Metal and Engineering Training Package

National code identifier – MEM98

Policy document

– for the manufacturing and engineering industry

and the boating industry

– leading to New Apprenticeships

November 1998

This volume contains qualifications, assessment guidelines and national competency standards (part 1).
Volumes 1, 2 and 3 contain national competency standards. This volume should not be used in isolation but in
the context of the complete Training Package.
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

© Australian National Training Authority (ANTA), 2003

This work has been produced with the assistance of funding provided by the
Commonwealth Government through ANTA.
• An individual may make a photocopy of all or part of the work for their personal use.
• A Registered Training Organisation may make photocopies of all or part of the work
for the teaching purposes of that organisation, including for supply to its students
provided that any consideration does not exceed the marginal cost of preparation,
reproduction, assembly and delivery.
Except as permitted under the Copyright Act 1968, all other rights are reserved. Requests
for permission may be directed to:
Australian National Training Authority
Level 11, AMP Place
10 Eagle Street
BRISBANE, QLD 4000
Phone: (07) 3246 2300 Fax: (07) 3246 2490
This work is the result of wide consultations with Australian industry participants. It is a
collaborative view and does not necessarily represent the view of ANTA or any specific
body. For the sake of brevity it may omit factors which could be pertinent in particular
cases.
While care has been taken in the preparation of this Training Package, ANTA and the
original developer do not warrant that any licensing or registration requirements specified
here are either complete or up-to-date for your State or Territory. ANTA and the original
developer do not accept any liability for any damage or loss (including indirect and
consequential loss) incurred by any person as a result of relying on the information
contained in this Training Package.
This Training Package should not be regarded as professional advice and it should not be
relied upon in any important matter without obtaining appropriate advice relevant to your
circumstances.
Published by: Australian Training Products Ltd
Level 25, 150 Lonsdale St
Melbourne 3000
Phone: +61 3 96550600 Fax: +61 3 9639 4684
www.atpl.net.au e-mail: [email protected]
First published: November 1998
Stock Code Number: 5040008S
ISBN: 0 642 79928 8
MEM98 Metals & Engineering Training Package – Policy Document
Printed by: Document Printing Australia Pty Ltd
AESharenet Code: P
Print Version No: 4
20 August 2003
IMPORTANT

Training packages are not static documents. Changes are made periodically to reflect the
latest industry practices.

Before commencing any form of training or assessment, you must ensure delivery is from
the current version of the Training Package.

To ensure you are complying with this requirement :

• Check the Print Version Number just below the copyright statement on the imprint
pages of your current Training Package.
• Access the ATP website (http://www.atpl.net.au) and check the latest Print Number.
• In cases where the Print Version Number is later than yours, the Print Version
Modification History in the Training Package sample on the ATP website will indicate
the changes that have been made.
The Modification History is also available on the website of the developer of the Training
Package: Manufacturing, Engineering & Related Services Indutry Training Advisory Board
http://www.mersitab.com.au

The National Training Information Service (http://www.ntis.gov.au) also displays any

changes in Units of Competency and the packaging of qualifications.
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package
Modification History
MODIFICATION HISTORY – ENDORSED MATERIALS
Please refer to the National Training Information Service for the latest version of Units of Competency and Qualification
information (http://www.ntis.gov.au).

MEM98 Metal and Engineering Training

Sheet: 1 of 1
Package

Date of Release

Authorisation:
Comments
Version

Inclusion of Marine Craft Construction, Boating Services and Jewellery

Manufacture resulting in five new qualifications. Revised name of
20/08/03 NTQC
4

Certificate IV in Engineering, introduction of new and revised units as

listed in the details table.

Revised point weighting and introduction of new units as listed in

3.00

10/02/03 NTQC
following details table
2.00

01/12/96 NTFC Details not available

1.00

21/11/98 NTFC Primary Release

Pre Training package, standards originally published 1995

Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Table of Contents

Modification History...........................................................................................................iii
Introduction..........................................................................................................................1
Competency standards ........................................................................................................2
Customisation guidelines.....................................................................................................5
Assessment guidelines.......................................................................................................... 8
Qualifications .....................................................................................................................13
Boating Industry qualifications information...................................................................18
Attachment 1 – Competency standards units which appear in Certificate III or higher
qualifications ......................................................................................................................23
Attachment 2 – Competency standards ‘stream’ units for Certificate III ‘Production’
and ‘Trade’ qualifications.................................................................................................24
Attachment 3 – Foundation and Core competencies.......................................................25
Attachment 4 – Boating Industry qualifications detail ..................................................26

© Australian National Training Authority i

MEM98: version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Important
Training Packages are living documents. Changes are periodically made to reflect the latest
industry practices.

As a user of the Training Package, and before commencing any form of training or
assessment, you must ensure delivery is from the current version.

Ensure you are complying with this requirement by:

• checking the version identifier code of the version you currently have (located on
the imprint page, just below the copyright statement)
• accessing the Australian Training Products (ATP) website and comparing the
version identifier. This information is displayed in the first few pages of the
Training Package.

Where the ATP website shows a different version, the Modification History, again shown
on the ATP website in the first few pages of the Training Package, will display the changes
made in versions. ATP website for version comparison: http://www.atpl.net.au

The Modification History is also visible on the website of the developer of the Training
Package: http://www.mersitab.com.au

Changes in units of competency and packaging of qualifications are reflected on the

National Training Information Service which displays only current information:
http://www.ntis.gov.au

ii © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Introduction
The Metal and Engineering Training Package has been developed by the Manufacturing,
Engineering and Related Services Industry Training Advisory Body Ltd. (MERS ITAB) to
meet the training and skills recognition needs of the manufacturing and engineering
industry in Australia. The Training Package was originally endorsed by the National
Training Framework Committee on 10th November 1998.

The Metal and Engineering Training Package links the National Metal and Engineering
Competency Standards through sound assessment processes to qualifications. The Training
Package has been designed to cover all occupations in the industry, with qualifications
from Certificate I to Diploma, including those covered by qualifications in boating
services.

The Training Package is supported by a variety of non-endorsed components, including

model training pathways and other learning strategy materials as well as assessment
materials and professional development programs.

Background
Following the reforms of industry restructuring during the late 1980’s, the National Metal
and Engineering Training Board (NMETB) introduced a suite of national competency
based training courses from 1990 to meet the training needs of the industry. The National
Metal and Engineering Curriculum bank of competency based training modules was
established to support this initiative. Draft competency standards were progressively
developed from the early 1990’s and a model implementation program was instigated to
trial the introduction of the National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards in
enterprises during 1995. The competency standards were refined as a result of this trial and
were re-issued in December 1996. The standards have been further refined and expanded
during the life of the Training Package.

MERS ITAB is a declared industry training advisory body by the Australian National
Training Authority (ANTA). MERS ITAB was formed in January 1996 after a review of
national industry training advisory bodies was undertaken by ANTA. MERS ITAB
incorporates the NMETB as the national advisory body for the industry sector. The
NMETB brings together representatives of large and small employers, key unions and
government bodies with an interest in the industry. MERS ITAB operates as a national
organisation with a network of state and territory ITABs and boards.

Scope
The Metal and Engineering Training Package (national identifier code MEM98) is
designed to replace all existing national industry-supported training courses. The Training
Package includes qualification outcomes from Certificate I to Diploma and will be
extended to include an Advanced Diploma. The Training Package covers the skills and
knowledge development and recognition requirements of people who use the workplace
competencies covered by the National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards and
specified Competency Standards from other NTQC endorsed training packages. The Metal
and Engineering Training Package is designed to be flexible and can be linked to all types
of employment arrangements including Australian Workplace Agreements, Certified
Agreements as well as Federal and State Awards. It also complements the employment
framework formally agreed to by all industrial parties.

© Australian National Training Authority 1

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Competency standards
All qualifications in the Training Package are based on the National Metal and Engineering
Competency Standards and those units specified from other endorsed Training Packages.
These standards focus on what is expected of people in workplaces rather than on the
learning process. The standards reflect realistic workplace practices across a broad range of
situations. This includes the specification of knowledge and skills and the application of
that knowledge and skill in the workplace as well as the ability to transfer and apply the
competency in new situations, environments and contexts.

The standards are set in a packaging framework designed to facilitate flexibility, multi-
skilling and specialisation. The framework is based on the principle that individual units of
competency, apart from the very small number of Core units, should not be exclusively
related to a particular occupation or employment classification level.

Details on the structure of the competency standards are shown below (with the exception
of boating services qualifications in which the Foundation and Core are combined and
listed as compulsory core. See Attachment 4 for full listing). Reference must also be made
to the Introduction section of the Competency Standards documentation for full details.

Fields
The competency standards are divided into ‘fields’ as convenient groupings of units to
assist the organisation of the standards and to help users in the selection of relevant
competency standards. The fields do not set up barriers to accessing any competency units
in a field, or between fields.

The competency standards units and fields are divided into three categories:

Foundation units (field 1)

Core units (field 2)
Specialisation units (fields 3 onwards)

Foundation units
Foundation units describe competencies that are a necessary part of the skill profile of
every job in the industry. Foundation competencies do not carry a points weighting,
however they are necessary prerequisites to higher level units and will form part of the
skills profile of all employees.

All qualifications in this Training Package include the Foundation units of competency.
People who hold an existing industry qualification and wish to undertake one of the new
Training Package qualifications are deemed to be competent against the Foundation units.
New entrants to the industry will need to demonstrate competency against the Foundation
units before being eligible for recognition in higher level competency units.

Core units
The Core units define competencies that are common and necessary in the industry. Core
units have been determined for each qualification level within the Training Package and
these Core units must be achieved as required for each qualification. The Key
Competencies have been mapped against the Foundation and Core units and achievement
of the Metal and Engineering units will also provide recognition against the Key
Competencies. A mapping matrix is included in the competency standards to show this
relationship.
2 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Core units are allocated to ‘bands’ and the number of required Core units increases for
each qualification level. Band 1 Core units apply to qualification outcomes up to
Certificate III. For qualification outcomes at Certificate IV and Diploma, band 2 Core units
apply as well as the band 1 Core units. Some band 2 Core units can be included in a
Certificate III qualification and these are shown in Attachment 1.

Attachment 3 shows a summary of the Foundation and Core competency units.

Specialisation units
These units describe the diverse range of competencies needed across the industry. The
Specialisation units are also divided into ‘bands’, with some overlap between them. The
allocation of units to different specialisation bands recognises the inherent differences in
the level of difficulty of skills used in the industry. For example, band B skills are more
difficult than band A skills. At the same time the large range of units in each band allows
enterprises a wide choice. Band E units are independent units developed for the boating
services qualifications.

Some Specialisation units are regarded as both band A and band B units. Use of these dual
band units is limited and this is shown in the requirements for each qualification. These
units are identified in the index to the competency standards as well as in the units
themselves by way of a note.

Note that some band A units only appear in qualifications at Certificate III and above as
shown in Attachment 1.

Table showing availability of Core and Specialisation units for each qualification

Qualification title Core units Specialisation units

band band band band band
1 2 A A/B B
Certificate I in Engineering all none some none none
Certificate II in Engineering – Production all none some some none
Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology all one some some none
Certificate III in Engineering – Production Systems all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Mechanical Trade all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Fabrication Trade all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Electrical/Electronic Trade all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Technician all all all all all
Certificate III in Engineering – Jewellery all some all all some
Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction all some all all some
Certificate IV in Engineering all all all all all
Diploma of Engineering all all all all all

Pre-requisite units
Many competency units indicate whether other specific competencies are required as
support in terms of pre-requisite skills and knowledge. Where there are options within the
pre-requisites then separate combinations or pre-requisite paths are shown. Where multiple
paths (path 1, path 2 etc) are shown then the most appropriate path should be chosen.

Unit weight points

Each unit of competency, with the exception of some of the 50 series units, has an
allocated weight shown as ‘unit weight points’. Each qualification includes an identified
number of points. The units selected for the qualification must have a combined points
© Australian National Training Authority 3
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

value no less than the points value specified for the qualification. The combined points
total also includes the points for any pre-requisite units involved. Note that the points for
any particular unit can only be counted once in each qualification. For example, if a unit is
selected to be part of a qualification and it is also a pre-requisite for another selected unit,
then the points for that unit can only be counted once.

Maintenance of the competency standards

MERS ITAB has an established Metal and Engineering Competency Standards Review
Group comprised of key industry stakeholders and ITAB staff. The group subjects the
standards to a continuous improvement process whereby feedback on the standards is
considered and changes made where appropriate. Feedback and comment is sought from
enterprises, industry organisations and training organisations from across Australia.

Changes can include simple editing functions through to development of new units to meet
particular industry needs. The standards are viewed as dynamic and changes are
incorporated to improve the standards in terms of technical quality, usability, changes in
workplace organisation and use of technology.

The competency standards will be progressively reviewed during and after the
implementation phase of the Training Package as well as part of an ongoing maintenance
function. The standards will be submitted for national endorsement where the changes are
sufficient to warrant re-endorsement of the units. It is expected that this process will be
dealt with on a cyclical basis, with the frequency determined by the extent of any proposed
change.

The Metal and Engineering Training Package is undergoing a major review during the
course of 2002-2003, with completion expected in late 2003

4 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Customisation guidelines
MERS ITAB believes that the structure and composition of the Metal and Engineering
Training Package provides sufficient flexibility to enable the training and skill recognition
requirements of enterprises in the industry to be met. The qualifications in the Training
Package are based on the content and structural rules of the Metal and Engineering
Competency Standards. Where the needs of an enterprise cannot be met under the standard
‘packaging’ arrangements for each qualification, there is opportunity for further flexibility
through the application of these customisation guidelines.

In general, it is the responsibility of Registered Training Organisations (RTOs) to

undertake customisation where required, within the limits set by these guidelines. The
guidelines deal with customisation of the competency standards as well as customisation of
the qualifications.

Changes to competency standards units

Units of competency may be customised by either or both of the two methods shown
below, provided the structure and overall outcome of the competency standards unit is not
changed.

1. Enterprise specific context may be added, including enterprise specific language,

terminology and procedures. MERS ITAB will provide advice on request as to the
accuracy of any such enterprise specific overlay document.

2. The range of variables may be changed to incorporate the context of enterprise

applications and procedures etc. For example, the range of machines or other
equipment may be changed provided the level of skill required or expected is not
increased or diminished. In most cases, the range of machines or equipment shown
in the Metal and Engineering Competency Standards units is only indicative or
illustrative and is not an exhaustive list.

Note that the unit number, title, pre-requisites and unit weight points value must not be
changed. Elements and performance criteria cannot be changed except by the addition of
detailed information.

Substitution of competency standards units

Provided that the integrity and level of outcome is retained, units of competency in the
Metal and Engineering Training Package may be substituted by National Training Quality
Council (NTQC) endorsed competency standards units from other industries and/or
enterprises in the two situations shown below. Assessment against any substitute or
replacement unit must be carried out according to the Assessment Guidelines in the Metal
and Engineering Training Package.

Situation 1 – importing competencies from other Training Packages

Twenty percent of the Specialisation units (as measured by their points value) may
be replaced by units from other NTQC endorsed Training Packages or competency
standards. (Note that the Foundation and Core units cannot be replaced in this
situation and that ‘stream’ rules must be met where applicable).

© Australian National Training Authority 5

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Situation 2 – substituting Metal and Engineering competencies with others

Where MERS ITAB has, in writing, formally recognised the proposed substitute
unit/s as equivalent to the unit/s being replaced then the substitute unit/s may form
part of a qualification in the Metal and Engineering Training Package. (Note that it is
the proponent’s responsibility to propose equivalence, including points weighting,
and to provide relevant evidence for consideration by MERS ITAB).

Adding new units to the competency standards

An enterprise may find that, after application of the guidelines for changes to units and/or
substitution of units, the competency standards still do not cover skills or processes unique
to the enterprise. In these cases, they can ask MERS ITAB to develop or assist in the
development of competency standards units to meet the needs of the enterprise.

Alternatively, the enterprise may choose to develop their own enterprise specific standards
and seek their endorsement by the NTQC.

Customisation of qualifications by including additional units of competency

Additional units of competency may be added to a qualification under the two situations
shown below.

1. Registered Training Organisations may face difficulty in matching MERS ITAB

recommended learning strategy support material to the units of competency
selected for the particular qualification, and so up to six extra points worth of
competency standards units can be included in each of the qualifications in the
Training Package. These extra points then form part of the total points for the
particular qualification. That is, only the nominal points value of the qualification
(without the extra points) can count for advanced standing or progression towards
another qualification.

or

2. Additional units of competency may be added to a qualification beyond the

minimum requirements specified for that qualification where the additional units
are required to meet specific organisational needs of the enterprise and with the
agreement of the enterprise. In this case, it should be noted that where the
additional units could contribute towards the achievement of a higher level Metal
and Engineering Training Package qualification then they should be separately
identified in any qualification transcript or statement of attainment.

Customisation of qualifications by use of the packaging and stream rules

Each qualification in the Metal and Engineering Training Package can be customised under
the packaging and stream rules through the selection of relevant and appropriate
Specialisation units of competency.

6 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Customisation of qualification titles

An additional descriptor may be added to any qualification title to illustrate a particular
skills profile. This may be achieved by the addition of an occupation/functional stream
after the endorsed title as shown on the qualification and/or transcript. This additional
descriptor must be drawn from the list provided below and must be shown in brackets. For
example Certificate III in Engineering – Mechanical Trade (Refrigeration). No other
changes may be made to the qualification titles. Note that the addition of these descriptors
to a qualification title does not change the formal title or unique code of the qualification.

MERS ITAB will consider applications from RTOs to extend the range of additional
approved descriptors.

Approved descriptors
Air-conditioning
Casting and Moulding
Jewellery
Locksmithing
Manufacturing
Patternmaking
Refrigeration
Surface Finishing
Toolmaking
Watchmaking

Use of units from the National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards in
other training packages or qualifications
Where units from the National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards are to be
used in other Training Packages or in customised qualifications which draw on more than
one Training Package, and equivalence is sought, then the following conditions apply:

1. Any changes to the units must be made according to these customisation

guidelines.

2. Any pre-requisite unit/s must also be included.

3. The MERS ITAB content and structural rules (packaging) of the National Metal
and Engineering Competency Standards must be taken into account.

4. Unless all the Metal and Engineering Training Package qualification requirements
are met then the title of the customised qualification must be clearly distinguished
from a MERS ITAB qualification and in particular the terms ‘certificate (level) in
engineering’ or diploma of engineering’ or ‘advanced diploma of engineering’
cannot be used.

It should also be noted that units in the National Metal and Engineering Competency
Standards are not determined or established at a particular AQF level but are designed to
span a range of AQF levels, depending on their use and application.

© Australian National Training Authority 7

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Assessment guidelines
Benchmarks for assessment
The current version of the National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards form
the benchmarks for assessment in the Metal and Engineering Training Package. The
competency standards have been endorsed by the National Training Quality Council
(NTQC), MERS ITAB, unions and employer organisations as the national benchmarks for
the recognition of skills in the industry. They contain evidence guides, which support,
facilitate and focus the assessment process.

Role of Registered Training Organisations

Registered Training Organisations (RTOs) providing training and assessment services for
the Metal and Engineering Training Package have the responsibility to ensure the quality
of the outcomes. The RTO must make the final assessment decision, based on a judgment
of the available evidence. They must ensure that a qualification is only issued when the
candidate has satisfied all aspects and requirements of that qualification. RTOs must also
ensure that appropriate assessment occurs and that ongoing records of assessment are kept.

Non-RTOs or other parties may use qualified assessors to carry out assessments against the
Metal and Engineering Training Package, however the outcomes will only be recognised
against the Metal and Engineering Training Package if the assessment is conducted under
the auspices of a RTO authorised to deliver and/or assess against the Training Package.

The minimum level of reporting assessment outcomes is at the unit level. Assessment
outcomes must primarily be reported without grading on the basis of the candidate being
either competent or not yet competent. However this does not preclude supplementary
reporting based on endorsed quality principles. Supplementary reporting of graded
assessment may occur where there is agreement between the Registered Training
Organisation and their client. Any supplementary reporting of graded assessment outcomes
must be shown as additional information on any testamur or transcript and not detract or
obscure the primary outcome report.

Assessment pathways
MERS ITAB defines assessment in accordance with the Assessment Principles adopted in
principle by vocational education and training Ministers. Assessment made against the
competency standards must ensure that competency can be demonstrated in a workplace
situation. A workplace situation can be simulated in many cases, however a few units of
competency indicate that assessment should be carried out in a workplace. In these cases,
the RTO should arrange for appropriate assessment evidence to be gathered from the
workplace so that an assessment decision can be made. This does not mean nor imply that
RTO staff will need to attend the workplace to undertake workplace assessment activities.
Workplace Assessors registered with MERS ITAB could be viewed as a valuable
assessment resource for RTOs. In all cases, it is important that sufficient and appropriate
authentic evidence is gathered to ensure that the assessment decision is fair, valid and
reliable.

8 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

MERS ITAB considers that assessment of competency should be carried out as a process
and not a single event. Where work is complex and high skill levels are expected, then
demonstration of competency should occur across a range of situations and/or applications.

It should be noted that competency must be demonstrated in all elements of a competency

standards unit as well as satisfying any pre-requisite requirements before ‘competency’ can
be granted.

Other than for pre-requisite competencies, there is no specified order to the assessment of
competencies. Assessors are encouraged to assess groups of units holistically and not adopt
an atomised unit by unit approach. Holistic assessment should also be used wherever
possible as one means of dealing with pre-requisite units.

Recognising prior learning

The industry views all learning prior to assessment as ‘prior learning’. This includes
relevant prior learning and competencies acquired through previous work, life and training
or educational experiences and should be recognised during the assessment process.
Assessing prior learning must be undertaken by a qualified assessor, using original
evidence and other assessment tools as required to determine competency.

Assessor requirements
Assessments against competencies in the Training Package will be carried out in
accordance with these endorsed guidelines and the specification included in the
competency standards. The guidelines include the necessary qualifications for those
conducting assessments and provide for those situations where more than one person may
contribute to the assessment and where the required technical and assessment
competencies may not all be held by any one person.

Assessor qualifications
Assessors must meet the three minimum requirements outlined below.

1. Competency in the following endorsed competency standards for assessment as

included in the Training Package for Assessment and Workplace Training BSZ98:
• Plan Assessment (BSZ401A)
• Conduct Assessment (BSZ402A)
• Review Assessment (BSZ403A)
Individuals can meet these requirements by completion of a recognised training
program or have other qualifications and/or experience recognised through an
approved process as equivalent to the above units. Note that these competency
standards units replace the previous Assessment Competency Standards and
Extension Unit.

2. Competency in the unit/s being assessed (note that more than one person may
contribute to the assessment where the required technical and assessment
competencies are not all held by any one person).

3. Familiarity with the National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards and
the agreed industrial processes for their implementation in workplaces. MERS
ITAB can provide a list of approved organisations that can provide an
Implementing Competency Standards Program to assist assessors to meet the above
requirement.

© Australian National Training Authority 9

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Using qualified assessors

Final assessment decisions must be made by qualified assessors who are either competent
in the unit(s) being assessed or agree to work with others who have technical expertise. In
these cases, the RTO should arrange for appropriate assessment evidence to be gathered
from the technical expert so that an assessment decision can be made. The technical expert
may be part of the RTO’s resources, or located in the candidate’s workplace, or otherwise
available for the purpose.

Guidelines for designing assessment materials

The National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards form a basis for the design of
assessment materials. Close attention must be paid to the performance criteria, range of
variables and evidence guides. The ‘Assessor guide’ columns provide indications and
guidance for assessors on the type of evidence required to be able to make a valid
assessment decision. These columns provide the basis for assessors to prepare assessment
tools to suit the candidate and the context of the assessment.

Assessors must use methods that enable the gathering of valid, sufficient, accurate,
consistent, current and authentic evidence to allow for assessment decisions to be made.
The process must also be valid, reliable, flexible, fair and cost effective. These terms will
form the basic criteria for quality assurance measures to ensure the design effectiveness of
assessment materials used in the industry and are explained below.

valid The assessment actually assesses what it claims to assess, integrating

knowledge and skills with their practical application. Language and
literacy requirements during assessment should be no greater than the
levels required to demonstrate competency in the unit being assessed.

reliable The assessment process must be able to produce consistent results, no

matter who does the assessment or when the assessment is done.

flexible The assessment should be able to be conducted in a variety of situations.

It should allow for diversity in how, where and when competencies have
been acquired.

fair The method chosen must not disadvantage (or advantage) any person,
with reasonable adjustments made to assessment procedures and methods
for people with special needs. Assessment tasks should be determined
with the participation of the person being assessed. See also Valid above.

cost The process must be as cost effective as possible in terms of both time
effective and money costs for enterprises and RTOs.

MERS ITAB will undertake ongoing review and maintenance of these Assessment
Guidelines and is committed to ensuring that the assessment process does not place an
undue cost burden on the industry and the training system. MERS ITAB will work closely
with RTOs to assist in establishing ways of offsetting and minimising the costs of any
workplace assessment activity.

10 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

The recommended assessment methods encompass a range of techniques, which include,

but are not limited to, the use of:
• direct observation of performance
• simulations of workplace activities
• oral questioning
• practical exercises
• projects/assignments
• work portfolios

In the interests of both holistic approaches to assessment and cost-effective practices,

assessors are encouraged to develop assessment methods that enable the measurement of a
number of related competencies through one assessment process or event. For example, it
is likely that all of the Foundation units and most Core units of competency will not
require separate assessment or even separate training. It is more likely that both training
and assessment for these units will be integrated with one or more Specialisation units.

Guidelines for conducting assessments

Before any assessment takes place at a workplace, employers, employees and any service
provider need to establish an assessment process through consultation which meets the
needs of the enterprise and is acceptable to all interested parties. Some workplaces use a
training committee or a consultative committee for this purpose. When RTOs need to
gather assessment evidence from the workplace they should have regard for any enterprise
needs, practices and processes.

Assessment procedures must be transparent and address the key assessment principles of
being valid, reliable, flexible, fair and cost effective (see above). Assessment should be
conducted in a non-threatening atmosphere. The assessor needs to establish rapport with
the assessment candidate, and provide timely feedback. The assessment process should
foster communication between assessment candidates and assessors, and ensure that:

• the assessment candidate knows and agrees to the assessment procedures before
assessment takes place
• assessments take place when the assessment candidate is ready to undertake the
assessment. Before undertaking formal assessment tasks, assessment candidates should
be encouraged to conduct self-assessment according to the agreed assessment criteria
to test their own readiness
• wherever practicable, assessment evidence is gathered on a number of occasions and in
a variety of contexts/situations
• during the assessment period, assessors and assessment candidates engage in feedback
and discussion, and can seek assistance to have disagreements resolved expeditiously
• records of assessments remain confidential

© Australian National Training Authority 11

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Sources of information on assessment

MERS ITAB national and state/territory offices as well as the industry parties to MERS
ITAB can provide additional information and guidance on assessment issues. Contact
details are contained in the National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards
Implementation Guide, 1997.

Other sources of information are shown below:

A Guide to the Competency Standards for Assessment, 1997 ANTA

Assessment Arrangement in the National Training Framework, 1996 ANTA
Assessment System Design, 1994 J S McMillan
Assessment Technical Manual, 1994 J S McMillan
Assuring Quality and Choice in National Training, 1997 ANTA
Competency Standards for Assessment, 1995 ANTA
Final Report Assessment Research and Development Project, 1996 MERS ITAB
Framework for competency based assessment in vocational education and training in
Western Australia, 1997 State Training Board and Training Accreditation Council of
Western Australia
Implementation of Metal & Engineering Assessment Framework: Final Report to
ANTA, 1997 MERS ITAB
Integrating Assessment of Learning Outcomes: an Approach to Holistic Assessment,
1996 Assessment Centre for Vocational Education, NSW TAFE
Making Sense: Addressing Language, Literacy & Numeracy Issues in Workplace
Assessment, 1998 MERS ITAB
Metal and Engineering Assessor Registration Procedure, 1998 MERS ITAB
Metal and Engineering Industry National Competency Standards (Volume 1-2), 1998
MERS ITAB
National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards Implementation Guide, 1999
MERS ITAB
On-the-job and Off-the-job Assessment - an Issues Paper, 1994 Assessment Centre
for Vocational Education, NSW TAFE
Resource Manual for Registered Workplace Assessors, 1997 MERS ITAB
Rumsey, David, Practical Issues in Workplace Assessment, in National Assessment
Research Forum, VEETAC Competency Based Training Working Party, Sydney

12 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Qualifications
Overview of structure
Each qualification is comprised of units of competency combined in a packaging
framework. The framework is based on the structure of the competency standards and
follows simple rules.

In general, each qualification is comprised of the Core units of competency relevant to the
qualification level as well as a selection of Specialisation units. The Engineering Trade,
Engineering Production, Jewellery Manufacture and Marine Craft Construction
qualifications at Certificate III also include Specialisation units in a ‘stream’ cluster. For
these qualifications, a minimum of 40 points value of units must be selected from the
appropriate list in Attachment 2 to obtain the particular stream outcome. As stated
previously, the Boating Services qualifications are structured differently to the other
qualifications covered by the Package and are covered in a discrete Boating Industry
qualifications section.

MERS ITAB will monitor the implementation of the Metal and Engineering Training
Package, including the use and application of the packaging framework for the
qualifications. Part of this monitoring role will include the consideration of claims by
Registered Training Organisations (RTOs) where they have a customer need that cannot be
accommodated within the stream rules or customisation guidelines.

The qualifications have been designed to meet the training and skills recognition needs of
the industry and are suited to New Apprenticeships.

© Australian National Training Authority 13

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Summary of Training Package qualifications

Qualification title Minimum points Industrial ‘C’

required level
outcome
Certificate I in Engineering 16 C13
MEM10198
Certificate II in Engineering – Production 32 C12
MEM20198
Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology 64 C11
MEM20298
Certificate III in Engineering – Production Systems 96 C10
MEM30198
Certificate III in Engineering – Mechanical Trade 96 C10
MEM30298
Certificate III in Engineering – Fabrication Trade 96 C10
MEM30398
Certificate III in Engineering – Electrical/Electronic Trade 96 C10
MEM30498
Certificate III in Engineering – Technician Year 12 +40 1 C9
MEM30598
Certificate III in Jewellery Manufacture 96 C10
MEM30803
Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction 96 C10
MEM30603
Certificate IV in Engineering 132 C7
MEM40103 or AQF III + 36 2
Diploma of Engineering Year 12 + 80 3 C5
MEM50198 or AQF III + 60 4
Advanced Diploma of Engineering (proposed) to be finalised 5 C3,
C2a

Boating Services qualifications

Certificate I in Boating Services

MEM10203
Certificate II in Boating Services
MEM20303
Certificate III in Boating Services
MEM30703
Certificate IV in Boating Services
MEM40203

1
Completion of Year 12 (or equivalent) with appropriate Maths and Science (some people may require additional bridging
training). The 40 points are comprised of 14 points from the specified band 1 Core units, 6 points in units drawn from
Specialisation band A units, and 20 points drawn from Specialisation band B units and/or band 2 Core units.
2
Completion of units to meet the requirements of a Certificate III in Engineering – Trade plus 36 points in units drawn from
Specialisation band A and/or band B units and/or band 2 Core units (maximum 24 points from band A).
3
Completion of Year 12 (or equivalent) with appropriate Maths and Science (some people may require additional bridging
training). The 80 points are comprised of 14 points from the specified band 1 Core units, 16 points of band 2 Core units and
50 points of Specialisation band A and/or band B units (maximum 24 points from band A).
4
Completion of units to meet the requirements of a Certificate III in Engineering – Trade or Production plus 16 points in
units drawn from band 2 Core units and 44 points of Specialisation band A and/or band B units (maximum 24 points from
band A).
Note that up to 20 points of Specialisation band B units and/or band 2 Core units achieved in the Certificate III in
Engineering – Technician qualification can be recognised for advanced standing in the Diploma of Engineering, that is a
minimum of 40 additional points must be achieved.
5
Competency standards for this qualification are under development.
14 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Schedule of requirements for Training Package qualifications

Certificate I in Engineering 16 points total C13

MEM10198 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 16 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units other than those shown in Attachment
1

Certificate II in Engineering – Production 32 points total C12

MEM20198 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 2 points of band 1 Core units required for C12, plus
• 30 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units other than those shown in Attachment
1

Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology 64 points total C11

MEM20298 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 10 points of required band 1 Core units for C11, plus
• 54 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units other than those shown in Attachment
1

Certificate III in Engineering – Production Systems 96 points total C10

MEM30198 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 40 points in units drawn from the ‘Production’ stream Specialisation band A units (see
Attachment 2), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units (including dual band A/band B units)

Certificate III in Engineering – Technician Year 12 +40 C9

MEM30598 points outcome
or AQF III + 12
• all Foundation units, plus
• Completion of Year 12 (or equivalent) with appropriate Maths and Science (some people may
require additional bridging training), plus
• 14 points of band 1 Core units 2.1C12, 2.2C11, 2.3C11, 2.4C11, 2.5C11, 2.6C10, plus
• 26 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A and/or band B units (including dual band
A/band B units) and/or band 2 Core units (minimum of 20 points from band B/band 2 Core)

or

• Completion of units to meet the requirements of a Certificate III in Engineering – Trade or

Production, plus
• 12 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A and/or band B units and/or band 2 Core
units (including dual band A/band B units)

Certificate III in Engineering – Mechanical Trade 96 points total C10

MEM30298 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 40 points in units drawn from the ‘Mechanical’ stream Specialisation band A units (see
Attachment 2), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units (including dual band A/band B units)

© Australian National Training Authority 15

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Certificate III in Engineering – Fabrication Trade 96 points total C10

MEM30398 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 40 points in units drawn from the ‘Fabrication’ stream Specialisation band A units (see
Attachment 2), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units (including dual band A/band B units)

Certificate III in Engineering – Electrical/Electronic 96 points total C10

Trade outcome
MEM30498
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 40 points in units drawn from the ‘Electrical/electronic’ stream Specialisation band A units (see
Attachment 2), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units (including dual band A/band B units)

Certificate III in Jewellery Manufacture 96 points total C10 outcome

MEM30803
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 40 points in units drawn from the ‘Jewellery Manufacture’ stream Specialisation band A units
(see Attachment 2), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units (including dual band A/band B units)

Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction 96 points total C??

MEM30603 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 40 points in units drawn from the ‘Marine Craft Construction’ stream Specialisation band A units
(see Attachment 2), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units (including dual band A/band B units)

16 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Certificate IV in Engineering 132 C7

MEM40103 or AQF III + 36 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 112 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units and/or band B units (including dual
band A/band B units) and/or band 2 Core units (minimum of 12 points from band B/band 2
Core)

or

• Completion of units to meet the requirements of Certificate III in Engineering – Trade, Certificate
III in Engineering – Marine Craft Construction, Certificate III Marine (Installation), Certificate III
Marine (Mechanics) or Certificate III in Jewellery Manufacture, plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A and/or band B units (including dual band
A/band B units) and/or band 2 Core units (maximum 24 points from band A)

Diploma of Engineering Year 12 + 80 C5

MEM50198 points outcome
or AQF III + 60
• all Foundation units, plus
• Completion of Year 12 (or equivalent) with appropriate Maths and Science (some people may
require additional bridging training), plus
• 14 points of band 1 Core units 2.1C12, 2.2C11, 2.3C11, 2.4C11, 2.5C11, 2.6C10, plus
• 16 points of band 2 Core units required for C5, plus
• 50 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A and/or band B units (including dual band
A/band B units) (maximum 24 points from band A)

or

• Completion of units to meet the requirements of a Certificate III in Engineering – Trade,

Production, Jewellery Manufacture or Marine Craft Construction, plus
• 16 points of band 2 Core units required for C5, plus
• 44 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A and/or band B units(including dual band
A/band B units) (maximum 24 points from band A)

or

• Completion of units to met the requirements of a Certificate III in Engineering – Technician, plus
• 16 points of band 2 Core units required for C5, plus
• 44 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A and/or band B units (including dual band
A/band B units) (maximum 24 points from band A)
• Note that up to 20 points from Specialisation band B units and/or band 2 Core units achieved in
the Certificate III in Engineering – Technician qualification can be recognised for advanced
standing in the Diploma in Engineering, that is a minimum of 40 additional points must be
achieved.

© Australian National Training Authority 17

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Boating Industry qualifications information

Introduction
New and revised Boating Industry qualifications were developed by MERS ITAB and
submitted to the National Training Quality Council (NTQC) for endorsement as a variation
to the MEM98 Metal and Engineering Training Package in February 2003.

These five new qualifications and one revised qualification are complemented by other
existing Training Package qualifications from the Automotive and Light Manufacturing
ITABs to meet the training and skills recognition needs of the boating industry, particularly
the recreational sector in Australia from AQF I to AQF IV.

Background
The new and revised qualifications were a culmination of several years of research and
development into the skills and training needs of the various sectors that collectively make
up the boating industry.

The industry defines itself as ‘incorporating all activities undertaken in or from Australia
associated with the design, manufacture, maintenance, service and repair, transport,
crewing, storage, marketing, management or retailing of boats and boating products for
recreational purposes’.

The industry is typically dominated by small businesses operating around the coastal and
inland waterways of the nation. The industry is not concentrated in the capital cities with
many of the key locations geographically remote from major centres. There are also a
number of larger enterprises within the industry, mostly involved in the manufacture, sales
and export of luxury pleasure cruisers.

It should be noted that ‘boats’ includes marine vessels up to 50 tonnes. By ANZSIC

definition vessels larger than 50 tonnes are ‘ships’. MERS ITAB covers boatbuilding as
well as shipbuilding and associated activities. Shipbuilding is already covered under the
endorsed Metal and Engineering Training Package.

Historically, some of the ‘boating’ vocational areas have been able to access reasonable
training arrangements via existing programs, generally linked to the trades such as
boatbuilder or marine mechanic, whilst those with more diverse needs or distant from
training facilities have encountered difficulties obtaining skills training. Much of the
industry operates around marine facilities such as marinas, slipways, boatbuilding and
storage facilities and charter bases in both tourist destinations and ‘out of the way’
locations.

To meet these needs, MERS ITAB has now developed a range of qualifications in Boating
Services as well as a new trade qualification in Marine Craft Construction. These
qualifications have been designed to meet the training and skills recognition needs of the
Boating Industry and are suited to New Apprenticeships.

18 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Scope of Boating Industry qualifications

The new ‘boating’ qualifications range from Certificate I to Certificate IV across the fields
of Marine Craft Construction/Engineering and Boating Services.

These qualifications use a number of existing, endorsed training outcomes and competency
standards drawn from related industries as well as offering boating specific skills for
enterprises operating across a range of areas such as marinas, slipways, brokerage and
charter bases. The qualifications and packaging rules can be found are contained herein.
All of the qualifications covered are accessible through New Apprenticeship arrangements.

Overview of structure
Each qualification is comprised of units of competency combined in a packaging
framework. The framework is based on the structure of the competency standards and
follows simple rules.

In general, each of the Boating Services qualifications is comprised of core units of

competency relevant to the qualification level as well as a selection of elective units (see
Attachment 4 for listed units).

The Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction is comprised of Core units relevant to the
qualification level as well as a selection of Specialisation units. Furthermore, the
Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction qualification, as with other engineering
qualifications, has an additional requirement of a minimum of 40 points value being
selected from a prescribed list of competencies to obtain a stream outcome. The Certificate
III in Marine Craft Construction articulates with the Certificate IV in Engineering (also see
Schedule of Requirements in Metal and Engineering section), as do the Certificate III
Marine (Installation) and Certificate III Marine (Mechanics).

© Australian National Training Authority 19

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Qualifications and pathways chart for the boating industry from AQF I to IV

MEM10203 Entry to the Boating Industry can be from a school based or pre-vocational program such as the Certificate I in Boating Services, or
Certificate I in via the recognition of industry experience or a related qualification. Alternatively, learners can enter at any level in any stream
provided that they satisfy the qualification requirements.
Boating Services

MEM20303 MEM20198 AUR23299 AUR23199 LMT20500

Certificate II in Certificate II Engineering Certificate II Marine Certificate II Marine (Sales) Certificate II
Production (Services) Textile Fabrication
Boating Services

MEM20298
Certificate II Engineering
Production Technology

MEM30703 MEM30603 AUR32199 AUR32299 AUR32399 LMT30400

Certificate III in Certificate III in Marine Craft Certificate III Certificate III Marine Certificate III Certificate III
Marine (Installation) (Mechanics) Marine (Sales) Textile Fabrication
Boating Services Construction

MEM40103
MEM40203 Certificate IV in
Certificate IV in Engineering
Boating Services

20 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Summary of Boating Industry qualifications

Qualification title Minimum core Minimum

units required elective units
required
Certificate I in Boating Services 7 3
MEM10203
Certificate II in Boating Services 9 6
MEM20303
Certificate III in Boating Services 9 14
MEM30703
Certificate IV in Boating Services 9 20
MEM40203

Summary of Marine Construction and related qualifications

Qualification title Minimum points Industrial ‘C’

required level outcome
Certificate I in Engineering 16 C13
MEM10198
Certificate II in Engineering – Production 32 C12
MEM20198
Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology 64 C11
MEM20298
Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction 96 C10
MEM30603
Certificate IV in Engineering 132 C7
MEM40103 or AQF III + 36

© Australian National Training Authority 21

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Schedule of requirements for Training Package qualifications

Certificate I in Boating Services 7 core units 3 elective units

MEM10203
• 10 units required in total (see Attachment 4 for details)

Certificate II in Boating Services 9 core units 6 elective units

MEM20303
• 15 units required in total (see Attachment 4 for details)

Certificate III in Boating Services 9 core units 14 elective units

MEM30703
• 23 units required in total (see Attachment 4 for details)

Certificate IV in Boating Services 9 core units 20 elective units

MEM40203
• 29 units required in total
or
• Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction, Certificate III in Marine (Installation), Certificate III in
Marine (Mechanics), Certificate III in Marine (Sales), Certificate III in Textile Fabrications, plus
• 8 units from specified list (see Attachment 4 for details)

Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction 96 points total C10

MEM30603 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 40 points in units drawn from the ‘Marine Craft Construction’ stream Specialisation band A units
(see qualification structure or Attachment 2), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units (including dual band A/band B units)

This qualification is covered in the Metal and Engineering section and Attachment 4

Certificate IV in Engineering 132 points C7

MEM40103 or AQF III + 36 outcome
• all Foundation units, plus
• 20 points of band 1 Core units required for C10, plus
• 112 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A units and/or band B units (including dual
band A/band B units) and/or band 2 Core units (minimum of 12 points from band B/band 2
Core)

or

• Completion of units to meet the requirements of Certificate III in Engineering – Trade, Certificate
III in Engineering – Marine Craft Construction, Certificate III Marine (Installation) or Certificate III
Marine (Mechanics), plus
• 36 points in units drawn from Specialisation band A and/or band B units (including dual band
A/band B units) and/or band 2 Core units (maximum 24 points from band A)
Note - See Metal and Engineering section for articulation details.

22 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Attachment 1 – Competency standards units which

appear in Certificate III or higher qualifications

2.10C5 Write reports

2.11C5 Research and prepare presentations and reports
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations
2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations
2.15C5 Operate in an autonomous team environment (SEE NOTE BELOW)
4.10A Develop and manufacture wood patterns
4.11A Produce polymer patterns
4.12A Assemble plated patterns
4.13A Develop and manufacture polystyrene patterns
4.14A Develop and manufacture production patterns
4.15A Develop and manufacture vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment
4.16A Develop and manufacture precision models
4.17A Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screws and propeller patterns
5.16A Perform advanced welding using (MMAW)
5.18A Perform advanced welding using (GMAW)
5.20A Perform advanced welding using (GTAW)
5.22A Perform advanced welding using (OAW)
5.36A Repair/replace/modify fabrications
5.38A Advanced geometric development – Cylindrical/Rectangular
5.39A Advanced geometric development – Conical
5.40A Advanced geometric development – Transitions
7.2A Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting operations
7.9A Perform precision jig boring operations
7.10A Perform tool and cutter grinding operations
7.11A Complex milling operations
7.12A Complex grinding operations
7.21A Perform complex lathe operations
7.23B Program and set up CNC manufacturing cell
10.3A Install and test electrical circuits up to 1000 volts AC to 1500 volts DC
10.4A Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters
10.6A Install machine/plant
12.3A Precision mechanical measurement
12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering)
12.7A Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes
14.1B Schedule material deliveries
14.3B Undertake basic production scheduling
16.1B Give formal presentations and take part in meetings
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components
18.45A Fault find/repair AC and DC elect. equip’t/components up to 240 v single phase etc.
18.46A Fault find/repair AC and DC elect. equip’t/components up to 1000v AC to 1500v DC
18.48A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits
18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrument sensors, transmitters & final control elements

NOTE – Competency unit 2.15C5 Operate in an autonomous team environment may be included in
a Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology or higher qualification.

© Australian National Training Authority 23

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Attachment 2 – Competency standards ‘stream’ units for

Certificate III ‘Production’ and ‘Trade’ qualifications
Units of at least 40 points value must be drawn from the fields and/or units shown under
each stream heading below to obtain the particular stream outcome.

Any combination of units may be selected from the ‘stream’ lists to make up the 40 points
provided that any pre-requisite requirements are met.

Note that pre-requisite units for the selected ‘stream’ units may be included in the 40
‘stream’ points, including where the pre-requisite units are from other fields not included
in the chosen stream.

Production stream Electrical/Electronic stream

Assembly field (all 3 series units) 5.1A, 5.2A, 5.3A, 5.6A
Surface finishing (all 8 series units) 9.1A, 9.2A
Materials handling field (all 11 series units) 10.2A, 10.3A
Quality field (all 15 series units) 12.2A, 12.4A
4.1A, 4.2A, 4.3A, 4.4A and 4.6A 18.1A, 18.2A
5.1A, 5.2A, 5.3A 18.45A to 18.65A inclusive
6.3A, 6.4A, 6.6A
7.1A, 7.3A, 7.4A, 7.24A, 7.25A, 7.26A,
7.27A, 7.28A
9.2A
12.1A, 12.2A
13.3A, 13.4A
18.1A, 18.2A

Fabrication stream Marine Craft Construction stream

Fabrication field (all 5 series units) Marine craft construction field (all 25 series units)
Casting and moulding field (all 4 series units) 4.18A
Surface finishing field (all 8 series units) 8.11A, 8.14A
3.3A 9.21A
9.1A, 9.2A 10.13A
10.1A 12.7A
12.7A 50.2A, 50.3A, 50.4A, 50.9A
18.1A, 18.2A

Mechanical stream Jewellery stream

Machining field (all 7 series units) Jewellery and horological field (all 19 series units)
Maintenance and diagnostics field (all 18 3.1A, 3.2A, 3.6A, 3.7A
series units)
9.1A, 9.2A 5.6A
10.4A, 10.6A 6.7A
12.3A, 12.6A 7.1A, 2.24A, 7.32A
13.7A 8.1A, 8.2A, 8.3A, 8.10A, 8.11A
9.1A
13.2A, 13.3A, 13.4A
15.4A
8.1A, 18.2A, 18.3A

24 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

Attachment 3 – Foundation and Core competencies

Foundation competency units
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM1.1FA Undertake interactive workplace communication 0
MEM1.2FA Apply principles of occupational health and safety in a work environment 0
MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures 0
MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task 0

Core competency units - band 1

At Certificate II in Engineering – Production (C12), the Foundation units and the C12 Core
unit is needed.
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.1C12A Apply quality systems 2
Total Core points at C12 2

At Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology (C11), the Foundation units, C12

Core unit and C11 Core units are required.
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.2C11A Organise and analyse information 2
MEM2.3C11B Operate in a work based team environment 2
MEM2.4C11A Assist in the provision of on the job training 2
MEM2.5C11A Measure with graduated devices 2
Add C12 Core points 2
Total Core points at C11 10

At Certificate III in Engineering – Trade/Production (C10) the Foundation units, C12

Core unit, C11 Core units and C10 Core units are required.
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.6C10A Plan a complete activity 4
MEM2.7C10A Perform computations – basic 2
MEM2.8C10A Perform computations 2
MEM2.9C10A Perform computer operations 2
Add C12 and C11 Core points 10
Total Core points at C10 20
Core competency units - band 2
Total of 16 points to be gained by C5 (see notes attached to qualifications above 96 points)
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.10C5A Write reports 2
MEM2.11C5A Research and prepare presentations and reports 2
MEM2.13C5A Perform mathematical computations 4
MEM2.14C5A Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations 2
MEM2.15C5A Operate in an autonomous team environment 2
MEM2.16C5A Interpret quality specifications and manuals 4
Total Core points in band 2 16

Note 1) C12, C11, C10 & C5 refer to industrial classifications.

Note 2) Boating Services qualifications combine the Foundation and selected Core units as
compulsory core for each qualification.

© Australian National Training Authority 25

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

Attachment 4 – Boating Industry qualifications detail

MEM10203 Certificate I in Boating Services
The requirement for the awarding of a Certificate I in Boating Services is demonstrated
competency in ten units of competency comprised of seven core units and three elective
units. (Note: When selecting units any pre-requisite units must also be completed but can
be counted towards the qualification total of twenty nine units.)

Compulsory core units (seven)

From: Unit code Unit title
MEM98 MEM1.1FA Undertake interactive workplace communication
MEM98 MEM1.2FA Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work
environment
MEM98 MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures
MEM98 MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task
MEM98 MEM50.1EA Classify recreational boating technologies and features
MEM98 MEM50.2AA Work safely on marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.3AA Follow work procedures to maintain the marine environment

Elective units (select three)

From: Unit code Unit title
AUR99 AUR50318A Dispose of waste and maintain a tidy work area
BSB01 BSBCMN212A Handle mail
MEM98 MEM2.3C11A Operate in a work based team environment
MEM98 MEM2.5C11B Measure with graduated devices
MEM98 MEM9.1AA Draw and interpret sketch
MEM98 MEM9.2AA Interpret technical drawing
MEM98 MEM11.10AA Operate mobile load shifting equipment
MEM98 MEM11.11AA Perform manual handling
MEM98 MEM13.3AA Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
MEM98 MEM18.1AB Use hand tools
MEM98 MEM18.2AA Use power tools/hand held operations
MEM98 MEM50.5EA Refuel vessels
MEM98 MEM50.6EA Check operational capability of marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.7EA Check operational capability of sails and sail operating equipment
MEM98 MEM50.8EA Carry out trip preparation and planning
MEM98 MEM50.9AA Safely operate a powered recreational boat
MEM98 MEM50.10EA Respond to boating emergencies and incidents
PMB01 PMBHAN201A Process orders and despatch orders
PMB01 PMBHAN202A Load and unload goods
PRM98 PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime
PUA00 PUAEME001A Provide emergency care
PUA00 PUAEME002B Manage injuries at emergency incident
PUA00 PUAEME003B Administer oxygen in an emergency situation
SFI00 SFISHIP209A Operate marine communications (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP212A Take emergency action on board a vessel (vessel operations)
SRO99 SRXEMEO02A Participate in the control of minor emergencies
THH02 THHCOR02B Work in a socially diverse environment
THH02 THHGCS01B Develop and update local knowledge
THH02 THHGGA03B Source and present information
THT02 THTTCO01B Develop and update tourism industry knowledge
WRR02 WRRCA1B Operate retail equipment (clerical administration)
WRR02 WRRLP1B Apply safe working practices (loss prevention)

26 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

MEM20303 Certificate II in Boating Services

The requirement for the awarding of a Certificate II in Boating Services is demonstrated
competency in fifteen units of competency comprised of nine core units and six elective
units. (Note: When selecting units any pre-requisite units must also be completed but can
be counted towards the qualification total of twenty nine units.

Compulsory core units (nine)

From: Unit code Unit title
MEM98 MEM1.1FA Undertake interactive workplace communication
MEM98 MEM1.2FA Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work
environment
MEM98 MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures
MEM98 MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task
MEM98 MEM2.3C11A Operate in a work based team environment
MEM98 MEM50.1EA Classify recreational boating technologies and features
MEM98 MEM50.2AA Work safely on marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.3AA Follow work procedures to maintain the marine environment
MEM98 MEM50.4AA Maintain quality of environment by following marina codes

Elective units (select six)

From: Unit code Unit title
AUR99 AUR50318A Dispose of waste and maintain a tidy work area
AUR99 AUR18676B Test, service and replace battery
AUR99 AUR37119A Drive and manoeuvre trailer(s)
AUR99 AUR46335A Launch and recover vessels from trailer
AUR99 AUR46435A Launch and recover vessel from cranes, gantries and forklifts
AUR99 AUR46519A Drive and manoeuvre motor driven vessels
AUR99 AUR46542A Moor vessels
AUR99 AUR37271A Service and repair trailers
AUR99 AUR46108A Carry out minor hull repairs
AUR99 AUR46649A Prepare (winterise) vessel systems
AUR99 AUR46660A Recommission vessel systems
AUR99 AUR46749A Prepare (winterise) engine systems
AUR99 AUR46760A Recommission engine systems
AUR99 AUR46866A Repair deck. hull, cabin equipment and fittings
AUR99 AUR46870A Service deck, hull, cabin equipment and fittings
AUR99 AUR46927A Identify the need for water testing vessels
AUR99 AUR46930A Water test vessels
AUR99 AUR46975A Water test engines in tanks
BSB01 BSBCMN205A Use business technology
BSB01 BSBCMN206A Process and maintain workplace information
BSB01 BSBCMN207A Prepare and process financial/business documents
BSB01 BSBCMN212A Handle mail
BSB01 BSBCMN213A Produce simple word processed documents
MEM98 MEM2.5C11B Measure with graduated devices
MEM98 MEM4.18AA General woodworking machine operations
MEM98 MEM5.3AA Soft soldering (basic)
MEM98 MEM5.5AA Carry out mechanical cutting
MEM98 MEM5.7AB Manual heating and thermal cutting
MEM98 MEM5.12AB Perform routine manual metal arc welding
MEM98 MEM9.1AA Draw and interpret sketch
MEM98 MEM9.2AA Interpret technical drawing
MEM98 MEM11.10AA Operate mobile load shifting equipment
MEM98 MEM11.11AA Perform manual handling
MEM98 MEM12.6AA Mark off/out (general engineering)
MEM98 MEM12.7AA Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes
MEM98 MEM13.3AA Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
MEM98 MEM18.1AB Use hand tools
© Australian National Training Authority 27
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

From: Unit code Unit title

MEM98 MEM18.2AA Use power tools/hand held operations
MEM98 MEM18.3AB Use tools for precision work
MEM98 MEM25.1AA Apply fibre reinforced plastics
MEM98 MEM25.4AA Fair and shape surfaces
MEM98 MEM25.7AA Maintain marine vessel surfaces
MEM98 MEM50.5EA Refuel vessels
MEM98 MEM50.6EA Check operational capability of marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.7EA Check operational capability of sails and sail operating equipment
MEM98 MEM50.8EA Carry out trip preparation and planning
MEM98 MEM50.9AA Safely operate a powered recreational boat
MEM98 MEM50.10EA Respond to boating emergencies and incidents
PMB01 PMBHAN201B Process orders and despatch orders
PMB01 PMBHAN202B Load and unload goods
PMB01 PMBPROD315B Produce polyurethane foam
PMB01 PMBPROD320B Produce foam injected mouldings
PMB01 PMBPROD380B Produce composites using chopper gun/depositor
PMB01 PMBFIN201B Finish products and components
PMB01 PMBFIN202B Fit attachments to products
PMB01 PMBFIN203B Repair product imperfections
PMB01 PMBHAN204B Package goods/materials
PMB01 PMBFIN205B Hand decorate products
PRM98 PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime
SFI00 SFISHIP209A Operate marine communications (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP212A Take emergency action on board a vessel (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP201A Comply with organisational and legislative requirements
SFI00 SFISHIP202A Contribute to safe navigating (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP203A Maintain the safety and security of vessel (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP204A Maintain marine vessels and equipment (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP205A Maintain marine plant (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP206A Operate a small vessel (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP207A Operate and maintain outboard motors
SFI00 SFISHIP208A Operate a low powered diesel engines (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP210A Operate a marine plant and systems (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP211A Prepare for maintenance (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP302A Command and control manoeuvres (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP303A Initial response to navigation emergencies (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP306A Monitor and control navigation in an inshore area
PUA00 PUAEME001A Provide emergency care
PUA00 PUAEME002B Manage injuries at emergency incident
PUA00 PUAEME003B Administer oxygen in an emergency situation
PUA00 PUAOPE002A Operate communications systems and equipment
SRO99 SRXEMEO02A Participate in the control of minor emergencies
SRO99 SROOPS001A Implement minimal environmental impact practices
SRO99 SROOPS002A Plan for minimal environmental impact
SRO99 SROOPS003A Apply weather information
SRO99 SROOPS006A Use and maintain a temporary overnight site
SRO99 SROORE001A Prepare to participate in a supervised outdoor activity requiring basic
skills
SRO99 SROORE002A Participate in a supervised outdoor activity requiring basic skills
SRO99 SROORE003A Prepare to participate in outdoor activities
SRO99 SROORE004A Participate in outdoor activities
SRO99 SROYAC001A Comply with maritime rules and regulations
SRO99 SROYSB001A Use basic skills to sail a small boat in controlled conditions
SRO99 SRXEME003A Respond to emergency situations
SRO99 SROOPS005A Apply search and rescue skills
SRO99 SROYAC002A Crew a ballasted yacht inshore
SRO99 SROYMC001A Crew a motor cruiser inshore
SRO99 SROYSB002A Sail a small boat in light to moderate conditions using enhanced skills
SRO99 SRXEME004A Coordinate emergency response
28 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

From: Unit code Unit title

SRO99 SRXRES002A Improve client awareness and implementation of environmental
management practices
SRO99 SRXRES004A Minimise waste and pollution and their environmental impact
SRO99 SRXRES008A Conserve and re-establish natural systems
THH02 THHCOR02B Work in a socially diverse environment
THH02 THHGCS01B Develop and update local knowledge
THH02 THHGGA03B Source and present information
THT02 THTTCO01B Develop and update tourism industry knowledge
WRR02 WRRCA1B Operate retail equipment (clerical administration)
WRR02 WRRI1B Perform stock control procedures (inventory)
WRR02 WRRLP1B Apply safe working practices (loss prevention)
WRR02 WRRF1B Balance register/terminal (finance)
WRR02 WRRF2B Perform retail finance duties (finance)
WRR02 WRRCS2B Apply point of sale handling procedures (service)
WRR02 WRRCS3B Interact with customers
WRR02 WRRI2B Minimise theft (loss prevention)
WRR02 WRRLP6C Apply retail food safety practices
WRR02 WRRM1B Merchandise products (merchandising)
WRR02 WRRM2B Perform routine housekeeping duties
WRR02 WRRS1B Sell product and services (selling)
WRR02 WRRS2B Advise on products and services (selling)

© Australian National Training Authority 29

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

MEM30703 Certificate III in Boating Services

The requirement for the awarding of a Certificate III in Boating Services is demonstrated
competency in twenty three units of competency comprised of nine core units and fourteen
elective units. (Note: When selecting units any pre-requisite units must also be completed
but can be counted towards the qualification total of twenty nine units.)

Compulsory core units (nine)

From: Unit code Unit title
MEM98 MEM1.1FA Undertake interactive workplace communication
MEM98 MEM1.2FA Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work
environment
MEM98 MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures
MEM98 MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task
MEM98 MEM2.3C11A Operate in a work based team environment
MEM98 MEM50.1EA Classify recreational boating technologies and features
MEM98 MEM50.2AA Work safely on marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.3AA Follow work procedures to maintain the marine environment
MEM98 MEM50.4AA Maintain quality of environment by following marina codes

Elective units (select fourteen)

From: Unit code Unit title
AUR99 AUR18676B Test, service and replace battery
AUR99 AUR37119A Drive and manoeuvre trailer(s)
AUR99 AUR37271A Service and repair trailers
AUR99 AUR46108A Carry out minor hull repairs
AUR99 AUR46335A Launch and recover vessels from trailer
AUR99 AUR46435A Launch and recover vessel from cranes, gantries and forklifts
AUR99 AUR46519A Drive and manoeuvre motor driven vessels
AUR99 AUR46542A Moor vessels
AUR99 AUR46649A Prepare (winterise) vessel systems
AUR99 AUR46660A Recommission vessel systems
AUR99 AUR46749A Prepare (winterise) engine systems
AUR99 AUR46760A Recommission engine systems
AUR99 AUR46866A Repair deck. hull, cabin equipment and fittings
AUR99 AUR46870A Service deck, hull, cabin equipment and fittings
AUR99 AUR46927A Identify the need for water testing vessels
AUR99 AUR46930A Water test vessels
AUR99 AUR46975A Water test engines in tanks
AUR99 AUR50318A Dispose of waste and maintain a tidy work area
BSB01 BSBCMN205A Use business technology
BSB01 BSBCMN206A Process and maintain workplace information
BSB01 BSBCMN207A Prepare and process financial/business documents
BSB01 BSBCMN212A Handle mail
BSB01 BSBCMN213A Produce simple word processed documents
BSB01 BSBCMN306A Produce business documents
BSB01 BSBCMN308A Maintain financial records
BSB01 BSBADM308A Process payroll
MEM98 MEM2.5C11B Measure with graduated devices
MEM98 MEM4.18AA General woodworking machine operations
MEM98 MEM5.3AA Soft soldering (basic)
MEM98 MEM5.5AA Carry out mechanical cutting
MEM98 MEM5.7AB Manual heating and thermal cutting
MEM98 MEM5.12AB Perform routine manual metal arc welding
MEM98 MEM9.1AA Draw and interpret sketch
MEM98 MEM9.2AA Interpret technical drawing
MEM98 MEM11.10AA Operate mobile load shifting equipment
MEM98 MEM11.11AA Perform manual handling
MEM98 MEM12.6AA Mark off/out (general engineering)

30 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

From: Unit code Unit title

MEM98 MEM12.7AA Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes
MEM98 MEM13.3AA Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
MEM98 MEM18.1AB Use hand tools
MEM98 MEM18.2AA Use power tools/hand held operations
MEM98 MEM18.3AB Use tools for precision work
MEM98 MEM25.1AA Apply fibre reinforced plastics
MEM98 MEM25.4AA Fair and shape surfaces
MEM98 MEM25.7AA Maintain marine vessel surfaces
MEM98 MEM25.8AA Repair marine vessel surfaces and structures
MEM98 MEM50.5EA Refuel vessels
MEM98 MEM50.6EA Check operational capability of marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.7EA Check operational capability of sails and sail operating equipment
MEM98 MEM50.8EA Carry out trip preparation and planning
MEM98 MEM50.9AA Safely operate a powered recreational boat
MEM98 MEM50.10EA Respond to boating emergencies and incidents
PMB01 PMBHAN201B Process orders and despatch orders
PMB01 PMBHAN202B Load and unload goods
PMB01 PMBPROD315B Produce polyurethane foam
PMB01 PMBPROD320B Produce foam injected mouldings
PMB01 PMBPROD380B Produce composites using chopper gun/depositor
PMB01 PMBFIN201B Finish products and components
PMB01 PMBFIN202B Fit attachments to products
PMB01 PMBFIN203B Repair product imperfections
PMB01 PMBHAN204B Package goods/materials
PMB01 PMBFIN205B Hand decorate products
PRM98 PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime
SFI00 SFISHIP201A Comply with organisational and legislative requirements
SFI00 SFISHIP202A Contribute to safe navigating (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP203A Maintain the safety and security of vessel (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP204A Maintain marine vessels and equipment (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP205A Maintain marine plant (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP206A Operate a small vessel (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP207A Operate and maintain outboard motors
SFI00 SFISHIP208A Operate a low powered diesel engines (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP209A Operate marine communications (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP210A Operate a marine plant and systems (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP211A Prepare for maintenance (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP212A Take emergency action on board a vessel (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP302A Command and control manoeuvres (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP303A Initial response to navigation emergencies (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP304A Manage the operation of auxiliaries and service plant outside normal
parameters (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP305A Manage the operation of low powered marine diesel engines outside
normal parameters (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP306A Monitor and control navigation in an inshore area
SFI00 SFISHIP307A Plan maintenance for marine engineering systems (vessel
operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP401A Ensure the seaworthiness of the vessel (simplified stability criteria)
SFI00 SFISHIP403A Monitor and control search and rescue operations
PUA00 PUAEME001A Provide emergency care
PUA00 PUAEME002B Manage injuries at emergency incident
PUA00 PUAEME003B Administer oxygen in an emergency situation
PUA00 PUAOPE002A Operate communications systems and equipment
SRO99 SROOPS001A Implement minimal environmental impact practices
SRO99 SROOPS002A Plan for minimal environmental impact
SRO99 SROOPS003A Apply weather information
SRO99 SROOPS005A Apply search and rescue skills
SRO99 SROOPS006A Use and maintain a temporary overnight site
SRO99 SROORE001A Prepare to participate in a supervised outdoor activity requiring basic
© Australian National Training Authority 31
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

From: Unit code Unit title

skills
SRO99 SROORE002A Participate in a supervised outdoor activity requiring basic skills
SRO99 SROORE003A Prepare to participate in outdoor activities
SRO99 SROORE004A Participate in outdoor activities
SRO99 SROYAC001A Comply with maritime rules and regulations
SRO99 SROYAC002A Crew a ballasted yacht inshore
SRO99 SROYAC003A Skipper a ballasted yacht inshore
SRO99 SROYMC001A Crew a motor cruiser inshore
SRO99 SROYMC002A Skipper a motor cruiser inshore
SRO99 SROYSB001A Use basic skills to sail a small boat in controlled conditions
SRO99 SROYSB002A Sail a small boat in light to moderate conditions using enhanced skills
SRO99 SRXEMEO02A Participate in the control of minor emergencies
SRO99 SRXEME003A Respond to emergency situations
SRO99 SRXEME004A Coordinate emergency response
SRO99 SRXRES002A Improve client awareness and implementation of environmental
management practices
SRO99 SRXRES004A Minimise waste and pollution and their environmental impact
SRO99 SRXRES008A Conserve and re-establish natural systems
THH02 THHCOR02B Work in a socially diverse environment
THH02 THHGCS01B Develop and update local knowledge
THH02 THHGGA03B Source and present information
THH02 THTSMA01B Coordinate the production of brochures and marketing materials
THT02 THTTCO01B Develop and update tourism industry knowledge
WRR02 WRRCA1B Operate retail equipment (clerical administration)
WRR02 WRRCA5B Operate retail information technology systems
WRR02 WRRCS2B Apply point of sale handling procedures (service)
WRR02 WRRCS3B Interact with customers
WRR02 WRRF1B Balance register/terminal (finance)
WRR02 WRRF2B Perform retail finance duties (finance)
WRR02 WRRI1B Perform stock control procedures (inventory)
WRR02 WRRI5A Maintain and order stock
WRR02 WRRLP1B Apply safe working practices (loss prevention)
WRR02 WRRI2B Minimise theft (loss prevention)
WRR02 WRRLP3B Maintain store safety (loss prevention)
WRR02 WRRLP6C Apply retail food safety practices
WRR02 WRRM1B Merchandise products (merchandising)
WRR02 WRRM2B Perform routine housekeeping duties
WRR02 WRRS1B Sell product and services (selling)
WRR02 WRRS2B Advise on products and services (selling)

32 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

MEM40203 Certificate IV in Boating Services

The requirement for the awarding of a Certificate IV in Boating Services is demonstrated
competency in twenty nine units of competency comprised of nine core units and twenty
elective units. (Note: When selecting units any pre-requisite units must also be completed
but can be counted towards the qualification total of twenty nine units.)

Compulsory core units (nine)

From Unit code Unit title
MEM98 MEM1.1FA Undertake interactive workplace communication
MEM98 MEM1.2FA Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work
environment
MEM98 MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures
MEM98 MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task
MEM98 MEM2.3C11A Operate in a work based team environment
MEM98 MEM50.1EA Classify recreational boating technologies and features
MEM98 MEM50.2AA Work safely on marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.3AA Follow work procedures to maintain the marine environment
MEM98 MEM50.4AA Maintain quality of environment by following marina codes

Elective units (twenty)

Select twenty units from the groups of elective units below, with:
• at least one unit from the list below, and
From: Unit code Unit title
MEM98 MEM50.5EA Refuel vessels
MEM98 MEM50.6EA Check operational capability of marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.7EA Check operational capability of sails and sail operating equipment
MEM98 MEM50.8EA Carry out trip preparation and planning
MEM98 MEM50.9AA Safely operate a mechanically powered recreational boat
MEM98 MEM50.10EA Respond to boating emergencies and incidents

• at least five units from the list below, and

From: Unit code Unit title
BSB01 BSBCMN408A Report on financial activity
BSB01 BSBRKG301A Control records
BSB01 any units from BSB41001 Certificate IV in Business (Frontline
Management)
BSB01 BSBADM402A Produce complex business documents
BSB01 BSBCMN406A Maintain business technology
BSB01 any units from BSZ40198 Certificate IV in Assessment and
Workplace Training
SFI00 SFISHIP501A Control overall safety of navigation operations (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP502A Ensure the seaworthiness of the vessel
SFI00 SFISHIP503A Prepare and plan the voyage (vessel operations)
FNB99 FNBFIN71A Prepare financial reports to meet statutory requirements

• the balance to be selected from the list below

From: Unit code Unit title
AUR99 AUR37271A Service and repair trailers
AUR99 AUR46108A Carry out minor hull repairs
AUR99 AUR46649A Prepare (winterise) vessel systems
AUR99 AUR46660A Recommission vessel systems
AUR99 AUR46749A Prepare (winterise) engine systems
AUR99 AUR46760A Recommission engine systems
AUR99 AUR46866A Repair deck. hull, cabin equipment and fittings
AUR99 AUR46870A Service deck, hull, cabin equipment and fittings
AUR99 AUR46927A Identify the need for water testing vessels

© Australian National Training Authority 33

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

From: Unit code Unit title

AUR99 AUR46930A Water test vessels
AUR99 AUR46975A Water test engines in tanks
BSB01 BSBCMN308A Maintain financial records
BSB01 BSBADM308A Process payroll
BSB01 BSBCMN206A Process and maintain workplace information
BSB01 BSBCMN306A Produce business documents
BSB01 BSBCMN205A Use business technology
BSB01 BSBCMN408A Report on financial activity
BSB01 BSBRKG301A Control records
BSB01 BSBADM402A Produce complex business documents
BSB01 BSBCMN406A Maintain business technology
BSB01 any units from BSB4101 Certificate IV in Business (Frontline
Management)
BSB01 any units from BSZ40198 Certificate IV in Assessment and
Workplace Training
FNB99 FNBFIN71A Prepare financial reports to meet statutory requirements
MEM98 MEM4.18AA General woodworking machine operations
MEM98 MEM5.3AA Soft soldering (basic)
MEM98 MEM5.5AA Carry out mechanical cutting
MEM98 MEM5.7AB Manual heating and thermal cutting
MEM98 MEM5.12AB Perform routine manual metal arc welding
MEM98 MEM25.1AA Apply fibre reinforced materials
MEM98 MEM25.4AA Fair and shape surfaces
MEM98 MEM25.7AA Maintain marine vessel surfaces
MEM98 MEM25.8AA Repair marine vessel surfaces and structures
SFI00 SFISHIP302A Command and control manoeuvres (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP303A Initial response to navigation emergencies (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP306A Monitor and control navigation in an inshore area
SFI00 SFISHIP304A Manage the operation of auxiliaries and service plant outside normal
parameters (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP305A Manage the operation of low powered marine diesel engines outside
normal parameters (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP307A Plan maintenance for marine engineering systems (vessel
operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP401A Ensure the seaworthiness of the vessel (simplified stability criteria)
SFI00 SFISHIP403A Monitor and control search and rescue operations
SFI00 SFISHIP501A Control overall safety of navigation operations (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP502A Ensure the seaworthiness of the vessel
SFI00 SFISHIP503A Prepare and plan the voyage (vessel operations)
SRO99 SROOPS005A Apply search and rescue skills
SRO99 SROYAC002A Crew a ballasted yacht inshore
SRO99 SROYMC001A Crew a motor cruiser inshore
SRO99 SROYSB002A Sail a small boat in light to moderate conditions using enhanced
skills
SRO99 SRXEME004A Coordinate emergency response
SRO99 SRXRES002A Improve client awareness and implementation of environmental
management practices
SRO99 SRXRES004A Minimise waste and pollution and their environmental impact
SRO99 SRXRES008A Conserve and re-establish natural systems
SRO99 SROYAC003A Skipper a ballasted yacht inshore
SRO99 SROYMC002A Skipper a motor cruiser inshore
WRR02 WRRCA5B Operate retail information technology systems
WRR02 WRRI5A Maintain and order stock
WRR02 WRRLP3B Maintain store safety (loss prevention)
WRR02 WRRO1B Manage merchandise and store presentation (merchandising)
WRR02 WRRO2B Manage sales and service delivery (operations)
WRR02 WRRO3B Provide a safe working environment(operations)
WRR02 WRRO4B Control store security/loss (operations)
WRR02 WRRO5B Control inventory (operations)

34 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package policy document

From: Unit code Unit title

WRR02 WRRO6B Manage store facilities (operations)

Persons holding any of the following qualifications are recognised as having credit in a
substantial part of the Certificate IV in Boating Services:

Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction – MEM30603

Certificate III in Marine (Installation) – AUR32199
Certificate III in Marine (Mechanics) – AUR32299
Certificate III in Marine (Sales) – AUR32399
Certificate III in Textile Fabrication – LMT30400

In addition to their Certificate III qualification, they need only complete eight additional
units as specified below.

Compulsory core unit (one)

From: Unit code Unit title
MEM98 MEM50.1EA Classify recreational boating technologies and features

Elective units (seven)

• one unit from the list below, and
From: Unit code Unit title
MEM98 MEM50.2AA Work safely on marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.3AA Follow work procedures to maintain the marine environment
MEM98 MEM50.4AA Maintain quality of environment by following marina codes
MEM98 MEM50.5EA Refuel vessels
MEM98 MEM50.6EA Check operational capability of marine craft
MEM98 MEM50.7EA Check operational capability of sails and sail operating equipment
MEM98 MEM50.8EA Carry out trip preparation and planning
MEM98 MEM50.9AA Safely operate a mechanically powered recreational boat
MEM98 MEM50.10EA Respond to boating emergencies and incidents

• six units from the list below.

From: Unit code Unit title
BSB01 BSBCMN408A Report on financial activity
BSB01 BSBRKG301A Control records
BSB01 any units from BSB4101 Certificate IV in Business (Frontline
Management)
BSB01 BSBADM402A Produce complex business documents
BSB01 BSBCMN406A Maintain business technology
BSB01 any units from BSZ40198 Certificate IV in Assessment and
Workplace Training
SFI00 SFISHIP501A Control overall safety of navigation operations (vessel operations)
SFI00 SFISHIP502A Ensure the seaworthiness of the vessel
SFI00 SFISHIP503A Prepare and plan the voyage (vessel operations)
FNB99 FNBFIN71A Prepare financial reports to meet statutory requirements

© Australian National Training Authority 35

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
policy document Metal and Engineering Training Package

MEM30603 Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction

As indicated in the earlier section of the Metal and Engineering Training Package
qualifications, this qualification follows the same packaging rules as apply to the
Engineering Certificate III ‘Trade’ qualifications (compulsory Foundation and Core units,
plus 40 points of Stream units, plus 36 points of Specialisation elective units). The
requirement for the awarding of a Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction is
demonstrated competency in units to a minimum points value of 96 according to the
following structure:

Compulsory units (20 points)

Unit code Unit title Points
MEM1.1FA Undertake interactive workplace communication 0
MEM1.2FA Apply principles of Occupational Health & Safety (OH&S) in work 0
environment
MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures 0
MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task 0
MEM2.1C12A Apply quality systems 2
MEM2.2C11A Organise and analyse information 2
MEM2.3C11A Operate in a work based team environment 2
MEM2.4C11A Assist in the provision of on the job training 2
MEM2.5C11B Measure with graduated devices 2
MEM2.6C10A Plan a complete activity 4
MEM2.7C10A Perform computations – basic 2
MEM2.8C10A Perform computations 2
MEM2.9C10A Perform computer operations 2

Stream units - select 40 points in units drawn from the Marine Craft Construction units stream
Specialisation band A units as follows (pre-requisite units points value may be included in the 40
‘stream’ points):
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM4.18AB General woodworking machine operations 4
MEM8.11AA Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means 2
MEM8.14AA Apply protective coatings (basic) 4
MEM9.21AA Interpret and produce curved 3-dimensional shapes 4
MEM10.13A Assemble and install equipment and accessories/ancillaries 2
MEM12.7AA Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes 4
MEM25.1AA Apply fibre-reinforced materials 2
MEM25.2AA Form and integrate fibre-reinforced structures 4
MEM25.3AA Set up marine vessel structures 4
MEM25.4AA Fair and shape surfaces 2
MEM25.5AA Construct and assemble marine vessel timber components 8
MEM25.6AA Undertake marine sheathing operations 2
MEM25.7AA Maintain marine vessel surfaces 4
MEM25.8AA Repair marine vessel surfaces and structures 4
MEM25.9AA Form timber shapes using hot processes 2
MEM25.10AA Perform fitout procedures 4
MEM25.11AA Install marine systems 8
MEM25.12AA Install and test operations of marine auxiliary systems 6
MEM25.13AA Produce three dimensional plugs/moulds 12
MEM25.14AA Perform marine slipping operations 2
MEM50.2AA Work safely on marine craft 1
MEM50.3AA Follow work procedures to maintain the marine environment 1
MEM50.4AA Maintain quality of environment by following marine codes 1
MEM50.9AA Safely operate powered recreational boat 2

Specialisation electives units (select 36 points in units drawn from MEM98 Specialisation band A
units (including dual band A/band B units). Note that pre-requisite units points value may be
included in the 36 points for electives.
36 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003
Metal and Engineering Training Package
National code identifier – MEM98

Introduction to the
Competency Standards

for the manufacturing and

engineering industry

MERSITAB
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

© Australian National Training Authority (ANTA), 2003

This work has been produced with the assistance of funding provided by the
Commonwealth Government through ANTA.
• An individual may make a photocopy of all or part of the work for their personal
use.
• A Registered Training Organisation may make photocopies of all or part of the
work for the teaching purposes of that organisation, including for supply to its
students provided that any consideration does not exceed the marginal cost of
preparation, reproduction, assembly and delivery.
Except as permitted under the Copyright Act 1968, all other rights are reserved.
Requests for permission may be directed to:
Australian National Training Authority
Level 11, AMP Place
10 Eagle Street
BRISBANE, QLD 4000
Phone: (07) 3246 2300 Fax: (07) 3246 2490
This work is the result of wide consultations with Australian industry participants. It is a
collaborative view and does not necessarily represent the view of ANTA or any specific body.
For the sake of brevity it may omit factors which could be pertinent in particular cases.
While care has been taken in the preparation of this Training Package, ANTA and the original
developer do not warrant that any licensing or registration requirements specified here are either
complete or up-to-date for your State or Territory. ANTA and the original developer do not
accept any liability for any damage or loss (including indirect and consequential loss) incurred
by any person as a result of relying on the information contained in this Training Package.
This Training Package should not be regarded as professional advice and it should not be relied
upon in any important matter without obtaining appropriate advice relevant to your
circumstances.
Published by: Australian Training Products Ltd
Level 25, 150 Lonsdale St
Melbourne 3000
Phone: +61 3 96550600 Fax: +61 3 9639 4684
www.atpl.net.au e-mail: [email protected]
First published: November 1998
Stock Code Number: 5040008S
ISBN: 0 642 79928 8
MEM98 Metals & Engineering Training Package – Volume One
Printed by: Document Printing Australia Pty Ltd
AESharenet Code: P
Print Version No: 4
20 August 2003

ii © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

IMPORTANT

Training packages are not static documents. Changes are made periodically to reflect
the latest industry practices.

Before commencing any form of training or assessment, you must ensure delivery is
from the current version of the Training Package.

To ensure you are complying with this requirement :

• Check the Print Version Number just below the copyright statement on the imprint
pages of your current Training Package.
Access the ATP website (http://www.atpl.net.au) and check the latest Print Number.
In cases where the Print Version Number is later than yours, the Print Version
Modification History in the Training Package sample on the ATP website will indicate
the changes that have been made.
The Modification History is also available on the website of the developer of the
Training Package: Manufacturing, Engineering & Related Services Industry Training
Advisory Body http://www.mersitab.com.au

The National Training Information Service (http://www.ntis.gov.au) also displays any

changes in Units of Competency and the packaging of qualifications.

© Australian National Training Authority iii

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Modification History
MODIFICATION HISTORY – ENDORSED MATERIALS
Please refer to the National Training Information Service for the latest version of Units of Competency and
Qualification information (http://www.ntis.gov.au).

MEM98 Metal and Engineering Training

Sheet: 1 of 1
Package
Date of Release

Authorisation:
Comments
Version

Inclusion of Marine Craft Construction, Boating Services and

Jewellery Manufacture resulting in five new qualifications. Revised
20/08/03 NTQC
4

name of Certificate IV in Engineering, introduction of new and

revised units as listed in the details table.

Revised point weighting and introduction of new units as listed in

3.00

10/02/03 NTQC
following details table
2.00

01/12/99 NTFC Details not available

1.00

21/11/98 NTFC Primary Release

Pre Training package, standards originally published 1995

Details Table
Unit code V Unit title Change information P
1. Foundation units
MEM1.2F A Apply principles of Occupational Health and minor title change 0
Safety in work environment
2. Core units
MEM2.7C10 A Perform computations – basic minor title change 2
4. Casting and moulding

MEM4.9A B Inspect/test castings/forgings pre-requisite 6

correction
MEM4.16A B Develop and manufacture precision models pre-requisite 6
correction
5. Fabrication
MEM5.38A A Advanced geometric development – minor title change 2
Cylindrical/Rectangular
MEM5.39A A Advanced geometric development – minor title change 2

iv © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

Conical
MEM5.40A A Advanced geometric development – minor title change 4
Transitions
MEM5.49A B Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding elements, assessor 2
guide
6. Forging
MEM6.6A B Spring repair pre-requisite 4
correction
7. Machine and process operations
MEM7.15A A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) minor title 2
correction
MEM7.16A B **Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process path 4 deleted 4
MEM7.18A B **Basic NC/CNC programming path 4 deleted 4
MEM7.19A B **Program NC/CNC machining centre path 4 deleted 2
MEM7.20A B **Program multiple spindle and/or multiple path 4 deleted 2
axis NC/CNC machining centre
MEM7.22A B **Advanced programming of CNC wire cut path 4 deleted 2
machines
MEM7.23B B Program and set up CNC manufacturing path 4 deleted 6
cell
MEM7.30A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations pre-requisite 6
(basic) removed
MEM7.31A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations pre-requisite 4
(complex) removed
8. Surface Finishing
MEM8.2A B Pre-treat work for subsequent surface range statement 4
coating
MEM8.3A B Finish work using acidic/alkaline all components of 6
electroplating solutions unit, points
MEM8.5A A Prepare and produce specialised coatings title correction 4
electrolytically
MEM8.9A B Maintain basic solutions title, element, range 2
statement
MEM8.18A A Electroplate engineering coatings new unit 6
MEM8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes new unit 6
MEM8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes new unit 6
9 Drawing, drafting and design
MEM9.21A A Interpret and produce curved 3-dimensional new unit 4
shapes
10. Installation and commissioning
MEM10.3A A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits minor title change 8
(up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)
MEM10.7B B Modification of control systems pre-requisites and 6
pathways corrected
MEM10.13A A Assemble and install equipment and new unit 2
accessories/ancillaries

© Australian National Training Authority v

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

12. Measurement
MEM12.7A B Mark off/out structural fabrications and element, range 4
shapes statement
13. Occupational Health and Safety
MEM13.2A A Undertake Occupational Health & Safety minor title change 3
activities in the workplace
MEM13.5B A Manage Occupational Health & Safety for a minor title change 12
workplace or section of a workplace
MEM13.6A A Monitor Occupational Health & Safety minor title change 4
factors for an enterprise or section of an
enterprise
15. Quality
MEM15.20B B Perform verification/certification or in- pre-requisite 12
service inspection corrected
MEM15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and pre-requisite 4
public weighbridge licensees corrected
18. Maintenance and diagnostics
MEM18.10A B *Equipment condition monitoring and pre-requisites 4
recording removed
MEM18.17B B Modify mechanical system and equipment minor title change, 8
pre-requisite
removed
MEM18.45A A Fault find/repair electrical minor title change 4
equipment/components which use up to
240v single phase supply
MEM18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical minor title change 6
equipment/components which use up to
1000vAC/1500vDC
MEM18.49A A **Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired minor title change 3
equipment which use up to
1000vAC/1500vDC
MEM18.58A B *Modify electronic equipment range statement 4
MEM18.60A A *Maintain, repair control instrumentation - minor title change 8
single and multiple loop control systems
MEM18.70B B Modify complex electrical circuits and pre-requisite 6
systems correction
19. Jewellery and horological
MEM19.9A A Perform investment procedures for “lost minor title change 1
wax” casting process
MEM19.10A A Produce rubber moulds for “lost wax” minor title change 2
casting process
MEM19.11A A Perform wax injection of moulds for “lost minor title change 2
wax” casting process
MEM19.16A A Construct jewellery components new unit 4
MEM19.17A A Fabricate jewellery items new unit 6
MEM19.18A A *Repair jewellery items new unit 6
MEM19.20A A Fault-find and maintain micro-mechanisms new unit 4

vi © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM19.21A A Diagnose and service micro-mechanisms new unit 6
MEM19.22A A *Perform precision micro-mechanism new unit 6
diagnosis and servicing
25. Marine craft construction
MEM25.1A A Apply fibre-reinforced materials new unit 2
MEM25.2A A Form and integrate fibre-reinforced new unit 4
structures
MEM25.3A A Set up marine vessel structures new unit 4
MEM25.4A A Fair and shape surfaces new unit 2
MEM25.5A A Construct and assemble marine vessel new unit 8
timber components
MEM25.6A A Undertake marine sheathing operations new unit 2
MEM25.7A A Maintain marine vessel surfaces new unit 4
MEM25.8A A Repair marine vessel surfaces and new unit 4
structures
MEM25.9A A Form timber shapes using hot processes new unit 2
MEM25.10A A Perform fitout procedures new unit 4
MEM25.11A A Install marine systems new unit 8
MEM25.12A A Install and test operations of marine new unit 6
auxiliary systems
MEM25.13A A *Produce three dimensional plugs/moulds new unit 12
MEM25.14A A Perform marine slipping operations new unit 2
50. Boating services
MEM50.1E A Classify recreational boating technologies new unit n/a
and features
MEM50.2A A Work safely on marine craft new unit 1
MEM50.3A A Follow work procedures to maintain the new unit 1
marine environment
MEM50.4A A Maintain quality of environment by following new unit 1
marina codes
MEM50.5E A Refuel vessels new unit n/a
MEM50.6E A Check operational capability of marine craft new unit n/a
MEM50.7E A Check operational capability of sails and new unit n/a
sail operating equipment
MEM50.8E A Carry out trip preparation and planning new unit n/a
MEM50.9A A Safely operate a mechanically powered new unit 2
recreational boat
MEM50.10E A Respond to boating emergencies and new unit n/a
incidents

© Australian National Training Authority vii

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Table of Contents

Modification History......................................................................................... iv

1. Introduction 1

2. Brief description of the standards structure .............................................. 1

3. Foundation and Core competencies ......................................................... 12

4. Competency standards at Certificate III and above ................................. 13

5. Key Competencies ...................................................................................... 14

6. Index of competency standards ................................................................ 15

viii © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

1. Introduction
These competency standards have been produced by the Manufacturing, Engineering
and Related Services Industry Training Advisory Body Ltd. (MERS ITAB) for the
manufacturing, metal and engineering industry. The units printed in these volumes
cover the Metal and Engineering Training Package qualifications from Certificate I to
Diploma. They also satisfy Metal, Engineering and Associated Industries Award
classification levels C12 to C5.

Each page of each competency standards unit is uniquely identified by a unit number,
page number and version date. The unit numbers now include ‘MEM’ indicating that
they can form part of the Metal and Engineering Training Package and they also
include a version identifier (version ‘A’ is November 1998 – see page 6 for more
details).
A brief description of the structure and use of the standards is included after this
introduction and further details on how they should be used for training purposes are
shown in the Metal and Engineering Training Package Policy Document. For industrial
classification purposes, please refer to the Implementation Guide, a separate
document agreed by the industry parties.

These competency standards are subject to continuous review and maintenance. In

particular the review will focus on any new or significantly revised units. In all cases, all
aspects of the units are subject to review including their technical adequacy, scope and
application, and points weighting. The review process will be dealt with on a cyclical
basis, with the frequency determined by the extent of any proposed change.
MERS ITAB has an established Metal and Engineering Competency Standards Review
Group comprised of key industry stakeholders and ITAB staff. The group considers all
feedback on the standards and changes are made where appropriate. Feedback and
comment is sought from enterprises, industry organisations and training organisations
from across Australia.

If you have any queries about the standards or their use, or any feedback, please
contact MERS ITAB, the Australian Industry Group or the members of the Metal Trades
Federation of Unions for further information.

Note that the points weightings for the electrical/electronic units are being reviewed as
part of the Phase II Training Package Review 2002-3.

2. Brief description of the standards structure

This section provides information on:
• what the standards are
• the standards model
– the fields
– the Core and Specialisation competencies
• the format of individual competency standards
• how the standards may be applied.
© Australian National Training Authority 1
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

What are competency standards?

National competency standards are a set of competency descriptions. The competency
descriptions are called units and describe the level of skill and the depth of knowledge
required to work competently at the various skill levels required by the industry.

These standards focus on what is expected of people in workplaces rather than on the
learning process. The standards reflect realistic workplace practices across a broad
range of situations. This includes the specification of knowledge and skills and the
application of that knowledge and skill in the workplace as well as the ability to transfer
and apply the competency in new situations, environments and contexts.

The National Metal and Engineering Competency Standards are a basis for the
development of learning strategies for training programs a well as workplace
recognition of skills. These standards have been endorsed by the National Training
Quality Council (NTQC) of the Australian National Training Authority.

The standards framework

The framework used to develop competency standards for the metal and engineering
industry is designed to facilitate flexibility and multiskilling as well as specialisation. It is
based on the principle that individual units of competency, apart from the very small
number of Core units, should not be exclusively related to a particular occupation or
classification level.

For example, the competency unit ‘interpret technical drawing’ is available to all
employees on a needs basis and is not exclusive to workers in the drafting areas.
Similarly, the unit ‘perform lathe operations’ is not restricted to engineering
tradespersons. Choices are, of course, subject to satisfaction of any skill prerequisites.

2 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

The ‘fields’
The competency standards are divided into ‘fields’ as convenient groupings of units to
assist the organisation of the standards and to help users in the selection of relevant
competency standards units. The fields do not set up barriers to accessing any
competency units in a field, or between fields.

The competency standards and fields are divided into three categories:
• Foundation units (field 1)
• Core units (field 2)
• Specialisation units (fields 3 onwards)

The following field numbers, groupings and titles have been used:
1 Foundation
2 Core
3 Assembly
4 Casting and moulding
5 Fabrication
6 Forging
7 Machine and process operations
8 Surface finishing
9 Drawing, drafting and design
10 Installation and commissioning
11 Materials handling
12 Measurement
13 Occupational health and safety
14 Planning
15 Quality
16 Communication
17 Training
18 Maintenance and diagnostics
19 Jewellery and horological
24 Non-destructive testing
25 Marine craft construction
50 Boating services
Types of competency standards
Foundation units
Foundation units describe competencies that are a necessary part of the skill profile of
every job in the industry. Foundation competencies do not carry a points weighting,
however they are necessary prerequisites to higher level units and will form part of the
skills profile of all employees. Weighting points are explained further on in this
document.

These units of competency should be achieved through a combination of secondary

school education, induction training within an enterprise, and up to three months
structured training required under the Award definition for C13. Foundation units are
not subject to formal assessment for reclassification purposes.

© Australian National Training Authority 3

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Core units
The Core units define competencies that are common and necessary across a range of
classifications and positions in the Metal and Engineering Industry. Core units have
been fixed for Industrial Award Classifications C12, C11, C10, and the C9-C5
classification range as well as for each corresponding Training Package qualification.
Core unit requirements for a particular level must be satisfied before progression to a
higher classification or qualification level. The Key Competencies have been mapped
against the Foundation and Core units and achievement of the Metal and Engineering
units will also provide recognition in the Key Competencies (see section five).

Core units are allocated to ‘bands’ and the number of required Core units increases for
each qualification level.

Band 1 Core units apply to qualification outcomes up to Certificate III (C10).

For qualification outcomes at Certificate IV (C7) and Diploma (C5), band 2 Core units
apply as well as the band 1 Core units.

The groups of Core units are:

band 1 Core - C12 to C10 (all Core units for C12-C10 must be completed by C10)
band 2 Core - C9 to C5 (all Core units for C9-C5 must be completed by C5)

All band 1 Core units can be selected as Specialisation units in any classification/
qualification level. Higher level Core units can be selected and included as
Specialisation units below the level at which they are specified. Some band 2 Core
units can be included in a Certificate III qualification and these are shown in the
Training Package documents.

Core units have been included in the following areas:

• Mathematics/Computations
• Occupational Health and Safety
• Communication
• Work Organisation
• Quality Assurance
• Measurement
• Planning.

Specialisation units
These units describe the diverse range of competencies needed across the industry.
The Specialisation units are also divided into four bands with some overlap between
them.

The allocation of units to different Specialisation bands recognises the inherent

differences in the level of difficulty of skills used in the industry, for example, band B
skills are more difficult than band A skills. At the same time the large range of units in
each band allows enterprises a wide choice.
4 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

© Australian National Training Authority 5

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

The levels for Specialisation competency standards are as follows:

• band A - represents a range of competencies which may be used for career

progression up to classification C8

• band B - represents a range of competencies which may be used for career

progression between classifications C10 to C5, and must be used above C8.

• band E –is a limited range of competencies in the Boating Services field (50
series) which may only be used in Boating Services qualifications only, as
indicated in the packaging rules for those qualification.

Some Specialisation units are regarded as both band A and band B units. Use of these
dual band units is limited and this is also shown in the requirements for each Training
Package qualification. These units are identified in the index to the competency
standards as well as in the units themselves by way of a note.

Note: Some band A units can only be used in qualifications at Certificate III and above
as shown in section four.

Availability of Core and Specialisation units for each qualification

Qualification title Core units Specialisation units

band band band band band
1 2 A A/B B
Certificate I in Engineering all none some none none
Certificate II in Engineering – Production all none some some none
Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology all one some some none
Certificate III in Engineering – Production Systems all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Mechanical Trade all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Fabrication Trade all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Electrical/Electronic Trade all some all all some
Certificate III in Engineering – Technician all all all all all
Certificate III in Engineering – Jewellery all some all all some
Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction all some all all some
Certificate IV in Engineering all all all all all
Diploma of Engineering all all all all all

Note that band E units are not included in this table. These units only apply to Boating
Services qualifications as shown in the packaging rules for those qualifications.

The Metal and Engineering Training Package documents and the Implementation
Guide both provide additional information concerning the availability of competency
units for use at particular levels.
6 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

© Australian National Training Authority 7

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

The standards format

The unit code (numbering system) and title
The units in each field are identified by field and unit numbers as well as the national
Training Package code identifier. The unit band is also included in the number. An
example is on the following page:

‘MEM’ shows that this unit is Title

Version identifier
identified as part of the Metal and The unit title gives a direct
Engineering Training Package ‘A’ shows that this unit was
statement of the activity
endorsed in November 1998
covered by the unit

MEM 4.1A A Operate melting furnaces

Field
Band
Field number 4 ‘1’ shows that this
includes casting and 'A’ shows that it is a Band
is the first unit in A unit, that is applicable
moulding skills this field up to and including
classification level C8

Notes
1. In this edition of the standards the letter ‘C’ refers to Core units. When further
Specialisation units for Band C (C4 to C2) and Band D (C1) are developed the
notation for Core units may be changed.
2. Further references to competency standards units in this introduction section will
only include the number of the field, the unit number in the field and the band e.g
4.1A.

Pre-requisite units
The pre-requisite units indicate whether other specific competencies are required to
support those included in that particular unit.

For example: A person must have the competencies included in the unit MEM13.4AA
Work safely with molten metals/glass before they can acquire the competencies
required by a number of other units in the Casting and Moulding field, such as
MEM4.1AA Operate melting furnaces.

Where there are options within the pre-requisites then separate combinations or paths
are shown. Where multiple paths (path 1, path 2 etc) are shown then the most
appropriate path should be chosen.
8 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

© Australian National Training Authority 9

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Elements
The elements are statements identifying the components that go toward making up the
unit of competence.

For example: ‘4.1A.1 Materials selected.’

Performance criteria
The performance criteria describe what has to be done to decide whether the
requirements of the element are satisfied.

For example: ‘4.1A.1.2 Charge analysis is undertaken in accordance with standard

operating procedures.’

Assessor guide
An assessor guide is provided for each criterion. It provides additional information and
guidance for assessors to help them prepare appropriate assessment strategies and
tools. It includes guidance on observation evidence to be gathered by an assessor as
well as areas to confirm or clarify that the candidate has the required level of
underpinning knowledge. Observation evidence may be gathered on a number of
occasions when the candidate is undertaking the particular task. Confirming and
clarifying underpinning skills and knowledge should be done in ways that are efficient
and effective, such as oral questioning. Further details about assessment for each unit
are included in the evidence guide.

Note: Competency must be demonstrated in all elements of a competency standards

unit as well as any pre-requisite requirements before ‘competency’ can be granted.

Range statement
The range statement defines the context of the unit, gives further information about the
level of autonomy, the equipment and materials that may be used and refers to
legislative requirements or standards. Some range statements also provide ‘signposts’
to other competency units that may be more appropriate in some circumstances or
should also be considered for particular applications of skill. Where lists of equipment,
machinery, materials etc. are shown in the range statement then these are provided for
illustrative purposes.

For example: ‘This unit covers the use of singular or multi, coke, oil, gas fired or electric
furnaces and a range of metals. All work is carried out to predetermined specifications
and standards of quality, and so on.’

Evidence guide
The evidence guide includes information about recommended assessment context,
critical aspects, conditions and special notes.

10 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit weight
The unit weight assigns a value (standards points) to the unit. Other than the
Foundation units, each unit of competency has been assigned a points value or
‘weight’. When competency units are grouped to form a particular qualification or to
describe a particular skills profile for a job or jobs within the enterprise, the unit weight
points are totalled to show how that skills profile relates to an appropriate qualification
in the Metal and Engineering Training Package or industrial classification structure.
The weighting allocated to individual units acknowledges the fact that not all skills are
equally complex and that it is unrealistic to develop standards in which each unit
represents an equal ‘amount’ of competence.

The points allocated to individual units have been determined by consideration of a

number of factors including the amount of formal and on the job training needed to gain
that skill, the amount of underpinning knowledge and experience needed and the
complexity of the skill.

For example: In the unit Operate melting furnaces: ‘Unit weight 4’.

© Australian National Training Authority 11

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

3. Foundation and Core competencies

Foundation competency units
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM1.1FA Undertake interactive workplace communication 0
MEM1.2FA Apply principles of occupational health and safety in a work environment 0
MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures 0
MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task 0

Core competency units - band 1

At Certificate II in Engineering – Production (C12), the Foundation units and the C12 Core
unit is needed.
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.1C12A Apply quality systems 2
Total Core points at C12 2

At Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology (C11), the Foundation units, C12

Core unit and C11 Core units are required.
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.2C11A Organise and analyse information 2
MEM2.3C11B Operate in a work based team environment 2
MEM2.4C11A Assist in the provision of on the job training 2
MEM2.5C11A Measure with graduated devices 2
Add C12 Core points 2
Total Core points at C11 10

At Certificate III in Engineering – Trade/Production (C10) the Foundation units, C12 Core
unit, C11 Core units and C10 Core units are required.
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.6C10A Plan a complete activity 4
MEM2.7C10A Perform computations – basic 2
MEM2.8C10A Perform computations 2
MEM2.9C10A Perform computer operations 2
Add C12 and C11 Core points 10
Total Core points at C10 20

Core competency units - band 2

Total of 16 points to be gained by C5 (see notes attached to qualifications above 96 points)
Unit code Unit title Points
MEM2.10C5A Write reports 2
MEM2.11C5A Research and prepare presentations and reports 2
MEM2.13C5A Perform mathematical computations 4
MEM2.14C5A Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations 2
MEM2.15C5A Operate in an autonomous team environment 2
MEM2.16C5A Interpret quality specifications and manuals 4
Total Core points in band 2 16
12 © Australian National Training Authority
MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

(Note that C12, C11, C10 and C5 refer to industrial award classifications.)

4. Competency standards at Certificate III and above

These units can only used in qualifications at Certificate III and above – that is, they can be accessed at C11
classifications for progression to C10 and above
MEM2.10C5A Write reports
MEM2.11C5A Research and prepare presentations and reports
MEM2.13C5A Perform mathematical computations
MEM2.14C5A Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations
MEM2.15C5A Operate in an autonomous team environment (SEE NOTE BELOW)
MEM4.10AA Develop and manufacture wood patterns
MEM4.11AA Produce polymer patterns
MEM4.12AA Assemble plated patterns
MEM4.13AA Develop and manufacture polystyrene patterns
MEM4.14AA Develop and manufacture production patterns
MEM4.15AA Develop and manufacture vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment
MEM4.16AB Develop and manufacture precision models
MEM4.17AA Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screws and propeller patterns
MEM5.16AB Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc welding process
MEM5.18AB Perform advanced welding using gas metal arc welding process
MEM5.20AB Perform advanced welding using gas tungsten arc welding process
MEM5.22AB Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene welding process
MEM5.36AB Repair/replace/modify fabrications
MEM5.38AA Advanced geometric development – Cylindrical/Rectangular
MEM5.39AA Advanced geometric development – Conical
MEM5.40AA Advanced geometric development – Transitions
MEM7.2AA Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting operations
MEM7.9AA Perform precision jig boring operations
MEM7.10AA Perform tool and cutter grinding operations
MEM7.11AA Complex milling operations
MEM7.12AA Complex grinding operations
MEM7.21AA Perform complex lathe operations
MEM7.23BB Program and set up CNC manufacturing cell
MEM10.3AA Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)
MEM10.4AA Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters
MEM10.6AA Install machine/plant
MEM12.3AA Precision mechanical measurement
MEM12.4AA Precision electrical/electronic measurement
MEM12.6AA Mark off/out (general engineering)
MEM12.7AB Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes
MEM14.1BA Schedule material deliveries
MEM14.3BA Undertake basic production scheduling
MEM16.1BA Give formal presentations and take part in meetings
MEM18.6AA Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components
MEM18.45AA Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components which use up to 240v single phase supply
MEM18.46AA Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components which use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC
MEM18.48AA Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits
MEM18.62AA Install, maintain and calibrate instrument sensors, transmitters & final control elements
Note:– MEM2.15C5A Operate in an autonomous team environment may be included in a Certificate II in
Engineering – Production Technology or higher qualification, that is, accessed at C11 for progression to C10
and above.

© Australian National Training Authority 13

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

5. Key Competencies
Recognition of competency in a Key Competency does not imply competency in any respective Metal and Engineering competency
standards unit as shown on this map.
Key Competencies
Collecting, Communicating Planning and Working with Using Solving Using
analysing and ideas and organising others and in mathematical problems Technology
organising information activities teams ideas and
information techniques
Competency Standards 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Foundation units
MEM1.1FA Undertake Interactive workplace
communication
MEM1.2FA Apply principles of OH & S in work
environment
MEM1.3FA Apply quality procedures
MEM1.4FA Plan to undertake a routine task
Band 1 Core units
MEM2.1C12A Apply quality systems
MEM 2.2C11A Organise and analyse information
MEM 2.3C11B Operate in work based team
environment
MEM 2.4C11A Assist in the provision of on-the-job
training
MEM 2.5C11A Measure with graduated devices
MEM 2.6C10A Plan a complete activity
MEM 2.7C10A Perform computations - basic
MEM 2.8C10A Perform computations
MEM 2.9C10A Perform computer operations

14 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.0
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

6. Index of competency standards

Index of competency units
This issue is dated May 2003. The ‘change information’ highlights the most recent
endorsed changes.
V = Version (A,B,C etc.)
P = Points (unit weighting)
* = Units marked with * have dual status and are to be regarded as both
Specialisation band A units and Specialisation band B units for progression to C5 (AQF
level V)
** = Units marked with ** have dual status and are to be regarded as both
Specialisation band A units and Specialisation band B units for progression to C7 (AQF
level IV)

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

1. Foundation units
MEM1.1F A Undertake interactive workplace no change 0
communication
MEM1.2F A Apply principles of Occupational Health and minor title change 0
Safety in work environment
MEM1.3F A Apply quality procedures no change 0
MEM1.4F A Plan to undertake a routine task no change 0
2. Core units
MEM2.1C12 A Apply quality systems no change 2
MEM2.2C11 A Organise and analyse information no change 2
MEM2.3C11 B Operate in a work based team environment no change 2
MEM2.4C11 A Assist in the provision of on the job training no change 2
MEM2.5C11 A Measure with graduated devices no change 2
MEM2.6C10 A Plan a complete activity no change 4
MEM2.7C10 A Perform computations – basic minor title change 2
MEM2.8C10 A Perform computations no change 2
MEM2.9C10 A Perform computer operations no change 2
MEM2.10C5 A Write reports no change 2
MEM2.11C5 A Research and prepare presentations and no change 2
reports
MEM2.13C5 A Perform mathematical computations no change 4
MEM2.14C5 A Use graphical techniques and perform no change 2
simple statistical computations
MEM2.15C5 A Operate in an autonomous team no change 2
environment
MEM2.16C5 A Interpret quality specifications and manuals no change 4
3. Assembly
MEM3.1A A Manual production assembly no change 4
MEM3.2A A Precision assembly no change 4

© Australian National Training Authority 15

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM3.3A A Sheet and plate assembly no change 4
MEM3.4A A Electronic/electrical assembly (production) no change 8
MEM3.5A A Rework and repair (electrical/electronic no change 8
production)
MEM3.6A A Setting assembly stations no change 2
MEM3.7A A Setting multistage continuous process lines no change 6
4. Casting and moulding

MEM4.1A A Operate melting furnaces no change 4

MEM4.2A A Gravity die casting no change 2
MEM4.3A A Operate pressure die casting machine no change 4
MEM4.4A A Prepare and mix sand for metal moulding no change 4
MEM4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand no change 16
(jobbing)
MEM4.6A A Operate sand moulding and core making no change 8
machines
MEM4.7A A Pour molten metal no change 4
MEM4.8A A Fettle and trim metal castings/forgings no change 4
MEM4.9A B Inspect/test castings/forgings pre-requisite 6
correction
MEM4.10A A Develop and manufacture wood patterns no change 20
MEM4.11A A Produce polymer patterns no change 8
MEM4.12A A Assemble plated patterns no change 8
MEM4.13A A Develop and manufacture polystyrene no change 2
patterns
MEM4.14A A Develop and manufacture production no change 8
patterns
MEM4.15A A Develop and manufacture vacuum forming no change 6
moulds and associated equipment
MEM4.16A B Develop and manufacture precision models pre-requisite 6
correction
MEM4.17A A Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor no change 4
screw and propeller patterns
MEM4.18A A General woodworking machine operations no change 4
MEM4.19A A Refractory installation and repair no change 4
5. Fabrication
MEM5.1A A Manual soldering/desoldering – no change 4
electrical/electronic components
MEM5.2A A High reliability soldering and desoldering no change 4
MEM5.3A A Soft soldering (basic) no change 2
MEM5.4A B Perform routine oxy acetylene welding no change 2
MEM5.5A A Carry out mechanical cutting no change 2
MEM5.6A A Perform brazing and/or silver soldering no change 2
MEM5.7A B Manual heating and thermal cutting no change 2
MEM5.8A B Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging no change 2
and shaping
MEM5.9A B Automated thermal cutting no change 2

16 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.0
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM5.10A A Undertake fabrication, forming, bending no change 8
and shaping
MEM5.11A B Assemble fabricated components no change 8
MEM5.12A B Perform routine manual metal arc welding no change 2
MEM5.13A B Perform manual production welding no change 2
MEM5.14A B Monitor quality of production no change 2
welding/fabrications
MEM5.15A B Weld using manual metal arc welding no change 4
process
MEM5.16A B Perform advanced welding using manual no change 4
metal arc welding process
MEM5.17A B Weld using gas metal arc welding process no change 4
MEM5.18A B Perform advanced welding use gas metal no change 4
arc welding process
MEM5.19A B Weld using gas tungsten arc welding no change 4
process
MEM5.20A B Perform advanced welding using gas no change 4
tungsten arc welding process
MEM5.22A B Perform advanced welding using oxy no change 6
acetylene welding process
MEM5.23A B Weld using submerged arc welding process no change 4
MEM5.24B A Perform welding supervision no change 12
MEM5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection no change 12
MEM5.26A A Apply welding principles no change 4
MEM5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications no change 4
MEM5.37A A Geometric development no change 6
MEM5.38A A Advanced geometric development – minor title change 2
Cylindrical/Rectangular
MEM5.39A A Advanced geometric development – minor title change 2
Conical
MEM5.40A A Advanced geometric development – minor title change 4
Transitions
MEM5.41A A Weld using powder flame spraying no change 4
MEM5.42A A Perform welds to code standards using flux no change 6
core arc welding process
MEM5.43A A Perform welds to code standards using gas no change 6
metal arc welding process
MEM5.44A A Perform welds to code standards using gas no change 6
tungsten arc welding process
MEM5.45A A Perform pipe welds to code standards no change 6
using manual metal arc welding process
MEM5.46A A Perform welds to code standards using no change 6
manual metal arc welding process
MEM5.47A A Weld using flux core arc welding process no change 4
MEM5.48A A Perform advanced welding using flux core no change 4
arc welding process
MEM5.49A B Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding elements, assessor 2
guide

© Australian National Training Authority 17

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM5.50A A Perform routine gas metal arc welding no change 2
6. Forging
MEM6.1A A Hand forging no change 4
MEM6.2A A Hammer forging no change 4
MEM6.3A B Carry out heat treatment no change 6
MEM6.4A A Select heat treatment processes and test no change 6
finished product
MEM6.5A A Drop and upset forging no change 4
MEM6.6A B Spring repair pre-requisite 4
correction
MEM6.7A A Perform basic incidental heat/ quenching, no change 2
tempering and annealing
7. Machine and process operations
MEM7.1A A Operational maintenance of no change 2
machines/equipment
MEM7.2A A Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting no change 4
operations
MEM7.3A A Setting machines (routine) no change 4
MEM7.4A A Setting machines (complex) no change 8
MEM7.5A A Perform general machining no change 8
MEM7.6A A Perform lathe operations no change 4
MEM7.7A A Perform milling operations no change 4
MEM7.8A B Perform grinding operations no change 4
MEM7.9A A Perform precision jig boring operations no change 4
MEM7.10A A Perform tool and cutter grinding operations no change 4
MEM7.11A A Complex milling operations no change 4
MEM7.12A A Complex grinding operations no change 4
MEM7.13A A Perform machining operations using no change 4
horizontal and/or vertical boring machine
MEM7.14A A Perform electro-discharge machining no change 4
operations
MEM7.15A A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) minor title 2
correction
MEM7.16A B **Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process path 4 deleted 4
MEM7.18A B **Basic NC/CNC programming path 4 deleted 4
MEM7.19A B **Program NC/CNC machining centre path 4 deleted 2
MEM7.20A B **Program multiple spindle and/or multiple path 4 deleted 2
axis NC/CNC machining centre
MEM7.21A A Perform complex lathe operations no change 4
MEM7.22A B **Advanced programming of CNC wire cut path 4 deleted 2
machines
MEM7.23B B Program and set up CNC manufacturing path 4 deleted 6
cell
MEM7.24A A Operate and monitor machine/process no change 4
MEM7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation no change 6
MEM7.26A A Advanced plastic processing no change 6

18 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.0
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM7.27A A Advanced press operations no change 6
MEM7.28A A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) no change 2
MEM7.29A A Perform routine sharpening/maintenance of no change 4
production tools and cutters
MEM7.30A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations pre-requisite 6
(basic) removed
MEM7.31A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations pre-requisite 4
(complex) removed
MEM7.32A A Use workshop machines for basic no change 2
operations
MEM7.33A A Operate and monitor basic boiler no change 6
8. Surface Finishing
MEM8.1A A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work no change 4
MEM8.2A B Pre-treat work for subsequent surface range statement 4
coating
MEM8.3A B Finish work using acidic/alkaline all components of 6
electroplating solutions unit, points
MEM8.4A A Finish work using wet, dry and vapour no change 4
deposition methods
MEM8.5A A Prepare and produce specialised coatings title correction 4
electrolytically
MEM8.6A A Produce clear and/or coloured and/or no change 2
sealed anodised films on aluminium
MEM8.7A A Control surface finish production and no change 4
finished product quality
MEM8.8A A Operate and control surface finishing waste no change 3
treatment process
MEM8.9A B Maintain basic solutions title, element, range 2
statement
MEM8.10A A Manually finish/polish materials no change 6
MEM8.11A A Undertake surface preparation using no change 2
solvents and/or mechanical means
MEM8.12A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting no change 4
(basic)
MEM8.13A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting no change 4
(advanced)
MEM8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) no change 4
MEM8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) no change 4
MEM8.16A A Control blast coating by-products, materials no change 1
and emissions
MEM8.18A A Electroplate engineering coatings new unit 6
MEM8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes new unit 6
MEM8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes new unit 6
9 Drawing, drafting and design
MEM9.1A A Draw and interpret sketch no change 2
MEM9.2A A Interpret technical drawing no change 4
MEM9.3A A Prepare basic engineering drawing no change 8

© Australian National Training Authority 19

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM9.4B A Electrical/electronic detail drafting no change 8
MEM9.5A A Basic engineering detail drafting no change 8
MEM9.6B A Advanced engineering detail drafting no change 4
MEM9.7B A Advanced mechanical detail drafting no change 4
MEM9.8B A Advanced structural detail drafting no change 4
MEM9.9B B Create 2D drawings using computer aided no change 8
design system
MEM9.10B B Create 3D models using computer aided no change 4
design system
MEM9.11A A Apply basic engineering design concepts no change 6
MEM9.21A A Interpret and produce curved 3-dimensional new unit 4
shapes
10. Installation and commissioning
MEM10.1A B Erect structures no change 4
MEM10.2A A Terminate and connect electrical wiring no change 3
MEM10.3A A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits minor title change 8
(up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)
MEM10.4A A Enter and change programmable controller no change 2
operational parameters
MEM10.5A A Commission programmable controller no change 4
programs
MEM10.6A A Install machine/plant no change 4
MEM10.7B B Modification of control systems pre-requisites and 6
pathways corrected
MEM10.8B A Undertake commissioning procedures for no change 4
plant and/or equipment
MEM10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning no change 4
plant and equipment
MEM10.10A A Install pipework and pipework assemblies no change 4
MEM10.11A A Terminate and connect specialist cables no change 2
MEM10.13A A Assemble and install equipment and new unit 2
accessories/ancillaries
11. Materials handling
MEM11.1A B Erect/dismantle scaffolding and equipment no change 4
MEM11.2A B Erect/dismantle complex scaffolding and no change 4
equipment
MEM11.3A A Coordinate erection/dismantling of complex no change 4
scaffolding/equipment
MEM11.4A A Undertake dogging/crane chasing no change 4
MEM11.5A A Pick and process order no change 4
MEM11.6A A Production packaging no change 2
MEM11.7A A Administer inventory procedures no change 4
MEM11.8A A Package materials (stores and warehouse) no change 2
MEM11.9A A Handle/move bulk fluids/gases no change 4
MEM11.10A A Operate mobile load shifting equipment no change 4
MEM11.11A A Manual handling no change 2

20 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.0
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM11.12A A Purchase materials no change 6
MEM11.13A A Undertake warehouse receival process no change 4
MEM11.14A A Undertake warehouse despatch process minor title change 4
MEM11.15A A Manage warehouse inventory system no change 6
MEM11.16A A Order materials no change 2
MEM11.17A A Organise and lead stocktakes no change 4
MEM11.18A A Organise and maintain warehouse stock no change 6
receival and/or dispatch system
MEM11.19A A Undertake tool store procedures no change 4
MEM11.20A A Perform advanced warehouse computer no change 4
operations
MEM11.21A A Advanced operation of load shifting no change 2
equipment
MEM11.22A A Operate fixed/moveable load shifting no change 4
equipment
12. Measurement
MEM12.1A A Use comparison and basic measuring no change 2
devices
MEM12.2A A Electrical/electronic measurement no change 2
MEM12.3A A **Precision mechanical measurement no change 2
MEM12.4A A **Precision electrical/electronic no change 4
measurement
MEM12.5B A Calibrating measuring equipment no change 6
MEM12.6A A Mark off/out (general engineering) no change 4
MEM12.7A B Mark off/out structural fabrications and element, range 4
shapes statement
MEM12.19A A Measure components using coordinate no change 4
measuring machine
MEM12.20A A Set and operate coordinate measuring no change 2
machine
MEM12.21A A Program coordinate measuring machine no change 4
MEM12.22A A Program coordinate measuring machine no change 2
(advanced)
13. Occupational Health and Safety
MEM13.1A A Perform emergency first aid no change 1
MEM13.2A A Undertake Occupational Health & Safety minor title change 3
activities in the workplace
MEM13.3A A Work safely with industrial chemicals and no change 2
materials
MEM13.4A A Work safely with molten metals/glass no change 2
MEM13.5B A Manage Occupational Health & Safety for a minor title change 12
workplace or section of a workplace
MEM13.6A A Monitor Occupational Health & Safety minor title change 4
factors for an enterprise or section of an
enterprise
MEM13.7A A Maintain water cooling towers and no change 2
treatment systems

© Australian National Training Authority 21

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM13.13A A Work safely with ionizing radiation no change 4
14. Planning
MEM14.1B A Schedule material deliveries no change 8
MEM14.2B A Basic process planning no change 8
MEM14.3B A Undertake basic production scheduling no change 8
15. Quality
MEM15.1A A Perform basic statistical quality control no change 2
MEM15.3A A Use improvement processes in team no change 4
activities
MEM15.4A A Perform inspection (basic) no change 2
MEM15.5A A Perform inspection (advanced) no change 4
MEM15.7B A Conduct product and/or process capability no change 6
studies
MEM15.8B A Perform advanced statistical quality control no change 2
MEM15.10B A Perform laboratory procedures no change 8
MEM15.11B A Exercise external quality assurance no change 6
MEM15.12B A Maintain/supervise application of quality no change 4
procedures
MEM15.15A A *Examine trading practices no change 5
MEM15.16A A *Inspect pre-packed articles no change 8
MEM15.17B A Use and maintain reference standards no change 3
MEM15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints no change 6
MEM15.19B A Conduct a field inspection no change 12
MEM15.20B B Perform verification/certification or in- pre-requisite 12
service inspection corrected
MEM15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and pre-requisite 4
public weighbridge licensees corrected
MEM15.22A A *Verify reference standards no change 8
16. Communication
MEM16.1B A Give formal presentations and take part in no change 2
meetings
MEM16.2A B Participate in formal interviews and no change 4
negotiations
MEM16.3B A Advanced customer service no change 2
MEM16.4A A Perform internal/external customer service no change 2
17. Training
MEM17.1A A *Assist in development and deliver training no change 2
in the workplace
MEM17.2A A *Conduct workplace assessment no change 2
18. Maintenance and diagnostics
MEM18.1A B Use hand tools no change 2
MEM18.2A A Use power tools/hand held operations no change 2
MEM18.3A B Use tools for precision work no change 4

22 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.0
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical no change 4
equipment
MEM18.5A A Bearings – fault diagnosis installation and no change 4
removal
MEM18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit no change 6
engineering components
MEM18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and no change 4
mechanical transmission assemblies
MEM18.8A A Balance equipment no change 2
MEM18.9A A Levelling and alignment of machines and no change 4
engineering components
MEM18.10A B *Equipment condition monitoring and pre-requisites 4
recording removed
MEM18.11A B **Shut down and isolate no change 2
machines/equipment
MEM18.12A A Mechanical seals – installation and removal no change 2
MEM18.13A A Gland packing no change 2
MEM18.14A A Tool, gauge and die manufacture no change 8
MEM18.15A A Tool and die maintenance no change 4
MEM 18.16B A Analyse plant and equipment condition no change 4
monitoring results
MEM18.17B B Modify mechanical system and equipment minor title change, 8
pre-requisite
removed
MEM18.18A B Maintain pneumatic system components no change 4
MEM18.19A A *Maintain and repair pneumatic systems no change 4
MEM18.20A B Maintain hydraulic system components no change 4
MEM18.21A A *Maintain and repair hydraulic systems no change 4
MEM18.22A A *Maintain/repair/replace fluid power no change 8
controls
MEM18.23B A Modify fluid power system operation no change 8
MEM18.24A A Maintain and repair engine cooling systems no change 2
MEM18.25A A Service combustion engines no change 2
MEM18.26A B Test compression ignition fuel systems no change 4
MEM18.27A B Overhaul engine fuel system components no change 8
MEM18.28A B Maintain and repair engine lubrication no change 2
systems
MEM18.29A A Tune diesel engine no change 4
MEM18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical no change 8
systems
MEM18.31A A Diagnose and repair low voltage starting no change 2
systems
MEM18.32A A Maintain and repair induction/exhaust no change 4
systems
MEM18.33A A Perform engine bottom-end overhaul no change 4
MEM18.34A A Perform engine top-end overhaul no change 8
MEM18.35A A Diagnose and repair braking systems no change 6
MEM18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis no change 10

© Australian National Training Authority 23

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

equipment
MEM18.37A A Diagnose and repair low voltage charging no change 2
systems
MEM18.38A A Maintain and repair wheels and tyres no change 2
MEM18.39A A Diagnose and repair track type no change 4
undercarriage
MEM18.40A A Maintain and repair suspension systems no change 4
MEM18.41A A Maintain and repair steering systems no change 4
MEM18.42A B Diagnose and repair manual transmissions no change 4
MEM18.43A B Diagnose and repair automatic no change 8
transmissions
MEM18.44A B Diagnose and repair drive line and final no change 4
drives
MEM18.45A A Fault find/repair electrical minor title change 4
equipment/components which use up to
240v single phase supply
MEM18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical minor title change 6
equipment/components which use up to
1000vAC/1500vDC
MEM18.47A A Diagnose and maintain electronic no change 4
controlling systems on mobile plant
MEM18.48A A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical no change 10
circuits
MEM18.49A A **Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired minor title change 3
equipment which use up to
1000vAC/1500vDC
MEM18.50A A **Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired no change 3
equipment over 1000vAC/1500vDC
MEM18.51A A *Fault find and repair/rectify complex no change 6
electrical circuits
MEM18.52A A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for no change 4
mobile plant
MEM18.53B A Modify fluid power control systems no change 6
MEM18.54A A **Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation no change 8
systems, equipment
MEM18.55A A Dismantle, replace and assemble no change 3
engineering components
MEM18.56A A **Diagnose and repair analog equipment no change 10
and components
MEM18.57A A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic no change 6
equipment
MEM18.58A B *Modify electronic equipment range statement 4
MEM18.59B A Modify electronic systems no change 4
MEM18.60A A *Maintain, repair control instrumentation - minor title change 8
single and multiple loop control systems
MEM18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems no change 8
MEM18.62A A **Install, maintain and calibrate no change 8
instrumentation sensors, transmitters and
final control elements
MEM18.63A A Terminate signal and data cables no change 4

24 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.0
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM18.64A A Maintain instrumentation system no change 6
components
MEM18.65A A **Diagnose and repair digital equipment no change 10
and components
MEM18.66A A *Diagnose and repair microprocessor no change 6
based equipment
MEM18.67A A *Tune control loops - multi controller or no change 6
multi element systems
MEM18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process no change 6
control analysers
MEM18.70B B Modify complex electrical circuits and pre-requisite 6
systems correction
MEM18.71A A Connect/disconnect fluid conveying system no change 2
components
MEM18.72A A Manufacture fluid conveying conductor no change 4
assemblies
MEM18.86A A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration no change 4
systems
MEM18.87A A Service and repair domestic and light no change 6
commercial refrigeration and air
conditioning equipment
MEM18.88A A Maintain and repair commercial air no change 4
conditioning systems and components
MEM18.89A A Maintain and repair large central air no change 6
handling systems
MEM18.90A A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration no change 6
systems and components
MEM18.91A A *Maintain and repair multi stage, cascade, no change 4
and/or ultra-cold industrial refrigeration
systems
MEM18.92A A **Maintain and repair commercial and/or no change 6
industrial refrigeration and/or air
conditioning controls
MEM18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial no change 8
refrigeration and/or large air handling
system controls
MEM18.94A A Service and repair of commercial no change 6
refrigeration
19. Jewellery and horological
MEM19.1A A Jewellery metal casting no change 6
MEM19.2A A Prepare jewellery illustrations no change 4
MEM19.3A A Handle gem materials (basic) no change 2
MEM19.4A A Handle and examine gemstone materials no change 6
MEM19.5A A Produce three-dimensional precision items no change 8
MEM19.6A A Watch battery replacement no change 1
MEM19.7A A Perform gemstone setting no change 6
MEM19.8A A *Prepare jewellery designs no change 6
MEM19.9A A Perform investment procedures for “lost minor title change 1
wax” casting process

© Australian National Training Authority 25

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
 National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

MEM19.10A A Produce rubber moulds for “lost wax” minor title change 2
casting process
MEM19.11A A Perform wax injection of moulds for “lost minor title change 2
wax” casting process
MEM19.12A A Produce jewellery wax model no change 4
MEM19.13A A *Produce jewellery metal masters no change 4
MEM19.14A A Perform hand engraving no change 4

MEM19.15A A Perform jewellery enamelling no change 4

MEM19.16A A Construct jewellery components new unit 4
MEM19.17A A Fabricate jewellery items new unit 6
MEM19.18A A *Repair jewellery items new unit 6
MEM19.20A A Fault-find and maintain micro-mechanisms new unit 4
MEM19.21A A Diagnose and service micro-mechanisms new unit 6
MEM19.22A A *Perform precision micro-mechanism new unit 6
diagnosis and servicing
24. Non-destructive testing
MEM24.1A A Perform basic penetrant testing no change 2
MEM24.2A A *Perform penetrant testing no change 4
MEM24.3A A Perform basic magnetic particle testing no change 2
MEM24.4A A *Perform magnetic particle testing no change 4
MEM24.5A A Perform basic eddy current testing no change 2
MEM24.6A A *Perform eddy current testing no change 6
MEM24.7A A Perform ultrasonic thickness testing no change 2
MEM24.8A A *Perform ultrasonic testing no change 6
MEM24.9A A Perform basic radiographic testing no change 2
MEM24.10A A *Perform radiographic testing no change 6
MEM24.11B A Establish non-destructive tests no change 12
MEM24.12A A *Apply metallurgy principles no change 4
25. Marine craft construction
MEM25.1A A Apply fibre-reinforced materials new unit 2
MEM25.2A A Form and integrate fibre-reinforced new unit 4
structures
MEM25.3A A Set up marine vessel structures new unit 4
MEM25.4A A Fair and shape surfaces new unit 2
MEM25.5A A Construct and assemble marine vessel new unit 8
timber components
MEM25.6A A Undertake marine sheathing operations new unit 2
MEM25.7A A Maintain marine vessel surfaces new unit 4
MEM25.8A A Repair marine vessel surfaces and new unit 4
structures
MEM25.9A A Form timber shapes using hot processes new unit 2
MEM25.10A A Perform fitout procedures new unit 4
MEM25.11A A Install marine systems new unit 8
MEM25.12A A Install and test operations of marine new unit 6

26 © Australian National Training Authority

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.0
National Metal and Engineering Industry Competency Standards

Unit code V Unit title Change information P

auxiliary systems
MEM25.13A A *Produce three dimensional plugs/moulds new unit 12
MEM25.14A A Perform marine slipping operations new unit 2
50. Boating services
MEM50.1E A Classify recreational boating technologies new unit n/a
and features
MEM50.2A A Work safely on marine craft new unit 1
MEM50.3A A Follow work procedures to maintain the new unit 1
marine environment
MEM50.4A A Maintain quality of environment by following new unit 1
marina codes
MEM50.5E A Refuel vessels new unit n/a
MEM50.6E A Check operational capability of marine craft new unit n/a
MEM50.7E A Check operational capability of sails and new unit n/a
sail operating equipment
MEM50.8E A Carry out trip preparation and planning new unit n/a
MEM50.9A A Safely operate a mechanically powered new unit 2
recreational boat
MEM50.10E A Respond to boating emergencies and new unit n/a
incidents

© Australian National Training Authority 27

MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 30 December 2003 version 4.00
MEM 1.1F A Undertake interactive workplace communication Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 1.1F A Undertake interactive workplace communication

Band – Foundation Field – Foundation Unit Weight 0

Element 1.1F.1 Communicate information about tasks, processes, events or skills

Criteria 1.1F.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
An appropriate choice of communication techniques, eg: Appropriate communication techniques are chosen as The person can explain: - the advantages and
telephone, face to face, written report, sketches etc. are required by: - the information to be conveyed - the receiver disadvantages of different ways of communicating - why
used. of the communication - the context in which the a particular communication technique was chosen for a
communication takes place. particular situation.

Criteria 1.1F.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Multiple operations involving several topics/areas are Communication covering a variety of topics and content
communicated. areas takes place so that the information is clearly
understood by the receiver(s) of the message.

Criteria 1.1F.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Listening is undertaken without continuous interruptions The person follows good listening techniques and listens The person is able to describe good listening techniques
of the speaker. in a variety of situations without interrupting the speaker. and explain the importance of not interrupting the
Situations covered might be listening to instructions, speaker.
technical information, briefings, descriptions of faults and
problems, and others.

Criteria 1.1F.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Questions are used to gain extra information. Questions are asked to clarify the message. The questions The person is able to give examples of a number of
state clearly what their purpose is and identify information different types of questions appropriate in particular
required. If necessary, follow up questions are used to situations.
gain further information or clarify the replies.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1 of 1445
MEM 1.1F A Undertake interactive workplace communication Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 1.1F.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct sources of information are identified. Information is gained from appropriate sources for the The person is able to give examples of a range of sources
outcome required. Examples might be technical manuals, of information and explain which would be used in
job cards, orders, production schedules, clients, technical particular situations and why.
experts, and others.

Criteria 1.1F.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information is selected and sequenced appropriately. The information is selected to meet the purpose for which The person can give reasons for selecting particular
it is required in terms of level of detail, credibility accuracy information and explain why they have organised the
and so on. Information gained is logically organised so information in the way that they have.
that it can be used to fulfil the purpose for which it was
required.

Criteria 1.1F.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Verbal and written reporting undertaken where required. Oral or written reports are given as required. For example, The person should be able to explain why they are
describe the outcomes of a service call, explain or write an reporting back, what the purpose of the report is
incident/accident report and others. Characteristics of a good report, oral or written, can be
given.

Criteria 1.1F.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Communication is demonstrated in both familiar and The person has communicated successfully in situations The person can describe strategies to follow when
unfamiliar situations and to familiar and unfamiliar where they are dealing with people that they are familiar speaking to individuals and groups and in situations
individuals and groups. with and those that are not familiar with. The situations where they are familiar with the people and where they
should include communication with individuals and are not.
groups.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 2 of 1445
MEM 1.1F A Undertake interactive workplace communication Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 1.1F.2 Take part in group discussion to achieve appropriate work outcomes
Criteria 1.1F.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Responses sought and provided to others in the group. The person gives clear, accurate and appropriate Appropriate principles to guide communication in groups
responses to others in a group. Information is sought from can be given, such as everyone should have an
others using questioning techniques appropriate for the opportunity to speak, people should be listened to and
person from whom the information is requested and giving not interrupted and so on a number of questioning
feedback to the person supplying the information. techniques can be identified.

Criteria 1.1F.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Constructive contributions are made in terms of the Contributions to the group discussions are constructive, The characteristics of constructive input to a discussion
production process involved. for example, other members of the group are listened to, can be described.
opinions and comments are given in positive terms.

Criteria 1.1F.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goals and aims are communicated. Goals and aims are identified. Appropriate methods of Appropriate ways of communicating goals and aims can
communicating goals and aims are selected. They are be listed. Reasons for use of a particular method can be
communicated to others so that they are understood, and given.
the receiver of the communication is able to restate them
accurately.

Element 1.1F.3 Represent views of group to others

Criteria 1.1F.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Views, opinions of others are understood and reflected The person is able to restate accurately the views of The reasons why it is necessary to restate the view of
accurately. others as they are expressed in a group discussion. Good others accurately can be given.
listening techniques are used when others are expressing
their opinions.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 3 of 1445
MEM 1.1F A Undertake interactive workplace communication Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers competencies needed for situations where employees must collectively undertake a task eg: three or four assemblers co-operating to assemble a product, a trades
person who has to attend a service call, or a group of process workers who undertake a similar task in close proximity to each other. This unit assumes that the group has not been
formally designated as a permanent cohesive work unit by management The performance criteria assume that any of the following techniques could be used as the subject of
communication in this unit, for example: sketches, drawings, production schedules; written machine or job instructions; client instructions. It is assumed that the application of this
unit in most workplaces would require a basic level of ability in speaking, reading and writing English as well as basic numeracy. Basic numeracy means the ability to perform simple
arithmetic using whole numbers applying the four basic rules of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. The unit however does not refer to competence in English but in
communication. English language ability should be professionally assessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The communication activities undertaken required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
should be consistent with the individual's field of work and be based workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
on interaction with others related to workplace tasks and procedures, relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
tools, equipment, materials and documentation relevant to that field of Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
work. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated Perform the tasks described by this guide, within a time frame established between the
by an individual working alone or as part of a team. Assessment candidate's supervisor/instructor and the assessor, prior to undertaking this assessment. -
should be conducted in an environment that the individual is familiar Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
with. appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit should be assessed in conjunction with other specialisation During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
or core units and not in isolation. The assessment should be linked communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
with performance of normal workplace activities where the and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
competency covered by this unit is demonstrated concurrently with plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
other core or specialisation competencies. The communication tasks accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
may be related to any aspect of the job, interacting with team accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
members, receiving instructions, reporting and any other activity
which requires communication with individuals or groups.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 4 of 1445
MEM 1.2F A Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 1.2F A Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work environment
Band – Foundation Field – Foundation Unit Weight 0
This unit covers the competencies needed to follow safe working practices in the workplace. Competencies include interpreting safety signs and symbols,
identifying and reporting actual and potential hazards and following emergency procedures.

Element 1.2F.1 Follow safe work practices

Criteria 1.2F.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work is carried out safely and in accordance with Safe working practices are followed in carrying out all Safety working practices relating to all the tasks being
company policy and company procedures and workplace activities undertaken in the workplace can be described Company
legislative requirements policy and legislative requirements relating to all
workplace activities can be identified and the relevance to
the individual's work described
Criteria 1.2F.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Housekeeping is undertaken in accordance with The workplace is maintained in a safe and clean condition, The reasons for good housekeeping in the workplace can
company procedures following company procedures be given The company requirements can be described

Criteria 1.2F.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Responsibilities and duties of employees are Workplace activities are carried out in accordance with the Responsibilities and obligations of employees can be
understood and demonstrated in day to day actions responsibilities and duties of employees, such as working given
safely, not endangering others, following company and
legislative requirements, following procedures for handling
dangerous substances and so on
Criteria 1.2F.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Personal protective equipment is worn and stored Appropriate personal protective equipment for the task is Reasons for use of personal protective equipment can be
according to company procedures selected Personal protective equipment according to given
company procedures is worn and stored appropriately after
use
Criteria 1.2F.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All equipment and safety devices are used according When carrying out workplace activities, all appropriate Appropriate equipment and safety devices for particular
to legislative requirements and safety equipment and devices are used in accordance with workplace tasks and activities can be selected The
company/manufacturer's procedures legislative and company/manufacturer's requirements reasons for using safety equipment and devices can be

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 5 of 1445
MEM 1.2F A Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 1.2F.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety signs/symbols are identified and followed as per Work is carried out in accordance with the information The signs and symbols can be correctly interpreted The
instruction given by safety signs and symbols application of the signs and symbols to their own work
activities can be described
Criteria 1.2F.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All manual handling is carried out in accordance with Manual handling is carried out in accordance with the Correct procedures for manual handling can be explained
legal requirements, company procedures and National principles laid down in legislation, company procedures The situations in which these procedures apply to their
Occupational Health & Safety Commission guidelines and National Health and Safety Commission guidelines own workplace activities can be identified

Criteria 1.2F.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency equipment identified and appropriate use Correct use of emergency equipment can be demonstrated Location of emergency equipment can be given The type
demonstrated of emergency equipment to be used in specific situations
can be identified The reasons for selecting a particular
type of equipment can be given
Element 1.2F.2 Report workplace hazards
Criteria 1.2F.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Workplace hazards identified during course of work Workplace hazards encountered in the course of daily Hazards which may be encountered in the workplace can
and reported to appropriate person according to activities are noted, and reported to personnel according to be listed Procedures for reporting hazards can be given
standard operating procedures standard operating procedures
Element 1.2F.3 Follow emergency procedures
Criteria 1.2F.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Means of contacting the appropriate personnel and Procedures for contacting appropriate personnel and Persons or services to be contacted in the event of a range
emergency services in the event of an accident emergency services in the event of an accident are of accidents can be listed (burns, poisons, broken limbs,
demonstrated demonstrated eye accidents, spills, explosions, falls, electrical accidents
and so on) Means of communication with emergency
personnel can be listed Procedures and reasons for
adopting standard procedures can be given
Criteria 1.2F.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency and evacuation procedure understood and Emergency and evacuation procedures are demonstrated Reasons for following emergency procedures can be
carried out when required Emergency and evacuation procedures followed if required explained Emergency and evacuation procedures
(including isolation of equipment, for example - electrical,
mechanical, hydraulic, steam, water gas and so on) can be
described
Criteria 1.2F.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Company evacuation procedures followed in case of If an emergency occurs, emergency procedures are Reasons for the company to establish standard
an emergency followed evacuation procedures can be given Company evacuation
procedures can be described

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 6 of 1445
MEM 1.2F A Apply principles of occupational health and safety in work environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) unit applies to safe working practices as applied to all metal and engineering workplaces. Competencies would be demonstrated
associated with performance of duties and use of specialist skills. Emergency procedures may include the isolation of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and
emergency steam and water equipment as appropriate. This unit and these standards do not cover the skills of emergency teams such as fire fighting, first aid officer etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. Aspects of this unit will need to be assessed in a work situation. required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
The context in which the OH & S principles are applied should be consistent workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
with the individual's field of work and relate to procedures, tools equipment, relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required
materials and documentation relevant to that field of work. The competencies to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or Perform the tasks described by this guide, within a time frame established between the
as part of a team. Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the candidate's supervisor/instructor and the assessor, prior to undertaking this assessment. -
individual is familiar with. Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence
where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. -
Satisfy the assessor that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all
required tasks and has a genuine knowledge of all the required criteria in this unit.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit should be assessed in conjunction with other specialisation or core During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
units and not in isolation. The assessment should be linked with performance communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a
of normal workplace activities where the competency covered by this unit is safe and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own
demonstrated concurrently with other core or specialisation competencies work: - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform
required by the individual's field of work. all tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to
specification - use accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 7 of 1445
MEM 1.3F A Apply quality procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 1.3F A Apply quality procedures

Band – Foundation Field – Foundation Unit Weight 0

Element 1.3F.1 Take responsibility for own quality

Criteria 1.3F.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Concept of supplying product or service to meet the Workplace activities undertaken to within an appropriate The concept of internal and external customers can be
customer requirements (internal and external) understood time frame and so that they meet the quality specification explained. Internal customers can be identified and their
and applied. of the internal and external customers. requirements described. The effects of not meeting their
needs can be explained. External customers can be
identified and their requirements described. The effect of
not meeting their needs can be explained.

Criteria 1.3F.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Interprets taking responsibility for own quality as a All workplace activities undertaken by the individual are Quality requirements for the person's own job can be
practical concept eg: "right first time". performed to the standards of quality required by the explained. The reasons for ensuring that their own work
enterprise. If workplace activities do not meet the quality meets the quality requirements can be given. The effects
requirements (right first time, produced within the on the company if workers do not take responsibility for
timeframe and so on), appropriate steps are taken to their own quality can be explained.
remedy this situation.

Element 1.3F.2 Apply standard procedures of workplace quality to own job

Criteria 1.3F.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quality system procedures followed. Quality procedures are followed in all tasks undertaken. Company quality system procedures can be described.
Quality system procedures applying to their own job can
be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 8 of 1445
MEM 1.3F A Apply quality procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 1.3F.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conformance to specifications ensured. All workplace activities are undertaken so that products Specifications for products and processes can be
and processes conform to specifications. All work is identified. Methods of checking that specifications are
checked to see that it does meet specifications. If products met, can be given. Reasons why it is important to meet
or processes do not meet specifications, appropriate specifications can be given. Appropriate actions to take
action is taken. in cases where specifications are not met can be listed
(for example, action to remedy routine problems,
reporting to appropriate person, and others).

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 9 of 1445
MEM 1.3F A Apply quality procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This competency is applied to an individual's own work position.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or using a The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
combination of on and off the job assessment Aspects of this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
need to be assessed in a work situation. The application of quality workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
procedures should be to the individual's own work and relate to relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to :
procedures, production, equipment, materials and documentation - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
relevant to that field of work. The competencies covered by this unit Perform the tasks described by this guide, within a time frame established between the
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a candidate's supervisor/instructor and the assessor, prior to undertaking this assessment. -
team. Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
individual is familiar with. appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. - Satisfy
the assessor that the candidate can. competently and consistently perform all required tasks
and has a genuine knowledge of all required criteria in this unit.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit should be assessed in conjunction with other specialisation During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
or core units and not in isolation. The assessment should be linked communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
with performance of normal workplace activities where the and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
competency covered by this unit is demonstrated concurrently with plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
other core or specialisation competencies. This unit could be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all talks to specification; - use
assessed in with any core or specialisation unit in which quality accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
procedures are applied to the individual's workplace tasks.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 10 of 1445
MEM 1.4F A Plan to undertake a routine task Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 1.4F A Plan to undertake a routine task

Band – Foundation Field – Foundation Unit Weight 0

Element 1.4F.1 Identify task requirements

Criteria 1.4F.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions as to procedures are obtained, understood Instructions for tasks are obtained from correct source of Correct sources of information for a particular task are
and where necessary clarified. information (job card, supervisor, manager/team leader, selected. Procedures for obtaining instructions and
computer, filing system and others). Clarification sought clarification procedures can be described.
from appropriate personnel where necessary.

Criteria 1.4F.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant specifications for task outcomes are obtained, Relevant specifications are identified from documentation, Specifications for the job can be given based on the
understood and where necessary clarified. job cards, manager, or other information source. information obtained. The reasons why it is necessary to
Specifications are clarified where necessary. have correct specifications can be given.

Criteria 1.4F.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Task outcomes are identified. Task outcomes are identified from documentation, job Task outcomes can be accurately described from
cards, manager, or other information source. Task documentation or information obtained. Reasons why it
outcomes are clarified where necessary. is important to clarify task outcomes can be given.

Criteria 1.4F.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Task requirements such as completion time and quality Task requirements accessed from documentation, job The requirements, such as completion time, quantity,
measures are identified. cards, manager, or other information source. Requirements quality procedures and others, can be described based
are clarified where necessary. on the information obtained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 11 of 1445
MEM 1.4F A Plan to undertake a routine task Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 1.4F.2 Plan steps required to complete task

Criteria 1.4F.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Based on instructions and specifications provided, the Plans for tasks are prepared. Where necessary, Reasons for preparing a plan can be given. Steps or
individual steps or activities required to undertake the requirements clarified from appropriate sources. activities in the plan can be described.
task are understood and where necessary clarified.

Criteria 1.4F.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequence of activities required to be completed is Activities in the plan put in a logical sequence. Reasons for arranging the activities in that order can be
identified in plan. given.

Criteria 1.4F.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Planned steps and outcome are checked to ensure Planned steps and outcomes are checked against the Reasons why it is important to check the plan against the
conformity with instructions and relevant specifications. instructions and specifications. instructions and specifications can be given.

Element 1.4F.3 Review plan

Criteria 1.4F.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Outcomes are identified and compared with (planned) Identified outcomes are compared with planned activities Reasons for this final check of outcomes against
objectives, task instructions, specifications and task to ensure that activities are carried out in line with requirements and specifications can be given.
requirements. instructions, and that task requirements and specifications
are complied with.

Criteria 1.4F.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
If necessary, plan is revised to better meet objectives and Plan is revised if necessary. Reasons for changes to the plan can be given, and the
task requirements. person can explain why the changed plan better meets
the objectives and task requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 12 of 1445
MEM 1.4F A Plan to undertake a routine task Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Instructions, such as standard operation sheets, are provided. Clear specifications and requirements, including quality and time allowances are also provided. The task and
associated planning activity are carried out under supervision. The plan may or may not be documented. The task involves one or more steps or functions carried out routinely on a
regular basis. The planning activity does not require the exercise of judgement as to priorities or time limitations, it requires that precise information provided in the instructions be
accurately followed, steps in the process be completed in the appropriate sequence and that the time limits specified are met.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The planning should be consistent with the required The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual's field of work and relate to procedures, tools, equipment, workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
materials and documentation relevant to that field of work. The relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
competencies covered by this unit would by demonstrated by an Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
individual working alone or as part of a team. Assessment should be Perform the tasks described by this guide, within a time frame established between the
conducted in an environment that the individual is familiar with. candidate's supervisor/instructor and the assessor, prior to undertaking this assessment. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. - Satisfy
the assessor that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all required tasks
and has a genuine knowledge of all the required criteria in this unit.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit should be assessed in conjunction with other specialisation During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
or core units and not in isolation. The assessment should be linked communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
with performance of normal workplace activities where the and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
competency covered by this unit is demonstrated concurrently with plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
other core or specialisation competencies. The assessment of this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
competency may be associated with the assessment of core or accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
specialist units that require planning for undertaking a routine task in
the individual's field of work.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 13 of 1445
MEM 2.1C12 A Apply quality systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.1C12 A Apply quality systems

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2

Element 2.1C12.1 Understand and follow standard operational or specification requirements

Criteria 2.1C12.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Follows instructions/performs duties within a quality Where appropriate, the job or work instructions are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The duties
improvement system. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. The of the individual within the quality improvement system
individual's work is carried out in accordance with can be identified. The reasons for following the
standard operating procedures. requirements of the quality improvement system can be
explained. The procedures to be followed in undertaking
the work can be identified.

Criteria 2.1C12.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensures conformance to specifications. Where appropriate, the specifications pertaining to the The specifications to which the individual's work is to
individual's work are obtained in accordance with work comply can be identified. The reasons for ensuring that
place procedures. The individual's work conforms to the individual's work conforms to specification can be
specifications. given.

Criteria 2.1C12.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects detected and reported according to standard Where appropriate, defects detected are reported in The procedures for reporting defects can be identified.
operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. Examples of common defects can be given.

Criteria 2.1C12.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performance of operation or quality of product or service The individual's customers can be identified. The
to ensure customer satisfaction monitored. customers' requirements with respect to the operation or
quality of the product or service can be identified. The
ways in which customer satisfaction is determined can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 14 of 1445
MEM 2.1C12 A Apply quality systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.1C12.2 Engages in quality improvement

Criteria 2.1C12.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process improvement procedures participated in. The individual's work is carried out in accordance with the The process improvement procedures can be identified.
process improvement procedures. The reasons for following process improvement
procedures can be given.

Criteria 2.1C12.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Participates in the improvement of internal/external, The individual's work is carried out in a manner consistent Examples of ways in which customer/supplier
customer/supplier relationships. with the improvement of customer/supplier relationships. relationships can be improved can be given. The benefits
of good customer/ supplier relationships can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 15 of 1445
MEM 2.1C12 A Apply quality systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Standards are applicable for any work within a quality improvement system either individually or in a team situation. The definition of customer is wide and applies to the next
person or organisation receiving the production or service. Operation or specification requirements include quality inspection of own or other employee's work up to the level of the
employees technical competence.

Range Name Description

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
associated with the individual's work or other units requiring the communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
satisfied. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 16 of 1445
MEM 2.2C11 A Organise and analyse information Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.2C11 A Organise and analyse information

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2

Element 2.2C11.1 Access information and/or records

Criteria 2.2C11.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information requirements of tasks are determined and The relevant information is accessed from a range of The information to be accessed can be identified. The
relevant information is accessed from a range of sources sources in accordance with standard operating source(s) from which the information is to be accessed
including computer terminals, tables, technical manuals procedures. can be given. The reasons for selecting the chosen
and/or charts, operational instructions. source(s) of information can be given. The procedures
for accessing the required information from the chosen
source(s) can be given.

Criteria 2.2C11.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accessed information is interpreted correctly and/or Where appropriate, the accessed information is recorded The accessed information is interpreted correctly. Where
recorded. in accordance with standard operating procedures. appropriate, the procedures for recording the accessed
information can be given.

Element 2.2C11.2 Give verbal and/or written reports

Criteria 2.2C11.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple verbal or written reports prepared and given in Simple reports are prepared and given in accordance with The topic(s) to be covered by the report can be
accordance with workplace procedures. workplace procedures. identified. Where appropriate, the relevant
forms/proformas to be used in the preparation of the
report can be identified. The procedures for
preparing/presenting simple reports in the work place can
be given. The reasons for preparing and presenting the
report can be given.

Criteria 2.2C11.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Give verbal and/or written feedback. The individual provides appropriate and timely feedback The reasons for providing feedback to those initiating
to those presenting reports or providing information. reports and/or providing information can be given. The
benefits of providing timely feedback to those initiating
reports and/or providing information can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 17 of 1445
MEM 2.2C11 A Organise and analyse information Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the accessing and recording of information from a variety of sources including data associated with the operation of just-in-time and KANBAN systems. This
unit also covers access and recording of electronically stored data where systems knowledge and judgement are not required eg. barcoding and simple keyboard operations. For
access and recording of data requiring system knowledge and judgement see Unit 2.9C10 (Perform computer operations). Reports under element include breakdown reports,
KANBAN cards, production/material problems, work improvement suggestions, quality circle participation suggestions/reports to clients, shift production schedules etc. A simple
report would be a report on one or two topics. It would be short and it would not require in-depth analysis. It is assumed that the application of this unit in most workplaces would
require a basic level of ability in speaking, reading and writing English as well as basic numeracy. The unit however does not refer to competence in English but in communication.
English language ability should be professionally assessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the organisation and analysis and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
of information or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 18 of 1445
MEM 2.3C11 B Operate in a work based team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.3C11 B Operate in a work based team environment

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2

Element 2.3C11.1 Determine team role and scope

Criteria 2.3C11.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The role and scope of the team identified from available Where appropriate, job or work instructions obtained in The work to be undertaken by the team can be identified.
information. accordance with workplace procedures. Where The team's internal/external customers and suppliers can
appropriate, all relevant drawings, specifications, manuals, be identified. The products/service to be received from
codes, standards, catalogues etc. are obtained in the team's suppliers can be identified. The
accordance with workplace procedures. products/service to be provided to the team's customers
can be identified.

Criteria 2.3C11.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Team parameters, reporting relationships and The individual participates in team discussions related to The team's reporting relationships can be identified. The
responsibilities identified from team discussions and the team's work. Where appropriate, information relating to team's responsibilities with respect to products/services
appropriate external sources. the team's responsibilities and reporting relationships is to be provided can be identified. The limits within which
obtained from relevant sources external to the team. the team is to operate can be identified. The sources
external to the team from which information relevant to
the team's work may be obtained can be identified. The
sources of technical expertise/ assistance external to the
team can be identified.

Element 2.3C11.2 Identify own role and responsibility within team

Criteria 2.3C11.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Own role and responsibilities within the team The individual's role and responsibilities within the team
environment identified. can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 19 of 1445
MEM 2.3C11 B Operate in a work based team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 2.3C11.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Roles and responsibility of other team members identified The roles and responsibilities of the other team members
and recognised. can be identified.

Criteria 2.3C11.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reporting relationships within team and external to team The reporting relationships within the team can be
identified. identified. The reporting relationships external to the
team can be identified. The procedures for obtaining
information and/or technical assistance from sources
external to the team can be given.

Element 2.3C11.3 Plan team activities

Criteria 2.3C11.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Contribute to development of team work plans based on The individual makes a contribution to the team's work The procedures for planning the team's work can be
understanding of role and parameters of team and own planning procedures. given. The skills and competencies of the individual and
skills and competencies. other team members can be identified. The effects on
team performance of assigning tasks to team members
without the appropriate skills and competencies required
to carry out those tasks can be given.

Element 2.3C11.4 Operate as team member

Criteria 2.3C11.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Effective and appropriate forms of communication used The individual communicates effectively and appropriately The team's activities and objectives can be identified.
and interactions undertaken with team members which with other team members. Examples of inappropriate forms of communication within
contribute to known team activities and objectives. the team can be given. The reasons for using
appropriate forms of communication in a team
environment can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 20 of 1445
MEM 2.3C11 B Operate in a work based team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 2.3C11.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Effective and appropriate contributions made to The individual demonstrates the full extent of skills and The skills and competencies required to carry out
complement team activities and objectives, based on own competencies held and required in performing assigned specified tasks within the team can be identified.
skills and competencies. tasks within the team.

Criteria 2.3C11.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Team agreed reporting lines followed using standard The individual follows agreed reporting lines in The reporting lines to be followed can be identified. The
operating procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures. reporting procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 21 of 1445
MEM 2.3C11 B Operate in a work based team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the skills necessary for participation in small and dedicated work team environments, including active participation in structured team meetings. Individual team
members are not responsible for the overall performance of the team but contribute to team activities and objectives using their own existing technical competencies. Identification
of own role and responsibilities within the team is based on predetermined, readily available information. Role of team is of a dedicated and predetermined nature and would have
available external technical and management support.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the work of the team or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 22 of 1445
MEM 2.4C11 A Assist in the provision of on the job training Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.4C11 A Assist in the provision of on the job training

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2

Element 2.4C11.1 Determine role of on the job training

Criteria 2.4C11.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Objectives of training and role identified and understood All relevant information with respect to the training to be The training to be delivered can be identified. The
in consultation with team leaders or other appropriate provided is obtained in accordance with work place personnel to be consulted with respect to the training to
personnel. procedures. be provided can be identified. The individual's role in the
provision of training can be explained. The objectives of
the training to be provided can be identified. The
person(s) to be trained can be identified. The procedures
to be followed when training individuals can be given.

Element 2.4C11.2 Provide on the job training

Criteria 2.4C11.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Training conducted using suitable methods eg: Suitable training methods are used in providing the The location(s) at which the training is to be provided
explanation, demonstration using standard operating required training. can be identified. All tools, equipment, procedures,
procedures. materials and resources required to achieve the training
objectives can be identified. Examples of appropriate
training delivery methods can be given. The reasons for
selecting the chosen delivery method(s) can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 23 of 1445
MEM 2.4C11 A Assist in the provision of on the job training Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 2.4C11.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trainee progress monitored and appropriate feedback Appropriate feedback is provided to the trainee The procedures for providing feedback to the trainee(s)
provided using standard operating procedures. throughout the training process in accordance with can be given. The reasons for monitoring trainee
standard operating procedures. progress can be explained. The reasons for giving
positive feedback to the trainee at all times can be
explained.

Element 2.4C11.3 Report on trainee performance

Criteria 2.4C11.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trainee's progress reported according to standard The trainee's progress is reported in accordance with The procedures for reporting trainee progress can be
operating procedure. standard operating procedures. given. The skills satisfactorily achieved by the trainee
can be identified. The skills requiring more practice by
the trainee can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 24 of 1445
MEM 2.4C11 A Assist in the provision of on the job training Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies where an employee assists in the provision of on the job training to others while undertaking his/her own normal duties, this may involve the replacement of
normal duties with training duties for limited periods of time. The individual would not be expected to be solely responsible for the assessment or reporting of a trainee's progress.
Reporting procedures should include information about the skills satisfactorily achieved and those where further practice is required. Typical applications could include the
provision of on-the-job guidance by a tradesperson to apprentices/trainees or by a production worker to other production workers/trainees. Where development of training
programs is involved see Unit 17.1A (Assist in development and deliver training in the workplace).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
been satisfied. plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 25 of 1445
MEM 2.5C11 A Measure with graduated devices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.5C11 A Measure with graduated devices

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2

Element 2.5C11.1 Use a range of graduated devices to measure/determine dimensions or variables

Criteria 2.5C11.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Selects appropriate device or equipment to achieve The appropriate measuring device can be selected from a The correct application of a range of measuring devices
required outcome. range of measuring devices for given measuring tasks. can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
measuring device for each of a number of given
measuring tasks can be given.

Criteria 2.5C11.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate measuring technique used. For each measuring device selected the correct and The correct and appropriate measuring technique for a
appropriate measuring technique is used. range of measuring devices can be identified. The
consequences of not using the correct and appropriate
measuring techniques for given measuring devices can
be explained.

Criteria 2.5C11.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measures accurately to finest graduation of instrument. All measurements taken are read accurately to the finest The accuracy to which a variety of measuring
graduation of the selected measuring device. instruments can be read can be identified. The effect of
using inappropriate measuring devices or measuring
techniques on the accuracy of the measurements taken
can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 26 of 1445
MEM 2.5C11 A Measure with graduated devices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.5C11.2 Maintain graduated devices

Criteria 2.5C11.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine care and storage of devices undertaken to All measuring devices are handled and stored in The procedures for handling and storing a range of
manufacturer's specification or standard operating accordance with manufacturers' specifications or standard measuring devices can be given. The effect of
procedure. operating procedures. inappropriate use, handling and/or storage on the
accuracy of measuring devices can be explained.

Criteria 2.5C11.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Checks and makes routine adjustments to devices eg: All measuring devices are checked for zero before use in The routine adjustments that can be made to a range of
"zeroing". accordance with standard operating procedures. Where measuring devices can be identified. The procedures for
appropriate, routine adjustments are made to measuring adjusting and zeroing a range of measuring devices can
devices in accordance with standard operating be given. The procedures for checking a range of
procedures. measuring devices for accuracy and correct operation
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 27 of 1445
MEM 2.5C11 A Measure with graduated devices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or part of team environment. Work undertaken in field, work station, workshops. This unit covers measurement skills requiring straightforward
application of the measuring device and may utilise the full range of graduations of measuring device. Examples may include measurements using verniers, feeler gauges,
micrometers, dial indicators, thermometers, and similar graduated devices. Measurements undertaken may include: length, squareness, flatness, angle, roundness, clearances or any
other measurements that can be read off analog, digital or other graduated device. Electrical/electronic devices used are those not requiring the connection or disconnection of
circuitry. Measurements may include metric and imperial measurement. All measurements undertaken to standard operating procedures. Adjustment of measuring devices is
through external means and includes zero and linear adjustment. For straightforward use of comparison or basic measuring devices Unit 12.1A (Use comparison and basic
measuring devices) should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the use of graduated and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measuring devices or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 28 of 1445
MEM 2.6C10 A Plan a complete activity Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.6C10 A Plan a complete activity

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 4

Element 2.6C10.1 Identify activity requirements

Criteria 2.6C10.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions as to objectives and performance Instructions are obtained in accordance with work site The tasks to be performed can be identified. The
requirements are obtained, understood and where procedures. person(s) who can clarify the objectives/performance
necessary clarified. requirements can be identified.

Criteria 2.6C10.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant specifications for activity outcomes are Specifications relevant to the tasks to be performed are The specifications relevant to the tasks to be performed
obtained, understood and where necessary clarified. obtained in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The person(s) who can clarify issues
relating to specifications can be identified.

Criteria 2.6C10.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Activity outcomes are identified. The outcomes to be achieved at the completion of the
activity can be identified.

Criteria 2.6C10.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Activity requirements, including overall timeframe for The timeframe in which the activity is to be completed
activity, quality requirements and criteria for acceptable can be identified. The quality requirements of the
completion are identified. product or service to be provided can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 29 of 1445
MEM 2.6C10 A Plan a complete activity Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.6C10.2 Plan process to complete activity

Criteria 2.6C10.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Based on instructions as to objectives, performance A plan is prepared including sequential steps that will The priority of each step in the plan can be identified.
requirements and specifications, the individual enable the activity to be completed. The reasons for the relative priority of each step can be
components of the activity are identified and prioritised. given.

Element 2.6C10.3 Modify plan

Criteria 2.6C10.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plan if necessary may be modified to overcome Where appropriate the plan is modified to take account of Modifications to the plan to overcome a range of
unforeseen difficulties or developments that occur as difficulties or developments that occur while following the unforseen situations can be given.
work progresses. prepared plan.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 30 of 1445
MEM 2.6C10 A Plan a complete activity Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Instructions may include timeframe, quality requirements, outcome requirements and performance requirements. Instructions carried out in accordance with established procedures.
However, the activities may require a response and modification of procedures or choice of different procedures to deal with unforeseen developments. The activity may require
prioritising of the individual components to facilitate the meeting of the objectives. Examples of activities to be planned may include: fault diagnosis and repair of an item of
equipment, a modification of an established sequence of assembly tasks. Activities are normally performed by the individual undertaking the planned activity and associated
reports are completed as required. Instructions refer to either formal or informal information about the task required. Planning will be related to familiar work tasks and environments
and be performed to standard operating procedures. Where more extensive reporting requiring research and forming conclusions is required refer Unit 2.10 C5 (Write reports).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with hand forging or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
requiring the exercise of skills and knowledge covered by this unit. perform all tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have specification; - use accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace
been satisfied. procedures. Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical
workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 31 of 1445
MEM 2.7C10 A Perform computations –(basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.7C10 A Perform computations (basic)

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies for performing computations in relation to measurement, statistical application or interpretation of drawings and diagrams. Basic
numeracy skills are assumed. ( Basic numeracy means the ability to perform simple arithmetic using whole numbers applying the four basic rules of addition,
subtraction,
multiplication and division.)

Element 2.7C10.1 Applies four basic rules of calculation

Criteria 2.7C10.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple calculations are performed using four basic rules, Calculations involving whole numbers can be correctly Examples of the application of each of the four rules of
addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. performed using all four basic rules. calculation performed in the workplace can be given.
Criteria 2.7C10.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Understands concept of and performs simple Calculations involving length, perimeter, area and The formula applicable to the determination of
calculations involving length, perimeter, area and volume can be correctly performed. perimeter, area and volume of simple geometric shapes
volume. can be identified from given information. The reasons
for using dimensions with the same units when
calculating length, perimeter, area and volume can be
given. The concepts of perimeter, area and volume can
be explained.

Element 2.7C10.2 Performs basic calculations involving fractions and decimals

Criteria 2.7C10.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple calculations are performed involving fractions Workplace calculations involving fractions and mixed Mixed numbers, fractions and whole numbers can be
and mixed numbers using four basic rules. numbers can be correctly performed using all four basic identified from a given list. The procedures for carrying
rules. out calculations involving fractions and using each of
the four basic rules can be given.
Criteria 2.7C10.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple calculations are performed involving decimal Workplace calculations involving decimals and mixed Mixed numbers, decimals and whole numbers can be
fractions and mixed numbers using four basic rules. numbers can be correctly performed using all four basic identified from a given list. The procedures for carrying
rules. out calculations involving decimals and using each of
the four basic rules can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 32 of 1445
MEM 2.7C10 A Perform computations (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Calculations may be performed using pen and paper or on a calculator. Computations performed in an appropriate application for the industry in which the person is working.
Skills may be demonstrated in relation to measurement, statistical application or interpretation of drawings and diagrams. Basic numeracy skills below those described in this
unit are not covered in these standards and are assumed to be held on entry to the industry. Basic numeracy means the ability to perform simple arithmetic using whole numbers
applying the four basic rules of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the computations being and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
performed or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 33 of 1445
MEM 2.8C10 A Perform computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.8C10 A Perform computations

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic

Element 2.8C10.1 Estimates approximate answers

Criteria 2.8C10.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Check calculated answers by estimating techniques. Calculated answers are checked for accuracy. An appropriate technique for estimating approximate
answers can be identified.

Criteria 2.8C10.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performs simple rounding off operations when estimating. Estimated answers are appropriately rounded off. The procedures for rounding off figures when estimating
approximate answers can be given.

Element 2.8C10.2 Performs basic calculations involving percentages

Criteria 2.8C10.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple calculations are performed to obtain percentages Information presented in fractional or decimal format can The concept of percentage can be explained. The
from information expressed in either fractional or decimal be expressed as a percentage. procedures to be followed in converting a decimal to a
format. percentage can be given. The procedures to be followed
on converting a fraction to a percentage can be given.

Element 2.8C10.3 Applies the four basic rules to algebraic expression

Criteria 2.8C10.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple calculations are performed on algebraic The appropriate formulae are selected for the given The sources of appropriate formulae can be given. The
expressions using the four basic rules - addition, application. The correct values are substituted for each reasons for ensuring that the units of each term are
subtraction, multiplication, division. term in the relevant formulae. The appropriate consistent with the formulae selected can be given. The
mathematical operations are used to determine the required procedures for converting given units to those required
value. Where appropriate, the known values are for use in formulae can be given.
converted to units consistent with the formulae selected.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 34 of 1445
MEM 2.8C10 A Perform computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.8C10.4 Performs basic calculations involving proportions

Criteria 2.8C10.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple calculations are performed involving ratios and Calculations involving ratios or proportions can be The concepts of ratio and proportion can be explained.
proportion using whole numbers, fractions and decimal correctly performed. Given ratios can be expressed in terms of whole numbers,
fractions. fractions and decimal fractions. Given proportions can
be expressed in terms of whole numbers, fractions and
decimal fractions.

Criteria 2.8C10.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information extracted from charts and graphs is used as a
basis for decision making.

Element 2.8C10.5 Interpret charts and graphs

Criteria 2.8C10.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information extracted from charts and graphs is The required information can be determined from The scales applicable to the axes of the graphs or charts
interpreted correctly. appropriate charts or graphs. can be correctly identified. Three types of charts and/or
graphs used in the individual's field of work can be
identified.
Criteria 2.8C10.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information extracted from charts and graphs is used as a Where appropriate, upper and lower limits of
basis for decision making. acceptability applicable to data entered on a graph or
chart can be identified. Where appropriate, the trends
indicated by the slope or gradient of a graph can be
identified. Where appropriate, the action to be taken
when given trends occur or set limits are approached on
graphs or charts can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 35 of 1445
MEM 2.8C10 A Perform computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.8C10.6 Produces charts and graphs from given information

Criteria 2.8C10.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information is used to produce simple charts and graphs Simple charts or graphs are produced from given Three types of graph can be identified. The procedures
as required. information or observations made. Appropriate scales are for drawing "lines of best fit" can be given. The trends
selected and used in the production of charts and graphs. indicated by the graphs or charts drawn can be
Appropriate limits are clearly marked on the graph or chart. identified.
The axes are appropriately and correctly labelled. The
coordinates are clearly and accurately marked.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 36 of 1445
MEM 2.8C10 A Perform computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Calculations may be performed using pen and paper or on a calculator. All problems should have appropriate applications depending on the workplace. Interpretation of charts and
graphs would usually extend to simple histograms, control charts, pie charts, etc. Data may be generated from readings taken or computer generated. Applications can include
computation of pressure, volume, temperature, heat, speed, density, mass, force, efficiency etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will access have to : - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The computations to be performed should be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
consistent with the individual's field of work and relate to procedures, workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
tools, equipment, materials and documentation relevant to that field of relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference material. The candidate will be required to: -
work. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
environment should not disadvantage the candidate. appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the computations being and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
performed or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks to
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be specification; - use accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. procedures. Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical
workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 37 of 1445
 MEM 2.9C10 A Perform computer operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.9C10 A Perform computer operations

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2

Element 2.9C10.1 Identify uses of computers in the workplace

Criteria 2.9C10.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles of computer systems understood. The hardware components of a computer system and
their function can be identified. The functions of both
hardware and software can be given.

Criteria 2.9C10.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Application of computers in the workplace correctly Four applications of computers in the metal and
identified. engineering industry can be given.

Element 2.9C10.2 Access information using computer

Criteria 2.9C10.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct program/application selected based on The program/application containing the information The program/application containing the required
knowledge of computer system in accordance with required is accessed in accordance with work site information can be identified.
standard operating procedure. procedures.

Criteria 2.9C10.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Required information identified and retrieved. A hard copy of the required information is obtained in Two consequences of not checking that the information
accordance with work site procedures. The information obtained is the information required can be given.
obtained is checked for conformance with the information
requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 38 of 1445
 MEM 2.9C10 A Perform computer operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.9C10.3 Input data correctly into computer

Criteria 2.9C10.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data entered into computer. The appropriate program/application into which data is to The program/application into which the data is to be
be entered is accessed in accordance with work site entered can be identified.
procedures. The data is entered into the computer in
accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 2.9C10.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accuracy of information checked and information saved The entered data is checked for accuracy. The entered Two consequences of not checking entered data for
in accordance with standard operating procedures. data is saved in accordance with work site procedures. accuracy can be given. Two consequences of not saving
entered data can be given.

Element 2.9C10.4 Output data using computer system

Criteria 2.9C10.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data processed using computer programs. The entered data is processed using appropriate software The function of relevant software commands can be
commands. identified.

Criteria 2.9C10.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data printed out as required using computer The processed data is checked for The reasons for checking data prior to printing can be
hardware/peripheral devices in accordance with standard accuracy/format/spelling/completeness as appropriate. given. Two examples of devices used to produce hard
operating procedure. The appropriate output device is selected for the hard copy printouts can be given.
copy to be produced. The data is presented in an
appropriate hard copy format.

Criteria 2.9C10.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Files, data transferred between compatible systems as The files/data to be transferred is checked for The reasons for checking data/files prior to transfer can
required using computer software, hardware/peripheral accuracy/format/spelling/completeness as appropriate. be given. Two examples of devices/procedures used to
devices where conversion skills are not required and data The appropriate data transfer device(s)/procedure(s) are transfer data between systems can be given.
transfer is in accordance with standard operating selected. The data is transferred accurately.
procedure.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 39 of 1445
 MEM 2.9C10 A Perform computer operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the application of the skills where an understanding of computer principles and application of programs is required. Skills may be demonstrated where program
knowledge and judgement is exercised in relation to maintenance of enterprise records; tracking of jobs/orders through an enterprise; accessing of information relating to inventory
stores/prices/availability of components; access to drawings held on CAD (computer aided design) systems; the accessing of CNC (computer numerical control) information; files
transferred to disk; printing output. This unit also covers the skills for routine downloading of programmable logic controller (PLC), CNC or NC programs via disk, tape or direct
means. Where this downloading requires program, data adjustment or checks against specification then Unit 10.4A (Enter and change programmable controller operational
parameters) should be selected. For access and recording of electronically stored data where program knowledge and judgement is not required see Unit 2.2C11 (Organise and
analyse information).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant hardware and software manuals The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by
other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues
who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. -
Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be
satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit
as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the computations being and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
performed or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 40 of 1445
 MEM 2.10C5 A Write reports Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.10C5 A Write reports

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.6C10 Plan a complete activity

Element 2.10C5.1 Communicate concepts in writing

Criteria 2.10C5.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reports are written using appropriate terminology where The terminology and language used in the report is The report's intended audience can be identified. The
required. appropriate to the target audience. consequences of using inappropriate terminology and
language can be given.

Criteria 2.10C5.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reports discuss alternatives, difficulties and suggestions Where appropriate, the report includes alternative views, The benefits of providing alternative approaches in a
when required. approaches and suggestions for consideration by the report can be given.
reader.

Criteria 2.10C5.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reports are coherent and based on any analysis or The report is coherent and logical. Any The benefits of documenting evidence to support
research undertaken. recommendations/suggestions made are based on recommendations/suggestions included in the report can
documented analysis or research undertaken. be given.

Criteria 2.10C5.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conclusions are based on the facts in the report and Any conclusions are based on the facts presented in the The benefits of presenting conclusions based on facts
recommendations are made if required. report. Where appropriate, recommendations are made. contained in the report can be given.

Criteria 2.10C5.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reports are completed within specified time. The report is completed within the specified time. The timeframe for the preparation of the report and the
deadline for completion can be identified.

Criteria 2.10C5.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
References are acknowledged as required. Where appropriate, references are acknowledged in the The details required to appropriately acknowledge
report. references used in the preparation of reports can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 41 of 1445
MEM 2.10C5 A Write reports Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Range statement
Report is used to denote any required written communication that goes beyond a simple recording of facts (such as completion of a pro forma shift production schedule) to include
a level of analysis and/or research. Reports may be of a technical or non-technical nature. If the report is technical, it should be based on the writer having technical knowledge.
Conclusions and/or recommendations where required are based on research or analysis of data. Reports include graphs, charts, tables, etc. as required. The analysis and
conclusions should be consistent with the level of skill and knowledge of an employee working at that level. Simple analysis and research would be required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant text, periodicals, reports, etc. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other
methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who
can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present
evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that
the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified
by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
applicable to the individual's work. Competency in this unit cannot be communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
accordance with standard operation procedures - use accepted engineering techniques,
practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will be completed within
reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 42 of 1445
 MEM 2.11C5 A Research and prepare presentations and reports Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.11C5 A Research and prepare presentations and reports

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.2C11 Organise and analyse information

Element 2.11C5.1 Research information

Criteria 2.11C5.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Research of existing materials is undertaken including Relevant reference sources have been identified and
reference books, tables, technical journals and accessed where appropriate. Relevant internal/external
internal/external databases. databases have been identified and accessed where
appropriate. Relevant personnel have been consulted
where appropriate.

Element 2.11C5.2 Analyse information

Criteria 2.11C5.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conclusions are reached that are logical and based on Conclusions are clearly stated and are consistent with the The reasons for including information/data in the report
objective analysis of available data. information/data contained in the report or presentation. or presentation can be given. All relevant
information/data is included in the report or presentation.
The effect of variations in the information/data obtained,
on the conclusions reached can be identified.

Criteria 2.11C5.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
References are acknowledged as required. References used in the preparation of the report or The reasons for acknowledging references utilised in the
presentation are appropriately acknowledged. preparation of reports or presentations can be given.
Appropriate methods of acknowledging references in
reports or presentations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 43 of 1445
 MEM 2.11C5 A Research and prepare presentations and reports Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.11C5.3 Summarise and organise technical data

Criteria 2.11C5.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials and data prepared for presentation or report. The materials required to support the presentation or Where appropriate, information and technical data to be
report are prepared and of a standard and quality presented have been summarised. The report or
appropriate to the intended audience. presentation is appropriately planned and sequenced.

Range statement
In this unit the employee may be preparing a presentation or report for another person or for themselves to deliver. Materials and documents mentioned are based on relevant
knowledge of the employee competency level.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The report/presentation to be researched and required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
prepared should relate to the individual's field of work and relate to workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
equipment, procedures, processes, techniques and/or practices the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. The competencies covered by this unit Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
candidate. must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the subject of the report and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
being researched and/or prepared for presentation or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 44 of 1445
 MEM 2.13C5 A Perform mathematical computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.13C5 A Perform mathematical computations

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 4
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations

Element 2.13C5.1 Performs calculations involving the six trigonometrical ratios

Criteria 2.13C5.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculations are performed to solve problems involving The appropriate trigonometrical ratios are used to solve The six trigonometrical ratios can be correctly identified.
right angled triangles, using appropriate ratios. given problems involving right-angled triangles. The trigonometrical ratios for given angles can be
determined. The angles corresponding to given
trigonometrical ratios can be determined.

Element 2.13C5.2 Applies the sine and cosine rule in the solution of problems
Criteria 2.13C5.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculations are performed on non right-angled triangles The cosine rule and sine rule are used to solve given The sine rule and cosine rule can be correctly identified.
utilising the sine and cosine rule. problems involving non right-angled triangles.

Element 2.13C5.3 Performs simple algebraic operations

Criteria 2.13C5.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple transposition of formulae is carried out to isolate Given formulae are transposed to isolate the required term. The appropriate mathematical operation(s) to isolate the
the variable required, involving, addition, subtraction, The four mathematical operations are correctly used in the required term can be identified.
multiplication, division. transposition of formulae.

Criteria 2.13C5.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Formulae is constructed to solve problems involving Where appropriate, formulae are constructed to enable The procedures for constructing formulae involving
simple shapes or concepts. problems to be solved. simple shapes or concepts can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 45 of 1445
 MEM 2.13C5 A Perform mathematical computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 2.13C5.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Simple equations are solved involving one unknown Equations involving one unknown term are solved The reasons for checking the accuracy of the calculated
value. correctly. answer can be given.

Element 2.13C5.4 Uses geometrical principles in the solution of problems

Criteria 2.13C5.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The solution to problems is facilitated by applying The appropriate geometrical principles are used to solve The geometric properties of triangles can be identified.
geometrical properties of angles, triangles and circles in problems involving angles, triangles and circles. The geometric properties of circles can be given. The
the calculations. geometric properties of parallel lines intersected by an
inclined line can be given.

Element 2.13C5.5 Calculates areas and volumes of complex shapes

Criteria 2.13C5.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Applies given formulae for the calculation of areas and The appropriate formulae are selected to determine the
volumes. areas and volumes of given shapes. The formulae for
determining the areas of plane figures including circles,
rectangles, triangles and trapeziums can be identified.
The formulae for determining the volumes of right prisms
can be identified. The formulae for determining the
volumes of right pyramids and cones can be identified.
The formulae for determining the volume of a sphere can
be identified. The formulae for determining the volume of
non-right pyramids, cones and prisms can be identified.

Criteria 2.13C5.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculates areas and volumes of composite shapes which The appropriate formulae are selected to determine the The standard shapes that composite figures are
may include conical sections. areas and volumes of complex shapes. constructed from can be identified. The appropriate
mathematical operation to be applied to composite
shapes involving holes can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 46 of 1445
 MEM 2.13C5 A Perform mathematical computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
A variety of devices may be used to assist with calculations. Mathematical techniques may be applied in a variety of engineering contexts.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The computations to be performed should be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
consistent with the individual's field of work and relate to procedures, workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
tools, equipment, materials and documentation relevant to that field of relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
work. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
environment should not disadvantage the candidate. appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the computations being and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
performed or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 47 of 1445
 MEM 2.14C5 A Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.14C5 A Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations
Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations

Element 2.14C5.1 Reads and constructs graphs from given or determined data
Criteria 2.14C5.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complex information is extracted from graphical The required information is obtained by interpreting data The characteristics of straight line, parabolic and
representation. presented in graphical form. hyperbolic curves can be identified. The procedures for
determining the slope/rate of change of a curve can be
given.

Criteria 2.14C5.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data is analysed with respect to emerging trends. The trend(s) indicated by the data presented in graphical The trend(s) indicated by changes in gradient of a graph
form are correctly determined. can be identified.

Criteria 2.14C5.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Graphs are constructed as required from data and drawn Graphs are constructed to scale in accordance with The procedures for drawing the line of best fit for the
with respect to scale and accepted method. standard procedures. The axes are appropriately labelled. coordinates plotted can be identified.
The scales selected are appropriate to the purpose for
which the graph is intended. Each coordinate is clearly and
accurately plotted. Where appropriate, the upper and
lower limits of acceptable outcomes are clearly marked on
the graph.
Criteria 2.14C5.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Significant features of graphical representation are The standard form of equations relating to straight lines
understood such as limit lines, gradients (straight line and parabolic curves can be identified. The gradient,
graphs), intercepts, maximum and minimum values. intercepts, maximum and minimum values and limit lines
for straight line and parabolic curves can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 48 of 1445
 MEM 2.14C5 A Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 2.14C5.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Constructs a wide variety of graphs as required including Histograms are constructed in accordance with standard The function of control charts can be identified.
histograms, control charts, straight line graphs and procedures. Control charts are constructed in accordance
parabolic graphs. with standard procedures. Straight line and parabolic
graphs can be constructed from given formulae.

Element 2.14C5.2 Performs basic statistical calculations

Criteria 2.14C5.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculates mean, median and mode from given data. For a given set of data the mean, median and mode can be The meaning of the terms mean, median and mode can be
correctly determined. given.

Criteria 2.14C5.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculates standard deviation and understands the For a given set of data the standard deviation can be The meaning of the term standard deviation can be
significance of 1, 2 and 3 sigma limits. correctly determined. given. The significance of 1, 2 and 3 sigma limits can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 49 of 1445
 MEM 2.14C5 A Use graphical techniques and perform simple statistical computations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Graphs and charts may be applied to information from various work contexts, quality processes, production and market trends and other engineering applications. A range of
devices may be used to assist with calculations.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The graphs to be constructed and required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
computations to be performed should be consistent with the workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
individual's field of work and relate to procedures, tools, equipment, relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
materials and documentation relevant to that field of work. The Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
environment should not disadvantage the candidate. must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with graphs being constructed and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and the computations being performed or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 50 of 1445
 MEM 2.15C5 A Operate in an autonomous team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.15C5 A Operate in an autonomous team environment

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C12 onwards
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.3C11 Operate in a work based team environment

Element 2.15C5.1 Determine work roles of team members

Criteria 2.15C5.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Team role and scope determined and understood using The role of the team can be identified. The scope of work
standard operating procedure. for which the team is responsible can be identified.

Criteria 2.15C5.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Role of self and team members understood and where The individual's role within the team can be identified.
appropriate clarified by all team participants. The roles of the other team members can be identified.
The procedures for clarifying the roles of team members
can be identified.

Element 2.15C5.2 Participate in team planning

Criteria 2.15C5.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate methods used to plan team activity or a Where appropriate, team planning meetings are scheduled Appropriate methods of planning team activities can be
number of related team activities. in accordance with work site procedures. identified. The activity(ies) to be planned can be
identified.

Criteria 2.15C5.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Planning activity is undertaken on an individual or shared Each team member's technical skills, knowledge and
basis, incorporating individual's technical skills, competence, relevant to the tasks being planned, are
knowledge and competence. accurately identified. The person(s) responsible for
undertaking the planning activity can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 51 of 1445
 MEM 2.15C5 A Operate in an autonomous team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 2.15C5.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Effective and appropriate contributions are made to the The individual makes an effective and appropriate The impact of planning decisions on other teams,
total planning process. contribution to the planning process. The agreed plan, personnel and/or resources has been considered. The
including where appropriate sequential steps and the roles procedures for obtaining the necessary resources to
and responsibilities of team members, is documented carry out the plan can be identified. Where appropriate,
where appropriate in accordance with work site input from non team members affected by the planning
procedures. process have been sought. The resources necessary to
carry out the plan can be identified.

Element 2.15C5.3 Operate as team member

Criteria 2.15C5.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Effective and appropriate forms of communication are Appropriate forms of communication are used to liaise A variety of appropriate means of communicating with
used to liaise with team members. with team members in accordance with work site team members can be identified. The reasons for
procedures. selecting the means of communication used can be
given.

Criteria 2.15C5.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Contributes to determination of time lines, quality The individual makes an appropriate contribution to the The production requirements of a given task can be
standards and production requirements for the team. determination of the production requirements, quality correctly identified. The quality standards appropriate to
standards and/or timelines for the team. a given task can be correctly identified. The factors
affecting the time to undertake a given task can be
identified.

Criteria 2.15C5.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Real or perceived issues resolved by effective and Where appropriate, the individual makes an effective and The types of interpersonal issues that could affect team
appropriate contributions from team member. appropriate contribution to the resolution of issues performance can be identified. Appropriate strategies for
affecting team performance. resolving given issues can be given.

Criteria 2.15C5.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Effective and appropriate contributions made by team The individual appropriately applies skills and knowledge The individual can identify the skills and knowledge to
member to achieve team objectives, based on member's to achieve team objectives. be applied to a given task(s). The team objectives can be
own technical skills, knowledge and competence. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 52 of 1445
 MEM 2.15C5 A Operate in an autonomous team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 2.15C5.4 Monitor and review team performance

Criteria 2.15C5.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Participate effectively in the planning and development of The individual makes an appropriate contribution to the The need to review team performance can be identified.
team review process. planning and development of team review processes. Team targets/goals can be identified. Team performance
indicators can be identified. The reasons for reviewing
team performance can be given.

Criteria 2.15C5.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate data is collected on an individual and team Team performance data is collected in accordance with The sources of data relevant to the team performance
basis using standard operating procedure. standard operating procedure. indicators can be identified.

Criteria 2.15C5.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data collected, analysed and used by team and individual The individual makes an appropriate contribution to the The actual team performance against team performance
team members to evaluate team performance and determination of future strategies to improve team targets can be determined. Where appropriate, the
determine future strategies. performance. reasons for discrepancies between actual and target team
performance can be identified. Where appropriate,
source(s) of approval for changes to team performance
parameters can be identified.

Element 2.15C5.5 Implement team performance improvements

Criteria 2.15C5.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performance improvement processes appropriate to team Performance improvement processes are implemented in The processes aimed at improving team performance can
activities implemented on a collective and individual accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified. Where appropriate, the changes to the
basis using standard operating procedure. individual's and team members' roles/responsibilities can
be identified. Where appropriate, the changes to
procedures can be identified. Where appropriate, the
changed targets, goals and/or objectives can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 53 of 1445
 MEM 2.15C5 A Operate in an autonomous team environment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies the skills necessary for effective participation by an individual in an autonomous team environment. Team parameters, constraints and objectives are determined
by sources external to the team. Where as a result of team discussions or planning, team parameters require adjustment, then appropriate authorisation and approvals are
established using standard operating procedures. Individual team participants would be already competent with technical aspects of team activities.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. The individual would already be relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
competent with the technical aspects of team activities. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with working in an autonomous and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
team environment or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 54 of 1445
 MEM 2.16C5 A Interpret quality specifications and manuals Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 2.16C5 A Interpret quality specifications and manuals

Band – Core Field – Core Unit Weight 4

Element 2.16C5.1 Identify and access all documentation

Criteria 2.16C5.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Documentation covering all of the tiers of quality within Documentation is accessed and can be used. Evidence of Knowledge of documentation location and/or retrieval
the enterprise identified and used. indexing, references etc. being used. can be described.

Element 2.16C5.2 Interpret documentation

Criteria 2.16C5.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quality specification for specific processes and systems Correct specifications for process and/or systems are Correct process used to identify relevant specifications
related and interpreted. used, including other related specifications. can be described. Specifications can be described "in
other words".

Criteria 2.16C5.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The enterprise quality improvement system related to the Components of system are correctly used where Sound understanding of quality improvement process is
formal documentation understood and used according to appropriate. Formal documentation completed according apparent.
standard operating procedures. to procedural specifications and requirements.

Element 2.16C5.3 Explain documentation

Criteria 2.16C5.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Documentation relating to quality control/assurance Appropriate communication strategy adopted, including Appropriate communication strategy can be identified for
explained to appropriate personnel. confirmation of received information. all workplace situations.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 55 of 1445
 MEM 2.16C5 A Interpret quality specifications and manuals Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 2.16C5.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions based on documentation given to Information is presented in ways appropriate for the A range of instructional techniques can be used.
appropriate personnel. audience.

Element 2.16C5.4 Monitor quality processes/systems

Criteria 2.16C5.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quality improvement system monitored and maintained. Appropriate records are maintained and audited. Relevant Quality system is understood and that system can be
forms and/or systems are available for reporting. Quality described. Components of quality system such as forms
system is followed according to established procedures. etc. are used and understood in terms of purpose and
function.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 56 of 1445
 MEM 2.16C5 A Interpret quality specifications and manuals Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This standard covers a wide range of processes/systems and enterprises. It covers the interpretation of all of the tiers of quality documentation from standards such as AS3900 -
AS3904 through to manuals, procedures and work instructions. Interpretation of technical requirements for production should be accessed through other technical units eg:
interpret technical drawing. Documentation is accessed and applied to the specific enterprise.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the supervision and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
maintenance of the application of quality procedures or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 57 of 1445
 MEM 3.1A A Manual production assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 3.1A A Manual production assembly

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Assembly Unit Weight 4

Element 3.1A.1 Read and understand job sheets

Criteria 3.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets and instructions understood and followed Job sheets and/or instructions are obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
correctly. with workplace procedures. sequence in which the tasks are to be performed can be
identified.

Element 3.1A.2 Select assembly equipment and components

Criteria 3.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly equipment is selected and used in accordance The assembly equipment is selected in accordance with The equipment to be used in the assembly process can
with instructions or job sheets to standard operating instructions or job sheets. The assembly equipment is be identified.
procedures. used in accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 3.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components/sub-assemblies are obtained and arranged The correct components/sub-assemblies are obtained. The The components/sub-assemblies to be assembled can be
for assembly. components/sub-assemblies are set out ready for identified. The sources of the
assembly in accordance with standard operating component/sub-assemblies can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 3.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment or tools are used in a safe manner. The assembly equipment and/or tools are used safely in The safety precautions to be taken with assembly
accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment and/or tools can be identified.

Element 3.1A.3 Assembles components

Criteria 3.1A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly produced following correct sequence of The correct sequence of operations is followed during the
operations using selected equipment as appropriate to assembly process. The selected assembly equipment is
standard operating procedures. used in accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 58 of 1445
 MEM 3.1A A Manual production assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 3.1A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records/inputs production data using standard operating The production data is recorded in accordance with The production data to be recorded can be identified.
procedure. standard operating procedures.

Element 3.1A.4 Performs tests

Criteria 3.1A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly tested/checked for compliance with job sheet The assembly is tested/checked for compliance with job The tests/checks to be applied to the assembly can be
requirements using standard operating procedures as sheet requirements in accordance with standard operating identified. The action to be taken if an assembly does not
required. procedures. comply with the job sheet requirement can be identified.

Element 3.1A.5 Protects assembly from damage

Criteria 3.1A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components and/or assembly are handled and stored in a The components and/or assembly are handled and stored The safe handling and storage procedures applicable to
safe manner least likely to cause damage using standard in a safe manner in accordance with standard operating components and/or assemblies can be identified. The
operating procedure. procedures. damage that can be done to components and/or
assemblies through the use of inappropriate handling
and storage procedures can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 59 of 1445
 MEM 3.1A A Manual production assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Assembly process can be carried out autonomously or in a team environment. This unit applies to assembly operations that are essentially manual in nature and which do not
require complex adjustments. This unit should not be selected when Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components) has already been selected. Where the
selection and use of tools is required as part of the assembly process see Unit 18.1A (Use hand tools) and Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations) as appropriate.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the assembly process or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 60 of 1445
 MEM 3.2A A Precision assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 3.2A A Precision assembly

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Assembly Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 3.2A.1 Read and understand job sheets

Criteria 3.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheet or equivalent instructions interpreted correctly. Job sheets and/or instructions are obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified.
with workplace procedures.

Criteria 3.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All components/parts checked against job sheet, All component parts are checked against the job sheet, The component parts can be identified.
assembly list or equivalent instructions. assembly list or instructions.

Criteria 3.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fitting requirements and sequential assembly planning Where appropriate, a sequential assembly plan is Where appropriate, the fitting requirements can be
carried out where applicable. prepared. identified.

Element 3.2A.2 Select and use assembly tools and equipment

Criteria 3.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools, equipment and components/parts selected to meet Tools and equipment are selected in accordance with job The tools and equipment required to carry out the
job requirements. requirements. The components/parts are selected in assembly can be identified.
accordance with job requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 61 of 1445
 MEM 3.2A A Precision assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 3.2A.3 Assemble engineering components

Criteria 3.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defective or faulty parts identified and processed Defective or faulty parts are identified and processed Common part faults or defects can be identified. The
according to standard operating procedure. according to standard operating procedures. procedures for dealing with faulty or defective parts can
be given.

Criteria 3.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts/components correctly prepared for assembly. Where appropriate parts/components are correctly Where appropriate the preparation requirements of parts
prepared for assembly. prior to assembly can be identified.

Criteria 3.2A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate technique and principles applied in assembly The components are assembled using appropriate The assembly requirements of components/parts can be
activity. techniques and principles in accordance with standard identified.
operating procedures.

Criteria 3.2A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate records/data maintained or processed. The appropriate records are kept/ maintained in The records to be kept/maintained can be identified.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 3.2A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component parts of assembly fitted to ensure correct The component parts are fitted to ensure correct Where appropriate the positioning requirements of
positioning and conformance with specifications. positioning and conformance to specifications. components can be identified. Where appropriate the
fitting specifications of the components can be
identified.

Criteria 3.2A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly tested to ensure that components The assembly is tested for conformance to operational The operational specifications of the assembly can be
interface/interact according to operational specifications. specifications in accordance with standard operating identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 62 of 1445
 MEM 3.2A A Precision assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 3.2A.4 Adjust mechanical assemblies

Criteria 3.2A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final adjustments performed on assembly to ensure Where appropriate, the assembly is adjusted to ensure The adjustments that can be made to the assembly can
alignment with operational specifications. conformance with operational specifications, in be identified. The effects of adjustments to the assembly
accordance with standard operating procedures. on the operation of the assembly can be identified.

Criteria 3.2A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty assemblies identified for rework by operator or Where appropriate, faulty assemblies are identified in The faults that can be rectified by the operator can be
where fault is outside scope of work station, processed accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The faults that cannot be rectified by the
according to standard operating procedure. operator can be identified. The procedures for dealing
with faults outside the scope of the operator's work
station can be given.

Criteria 3.2A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly correctly marked/tagged/identified where Where appropriate, the assembly is correctly The procedures for marking/tagging/ identifying faulty
appropriate. marked/tagged/identified as faulty in accordance with assemblies can be given.
standard operating procedures.

Element 3.2A.5 Protects assembly from damage

Criteria 3.2A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components and/or assembly are handled and stored in a The components and/or assembly are handled and stored The safe handling and storage procedures applicable to
manner least likely to cause damage using standard in a safe manner in accordance with standard operating components and/or assemblies can be identified. The
operating procedure. procedures. damage that can be done to components and/or
assemblies through the use of inappropriate handling
and storage procedures can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 63 of 1445
 MEM 3.2A A Precision assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Assembly process can be carried out autonomously or in a team environment. This unit applies to assembly operations that are essentially manual in nature and require the
application of accepted engineering principles and practices. Assembly activities typically involve build-to-order work and/or low volume and/or complex assemblies and/or long
assembly time frames. Work may involve manual adjustments to correct eg: clearances, mesh, tension, level, alignment, etc. using predetermined standards of quality and safety.
Applications of this unit may also require varying levels of measurement competencies, where this is the case refer to Units 2.5C11 (Measure with graduated devices) or 12.3A
(Precision mechanical measurement). This unit should not be selected when Unit 18.55A ( Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components) is/has been also selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision assembly or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 64 of 1445
 MEM 3.3A A Sheet and plate assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 3.3A A Sheet and plate assembly

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Assembly Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 3.3A.1 Read and understand job sheets

Criteria 3.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets/instruction correctly interpreted and followed. Job sheets and/or instructions are obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
with work place procedures. sequence in which the tasks are to be performed can be
identified.

Element 3.3A.2 Select and use sheet and plate assembly equipment
Criteria 3.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly equipment is selected in accordance with The assembly equipment is selected in accordance with The equipment to be used in the assembly process can
instructions on job sheet. instructions or job sheets. The assembly equipment is be identified.
used in accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 3.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is used in a safe manner according to standard The assembly equipment and/or tools are used safely in The safety precautions to be taken with the assembly
operating procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment and/or tools can be identified.

Element 3.3A.3 Assembles fabrications

Criteria 3.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly produced following correct sequence of The correct sequence of operations is followed during the
operations. assembly process. The selected assembly/joining
equipment is used in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 65 of 1445
 MEM 3.3A A Sheet and plate assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 3.3A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assemblies/fabrications joined according to specification The components/fabrications are joined using appropriate The joining technique to be used can be identified. The
using appropriate techniques. techniques in accordance with standard operating procedures to be followed when joining sheet, plate
procedures. and/or fabrications can be given.

Criteria 3.3A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly tested/checked for compliance with job sheet The assembly is tested/checked for compliance with job The tests/checks to be applied to the assembly can be
requirements using standard operating procedures. sheet requirements in accordance with standard operating identified. The action to be taken if an assembly does
procedures. not comply with the job sheet requirement can be
identified.

Element 3.3A.4 Protects assembly from damage

Criteria 3.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assemblies/fabrications are handled and stored in a safe The components, fabrications and/or assembly are The safe handling and storage procedures applicable to
manner least likely to cause damage using standard handled and stored in a safe manner in accordance with components, fabrications and/or assemblies can be
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. identified. The damage that can be done to components,
fabrications and/or assemblies through the use of
inappropriate handling and storage procedures can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 66 of 1445
 MEM 3.3A A Sheet and plate assembly Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers production assembly of pre-fabricated/formed components. Applications of this unit may include manufacture of white goods, appliances, electrical cabinets, etc;
metal furniture, cladding and shelving, box trailer bodies, ductwork and other sheet and plate assemblies. Joining processes may include seaming, bonding, riveting, etc. Assembly
equipment covers jigs, fixtures and other appropriate tools. Assembly process can be carried out autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality
and safety. Where production welding skills are required refer to Unit 5.13A (Perform manual production welding). Where measurement skills are required refer to Unit 2.5C11
(Measure with graduated devices) or Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the assembly of sheet and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
plate or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 67 of 1445
 MEM 3.4A A Electronic/electrical assembly (production) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 3.4A A Electronic/electrical assembly (production)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Assembly Unit Weight 8

Element 3.4A.1 Read and understand job sheets

Criteria 3.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets and instructions understood and followed Job sheets and instructions are obtained in accordance The job requirements can be identified.
correctly. with work site procedures. The job sheet and instructions
are followed correctly throughout the assembly process.

Element 3.4A.2 Select assembly equipment

Criteria 3.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly equipment is selected and used in accordance Appropriate tools and equipment are selected in carrying Items of assembly equipment and their application can be
with instructions or job sheets to standard operating out assembly tasks to standard operating procedures. identified.
procedures.

Criteria 3.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is used in a safe manner. All tools and equipment are used in a safe manner. The hazards associated with the misuse of tools and
equipment can be identified.

Element 3.4A.3 Identify electronic/electrical components

Criteria 3.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify by name, appearance, colour, common electronic Specified electronic and electrical components can be Common electronic and electrical components can be
and electrical components. correctly selected from a range of components. identified by name, colour and appearance.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 68 of 1445
 MEM 3.4A A Electronic/electrical assembly (production) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 3.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify polarity indicators on components. The polarity indicators on common electronic and
electrical components can be identified. The
consequences of connecting electronic and electrical
components with incorrect polarity can be given.

Element 3.4A.4 Assemble components

Criteria 3.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Selects correct components by code/colour or other The correct components are selected for assembly in The components to be assembled can be identified from
identification methods. accordance with instructions and work site procedures. the job instructions.

Criteria 3.4A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Prepares components/devices for soldering or other The components/devices are correctly prepared for A range of termination methods can be identified. The
termination methods. soldering and termination in accordance with instructions preparation requirements for components/devices to be
and work site procedures. soldered can be identified. The preparation requirements
for components/devices that are to be terminated using
non-soldering techniques can be identified.

Criteria 3.4A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Connect cables to a variety of plug and socket Cables are connected to plugs/sockets in accordance with The connection requirements of a variety of plugs and
combinations as required. instructions and work site procedures. sockets can be identified.

Criteria 3.4A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are safely handled and stored using All components are safely handled and stored in Anti-static procedures and techniques can be identified.
appropriate anti-static handling procedures and accordance with work site procedures. Where appropriate The safe handling and storage requirements of electrical
techniques in accordance with standard operating anti-static handling procedures and techniques are used in and electronic components can be identified.
procedure. accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 69 of 1445
 MEM 3.4A A Electronic/electrical assembly (production) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 3.4A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Produces assembly following correct sequence of Correct sequence of operation is followed. The consequences of not following the correct sequence
operations. of operations can be given.

Element 3.4A.5 Performs tests

Criteria 3.4A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly tested/checked for compliance with job sheet All work is checked for conformance to specification in The specifications against which the assembly is to be
requirements using standard operating procedures. accordance with work site procedures and instructions. checked/tested can be identified. The appropriate
test/check procedures can be identified.

Criteria 3.4A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records and inputs production data as required. All production records and reports are completed in The data to be recorded and the frequency of recording
accordance with work site procedures. can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 70 of 1445
 MEM 3.4A A Electronic/electrical assembly (production) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Given a range of workstations, is able to assemble components and be responsible for own quality. Assembly can be carried out autonomously or in a team environment across a
range of industries. This unit is applied to assembly of electronic/electrical components or equipment to pre-determined specification and following pre-determined procedures
including automatic wave soldering machines. Soldering skills, if required, are covered by Unit 5.1A (Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components)) or Unit 5.2A
(High reliability soldering and desoldering). If measurement skills are required then Unit 12.2A (Electrical/electronic measurement) should also be selected. Where the selection and
use of tools is required as part of the assembly process, see Units 18.1A (Use hand tools) and 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations) as appropriate.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documents required.
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant workplace
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The candidate will be
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training relating to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the rework and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
electrical and electronic products/components, or other competencies plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - use accepted
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.
been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 71 of 1445
 MEM 3.5A A Rework and repair (electrical/electronic production) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 3.5A A Rework and repair (electrical/electronic production)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Assembly Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
3.4A Electronic/electrical assembly (production) 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 18.1A Use hand tools
components

Element 3.5A.1 Performs tests

Criteria 3.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly tested for functional requirements from job The appropriate job sheet is obtained in accordance with The functional requirements of the assembly can be
sheet. work site procedures. Appropriate tests are conducted on identified. The tests to be performed on the assembly can
the assembly in accordance with work site procedures. be identified.

Criteria 3.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identifies faults in assembly or soldering. The assembly or soldering fault(s) is identified in Examples of faults in connections and components and
accordance with work site procedures. their symptoms can be given.

Element 3.5A.2 Diagnoses cause of fault problems and rectifies fault

Criteria 3.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cause of fault identified using standard operating The cause of the fault is identified in accordance with work Causes of faults in connections and components can be
procedure. site procedures. given.

Criteria 3.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair and/or rework completed and instructions from job All information relevant to the repair and/or rework to be The repair or rework to be undertaken to return the
cards, drawings, assembly specification. undertaken is obtained in accordance with work site assembly to specification can be identified.
procedures. The repair and/or rework is completed to
specification in accordance with instructions and work site
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 72 of 1445
 MEM 3.5A A Rework and repair (electrical/electronic production) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 3.5A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are safely handled and stored using All components are safely handled and stored in The dangers of static electricity to electrical and
appropriate anti-static handling procedures and accordance with work site procedures. Where appropriate, electronic components can be identified. Anti-static
techniques. anti-static handling procedures and techniques are used in procedures and techniques can be identified. The safe
accordance with work site procedures. handling and storage requirements of electrical and
electronic components can be identified.

Range statement
Given a range of components and printed circuit boards, the worker is able to carry out diagnosis of faults in accordance with established procedures, rework and repair and be
responsible for own quality. Work may be carried out in a team or autonomously. Applications of this unit may also require varying levels of measurement competencies.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documents required.
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant workplace
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The candidate will be
disadvantage the candidate. required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training relating to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the rework and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
electrical and electronic products/components, or other competencies plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - use accepted
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.
been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 73 of 1445
 MEM 3.6A A Setting assembly stations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 3.6A A Setting assembly stations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Assembly Unit Weight 2
Notes - Note: Unit 3.3A (Sheet & plate assembly) if selected also has a prerequisite Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations).
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
3.1A Manual production assembly 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
3.3A Sheet and plate assembly 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
3.4A Electronic/electrical assembly (production) 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 3.6A.1 Identify job requirements

Criteria 3.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets/instructions interpreted and understood. Job sheets and/or instructions obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified.
with workplace procedures.

Element 3.6A.2 Select and use a range of hand tools and equipment
Criteria 3.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hand tools and equipment are used in a safe manner in Hand tools and equipment are used safely in accordance The safety precautions to be taken with hand tools and
accordance with instructions and legislative with instructions, legislative requirements and standard equipment can be identified.
requirements. operating procedures.

Element 3.6A.3 Sets assembly station

Criteria 3.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly station is set up in accordance with defined The assembly station is set up in accordance with The procedures to be followed in setting up assembly
procedures. standard operating procedures. stations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 74 of 1445
 MEM 3.6A A Setting assembly stations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 3.6A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe working practices are observed and implemented. Safe working practices are followed throughout the setting Any safety hazards associated with the assembly station
up process. and/or its setting up can be identified.

Criteria 3.6A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly station is adjusted to meet specifications and Where appropriate, the assembly station is adjusted to The specifications applicable to the assembly station can
operational requirements. meet specifications and operational requirements in be identified. The operational requirements of the
accordance with standard operating procedures. assembly station can be identified. The effect of various
adjustments that can be made to the assembly station, on
the specifications and operational requirements of the
assembly station can be given.

Criteria 3.6A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly station is tested for correct operation. The appropriate tests are carried out on the assembly The tests applicable to the operation of the assembly
station to ensure its correct operation in accordance with station can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

Element 3.6A.4 Maintains equipment

Criteria 3.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Carries out routine maintenance according to standard Routine maintenance is carried out in accordance with The routine maintenance tasks to be carried out can be
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. identified. The frequency at which the routine
maintenance tasks are to be carried out can be identified.

Criteria 3.6A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Worn or damaged components identified and changed. Worn or damaged components are changed in accordance Worn or damaged components can be correctly
with standard operating procedures. identified. The effect of worn or damaged components on
the operational requirements and specifications of the
assembly station can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 75 of 1445
 MEM 3.6A A Setting assembly stations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the setting up of a range of jobbing assembly stations and may include ensuring that appropriate jigs, fixtures, die sets, stores and tooling etc. are in place as
required to meet the production order or schedules. Assembly stations may be used for operations such as riveting, pressing, screwing, tensioning etc. and processes such as
testing, gluing, identification, numbering or simple hot stamping etc. of components/assemblies. For setting of automated assembly processes Unit 3.7A (Setting multistage
continuous process lines) should be selected as appropriate. Machine setting skills are covered by Unit 7.3A (Setting machines (routine)) and Unit 7.4A (Setting machines
(complex)). Where measurement skills are required then Unit 2.5C11 (Measure with graduated devices) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the setting of assembly and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
stations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 76 of 1445
 MEM 3.7A A Setting multistage continuous process lines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 3.7A A Setting multistage continuous process lines

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Assembly Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 3.7A.1 Determine process

Criteria 3.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets/instructions interpreted and understood. Job sheets/instructions are obtained in accordance with The tasks to be undertaken can be identified.
work site procedures.

Element 3.7A.2 Select and use a range of hand tools and equipment
Criteria 3.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hand tools and equipment are used in a safe manner in Hand tools and equipment are safely used in accordance The safety precautions to be taken when using hand
accordance with standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. tools and equipment associated with the process line to
be set can be identified.

Element 3.7A.3 Set process line

Criteria 3.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process line is set up to specifications in accordance with The process line is set to specification in accordance with The specifications applying to the process line can be
standard operating procedure. standard operating procedures. identified.

Criteria 3.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All sensors, process links, displays, monitors, feedback All sensors, process links, displays, monitors, feedback All sensors, process links, displays, monitors, feedback
loops etc. are set up to specifications using standard loops etc. are set to specifications in accordance with loops etc. incorporated in the process line can be
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. identified. The specifications applicable to the sensors,
process links, displays, monitors, feedback loops etc.
incorporated in the process line can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 77 of 1445
 MEM 3.7A A Setting multistage continuous process lines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 3.7A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All safety apparatus is in place and checked for correct All safety apparatus is in place and checked for correct The function of all safety apparatus incorporated in the
operation. operation. process line can be given. The correct operation and
specification for all safety apparatus incorporated in the
process line can be identified.

Criteria 3.7A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process line is run to meet predetermined production and The process line is operated in accordance with standard The product specifications and quality requirements can
quality requirements. operating procedures. The product is checked for be identified. The production requirements can be
conformance to quality requirements and specifications. identified
The process line operation is checked for conformance to
production requirements.

Criteria 3.7A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process line is adjusted to meet specifications and Where appropriate, the process line is adjusted to meet The effect of process line adjustments on product and
operational requirements. specifications and operational requirements in accordance operational specifications can be given.
with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 3.7A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operator(s) instructed as required. Where appropriate, operators are instructed on the The requirements of operators in the operation and
operational requirements of the process line. monitoring of the continuous process line can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 78 of 1445
 MEM 3.7A A Setting multistage continuous process lines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the setting of a wide range of continuous process lines where operations are performed by machines and equipment that are sequentially linked. This may
include mechanical assembly operations, electrical/electronic assembly operations and processes such as welding, testing, insertion, filling, printing, hot stamping etc. Work may be
carried out autonomously or as part of a work team. All work is carried out to predetermined standards of quality, safety and specifications. Where setting or adjustment of
NC/CNC or PLC controls is required, then appropriate units should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the setting of multistage and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
continuous process lines or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 79 of 1445
 MEM 4.1A A Operate melting furnaces Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.1A A Operate melting furnaces

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass

Element 4.1A.1 Materials selected

Criteria 4.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requisitions completed as required according to standard The quantities of materials required are ordered in The appropriate materials ordering/requisitioning
operating procedures. accordance with work site procedures. procedures can be identified. The person(s) responsible
for authorising/approving materials orders/requisitions
can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Charge analysis is undertaken in accordance with The charge analysis is achieved in accordance with work The appropriate sources of information on charge
standard operating procedures. site procedures. analysis can be identified. The material to be loaded into
the furnace can be identified. The percentage
composition of each component material required to
achieve the metal specification can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The charge analysis is converted to furnace charge The quantities of materials required to achieve the The sources of information relating to materials and
weight using standard operating procedures. specified charge weight are correctly determined in composition to produce specified metals can be
accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 4.1A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Charge is weighed according to standard operating Weight of charge is correctly determined in accordance The sources of information for determining correct
procedures. with work site procedures. charge weight can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 80 of 1445
 MEM 4.1A A Operate melting furnaces Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.1A.2 Start up furnace

Criteria 4.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspect furnace for any defects or damage. Furnace inspected for any defects or damage in The sources of information relating to identifying defects
accordance with work site procedures. or damage to furnace can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine operational maintenance of furnace undertaken Routine operational maintenance of the furnace is The routine maintenance to be carried out on the furnace
to standard operating procedures. undertaken in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Start up furnace according to standard operating Start up of the furnace is undertaken in accordance with The sources of information for the starting up of the
procedures. work site procedures. furnace can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Report faults using standard operating procedures. Faults identified during start up of the furnace reported in The sources of information for the reporting of faults can
accordance with work site procedures. be identified.

Element 4.1A.3 Charge furnace

Criteria 4.1A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency/safety procedures identified and followed as Appropriate safety clothing and apparatus is used at all Safety clothing and apparatus and their applications can
necessary. times. be identified. The hazards associated with feeding
materials into a furnace can be identified. The
precautions to be taken to avoid/overcome hazards
associated with feeding of materials into a furnace can be
given.

Criteria 4.1A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are preheated if required according to standard The materials are preheated in accordance with work site The sources of information for preheating materials can
operating procedures. procedures. be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 81 of 1445
 MEM 4.1A A Operate melting furnaces Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.1A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are charged into furnace using standard The materials are fed into the furnace safely and at the The appropriate feed rate for materials to produce a
operating procedures. appropriate rate in accordance with work site procedures. required metal can be identified. The source of
information on feed rates for production of specific
metals can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Suitable areas for emergency unloading of molten metal Suitable areas for emergency unloading of molten metal are The appropriate areas for emergency unloading of molten
are identified and kept available. kept available. metal can be identified.

Element 4.1A.4 Monitor furnace

Criteria 4.1A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Furnace is maintained at optimum operating condition to The furnace is maintained at the optimum operating The optimum operating temperature of the furnace to
standard operating procedure. temperatures throughout the process in accordance with produce a specified metal can be identified. The source
work site procedures. of information on optimum furnace operating
temperatures can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Chemical analysis is taken and remedial action applied as The chemical analysis is taken and remedial action applied The sources of information on chemical analysis can be
required to standard operating procedure. as required in accordance with work site procedures. identified. The material to be input to the furnace can be
identified. The percentage of each material required to
achieve the metal specification can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Furnace is drossed and/or degassed to standard The furnace is drossed/degassed in accordance with work The stage and frequency at which the furnace is to be
operating procedure. site procedures. drossed/degassed can be identified. The function of the
dross in the production of metals can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 82 of 1445
 MEM 4.1A A Operate melting furnaces Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.1A.5 Tap or unload the furnace

Criteria 4.1A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantity of the required metal is identified. The sources of information relating to the correct
quantity of the required metal can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tap rate is carried out to standard operating procedure. The metal is tapped from the furnace safely and at the The appropriate tap rate for the required metal can be
appropriate rate in accordance with work site procedures. identified. The source of information on tap rates for
specific metals can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tapping or unloading undertaken and completed safely The furnace is tapped or unloaded safely in accordance The source of information for tapping or unloading the
according to standard operating procedure. with work site procedures. furnace can be identified.

Element 4.1A.6 Shutdown furnace

Criteria 4.1A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Shut-down of furnace completed to standard operating The furnace is shut-down safely in accordance with work The source of information for shutting down the furnace
procedure. site procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 4.1A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine operational maintenance of furnace undertaken Routine operational maintenance of the furnace is The routine maintenance to be carried out on the furnace
to standard operating procedure. undertaken in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The frequency with which routine
maintenance is to be carried out can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 83 of 1445
 MEM 4.1A A Operate melting furnaces Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers singular or multi, coke, oil, gas fired or electric furnaces and a range of metals. All work is carried out to predetermined specifications and standards of quality,
safety, regulatory and legislative requirement. Work may be undertaken as part of a workteam. Operational maintenance may extend to routine lubrication, cleaning, routine
repair/repointing of refractory. Furnaces would primarily be used for continuous or staged bulk melting/smelting of metals, holding of hot liquids, or the melting of metals for
production processes eg. drawing, casting/moulding, galvanising, extrusion etc. This unit would not normally be selected in a toolmaking or other one-off environment. Simple heat
treatment processes like annealing, heating or quenching processes undertaken as incidental to trade work (eg. toolmaking) are covered by Unit 6.7A (Perform basic incidental
heat/quenching, tempering and annealing).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation of furnaces or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 84 of 1445
 MEM 4.2A A Gravity die casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.2A A Gravity die casting

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass

Element 4.2A.1 Prepare equipment

Criteria 4.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Die coat mixed in correct proportion. The die coat is mixed in the correct proportions in The purpose of the die coat in the gravity die casting
accordance with standard operating procedures. process can be identified. The materials to be used in the
preparation of the die coat can be identified. The
proportions of the materials comprising the die coat can
be identified. The function(s) of the die coat in gravity
die casting can be identified. The procedures for mixing
the die coat can be given.

Criteria 4.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Die temperatures lifted to, or maintained, at the correct The die is maintained at the correct temperature in The procedures for raising the temperature of the die to
level. accordance with standard operating procedures. the correct level and then maintaining that temperature
can be given. Where appropriate, the reasons for raising
the temperature of the die can be given. The correct
operating temperatures for a range of gravity die casting
applications can be given.

Criteria 4.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate safety clothing and apparatus used. The appropriate personal protective clothing and The hazards associated with the gravity die casting
equipment is worn and correctly used at all times during process can be identified. The appropriate safety
the gravity die casting process. equipment and personal protective clothing to be used in
conjunction with the gravity die casting process can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 85 of 1445
 MEM 4.2A A Gravity die casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.2A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Die coat applied in correct sequence and in a safe manner The die coat is applied safely in the correct sequence in The procedures for applying the die coat can be given.
according to standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. The hazards associated with the application of the die
coat can be identified. The equipment to be used in the
application of the die coat can be identified.

Criteria 4.2A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Die correctly located and closed. The two halves of the die are correctly aligned and closed The procedures for aligning and closing the die can be
in accordance with standard operating procedures. given. The method of locking/securing the die halves
together can be identified.

Element 4.2A.2 Carry out manual pouring

Criteria 4.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pour made in manner to reduce porosity and lamination. The molten metal is poured so as to minimise porosity and The procedures to be followed when pouring molten
lamination in the casting. metal can be given. The causes of porosity and
lamination in castings produced by the gravity die
casting process can be identified.

Criteria 4.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conditions identified that contribute to inferior or rejects. Common defects in castings produced by the gravity die
casting process can be identified. The causes of those
defects can be given. The procedures to be followed to
minimise the number of inferior or reject castings
produced can be given.

Criteria 4.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowance is made for adequate curing time. Adequate curing time is allowed before subsequent steps The reasons for allowing the casting to cure can be
in the casting process are undertaken. explained. The sources of information on curing times for
castings of various volumes and materials can be
identified. The curing times for a range of given casting
situations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 86 of 1445
 MEM 4.2A A Gravity die casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.2A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pour made are continuous and at appropriate rate. The molten metal is poured at a continuous and The reasons for ensuring that pours are continuous and
appropriate rate. at an appropriate rate can be given. The effects of
non-continuous pours and/or inappropriate pouring
rates on casting quality and personal safety can be
identified.

Criteria 4.2A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Monitoring of die condition carried out and re-spraying The condition of the die is checked prior to each pour. The reasons for checking the die prior to each pour can
occurs as required. Where appropriate, the die coat is repaired/replaced in be given. The procedures for repairing/replacing the die
accordance with standard operating procedures. coat can be given. The effect on casting quality of an
incomplete die coat can be identified.

Element 4.2A.3 Remove materials

Criteria 4.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts removed and stored in a manner that minimises All castings are removed and stored in a manner that The procedures for removing castings from the die and
damage. minimises damage and in accordance with standard storing them can be given. The damage that can be
operating procedures. caused to castings through inappropriate handling and
storage can be identified. The hazards associated with
removing castings from the die can be identified.

Element 4.2A.4 Clean die

Criteria 4.2A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Shot blaster operated in a safe manner and according to The shot blaster is operated safely in accordance with The procedures to be followed when using a shot blaster
standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. can be given. The reasons for shot blasting the die can
be given.
Criteria 4.2A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Chemical analysis is taken and remedial action applied as The appropriate safety clothing and equipment is used The hazards associated with the shot blasting process
required to standard operating procedure. correctly throughout the shot blasting process. can be identified. The personal safety clothing and
equipment to be used in conjunction with the shot
blasting process can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 87 of 1445
 MEM 4.2A A Gravity die casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 4.2A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Furnace is drossed and/or degassed to standard The die coat is cleaned from the body of the die in The procedures for removing die coat from the body of
operating procedure. conformance to specifications and in accordance with the die can be given. The specifications to be achieved in
standard operating procedures. removing the die coat from the die can be identified.

Criteria 4.2A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work area cleaned of coating and shot residue to All coating and shot residue is removed from the work area The procedures for removing shot and die coat residue
appropriate standard. in accordance with standard operating procedures. from the work area can be given. The tools and
equipment necessary to clean the work area can be
identified. The storage requirements of the residue
removed from the work area can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 88 of 1445
 MEM 4.2A A Gravity die casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to gravity casting into permanent die. All work is carried out to predetermined specifications and standards of quality and safety. Work is carried out
autonomously or as part of a workteam. Metals used in this area may include aluminium, aluminium alloys and other non-ferrous and ferrous metals.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: -all tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required the candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: -any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures -any relevant product and manufacturing specifications - any relevant
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. codes, standards, manuals and reference materials the candidate will be required to: - orally, or
by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor -identify
colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate - present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with gravity die casting or other and efficient working environment - take responsibility for the quality of their own work - plan
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures - perform all tasks to specification - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 89 of 1445
 MEM 4.3A A Operate pressure die casting machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.3A A Operate pressure die casting machine

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass

Element 4.3A.1 Conduct pre-operational checks

Criteria 4.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Start up procedure conducted according to the standard All relevant work instructions, etc. are obtained in The pre start checks to be undertaken can be identified.
operating procedures. accordance with work place procedures. All pre start-up The procedures for carrying out pre start checks can be
checks are carried out in accordance with standard given. The procedures for starting up the die casting
operating procedures. The die casting machine is started machine can be given. The adjustments that can be made
in accordance with standard operating procedures. to the die casting machine to ensure correct operation of
the machine can be identified.

Criteria 4.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
If necessary, shot size adjusted. Where appropriate, the shot size is adjusted in accordance The procedures for adjusting the shot size can be given.
with standard operating procedures. The effects of incorrect shot size on the quality of the die
casting can be identified.

Criteria 4.3A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
If applicable, nitrogen and/or vacuum systems checked. Where appropriate, nitrogen and/or vacuum systems are The function of nitrogen and vacuum systems in the die
checked for correct operation in accordance with standard casting process can be identified. The procedures for
operating procedures. checking/ adjusting nitrogen and/or vacuum systems can
be given.
Criteria 4.3A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
If applicable, functional check made of picking robot and Where appropriate, the picking robot and component The correct function of a picking robot and the
component gripper adjusted as necessary. gripper are checked for correct operation. Where component gripper can be described. The procedures for
appropriate, the picking robot is adjusted in accordance adjusting the picking robot can be given. The effects of
with standard operating procedures. the adjustments on robot performance can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 90 of 1445
 MEM 4.3A A Operate pressure die casting machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 4.3A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Die spray nozzles adjusted as necessary. Where appropriate, the die spray nozzles are adjusted in The reasons for spraying the die can be given. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for adjusting the die spray nozzles can be
given.

Criteria 4.3A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Planning carried out that ensures efficient flow of The sequence of operations to be performed on the die The operations to be performed subsequent to the die
finished product ie: breaking of runners, stacking cast product is planned to ensure efficient product flow. casting of the product can be identified. The tools and
baskets, bins, conveyors. equipment necessary to carry out those operations can
be identified. The locations at which those operations are
to be carried out can be identified. The appropriate
means of transporting/conveying the die cast product
between those locations can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen transporting/conveying method
can be given.

Element 4.3A.2 Operate all functions on machine control panel

Criteria 4.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate knowledge of die casting process applied in Die cast products are produced to specification using all The die casting process can be correctly described. The
the operation, adjustment and monitoring of machine functions of the machine control panel in accordance with effect of adjusting each control on the machine control
functions. standard operating procedures. panel on the quality of the die casting produced can be
explained. The procedures for adjusting the operation of
the die casting machine can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 91 of 1445
 MEM 4.3A A Operate pressure die casting machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.3A.3 Operate machine to produce castings

Criteria 4.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operated to standard operating procedures The die casting machine is operated in accordance with The procedures for operating the die casting machine
including maintenance of liquid metal and die operating standard operating procedures. The liquid metal is can be given. The appropriate quantity of liquid level to
conditions. maintained in accordance with standard operating be maintained can be identified. The operating
procedures. parameters to be maintained during the die casting
process can be identified.

Criteria 4.3A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Runners broken off. The runners are broken off from the casting in accordance The procedures for removing runners from the die
with standard operating procedures. casting can be given.

Criteria 4.3A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Castings are visually inspected for porosity, cracks, tears, The castings produced are visually checked for The procedures for inspecting die castings can be given.
splits, sinks, cold shuts, tinning and surface crazing conformance to specifications in accordance with standard The common faults to be found in die castings can be
according to standard operating procedures. operating procedures. identified. The probable causes of each type of fault can
be given.

Criteria 4.3A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Castings handled in a manner that minimises risk of All castings are handled in a manner that minimises The damage that can be caused to castings through
damage. damage to the casting in accordance with standard inappropriate handling and storage can be identified.
operating procedures.

Criteria 4.3A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
First-off castings produced, visually inspected and The first-off castings produced are submitted for checking The procedures for checking first-off castings for
submitted for checking against specifications. against specifications in accordance with standard conformance to specification can be given. The
operating procedures. specifications of the die cast product can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 92 of 1445
 MEM 4.3A A Operate pressure die casting machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.3A.4 Monitor furnace

Criteria 4.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Furnace is maintained at optimum operating condition to The die casting machine is shut down in accordance with The procedures for shutting down the die casting
standard operating procedure. standard operating procedures. machine can be given. The hazards associated with the
shutting down of the die casting machine can be
identified.

Range statement
This unit applies to all pressure die casting machines. All work is carried out to predetermined specifications and standards of quality and safety. Work may be carried out
autonomously or as part of a work team.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation of pressure die and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
casting machinery or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 93 of 1445
 MEM 4.4A A Prepare and mix sand for metal moulding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.4A A Prepare and mix sand for metal moulding
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4

Element 4.4A.1 Load mixer (mill/muller)

Criteria 4.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All pre start-up checks performed safely and according to All relevant job instructions, specifications and The pre start checks to be undertaken prior to mixing the
standard operating procedures. procedures are obtained in accordance with work site sand can be identified. The procedures for starting the
procedures. All start checks are carried out in accordance mixer can be given.
with work site procedures.

Criteria 4.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Formula for sand mix is determined according to standard The composition of the sand mix can be identified. The
operating procedure. proportions of each component of the sand mix can be
identified.

Criteria 4.4A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials measured and loaded according to formula All materials are loaded into the mixer in the correct The procedure for loading the mixer can be given. The
specification. proportions in accordance with work site procedures. hazards associated with the loading of the mixer can be
identified.

Element 4.4A.2 Mix sand

Criteria 4.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sand mixed for correct time according to specifications. The sand is mixed for the correct time in accordance with The time for which the sand is to be mixed can be
work site procedures. identified. The source(s) of information for a variety of
sand formulas can be identified. The procedure for mixing
the sand can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 94 of 1445
 MEM 4.4A A Prepare and mix sand for metal moulding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Monitor performance of mixer and the condition of the The mixer is monitored for correct operation in accordance Factors which may inhibit the correct operation of the
sand. with work site procedures. mixer can be identified.

Criteria 4.4A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintain material supply, eg: water, chemicals, sand. An adequate supply of raw materials is maintained The procedures for obtaining raw materials can be given.
throughout the mixing process.

Criteria 4.4A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Report faults. Where appropriate, all faults detected are reported in The procedures for reporting faults in the mixer/mixing
accordance with work site procedures. process can be given. The authority to whom faults are
reported can be identified. Common faults in the mixing
process can be identified, and probable causes can be
given.

Element 4.4A.3 Take and test samples

Criteria 4.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Extract sample correctly. Samples are extracted from the mixer in accordance with The procedure for taking samples from the mixer can be
work site procedures. given. The hazards associated with taking samples from
the mixer can be identified.

Criteria 4.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test applied in accordance with standard operating Sand samples are tested using appropriate tools, Tests to be performed on the sand samples taken can be
procedure. equipment and techniques in accordance with work site identified. The procedures to be followed when testing
procedures. samples can be given. The tools and equipment required
to test the sand can be identified.

Criteria 4.4A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Compare test results against specification. Test results are compared against specifications of the
sand mixture.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 95 of 1445
 MEM 4.4A A Prepare and mix sand for metal moulding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.4A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments to formula/mix made as required in Where appropriate the recipe/mixture is adjusted to ensure Where the sand mix does not comply with the
accordance with standard operating procedures. that the sand conforms to specifications in accordance specification, the adjustments to be made to the
with work site procedures. recipe/mixture can be identified. The reasons for making
the adjustments identified can be given. The effects of
varying each component material on the characteristics
of the sand mixture can be explained. The procedure for
adjusting the sand mix can be given.

Element 4.4A.4 Discharge mixture

Criteria 4.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load discharged correctly according to standard The mixture is discharged from the mixer safely in The procedure for discharging the sand mixture from the
operating procedure. accordance with work place procedures. mixer can be given. The hazards associated with
discharging the mixed sand can be identified.

Criteria 4.4A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unwanted treated sand is disposed of according to The unwanted treated sand is disposed of in accordance The procedures for disposing of unwanted treated sand
standard operating procedure. with work place procedures. can be explained. The environmental hazards associated
with disposing of unwanted treated sand incorrectly can
be explained.

Element 4.4A.5 Clean mixer

Criteria 4.4A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mixer is shut down to standard safety and operating The mixer is shut down safely in accordance with The procedures for shutting down the mixer can be
procedures. workplace procedures. explained.

Criteria 4.4A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mixer cleaned according to standard operating The mixer is left in a safe and clean condition. The reason for cleaning mixer after use can be given.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 96 of 1445
 MEM 4.4A A Prepare and mix sand for metal moulding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applied to the mixing of sand in continuous and batch type mills. All work is carried out to predetermined specifications and standards of quality and safety. Work is
carried out autonomously or as part of a team and in accordance with legislative and statutory requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the preparation and mixing of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
sand for metal moulding or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 97 of 1445
 MEM 4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 16
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 4.5A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing, instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant specifications, drawings, instructions and The specifications to be achieved can be identified. A
understood. procedures are obtained in accordance with work place variety of pattern types and their application can be
procedures. identified. The features of a sand mould and their
function can be identified. A variety of core types and
their application can be identified.

Element 4.5A.2 Determine sequence of operation

Criteria 4.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequence of operation including job set up is determined The sequence of operation including job set up is The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
for maximum efficiency and to meet job specifications. determined in accordance with work place procedures. procedures to be followed in producing moulds and
cores by hand can be described.

Criteria 4.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate material selected. The appropriate materials for producing moulds and cores The procedures for obtaining the materials for producing
selected and obtained in accordance with work place moulds and cores can be identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 98 of 1445
 MEM 4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.5A.3 Select inspect and prepare pattern equipment

Criteria 4.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern equipment correctly identified from specifications The pattern equipment correctly identified from The procedures for obtaining patterns can be identified.
according to standard operating procedure. specifications in accordance with work place procedures. All parts of the patterns can be identified.

Criteria 4.5A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern equipment inspected to specifications and The pattern is checked for conformance to specifications The most appropriate measuring devices for checking
damaged patterns are identified for repair or replacement in accordance with work place procedures. patterns can be identified. The procedures for checking
to standard operating procedure. patterns can be identified. The procedures for repair or
replacement of damaged patterns can be identified.

Criteria 4.5A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern is assembled to specification. The pattern is assembled to specifications in accordance The procedure for assembling the pattern can be
with work place procedures. identified.

Criteria 4.5A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern equipment set up to specification according to The pattern and all necessary mould features are The procedures for setting up the pattern equipment can
standard operating procedure. appropriately positioned in the moulding box in be identified. The procedures for preparing two and three
accordance with work place procedures. box moulds can be given. The reason for choosing the
selected position and size of each mould feature can be
explained.

Element 4.5A.4 Make mould and core

Criteria 4.5A.4.0 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Core positioned in prints utilising chaplets and chills as The core is positioned in prints utilising chaplets and The procedures for positioning the core in prints and
required and vented to specification according to chills, vented in accordance with work place procedures. venting can be identified. The use of chaplets and chills
standard operating procedure. can be explained.
Criteria 4.5A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select and position appropriate moulding/core-making The moulding/core-making equipment are appropriately The procedures for setting up the moulding/core-making
equipment according to standard operating procedure. positioned in the moulding box in accordance with work equipment can be identified. The reason for choosing the
place procedures. selected position and size of each mould/core can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 99 of 1445
 MEM 4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 4.5A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mould closed and checked for compliance to component The mould closed and checked for compliance to The procedures for closing the mould, and checking for
specification in accordance with standard operating component specification in accordance with work place compliance to component specification can be explained.
procedure. procedures.

Criteria 4.5A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select appropriate moulding media to produce mould and The appropriate moulding media for producing moulds and A range of moulding media and their applications can be
core to specification. cores selected and obtained in accordance with work given. The appropriate moulding media for the object to
place procedures. be cast can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen moulding media can be given.

Criteria 4.5A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mould secured according to standard operating The mould secured in accordance with work place The procedures and equipment required for securing the
procedure. procedures. mould can be explained.

Criteria 4.5A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pouring basin is selected or manufactured to The pouring basin is selected and/or manufactured to The procedures for selecting and positioning the pouring
specification and positioned in accordance with standard specification, and positioned in accordance with work basin can be explained. The procedures, tools and
operating procedure. place procedures. equipment necessary to manufacture and repair damaged
pouring basins can be identified.

Criteria 4.5A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Use moulding media to produce mould and core The pattern and all necessary mould features are packed The procedures for packing the mould boxes with
according to standard operating procedure. with moulding media in accordance with work place moulding media can be given.
procedures.
Criteria 4.5A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mould and cores rammed up with joints and drawbacks The mould and cores rammed up with joints and The procedures for ramming up moulds and cores with
as required to standard operating procedure. drawbacks in accordance with work place procedures. joints and drawbacks can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 100 of 1445
 MEM 4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 4.5A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parting and stripping systems are utilised in accordance The most appropriate mould parting and stripping system A range of parting and stripping systems and their
with standard operating procedure. is selected and used in accordance with work place applications can be given. The reasons for selecting the
procedures. chosen parting and stripping systems can be given.

Criteria 4.5A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Loose pieces, vents, risers and runners positioned and The loose pieces, vents, risers and runners positioned and The procedures for positioning and securing loose
secured as required to standard operating procedure. secured in accordance with work place procedures. pieces, vents, risers and runners can be given.

Criteria 4.5A.4.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern and loose pieces removed from mould and core The loose pieces, vents, risers and runners removed in The procedures for removing loose pieces, vents, risers
box in a safe manner least likely to cause damage to the accordance with work place procedures. and runners can be given. The precautions to be taken
pattern and in accordance with standard operating during removing loose pieces, vents, risers and runners
procedure. to minimise damage to the mould can be given.

Criteria 4.5A.4.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mould is inspected and repaired as required. The mould is visually inspected for conformance to The procedures for repairing moulds can be given. The
specifications and where appropriate, the mould is repaired tools and equipment necessary to repair damage moulds
in accordance with work place procedures. can be identified. Common mould defects and their
causes can be identified. Mould defects which are
repairable can be identified.

Criteria 4.5A.4.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mould and core cleaned and painted according to The mould and core is cleaned and painted in accordance The procedures for cleaning and painting moulds and
specification using standard operating procedure. with work place procedures. cores can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 101 of 1445
 MEM 4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.5A.5 Clean and restore work area

Criteria 4.5A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All materials/debris cleared and work site cleaned and left The work site cleaned of all materials/debris and left in a The hazards associated with working in a moulding
in a safe state. safe state in accordance with work place procedures. environment can be identified. The housekeeping
procedures to be employed to minimise hazards in the
moulding environment can be explained.

Criteria 4.5A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unwanted treated sand is disposed of according to The unwanted treated sand is disposed of in accordance The procedures for disposing of unwanted treated sand
standard operating procedure. with workplace procedures. can be explained. The environmental hazards associated
with disposing of unwanted treated sand incorrectly can
be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 102 of 1445
 MEM 4.5A A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of sand moulds and cores by manual (jobbing) methods. All work is carried out to predetermined specifications and standards of quality and
safety. Work may be done autonomously or in a team environment. The types of patterns may include flatback and plated patterns, multi-joint, strickle, consumable, split patterns,
loose piece patterns, patterns requiring odd sides, cored moulds, drag and cope mould etc. A range of moulding media such as, green sand, shell sand, chemically bonded media
etc. may be used. Unwanted treated moulding/core sand is disposed of according to legislative and statutory requirements. Where lifting and moving moulds and cores requires the
use of mobile load shifting equipment or overhead cranes appropriate manual handling units should also be selected. Where the securing of moulds requires welding skills, see unit
5.12A (Perform routine manual metal arc welding) and Unit 5.50 (Perform routine gas metal arc welding) as appropriate.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the production of moulds and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
cores or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 103 of 1445
 MEM 4.6A A Operate sand moulding and core making machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.6A A Operate sand moulding and core making machines
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 8

Element 4.6A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant specifications, drawings, instructions and The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
understood. procedures are obtained in accordance with work place specifications to be achieved can be identified. The
procedures. procedures to be followed in producing moulds and
cores by machine can be described. A variety of pattern
types and their application can be identified. The
features of a sand mould and their function can be
identified. A variety of core types and their application
can be identified.

Element 4.6A.2 Conduct pre-operational checks

Criteria 4.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern/core box selected and inspected to specifications The pattern/core is correctly set up in the bolster in The procedures for setting up the pattern/core in the
and cleaned as required. Damaged patterns/core boxes accordance with standard operating procedures. The core bolster can be given. The correct method of locating the
are identified for repair or replacement to standard box is correctly located in the machine in accordance with core box in the machine can be identified.
operating procedure. standard operating procedures.

Criteria 4.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern/core box is set up in bolster and core box The pattern is checked for conformance to specification The procedures for checking patterns for conformance to
according to standard operating procedures. and inspected for signs of damage in accordance with specifications can be given. The appropriate measuring
standard operating procedures. devices to be used to check the pattern for conformance
to specification can be identified. Examples of damage to
patterns and their effect on casting quality can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 104 of 1445
 MEM 4.6A A Operate sand moulding and core making machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.6A.3 Operate machine to produce mould/cores

Criteria 4.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select appropriate moulding media to produce mould and The appropriate moulding media for producing moulds and A range of moulding media and their applications can be
core to specification. cores selected and obtained in accordance with workplace given. The appropriate moulding media for the object to
procedures. be cast can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen moulding media can be given.

Criteria 4.6A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Moulds/cores filled to specification according to The pattern and all necessary mould features are filled with The procedures for filling the mould boxes with moulding
standard operating procedures. moulding media in accordance with workplace procedures. media can be given.

Criteria 4.6A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine is operated in accordance with standard The machine is operated safely in accordance with The procedures for operating the moulding/core making
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. machine can be given. The hazards associated with the
operation of moulding/core making machines can be
given.

Criteria 4.6A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine is unloaded safely to standard operating The machine is unloaded safely in accordance with The procedures for unloading the moulding/core making
procedures. standard operating procedures. machine can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 105 of 1445
 MEM 4.6A A Operate sand moulding and core making machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.6A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Moulds/cores are stripped, inspected and painted as The moulds/cores are stripped in accordance with The procedures for stripping the mould can be given.
required according to standard operating procedures. standard operating procedure. The moulds/cores are The precautions to be taken during mould stripping to
visually inspected for conformance to specification. The minimise damage to the mould can be identified. The
moulds/cores are repaired in accordance with standard procedures for repairing the moulds and cores can be
operating procedure. Where appropriate moulds/cores are given. The tools and equipment necessary to repair
painted with the appropriate medium in accordance with damaged moulds and cores can be identified Common
standard operating procedures. mould/core defects and their causes can be identified.
Those defects that are repairable can be recognised. The
purpose of painting moulds/cores can be given The
procedures for painting moulds/cores can be given. The
appropriate painting medium can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen painting medium can be
explained.

Element 4.6A.4 Assemble moulds/cores

Criteria 4.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Moulds/cores are dried, glued and vented as required to Where appropriate, the core(s) are assembled and vented The specification for the core(s) can be identified. The
specification and closed in accordance with standard in conformance to specifications. Where appropriate, the method of core assembly and venting can be identified.
operating procedures. mould is closed and secured against lift in accordance with The procedures for closing and securing the mould
standard operating procedure. boxes can be given. The methods of securing the mould
against lift can be identified. The causes of lift in the
moulding process can be explained.

Criteria 4.6A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Runner bush is set to specification as required. The runner bush is set for pouring in accordance with The function of the runner bush can be explained. The
standard operating procedure. procedures for setting the runner bush can be given.

Element 4.6A.5 Clean and restore work area

Criteria 4.6A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All materials/debris cleared and work site cleaned and left The work site cleaned of all materials/debris and left in a The hazards associated with working in a moulding
in a safe state. safe state in accordance with workplace procedures. environment can be identified. The housekeeping
procedures to be employed to minimise hazards in the
moulding environment can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 106 of 1445
 MEM 4.6A A Operate sand moulding and core making machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 4.6A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unwanted treated sand is disposed of according to The unwanted treated sand is disposed of in accordance The procedures for disposing of unwanted treated sand
standard operating procedures. with workplace procedures. can be explained. The environmental hazards associated
with disposing of unwanted treated sand incorrectly can
be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 107 of 1445
 MEM 4.6A A Operate sand moulding and core making machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the operation of a range of automatic and semi-automatic sand moulding and core making machines. Work may be carried out autonomously or as part of a work
team. Work is carried out to predetermined specification and safety standards of quality and safety. A range of moulding media such as green sand, shell sand, chemically bonded
media etc. may be used. Unwanted treated moulding/core sand is disposed of according to legislative and statutory requirements. Where lifting and moving moulds and cores
requires the use of mobile load shifting equipment or overhead cranes appropriate materials handling units should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation of moulding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and core making machines or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 108 of 1445
 MEM 4.7A A Pour molten metal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.7A A Pour molten metal

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass

Element 4.7A.1 Prepare for pouring molten metal

Criteria 4.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition of mould checked according to standard All relevant work instructions, specifications and The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
operating procedures. procedures obtained in accordance with standard specifications of the liquid metal to be poured can be
operating procedures. identified. The appropriate pouring sequence can be
identified. The reasons for choosing the selected pouring
sequence can be given. Any hazards associated with the
selected pouring sequence can be identified. The
temperature at which the liquid metal is to be poured can
be identified.

Criteria 4.7A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition of ladle checked according to standard Where appropriate, relevant personnel are consulted with The quantity of liquid metal to be poured is identified
operating procedure. respect to quantities of liquid metal required. from available information. Where appropriate, personnel
to be consulted with respect to the quantities of liquid
metal required can be identified.

Criteria 4.7A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Temperature of molten metal checked for conformance to The condition of the ladle is checked for conformance to The ladle specifications can be identified. The
specification and pouring method sequenced to standard specifications in accordance with standard operating procedures for checking the ladle can be given. Common
operating procedures. procedures. ladle defects/non-conformances can be identified. The
procedures for rectifying common ladle
defects/non-conformances can be given.

Criteria 4.7A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Capacity of the required pour is identified against The capacity of the ladle is checked against the required The consequences of undersizing the ladle can be
specification according to standard operating pour in accordance with standard operating procedures. identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 109 of 1445
 MEM 4.7A A Pour molten metal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.7A.2 Preheat or prepare ladle

Criteria 4.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ladle is preheated/prepared to receive molten metal. The ladle is preheated to the appropriate temperature to The temperature to which the ladle is to be preheated can
receive the liquid metal in accordance with standard be identified. The procedures for preparing the ladle to
operating procedures. receive hot metal can be given. The possible
consequences of pouring liquid metal into an
inappropriately preheated/prepared ladle can be
explained.

Element 4.7A.3 Transfer ladle to furnace

Criteria 4.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety clips checked according to standard operating The safety clips are checked for correct operation in The purpose of the safety clips can be explained. The
procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for checking the correct operation of the
safety clips can be given.

Criteria 4.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ladle filled and transferred to pouring area in accordance The ladle is filled safely from the furnace in accordance The procedures for filling the ladle can be given. The
with standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. The ladle is hazards associated with the filling of the ladle with liquid
transferred safely to the pouring area in accordance with metal can be identified. The procedures for transferring
standard operating procedures. the ladle to the pouring area can be given. The hazards
associated with transferring liquid metal in a ladle can be
identified. The safety precautions to be taken during
filling and transfer of the ladle can be identified.

Criteria 4.7A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Additives determined from specification and added to
molten metal as required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 110 of 1445
 MEM 4.7A A Pour molten metal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.7A.4 Maintain quality of metal as required

Criteria 4.7A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Slag/dross removed where necessary. Where appropriate, the slag/dross is safely removed from The procedures for removing slag/dross from the ladle
the ladle in accordance with standard operating can be given. The safety precautions to be taken when
procedures. removing slag/dross from the ladle can be identified.

Criteria 4.7A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Temperature monitored as required. Where appropriate, the temperature of the liquid metal in The procedure for monitoring the temperature of liquid
the ladle is monitored in accordance with standard metal in the ladle can be given. The appropriate
operating procedures. measuring device for monitoring the temperature of liquid
metal in the ladle can be identified.

Criteria 4.7A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Chemical analysis is taken and remedial action applied as Where appropriate, a chemical analysis of the liquid metal The appropriate remedial action required to maintain the
required to standard operating procedures. in the ladle is taken in accordance with standard operating chemical analysis in accordance with standard operating
procedures. procedure can be identified.

Element 4.7A.5 Pour molten metal

Criteria 4.7A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Personnel in immediate area of the metal pour informed The characteristics of the mould are checked for The procedures for checking moulds prior to pouring can
that pour is to take place and appropriate safety clothing conformance to specifications in accordance with standard be given. The characteristics of the mould to be checked
and equipment is used as specified in standard operating operating procedures. can be identified. The consequences of pouring liquid
procedures. metal into a mould whose characteristics do not conform
to specifications can be explained.

Criteria 4.7A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Metal is poured safely to specification and in accordance A test bar is poured in accordance with standard operating The procedures for pouring test bars can be given. The
with standard operating procedures. procedures. reasons for pouring test bars can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 111 of 1445
 MEM 4.7A A Pour molten metal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 4.7A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Metal is poured at an appropriate and continuous rate. The liquid metal is poured so as to minimise porosity and The procedures to be followed when pouring liquid metal
lamination in the casting in accordance with standard into moulds can be given. The causes of porosity and
operating procedures. lamination in castings can be identified.

Criteria 4.7A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test bar is poured in accordance with standard operating The liquid metal is poured at a continuous and appropriate The reasons for ensuring that pours are continuous and
procedures as required. rate in accordance with standard operating procedures. at an appropriate rate can be given. The effects of
non-continuous pours and/or inappropriate pouring
rates on casting quality and personal safety can be
identified.

Element 4.7A.6 Empty excess metal from ladle

Criteria 4.7A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pigs poured and tagged. Any unused liquid metal is poured into pigs and correctly The procedures for pouring pigs can be given. The
tagged in accordance with standard operating procedures. reasons for pouring pigs and tagging them can be
explained.

Element 4.7A.7 Return ladle

Criteria 4.7A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ladle emptied, cleaned and maintained according to The ladle is emptied, cleaned and maintained in The procedures for emptying, cleaning and maintaining
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. ladles can be given. The tools and equipment necessary
to clean and maintain ladles can be identified. The safety
precautions to be taken when cleaning and maintaining
ladles can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 112 of 1445
 MEM 4.7A A Pour molten metal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to manual pouring of molten metal as part of foundry processes. Work may be carried out autonomously or as part of a work team and to predetermined
specifications and standards of quality and safety. This unit should not be selected for one-off pouring of molten metal undertaken for sample castings in toolmaking manufacturing
and maintenance of wires, ropes and slings, re-metalling of bearings, etc. Operational maintenance of ladles may include routine lubrication of ladles as well as repairs and cleaning
of refractory. Where lifting and moving of ladles requires the use of overhead cranes appropriate materials handling units should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the pouring of liquid metal or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 113 of 1445
 MEM 4.8A A Fettle and trim metal castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.8A A Fettle and trim metal castings/forgings

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.8A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.8A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job instructions and specifications interpreted and Job instructions/specifications are obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
understood. with work site procedures. specifications to be achieved can be identified.

Criteria 4.8A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct mouldings and/or castings/forgings located and The correct castings are located. The castings are
arranged for efficient processing. arranged for efficient processing in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Element 4.8A.2 Observe safety requirements

Criteria 4.8A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Personal protection equipment selected and used The excess metal to be removed is correctly identified. The The reasons for removing excess metal can be given.
correctly. casting is visually checked for suitability for further Casting defects that cannot be rectified by fettling or
processing in accordance with standard operating trimming can be identified. The reasons for not
procedures. proceeding with the processing of castings with visually
detected defects can be given.

Criteria 4.8A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Castings/forgings handled using appropriate manual or The appropriate handling procedure is carried out in The appropriate handling procedure can be identified.
mechanical handling procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 4.8A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Castings/forgings are stored or positioned in a safe All casting and forging are positioned safely in The standard operating procedure for safely positioning
manner. accordance with standard operating procedures. castings/forging can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 114 of 1445
 MEM 4.8A A Fettle and trim metal castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.8A.3 Identify excess material for removal

Criteria 4.8A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Remove casting from mould and/or remove sand media Where appropriate, hand tools are correctly selected and Hand tools and their application to fettling and trimming
from casting as required. used in accordance with standard operating procedures. processes can be identified.

Criteria 4.8A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Castings/forgings visually checked as suitable for further Where appropriate, power tools are correctly selected and Power tools and their application to fettling and trimming
processing and excess metal correctly identified in used in accordance with standard operating procedures. processes can be identified. The grades of grinding
accordance with standard operating procedures. disks/belts and their application can be given.

Element 4.8A.4 Select correct tools and equipment

Criteria 4.8A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cleaning method selected. Rumbling/shot Excess metal is removed using appropriate methods and Appropriate combinations of tools and equipment can be
blast/sand blast equipment set to specification and used equipment in accordance with standard operating identified to remove excess metal efficiently and achieve
in accordance with standard operating procedures as procedures. specified surface finishes.
required.

Criteria 4.8A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate hand tools selected and used eg: files,
chisels, hammers etc.

Criteria 4.8A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate power tools and accessories selected and
used eg: saws, croppers, grinding disks/belts (including
grades), swing and pedestal grinders etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 115 of 1445
 MEM 4.8A A Fettle and trim metal castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.8A.5 Remove excess material

Criteria 4.8A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Excess metal (eg: runners, risers and flashing) removed The appropriate personal protection equipment is selected The hazards associated with fettling and trimming metal
using appropriate methods and equipment in accordance and worn. All equipment safety guards are in place and can be identified. Personal protective equipment and its
with standard operating procedures. used correctly. application can be identified.

Criteria 4.8A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Excess metal suitable for recycling identified in Castings are handled in accordance with legal The procedures for safe lifting and manual handling of
accordance with standard operating procedures. requirements, company procedures and National castings can be given. The mechanical handling devices
Occupational Health and Safety Commission Guidelines. available at the work site and their application can be
Where appropriate, mechanical handling equipment is identified.
used safely in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 4.8A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Excess metallic materials are identified from specifications The excess material to be trimmed is identified in
and isolated as required according to standard operating accordance with standard operating procedures.
procedures.

Element 4.8A.6 Castings/forgings quality assessed

Criteria 4.8A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Castings/forgings visually checked for conformance with Castings are visually checked for conformance to
specifications following standard operating procedures. specification in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 4.8A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Castings/forgings rejected or set aside and identified for Where appropriate, castings are rejected, set aside for The casting defects that can be remedied by further work
further consideration or remedial action in accordance further consideration or remedial action in accordance with can be identified. The casting defects that cannot be
with standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. remedied by further work can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 116 of 1445
 MEM 4.8A A Fettle and trim metal castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.8A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults reported/recorded as required using standard Where appropriate, casting defects are reported/recorded The reporting/recording requirements for casting defects
operating procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. detected can be identified.

Element 4.8A.7 Protects castings/forgings from damage

Criteria 4.8A.7. Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 117 of 1445
 MEM 4.8A A Fettle and trim metal castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit is intended to apply to the skills used in the dressing of castings/forgings formed by a variety of processes. Work is carried out autonomously or as part of a work team.
Equipment used may include saws, croppers, grinders, rumbling equipment etc. Flame and air arc cutting equipment is covered by another unit. For preparation of surfaces using
blasting processes including hydro-blast, refer to Unit 8.11A (Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means). Where lifting and moving moulds and/or
castings/forgings requires the use of mobile loadshifting equipment or overhead cranes, appropriate materials handling units should also be selected. Where production packaging
and labelling of the finished product is required Unit 11.6A (Production packaging) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with fettling and trimming of metal and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
castings, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 118 of 1445
MEM 4.9A B Inspect/test castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.9A B Inspect/test castings/forgings

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to inspect castings and forgings including assessing the quality of the casting/forging, identifying defects, testing the
castings/forging and instigating corrective action.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
4.2A Gravity die casting 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
4.3A Operate pressure die casting machine 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
4.5A Produce moulds and cores by hand (jobbing) 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
6.1A Hand forging 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 5
6.2A Hammer forging 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 4.9A.1 Assess castings/forgings

Criteria 4.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings correctly interpreted All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications are The key features and specifications of the castings/forgings
obtained in accordance with workplace procedures can be correctly identified

Criteria 4.9A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measuring equipment correctly selected and used The appropriate measuring equipment is used to check the The appropriate measuring equipment to measure the key
casting/forging for conformance to specification features of the casting/forging can be identified The
reasons for selecting the chosen measuring equipment can
be given
Element 4.9A.2 Identify casting/forging defects
Criteria 4.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct sampling procedure applied according to The correct sampling procedure is used to check The procedures for sampling castings/forgings can be given
standard operating procedures castings/forgings for defects in accordance with standard The frequency with which castings/forgings are to be
operating procedures checked for defects can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 119 of 1445
MEM 4.9A A Inspect/test castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.9A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defective castings/forgings are correctly identified and Where appropriate, defective castings/forgings are identified The procedures for isolating defective castings/forgings can
isolated and isolated in accordance with standard operating be given The defects for which castings/forgings are to be
procedures tested can be identified The reasons for carrying out tests
for each of these types of defect can be explained
Criteria 4.9A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Possible causes of defects identified The possible causes for each type of casting/forging defect
identified can be given

Element 4.9A.3 Test castings/forgings

Criteria 4.9A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate testing carried out to assess surface defects Castings/forgings are tested for surface defects using The procedures for testing castings/forgings for surface
using standard operating procedures appropriate tools, equipment and techniques in accordance defects can be given The methods of testing for surface
with standard operating procedures defects can be identified The tools, equipment and
techniques necessary for testing surface defects can be
identified The reasons for selecting the chosen test method
can be explained
Criteria 4.9A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate testing carried out to assess bend, tension, The physical properties of the cast metal are tested using The procedures for testing the physical properties of the
hardness, tensile, strength etc. as required using standard appropriate tools, equipment and techniques in accordance cast metal can be given The methods of testing for each of
operating procedures with standard operating procedures the physical properties of the cast metal can be identified
The tools, equipment and techniques necessary for testing
the physical properties of the cast metal can be identified
The reasons for selecting the chosen test methods can be
explained
Criteria 4.9A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-destructive testing is carried out to assess internal Castings/forgings are tested for cracks and internal defects The procedures for carrying out non-destructive tests on
defects as required using standard operating procedures using appropriate non-destructive tests in accordance with castings/forgings for cracks and internal defects can be
standard operating procedures given Non-destructive testing methods and their
application can be given The tools, equipment and
techniques required to carry out each of the non-destructive
tests can be identified The reasons for selecting the chosen
non-destructive test(s) can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 120 of 1445
MEM 4.9A A Inspect/test castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.9A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
If applicable, pressure testing of castings/forgings is Where appropriate, castings/forgings are pressure tested The procedures for pressure testing castings/forgings can be
performed using appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in given The safety precautions to be taken when pressure
accordance with standard operating procedures testing castings/forgings can be identified The tools,
techniques and equipment necessary to pressure test
castings/forgings can be identified
Criteria 4.9A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All test results are accurately recorded and/or reported All test results are accurately recorded in accordance with The procedures for recording and reporting test results can
to appropriate authority using standard operating standard operating procedures Where appropriate, test be given The person to whom test results are to be
procedures results are reported to the appropriate authority in reported can be identified The reasons for accurately
accordance with standard operating procedures recording all test results can be explained
Element 4.9A.4 Instigate corrective action
Criteria 4.9A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Knowledge of casting/forging process is applied in the All test results are obtained in accordance with standard Any defects detected in the casting/forging can be identified
alteration of the process to eliminate identified faults operating procedures Proposed changes to the Any physical properties of the cast metal not conforming
casting/forging process are reported to the appropriate to specification can be identified The probable causes of
authority/instigated in accordance with standard operating any defects or non-conformances detected can be given
procedures Changes to the casting/forging process are proposed to
eliminate the identified defects/non-conformances The
reasons for the proposed alterations to the casting/forging
process can be explained The person to whom proposed
changes are to be reported can be identified The procedures
for reporting/instigating proposed changes to the
casting/forging process can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 121 of 1445
MEM 4.9A A Inspect/test castings/forgings Metal and Engineering Training
Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to persons required to respond to quality problems in a range of castings/forgings. The acceptance/inspection of first off products may also be required. Testing
activities will be in accordance with standard operating procedure and may include where required, dimensional inspection, crack detection, dye/penetrant inspection, magnetic
particle, x-ray and ultrasound etc. Work is carried out autonomously or as part of a work team, to predetermined specifications and standards of quality and safety. Where
knowledge of the casting/forging process is not required and inspection skills are needed Unit 15.4A (Perform inspection (basic)) may be considered instead of this unit.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the inspection of castings or other units requiring the exercise of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 122 of 1445
 MEM 4.10A A Develop and manufacture wood patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.10A A Develop and manufacture wood patterns

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 20
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 4.18A General woodworking machine operations 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering) 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.10A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant written instructions, sketches or drawings Those instructions, sketches or drawings have been
understood. have been received and used. interpreted correctly.

Criteria 4.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Moulding/casting techniques and foundry processes are The pattern/corebox will meet the requirements for the The moulding/casting techniques and foundry process
applied to determine type of wood pattern required. predetermined moulding/casting techniques and foundry can be identified.
process.

Criteria 4.10A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate timber/timber composites selected to meet The appropriate timber has been selected for ease of The consequences of selecting inappropriate materials,
specification. working, stability, durability and strength, to suit the can be identified.
predetermined moulding/casting techniques and foundry
process.

Element 4.10A.2 Develop and lay out wood patterns

Criteria 4.10A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculate pattern parameters eg: angles, tapers, The calculations necessary for manufacturing the pattern The calculus necessary to carry out those calculations
clearances, contractions etc. to specification. and corebox have been carried out, i.e. contraction, taper, can be identified.
clearances, etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 123 of 1445
 MEM 4.10A A Develop and manufacture wood patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.10A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lay out pattern showing tapers, machining allowances, The pattern/corebox has been laid out showing The consequences of not laying out the pattern in detail
core prints and method of construction to specification. contraction, tapers, machining allowance, core prints, and with all known specifications can be identified.
clearances, pattern/corebox construction, and conforms to
drawings, sketches, tolerances and to the predetermined
specifications.

Criteria 4.10A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Develop and manufacture jigs and fixtures to aid wood Any jigs and fixtures required for manufacture have been The reasons why those particular manufacturing aids are
pattern manufacture as required. developed and manufactured. required, and their use identified.

Element 4.10A.3 Manufacture wood patterns

Criteria 4.10A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials marked out and construction developed to meet The construction of the patterns/corebox will meet the The reason why that particular construction has been
specification. requirements for the predetermined moulds/casting used and that other methods can be identified and the
technique and foundry process. consequences of using those methods.

Criteria 4.10A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable wood pattern making techniques, The completed pattern/corebox, complies with the pattern The appropriate hand, and hand held power tools and
procedures and utilising appropriate hand and hand held layout, drawings, sketches and contraction, predetermined necessary machinery can be identified. The
power tools, pattern or pattern component parts are specifications and the chosen moulding/ casting consequences of split patterns turned between centres,
produced to size and shape and checked for compliance technique. Split patterns and coreboxes are accurately not being correctly centred, and the methods of centring
to specifications. located, one half to the other by using appropriate dowels can be identified. The reason why that particular type of
or location techniques. Turned patterns are either built up pattern has been manufactured. Other types of patterns
with segments or laminated in such a manner as to reduce can be identified, and the consequences of using those
timber shrinkage and distortion. Solid patterns, where types. The meaning of mouldable can be identified i.e.
necessary, are set up on a joint board for ease of surface finish is smooth, tapers are flat, not concave or
moulding, and that the joint line does not develop knife convex, there are no undercuts, etc. The necessary
edges of sand, and that all pockets are mouldable. The checking devices have been used and identified. The
surface finish is mouldable, tapers are true and straight necessary checking procedures have been carried out.
radii and fillets are true and where necessary, lifting
devices are in place. The necessary checking procedures
have been carried out.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 124 of 1445
 MEM 4.10A A Develop and manufacture wood patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 4.10A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable wood pattern making techniques and The component parts required to manufacture the The various joining and fixing techniques can be
procedures, pattern component parts are joined or fixed patterns/corebox are joined/fixed to the main body by identified and the reason why that particular fixing has
as required and checked for compliance to specification. using appropriate fixing techniques, eg: glue, nails, screws, been used.
dovetails, double round and straight keys, spigot, dowels,
butt joints, half lap, spline, etc.

Criteria 4.10A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern correctly marked, colour coded or tagged in The completed pattern/corebox has been marked with any The necessary colour coding can be identified and the
compliance with specifications or standard operational necessary identification numbers, colour coded to identify consequences of wrong colour code being used.
procedures. the casting area, core prints, loose pieces, stop off, etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 125 of 1445
 MEM 4.10A A Develop and manufacture wood patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. All specifications interpreted from drawings,
technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Tasks undertaken utilise appropriate wood pattern making principles and techniques, designated procedures, correct and
appropriate tools and equipment. This unit covers the manufacture of all types of solid, split and turned wood patterns and wood pattern component parts, including but is not
limited to general engineering patterns, master patterns with multiple contraction, skeleton, frame and strickle, wheels, pulleys, chain sheaves, impellors etc. Patterns may be
constructed by laminating timber and timber composites, stave and lag, box or frame construction or any alternative method that minimises timber shrinkage, warpage and achieves
required strength and a full range of timber and timber composites may be used. Solid patterns may be set up on a regular or irregular joint, turned patterns are manufactured using
tools and machines appropriate for shaping wood. If patterns are set up on pattern plates see Unit 4.12A (Assemble plated patterns). For the development and manufacture of
marine propellers, conveyor screws, cast gears etc. Unit 4.17A (Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screw and propeller patterns) should also be considered; where precision
measurement is required, Unit 12.3A ( Precision mechanical measurement ) should also be considered. This unit should not be selected when Unit 18.14A (Tool, gauge and die
manufacture) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications.
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the development and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
manufacture of wood patterns or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 126 of 1445
 MEM 4.11A A Produce polymer patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.11A A Produce polymer patterns

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 4.11A.1 Inspect and prepare patterns and cores

Criteria 4.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Patterns or cores inspected for appropriate surface finish The patterns or cores are sealed with appropriate surface The consequences of the pattern or core not being
and set up on jointline or flat board to specification. finish and are set up with necessary locations, datums, surface finished or set up correctly, can be identified.
stripping devices, frames and any special foundry
requirements, eg; anticrush, fillets, sand traps, etc. Ensure
that datum boards or joint boards are flat and the patterns
or cores are securely attached and are flat on the board.

Criteria 4.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate parting agent selected and applied to The parting agent has been applied evenly and it covers The appropriate parting agent has been used, that other
polymer specifications. the complete area to be covered with polymer. parting agents can be identified and the consequences of
using those parting agents.

Element 4.11A.2 Manufacture moulds, patterns, tooling aids etc.

Criteria 4.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate polymer materials selected to specification. The appropriate polymer has been selected for that type of The complete range of polymers used in the field of
pattern, corebox, tooling aid or master mould. pattern making can be identified and the consequences
of selecting an inappropriate polymer can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 127 of 1445
 MEM 4.11A A Produce polymer patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.11A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Polymer and hardener mixed to correct ratios and The polymer and hardener has been mixed thoroughly with The correct ratio of polymer to hardener has been used
specifications using standard safety and operating minimum air entrapment. and that any calculations required to determine that ratio
procedures. have been carried out correctly Identify the
consequences of the wrong ratio or incorrect weight
measurements being used.

Criteria 4.11A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Polymer applied to specification and using predetermined The polymer is applied evenly, that vertical walls are not The reasons for excessive heat generation, air pockets
methods, ensuring that air is not entrapped in thinly coated and that no excessive build-up of polymer and delamination can be identified and the consequences
application, excessive heat is not generated and occurs in pockets. Ensure that air is not trapped while of those problems explained.
delamination does not occur in final use. polymer is applied and that the time between applying
successive layers is not excessive.

Criteria 4.11A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern/core box stripped, inspected, cleaned and The pattern/corebox or tooling aid is stripped using lifting Various methods of stripping and repairs can be
repaired as required. devices to obtain an even lift and in a manner to not identified.
damage the equipment. Parting agent has been removed
and the equipment has been cleaned. Any repairs have
been carried out in a manner to ensure that it has been
securely adhered or keyed.

Criteria 4.11A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faces of polymer pattern are machined and finished to Those patterns/coreboxes or tooling aids require The various machines used, and their operation can be
specifications. machining have been machined to drawing/sketches or identified.
verbal instruction.

Criteria 4.11A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate method of location applied to patterns and Where pattern/coreboxes require location, ensure the The various types of location can be identified.
core boxes. location is appropriate for that type of equipment and the
correct line up has been obtained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 128 of 1445
 MEM 4.11A A Produce polymer patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.11A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Polymer tooling checked for compliance with The necessary checking procedures have been carried out. The measuring devices can be identified. The equipment
specifications as required. conforms to drawings/sketches and specifications.

Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workplace procedures. All specifications interpreted from drawings,
technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Tasks undertaken utilise appropriate polymer pattern making principles, techniques, designated procedures, correct and
appropriate tools, equipment and covers the manufacture of polymer patterns, core boxes, tooling aids, jigs and checking fixtures etc. using various methods of construction
including but not limited to solid polymer, sand filled, laminated fibreglass or metal inserts etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the production of polymer and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
patterns or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 129 of 1445
 MEM 4.12A A Assemble plated patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.12A A Assemble plated patterns

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 4.10A Develop and manufacture wood patterns 4.18A General woodworking machine operations
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.12A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.12A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant written instructions, sketches or drawings Those instructions, sketches or drawings have been
understood. have been received and used. interpreted correctly.

Element 4.12A.2 Inspect and layout patterns

Criteria 4.12A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern(s) inspected to ensure size and surface finish The surface finish complies to the predetermined moulding The necessary checking devices have been used and the
conforms to specifications, location dowels are tight and process. The tapers are straight and true. The location necessary checking procedures have been carried out.
pattern halves are correctly aligned. dowels are tight. There is no mismatch or cross joining.

Criteria 4.12A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lay out pattern and runner system to specifications from The patterns and runner systems have been laid out to the The reason for using that particular layout and runner
drawings, sketches or verbal instructions. predetermined instructions, drawings or sketches. system can be identified. The various types of pattern
plates can be identified, eg: cope and drag, double sided,
core mould etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 130 of 1445
 MEM 4.12A A Assemble plated patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.12A.3 Mount pattern on plates

Criteria 4.12A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cope and drag patterns/double sided match plate Those patterns mounted on either cope and drag plates, or The various methods of fixing and drilling techniques
patterns are attached to pattern plate/s according to double sided match plates, are securely attached to the can be identified.
specification. pattern plate or to one another through the pattern plate,
by using appropriate screws/fixing techniques.

Criteria 4.12A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cope and drag patterns/double sided match plate The patterns are flat on the plate, located correctly on their The techniques for determining cross jointing or
patterns are inspected for security and alignment. location dowels and lined up from cope to drag, in relation mismatch of the pattern and their relationship to the
to the moulding box pin-centres. pin-centres can be identified. The consequences if these
problems are not identified.

Element 4.12A.4 Mount runner system

Criteria 4.12A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Volume of runner system and area of in-gates calculated The runner system has been manufactured to The runner system volume and the area of in-gates are
to conform to specification and manufactured as required. drawings/sketches and specifications. correctly calculated to the predetermined specifications.

Criteria 4.12A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Runner components attached to pattern plates using The runner components have been attached securely to The consequences of poorly fitted runner system can be
appropriate fixing and joining techniques to specification. the pattern plate by using appropriate screw/fixing identified.
techniques and that any joint/gaps are filled and filleted.

Element 4.12A.5 Inspect plated pattern assembly

Criteria 4.12A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface and mouldability of plated pattern assembly Both the pattern and the runner system complies to the The various types of pattern plates can be identified. The
inspected for compliance with specifications. predetermined pattern plate layout. The surface finish on meaning of mouldable can be identified, i.e. surface
both patterns and runners are mouldable. The pattern finish is smooth, tapered faces are flat, not convex or
plates have the necessary pins or bushes and any other concave, there are no undercuts, etc.
necessary pattern plate fixing holes required to suit the
predetermined moulding/casting process.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 131 of 1445
 MEM 4.12A A Assemble plated patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. All specifications interpreted from drawings,
technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Tasks undertaken utilise appropriate pattern making principles and techniques, designated procedures, correct and appropriate
tools and equipment and covers the manufacture of all types of plated patterns utilising a range of materials such as, timber, timber composite and metal. It covers the manufacture
(when appropriate) and mounting of runner systems. This unit does not address machining competencies if these are required appropriate units should also be accessed. For cast
aluminium plates see Unit 4.14A ( Develop and manufacture production patterns). Where the manufacture of polymer plated patterns is required Unit 4.11A (Produce polymer
patterns) should also be accessed. Where precision measurement is required, Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the assembly of plated and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
patterns or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 132 of 1445
 MEM 4.13A A Develop and manufacture polystyrene patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.13A A Develop and manufacture polystyrene patterns

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 4.10A Develop and manufacture wood patterns 4.18A General woodworking machine operations
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.13A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant written instructions, sketches or drawings Those instructions, sketches or drawings have been
understood. have been received and used. interpreted correctly.

Criteria 4.13A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate grade/type of polystyrene selected to meet The polystyrene selected is appropriate for that type of The various types of polystyrene can be identified.
specifications. pattern or foundry process.

Element 4.13A.2 Mark out pattern

Criteria 4.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Perform appropriate calculations to determine contraction Those calculations necessary for the pattern manufacture The calculus necessary to perform those calculations can
allowance etc. have been carried out, eg: contraction etc. be identified.

Criteria 4.13A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mark out pattern/pattern components to meet The polystyrene has been marked out to meet the pattern The marking out tools and devices can be identified. The
specifications. and pattern component manufacturing requirements and reason why taper or cores are not required, can be
conforms to specifications. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 133 of 1445
 MEM 4.13A A Develop and manufacture polystyrene patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.13A.3 Manufacture pattern

Criteria 4.13A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern components are correctly jointed and secured The type of adhesive used is correct for the job. The The various types of adhesive can be identified and the
using appropriate adhesives. method of joining and securing the various component consequences of the wrong adhesive being used.
parts.

Criteria 4.13A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools selected and techniques used to The tools selected to shape and manufacture the patterns All the various tools used in the manufacture of
manufacture polystyrene patterns to specification. are appropriate. polystyrene patterns can be identified.

Criteria 4.13A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern is checked for compliance with specifications and The completed pattern has been checked using the The checking procedure and checking devices can be
correctly marked for identification. necessary checking procedure and checking devices to identified.
determine that the pattern conforms to specifications. The
pattern has been marked for identification.

Element 4.13A.4 Protect pattern from damage

Criteria 4.13A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Patterns are handled and stored in a safe manner least Care has been taken in handling and storing the completed The consequences of rough handling and incorrect
likely to cause damage using standard operating pattern. storage can be identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 134 of 1445
 MEM 4.13A A Develop and manufacture polystyrene patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers all patterns using polystyrene, including patterns for the Lost Foam Process and for those areas on a wood pattern and core box where polystyrene is required.
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. All specifications interpreted from drawings,
technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Where holes are required in the final casting they are built into the pattern as specified. Allowances are made for contraction and
machining. Where precision measurement is required, Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the development and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
manufacture of polystyrene patterns or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 135 of 1445
 MEM 4.14A A Develop and manufacture production patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.14A A Develop and manufacture production patterns

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 4.10A Develop and manufacture wood patterns 4.12A Assemble plated patterns
4.18A General woodworking machine operations 7.5A Perform general machining 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering) 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.14A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.14A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant written instructions, sketches, drawings or Those instructions, sketches or drawings have been
understood. sample components have been received and used. interpreted correctly.

Criteria 4.14A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern type and design conceptualised and planned with The number of patterns, pattern layout, runner system and The predetermined moulding/casting and core making
reference to customer's specification (written or verbal) core box design, have been planned with reference to process can be identified.
for number, layout, runner system and core box design. customer requirements and the predetermined
moulding/casting process.

Criteria 4.14A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern design is interpreted and visualised from Where metal patterns and coreboxes are fully machined The programming and machining process/processes, can
drawings, prints or plans and checked against customer without the use of pattern aids, i.e CAD/CNC. That the be identified.
requirements. pattern equipment has been visualised and interpreted
correctly from drawings, customer instructions and
foundry requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 136 of 1445
 MEM 4.14A A Develop and manufacture production patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.14A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plan developed for sequence of manufacture for either a A planned sequence of manufacture has been developed The developed sequence of manufacture can be
high or low volume foundry production pattern. for high volume tooling, eg: pre-matching, datum tooling identified for both higher and low volume tooling, and
holes pantographing, copy mill, handwork, finish the consequences of not following that developed
machining, venting, etc. A planned sequence of sequence of manufacture can be identified.
manufacture has been developed for low volume tooling,
eg: joint line either sanded or milled, dowelled, handwork,
etc.

Element 4.14A.2 Develop pattern equipment

Criteria 4.14A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate materials selected and obtained to meet The materials selected meet with the requirements for the The various materials used for the manufacture of metal
requirements of strength, durability and component finish predetermined moulding/casting process for strength, patterns and core boxes, can be identified and the reason
etc. durability and surface finish. for their use.

Criteria 4.14A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculations appropriate to establishing pattern Those calculations necessary to establish contraction The calculus necessary to perform those calculations are
parameters are performed, including angles, tapers, tapers, clearances etc., have been carried out. understood.
contraction, etc. where applicable.

Element 4.14A.3 Perform machining operations

Criteria 4.14A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate machines and machining process selected to The range of machine tools selected is appropriate for the The range of machine tools and their operation can be
shape/produce production patterns and core boxes to manufacture of the equipment to size and specifications, identified.
specification. i.e. mills, pantographs, copymill, lathe etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 137 of 1445
 MEM 4.14A A Develop and manufacture production patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.14A.4 Use hand and hand held power tools

Criteria 4.14A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A range of hand and hand held power tools are selected The range of hand and hand held power tools is The range of hand and hand held power tools and their
to fashion/manufacture production patterns and core appropriate for the manufacture of the equipment to size correct use, identified.
boxes to specification. and specification.

Criteria 4.14A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production patterns and core boxes checked to The pattern/core box equipment has been checked using The necessary checking procedures and checking
specification and surface finish checked for mouldability. the necessary checking procedures and the necessary devices can be identified. The hand work has been
checking devices to determine that the equipment carried out accurately without the loss of size or shape.
conforms to drawings/sketches, specifications and the The consequences of inaccurate and poorly finished
predetermined moulding/casting process. The surface hand work can be identified. The meaning of mouldable
finish is suitable for sand moulding and that all tapers, can be identified, i.e. surface finish is smooth, tapered
fillets and radii are true and mouldable. faces are flat, not concave or convex, there are no
undercuts.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 138 of 1445
 MEM 4.14A A Develop and manufacture production patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. All specifications interpreted from drawings,
technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Tasks undertaken utilise appropriate pattern making principles and techniques, designated procedures, correct and appropriate
tools and equipment and covers the manufacture of all types of metal patterns, core boxes and associated equipment including cast plates etc. Patterns may be loose, integral with
the plate or mounted to the plates with gating, depending upon specifications production core boxes also may be loose or mounted into core box rigs etc, depending upon
specifications. Patterns and core boxes are manufactured from a range of ferrous, non-ferrous and alloy materials using conventional metal cutting machines, including pantograph
and copy mills etc. Patterns and core boxes are finished using appropriate hand working equipment. Where the manufacture of polymer production patterns is required, Unit 4.11A
(Produce polymer patterns) should be considered. Where precision measurement is required, Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the development and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
manufacture of production patterns or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 139 of 1445
 MEM 4.15A A Develop and manufacture vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.15A A Develop and manufacture vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 4.10A Develop and manufacture wood patterns 4.11A Produce polymer patterns
4.12A Assemble plated patterns 4.14A Develop and manufacture production patterns 4.18A General woodworking machine operations
7.5A Perform general machining 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering) 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.15A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.15A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant written instructions, sketches or drawings Those instructions or drawings have been interpreted
understood. have been received and used. correctly.

Criteria 4.15A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Vacuum forming processes are applied to determine the The type of vacuum forming moulds and associated The various types of vacuum forming processes can be
design of vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment will meet requirements for the predetermined identified. The equipment to suit those processes can be
equipment to be constructed. vacuum forming process. identified.

Criteria 4.15A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate material selected to meet specifications. The material selected for that particular vacuum forming The various materials used in vacuum forming processes
process is suitable and will meet customer requirements. can be identified. The consequences of using incorrect
materials, identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 140 of 1445
 MEM 4.15A A Develop and manufacture vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.15A.2 Develop/mark out vacuum forming equipment

Criteria 4.15A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Perform appropriate calculations to establish the The calculations necessary for the manufacturing of that The calculus necessary to carry out those calculations
equipment parameters, taking into account plastic sheet particular vacuum form equipment have been carried out, can be identified.
thickness and shrinkage etc. and that the shrinkage and plastic sheet thickness has
been taken into account.

Criteria 4.15A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mark out vacuum forming equipment showing size and The predetermined die design and vacuum forming The reasons for the importance of the position and size
position of air evacuation and of the moulded form. process has been marked out, laid out, including size and of the air evacuation holes can be identified.
position of air evacuation holes.

Element 4.15A.3 Manufacture vacuum forming equipment

Criteria 4.15A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate machines and machining process selected to The vacuum forming equipment has been manufactured Arrange of machine tools and their operation can be
shape/produce vacuum forming equipment to using a range of machine tools appropriate for identified.
specification. shaping/sizing, to specification.

Criteria 4.15A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A range of hand and hand held power tools are selected The vacuum forming equipment has been surface finished The various hand and hand held power tools and their
and used to fashion/manufacture vacuum forming using various hand held power tools. correct use, can be identified, and used, using normal
equipment to specification. safety standards.

Criteria 4.15A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Constructed vacuum forming equipment checked to The complete vacuum forming equipment complies with The necessary checking devices have been used and can
specification. the predetermined vacuum forming process, and customer be identified. The necessary checking procedures have
specifications. been carried out. The surface finish meets requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 141 of 1445
 MEM 4.15A A Develop and manufacture vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. All specifications interpreted from drawings,
technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Tasks undertaken utilise appropriate pattern making principles and techniques, designated procedures, correct and appropriate
tools and equipment and cover the manufacture of all types of vacuum forming equipment including vacuum bagging, utilising a range of materials such as, timber, composites,
polymer, metal etc. Where precision measurement is required, Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the development and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
manufacture of vacuum forming moulds and associated equipment or plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 142 of 1445
MEM 4.16A B Develop and manufacture precision models Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.16A B Develop and manufacture precision models

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required for laying out and manufacturing and finishing precision models. Appropriate tools and techniques are used to manufacture
models such as flow models, viewing models, prototype and development models using a wide range of materials (for example timber, metal plastic, fibreglass
composites)
and processes.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 4.10A Develop and manufacture wood patterns 4.11A Produce polymer patterns
4.12A Assemble plated patterns 4.13A Develop and manufacture polystyrene patterns 4.14A Develop and manufacture production patterns
4.15A Develop and manufacture vacuum forming moulds 4.18A General woodworking machine operations 7.5A Perform general machining
and associated equipment
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement
12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering) 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.16A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.16A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant written instructions, drawings have been Those instructions, drawings etc. have been interpreted
understood received and used correctly

Criteria 4.16A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate material selected to meet specifications The materials have been selected for ease of working, The consequences of selecting inappropriate materials can
stability and can be worked accurately be identified

Element 4.16A.2 Layout model

Criteria 4.16A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Finished model design conceptualised and planned with The type of model has been visualised and determined by The various processes requiring models, can be identified
reference to customer's specifications (written or verbal) using the instructions, drawings and the knowledge of the
for finish, quality and form known processes predetermined process i.e. high volume foundry tooling,
injection moulding, pressure die casting etc.
Criteria 4.16A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculate contractions allowances, clearances, tapers The calculations necessary for manufacture have been The calculus necessary to carry out calculations can be
etc. to establish model parameters carried out identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 143 of 1445
MEM 4.16A A Develop and manufacture precision models Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.16A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design and manufacture datum boards, jigs and fixtures All necessary datum boards, datum holes or datum faces etc. The reason why datum boards, datum holes or datum faces
as required required for accurate manufacture, have been developed and are required for manufacture and their use identified The
manufactured Any jigs and fixtures required for manufacture reason why those particular manufacturing aids are required
have been developed and manufactured and their use identified
Element 4.16A.3 Manufacture model
Criteria 4.16A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine sequence of manufacture, including build-up A planned sequence of manufacture has been developed eg: The developed sequence of manufacture can be identified
on datum board, establishing datum's mark out of model model built upon datum boards, datums developed, areas The consequence of not following that developed sequence
and areas to be NC/CNC machined required to be accurately manufactured by NC/CNC have of manufacture, can be identified
been identified, etc.
Criteria 4.16A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate machines and machining process selected The range of machines and machining processes selected is The range of machines and machining processes and their
to shape/produce model to specifications appropriate for manufacturing the model accurately to size, operations can be identified
tolerance and specifications
Criteria 4.16A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A range of hand and hand held power tools are selected The range of hand and hand held power tools is appropriate The range of hand and hand held power tools, and their
and used utilising acceptable techniques and procedures for the manufacture of the model, accurately, to size, correct use, can be identified
to fashion/manufacture model to fine tolerances tolerance and specifications The surface finish is appropriate
according to specifications, ensuring that surface finish
is appropriate to the type of model
Criteria 4.16A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate measurement/calculations undertaken to The necessary checking procedures have been carried out The various checking procedures, can be identified The
check specifications, including coordinate measuring, The checking devices are appropriate for checking to the necessary checking devices, including CMM, can be
machine checking as required predetermined accuracy and fine tolerances identified
Criteria 4.16A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where necessary, all deviations or modifications to Any deviation or modification to original drawings or
original tooling design, prints or plans, recorded and specifications has been recorded
reported consistent with standard operating procedure

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 144 of 1445
MEM 4.16A A Develop and manufacture precision models Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. All specifications interpreted from complex
drawings and Mylar drawings, technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Tasks undertaken utilise appropriate model making principles and techniques, designated
procedures, correct and appropriate tools and equipment and cover the development and manufacture of flow models, viewing models, prototype and development models and the
inspection and completion of items made in the stereo lithography process etc. Utilising a wide variety of materials including but not limited to timber, metal, plastic, fibreglass,
composites etc. and where accurate and complicated models are required to assist in the development and manufacture of production of tooling for a wide variety of processes,
such as, blow moulding, metal forming, vacuum forming, rotational moulding, gravity die casting, pressure die casting, low pressure die casting, complex ferrous and non-ferrous
castings, plastic injection moulding, etc. When the programming of coordinate measurement machines and/or NC/CNC machines are required see appropriate machine

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of on and off The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the development and manufacture precision models or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 145 of 1445
 MEM 4.17A A Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screw and propeller patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.17A A Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screw and propeller patterns
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 4.10A Develop and manufacture wood patterns 4.12A Assemble plated patterns
4.18A General woodworking machine operations 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering) 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.17A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.17A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant written instructions, sketches or drawings Those instructions, sketches or drawings have been
understood. have been received and used. interpreted correctly.

Criteria 4.17A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate material selected to meet specifications. The appropriate materials have been selected for ease of The consequences of selecting inappropriate materials
working, stability, durability and strength to suit the can be identified.
predetermined moulding/casting techniques and foundry
process.

Criteria 4.17A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Moulding, cast techniques and foundry processes are The type of pattern will meet the requirements for the The reason why that particular type of pattern is to be
applied in determining the type of pattern required. predetermined moulding/casting technique and foundry manufactured, and other types can be identified and the
process. consequence of using those types. The predetermined
mould/casting technique and foundry process can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 146 of 1445
 MEM 4.17A A Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screw and propeller patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.17A.2 Layout pattern

Criteria 4.17A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calculate pattern parameters such as pitch circles, The calculations necessary for the development and The calculus necessary to carry out those calculations
pressure angles, tooth form, left and right hand flight manufacture of either cast gears, conveyor screws or can be identified.
helix, pitch axial dimensions, angles, tapers, clearances, marine propellers, have been carried out.
contraction allowances etc. appropriate to developing
various types of gear, conveyor and propeller forms etc.

Criteria 4.17A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Layout pattern showing tapers, machining allowances, The pattern has been laid out fully and conforms to The consequences of not laying out the pattern in detail,
core prints and method of construction etc. to drawings, sketches, predetermined specifications and and with all known specifications, can be identified.
specification. tolerances, etc.

Criteria 4.17A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Develop and manufacture jigs and fixtures to aid the Any jigs and fixtures required for manufacture have been The reasons why those particular manufacturing aids are
manufacture of the pattern form as required. developed and manufactured. required, and they can be identified.

Element 4.17A.3 Manufacture pattern

Criteria 4.17A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials marked out and construction developed to meet The material has been marked out to suit the The process of developing gears, screws and propellers
specifications. development/construction of cast gears, conveyor screws can be identified.
or marine propellers.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 147 of 1445
 MEM 4.17A A Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screw and propeller patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.17A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable wood pattern making techniques, The completed pattern complies with the pattern layout, The appropriate hand and hand held tools and necessary
procedures and utilising appropriate hand and hand held drawings, sketches, predetermined specifications and the machinery can be identified. The necessary checking
power tools, pattern or pattern component parts are chosen moulding/casting technique. The surface finish is devices can be identified. The various checking
produced to size and shape and checked for compliance mouldable, tapers are true and straight, radii and fillets are procedures can be identified. The meaning of mouldable
with specifications. true and where necessary, lifting devices are in place. can be identified, i.e. surface finish is smooth, tapered
faces are flat, not concave or convex, there are no
undercuts.

Criteria 4.17A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable pattern making techniques and The component parts required to manufacture the pattern The various jointing techniques can be identified and the
procedures, pattern component parts are joined or fixed are jointed/fixed to the main body by using appropriate reason why that particular fixing was used.
as required, according to specifications. fixing techniques, eg: glue, nails, screws, dovetails, double
round and straight keys, spigots, dowels, butt joints, half
lap, spline, etc.

Criteria 4.17A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pattern correctly marked, colour coded and/or tagged in The completed pattern has been marked with any The necessary colour coding can be identified and the
compliance with specifications or standard operating necessary identification numbers, colour coded to identify consequences of the wrong coding being used.
procedure. casting area, core prints, loose pieces etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 148 of 1445
 MEM 4.17A A Develop and manufacture gear, conveyor screw and propeller patterns Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. All specifications interpreted from drawings,
technical sketches and/or customer requirements. Tasks undertaken utilise appropriate wood pattern making principles and techniques, designated procedures, calculations,
appropriate tools, equipment and cover the development and manufacture of patterns for all types of cast gears, conveyor screws, marine propellers etc. utilising the full range of
timbers and composites. Gear patterns may be segmented or any other method to minimise timber shrinkage or warpage and to achieve the required strength. Conveyor and marine
screws may be built up using predetermined thicknessed timber, either over a mandrel or a layout. Patterns may be set up on a joint board or plated for ease of moulding. Where
precision measurement is required, Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the development and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
manufacture gear, conveyor screw and propeller patterns or other plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 149 of 1445
 MEM 4.18A A General woodworking machine operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.18A A General woodworking machine operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 4.18A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 4.18A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job instructions and specifications interpreted and Any written instructions or sketches have been received Those instructions or sketches have been interpreted
understood. and used. correctly.

Criteria 4.18A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate woodworking machine selected to meet The machine selected is appropriate for that machining The range of woodworking machines and their
specifications. operation. operations can be identified.

Element 4.18A.2 Set up woodworking machine

Criteria 4.18A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools/cutters are selected where appropriate. The tools/cutters selected are appropriate for that The range of tools/cutters for different purposes can be
operation. identified.

Criteria 4.18A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cutting tools are sharpened and/or shaped to meet The cutter/cutter blades etc. have been sharpened or The consequences of incorrect set or cutting angles can
specifications. shaped to the correct set or cutting angles. be identified.

Criteria 4.18A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools/cutters are correctly installed using standard The tool holder, tools, and cutters etc., are held in by The consequences of tool holders, tools and cutters etc.,
operating procedures. using the correct bolting/attachments, to suit the machine. being incorrectly secured, can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 150 of 1445
 MEM 4.18A A General woodworking machine operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 4.18A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate guards/stops are set and adjusted as Guards and stops have been set correctly. The consequences of not using guards etc., can be
required. identified.

Element 4.18A.3 Operate woodworking machines

Criteria 4.18A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material to be machined is positioned and secured. The material has been positioned correctly on the machine The various methods and manner of clamping can be
and that it has been securely clamped and that the clamps identified.
will not interfere with the machining operations.

Criteria 4.18A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Woodworking machine is operated to cut materials to The machines used either to machine the material in a The operation of various woodworking machines can be
specification using standard operating procedures. clamped position, e.g. pattern mills, or while the material is identified. Various safety problems can be identified eg:
held by hand eg: buzzers, sanders, routers, etc. or while material too short, direction of the grain, fingers are well
the cutting tool is being held by hand, e.g. lathe, are clear of cutter, etc.
correctly operated, using all necessary safety measures.

Criteria 4.18A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is used in most economical way. The various methods of using the material in the most
economical way can be identified.

Element 4.18A.4 Check finished component

Criteria 4.18A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machined component checked against specifications and The finished component is checked for size against The necessary checking procedures have been carried
predetermined finish. specifications. The finished machine surface is acceptable. out. The reason for a poorly finished surface, can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 151 of 1445
 MEM 4.18A A General woodworking machine operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. This unit covers all woodworking machines
used by Engineering Patternmakers and involves the use of various machines including but not limited to, band saws, buzzers, thicknesser, disk sander, bobbin sander, pattern mill,
wood lathe, pedestal router and drill etc. and covers the sharpening of blades and cutters. This unit is not appropriate for those using specialised woodworking machines etc.
(Cabinet makers etc.) For hand held/power tools use Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the general wood working and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
machine operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 152 of 1445
 MEM 4.19A A Refractory installation and repair Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 4.19A A Refractory installation and repair

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Casting & moulding Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 4.19A.1 Inspect refractory

Criteria 4.19A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specification interpreted and understood. All relevant instruction and specifications are obtained in Instructions and specifications can be correctly
accordance with workplace procedures. interpreted and understood.

Criteria 4.19A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specific areas of the refractory identified for repair or The refractory inspected and faults identified for repair or Indicators of need for replacement can be described.
replacement. replacement in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Element 4.19A.2 Knockout refractory

Criteria 4.19A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequence of operations to remove refractory is A work plan is prepared identifying the sequence for Work plan can be prepared for a variety of situations.
determined to meet the job specification. refractory removal in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 4.19A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools and equipment selected to safely Appropriate tools and equipment selected in accordance Tools and equipment appropriate for the job can be
remove damaged refractory. with workplace procedures. identified.

Criteria 4.19A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Damaged refractory is removed and disposed of safely. The damaged refractory is safely removed and disposed of There is an awareness of OHS issues.
in accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 153 of 1445
 MEM 4.19A A Refractory installation and repair Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 4.19A.3 Prepare refractory materials

Criteria 4.19A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate refractory materials selected to meet The appropriate refractory materials selected to meet Different refractory materials can be identified.
specifications. specifications accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 4.19A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refractory media is mixed to specification. The refractory media is mixed to in accordance with The impact of incorrect mixing ratios and methods is
standard operating procedures. understood.

Element 4.19A.4 Install refractory

Criteria 4.19A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequence of operations to install refractory is determined A work plan is prepared identifying the sequence for Work plan can be prepared for a variety of situations.
to meet the job specification. installing refractory in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 4.19A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refractory is installed using appropriate techniques and The refractory is installed to the correct wall thickness and The effect of incorrect wall thickness and/or surface
tools and equipment to meet the job specification. surface finish in accordance with standard operating finish is understood.
procedures.

Element 4.19A.5 Cure refractory

Criteria 4.19A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refractory cured to specifications using appropriate The refractory is cured to specifications using appropriate The importance of any specified curing is understood.
techniques and equipment to meet the job specification. techniques and equipment selected in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 154 of 1445
 MEM 4.19A A Refractory installation and repair Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the repairs and replacement of all types of refractory, including relining furnaces, treatment vessels, ladles and launders, and covers material which can be machine
rammed, hand rammed, forked or vibrated. This includes refractory bricks and their replacement. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team to predetermined standards of
quality and safety. For operational maintenance such as routine repair/repointing of refractory see Units 4.1A (Operate melting furnace) and/or Unit 4.7A (Pour molten metal).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with furnace/kiln operations, or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 155 of 1445
 MEM 5.1A A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.1A A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4

Element 5.1A.1 Prepare materials for soldering

Criteria 5.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials preparation instructions understood and Materials are prepared for soldering in accordance with The preparation requirements of materials prior to
followed. instructions and work site procedures. soldering can be identified. The consequences of
incorrect material preparation prior to soldering can be
given.

Criteria 5.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials prepared using correct soldering tools, Appropriate tools are used in the preparation of materials The correct application of a range of soldering tools and
equipment, materials and procedures. for soldering in accordance with work site procedures. equipment can be given. The applications of different
solders and fluxes with respect to the materials to be
soldered can be identified.

Criteria 5.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials prepared to specifications using instruction or The materials to be soldered are prepared to specification The material preparation requirements can be identified.
standard operating procedures. and in accordance with work site procedures.

Element 5.1A.2 Solder materials

Criteria 5.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct soldering techniques, procedures, materials and An appropriate soldering technique is selected in Examples of alternative soldering techniques and their
soldering tools selected. accordance with work site procedures. The correct tools application can be given.
and materials are selected in accordance with work site
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 156 of 1445
 MEM 5.1A A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials to be jointed, mounted, shaped to specification Where appropriate, materials to be jointed are aligned, The required relationship between the parts to be joined
using standard operating procedures. clamped and mounted as necessary prior to soldering, in can be identified.
accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 5.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Solder applied using correct and appropriate techniques. An appropriate soldering technique is used to apply
solder to the materials to be jointed, in accordance with
work site procedures.

Criteria 5.1A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, excess material removed using correct Where appropriate, excess solder is removed in Methods of solder removal and their application can be
and appropriate tools and techniques. accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 5.1A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Procedures for the protection of components observed Work site procedures for the protection of components are Component protection procedures can be described.
according to standard operating procedure. followed.

Element 5.1A.3 Inspect solder joints

Criteria 5.1A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection procedure undertaken to standard operating Work site inspection procedures are followed. The inspection procedures for soldered joints can be
procedures. identified.

Criteria 5.1A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection results reported/recorded to standard Inspection results are recorded/reported in accordance The information to be recorded and the frequency of
operating procedures as required. with work site procedures. recording can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 157 of 1445
 MEM 5.1A A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.1A.4 Undertake desoldering

Criteria 5.1A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate techniques, procedures, Appropriate desoldering tools and equipment are selected Desoldering techniques and procedures can be
desoldering tools and equipment selected. in accordance with work site procedures. identified. The applications of different desoldering
techniques/procedures can be given.

Criteria 5.1A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials/components de-soldered using correct Materials/components are de-soldered in accordance with Methods of minimising damage to materials/components
procedure minimising damage to materials, components. work site procedures. Damage to materials/components is can be identified.
minimised through the application of appropriate work site
procedures.

Criteria 5.1A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material/device removed and cleaned to specifications The material/device is removed and cleaned in accordance The methods of cleaning solder from materials/devices
using standard operating procedures. with work site procedures. can be identified. The applications of different cleaning
methods can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 158 of 1445
 MEM 5.1A A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers manual soldering/desoldering for the installation and fabrication of electrical/electronic components. Work undertaken in a production or maintenance environment
using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Component protection procedures are predetermined. Correct and appropriate soldering tools and
equipment may include all types of soldering irons, cutters, brushes, files, soldering tips, solder syringes, holding devices etc. Correct and appropriate materials may include solder
(solid resin cord and paste), flux (resin or powder) etc. All materials and procedures specified via job instructions. Inspections carried out using visual, mechanical or electric
techniques with pre setup equipment. All work undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements. Depending on the actual soldering job, hand and power tools and measuring
skills may be required. These are covered by other units such as Unit 18.1A (Use hand tools), Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations) and appropriate measurement
units. Handling refers to methods of physical handling and stress relief methods of preventing damage caused by electrostatic discharge. This may include wrist straps and
anti-static work areas and practices. This unit does not include skills in silver soldering or brazing skills. These skills are covered in Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver
soldering). Where soldering and desoldering is limited to the straightforward termination, disconnection or reconnection of electrical wiring then see Unit 10.2A (Terminate and
connect electrical wiring). Advanced specification and high reliability soldering associated with the installation of electrical/electronic components, in areas where reliability of
connections is critical, is covered by Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, material and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer
questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection
of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job
training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently
and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with manual soldering and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
desoldering or other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specifications; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 159 of 1445
 MEM 5.1A A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.2A A High reliability soldering and desoldering

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic
components

Element 5.2A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 5.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job specification determined using data sheets, All relevant data sheets, specifications, instructions and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
specifications, technical drawings or via consultation technical drawings are obtained in accordance with specifications pertaining to the work to be done can be
with technical experts. workplace procedures. Where appropriate, technical identified.
experts are consulted as to the job specifications.

Criteria 5.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate tools, equipment and material The appropriate tools, equipment and materials to carry
selected. out the work can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen tools, equipment and materials can be given.

Element 5.2A.2 Prepare for soldering

Criteria 5.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material/device cut, shaped and/or drilled to Where appropriate, the material/ device to be soldered is The procedures for cutting, shaping and/or drilling
specification. cut, shaped and/or drilled to specifications in accordance materials/devices to be soldered can be given. The
with standard operating procedures. specifications to which the material/device is to be cut,
shaped and/or drilled can be identified. The tools and
equipment to be used to cut, shape and/or drill the
material/device can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tools and equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 160 of 1445
 MEM 5.2A A High reliability soldering and desoldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials/devices cleaned to specifications using correct The material/device to be soldered is cleaned in The procedures for cleaning materials/devices prior to
and appropriate materials and procedures. conformance to specifications in accordance with standard soldering can be given. The materials to be used to clean
operating procedures. the materials/devices to be soldered can be identified.
The safety precautions to be taken when cleaning
materials and devices to be soldered can be identified.

Criteria 5.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate set up and/or mounting The materials/devices to be soldered are correctly set up The procedures for setting up and mounting
techniques used. and/or mounted in accordance with standard operating materials/devices to be soldered can be given. The tools,
procedures. techniques and equipment to be used when setting up
and mounting materials/devices to be soldered can be
identified.

Element 5.2A.3 Solder materials

Criteria 5.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material/device mounted to specifications using correct The materials/devices to be soldered are mounted in The specifications pertaining to the mounting of the
and appropriate tools and techniques. conformance with specifications. materials/devices to be soldered can be identified.

Criteria 5.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Soldering undertaken using correct and appropriate The materials/devices are soldered using appropriate The procedures for soldering materials/devices can be
techniques including appropriate use of flux. techniques and fluxes in accordance with standard given. The tools, equipment and techniques to be used
operating procedures. to solder materials/devices can be identified. The reasons
for using fluxes when soldering can be explained. The
reasons for selecting the chosen flux can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 161 of 1445
 MEM 5.2A A High reliability soldering and desoldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.2A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary techniques undertaken to protect The materials/devices being soldered are protected from The procedures for protecting materials/devices from
materials/devices from heat damage. heat damage using appropriate techniques in accordance heat damage can be given. The tools and techniques to
with standard operating procedures. be used to minimise heat damage to materials/devices
being soldered can be identified. The consequences of
not protecting materials/devices from heat damage can
be given.

Criteria 5.2A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Printed circuit boards, assemblies and components are Printed circuit boards, assemblies and components are The procedures for handling printed circuit boards,
handled in such a way as to prevent electrostatic handled so as to prevent electrostatic discharge or assemblies and components to prevent electrostatic
discharge or mechanical damage. mechanical damage. discharge can be given. The precautions to be taken to
prevent mechanical damage to printed circuit boards,
assemblies and components can be identified. The tools,
techniques and equipment to be used to prevent
electrostatic discharge can be identified. The
consequences of inappropriate handling of printed
circuit boards, assemblies and components can be
explained.

Element 5.2A.4 Test/inspect soldered joints

Criteria 5.2A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Visual inspection carried out to ensure compliance with All soldered joints are visually inspected to ensure The procedures for inspecting soldered joints can be
specifications. compliance with specifications in accordance with given. The specifications of the soldered joint can be
standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, joints identified. The procedures for marking items for rework or
not complying with specifications are marked for rework or repair can be given.
repair in accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 162 of 1445
 MEM 5.2A A High reliability soldering and desoldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.2A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required, mechanical/electrical tests undertaken Where appropriate, soldered joints are mechanically The procedures for conducting mechanical and electrical
using correct and appropriate techniques and equipment and/or electrically tested for compliance with tests on soldered joints can be given. The tools,
to ensure compliance with specifications. specifications, using appropriate techniques and techniques and equipment necessary to carry out the
equipment, in accordance with standard operating mechanical and electrical tests on the soldered joints can
procedures. Where appropriate, joints not complying with be identified. The precautions to be taken when testing
specifications are marked for rework or repair in soldered joints can be identified. The specifications of
accordance with standard operating procedures. the soldered joint can be identified.

Element 5.2A.5 Rework/repair faulty joints including desoldering

Criteria 5.2A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Rework/repair carried out to ensure compliance with The faulty joint(s) are reworked/ repaired in conformance The procedures for reworking/ repairing faulty joints can
specifications. to specifications in accordance with standard operating be given. The precautions to be taken when
procedures. reworking/repairing faulty joints can be given.

Criteria 5.2A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair/rework inspected and tested. The repaired/reworked soldered joints are inspected and The procedures for inspecting and testing
tested for conformance to specifications in accordance reworked/repaired soldered joints can be given. The
with standard operating procedures. precautions to be taken when inspecting and testing
reworked/ repaired soldered joints can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 163 of 1445
 MEM 5.2A A High reliability soldering and desoldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers soldering/desoldering for the installation and fabrication of electrical/electronic components to advanced or military specifications, or where the reliability of
electrical connections is critical. It also covers the soldering of electronic components where prevention of damage through electrostatic discharge or other means is required. Work
undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. This unit has limited application and should be confined to work undertaken on
equipment where continuous performance is critical and this may include work to military specifications. This unit can also cover the soldering of electronic Surface Mount Devices
(SMD). Work is undertaken in a workshop, laboratory or in situ. Correct and appropriate tools and equipment may include all types of irons, pliers, side cutters, brushes, files,
soldering tips, solder syringes, holding devices etc. Appropriate handling includes correct methods to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge, manual handling or heat
damage to components. Correct and appropriate materials may include solder (solid, resin cord and paste), flux (resin or powder) etc. All materials and procedures determined from
specifications, manufacturer's data sheets, standard operating procedures or in consultation with a technical expert. Tests and inspections carried out using visual, mechanical or
electrical techniques. All work undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements. If precision electro measurement is required it is covered by another unit. Depending on the
actual soldering job, hand and power tools and drawing interpretation skills may be required. These are covered by Unit 18.1A (Use hand tools), Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand
held operations) and Unit 9.2A (Interpret technical drawing). Manual soldering for the installation and fabrication of electrical/electronic components, where reliability of
connections is not critical, is covered by Unit 5.1A (Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with high reliability soldering and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
desoldering or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 164 of 1445
 MEM 5.2A A High reliability soldering and desoldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.3A A Soft soldering (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.3A.1 Identify job requirements

Criteria 5.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Soldering requirements identified and correctly Job sheets and/or instructions obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The soft
understood from job sheets or instructions. with work site procedures. soldering requirements can be identified.

Element 5.3A.2 Undertake soft soldering

Criteria 5.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate tools, equipment and The necessary tools, equipment and consumables are The appropriate tools and equipment to carry out soft
consumables assembled and prepared for use as required. prepared for use in accordance with standard operating soldering operations can be identified. The consumables
procedures. associated with soft soldering operations can be
identified. The effect of material to be soft soldered on
the selection of consumables can be given.

Criteria 5.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials to be soldered are prepared, arranged and The materials to be soldered are prepared for soldering in The preparation requirements of the materials to be
checked as required, to ensure solder joint meets accordance with standard operating procedures. soldered can be identified. The reasons for preparing
specifications. surfaces prior to soldering can be given.

Criteria 5.3A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate techniques used to apply soft Soft solder is applied in accordance with specifications A variety of soldering techniques and their application
solder in accordance with standard operating procedures. and standard operating procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 5.3A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Solder joint cleaned and checked for compliance with The soldered joint is cleaned in accordance with standard Appropriate methods of cleaning soldered joints can be
specifications using standard operating procedures. operating procedures. The soldered joint is checked for identified. Defects in soldered joints can be identified.
conformance to specifications. The procedures for rectifying defects in soldered joints
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 165 of 1445
 MEM 5.3A A Soft soldering (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to soft soldering applications of ferrous and non ferrous materials such as sheet metal etc. using straightforward techniques, where heat damage to components or
finish of soldered joint is not critical. All work is undertaken to predetermined standards of quality, safety and procedures. Techniques of applying soft solder may include the use
of soldering irons (all types) and direct flame or other heating devices. Maintenance of soldering irons is limited to the replacement and/or cleaning of soldering tips. Preparation of
materials includes cleaning, deburring, twisting of conductors and fluxing. This unit should not be selected if Unit 5.1A (Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic
components) or Unit 10.2A (Terminate and connect electrical wiring) has already been selected. Depending on the actual soldering job, hand and power tools and drawing and
interpretation skills may be required. These are covered by units 18.1A (Use hand tools), 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations) and 9.1A (Draw and interpret sketch).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the soft soldering of joints or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 166 of 1445
 MEM 5.4A B Perform routine oxy acetylene welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.4A B Perform routine oxy acetylene welding

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.4A.1 Prepare materials for welding

Criteria 5.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are determined in accordance with job All appropriate specifications and drawings are obtained The weld requirements can be identified. The weld
specifications. in accordance with work site procedures. specifications can be identified. The location and size of
welds can be identified.

Criteria 5.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is cleaned and prepared using appropriate tools The materials to be welded are cleaned and prepared using The materials preparation required prior to welding can
and techniques in accordance with standard operating appropriate tools and techniques in accordance with be identified. The tools and techniques appropriate to
procedures. standard operating procedures. the preparation of materials to be welded can be
identified.

Element 5.4A.2 Assemble and set up welding equipment

Criteria 5.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment including cylinders and regulators The welding equipment is correctly assembled and set up The procedures for assembling and setting up
are assembled and set up safely and correctly in in accordance with standard operating procedures. oxyacetylene/fuel gas welding equipment can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures. The safety precautions to be taken when assembling and
setting up oxyacetylene/fuel gas welding equipment can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 167 of 1445
 MEM 5.4A B Perform routine oxy acetylene welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.4A.3 Select welding equipment, settings, and consumables

Criteria 5.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding tips, settings and consumables selected against The appropriate oxygen and acetylene (or appropriate fuel The appropriate settings for the given task and the
job requirements, welding procedures, in accordance with gas) settings are set in accordance with standard selected welding tips and consumables can be identified.
standard operating procedures. operating procedures. The application of a variety of filler rods and fluxes can
be given. The appropriate filler rod and flux for the given
task can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen welding tip, filler rod and flux can be given.

Element 5.4A.4 Perform routine welding using fuel gas process

Criteria 5.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld undertaken safely and to prescribed procedure. All welds are performed safely and in accordance with The hazards associated with welding processes can be
standard operating procedure. identified. Appropriate personal protection equipment
and its function can be identified. The appropriate
ventilation/extraction requirements can be identified.

Criteria 5.4A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds cleaned in accordance with standard operating All welds are cleaned in accordance with specifications The weld cleaning requirements can be identified. The
procedures. and standard operating procedures. appropriate tools/equipment for cleaning welds can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 168 of 1445
 MEM 5.4A B Perform routine oxy acetylene welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Oxy acetylene welding (OAW) in this unit is intended to apply in a manufacturing or maintenance environment where welding is not required to meet Australian Standards or
equivalent codes, and/or licensing requirements. The term "oxy-acetylene" is used here to describe a range of fuel gases, including acetylene, LPG, hydrogen etc. The person would
work autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, work and welding procedures. Materials welded may include low carbon steel,
cast iron, etc. Preparation of materials would be minimal and include preheating, setting up jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Setting up may include the correct connection of hoses,
blowpipes, regulators, etc., and correct settings of gas mixtures.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with routine oxyacetylene welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
(fuel gas welding) or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 169 of 1445
 MEM 5.5A A Carry out mechanical cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.5A A Carry out mechanical cutting

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 5.5A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 5.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job specification requirements determined from job Job sheets and/or instructions are obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
sheets and/or instructions. with work site procedures. specifications relating to the tasks can be identified.

Criteria 5.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate method/machine selected to meet Four different cutting methods/ machines can be
specifications. identified. The appropriate cutting method/ machine to
meet the cutting specifications can be identified.

Criteria 5.5A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine loaded and adjusted appropriately for operation The cutting machine is loaded and adjusted in accordance
consistent with standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures.

Element 5.5A.2 Select/set up machine tooling

Criteria 5.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate tooling is selected. The most appropriate machine tooling is selected. The material to be cut can be identified. The effect of the
material to be cut on the machine tooling to be used can
be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 170 of 1445
 MEM 5.5A A Carry out mechanical cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling is correctly installed using standard operating The cutting tool is correctly installed in accordance with Tooling defects can be identified. The operational
procedures. standard operating procedures. requirements of the cutting tool can be identified. The
safety precautions to be observed while installing the
cutting tool can be identified.

Criteria 5.5A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine set up and adjusted using standard operating The cutting machine is set up and adjusted in accordance The adjustments that can be made to ensure optimum
procedures. with standard operating procedures. cutting performance can be identified.

Element 5.5A.3 Operate mechanical cutting machine

Criteria 5.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate stops and guards are set and adjusted as The appropriate stops and guards are set and adjusted. The stops to be set can be identified. All guards and
required. their function can be identified.

Criteria 5.5A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material secured and correctly positioned using The material is secured and correctly positioned in The dimensions of the part to be cut can be identified.
measuring equipment as necessary. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.5A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine started and stopped safely to standard The machine is started and stopped safely in accordance The safety procedures to be followed during machine
operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. start up and stopping can be identified.

Criteria 5.5A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine is operated to cut/hole material to specifications The material is cut to size and specification in accordance
using standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 171 of 1445
 MEM 5.5A A Carry out mechanical cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.5A.4 Check material for conformance to specification

Criteria 5.5A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is checked against specification. Machine and/or Where appropriate, the cutting machine and/or tooling is The adjustments that can be made to the machine and/or
tooling adjusted as required and in process adjustments adjusted in accordance with standard operating tooling can be identified. The effect of those adjustments
carried out as necessary. procedures, to ensure cut material conforms to on the dimensions of the cut material can be given.
specifications.

Criteria 5.5A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is cut and/or holed to within workplace The material is cut and/or holed to specification. The tolerances applicable to the dimensions of the cut
tolerances. material can be identified.

Criteria 5.5A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material used in most economical way. The material is used in the most economical way. Where appropriate, the material to be cut is marked out to
ensure minimum wastage of material.

Criteria 5.5A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Codes and standards observed. Where appropriate, relevant codes and standards are Any relevant codes and/or standards applicable to the
complied with. work being undertaken can be identified. The
requirements of those codes in terms of cut material can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 172 of 1445
 MEM 5.5A A Carry out mechanical cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit may cover the operation of a number of the following activities: sawing, shearing, cropping and/or holing. Materials may include ferrous and non-ferrous metals and
non-metallic products. This unit includes the set up and operation of a range of mechanical cutting and holing equipment. Examples of machines that could be covered include
guillotines, croppers, cold saws, band saws, automatic saws etc. This unit does not cover hand or hand held power tools used for cutting purposes eg: circular saws, nibblers and
side grinder. These skills are covered by other units, see Unit 18.1A (Use hand tools) and Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations). Typical applications of this unit may
include cutting for manufacture, production cutting and cutting of materials selected from stores in a maintenance environment. Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a
team environment to predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedure. This unit does not include the skills required for operational maintenance of the
equipment used, these skills are covered by Unit 7.1A (Operational maintenance of machines/equipment). For repair and welding of band saw blades where blade repair unit is not
attached to the machine, refer to Unit 5.13A (Perform manual production welding).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the mechanical cutting of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
materials or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 173 of 1445
 MEM 5.6A A Perform brazing and/or silver soldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.6A A Perform brazing and/or silver soldering

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.6A.1 Prepare materials and equipment

Criteria 5.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job requirements determined from specifications and/ or All relevant drawings, specifications and instructions are The brazing/silver soldering requirements can be
instructions. obtained in accordance with work place procedures. identified. The specifications of the joint to be
brazed/silver soldered can be identified. The location and
size of the joint to be brazed/silver soldered can be
identified.

Criteria 5.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly prepared using appropriate tools and The materials to be brazed/silver soldered are cleaned and The materials preparation required prior to brazing/silver
techniques. prepared using appropriate tools and techniques in soldering can be identified. The tools and techniques
accordance with standard operating procedures. appropriate to the preparation of materials to be
brazed/silver soldered can be identified.

Criteria 5.6A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly assembled/aligned to meet The materials to be brazed/silver soldered are The method of assembling/aligning the materials to be
specifications as required. assembled/aligned to specification in accordance with brazed/silver soldered can be identified. The reasons for
standard operating procedures. selecting the chosen method of assembly/alignment can
be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 174 of 1445
 MEM 5.6A A Perform brazing and/or silver soldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.6A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Distortion prevention measures identified and The procedures for minimising distortion of the materials
appropriate action taken as required. being brazed/silver soldered can be given. The action to
be taken to minimise distortion during the brazing/silver
soldering process can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen action can be given.

Criteria 5.6A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Heating equipment assembled and set up safely and The heating equipment is correctly and safely assembled The appropriate heating equipment for the given task can
correctly in accordance with standard operating and set up in accordance with standard operating be identified. The procedures for assembling and setting
procedures. procedures. up the chosen heating equipment can be given. The
reasons for selecting the chosen heating equipment can
be given. The safety precautions to be taken when
assembling and setting up the heating equipment can be
identified.

Criteria 5.6A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate consumables selected and The appropriate consumables for the brazing/silver
prepared. soldering process can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen consumables can be given.

Criteria 5.6A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test run undertaken and verified as required. Where appropriate, a test run is undertaken and checked The reasons for undertaking test runs can be explained.
for conformance to specifications in accordance with The procedures for checking test runs against
standard operating procedures. specifications can be given. The tools, equipment and
techniques to be used in checking test runs for
conformance with specifications can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 175 of 1445
 MEM 5.6A A Perform brazing and/or silver soldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.6A.2 Braze and/or silver solder

Criteria 5.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate process selected to meet Typical applications of brazing and silver soldering
specifications. processes can be given. The most appropriate process
for the given task can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen process can be given.

Criteria 5.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials preheated as required. The materials to be joined are preheated in accordance The procedures for preheating the materials to be joined
with standard operating procedures. can be given. The precautions to be taken when
preheating materials to be joined can be identified.

Criteria 5.6A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consumables applied using correct and appropriate The jointing material and flux are applied to the joint using The procedures and techniques for applying flux and
techniques. correct and appropriate techniques in accordance with jointing material to the joint can be given. The effects of
standard operating procedures. the use of inappropriate techniques on the performance
of the jointed materials can be given.

Criteria 5.6A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Jointing material applied correctly and in appropriate The jointing material is applied correctly and in appropriate The joint specifications can be identified. The effect of
quantities to meet job/specifications. quantities to conform to specifications. inappropriate quantities of jointing material on the
performance of the jointed materials can be given.

Criteria 5.6A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material temperatures normalised using correct and The temperatures of the jointed materials are normalised The procedures for normalising the temperature of
appropriate techniques. using correct and appropriate techniques in accordance jointed materials can be given. The consequences of
with standard operating procedures. using inappropriate techniques to normalise the
temperature of the joint can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 176 of 1445
 MEM 5.6A A Perform brazing and/or silver soldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.6A.3 Inspect joints

Criteria 5.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Excess jointing materials removed using correct and Where appropriate, excess jointing materials are removed The procedures for removing excess jointing material can
appropriate techniques. using correct and appropriate techniques. be given. The tools and techniques to be used to
remove excess jointing materials can be identified.

Criteria 5.6A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection of joints undertaken to standard operating The brazed/silver soldered joint is inspected for The procedures for inspecting brazed/silver soldered
procedures. conformance to specifications in accordance with standard joints can be given. The equipment and techniques to be
operating procedures. used to inspect the joint for conformance to
specifications can be identified.

Criteria 5.6A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection results reported/recorded using standard Where appropriate, the inspection results are The procedures for recording/ reporting the inspection
operating procedures as required. reported/recorded in accordance with standard operating results can be given.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 177 of 1445
 MEM 5.6A A Perform brazing and/or silver soldering Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken in a production or maintenance environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Work may be undertaken autonomously or
within a team environment. Heating medium can include oxyacetylene and fuel gas. Correct and appropriate consumables may include fluxes (resin or powder), all types of silver
solder and brazing grades, etc. Correct and appropriate assembly of heating equipment may include cylinders, connections, hoses, tips and nozzles. All work undertaken to
legislative and regulatory requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with brazing and/or silver and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
soldering or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 178 of 1445
 MEM 5.7A B Manual heating and thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.7A B Manual heating and thermal cutting

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.7A.1 Assemble/disassemble plant, equipment for manual heating and thermal cutting
Criteria 5.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cutting process and/or procedure for All relevant job sheets, drawings and instructions are The material to be cut can be identified. The most
material is selected. obtained in accordance with work place procedures. appropriate cutting process for the material to be cut can
be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
cutting process can be given.

Criteria 5.7A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accessories and equipment correctly selected and The selected equipment and accessories are correctly The tools, equipment and techniques required to carry
assembled. assembled in accordance with standard operating out the chosen cutting process can be identified. The
procedures. reasons for selecting the chosen equipment and
accessories can be given. The procedures for
assembling the selected equipment and accessories can
be given.

Element 5.7A.2 Operate heating and thermal cutting equipment

Criteria 5.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All safety procedures observed. All safety procedures are followed throughout the heating The hazards associated with manual heating and thermal
and cutting processes. cutting can be identified. The appropriate personal
protective clothing and equipment can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 179 of 1445
 MEM 5.7A B Manual heating and thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment start up procedures followed correctly to The equipment is started up safely in accordance with The procedures for starting up the equipment can be
standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. All necessary pre-start given. The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be
checks are carried out in accordance with standard identified.
operating procedures.

Criteria 5.7A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment adjustments made correctly using standard Where appropriate, the equipment is adjusted to operating The procedures for adjusting the equipment for correct
operating procedures. specifications in accordance with standard operating operation can be given. The adjustments that can be
procedures. made to the equipment can be identified. The effect of
those adjustments on the operation/performance of the
equipment can be explained.

Criteria 5.7A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cutting allowances made. Appropriate cutting allowances are made when carrying The dimensions/specifications of the cut material can be
out cutting processes. identified. The cutting allowance to be applied to ensure
the cut material conforms to specification can be
identified. The source(s) of cutting allowance information
can be identified. The reasons for applying cutting
allowances to the material to be cut can be explained.

Criteria 5.7A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material used in the most economical way. The material from which the object(s) are to be cut is used The procedures for minimising waste material when
in the most economical way. Where appropriate, the cutting objects from sheet or plate can be given. The
material to be cut is marked out to ensure minimum reasons for minimising waste material can be explained.
wastage of material.

Criteria 5.7A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects recognised and corrective action taken to Where appropriate, cutting defects are recognised and Examples of cutting defects and their cause can be given.
standard operating procedures. appropriate corrective action taken in accordance with The procedures for correcting cutting defects can be
standard operating procedures. given. The tools, equipment and techniques required to
correct cutting defects can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 180 of 1445
 MEM 5.7A B Manual heating and thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.7A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material heated and cut to specification. The material is heated and cut to specifications in The specifications to which the heating and cutting to be
Shape/size/length to accepted workplace standards. accordance with standard operating procedures. carried out is to conform can be identified. The
procedures for undertaking the heating and cutting of
the material can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 181 of 1445
 MEM 5.7A B Manual heating and thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a team. Predetermined standards of quality and safety are observed and work is carried out following standard operating
procedures. Manual, straight line cutting standards observed. Manual or automatic processes used to cut and heat to specifications. Cutting may include flame gouging by hand.
All work carried out to legislative and regulatory requirements. Cutting may be applied to material of various thicknesses and types including ferrous, non-ferrous and non-metallic
materials by a variety of methods which may include fuel gas, oxy fuel gas and air fuel gas. Cutting may include use of hand held and self-propelled straight line cutters. Heating
may be applied to material of various thicknesses and types including ferrous, non-ferrous and non-metallic materials by a variety of methods which may include fuel gas, oxy fuel
gas and air fuel gas.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with manual heating, thermal and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
cutting and gouging or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 182 of 1445
 MEM 5.8A B Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.8A B Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting

Element 5.8A.1 Assemble/disassemble plant, equipment for manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping
Criteria 5.8A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cutting process and procedure for material All relevant job sheets, drawings, instructions and The material to be cut can be identified. The most
being worked is selected. procedures are obtained in accordance with work place appropriate cutting process for the material to be cut can
procedures. be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
cutting process can be given. The shapes and sizes to be
produced can be identified. The specifications for
surface finish to be achieved can be identified.

Criteria 5.8A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accessories and equipment correctly selected and The selected equipment and accessories are correctly The tools, equipment and techniques required to carry
assembled. assembled in accordance with standard operating out the chosen cutting process can be identified. The
procedures. reasons for selecting the chosen equipment and
accessories can be given. The procedures for
assembling the selected equipment and accessories can
be given.

Element 5.8A.2 Select equipment settings and consumables

Criteria 5.8A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct equipment settings and consumables selected The equipment settings can be identified. The
from the appropriate standard operating procedures. consumables to be used can be identified. The sources
of information on equipment settings and consumables
to be used can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 183 of 1445
 MEM 5.8A B Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.8A.3 Operate hand held thermal cutting and shaping equipment
Criteria 5.8A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All safety procedures observed. All safety procedures are followed throughout the The hazards associated with manual heating, thermal
heating/cutting/gouging processes. cutting and gouging can be identified. The appropriate
personal protective clothing and equipment can be
identified.

Criteria 5.8A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment start up procedures followed correctly to The equipment is started up safely in accordance with The procedures for starting up the equipment can be
standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. All necessary pre-start given. The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be
checks are carried out in accordance with standard identified.
operating procedures.

Criteria 5.8A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material cut to specification Shape/profile/surface finish The material is cut to specifications and in accordance The specifications to which the cutting is to conform can
to accepted workplace standards. with standard operating procedures. be identified. The procedures for undertaking the
cutting of the material can be given.

Criteria 5.8A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cutting defects recognised and corrective action taken to Where appropriate, cutting defects are recognised and Examples of cutting defects and their cause can be given.
standard operating procedures. appropriate corrective action taken in accordance with The procedures for correcting cutting defects can be
standard operating procedures. given. The tools, equipment and techniques required to
correct cutting defects can be identified.

Criteria 5.8A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material removed with minimum loss of sound metal. The material from which the object(s) are to be cut is used The procedures for minimising waste material when
in the most economical way. Where appropriate, the cutting objects from sheet or plate can be given. The
material to be cut is marked out to ensure minimum reasons for minimising waste material can be explained.
wastage of material.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 184 of 1445
 MEM 5.8A B Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a team. Predetermined standards of quality and safety are observed and work is carried out following standard operating
procedures. The manual thermal cutting process is used to produce complex internal and external profiles which satisfy predetermined shape, size and surface finish specifications.
Items are cut, shaped or gouged by a variety of methods which may include: oxyacetylene, oxy/hydrogen, plasma, thermal lance, carbon arc, etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the thermal cutting, gouging and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and shaping of materials or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 185 of 1445
 MEM 5.9A B Automated thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.9A B Automated thermal cutting

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.9A.1 Set up material

Criteria 5.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is set up including correct procedures for stack All relevant job instructions, specifications and The material to be cut can be identified. The material
cutting and nesting to minimise waste. procedures are obtained in accordance with work place set-up procedures can be given. The reasons for
procedures. The material is set up correctly in accordance minimising waste can be given. The advantages of stack
with standard operating procedures. cutting and nesting can be given. The tools, equipment
and techniques to be used to set up the material for
cutting can be given.

Element 5.9A.2 Set up and use automated cutting machine

Criteria 5.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cutting medium selected and set to The appropriate cutting medium is set to specifications in The appropriate cutting medium can be identified. The
specification. accordance with standard operating procedures. reasons for selecting the chosen cutting medium can be
given. The procedures for setting cutting media can be
given. The sources of the specifications to which the
cutting media are to be set can be identified.

Criteria 5.9A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process requirements determined from specifications or The process requirements can be identified.
instructions.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 186 of 1445
 MEM 5.9A B Automated thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.9A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine set up safely to specifications using standard The machine is set up safely in conformance to The procedures for setting up the machine can be given.
operating procedures. specifications and in accordance with standard operating The specifications to which the machine is to be set can
procedures. be identified. The hazards associated with the setting of
automated thermal cutting machines can be identified.
The tools, techniques and equipment necessary to set up
the machine can be identified.

Criteria 5.9A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct program selected and loaded to standard The correct program is selected and loaded in accordance The procedures for loading the program into the machine
operating procedure. with standard operating procedures. can be given. The correct program for the work to be
undertaken can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen program can be given.

Criteria 5.9A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine datums established to specifications. The machine datums are established in accordance with The procedures for establishing machine datums can be
specifications and standard operating procedures. given. The specifications for the machine datums can be
identified.

Element 5.9A.3 Use automated thermal cutting machine

Criteria 5.9A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required cutting medium is ignited following Where appropriate, the cutting medium is ignited in The procedures for igniting cutting media can be given.
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. The hazards associated with igniting cutting media can
be identified.

Criteria 5.9A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine started using correct sequence and procedure. The machine is started up safely in the correct sequence in The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified.
accordance with standard operating procedures. The procedures for starting the machine can be given.
The starting sequence can be identified. The safety
precautions to be taken when starting the machine can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 187 of 1445
 MEM 5.9A B Automated thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.9A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Powder marking and other tracing devices used as Where appropriate, powder marking or other tracing The function of powder marking and other tracing
required to standard operating procedure. devices are used in accordance with standard operating devices can be explained. The procedures for using
procedures. tracing devices can be given. The safety precautions to
be taken when using tracing devices can be identified.

Criteria 5.9A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct shut down procedure observed in accordance The machine is shut down safely in the correct sequence The procedures for shutting down the machine can be
with standard operating procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. given. The shut down sequence can be identified. The
safety precautions to be taken during machine shut
downs can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 188 of 1445
 MEM 5.9A B Automated thermal cutting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Use of single or multi-head machines. Use in heavy engineering for plate and pipe cutting. Person would work autonomously or as part of a team. A range of material would be
used. Cutting media would include fuel gases, oxy acetylene, plasma arc, laser etc. Powder marking and magnetic, photoelectric tracing devices or numerically controlled (NC)
machines may be used. Programs on numerically controlled (NC) machines are selected and loaded according to predetermined instructions.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with automated thermal cutting or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 189 of 1445
 MEM 5.10A A Undertake fabrication, forming, bending and shaping Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.10A A Undertake fabrication, forming, bending and shaping

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 5.10A.1 Select and set up forming/shaping equipment for a specific operation
Criteria 5.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate tools and equipment selected. The most appropriate tools and equipment are selected. A variety of hot and cold forming/ shaping processes
can be identified. The machines, tools and/or equipment
required to perform those forming/shaping processes can
be identified. The forming/shaping processes to be
applied to the given task can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, equipment and
process(es) can be given.

Criteria 5.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment correctly set up and adjusted for operation to The equipment is set up and adjusted in accordance with The adjustments that can be made to the equipment and
standard operating procedure. standard operating procedures. the effect of the adjustments on the object being
formed/shaped can be identified.

Criteria 5.10A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances for shrinkage, thickness, inside/outside Where appropriate, all allowances are calculated correctly. The allowances to be determined when forming/shaping
measurements correctly made. All measurements made take account of the relevant materials can be identified. The sources of data relating
allowances. to those allowances can be identified.

Element 5.10A.2 Operate forming/shaping equipment

Criteria 5.10A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine safely started up and shut down to standard Where appropriate, the machine is started up and shut The start up and shut down procedures, where
operating procedure. down in accordance with standard operating procedures. appropriate, can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 190 of 1445
 MEM 5.10A A Undertake fabrication, forming, bending and shaping Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.10A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material and safety guards correctly positioned. The material is correctly positioned in the The material positioning/feeding requirements can be
machine/equipment in accordance with standard operating identified. The location and function of all safety guards
procedures. All safety guards are correctly positioned can be identified.
before the machine/equipment is operated in accordance
with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.10A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment correctly operated and adjusted. The machine/equipment is correctly operated and
adjusted where appropriate in accordance with standard
operating procedures. The adjustments that can be made
to the machine/equipment can be identified. The effect of
those adjustments on the object to be formed/shaped
can be given.

Element 5.10A.3 Form and shape material

Criteria 5.10A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material levelled, straightened, rolled, pressed or bent to Drawings and/or specifications are obtained in accordance The tasks to be undertaken can be identified. The
specifications/drawings. with work site procedures. The material is formed/shaped specifications relating to those tasks can be identified.
to size and specification in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

Criteria 5.10A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct hot or cold forming procedures followed. The most appropriate forming/shaping process to achieve The procedures to be followed in the forming/shaping
the required size and specification is utilised in accordance process to be utilised can be given.
with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.10A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final form/shape checked for compliance to specification The final form/shape of the object is checked for Defects in formed/shaped materials can be identified.
and adjusted as necessary to standard operating conformance with specifications. Where appropriate, the Those defects that can be rectified by further
procedure. object is reworked in accordance with standard operating work/adjustment can be identified.
procedure to ensure conformance with specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 191 of 1445
 MEM 5.10A A Undertake fabrication, forming, bending and shaping Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work may be undertaken autonomously or as part of a team. Predetermined standards of quality and safety are observed and work is carried out following standard operating
procedures. Forming, shaping and bending operations conducted on either plate, section or sheet including tube. A wide range of shapes and products are formed which may
include pipework chamfers, cylinders, cones, angles, hoppers, ductwork, "square to round", "transitions," "lobster backs" and all forms of tubular shapes, including hand rails,
reticulation pipework, mufflers etc. Materials may include ferrous and non ferrous and non-metallic substances. A variety of tools and equipment may be used including presses,
shapers, benders, drop hammers etc. If heating or thermal cutting is required, Unit 5.7A (Manual heating and thermal cutting) should be accessed. Where mark off/out skills are
required then Unit 12.7A (Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the forming and shaping of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
fabricated components or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 192 of 1445
 MEM 5.11A B Assemble fabricated components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.11A B Assemble fabricated components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 8
Notes - Where welds are required to meet legislative or regulatory requirements then appropriate welding units should also be selected.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding
5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.19A Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process
5.49A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
5.4A Perform routine oxy acetylene welding 5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting
5.22A Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
welding process
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.17A Weld using gas metal arc welding process
5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.11A.1 Identify assembly method and construct jigs if required

Criteria 5.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Method identified and jigs constructed from engineering Where appropriate, engineering drawings and/or A variety of methods for assembling fabricated
drawings or according to workshop practice. specifications are obtained in accordance with work site components can be identified. The assembly method
procedures. Where appropriate, jigs are constructed to most appropriate to the components to be assembled can
meet the requirements of the assembly process in be identified. Any jigs required to facilitate the assembly
accordance with standard operating procedures. of the components can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 193 of 1445
 MEM 5.11A B Assemble fabricated components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Distortion prevention/control techniques correctly Distortion prevention/control techniques are correctly The effects of distortion of fabricated components can
applied. applied in accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified. Distortion prevention techniques can be
identified.

Element 5.11A.2 Ensure all components for assembly are available

Criteria 5.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All components checked against drawings and material All components required for the assembly are obtained in The components contained in the drawing and material
list. accordance with standard operating procedures. list can be identified. Where appropriate, the procedures
for obtaining components required for the assembly can
be identified.

Element 5.11A.3 Select tools and fixtures for fabrication assembly

Criteria 5.11A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate equipment selected. The most appropriate equipment for fabrication assembly The most appropriate equipment for fabrication assembly
is obtained, or access to the equipment organised in can be identified.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Element 5.11A.4 Assemble fabricated components

Criteria 5.11A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material and/or fabricated components correctly The components to be assembled are correctly positioned The relative position/location of each component in the
positioned. in accordance with drawing/specifications. completed assembly can be identified.

Criteria 5.11A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Jigs, fixtures, tools and measuring equipment correctly All jigs, fixtures, tools and equipment are appropriately
adjusted and applied. used and adjusted in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 194 of 1445
 MEM 5.11A B Assemble fabricated components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.11A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Datum line correctly determined if necessary. Where appropriate, the datum line is correctly marked to The function of datum lines can be explained.
facilitate assembly.

Criteria 5.11A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembled components checked for position including The position of all assembled components is checked for The position requirements of the assembled components
squareness, level and alignment to specification. conformance with specifications. in terms of squareness, level, alignment, can be
identified.

Criteria 5.11A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fixing/joining techniques applied as necessary according Appropriate fixing/joining techniques are used to A variety of fixing/joining techniques can be identified.
to standard operating procedure. assemble the components in accordance with standard The most appropriate fixing/joining technique for the
operating procedures. components to be assembled can be identified.

Criteria 5.11A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly checked for compliance with drawing. The assembly is checked visually and dimensionally for Defects associated with the assembly of fabricated
conformance to drawings and specifications. components can be identified. Those defects that can be
rectified by rework or adjustments can be identified.

Criteria 5.11A.4.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Codes/standards interpreted and applied. Where appropriate, the assembly, assembly process and Where appropriate, the relevant codes/standards
technique are checked for conformance to the applying to the assembly of fabricated components can
requirements of the relevant codes/ standards. be identified. Where appropriate, the requirements of the
codes/standards on the assembly process and/or
techniques can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 195 of 1445
 MEM 5.11A B Assemble fabricated components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
All work would be carried out in accordance with legislative and regulatory requirements. Work would be undertaken using general fabricated components in either plate, pipe and
section or sheet. Typical applications are transitions, pipeworks and structural fabrication, ductwork, general jobbing work, fired and unfired pressure vessels. Standards for lifting
equipment are defined elsewhere. Work may be undertaken in plant or on-site. Work would be undertaken as part of a team in many instances in co-operation with those with
rigging/dogging skills where necessary. In this unit alignment refers to typical structural alignment and levelling using planes and line straight edges, spirit levels, line levels,
squares, etc. This unit does not cover the skills required for the assembly of fabricated engineering components, these skills are covered by the Unit 18.6A
(Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components). Assembly using pre-constructed jigs is covered by Unit 3.1A (Manual production assembly) or Unit 3.3A
(Sheet and plate assembly).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the assembly of fabricated and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
components or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 196 of 1445
 MEM 5.12A B Perform routine manual metal arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.12A B Perform routine manual metal arc welding

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.12A.1 Identify weld requirements

Criteria 5.12A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are identified from job instructions. Appropriate instructions, specifications and drawings are The weld requirements for performing routine MMAW
obtained and weld requirements identified in accordance can be given.
with work site procedures.

Criteria 5.12A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Location of welds are identified in accordance with Location of required weld(s) identified for given tasks. Location of weld can be determined from standard
standard operating procedures and job specifications. operating procedures and job specifications.

Element 5.12A.2 Prepare materials for welding

Criteria 5.12A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are cleaned and prepared ready for welding. The materials to be welded are cleaned and prepared using The materials preparation required prior to welding can
appropriate tools and techniques. be identified. The tools and techniques appropriate to
the preparation of materials to be welded can be
identified.

Element 5.12A.3 Prepare equipment for welding

Criteria 5.12A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up correctly. Welding leads are correctly attached. Current setting is Different current settings can be given to suit typical
appropriate for the size and type of electrode and for situations and electrodes.
position of weld.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 197 of 1445
 MEM 5.12A B Perform routine manual metal arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.12A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct electrodes are selected. The correct electrode flux type and size is selected to Different electrodes can be identified and related to a
produce the weld required and ,where applicable, typical range of welding outcomes.
according to job instructions/drawings/work
specifications.

Element 5.12A.4 Perform routine welding using MMAW

Criteria 5.12A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe welding practices are applied. All welds are performed in a safe manner with regard to the Safe welding practices and precautions can be given.
operator and other personnel. Precautions are taken to Typical hazards can be identified.
protect the welder and other personnel from hazards
associated with welding process.

Criteria 5.12A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are welded to job requirements. Welds are produced with a minimum number of major Major defects and their causes relating to MMAW can
defects. Appropriate action taken to report defects. Cause be given.
of major defects identified and required adjustments to
settings/ electrodes/welding technique identified.

Criteria 5.12A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds cleaned in accordance with standard operating All welds are cleaned to specification. Standard operating The weld cleaning requirements can be identified. The
procedures. procedures are followed, where applicable. appropriate tools/equipment for cleaning welds can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 198 of 1445
 MEM 5.12A B Perform routine manual metal arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Routine MMAW in this unit is intended to apply in a manufacturing or maintenance environment where welding is not required to meet Australian Standards or other welding
codes, licensing requirements, Occupational Health and Safety regulations relating to certificated/coded welding. Fillet and butt welds in all positions would typically be performed
on low carbon/mild steels. Weld preparation would be minimal and generally restricted to cleaning, using files and grinders. In circumstances where welding is required to meet
Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose or equivalent codes, Occupational Health and Safety regulations and/or licensing requirements then Unit 5.15A (Weld using manual
metal arc welding process) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with routine manual arc welding or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 199 of 1445
 MEM 5.13A B Perform manual production welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.13A B Perform manual production welding

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.13A.1 Tack and/or weld material using appropriate welding process
Criteria 5.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is prepared for the process to be used following The materials to be welded are prepared in accordance The material preparation to be undertaken prior to
standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. welding can be identified. The tools and/or equipment to
be used in preparing the material(s) can be identified.

Criteria 5.13A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is aligned (if required) using dedicated jigs and Where appropriate, jigs and fixtures are used to align The positional relationships of parts to be welded can be
fixtures. materials to be welded in accordance with standard identified. Where appropriate, the jigs and/or fixtures to
operating procedures. be used to align the materials to be welded can be
identified. The function of jigs and fixtures in production
welding can be given.

Criteria 5.13A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld is carried out using appropriate welding processes The tack and/or weld is performed safely in accordance Weld requirements can be identified. The welding
to accepted workplace standards. with standard operating procedures. process to be used can be identified. The hazards
associated with the welding process can be identified.
The appropriate personal protection equipment and its
function can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 200 of 1445
 MEM 5.13A B Perform manual production welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Production welding, including spot, resistance, hot air, ultrasonic welding is undertaken on one of a range of metallic and non-metallic materials including low carbon steels.
Guidance may be required with respect to equipment settings, choice of consumables, gas mixture and pressures. For performing automated/production welding, Unit 7.24A
(Operate and monitor machine/process) or Unit 7.25A (Advanced machine/process operation) should be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with manual production welding or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 201 of 1445
 MEM 5.14A B Monitor quality of production welding/fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.14A B Monitor quality of production welding/fabrications

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
5.17A Weld using gas metal arc welding process 5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
5.19A Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process 5.49A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
5.4A Perform routine oxy acetylene welding 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.14A.1 Monitor quality of welded products

Criteria 5.14A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements identified from specifications and/or Drawings and/or specifications are obtained in accordance The weld requirements can be identified.
drawings. with work site procedures.

Criteria 5.14A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection procedures carried out in accordance with The weld inspection procedures are carried out in The weld inspection procedures can be identified.
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.14A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-conforming welds are reported and corrective action Where appropriate, non-conforming welds are reported in Weld defects can be identified. Those weld defects that
initiated in accordance with standard operating accordance with standard operating procedures. Where can be rectified by further work/rework can be identified.
procedures. appropriate, corrective action is initiated in accordance
with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 202 of 1445
 MEM 5.14A B Monitor quality of production welding/fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.14A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preset gauges used to monitor quality of welded product. Preset gauges are used correctly in accordance with The preset gauges appropriate to the welded product can
standard operating procedures. be identified. The function of the preset gauges can be
identified.

Element 5.14A.2 Initiate testing when required

Criteria 5.14A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Implement test requirements in accordance with standard Where appropriate, weld tests are initiated in accordance Test requirements appropriate to the welded product can
operating procedures and any legislative or regulatory with standard operating procedures and be identified. Where appropriate, legislative and/or
requirements. legislative/regulatory requirements. regulatory requirements of the welded product can be
identified. The procedures for initiating weld tests can be
given.

Element 5.14A.3 Undertake procedures' reporting

Criteria 5.14A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data collected according to standard operating All relevant welding data is collected in accordance with The weld data to be collected can be identified.
procedure. standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.14A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Prepare reports as required. Where appropriate, weld reports are prepared in The weld reporting requirements can be identified. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. person for whom the reports are prepared can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 203 of 1445
 MEM 5.14A B Monitor quality of production welding/fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to those whose duties include the basic inspection of completed or partly completed welded fabrications produced by others in a production environment. Work
would be carried out in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and standard operating procedures and to established welding procedures. Duties to
be carried out in consultation with appropriately qualified supervisor or engineer. This competency would be used in a production welding environment, monitoring the quality of
production fabrication work where knowledge of the welding techniques and testing procedures is required. This unit should not be selected where Unit 15.4A (Perform inspection
(basic)) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with monitoring the quality of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
welded products or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 204 of 1445
 MEM 5.15A B Weld using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.15A B Weld using manual metal arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.15A.1 Prepare materials for welding

Criteria 5.15A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is correctly prepared. All appropriate specifications and drawings are obtained. The weld requirements can be identified.

Criteria 5.15A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is correctly prepared. Appropriate tools and techniques are used to prepare The material preparation requirements can be identified.
material for welding in accordance with work site
procedures.

Element 5.15A.2 Select welding machine components

Criteria 5.15A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding machine and electrodes identified. Correct welding machine and electrodes for given task is The application of a variety of welding machines can be
identified against pre-determined welding procedures and given. The application of the electrodes classification
specifications and/or technical drawings. system can be given.

Element 5.15A.3 Assemble and set up welding equipment

Criteria 5.15A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment assembled and set up. Welding equipment is correctly assembled and set up to The relationships between amperage, electrode and
safety and work site procedures. material can be given. The appropriate settings for the
given applications and the selected
equipment/electrodes can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 205 of 1445
 MEM 5.15A B Weld using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.15A.4 Minimise and rectify distortion

Criteria 5.15A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate distortion prevention measures are selected. Appropriate distortion prevention measures are Methods of preventing distortion of welded materials
undertaken during the welding process. can be given. The appropriate distortion prevention
method for the given application can be identified.

Criteria 5.15A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Distortion is rectified. Where appropriate, distortion of welded materials is Methods of rectifying distortion of welded materials and
rectified in accordance with work site procedures. their applications can be given.

Element 5.15A.5 Weld to job specification using MMAW

Criteria 5.15A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld deposit is to specification. Welds are deposited according to job requirements. The weld requirements for similar applications can be
identified.

Criteria 5.15A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Joints cleaned to specifications. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate tools and Methods of cleaning welded joints can be given.
techniques in accordance with work site procedures.

Element 5.15A.6 Ensure weld conformance

Criteria 5.15A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects removed with minimum loss of sound metal using Where appropriate, weld defects are removed in Methods of weld defect removal and their application
correct and appropriate techniques and tools. accordance with work site procedures. A minimum amount can be given.
of sound metal is removed with the defect.

Criteria 5.15A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected for conformance to Visual defects in welded joints are identified. Weld discontinuities detectable visually can be given.
specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 206 of 1445
 MEM 5.15A B Weld using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.15A.7 Maintain weld records

Criteria 5.15A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are completed correctly. Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with The weld records to be kept can be identified. The
standard operating procedures. frequency at which weld details are to be recorded can be
identified. The reasons for keeping weld records can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 207 of 1445
 MEM 5.15A B Weld using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, work and welding procedures and the skills applied to a range of
fabrication activities. A range of material suitable to heavy or light fabrication is used. Fillet and butt welds in all positions on a range of materials that may include carbon steel or
stainless steel, etc. As a guide, welds produced to the standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose, American Bureau of Shipping
(ABS) or equivalent. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Remedial action using thermal processes may include oxyacetylene
and air arc equipment. Grinding devices may also be used. Where thermal processes, hand and/or power tools are required the appropriate specialisation units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. drawings, specifications, catalogues, manuals, codes, standards and information relevant to
the work. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication,
answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the
collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any
off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can
competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria,
including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the manual metal arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for their own work; - plan tasks in all
process or other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in accordance with
knowledge covered by this unit. standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use accepted
engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will
be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 208 of 1445
 MEM 5.16A B Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.16A B Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.16A.1 Prepare welding materials and equipment

Criteria 5.16A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is prepared. Appropriate machine settings and electrodes determined The elements of a welding procedure can be identified
from relevant documentation and instructions. and the purpose given. The purpose of pre and/or post
welding heating and the methods of application can be
given. The appropriate ventilation/extraction
requirements can be identified.

Criteria 5.16A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate welding equipment is assembled and Welding equipment is set up safely with correct settings in Settings, electrodes and related equipment set-up can be
adjusted correctly and safely. accordance with standard operating procedures. given for materials and weld requirements. The purpose
for the correct size of welding cable, handpiece and
equipment capacity is given.

Criteria 5.16A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to achieve required weld Weld and material preparation requirements are identified All weld and preparation requirements to achieve code
specification. from given specifications. Materials are prepared correctly, specification can be given.
using appropriate tools and techniques.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 209 of 1445
 MEM 5.16A B Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.16A.2 Weld joints to code requirements using MMAW

Criteria 5.16A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are interpreted correctly. Instructions, symbols, specifications interpreted correctly, The weld requirements of nominated code can be
including bead size, bead placement, reinforcement, etc., identified. The location and size of the weld(s) to be
and in accordance with weld procedure sheet, if available, deposited can be identified.
and standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.16A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds are deposited correctly to specifications. Fillet and butt welds are deposited correctly as per code Methods and conditions for obtaining fillet and butt
requirements. Where appropriate, distortion prevention weld deposits to code requirements can be given.
techniques are used in accordance with work site Distortion prevention techniques can be given.
procedures. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate
tools and techniques in accordance with work site
procedures.

Element 5.16A.3 Assess weld quality and rectify faults

Criteria 5.16A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected against specifications. Weld are inspected against the nominated code and Various weld discontinuities that are detectable visually
discontinuities identified. Decision is made as to and do not conform to the code requirements can be
acceptability of discontinuity as per code requirements. explained. The causes of the discontinuities are given.

Criteria 5.16A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are removed using appropriate methods. Where identified and does not meet code requirements, Discontinuities can be identified in relation to code
discontinuities are removed. A minimum amount of sound requirements.
metal is removed with the defect. The weld conforms to the
requirements of the job specification.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 210 of 1445
 MEM 5.16A B Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.16A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are correctly completed and maintained. Weld identification is applied appropriately and Different welder identification systems can be given,
documentation completed correctly. such as numbering, bar coding, paint coding, letter
stamps.

Range statement
Advanced MMAW undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and welding procedures. Work is carried out on a range
of structural sections and/or plate and/or pipe for general fabrication and may include low carbon steel, stainless steel, low alloy steel, etc. As a guide, welds produced to the
standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 Structural Purpose, Bureau Det Norse Verticas or equivalent. Welds are fillet and butt in all positions.
Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is carried out, Unit 5.8A
(Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the manual metal arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 211 of 1445
 MEM 5.17A B Weld using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.17A B Weld using gas metal arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.17A.1 Prepare materials for gas metal arc welding

Criteria 5.17A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements identified from specifications and/or All appropriate specifications and drawings are obtained. The weld requirements for GMAW can be identified.
drawings.

Criteria 5.17A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is correctly prepared. Appropriate tools and techniques are used to prepare The material preparation requirements can be identified.
material for welding in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 5.17A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials assembled/aligned to specification where The materials to be welded are aligned, located and Examples of material holding devices and their
required. clamped to specification in accordance with work site application can be given. The required relationship
procedures. between the parts to be welded can be identified. The
appropriate work holding method for the application can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 212 of 1445
 MEM 5.17A B Weld using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.17A.2 Select welding components

Criteria 5.17A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding machine settings accessories and consumables Correct welding machine, settings, gas and electrode for The application of weld metal transfer (short arc, spray,
identified. given task selected against pre-determined welding etc.) can be given. The application of a variety of welding
procedures and specifications and/or technical drawings. machines can be given. The appropriate gas can be
identified given the range of weld requirements. The
appropriate electrode is selected using the electrode
classification system. The appropriate welding machine
for the given task can be identified. Appropriate size of
contact tip and drive rollers is given. Appropriate type of
liner for the task is given.

Element 5.17A.3 Assemble and set up welding equipment

Criteria 5.17A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment assembled and set up. Welding equipment is correctly assembled and set up to The relationships between amperage, gas flow, electrode,
safety and work site procedures. contact tip and roller, feed rate and material can be
given. The appropriate settings for the given
applications and the selected equipment/consumables
can be identified.

Element 5.17A.4 Minimise and rectify distortion

Criteria 5.17A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate distortion prevention measures are selected. Appropriate distortion prevention measures are Methods of preventing distortion of welded materials
undertaken during the welding process. can be given. The appropriate distortion prevention
method for the given application can be identified.

Criteria 5.17A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Distortion is rectified. Where appropriate, distortion of welded materials is Methods of rectifying distortion of welded materials and
rectified in accordance with work site procedures. their applications can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 213 of 1445
 MEM 5.17A B Weld using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.17A.5 Weld to job specification using GMAW

Criteria 5.17A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld deposit is to specification. Welds are deposited according to job requirements. The weld requirements for similar GMAW applications
can be identified.

Criteria 5.17A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Joints cleaned to specifications. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate tools and Methods of cleaning welded joints can be given.
techniques in accordance with work site procedures.

Element 5.17A.6 Ensure weld conformance

Criteria 5.17A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected for conformance to Visual defects in welded joints are identified. Weld discontinuities detectable visually can be given.
specifications.

Criteria 5.17A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects removed with minimum loss of sound metal using Where appropriate, weld defects are removed in Methods of weld defect removal and their application
correct and appropriate techniques and tools. accordance with work site procedures. A minimum amount can be given.
of sound metal is removed with the defect.

Element 5.17A.7 Maintain weld records

Criteria 5.17A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are completed correctly. Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with The weld records to be kept can be identified. The
standard operating procedures. frequency at which weld details are to be recorded can be
identified. The reasons for keeping weld records can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 214 of 1445
 MEM 5.17A B Weld using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
GMAW undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, work and welding procedures and the skills applied to a range of
fabrication activities. A range of material suitable to heavy or light fabrication is used. Fillet and butt welds in all positions on a range of materials that may include carbon steel or
stainless steel, etc. As a guide, welds produced to the standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose, American Bureau of Shipping
(ABS) or equivalent. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Remedial action using thermal processes may include oxyacetylene
and air arc equipment. Grinding devices may also be used. Where thermal processes, hand and/or power tools are required the appropriate specialisation units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the gas metal arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 215 of 1445
 MEM 5.18A B Perform advanced welding using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.18A B Perform advanced welding using gas metal arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.17A Weld using gas metal arc welding process 5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.18A.1 Prepare welding materials and equipment

Criteria 5.18A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is prepared. Appropriate machine settings and electrodes determined The elements of a welding procedure can be identified
from relevant documentation and instructions. and the purpose given. The purpose of pre and/or post
welding heating and the methods of application can be
given. The appropriate ventilation/extraction
requirements can be identified.

Criteria 5.18A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate welding equipment is assembled and Welding equipment is set up safely with correct settings in Settings, electrodes and related equipment set-up can be
adjusted correctly and safely. accordance with standard operating procedures. given for materials and weld requirements. The purpose
for the correct size of welding cable, handpiece and
equipment capacity is given.

Criteria 5.18A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to achieve required weld Weld and material preparation requirements are identified All weld and preparation requirements to achieve code
specification. from given specifications. Materials are prepared correctly, specification can be given.
using appropriate tools and techniques.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 216 of 1445
 MEM 5.18A B Perform advanced welding using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.18A.2 Weld joints to code requirements using GMAW

Criteria 5.18A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are interpreted correctly. Instructions, symbols, specifications interpreted correctly, The weld requirements of nominated code can be
including bead size, bead placement, reinforcement, etc., identified. The location and size of the weld(s) to be
and in accordance with weld procedure sheet, if available, deposited can be identified.
and standard operating procedures..

Criteria 5.18A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds are deposited correctly to specifications. Fillet and butt welds are deposited correctly as per code Methods and conditions for obtaining fillet and butt
requirements. Where appropriate, distortion prevention weld deposits to code requirements can be given.
techniques are used in accordance with work site Distortion prevention techniques can be given.
procedures. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate
tools and techniques in accordance with work site
procedures.

Element 5.18A.3 Assess weld quality and rectify faults

Criteria 5.18A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected against specifications. Weld are inspected against the nominated code and Various weld discontinuities that are detectable visually
discontinuities identified. Decision is made as to and do not conform to the code requirements can be
acceptability of discontinuity as per code requirements. explained. The causes of the discontinuities are given.

Criteria 5.18A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are removed using appropriate methods. Where identified and does not meet code requirements, Discontinuities can be identified in relation to code
discontinuities are removed. A minimum amount of sound requirements.
metal is removed with the defect. The weld conforms to the
requirements of the job specification.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 217 of 1445
 MEM 5.18A B Perform advanced welding using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.18A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are correctly completed and maintained. Weld identification is applied appropriately and Different welder identification systems can be given,
documentation completed correctly. such as numbering, bar coding, paint coding, letter
stamps.

Range statement
Advanced GMAW undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and welding procedures. Work is carried out on a range of
structural sections and/or plate and/or pipe for general fabrication and may include low carbon steel, stainless steel, low alloy steel, etc. As a guide, welds produced to the standard
of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 Structural Purpose, Bureau Det Norse Verticas or equivalent. Welds would be fillet and butt in all positions.
Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is carried out, Unit 5.8A
(Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the manual metal arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 218 of 1445
 MEM 5.19A B Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.19A B Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.49A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.19A.1 Prepare materials for GTAW welding

Criteria 5.19A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements identified from specifications and/or All appropriate specifications and drawings are obtained. The weld requirements for GTAW can be identified.
drawings.

Criteria 5.19A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is correctly prepared. Appropriate tools and techniques are used to prepare The material preparation requirements can be identified.
material for welding in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 5.19A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are assembled/aligned to specification where The materials to be welded are aligned, located and Examples of material holding devices and their
required. clamped to specifications in accordance with work site application can be given. The required relationship
procedures. between parts to be welded can be identified. The
appropriate work holding method for a given application
can be identified.

Element 5.19A.2 Select welding machine components

Criteria 5.19A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding machine settings accessories and consumables Correct welding machine settings, gas and electrodes for The application of a variety of welding machines can be
are identified. given task is identified against pre-determined welding given. The application of the electrodes classification
procedures and specifications and/or technical drawings. system can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 219 of 1445
 MEM 5.19A B Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.19A.3 Assemble and set up welding equipment

Criteria 5.19A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment assembled and set up. Welding equipment is correctly assembled and set up to The relationships between amperage, gas flow, electrode,
safety and work site procedures. contact tip and roller, feed rate and material can be
given. The appropriate settings for the given
applications and the selected equipment/electrodes can
be identified.

Element 5.19A.4 Minimise and rectify distortion

Criteria 5.19A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate distortion prevention measures are selected. Appropriate distortion prevention measures are Methods of preventing distortion of welded materials
undertaken during the welding process. can be given. The appropriate distortion prevention
method for the given application can be identified.

Criteria 5.19A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Distortion is rectified. Where appropriate, distortion of welded materials is Methods of rectifying distortion of welded materials and
rectified in accordance with work site procedures. their applications can be given.

Element 5.19A.5 Weld to job specification using GTAW

Criteria 5.19A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld deposit is to specification. Welds are deposited according to job requirements. The weld requirements for similar GTAW applications
can be identified.

Criteria 5.19A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Joints cleaned to specifications. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate tools and Methods of cleaning welded joints can be given.
techniques in accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 220 of 1445
 MEM 5.19A B Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.19A.6 Ensure weld conformance

Criteria 5.19A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects removed with minimum loss of sound metal using Where appropriate, weld defects are removed in Methods of weld defect removal and their application
correct and appropriate techniques and tools. accordance with work site procedures. A minimum amount can be given.
of sound metal is removed with the defect.

Criteria 5.19A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected for conformance to Visual defects in welded joints are identified. Weld discontinuities detectable visually can be given.
specifications.

Element 5.19A.7 Maintain weld records

Criteria 5.19A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are completed correctly. Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with The weld records to be kept can be identified. The
standard operating procedures. frequency at which weld details are to be recorded can be
identified. The reasons for keeping weld records can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 221 of 1445
 MEM 5.19A B Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
GTAW undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, work and welding procedures and the skills applied to a range of
fabrication activities. A range of material suitable to heavy or light fabrication is used. Fillet and butt welds in all positions on a range of materials that may include carbon steel or
stainless steel, etc. As a guide, welds produced to the standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose, American Bureau of Shipping
(ABS) or equivalent. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Remedial action using thermal processes may include oxyacetylene
and air arc equipment. Grinding devices may also be used. Where thermal processes, hand and/or power tools are required the appropriate specialisation units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. drawings, specifications, catalogues, manuals, codes, standards and information relevant to
the work. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication,
answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the
collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any
off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can
competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria,
including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the gas tungsten arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for their own work; - plan tasks in all
process or other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in accordance with
knowledge covered by this unit. standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use accepted
engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will
be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 222 of 1445
 MEM 5.20A B Perform advanced welding using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.20A B Perform advanced welding using gas tungsten arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.19A Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process 5.49A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.20A.1 Prepare welding materials and equipment

Criteria 5.20A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is prepared. Appropriate machine settings and electrodes determined The elements of a welding procedure can be identified
from relevant documentation and instructions. and the purpose given. The purpose of pre and/or post
welding heating and the methods of application can be
given. The appropriate ventilation/extraction
requirements can be identified.

Criteria 5.20A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate welding equipment is assembled and Welding equipment is set up safely with correct settings in Settings, electrodes and related equipment set-up can be
adjusted correctly and safely. accordance with standard operating procedures. given for materials and weld requirements. The purpose
for preparing the electrode tip is given. The purpose for
the various gas shrouds is given. The appropriate
handpiece for given welding current ranges and weld
applications can be given.

Criteria 5.20A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to achieve required weld Weld and material preparation requirements are identified All weld and preparation requirements to achieve code
specification. from given specifications. Materials are prepared correctly, specification can be given.
using appropriate tools and techniques.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 223 of 1445
 MEM 5.20A B Perform advanced welding using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.20A.2 Weld joints to code requirements using GTAW

Criteria 5.20A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are interpreted correctly. Instructions, symbols, specifications interpreted correctly, The weld requirements of nominated code can be
including bead size, bead placement, reinforcement, etc., identified. The location and size of the weld(s) to be
and in accordance with weld procedure sheet, if available, deposited can be identified.
and standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.20A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds are deposited correctly to specifications. Fillet and butt welds are deposited correctly as per code Methods and conditions for obtaining fillet and butt
requirements. Where appropriate, distortion prevention weld deposits to code requirements can be given.
techniques are used in accordance with work site Distortion prevention techniques can be given.
procedures. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate
tools and techniques in accordance with work site
procedures.

Element 5.20A.3 Assess weld quality and rectify faults

Criteria 5.20A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected against specifications. Weld are inspected against the nominated code and Various weld discontinuities that are detectable visually
discontinuities identified. Decision is made as to and do not conform to the code requirements can be
acceptability of discontinuity as per code requirements. explained. The causes of the discontinuities are given.

Criteria 5.20A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are removed using appropriate methods. Where identified and does not meet code requirements, Discontinuities can be identified in relation to code
discontinuities are removed. A minimum amount of sound requirements.
metal is removed with the defect. The weld conforms to the
requirements of the job specification.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 224 of 1445
 MEM 5.20A B Perform advanced welding using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.20A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are correctly completed and maintained. Weld identification is applied appropriately and Different welder identification systems can be given,
documentation completed correctly. such as numbering, bar coding, paint coding, letter
stamps.

Range statement
Advanced GTAW undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and welding procedures. Work is carried out on a range of
structural sections and/or plate and/or pipe for general fabrication and may include low carbon steel, stainless steel, low alloy steel, etc. As a guide, welds produced to the standard
of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 Structural Purpose, Bureau Det Norse Verticas or equivalent. Welds are fillet and butt in all positions. Preparation
of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is carried out, Unit 5.8A (Advanced
manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the gas tungsten arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 225 of 1445
 MEM 5.22A B Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.22A B Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.4A Perform routine oxy acetylene welding 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.22A.1 Select welding equipment and consumables

Criteria 5.22A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct welding equipment and consumables are selected All relevant job instructions, drawings, specifications etc. The appropriate welding equipment and consumables for
from weld procedure specifications. are obtained in accordance with work place procedures. the given task can be identified. The appropriate
settings for the given oxyacetylene welding task can be
identified. The appropriate ventilation/extraction
requirements can be identified. The work holding
requirements can be identified. Where appropriate, pre
and/or post- welding heating requirements can be
identified. The purpose of pre and post-welding heating
of the weld materials can be given. Examples of materials
requiring pre and post-welding heating can be given.

Element 5.22A.2 Assemble welding equipment

Criteria 5.22A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment, including cylinders, regulators, The welding equipment is correctly assembled and set up The appropriate settings for the given task and the
hoses, torches and tips is assembled and set up safely in in accordance with standard operating procedures. Where selected equipment/consumables can be identified.
accordance with standard operating procedures. appropriate, jigs, fixtures, clamps etc. are used correctly
and safely in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 226 of 1445
 MEM 5.22A B Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.22A.3 Weld joints to Australian Standard 1554 SP or equivalent

Criteria 5.22A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials welded to Australian Standard 1554 SP or Fillet and butt welds are deposited correctly and to 1554 The weld requirements of 1554 SP (or equivalent) can be
equivalent in all positions. SP or equivalent in accordance with standard operating identified.
procedures in each of the following positions: - horizontal
- vertical - overhead. Where appropriate, distortion
prevention techniques are used in accordance with work
site procedures. The welded joint is cleaned using
appropriate tools and techniques in accordance with work
site procedures.

Criteria 5.22A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions, symbols, specifications interpreted correctly The location and size of the weld(s) to be deposited can
including bead size, bead placement, reinforcement etc. be identified. The purpose of reinforcing areas to be
and in accordance with weld procedure sheet, if available, welded can be given. Where appropriate, the
and standard operating procedures. reinforcement to be incorporated into the given weld(s)
can be identified.

Element 5.22A.4 Inspect welds

Criteria 5.22A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected against specifications. Welded joints are visually inspected for defects. Common weld defects detectable visually can be
identified.

Criteria 5.22A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld defects identified. Where applicable, weld defects are identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 227 of 1445
 MEM 5.22A B Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.22A.5 Correct faults

Criteria 5.22A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects removed with minimum loss of sound metal using Where appropriate, weld defects are removed in The methods of weld defect removal and their application
correct and appropriate techniques and tools to accordance with work site procedures. A minimum amount can be given.
Australian Standard 3992 or equivalent. of sound metal is removed with the defect. The weld
conforms to the requirements of AS3992 or equivalent.

Element 5.22A.6 Maintain weld records

Criteria 5.22A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records maintained in accordance with Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with The weld records to be kept can be identified. The
specifications and standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. frequency at which weld details are to be recorded can be
identified. The reasons for keeping weld records can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 228 of 1445
 MEM 5.22A B Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Advanced oxy acetylene welding carried out using a range of materials for general fabrication. The term "oxy-acetylene" is used here to describe a range of fuel gases, including
acetylene, LPG, hydrogen etc The person would work autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and welding procedures. Weld
would be applied to meet Australian Standard 1554 SP, appropriate industrial standards, or equivalent outcomes. Welds would be fillet and butt in all positions. Preparation of
materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps etc. Materials may include low carbon steel, plate, pipe, tube and round bar. Where welds comply with one of
the certificates covered by Australian Standard 1796, then Unit 5.26A (Apply welding principles) should also be selected. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and
shaping is carried out, Unit 5.8A (Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with oxyacetylene welding or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 229 of 1445
 MEM 5.23A B Weld using submerged arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.23A B Weld using submerged arc welding process

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4

Element 5.23A.1 Prepare materials for welding

Criteria 5.23A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements identified from specifications and/or All appropriate specifications and drawings are obtained. The weld requirements can be identified.
drawings.

Criteria 5.23A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is correctly prepared using appropriate tools and Appropriate tools and techniques are used to prepare The material preparation requirements can be identified.
techniques. material for welding in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 5.23A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials assembled/aligned to specifications where The materials to be welded are aligned, located and Examples of material holding devices and their
required. clamped to specification in accordance with work site application can be given. The required relationship
procedures. between the parts to be welded can be identified. The
appropriate work holding method for the application can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 230 of 1445
 MEM 5.23A B Weld using submerged arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.23A.2 Select welding machine settings and consumables

Criteria 5.23A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding machine settings and consumables identified The application of a variety of welding machines can be
against job requirements, welding procedures and given. The application of a variety of consumables can
specifications and/or technical drawings. be given. The appropriate welding machine for the given
task can be identified. The appropriate consumables for
the given task can be identified. The appropriate
ventilation/extraction requirements can be identified.

Element 5.23A.3 Assemble and set up welding equipment

Criteria 5.23A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment assembled and set up safely and Welding equipment is correctly assembled and set up in The relationships between amperage, electrode and
correctly in accordance with standard operating accordance with safety and work site procedures. material thickness can be given. The appropriate settings
procedures. for the given task and the selected equipment and
consumables can be identified.

Criteria 5.23A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test runs undertaken and verified in accordance with Test welds are performed in accordance with work site The weld specifications to be achieved can be identified.
specifications. procedures. Test welds are checked for conformance to The actions to be undertaken when test runs do not
specifications in accordance with work site procedure. conform to specifications can be described.
Where appropriate, adjustments are made to settings to
ensure conformance to specifications.

Element 5.23A.4 Identify distortion prevention methods

Criteria 5.23A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Distortion prevention measures identified. Methods of preventing distortion of welded materials
can be given. The appropriate distortion prevention
method for the given application can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 231 of 1445
 MEM 5.23A B Weld using submerged arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.23A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate action taken to minimise and rectify Appropriate distortion prevention measures are Methods of rectifying distortion of welded materials and
distortion. undertaken during the welding process. Where their application can be given.
appropriate, distortion of welded materials is rectified in
accordance with work site procedures.

Element 5.23A.5 Weld joints using submerged arc by correct process

Criteria 5.23A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pad, butt and fillet welds deposited correctly in flat, and Welds are deposited correctly and to AS1554 GP or The weld requirements of AS1554 GP (or equivalent) can
fillet welds in horizontal position, to specification. equivalent in accordance with work site procedures in be identified.
each of the following positions: - flat - horizontal. Where
appropriate, distortion prevention techniques are used in
accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 5.23A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Joints cleaned to specifications using correct and The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate tools and Methods of cleaning welded joints can be given.
appropriate techniques and tools. techniques in accordance with work site procedures.

Element 5.23A.6 Inspect welds

Criteria 5.23A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected against specifications. Welded joints are visually inspected for defects. Common weld defects detectable visually can be
identified.

Criteria 5.23A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld defects identified. Where applicable, weld defects are identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 232 of 1445
 MEM 5.23A B Weld using submerged arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.23A.7 Correct faults

Criteria 5.23A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Take remedial action where required. Where appropriate, weld defects are removed in Methods of weld defect removal and their application
accordance with work site procedures. can be given.

Criteria 5.23A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects removed with minimum loss of sound metal using A minimum amount of sound metal is removed with the The tools, techniques and equipment to be used in
correct and appropriate techniques and tools. defect. removing weld defects can be identified.

Element 5.23A.8 Maintain weld records

Criteria 5.23A.8.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records maintained in accordance with Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with The weld records to be kept can be identified. The
specifications and standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. frequency at which weld details are to be recorded can be
identified. The reasons for keeping weld records can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 233 of 1445
 MEM 5.23A B Weld using submerged arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This work would be carried out using a range of material for heavy or light fabrication. The person would work autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined
standards of quality, safety, work and welding procedures and the skills applied to a range of fabrication activities. Weld quality meets a standard up to Australian Standard 1554
General Purpose or equivalent. Materials used may include carbon steel or stainless steel. Preparation of materials would include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps etc.
Remedial action using thermal processes may include oxyacetylene and air arc equipment. Grinding devices may also be used. Where thermal processes and/or hand and power
tools are required, appropriate units should be selected. Where welds comply with one of the certificates covered by Australian Standard 1796, then Unit 5.26A (Apply welding
principles) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the submerged arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 234 of 1445
 MEM 5.24B A Perform welding supervision Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.24B A Perform welding supervision

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 12
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.26A Apply welding principles

Element 5.24B.1 Prepare and determine welding procedure

Criteria 5.24B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instruction of welders carried out to procedure. Welders are instructed in the welding procedure(s) to be The welding procedures to be followed in carrying out
followed. All relevant job instructions, drawings, specified welds can be identified. The welders to be
specifications, codes, standards and information are involved in the particular welding process can be
obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. identified. The reporting and recording requirements with
reference to the particular welding process can be
identified.

Criteria 5.24B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding parameters are determined in accordance with The procedures for determining the welding parameters
procedures. can be given. The welding parameters applicable to the
particular welding process can be identified. The effects
of varying welding parameters on the quality of the
welds produced can be explained. The reasons for
selecting the chosen welding parameters can be given.

Criteria 5.24B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Variables and sequence checks are planned against The welding procedures are planned and documented in The procedures for planning welding procedures can be
documentation. accordance with the relevant codes and/or standards. given. The relevant codes and/or standards can be
identified. The variables to be checked during the
welding process can be identified. The sequence of
checks to be undertaken can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen sequence of checks on the
welding process and variables can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 235 of 1445
 MEM 5.24B A Perform welding supervision Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.24B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate documentation prepared for record keeping. The welding procedures are documented in accordance The welding records to be kept can be identified. The
with the relevant codes and/or standards. The welding procedures for preparing and authorising welding
records to be completed are prepared and authorised in records can be given. The procedures for documenting
accordance with standard operating procedures. welding procedures can be given.

Element 5.24B.2 Qualify welders to required procedures

Criteria 5.24B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welders trained regarding procedures. Welders are trained in the welding procedures in The objectives of the training can be given. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for training welders can be given. All
necessary materials and equipment for the welding
procedures to be undertaken can be identified. The
competencies to be achieved by the welders can be
identified.

Criteria 5.24B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welders tested regarding procedures. Welders are tested in the welding procedures for which The testing procedures can be identified.
they are being trained.

Criteria 5.24B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reports on the welder's performance regarding The performance of welders being trained in the welding The procedures for reporting welder performance during
procedures are maintained. procedures is reported in accordance with standard training can be given. The competencies to be reported
operating procedures. on can be identified.

Element 5.24B.3 Monitor/maintain quality assurance and safety procedures

Criteria 5.24B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Internal QA plan monitored. The welding processes are monitored in accordance with The internal quality assurance plan can be described.
standard operating procedures. The weld monitoring requirements of the quality
assurance plan can be identified. The procedures for
monitoring the welding process can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 236 of 1445
 MEM 5.24B A Perform welding supervision Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.24B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Traceability of materials ensured. The materials used in a nominated weld can be traced to The procedures for tracing weld materials throughout the
their source in accordance with standard operating welding process can be given. The records to be kept to
procedures. ensure that all materials can be traced through the
welding process to their source can be identified. The
reasons for ensuring weld materials can be traced can be
explained.

Criteria 5.24B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding supervised to ensure compliance with The welding process is supervised to ensure that the The safety procedures to be followed when carrying out
prescribed specifications and/or documented procedures welds are produced in compliance with specifications in the welding process can be given. The specifications of
and/or safety procedures. accordance with the documented welding and safety the weld to be produced can be identified. The reasons
procedures. for supervising the welding process can be explained.

Element 5.24B.4 Prepare documents

Criteria 5.24B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Recording of the procedure against pre-qualifying The welding procedures are recorded in accordance with The pre-qualifying procedures can be given. The
procedures carried out. the relevant codes, standards and procedures. recording requirements for welding procedures can be
identified.

Criteria 5.24B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Findings on internal QA plan recorded. The results obtained with respect to welds undertaken are The weld recording requirements of the internal quality
recorded in accordance with the internal quality assurance assurance plan can be identified. The results of the weld
plan. checks and tests carried out as part of the internal quality
assurance plan can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 237 of 1445
 MEM 5.24B A Perform welding supervision Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.24B.5 Arrange for non-destructive testing and destructive testing

Criteria 5.24B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conducting of appropriate testing is ensured. Appropriate weld tests are initiated in accordance with the The weld tests to be carried out can be identified. A
welding procedures. variety of weld testing procedures can be identified. The
purpose of each weld test can be given. The procedures
for initiating the testing of welds by internal/external
personnel can be identified. The tests to be conducted
for compliance with the welding procedures can be
identified.

Criteria 5.24B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Verify that non-destructive testing/destructive testing The reports of the weld testing carried out in accordance The authority responsible for testing the welds can be
reports conform to requirements. with the weld procedures are obtained from the identified. The information to be recorded for each weld
appropriate testing authority. test can be identified. Any discrepancies between the
weld test report and the reporting/ recording
requirements can be identified. The consequence of
incomplete or inappropriate reporting of weld tests can
be explained. The procedures for dealing with
incomplete/inappropriate weld test records can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 238 of 1445
 MEM 5.24B A Perform welding supervision Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Competencies in this unit are based on wide knowledge of welding science, processes, procedures and technical requirements. Individuals working in this field would hold at least
one certificate satisfying the requirements of Australian Standard 1796 Certificate 1 - 9. Competencies and procedures are determined by recognised codes and standards such as
Australian Standard 2214 and Australian Standard 1796 Certificate 10. All work would be conducted in accordance with job requirements, technical specifications and legislative and
regulatory requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the supervision of welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
processes or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 239 of 1445
 MEM 5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 12
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.26A Apply welding principles

Element 5.25B.1 Select and organise/conduct appropriate non-destructive test procedures or verify previous test
procedures
Criteria 5.25B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate non-destructive test or tests selected and All relevant job instructions, specifications, codes, A variety of non-destructive tests and their application
organised/conducted in accordance with standard standards and procedures are obtained in accordance with can be identified. The weld specifications can be
operating procedures or job specifications. workplace procedures. Where appropriate, the testing of identified. The welding procedures for the given weld
welds is initiated in accordance with standard operating can be identified. The tests to be conducted can be
procedures. Where appropriate, the welds are tested in identified. The procedures for initiating the weld tests
accordance with welding and standard operating can be given. The procedures for conducting a variety of
procedures. non-destructive tests can be given. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tests can be given.

Criteria 5.25B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results of previous testing procedures verified. The results of previous weld tests are obtained in The procedures for obtaining previous weld tests can be
accordance with standard operating procedures. given. Any discrepancies between previous and current
weld tests can be identified. The reasons for any
discrepancies identified can be given. The effects of
testing procedures on test results can be explained. The
procedures for verifying/ amending previously
established weld test procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 240 of 1445
 MEM 5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.25B.2 Establish welding procedure

Criteria 5.25B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Joint design specification is interpreted. All relevant weld design data is obtained in accordance The specifications of the welded joint can be identified.
with standard workplace procedures.

Criteria 5.25B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parameters are described. The parameters affecting the performance of the weld
with respect to specifications can be identified and
described.

Criteria 5.25B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Variables are checked. The variable weld parameters are checked for conformance The variables affecting the performance of the weld can
to specification in accordance with welding and standard be identified. The tools, equipment and techniques
operating procedures. necessary to check each variable can be identified.

Criteria 5.25B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Procedures are documented. The welding procedures are documented in accordance The procedures for documenting welding procedures can
with standard operating procedures. be given.

Element 5.25B.3 Validate welding procedures

Criteria 5.25B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Organise preparation of a test piece. A test piece is produced in accordance with standard The procedures for preparing a weld test piece can be
operating procedures. given.

Criteria 5.25B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Prescribed tests are arranged or conducted. Where appropriate, the prescribed tests are conducted in The prescribed tests can be identified. The procedures
accordance with standard operating procedures. Where for conducting the prescribed tests can be given. The
appropriate, the prescribed tests are initiated in tools, equipment and techniques necessary to carry out
accordance with standard operating procedures. the prescribed tests can be identified. The procedures for
initiating prescribed tests can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 241 of 1445
 MEM 5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.25B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test results are interpreted and report prepared Test results are obtained in accordance with standard The procedures for obtaining test results can be given.
identifying required action. operating procedures. The test report is prepared in The procedures for reporting test results can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures. The test results are checked against weld specifications.
Any discrepancies between the test results and weld
specifications are identified. The reasons for any
discrepancies detected can be given. The action to be
taken to return the welds produced to specification can
be identified. The reasons for proposing such action can
be explained.

Element 5.25B.4 Ensure quality assurance procedures are carried out

Criteria 5.25B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material identification checked. The material to be welded is checked for conformance to The specifications of the material to be welded can be
specifications. identified. The methods of identifying weld materials can
be given. The reasons for correctly marking/ identifying
weld materials can be explained.

Criteria 5.25B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Movement of material through workshop in-site is The movement of material through the workshop is The procedures for documenting/ recording the
documented. recorded in accordance with standard operating movement of material through the workshop can be
procedures. given. The reasons for documenting/ recording the
movement of material through the workshop can be
explained.

Criteria 5.25B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Transferring material test certification numbers is The transfer of material test certification numbers from the The procedures for transferring material test certification
witnessed. parent material to a part cut from the parent material is numbers can be given. The person(s) who can witness
witnessed in accordance with standard operating the transfer of material test certification numbers can be
procedures. identified. The reasons for witnessing the transfer of
material test certification numbers can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 242 of 1445
 MEM 5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.25B.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identification of consumables in accordance with welding Consumables are marked for identification in accordance The procedures for identifying consumables can be
procedures is performed. with welding procedures. given. The reasons for marking consumables for
identification purposes can be explained.

Criteria 5.25B.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Storage and use of consumables are monitored. Welding consumables are used and stored in accordance The procedures for using and storing consumables can
with manufacturers' recommendations or standard be given. The consequences of inappropriate use and/or
operating procedures. storage of consumables can be given. The storage life of
consumables can be identified.

Criteria 5.25B.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintain and review quality records to ensure Welding quality records are maintained in accordance with The procedures for maintaining welding quality records
compliance with requirements. standard operating procedures. The welding records are can be given. The welding quality requirements of the
checked for conformance with welding quality relevant code, standard and/or welding procedure can be
requirements in accordance with standard operating identified.
procedures.

Element 5.25B.5 Monitor procedures in process

Criteria 5.25B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material forming is checked. Where appropriate, the form of the material to be welded is The procedures for checking the form of materials to be
checked for conformance with specifications in welded can be given. The tools, techniques and
accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment necessary to check the form of the materials
to be welded can be identified.

Criteria 5.25B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dimensional checks carried out. The dimensions of the welded components are checked for The specifications of the welded object can be identified.
conformance to specifications. The tools, techniques and equipment necessary to
check the dimensions of the welded components can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 243 of 1445
 MEM 5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.25B.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final inspection against specifications. The welds are checked for conformance to specifications The specifications of the weld can be identified. The
in accordance with the welding procedures. tests/checks to be undertaken on the weld in accordance
with the welding procedures can be identified. The tools,
equipment and techniques required to test/check the
welds for conformance to specifications can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 244 of 1445
 MEM 5.25B B Perform welding/fabrication inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
All work is undertaken in accordance with legislative and regulatory requirements. Test procedures and the range of this standard are determined by the code requirements relating
to welding inspection procedures eg: Australian Standard 1210, Australian Standard 1554, Welding Technology Institute of Australia specifications or equivalent. Competencies
used in this unit are based on knowledge of welding science and metallurgy, mechanical properties of welded joints, heat treatment procedures and national and technical
standards. Examples of test procedures include dye penetrant magnetic particle, radiographic or ultrasound tests.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with welding inspection or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 245 of 1445
 MEM 5.26A A Apply welding principles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.26A A Apply welding principles

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Notes - This unit is to be assessed in conjunction with one of the competency units which recognises certificates covered by Australian Standard 1796 - see range
statement.

Element 5.26A.1 Apply all statutory and regulatory requirements to welding procedures
Criteria 5.26A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Statutory and safety requirements applied to welding. All welding is carried out in accordance with the relevant The relevant statutory and safety requirements can be
statutory and safety requirements. identified with respect to welding processes. The hazards
associated with welding can be identified. The personal
protective clothing and equipment to be used in
conjunction with welding processes can be identified.

Element 5.26A.2 Interpret all welding terms, codes and symbols

Criteria 5.26A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding terms and symbols correctly interpreted. The meanings of a wide variety of given welding terms
and symbols can be correctly given. The reasons for
using welding symbols can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 246 of 1445
 MEM 5.26A A Apply welding principles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.26A.3 Determine the effects of heat treatment on metal in relation to welding
Criteria 5.26A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reasons for performing heat treatment are identified. The reasons for heat treating metal in relation to welding
can be explained. Applications of each of the following
heat treatment processes can be given: - pre-welding
heat treatment - post-welding heat treatment - stress
relieving - normalising - annealing. For given welding
situations the appropriate heat treatment process to be
applied can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen heat treatment process can be given.

Criteria 5.26A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Processes used such as pre/post heat treatment, stress Where appropriate, the heat treatment process applicable The procedure for carrying out each of the above heat
relieving, normalising, annealing appropriately applied. to the welding undertaken is correctly applied in treatment processes can be given. The tools, equipment
accordance with standard operating procedures. and techniques necessary to carry out the heat treatment
processes can be identified.

Element 5.26A.4 Identify the logical sequence of events involved in planning a welding operation
Criteria 5.26A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles of planning and setting up welding The sequence of operations in performing a weld in
appropriately applied. accordance with AS1796 can be identified. The reasons
for planning a welding operation can be given. The
procedures for setting up welding and safety equipment
can be given.

Criteria 5.26A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where specified, appropriate preparation undertaken for Where appropriate, welds are prepared for testing in The procedures for preparing welds for testing can be
testing of welds. accordance with welding procedures. given. The tools, equipment and techniques to be used
in preparing welds for testing can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 247 of 1445
 MEM 5.26A A Apply welding principles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit describes the underpinning knowledge required to satisfy Australian Standard 1796. It should be assessed in combination with one of the units satisfying the Australian
Standard 1796 Certificate 1 - 9 or other welding codes: Unit 5.16A (Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc welding process), Unit 5.18A (Perform advanced welding
using
gas metal arc welding process), Unit 5.20A (Perform advanced welding using gas tungsten arc welding process, Unit 5.22A (Perform advanced welding using oxyacetylene welding
process) and Unit 5.23A (Weld using submerged arc welding process). Welding, planning and set up principles for a range of materials and processes are applied to satisfy
Australian Standard 1796.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with welding in accordance with and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
AS1796 Certificates 1-9 inclusive, or other units requiring the exercise plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 248 of 1445
 MEM 5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.11A Assemble fabricated components
5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.11A Assemble fabricated components
5.17A Weld using gas metal arc welding process 5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
5.4A Perform routine oxy acetylene welding 5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting
5.11A Assemble fabricated components 5.22A Perform advanced welding using oxy acetylene 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
welding process
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
5.5A Carry out mechanical cutting 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.11A Assemble fabricated components
5.19A Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process 5.49A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.36A.1 Assess and process repair/replacement/modification requirement

Criteria 5.36A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work requirement determined from job sheet, instruction Where appropriate, a visual inspection of the work to be The work to be done can be identified.
or visual inspection. done is carried out in accordance with work site
procedures. All relevant job sheets and instructions are
obtained in accordance with work place procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 249 of 1445
 MEM 5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.36A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications and drawings obtained, interpreted and All codes, standards, specifications and drawings relevant The specifications applying to the work to be done can
understood where required. to the work to be done are obtained in accordance with be identified. Any codes or standards applying to the
work site procedures. work to be done can be identified.

Criteria 5.36A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fabrication inspected and suitability for The fabrication is inspected for defects, faults and Any faults, defects and/or non-compliance with
repair/replacement/modification determined. compliance with specifications in accordance with specifications that can be rectified by rework or
standard operating procedures. additional work can be identified. Any faults, defects
and/or non-compliance with specifications that can be
rectified by replacement of components/materials can be
identified. The effects of any proposed modifications on
the fabrication can be given. The effects of any proposed
modifications on the fabrication's specifications,
operation or function can be given. The most appropriate
action to be taken with respect to the fabrication
(repair/replace/modify) can be identified. Appropriate
reasons for the proposed action can be given.

Element 5.36A.2 Assess and process material requirements

Criteria 5.36A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material requirements are assessed in accordance with The type, quantity and size(s) of materials required to
relevant codes, manufacturer's specifications and undertake the work can be identified. The reasons for
standard operating procedures. selecting the chosen materials can be explained.

Criteria 5.36A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are obtained/requisitioned in accordance with The necessary materials are obtained/requisitioned in The appropriate procedures for procuring materials can
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 250 of 1445
 MEM 5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.36A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tool and equipment requirements are assessed and Where appropriate, the tools, equipment and consumables The tools, equipment and consumables required to carry
obtained, where required, in accordance with standard required are obtained/requisitioned in accordance with out the work can be identified.
operating procedures. standard operating procedures.

Element 5.36A.3 Prepare materials

Criteria 5.36A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fabrication for repair/replacement and/or modification The fabrication is appropriately prepared for the work to The work to be done in preparation for the
prepared in accordance with specifications using be undertaken in accordance with standard operating repair/replacement/ modification of the fabrication can be
acceptable workplace practices, tools and equipment. procedures. All precautions are taken to ensure the safety identified. The safety procedures to be followed before,
of those undertaking, or in the vicinity of the repair/ during and after the repair/replacement/modification can
replacement/modification being carried out. be identified.

Criteria 5.36A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials marked out and prepared to specifications with Materials are checked for conformance to specifications. The appropriate marking out principles can be identified.
minimum wastage using correct principles, tools, Materials are marked out using appropriate tools,
equipment and procedures. equipment and principles in accordance with standard
operating procedures. Material wastage is minimised.

Criteria 5.36A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material or item for repair, replacement and/or The material is cut, bent, rolled, shaped or formed to The necessary material preparation processes can be
modification is cut, bent, rolled, shaped or formed to specification in accordance with standard operating identified. The procedures for accessing the necessary
specifications using appropriate fabrication procedures. Appropriate techniques, procedures, tools equipment can be identified.
techniques/procedures, tools and equipment. and equipment are used to carry out the material
preparation processes.

Criteria 5.36A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required, items are marked for identification. Where appropriate, prepared materials are marked for The reasons for marking prepared materials for
identification in accordance with standard operating identification can be given. Where appropriate, the
procedures. procedures for identifying prepared materials can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 251 of 1445
 MEM 5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.36A.4 Repair/replacement or modification carried out

Criteria 5.36A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate clamping methods, equipment, jigs and Materials are correctly positioned and clamped for A range of clamping methods and their application can
fixtures, materials are positioned and clamped for welding. Appropriate clamping methods, equipment, jigs be given. The most appropriate clamping method(s) can
welding. and fixtures are used to hold the materials to be welded. be identified for the welds to be undertaken. The relative
position/location of all materials to be welded can be
identified.

Criteria 5.36A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-tack checks undertaken and compliance with All pre-welding/tacking checks are undertaken in
specifications determined prior to tack welding in accordance with standard operating procedures.
position.

Criteria 5.36A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is prepared and settings adjusted Welding equipment is set up and adjusted in accordance The weld specifications can be identified. The
according to requirements. with specifications and standard operating procedures. equipment, consumables and settings required to
achieve the weld specification can be identified.

Criteria 5.36A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Immediate work site environment is checked to ensure The work site is checked for conformance with safety The safety requirements applicable to the work to be
compliance with safety requirements and procedures. requirements and standard operating procedures. undertaken can be identified. The safety procedures to
be followed can be identified.

Criteria 5.36A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material or item tack welded using appropriate distortion The materials are tack welded in accordance with standard The appropriate distortion minimisation procedures can
minimisation techniques and procedures. operating procedures. Distortion of materials is minimised. be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 252 of 1445
 MEM 5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.36A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material or item is checked against specifications prior to The materials/fabrications tack welded, are checked
welding. visually and dimensionally for conformance to
specifications.

Criteria 5.36A.4.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material or item is welded to specifications using The material/fabrication is welded in accordance with The weld specifications can be identified. Appropriate
appropriate techniques and procedures. standard operating procedures. The welds comply with all methods for rectifying any distortion of materials that
relevant specifications. Material distortion is minimised has occurred during the welding process can be given.
and where appropriate rectified.

Element 5.36A.5 Repair, replacements and/or modification finished and inspected

Criteria 5.36A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair, replacement and/or modification cleaned and Materials/fabrication cleaned and finished to specification Material cleaning and finishing processes and their
finished to specifications using appropriate workplace in accordance with standard operating procedures. application can be given. The most appropriate cleaning
practices. and finishing process for the given
repair/replacement/modification can be identified.

Criteria 5.36A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds visually inspected to assess weld quality against Welds are visually inspected for conformance to
predetermined specifications. specification. Where appropriate, non-conforming welds
are returned to specification in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

Criteria 5.36A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Completed repair, replacement and/or modification The repair/replacement/modification is checked for
assessed against specifications. conformance to specifications. Where appropriate the
repair/replacement/modification is returned to specification
in accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.36A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance report prepared and lodged in accordance Maintenance reports are prepared and lodged in The maintenance reporting requirements can be
with standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The reasons for completing reports on
repairs/replacements/modifications can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 253 of 1445
 MEM 5.36A B Repair/replace/modify fabrications Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit should be selected where an integrated level of skills in fabrication maintenance and repair is required. This unit is intended to build on skills covered by the specialist
prerequisites. If individual skills are required specialist units only should be selected. Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of
quality, safety and workplace procedures in the repair, replacement and/or modification of fabrications. Work may be carried out in workshop or on-site environments utilising
welding and fabrication techniques, processes, tools, equipment and procedures on a range of materials. Processes may involve the simple mark out of materials, setting up and
operation of a variety of welding and cutting plant/equipment. Where additional or more complex marking out skills are required, refer to Unit 12.7A (Mark off/out structural
fabrications and shapes). If machines and equipment for forming, bending or shaping are required, Unit 5.10A (Undertake fabrication, forming, bending and shaping) should also be
selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the repair, replacement and/or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
modification of fabrications or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 254 of 1445
 MEM 5.37A A Geometric development Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.37A A Geometric development

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 5.37A.1 Transfer dimensions from a detail drawing to work

Criteria 5.37A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications and work requirements determined and Job instructions and specifications are obtained in The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
understood using correct and appropriate calculations. accordance with work site procedures. All necessary specifications applicable to the work to be done can be
calculations are performed correctly and accurately. identified.

Criteria 5.37A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Development carried out to specifications or standard The development is carried out accurately using The tools and equipment to be used in the preparation of
operating procedures using appropriate tools and appropriate techniques, procedures and equipment. the development can be identified.
equipment.

Criteria 5.37A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Datum points correctly established. All datum points are correctly established and The datum points can be identified.
appropriately marked.

Element 5.37A.2 Make templates as required

Criteria 5.37A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate template material chosen. Materials that can be used for the preparation of
templates and their application can be given. The
appropriate template material for the given
development/application can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 255 of 1445
 MEM 5.37A A Geometric development Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.37A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates produced to specification. The template is produced to specification in accordance The manufacturing allowances that have to be
with standard operating procedures. All manufacturing considered when developing patterns can be identified.
allowances are correctly and accurately calculated.

Criteria 5.37A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct storage procedures followed including labelling Templates are labelled and stored in accordance with Template labelling and identification procedures can be
and identification to standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. identified. The appropriate storage requirements of
templates can be identified.

Element 5.37A.3 Develop patterns as required

Criteria 5.37A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parallel line, radial line and triangulation development Patterns are developed using the appropriate method(s) in The three development methods and their application
methods chosen and applied. accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. The appropriate method(s) of
development of a range of given objects can be
identified.

Criteria 5.37A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances for fabrication and assembly correctly Fabrication and assembly allowances are correctly The appropriate fabrication and assembly allowances can
determined and transferred. determined and transferred to the pattern. be identified. The effects of material type and thickness
on fabrication and assembly allowances can be
identified. The sources of data on fabrication and
assembly allowances can be identified.

Element 5.37A.4 Interpret relevant codes, standards and symbols

Criteria 5.37A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant standards/codes and symbols interpreted. All relevant standards and codes can be identified. The
meaning of symbols used in the standards/codes can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 256 of 1445
 MEM 5.37A A Geometric development Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.37A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements of standards/codes interpreted and applied Where applicable, the requirements of the The requirements of the codes/ standards applicable to
to materials and processes. codes/standards are correctly applied during the geometric the work to be done can be identified.
development process.

Element 5.37A.5 Estimate quantities of materials from detail drawings

Criteria 5.37A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly identified. The material(s) from which the component/assembly is to
be manufactured can be identified.

Criteria 5.37A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities estimated from drawings. Material and component quantities are correctly
determined from drawings and job specifications.

Criteria 5.37A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material wastage minimised. Material wastage is minimised during the development of The benefits of minimising material wastage can be
patterns/ templates. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 257 of 1445
 MEM 5.37A A Geometric development Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to marking out of general fabrications using geometric development. Work is undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and
workshop procedures. The task may be performed in the workshop or in situ. Marking out is undertaken using appropriate tools and equipment, and templates and patterns are
produced as required. This unit is not intended to cover the skills required for marking out activities associated with general engineering and maintenance functions. For these
skills, see Units12.6A (Mark off/out (general engineering)), 7.5A (Perform general machining), 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) and 18.14A
(Tool, gauge and die manufacture).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the preparation of geometric and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
developments or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 258 of 1445
MEM 5.38A A Advanced geometric development - cylindrical/rectangular Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.38A A Advanced geometric development - cylindrical/rectangular

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2
This unit applies to marking out of complex cylindrical/rectangular fabrications. Fabrications may include hoppers, chutes and involve compound bends and double
offsets. This unit requires advanced skills in parallel line developments.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations 2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations
5.37A Geometric development 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 5.38A.1 Mark off/out

Criteria 5.38A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications and work requirements determined and Job instructions and specifications are obtained in The work to be undertaken can be identified The
understood using correct and appropriate calculations accordance with work site procedures All necessary specifications applicable to the work to be done can be
calculations are performed correctly and accurately identified
Criteria 5.38A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Development carried out to specifications or standard The development is carried out accurately using The tools and equipment to be used in the preparation
operating procedures using appropriate tools and appropriate techniques, procedures and equipment of the development can be identified
equipment
Criteria 5.38A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Datum points correctly established and indicated All datum points are correctly established and The datum points can be identified
appropriately marked
Criteria 5.38A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances are correctly determined and marked All allowances are calculated correctly and transferred to The reasons for making the following allowances when
(thickness, bend, pitch, angle, circumference, perimeter) the material being marked out marking out can be given: - thickness - bend - pitch -
angle - circumference - perimeter The method of
calculating each allowance can be demonstrated

Element 5.38A.2 Make templates as required

Criteria 5.38A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate template material chosen Materials that can be used for the preparation of
templates and their application can be given The
appropriate template material for the given
development/application can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 259 of 1445
MEM 5.38A A Advanced geometric development - cylindrical/rectangular Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.38A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates produced The template is produced to specification in accordance The manufacturing allowances that have to be
with standard operating procedures considered when developing patterns can be identified
Criteria 5.38A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances determined and transferred All manufacturing allowances are correctly and
accurately calculated
Criteria 5.38A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates for rolling, bending, pressing, drilling and Where appropriate, templates for rolling, bending, The procedures for making templates can be given The
profiling accurately produced pressing, drilling and profiling are accurately produced in reasons for making templates for specific
accordance with standard operating procedures manufacturing operations can be explained The tools,
equipment and techniques to be used to produce
templates can be identified
Criteria 5.38A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct storage procedures followed including labelling Templates are labelled and stored in accordance with Template labelling and identification procedures can be
and identification to standard operating procedures standard operating procedures identified The appropriate storage requirements of
templates can be identified

Element 5.38A.3 Develop patterns as required

Criteria 5.38A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate development method chosen and Patterns are developed using the appropriate method(s) The three development methods and their application
applied in accordance with standard operating procedures can be identified The appropriate method(s) of
development of a range of given objects can be
identified
Criteria 5.38A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances correctly determined and transferred Fabrication and assembly allowances are correctly The appropriate fabrication and assembly allowances
determined and transferred to the pattern can be identified The effects of material type and
thickness on fabrication and assembly allowances can be
identified The source of data on fabrication and
assembly allowances can be identified

Element 5.38A.4 Interpret relevant codes, standards and symbols

Criteria 5.38A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant standards/codes and symbols interpreted All relevant standards and codes can be identified The
meaning of symbols used in the standards/codes can be
given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 260 of 1445
MEM 5.38A A Advanced geometric development - cylindrical/rectangular Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.38A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements of standards/codes interpreted and applied Where applicable, the requirements of the The requirements of the codes/ standards applicable to
to materials and processes codes/standards are correctly applied during the the work to be done can be identified
geometric development process

Element 5.38A.5 Estimate quantities of materials from engineering drawings

Criteria 5.38A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly identified The material(s) from which the components/assembly
is to be manufactured can be identified
Criteria 5.38A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities estimated from drawings Material and component quantities are correctly
determined from drawings and job specifications
Criteria 5.38A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material wastage minimised Material wastage is minimised during the development of The benefits of minimising material wastage can be
patterns/ templates given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 261 of 1445
MEM 5.38A A Advanced geometric development - cylindrical/rectangular Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to marking out of complex cylindrical/rectangular fabrications. Fabrications may include hoppers, chutes and involve compound bends and double offsets. This
unit requires advanced skills in parallel line developments. All work undertaken in compliance with legislative and regulatory requirements to previously determined standards
of safety, quality and standard operating procedures. Individuals may work autonomously or in a team environment. This unit is not intended to cover the skills required for
marking out activities associated with general engineering and maintenance functions. For these skills, see Units 12.6A (Mark off/out (general engineering)), 7.5A (Perform
general machining), 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) and 18.14A (Tool, gauge and die manufacture).

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the geometric development and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
of cylinders and rectangles or other units requiring the exercise of - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 262 of 1445
MEM 5.39A A Advanced geometric development - conical Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.39A A Advanced geometric development - conical

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2
This unit applies to the marking out of complex conical fabrications using advanced geometric development. Fabrications may include hoppers with round/rectangular
branch intersections. This unit requires advanced skills for the calculation of cutting, bending lines and developments.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations 2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations
5.37A Geometric development 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 5.39A.1 Mark off/out

Criteria 5.39A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications and work requirements determined and Job instructions and specifications are obtained in The work to be undertaken can be identified The
understood using correct and appropriate calculations accordance with work site procedures All necessary specifications applicable to the work to be done can be
calculations are performed correctly and accurately identified
Criteria 5.39A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Development carried out to specifications or standard The development is carried out accurately using The tools and equipment to be used in the preparation
operating procedures using appropriate tools and appropriate techniques, procedures and equipment of the development can be identified
equipment
Criteria 5.39A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Datum points correctly established and indicated All datum points are correctly established and The datum points can be identified
appropriately marked
Criteria 5.39A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances are correctly determined and marked All allowances are calculated correctly and transferred to The reasons for making the following allowances when
(thickness, bend, pitch, angle, circumference, the material being marked out marking out can be given: - thickness - bend - pitch -
angle - circumference - perimeter The method of
calculating each allowance can be demonstrated

Element 5.39A.2 Make templates as required

Criteria 5.39A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate template material chosen Materials that can be used for the preparation of
templates and their application can be given The
appropriate template material for the given
development/application can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 263 of 1445
MEM 5.39A A Advanced geometric development - conical Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.39A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates produced The template is produced to specification in accordance The manufacturing allowances that have to be
with standard operating procedures considered when developing patterns can be identified
Criteria 5.39A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances determined and transferred All manufacturing allowances are correctly and
accurately calculated
Criteria 5.39A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates for rolling, bending, pressing, drilling and Where appropriate, templates for rolling, bending, The procedures for making templates can be given The
profiling accurately produced pressing, drilling and profiling are accurately produced in reasons for making templates for specific
accordance with standard operating procedures manufacturing operations can be explained The tools,
equipment and techniques to be used to produce
templates can be identified
Criteria 5.39A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct storage procedures followed including labelling Templates are labelled and stored in accordance with Template labelling and identification procedures can be
and identification to standard operating procedures standard operating procedures identified The appropriate storage requirements of
templates can be identified

Element 5.39A.3 Develop patterns as required

Criteria 5.39A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate development method chosen and Patterns are developed using the appropriate method(s) The three development methods and their application
applied in accordance with standard operating procedures can be identified The appropriate method(s) of
development of a range of given objects can be
identified
Criteria 5.39A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances correctly determined and transferred Fabrication and assembly allowances are correctly The appropriate fabrication and assembly allowances
determined and transferred to the pattern can be identified The effects of material type and
thickness on fabrication and assembly allowances can be
identified The sources of data on fabrication and
assembly allowances can be identified

Element 5.39A.4 Interpret relevant codes, standards and symbols

Criteria 5.39A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant standards/codes and symbols interpreted All relevant standards and codes can be identified The
meaning of symbols used in the standards/codes can be
given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 264 of 1445
MEM 5.39A A Advanced geometric development - conical Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.39A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements of standards/codes interpreted and applied Where applicable, the requirements of the The requirements of the codes/ standards applicable to
to materials and processes codes/standards are correctly applied during the the work to be done can be identified
geometric development process

Element 5.39A.5 Estimate quantities of materials from engineering drawings

Criteria 5.39A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly identified The material(s) from which the component/assembly is
to be manufactured can be identified
Criteria 5.39A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities estimated from drawing Material and component quantities are correctly
determined from drawings and job specifications
Criteria 5.39A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material wastage minimised Material wastage is minimised during the development of The benefits of minimising material wastage can be
patterns/ templates given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 265 of 1445
MEM 5.39A A Advanced geometric development - conical Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the marking out of complex conical fabrications using advanced geometric development. Fabrications may include hoppers with round/rectangular branch
intersections. This unit requires advanced skills for the calculation of cutting, bending lines and developments. All work undertaken in compliance with legislative and
regulatory requirements to previously determined standards of safety, quality and standard operating procedures. Individuals may work autonomously or in a team environment.
This unit is not intended to cover the skills required for marking out activities associated with general engineering and maintenance functions. For these skills, see Units 12.6A
(Mark off/out (general engineering)), 7.5A (Perform general machining), 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) and 18.14A (Tool, gauge
and die manufacture).

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the geometric development and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
of cones or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 266 of 1445
MEM 5.40A A Advanced geometric development - transitions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.40A A Advanced geometric development - transitions

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
This unit applies to the marking out of complex fabrications using geometric development. Fabrications may include hoppers, chutes, elliptical shapes, curves, spirals
etc.
Patterns may include complex and irregular shapes. This unit requires advanced skills for the calculation of cutting, bending lines and developments.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations 2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations
5.37A Geometric development 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 5.40A.1 Mark off/out

Criteria 5.40A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications and work requirements determined and Job instructions and specifications are obtained in The work to be undertaken can be identified The
understood using correct and appropriate calculations accordance with work site procedures All necessary specifications applicable to the work to be done can be
calculations are performed correctly and accurately identified
Criteria 5.40A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Development carried out to specifications or standard The development is carried out accurately using The tools and equipment to be used in the preparation
operating procedures using appropriate tools and appropriate techniques, procedures and equipment of the development can be identified
equipment
Criteria 5.40A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Datum points correctly established and indicated All datum points are correctly established and The datum points can be identified
appropriately marked
Criteria 5.40A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances are correctly determined and marked eg: All allowances are calculated correctly and transferred to The reasons for making the following allowances when
(thickness, bend, pitch, angle, circumference, the material being marked out marking out can be given: - thickness - bend - pitch -
contraction, etc.) angle - circumference - perimeter The method of
calculating each allowance can be demonstrated

Element 5.40A.2 Make templates as required

Criteria 5.40A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate template material chosen Materials that can be used for the preparation of
templates and their application can be given The
appropriate template material for the given
development/application can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 267 of 1445
MEM 5.40A A Advanced geometric development - transitions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.40A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates produced The template is produced to specification in accordance The manufacturing allowances that have to be
with standard operating procedures considered when developing patterns can be identified
Criteria 5.40A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances determined and transferred All manufacturing allowances are correctly and
accurately calculated
Criteria 5.40A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates for rolling, bending, pressing, drilling and Where appropriate, templates for rolling, bending, The procedures for making templates can be given The
profiling accurately produced pressing, drilling and profiling are accurately produced in reasons for making templates for specific
accordance with standard operating procedures manufacturing operations can be explained The tools,
equipment and techniques to be used to produce
templates can be identified
Criteria 5.40A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct storage procedures followed including labelling Templates are labelled and stored in accordance with Template labelling and identification procedures can be
and identification to standard operating procedures standard operating procedures identified The appropriate storage requirements of
templates can be identified

Element 5.40A.3 Develop patterns as required

Criteria 5.40A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate development method chosen and Patterns are developed using the appropriate method(s) The three development methods and their application
applied in accordance with standard operating procedures can be identified The appropriate method(s) of
development of a range of given objects can be
identified
Criteria 5.40A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances correctly determined and transferred Fabrication and assembly allowances are correctly The appropriate fabrication and assembly allowances
determined and transferred to the pattern can be identified The effects of material type and
thickness on fabrication and assembly allowances can be
identified The sources of data on fabrication and
assembly allowances can be identified

Element 5.40A.4 Interpret relevant codes, standards and symbols

Criteria 5.40A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant standards/codes and symbols interpreted All relevant standards and codes can be identified The
meaning of symbols used in the standards/codes can be
given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 268 of 1445
MEM 5.40A A Advanced geometric development - transitions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.40A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements of standards/codes interpreted and applied Where applicable, the requirements of the The requirements of the codes/ standards applicable to
to materials and processes codes/standards are correctly applied during the the work to be done can be identified
geometric development process

Element 5.40A.5 Estimate quantities of materials from engineering drawings

Criteria 5.40A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly identified The material(s) from which the component/assembly is
to be manufactured can be identified
Criteria 5.40A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities estimated from drawings Material and component quantities are correctly
determined from drawings and job specifications
Criteria 5.40A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material wastage minimised Material wastage is minimised during the development of The benefits of minimising material wastage can be
patterns/ templates given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 269 of 1445
MEM 5.40A A Advanced geometric development - transitions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the marking out of complex fabrications using geometric development. Fabrications may include hoppers, chutes, elliptical shapes, curves, spirals etc.
Patterns may include complex and irregular shapes. This unit requires advanced skills for the calculation of cutting, bending lines and developments. All work undertaken in
compliance with legislative and regulatory requirements to previously determined standards of safety, quality and standard operating procedures. Individuals may work
autonomously or in a team environment. This unit is not intended to cover the skills required for marking out activities associated with general engineering and maintenance
functions. For these skills, see Units 12.6A (Mark off/out (general engineering)), 7.5A (Perform general machining), 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit
engineering components) and 18.14A (Tool, gauge and die manufacture).

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the geometric development and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
of transitions or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 270 of 1445
 MEM 5.41A A Weld using powder flame spraying Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.41A A Weld using powder flame spraying

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.4A Perform routine oxy acetylene welding 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch

Element 5.41A.1 Prepare work for spray welding

Criteria 5.41A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify spray weld requirements from specifications Spray weld requirements determined from specifications The appropriate spray weld specifications can be
and/or drawings. and drawings. identified.

Criteria 5.41A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Prepare work using appropriate tools and techniques. Work is prepared using tools and techniques in The procedures for preparing various materials can be
accordance with workplace procedures. identified.

Criteria 5.41A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assemble/align work to specifications as required. Work assembled/aligned to specification in accordance The procedures for assembling/aligning various materials
with workplace procedures. can be given.

Element 5.41A.2 Select spray welding equipment and powders

Criteria 5.41A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select appropriate spray welding equipment and Spray welding equipment selected for work requirements The procedures for selecting for spray welding
consumables for work requirements. in accordance with workplace procedures. equipment can be identified.
Spray welding consumables selected for work The procedures for selecting spray welding consumables
requirements in accordance with workplace procedures. can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 271 of 1445
 MEM 5.41A A Weld using powder flame spraying Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.41A.3 Set up spray welding equipment

Criteria 5.41A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjust gas setting on spray welding equipment to task Spray welding equipment gas setting adjusted to task The procedure for adjusting the spray weld gas settings
requirement. requirements in accordance with workplace procedures. to task requirements can be given.

Criteria 5.41A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Make test runs to verified spray weld meets Test run made in accordance with workplace procedures. The procedures for making test runs can be given.
specifications.

Element 5.41A.4 Implement distortion prevention/control measures

Criteria 5.41A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify distortion prevention/control measures. The procedures for determining the appropriate
distortion prevention/control can be identified.

Criteria 5.41A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Apply appropriate to distortion prevention/control Distortion prevention/control measures applied in The procedures for eliminating/reducing distortion can
measures minimise and rectify distortion. accordance with workplace procedures. be given.

Element 5.41A.5 Spray weld material

Criteria 5.41A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Deposit spray weld correctly to specification. Spray weld deposited in accordance with workplace The procedures for depositing spray welds can be
procedures. identified.

Element 5.41A.6 Inspect spray weld

Criteria 5.41A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Visually inspect weld area/joints against specification. Weld areas/joints visually inspected in accordance with The procedures for visually inspecting weld areas/joints
workplace procedures. can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 272 of 1445
 MEM 5.41A A Weld using powder flame spraying Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.41A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Remove defects detected with minimum loss of sound Defects removed with minimum sound material loss in The reasons for removing defective material with minimal
material. accordance with workplace procedures. sound material loss can be given.

Range statement
This unit covers powder spraying using hot and/or cold process, on a range of heavy or light materials. Powders are fed into the oxyacetylene flame and are deposited onto the
surface to be built up or joined. Work is carried out autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, work and welding procedures, and
applies to a range of reclamation activities. Spray weld quality would meet the integrity of the work piece, dependent on the performance requirement of the work piece and the
spray weld. Consumables (powders) cover a wide range of applications to suit steels, carbon steels, cast iron, etc or non-metallic materials (plastic/nylon) etc. Preparation of
materials would include pre-heat, post-heat, set up of jigs, fixtures, clamps etc. Setting includes the correct settings of gas mixtures and flow rates. For remedial action using
machining processes other than grinding with grinding wheels (ceramic or other) the appropriate machining units should also be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with fuel gas welding or cutting, or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 273 of 1445
 MEM 5.42A A Perform welds to code standards using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.42A A Perform welds to code standards using flux core arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.47A Weld using flux core arc welding process 5.48A Perform advanced welding using flux core arc welding
process
5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.42A.1 Maintain welding equipment

Criteria 5.42A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance is performed on welding equipment. Welding equipment including handpiece, cable, lead etc Maintenance requirements for handpiece, cable, leads
checked and serviceability determined. can be given.
Ventilation/extraction equipment checked and determined
to be working satisfactorily. Repairs if undertaken as
required.

Element 5.42A.2 Prepare welding materials and equipment for FCAW welding to code standard
Criteria 5.42A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements for welding to code standards are Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Weld requirements of the nominated code can be given,
determined. from welding procedure specification. including required weld size, bead placement, weld shape
and reinforcement consumables and settings can be
selected to suit code requirements.

Criteria 5.42A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to produce weld to code standard. Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Methods for preparing materials for code standard
from welding procedure specification. Materials are welding can be given. Pre and post welding heating
suitably prepared ready for welding. methods and requirements for welds to code standard
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 274 of 1445
 MEM 5.42A A Perform welds to code standards using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.42A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up. Equipment consumables and settings are selected as per Equipment consumables and settings appropriate to
welding procedure specification. code standard welding in relevant situations can be
given.

Element 5.42A.3 Weld joints using FCAW to procedure specifications

Criteria 5.42A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials welded as per weld procedure specification. Welds are produced to procedure specification. Weld size, Weld size, bead placement, weld shape and
bead placement, weld shape and reinforcement, etc are in reinforcement, etc can be assessed against requirements
accordance with weld procedure specification. Distortion of the nominated code.
prevention techniques are used. The welded joint is
cleaned using appropriate tools and technique.

Element 5.42A.4 Ensure weld quality

Criteria 5.42A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are rectified to ensure conformance to Welded joints are visually inspected for conformity using Techniques for inspecting welds, rectifying defects to
code requirements. appropriate techniques. Where discontinuities are code standard can be given.
identified as a defect, the defect is repaired. The weld
conforms to code requirements.

Criteria 5.42A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records maintained in accordance with standard Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with Requirements for maintaining weld records to code
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. standard can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 275 of 1445
 MEM 5.42A A Perform welds to code standards using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
FCAW to code standard carried out using a range of materials. The person would work autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety
and welding procedures. Butt and fillet welds are produced in all positions. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Materials used
may include carbon/manganese steel, low alloy steel etc. on plate, pipe and rolled steel sections. Welds produced to the standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian
Standard 1210, AS 4140, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) IX or equivalent. This unit, in conjunction with Unit 5.26 A (Apply welding principles), may satisfy
the requirements of AS 1796 Certificate 8F Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is carried out, Unit (5.8A Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and
shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
candidate. - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for an off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with flux core arc welding or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 276 of 1445
 MEM 5.43A A Perform welds to code standards using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.43A A Perform welds to code standards using gas metal arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.17A Weld using gas metal arc welding process 5.18A Perform advanced welding using gas metal arc
welding process
5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.43A.1 Maintain welding equipment

Criteria 5.43A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance is performed on welding equipment. Welding equipment including welding gun, cable, lead etc Maintenance requirements for welding gun, cable, leads
checked and serviceability determined. can be given.
Ventilation/extraction equipment checked and determined
to be working satisfactorily. Repairs if undertaken as
required.

Element 5.43A.2 Prepare welding materials and equipment for GMAW welding to code standard
Criteria 5.43A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements for GMAW welding to code Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Weld requirements of the nominated code can be given,
standards are determined. from welding procedure specification. including requirement weld size, bead placement, weld
shape and reinforcement consumables and settings can
be selected to suit code requirements.

Criteria 5.43A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to produce weld to code standard. Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Methods for preparing materials for code standard
from welding procedure specification. Materials are welding can be given. Pre and post welding heating
suitably prepared ready for welding. methods and requirements for welds to code standard
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 277 of 1445
 MEM 5.43A A Perform welds to code standards using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.43A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up. Equipment consumables and settings are selected as per Equipment consumables and settings appropriate to
welding procedure specification. code standard welding in relevant situations can be
given.

Element 5.43A.3 Weld joints using GMAW to procedure specifications

Criteria 5.43A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials welded as per weld procedure specification. Welds are produced to procedure specification. Weld size, Weld size, bead placement, weld shape and
bead placement, weld shape and reinforcement, etc are in reinforcement, etc can be assessed against requirements
accordance with weld procedure specification. Distortion of the nominated code.
prevention techniques are used. The welded joint is
cleaned using appropriate tools and technique.

Element 5.43A.4 Ensure weld quality

Criteria 5.43A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are rectified to ensure conformance to Welded joints are visually inspected for conformity using Techniques for inspecting welds, rectifying defects to
code requirements. appropriate techniques. Where discontinuities are code standard can be given.
identified as a defect, the defect is repaired. The weld
conforms to code requirements.

Criteria 5.43A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records maintained in accordance with standard Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with Requirements for maintaining weld records to code
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. standard can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 278 of 1445
 MEM 5.43A A Perform welds to code standards using gas metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
GMAW to code standard carried out using a range of materials. The person would work autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety
and welding procedures. Butt and fillet welds are produced in the flat, horizontal, vertical and overhead positions. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of
jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Materials used may include carbon/manganese steel, low alloy steel and aluminium materials, etc. on plate, pipe and rolled steel sections. Welds produced
to the standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1210, AS 4140, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) IX or equivalent. This unit, in
conjunction with Unit 5.26 A Apply welding principles, may satisfy the requirements of AS 1796 Certificate 8G. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is
carried out, Unit 5.8A (Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
candidate. - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for an off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with gas metal arc welding or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 279 of 1445
 MEM 5.44A A Perform welds to code standards using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.44A A Perform welds to code standards using gas tungsten arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.19A Weld using gas tungsten arc welding process 5.20A Perform advanced welding using gas tungsten arc
welding process
5.49A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.44A.1 Maintain welding equipment

Criteria 5.44A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance is performed on welding equipment. Welding equipment including handpiece, cable, lead etc Maintenance requirements for handpiece, cable, leads
checked and serviceability determined. can be given.
Ventilation/extraction equipment checked and determined
to be working satisfactorily.

Element 5.44A.2 Prepare welding materials and equipment for GTAW welding to code standard
Criteria 5.44A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements for GTAW welding to code standards Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Weld requirements of the nominated code can be given,
are determined. from welding procedure specification. including required weld size, bead placement, weld shape
and reinforcement consumables and settings can be
selected to suit code requirements.

Criteria 5.44A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to produce weld to code standard. Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Methods for preparing materials for code standard
from welding procedure specification. Materials are welding can be given. Pre and post welding heating
suitably prepared ready for welding. methods and requirements for welds to code standard
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 280 of 1445
 MEM 5.44A A Perform welds to code standards using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.44A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up. Equipment consumables and settings are selected as per Equipment consumables and settings appropriate to
welding procedure specification. code standard welding in relevant situations can be
given.

Element 5.44A.3 Weld joints using GTAW to procedure specifications

Criteria 5.44A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials welded as per weld procedure specification. Welds are produced to procedure specification. Weld size, Weld size, bead placement, weld shape and
bead placement, weld shape and reinforcement, etc are in reinforcement, etc can be assessed against requirements
accordance with weld procedure specification. Distortion of the nominated code.
prevention techniques are used. The welded joint is
cleaned using appropriate tools and technique.

Element 5.44A.4 Ensure weld quality

Criteria 5.44A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are rectified to ensure conformance to Welded joints are visually inspected for conformity using Techniques for inspecting welds, rectifying defects to
code requirements. appropriate techniques. Where discontinuities are code standard can be given.
identified as a defect, the defect is repaired. The weld
conforms to code requirements.

Criteria 5.44A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records maintained in accordance with standard Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with Requirements for maintaining weld records to code
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. standard can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 281 of 1445
 MEM 5.44A A Perform welds to code standards using gas tungsten arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
GTAW to code standard carried out using a range of materials. The person would work autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety
and welding procedures. Butt and fillet welds are produced in the flat, horizontal, vertical and overhead positions. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of
jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Materials used may include carbon/manganese steel, low alloy steel and aluminium materials, etc. on plate, pipe and rolled steel sections. Welds produced
to the standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1210, AS 4140, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) IX or equivalent. This unit, in
conjunction with Unit 5.26 A Apply welding principles, may satisfy the requirements of AS 1796 Certificate 7. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is
carried out, Unit 5.8A (Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
candidate. - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for an off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with gas tungsten arc welding or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 282 of 1445
 MEM 5.45A A Perform pipe welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.45A A Perform pipe welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process
5.16A Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
welding process
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.45A.1 Maintain welding equipment

Criteria 5.45A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance is performed on welding equipment. Welding equipment including handpiece, cable, lead etc Maintenance requirements for handpiece, cable, leads
checked and serviceability determined. can be given.
Ventilation/extraction equipment checked and determined
to be working satisfactorily. Repairs if undertaken as
required.

Element 5.45A.2 Prepare welding materials and equipment for MMAW pipe welding to code standards
Criteria 5.45A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements for welding to code standards are Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Weld requirements of the nominated code can be given,
determined. from welding procedure specification. including required weld size, bead placement, weld shape
and reinforcement consumables and settings can be
selected to suit code requirements.

Criteria 5.45A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up. Equipment consumables and settings are selected as per Equipment consumables and settings appropriate to
welding procedure specification. code standard pipe welding in relevant situations can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 283 of 1445
 MEM 5.45A A Perform pipe welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.45A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to produce pipe weld to code Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Methods for preparing pipe for code standard welding
standard. from welding procedure specification. can be given. Pre and post welding heating methods and
Pipe is suitably prepared ready for welding. requirements for pipe welding to code standard can be
given.

Element 5.45A.3 Weld pipe using MMAW to procedure specifications

Criteria 5.45A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials welded as per weld procedure specification. Welds are produced to procedure specification. Weld size, Weld size, bead placement, weld shape and
bead placement, weld shape and reinforcement, etc are in reinforcement, etc can be assessed against requirements
accordance with weld procedure specification. Distortion of the nominated code.
prevention techniques are used. The welded joint is
cleaned using appropriate tools and technique.

Element 5.45A.4 Ensure weld quality

Criteria 5.45A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are rectified to ensure conformance to Welded joints are visually inspected for conformity using Techniques for inspecting pipe welds, rectifying defects
code requirements. appropriate techniques. Where discontinuities are to code standard can be given.
identified as a defect, the defect is repaired. The weld
conforms to code requirements.

Criteria 5.45A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records maintained in accordance with standard Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with Requirements for maintaining weld records to code
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. standard can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 284 of 1445
 MEM 5.45A A Perform pipe welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
MMAW to code standard carried out using a range of materials. The person would work autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety
and welding procedures. Butt and fillet welds are produced on pipe with the axis horizontal, vertical and/or askew. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of
jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Materials used may include carbon/manganese steel, low alloy steel and aluminium materials, etc. Welds produced to the standard of this unit would
typically conform to Australian Standard 1210, AS 4140, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) IX or equivalent. This unit, in conjunction with Unit 5.26 A (Apply
welding principles), may satisfy the requirements of AS 1796 Certificates 2 and 4. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is carried out, Unit 5.8A
(Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
candidate. - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for an off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with manual metal arc welding or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 285 of 1445
 MEM 5.46A A Perform welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.46A A Perform welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process
5.16A Perform advanced welding using manual metal arc 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
welding process
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.46A.1 Maintain welding equipment

Criteria 5.46A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance is performed on welding equipment. Welding equipment including handpiece, cable, lead etc Maintenance requirements for handpiece, cable, leads
checked and serviceability determined. can be given.
Ventilation/extraction equipment checked and determined
to be working satisfactorily. Repairs if undertaken as
required.

Element 5.46A.2 Prepare welding materials and equipment for MMAW welding to code standard
Criteria 5.46A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements for welding to code standards are Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Weld requirements of the nominated code can be given,
determined. from welding procedure specification. including required weld size, bead placement, weld shape
and reinforcement consumables and settings can be
selected to suit code requirements.

Criteria 5.46A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to produce weld to code standard. Weld outcomes, consumables and settings are determined Methods for preparing materials for code standard
from welding procedure specification. Materials are welding can be given. Pre and post welding heating
suitably prepared ready for welding. methods and requirements for welds to code standard
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 286 of 1445
 MEM 5.46A A Perform welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.46A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up. Equipment consumables and settings are selected as per Equipment consumables and settings appropriate to
welding procedure specification. code standard welding in relevant situations can be
given.

Element 5.46A.3 Weld joints using MMAW to procedure specifications

Criteria 5.46A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials welded as per weld procedure specification. Welds are produced to procedure specification. Weld size, Weld size, bead placement, weld shape and
bead placement, weld shape and reinforcement, etc are in reinforcement, etc can be assessed against requirements
accordance with weld procedure specification. Distortion of the nominated code
prevention techniques are used. The welded joint is
cleaned using appropriate tools and technique.

Element 5.46A.4 Ensure weld quality

Criteria 5.46A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are rectified to ensure conformance to Welded joints are visually inspected for conformity using Techniques for inspecting welds, rectifying defects to
code requirements. appropriate techniques. Where discontinuities are code standard can be given.
identified as a defect, the defect is repaired. The weld
conforms to code requirements.

Criteria 5.46A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records maintained in accordance with standard Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with Requirements for maintaining weld records to code
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. standard can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 287 of 1445
 MEM 5.46A A Perform welds to code standards using manual metal arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
MMAW to code standard carried out using a range of materials. The person would work autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety
and welding procedures. Butt and fillet welds are produced in the flat, horizontal, vertical and overhead positions. Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of
jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Materials used may include carbon/manganese steel, low alloy steel and aluminium materials, etc. Welds produced to the standard of this unit would
typically conform to Australian Standard 1210, AS 4140, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) IX or equivalent. This unit, in conjunction with Unit 5.26 A (Apply
welding principles), may satisfy the requirements of AS 1796 Certificates 1, 1E, 3 and 3E. Where advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping is carried out, Unit 5.8A
(Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and shaping) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
candidate. - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for an off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with manual metal arc welding or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 288 of 1445
 MEM 5.47A A Weld using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.47A A Weld using flux core arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.47A.1 Prepare materials for flux core arc welding

Criteria 5.47A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements identified from specifications and/or All appropriate specifications and drawings are obtained. The weld requirements for FCAW can be identified.
drawings.

Criteria 5.47A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is correctly prepared. Appropriate tools and techniques are used to prepare The material preparation requirements can be identified.
material for welding in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 5.47A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are assembled/aligned to specification where The materials to be welded are aligned, located and Examples of material holding devices and their
required. clamped to specifications in accordance with work site application can be given. The required relationship
procedures. between parts to be welded can be identified. The
appropriate work holding method for a given application
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 289 of 1445
 MEM 5.47A A Weld using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.47A.2 Select welding machine components

Criteria 5.47A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding machine settings accessories and consumables Correct welding machine, settings, gas and electrode for The application of weld metal transfer can be given. The
identified. given task selected against pre-determined welding application of a variety of welding machines can be
procedures and specifications and/or technical drawings. given. The appropriate gas can be identified given the
type of electrode, its application and the weld
requirements. The electrode classification system can be
explained (gas and gasless). The appropriate welding
machine for the given task can be identified. Appropriate
size of contact tip and drive rollers is given.

Element 5.47A.3 Assemble and set up welding equipment

Criteria 5.47A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment assembled and set up. Welding equipment is correctly assembled and set up to The relationships between amperage, gas flow,
safety and work site procedures. electrode, contact tip and roller, feed rate and material
can be given. The appropriate settings for the given
applications and the selected equipment/electrodes can
be identified.

Element 5.47A.4 Minimise and rectify distortion

Criteria 5.47A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate distortion prevention measures are selected. Appropriate distortion prevention measures are Methods of preventing distortion of welded materials
undertaken during the welding process. can be given. The appropriate distortion prevention
method for the given application can be identified.

Criteria 5.47A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Distortion is rectified. Where appropriate, distortion of welded materials is Methods of rectifying distortion of welded materials and
rectified in accordance with work site procedures. their applications can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 290 of 1445
 MEM 5.47A A Weld using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.47A.5 Weld to job specification using FCAW

Criteria 5.47A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld deposit is to specification. Welds are deposited according to job requirements. The weld requirements for similar FCAW applications
can be identified.

Criteria 5.47A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Joints cleaned to specifications. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate tools and Methods of cleaning welded joints can be given.
techniques in accordance with work site procedures.

Element 5.47A.6 Ensure weld conformance

Criteria 5.47A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects removed with minimum loss of sound metal using Where appropriate, weld defects are removed in Methods of weld defect removal and their application
correct and appropriate techniques and tools. accordance with work site procedures. A minimum amount can be given.
of sound metal is removed with the defect.

Criteria 5.47A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected for conformance to Visual defects in welded joints are identified. Weld discontinuities detectable visually can be given.
specifications.

Element 5.47A.7 Maintain weld records

Criteria 5.47A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are completed correctly. Weld records are accurately completed in accordance with The weld records to be kept can be identified. The
standard operating procedures. frequency at which weld details are to be recorded can be
identified. The reasons for keeping weld records can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 291 of 1445
 MEM 5.47A A Weld using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
FCAW undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, work and welding procedures and the skills applied to a range of
fabrication activities. A range of material suitable to heavy or light fabrication is used. Fillet and butt welds in all positions on common materials. As a guide, welds produced to
the standard of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose, American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) or equivalent. Preparation of materials may
include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc. Remedial action using thermal processes may include oxyacetylene and air arc equipment. Grinding devices may also be
used. Where thermal processes, hand and/or power tools are required the appropriate specialisation units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. drawings, specifications, catalogues, manuals, codes, standards and information relevant to
the work. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication,
answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the
collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any
off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can
competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria,
including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the flux core arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for their own work; - plan tasks in all
process or other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in accordance with
knowledge covered by this unit. standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use accepted
engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will
be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 292 of 1445
 MEM 5.48A A Perform advanced welding using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.48A A Perform advanced welding using flux core arc welding process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.47A Weld using flux core arc welding process 5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 5.48A.1 Prepare welding materials and equipment

Criteria 5.48A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is prepared. Appropriate machine settings and electrodes determined The elements of a welding procedure can be identified
from relevant documentation and instructions. and the purpose given. The purpose of pre and/or post
welding heating and the methods of application can be
given. The appropriate ventilation/extraction
requirements can be identified.

Criteria 5.48A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate welding equipment is assembled and Welding equipment is set up safely with correct settings in Settings, electrodes and related equipment set-up can be
adjusted correctly and safely. accordance with standard operating procedures. given for materials and weld requirements. The purpose
for the correct size of welding cable, handpiece and
equipment capacity is given. The purpose for the
replacing worn liners, drive rolls, contact tip and gas
shrouds is given. The purpose of changing welding
current polarity is given.

Criteria 5.48A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are prepared to achieve required weld Weld and material preparation requirements are identified All weld and preparation requirements to achieve code
specification. from given specifications. Materials are prepared correctly, specification can be given.
using appropriate tools and techniques.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 293 of 1445
 MEM 5.48A A Perform advanced welding using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 5.48A.2 Weld joints to code requirements using FCAW

Criteria 5.48A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are interpreted correctly. Instructions, symbols, specifications interpreted correctly, The weld requirements of nominated code can be
including bead size, bead placement, reinforcement, etc., identified. The location and size of the weld(s) to be
and in accordance with weld procedure sheet, if available, deposited can be identified.
and standard operating procedures.

Criteria 5.48A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds are deposited correctly to specifications. Fillet and butt welds are deposited correctly as per code Methods and conditions for obtaining fillet and butt
requirements. Where appropriate, distortion prevention weld deposits to code requirements can be given.
techniques are used in accordance with work site Distortion prevention techniques can be given.
procedures. The welded joint is cleaned using appropriate
tools and techniques in accordance with work site
procedures.

Element 5.48A.3 Assess weld quality and rectify faults

Criteria 5.48A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld joints visually inspected against specifications. Weld are inspected against the nominated code and Various weld discontinuities that are detectable visually
discontinuities identified. Decision is made as to and do not conform to the code requirements can be
acceptability of discontinuity as per code requirements. explained. The causes of the discontinuities are given.

Criteria 5.48A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discontinuities are removed using appropriate methods. Where identified and does not meet code requirements, Discontinuities can be identified in relation to code
discontinuities are removed. A minimum amount of sound requirements.
metal is removed with the defect. The weld conforms to the
requirements of the job specification.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 294 of 1445
 MEM 5.48A A Perform advanced welding using flux core arc welding process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.48A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld records are correctly completed and maintained. Weld identification is applied appropriately and Different welder identification systems can be given,
documentation completed correctly. such as numbering, bar coding, paint coding, letter
stamps.

Range statement
Advanced FCAW undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and welding procedures. Work is carried out on a range of
structural sections and/or plate and/or pipe for general fabrication and may include low carbon steel, stainless steel, low alloy steel, etc. As a guide, welds produced to the standard
of this unit would typically conform to Australian Standard 1554 Structural Purpose, Bureau Det Norse Verticas or equivalent. Welds would be fillet and butt in all positions.
Preparation of materials may include preheating, setting up of jigs, fixtures, clamps, etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the flux core arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 295 of 1445
 MEM 5.49A B Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.49A B Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required for identifying welding requirements from instructions, preparing the materials and carrying out routine GTAW . This unit
applies in a maintenance or manufacturing environment where the welding is not required to meet the Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose. The materials used
would typically be low carbon and mild steels.

Element 5.49A.1 Identify weld requirements

Criteria 5.49A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are identified from job instructions. Appropriate instructions, specifications and drawings are The weld requirements for performing routine GTAW can
obtained and weld requirements identified in accordance with be given.
work site procedures.
Criteria 5.49A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Location of welds are identified in accordance with Location of required weld/s identified for given tasks. Location of weld can be determined from standard
standard operating procedures and job specifications. operating procedures and job specifications.

Element 5.49A.2 Prepare materials for welding

Criteria 5.49A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are cleaned and prepared ready for welding. The materials to be welded are cleaned and prepared using The materials preparation required prior to welding can be
appropriate tools and techniques. identified. The tools and techniques appropriate to the
preparation of materials to be welded can be identified.

Element 5.49A.3 Prepare equipment for welding

Criteria 5.49A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up correctly. The welding leads, gas regulators and hoses are correctly Different current types and examples of application can be
attached. Correct electrode and gas types for current use are given. Machine controls and their functions can be
selected. identified and explained.
Criteria 5.49A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Settings and consumables are selected to suit application. Correct gas flow rate is set. The welding machine is set for Different current settings for electrode diameter and current
the electrode diameter to produce the weld required. The types can be given.
range of variables is appropriate for the weld required.
Appropriate current range for electrode diameter is set.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 296 of 1445
 MEM 5.49A A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 5.49A.4 Perform routine welding using GTAW
Criteria 5.49A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe welding practices are applied. All welds are performed in a safe manner with regard to the Safe welding practices and precautions can be given. Typical
operator and other personnel. Precautions are taken to hazards can be identified.
protect the welder and other personnel from hazards
associated with welding process.
Criteria 5.49A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are welded to job requirements. Welds are produced with a minimum number of major Major defects and their causes relating to GTAW can be
defects. Appropriate action taken to report defects. Cause of given.
major defects identified and required adjustments to settings/
welding technique identified.
Criteria 5.49A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds cleaned in accordance with standard operating All welds are cleaned to specification. Standard operating The weld cleaning requirements can be identified. The
procedures. procedures are followed, where applicable. appropriate tools/equipment for cleaning welds can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 297 of 1445
 MEM 5.49A A Perform routine gas tungsten arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Routine GTAW in this unit is intended to apply in a manufacturing or maintenance environment where welding is not required to meet Australian Standards or other welding codes,
Occupational Health and Safety regulations relating to certificated/coded welding and/or licensing requirements. Fillet and butt welds in all positions would typically be performed
on low carbon/mild steels. Weld preparation would be minimal and generally restricted to cleaning, using files and grinders. In circumstances where welding is required to meet
Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose or equivalent codes, Occupational Health and Safety regulations and/or licensing requirements Unit 5.19A (Weld using gas tungsten arc
welding process) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference manuals. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit.
Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all
elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with routine gas tungsten arc welding or other units requiring the and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 298 of 1445
 MEM 5.50A A Perform routine gas metal arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 5.50A A Perform routine gas metal arc welding

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Fabrication Unit Weight 2

Element 5.50A.1 Identify weld requirements

Criteria 5.50A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Weld requirements are identified from job instructions. Appropriate instructions, specifications and drawings are The weld requirements for performing routine GMAW
obtained and weld requirements identified in accordance can be given.
with work site procedures.

Criteria 5.50A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Location of welds are identified in accordance with Location of required weld/s identified for given tasks. Location of weld can be determined from standard
standard operating procedures and job specifications. operating procedures and job specifications.

Element 5.50A.2 Prepare materials for welding

Criteria 5.50A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are cleaned and prepared ready for welding. The materials to be welded are cleaned and prepared using The materials preparation required prior to welding can
appropriate tools and techniques. be identified. The tools and techniques appropriate to
the preparation of materials to be welded can be
identified.

Element 5.50A.3 Prepare equipment for welding

Criteria 5.50A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welding equipment is set up correctly. The welding leads, gas regulators and hoses are correctly Different liners and tips can be given to suit typical
attached. Clean and correct liner and contact tip selected. situations. Machine controls and their functions can be
identified and explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 299 of 1445
 MEM 5.50A A Perform routine gas metal arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 5.50A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Settings and consumables are selected to suit Correct gas flow rate is set. The welding machine is set for Different current & voltage settings, gas flow rates wire
the electrode wire diameter to produce the weld required. diameters and other variables can be given to suit typical
The range of variables is appropriate for the weld required. situations.
Appropriate current and voltage range for the weld
required are set.

Element 5.50A.4 Perform routine welding using GMAW

Criteria 5.50A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe welding practices are applied. All welds are performed in a safe manner with regard to the Safe welding practices and precautions can be given.
operator and other personnel. Precautions are taken to Typical hazards can be identified.
protect the welder and other personnel from hazards
associated with welding process.

Criteria 5.50A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are welded to job requirements. Welds are produced with a minimum number of major Major defects and their causes relating to GMAW can be
defects. Appropriate action taken to report defects. Cause given.
of major defects identified and required adjustments to
settings/ welding technique identified.

Criteria 5.50A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Welds cleaned in accordance with standard operating All welds are cleaned to specification. Standard operating The weld cleaning requirements can be identified. The
procedures. procedures are followed, where applicable. appropriate tools/equipment for cleaning welds can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 300 of 1445
 MEM 5.50A A Perform routine gas metal arc welding Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Routine GMAW in this unit is intended to apply in a manufacturing or maintenance environment where welding is not required to meet Australian Standards or other welding
codes, Occupational Health and Safety regulations relating to certificated/coded welding and/or licensing requirements. Fillet and butt welds in all positions would typically be
performed on low carbon/mild steels. Weld preparation would be minimal and generally restricted to cleaning, using files and grinders. In circumstances where welding is required
to meet Australian Standard 1554 General Purpose or equivalent codes, Occupational Health and Safety regulations and/or licensing requirements Unit 5.17A (Weld using gas metal
arc welding process) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference manuals. The candidate will be required to: -
candidate. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit.
Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all
elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with routine gas metal arc welding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 301 of 1445
 MEM 6.1A A Hand forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 6.1A A Hand forging

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Forging Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 6.1A.1 Use hand tools and formers

Criteria 6.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hand tools and formers correctly selected for specific The relevant job instructions, drawings, procedures etc are The task(s) to be performed can be identified. The range
forging techniques. obtained in accordance with work place procedures. of hand tools and formers used in hand forging and their
application can be identified. The hand tools and formers
to be used to produce a variety of given articles can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen hand
tools and formers can be given. The techniques to be
used when hand forging given articles can be described.

Criteria 6.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hand tools and formers used correctly. A wide range of hand tools and formers are used correctly The procedures for hand forging articles can be given.
in accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 302 of 1445
 MEM 6.1A A Hand forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.1A.2 Apply hand forging techniques

Criteria 6.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Knowledge of drawing, swaging, bending, upsetting, Articles are produced to specification using appropriate The following hand forging techniques and procedures
spreading, punching and drifting techniques applied to hand forging techniques in accordance with standard can be described: - drawing - swaging - bending -
produce articles to specification. operating procedures. upsetting - spreading - punching - drifting. The reasons
for selecting the chosen hard forging technique(s) to
produce the given article can be explained. The
specifications of the article to be produced can be
identified.

Criteria 6.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Forging temperatures and heat specifications adhered to The hand forging of articles is carried out at the correct The source of information on forging temperatures and
for various materials. forging temperature and within the heat specifications of heat specifications for various materials can be identified.
the material being forged. The forging temperatures and heat specifications for a
range of materials can be identified.

Criteria 6.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowance made for material shrinkage and oxidisation. Appropriate allowance for material shrinkage and The effects of material shrinkage and oxidisation on the
oxidisation is made when hard forging articles. dimensions of the forged article can be given. The
methods of overcoming/allowing for the effects of
shrinkage and oxidisation when hand forging articles can
be explained.

Criteria 6.1A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate forging technique selected and applied. The appropriate hand forging technique is applied to
produce given articles in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 303 of 1445
 MEM 6.1A A Hand forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.1A.3 Operate heating equipment

Criteria 6.1A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Heating equipment set up and operated correctly. The appropriate heating equipment is set up and operated A range of heating equipment and its application can be
correctly in accordance with standard operating identified. The procedures for operating each type of
procedures. heating equipment can be given. The procedures for
setting up each type of heating equipment can be given.
The most appropriate heating equipment for a given
forging task can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen heating equipment can be given.

Criteria 6.1A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment operated in a manner that minimises The heating equipment is operated in a manner that will
oxidisation. minimise oxidisation of the material to be forged in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 6.1A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Heat controlled to specified areas. Heat is applied and controlled in specified areas of the The procedures for controlling the application of heat to
material to be forged in accordance with standard specified areas of the material to be forged can be given.
operating procedures. The reasons for concentrating the heat in specified areas
can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 304 of 1445
 MEM 6.1A A Hand forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit refers to the hand forging of low to medium carbon and alloy steels using various techniques, tools, formers and heating devices. Heating devices include diesel, electric
and gas furnaces; coke fires and gaseous oxygen/fuel equipment. Work approach is determined using specifications, instructions and drawings. For simple manual heating and
bending see Unit 5.7A (Manual heating, thermal cutting and gouging).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with hand forging or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 305 of 1445
 MEM 6.2A A Hammer forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 6.2A A Hammer forging

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Forging Unit Weight 4

Element 6.2A.1 Use hammer tools and formers

Criteria 6.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hammer tools and formers correctly selected for specific A wide range of hammer tools and formers and their
forging technique. application can be identified. A variety of hammer
forging techniques can be described. The appropriate
tools, formers and techniques can be selected to produce
a range of hammer forged articles. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tools, formers and techniques can
be given.

Criteria 6.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hammer tools and formers used correctly. The appropriate hammer tools and formers are used The procedures for hammer forging given articles can be
correctly to produce given articles in accordance with identified.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 6.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Forging machine set up and operated correctly. The forging machine is set up and operated in accordance The procedures for setting up and operating forging
with standard operating procedures. machines can be given. The tools, equipment and
techniques necessary to set up the forging machine can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 306 of 1445
 MEM 6.2A A Hammer forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.2A.2 Apply hammer forging techniques

Criteria 6.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate hammer forging technique selected and The relevant job instructions, drawings, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
applied. procedures are obtained in accordance with workplace specifications of the article to be hammer forged can be
procedures. The article is produced to specification using identified. The appropriate hammer forging technique,
appropriate hammer forging techniques, tools and formers tools and formers can be identified. The reasons for
in accordance with standard operating procedures. selecting the chosen technique, tools and formers can be
explained.

Criteria 6.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects recognised and appropriate rectification action Where appropriate, forging defects are detected and Common defects in hammer forged articles and their
taken. rectified in accordance with standard operating causes can be identified. Those defects that can be
procedures. rectified and the method of rectification of the defect can
be given.

Criteria 6.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct techniques applied to the handling of hot metal The hot metal is handled safely in accordance with The techniques for handling hot metal with respect to
with regard to balancing and pivoting. standard operating procedures. balancing and pivoting can be given. The hazards
associated with handling hot metal can be identified. The
appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment
and its use can be identified. The procedures for
handling hot metal can be given.

Criteria 6.2A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct heating procedure applied. The material being forged is heated correctly in The procedures for heating material to be hammer forged
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 307 of 1445
 MEM 6.2A A Hammer forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.2A.3 Select material

Criteria 6.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material calculations made using volumes and weights The volume and weight of material required to produce a The allowances to be made for oxidisation and shrinkage
that include provision for oxidisation and shrinkage. given article to specification is correctly calculated in of the material to be forged can be given. The reasons for
accordance with standard operating procedures. making those allowances can be explained. The
procedures and formulae for determining the volume and
weight of material required to produce an article to
specification can be given.

Criteria 6.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material correctly selected for use with specific tools and The appropriate tools and formers for the material to be The material specifications can be identified. The hammer
formers. hammer forged are used in accordance with standard tools and formers to be used with a variety of different
operating procedures. materials can be identified. The reasons for selecting
specific tools and formers for use with different materials
can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 308 of 1445
 MEM 6.2A A Hammer forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit refers to hammer forging operations on carbon and alloy steels using various techniques, tools, formers, power hammers and heating devices. Heating devices include
diesel, electric and gas furnaces; coke fires and gaseous oxygen/fuel equipment. Work approach is determined using specifications, instructions and drawings. Equipment range
does not include drop and upset machinery, vacuum furnaces or rolling and extruding mill machinery.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with hammer forging or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 309 of 1445
 MEM 6.3A B Carry out heat treatment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 6.3A B Carry out heat treatment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Forging Unit Weight 6

Element 6.3A.1 Determine requirements of job

Criteria 6.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job requirements determined from engineering drawings, Job instructions, drawings and specifications obtained in The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
job sheet or verbal instructions from metallurgist or accordance with work site procedures. specifications pertaining to the work to be done can be
supervisor. identified.

Element 6.3A.2 Select heat treatment equipment

Criteria 6.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment for heat treatment application The equipment to be used with a variety of heat
selected. treatment applications can be identified. The most
appropriate equipment to carry out the required heat
treatment process can be identified.

Element 6.3A.3 Set up equipment

Criteria 6.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment set up according to standard operating The appropriate equipment is correctly set up for the
procedures and manufacturer's instructions. required heat treatment process in accordance with
standard operating procedures and manufacturer's
instructions.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 310 of 1445
 MEM 6.3A B Carry out heat treatment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.3A.4 Work safely with hot metals

Criteria 6.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate safety clothing and personal protection Appropriate safety clothing and personal protection The hazards associated with the heat treatment process
equipment used correctly as specified in standard equipment is used in accordance with standard operating can be identified. The safety clothing and personal
operating procedures. procedures. protection equipment to be worn can be identified.

Criteria 6.3A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency procedures identified and demonstrated Emergency procedures can be correctly demonstrated. Emergency procedures to be followed in the event of an
according to approved safety instructions. emergency can be identified.

Criteria 6.3A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety signs and symbols identified and understood. The meaning of all safety signs and symbols can be
given.

Criteria 6.3A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment used according to specifications and standard Standard operating procedures and specifications are The standard operating procedures for the heat treatment
operating procedures. followed at all times during the heat treatment process. process(es) can be identified.

Element 6.3A.5 Heat treat material

Criteria 6.3A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is treated to achieve required result and may The required heat treatment process(es) are carried out in The heat treatment process to be carried out can be
include processes of preparation eg: coatings and accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The preparation requirements of the material to
packings; preheating; soaking; quenching; tempering; be heat treated can be identified. The quenching
annealing; normalising; carburizing; sintering. requirements of the material to be heat treated can be
identified. The preheating requirements of the material to
be heat treated can be identified. The condition of the
material to be achieved via the heat treating process can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 311 of 1445
 MEM 6.3A B Carry out heat treatment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 6.3A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material piece or batch loaded and unloaded using The furnace is loaded safely in accordance with standard The equipment to be used in batch and/or piece loading
equipment appropriate to the situation in accordance with operating procedures. of furnaces can be identified. The procedures for the safe
standard operating procedures. loading of furnaces can be identified.

Criteria 6.3A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct temperature is maintained in accordance with The correct temperature is maintained in accordance with The temperature applicable to the heat treatment process
standard operating procedures. specifications and standard operating procedures. can be identified. The time for which the temperature
must be maintained can be identified.

Element 6.3A.6 Identify hazardous conditions

Criteria 6.3A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hazards identified and planning undertaken to maintain a All work is undertaken safely in accordance with standard The hazards associated with working in a heat treatment
safe work environment. operating procedures. Where appropriate, hazards are environment can be identified. The precautions to be
reported to the appropriate person. undertaken to ensure a safe working environment is
maintained can be identified. The procedures for
reporting identified hazards can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 312 of 1445
 MEM 6.3A B Carry out heat treatment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to heat treatment of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Equipment range may include salt baths, vacuum furnace, induction heating, kilns, gas fired furnaces, etc. and
may incorporate overhead lifting apparatus. Simple heat treatment applications like annealing and/or heat/quench processes undertaken as incidental to trade work eg. toolmaking
are covered by Unit 6.7A (Perform heat/quenching, tempering and annealing).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the carrying out of heat and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
treatment processes or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 313 of 1445
 MEM 6.4A A Select heat treatment processes and test finished product Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 6.4A A Select heat treatment processes and test finished product
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Forging Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
6.3A Carry out heat treatment

Element 6.4A.1 Determine requirements of job

Criteria 6.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process to achieve specified result determined using All relevant information is obtained in accordance with The characteristics of the material to be achieved
reference material, metallurgist's report, consultation or workplace procedures. through heat treatment of the material can be identified.
technical specialists or other appropriate personnel. The sources of information on material characteristics,
heat treatment processes and equipment can be
identified.

Criteria 6.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Knowledge of metal composition and effects of heat and Six heat treatment processes can be identified. The effect
cooling applied to selection of appropriate process. on material characteristics of the heat treatment
processes identified can be given. The appropriate heat
treatment process to achieve the required material
characteristics can be identified. For the material
characteristics to be achieved via the selected heat
treatment process the following can be identified: - any
material preparation requirements - any quenching
requirements - any preheating requirements - the
temperature to be achieved - the time for which the
temperature is to be maintained. The effect of variations
in material composition on the above parameters can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 314 of 1445
 MEM 6.4A A Select heat treatment processes and test finished product Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.4A.2 Maintain documentation of jobs

Criteria 6.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All relevant information recorded in accordance with All relevant information on material characteristics is The material characteristics to be recorded and the
standard operating procedures. recorded in accordance with standard operating frequency at which they are to be recorded can be
procedures. identified.

Criteria 6.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information relating to heat treatment equipment and All relevant information relating to the heat treatment The data relating to equipment usage to be recorded and
processes recorded and kept up to date as required. equipment and its use is recorded in accordance with the frequency of recording can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

Element 6.4A.3 Test material

Criteria 6.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material prepared for testing as required. Where appropriate, materials are appropriately prepared The types of destructive testing and their application can
for testing in accordance with standard operating be given. The types of non-destructive testing and their
procedures. application can be given. The material preparation
requirements for each test can be identified.

Criteria 6.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Properties of material tested using appropriate testing Where appropriate, the physical properties of the heat The physical properties of materials that are to be tested
equipment as required. treated materials are tested using the appropriate can be identified. The equipment to be used in
equipment in accordance with standard operating determining each of the physical properties of material
procedures. can be identified. The appropriate tests and equipment
for the work to be undertaken can be identified.

Criteria 6.4A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Heat treatment faults identified and reported if Where appropriate, heat treatment faults are identified. Common heat treatment faults can be identified. The
appropriate. Where appropriate, heat treatment faults are reported in procedures to be followed if heat treatment faults are
accordance with standard operating procedures. detected can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 315 of 1445
 MEM 6.4A A Select heat treatment processes and test finished product Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 6.4A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Heat treatment faults rectified where possible. Where appropriate, heat treatment faults are rectified in Heat treatment faults that can be rectified can be
accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The procedures for rectifying those faults can
be given.

Range statement
This unit applies to heat treatment of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Equipment range may include salt baths, vacuum furnace, induction heating, kilns, gas fired furnaces etc. and
may incorporate overhead lifting equipment. Advice may be given as to selection of appropriate material to provide required product outcome. Testing may include destructive and
non-destructive testing methods.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the selection of heat and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
treatment processes and/or the testing of heat treated products or plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 316 of 1445
 MEM 6.5A A Drop and upset forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 6.5A A Drop and upset forging

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Forging Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
6.2A Hammer forging

Element 6.5A.1 Identify and select drop and upset forging equipment and tools for specific operation
Criteria 6.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment selected which accounts for size The relevant job instructions, drawings, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
of material and procedures. procedures are obtained in accordance with workplace specifications of the work to be done can be identified.
procedures. The drop or upset forging procedures to be used to carry
out the specific operations required can be given. The
appropriate drop/upset forging equipment to be used to
carry out the work can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen equipment can be given.

Criteria 6.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dies and punches correctly selected for specific The dies and punches required to carry out the specific
operations and equipment. operations required in the selected equipment can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen dies and
punches can be given.

Criteria 6.5A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Die replacement correctly determined with regard to relief The die is inspected for defects and conformance to The procedures for checking dies for
allowances, cracking, dimensions, etc. specifications in accordance with standard operating defects/conformance to specification can be given. The
procedures. Where appropriate, the die is replaced in tools, techniques and equipment required to inspect dies
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. The procedures for replacing
defective/out of specification dies can be given. The
tools, techniques and equipment required to replace dies
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 317 of 1445
 MEM 6.5A A Drop and upset forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.5A.2 Set up and operate drop and upset forging equipment
Criteria 6.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment correctly and safely set up, adjusted and The drop/upset forging equipment is safely set up, The safety precautions to be taken when setting,
operated. adjusted and operated in accordance with standard adjusting and operating forging equipment can be
operating procedures. identified. The procedures for setting, adjusting and
operating forging equipment can be given. The tools,
techniques and equipment required to set and adjust
forging equipment can be identified.

Criteria 6.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct die setting techniques applied in setting correct The dies and punches are correctly aligned in accordance The consequences of incorrect alignment of dies and
die and punch alignment. with specifications and standard operating procedures. punches can be identified. The procedures for ensuring
correct alignment of dies and punches can be given.

Criteria 6.5A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct die preheating procedures applied. The die is preheated to the correct temperature in The reasons for preheating the dies can be given. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for preheating dies can be given. The
temperature to which the die is to be preheated for the
specific operation can be identified.

Element 6.5A.3 Prepare material

Criteria 6.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly prepared and heated in accordance The material to be forged is correctly prepared and heated The material to be forged can be identified. The
with job requirements and/or specifications. in accordance with specifications and standard operating preparation and heating requirements of the material can
procedures. be identified. The source of preparation and heating
requirements of different materials can be identified. The
procedures for preparing and heating the material to be
forged can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 318 of 1445
 MEM 6.5A A Drop and upset forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.5A.4 Drop and upset forge material

Criteria 6.5A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drop forge material using correct procedures and The material is drop/upset forged to specification in The procedures and techniques for drop/upset forging of
techniques. accordance with standard operating procedures. material can be given.

Criteria 6.5A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct lubricant applied for die wear and forging release. The appropriate lubricant is applied to the die in The reasons for lubricating the die can be given. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for lubricating the die can be given. The
appropriate lubricant for the die/material being forged
can be identified.

Criteria 6.5A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct grain flow determined. The grain flow to be achieved in the forging can be
identified. The consequences of grain flow not
conforming to specifications can be given.

Criteria 6.5A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Galls, folds and cracks identified and corrected. Where appropriate, galls, folds and cracks in drop/upset The causes of galls, folds and cracks in drop/upset
forged articles are identified and corrected in accordance forged articles can be identified. The procedures for
with standard operating procedures. correcting defects in drop/upset forged articles can be
given.

Criteria 6.5A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct removal of flash or fin. Where appropriate, flash or fins are removed from The procedures for removing flash and fins from
drop/upset forged articles in accordance with standard drop/upset forged articles can be given. The tools,
operating procedures. techniques and equipment required to remove flash and
fins can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 319 of 1445
 MEM 6.5A A Drop and upset forging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 6.5A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material amounts calculated with allowance for heat The weight and volume of material required to produce a The procedures and formulae for calculating material
wastage and flash or fin. specific article by drop/upset forging is correctly volume and weight to produce the specified forging can
calculated in accordance with standard operating be given. The source of data on allowances to be made
procedures. for different materials can be identified. The reasons for
making allowances for heat wastage, flash and fin can be
explained.

Range statement
This unit refers to drop and upset forging operations conducted on a range of metals. Material forged is to specified dimensional accuracy and finish. Equipment range includes
drop forging and upset forging equipment and cold upset forging equipment. For routine, repetitive cold upset forging see Unit 7.24A (Operate and monitor machine/process).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with drop and upset forging or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 320 of 1445
MEM 6.6A B Spring repair Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 6.6A B Spring repair

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Forging Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to assess the spring condition, set and reset springs for repair, set up and operate spring forming equipment, form and shape
material and test components. Materials typically include spring and stainless steels.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
6.1A Hand forging 6.3A Carry out heat treatment 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 6.6A.1 Assess spring condition

Criteria 6.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Knowledge of annealing, hardening, tempering, soaking, Springs are checked for correct operation or malfunction in The procedures for testing springs for correct
spring operation and setting applied in determining accordance with standard operating procedures operation/malfunction can be given The tools, techniques
defects and correct action and equipment required to test springs can be identified The
specifications of the spring being tested can be determined
Deviations of spring performance from specification can be
identified The causes of the deviation from
specification/defect in the spring can be identified The
effects of annealing, hardening, tempering, soaking and
setting on spring operation can be identified
Criteria 6.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Springs suitable for rework correctly identified Springs suitable for rework can be correctly identified from a Spring defects that can be rectified by rework can be
given sample of springs identified The rework procedures for a range of spring
defects can be given
Criteria 6.6A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair procedure correctly identified The appropriate repair procedure for given repairable
springs can be identified The reasons for selecting the
chosen repair procedure can be given
Element 6.6A.2 Set and reset springs for repair
Criteria 6.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct stripping procedure applied Springs for repair are stripped in accordance with standard The procedures for stripping springs prior to repair can be
operating procedures given The reasons for stripping springs prior to repair can
be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 321 of 1445
MEM 6.6A A Spring repair Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 6.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Setting tolerances allowed for in set/reset of springs to Springs are set/reset to specification in accordance with The setting specifications of the spring to be set/reset can
specification standard operating procedures be identified The procedures for setting/resetting springs
can be given
Criteria 6.6A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct temperature controlled for setting/resetting Springs are set/reset at the correct temperature for the The temperature at which springs are to be set/reset can be
springs spring material in accordance with standard operating identified The source of information on setting
procedures temperatures for different spring materials can be given
Element 6.6A.3 Set up and operate spring forming equipment
Criteria 6.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment safely set up and correctly utilised Spring forming equipment is safely and correctly set up in The procedures for setting up spring forming equipment can
accordance with standard operating procedures be given The hazards associated with the set up and
operation of spring forming equipment can be identified
The precautions to be taken when setting up and operating
spring forming equipment can be identified
Criteria 6.6A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material correctly and safely positioned The material to be formed is safely and correctly positioned The procedures for positioning material in the spring
in the spring forming equipment in accordance with standard forming equipment can be given
operating procedures
Criteria 6.6A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Forming equipment and tools correctly selected and The appropriate forming tools and equipment are used to The forming equipment and tools for given spring forming
utilised for application form springs in accordance with specifications and standard applications can be identified The reasons for selecting the
operating procedures chosen forming equipment and tools can be given
Element 6.6A.4 Form and shape material
Criteria 6.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material tapered, rolled and bent to conform with Where appropriate, the material is tapered, rolled and bent The form and shape of the spring being made/repaired can
specifications in conformance with specifications and in accordance with be identified The procedures for tapering, rolling and
standard operating procedures bending materials can be given The specifications of the
form and shape to be produced can be identified The tools,
techniques and equipment required to taper, roll and bend
spring materials can be identified
Criteria 6.6A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct procedure adopted for both hot and cold The applications of both hot and cold forming processes
forming can be given The reasons for selecting hot and cold
forming processes can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 322 of 1445
MEM 6.6A A Spring repair Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 6.6A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowance made for relief and spring-back Appropriate allowance is made for relief and spring-back The allowances to be made for relief and spring-back can be
when forming and shaping materials to specification identified The reasons for making allowances for relief and
spring-back can be given
Criteria 6.6A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material lengths correctly determined The correct length of material is used when forming and The length of material required to form and shape the
shaping materials to specification spring to specification can be identified

Criteria 6.6A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct procedure utilised for buckling laminated springs Laminated springs are buckled safely and correctly in The procedures for buckling laminated springs can be given
accordance with standard operating procedures The tools, techniques and equipment required to buckle
laminated springs can be identified The safety precautions
to be taken when buckling laminated springs can be
identified
Element 6.6A.5 Test components
Criteria 6.6A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spring compression determined from specifications The spring specifications can be identified The appropriate
testing techniques and equipment to be used to check for
conformance to specification can be identified The
procedures for testing springs for conformance to
specification can be given
Criteria 6.6A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects and dimensional accuracy correctly determined The spring is tested for conformance with specifications in The procedures for recording test results can be given The
accordance with standard operating procedures The test procedures for marking defective springs for repair/rework
results are recorded in accordance with standard operating can be given
procedures Where appropriate, defective springs are marked
for repair/rework in accordance with standard operating
procedures
Criteria 6.6A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Springs correctly nested to specification The springs tested are correctly nested in accordance with The procedures for nesting springs can be given The
standard operating procedures reasons for nesting springs can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 323 of 1445
MEM 6.6A A Spring repair Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit refers to the forming, shaping and setting operations for springs. Materials typically include spring and stainless steels. Equipment range includes tapering, coiling,
stripping and buckling; and spring testing machines, but does not include automated spring making equipment.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with spring repair or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
until all prerequisites have been satisfied. in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 324 of 1445
 MEM 6.7A A Perform basic incidental heat/quenching, tempering and annealing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 6.7A A Perform basic incidental heat/quenching, tempering and annealing
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Forging Unit Weight 2

Element 6.7A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 6.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job requirements determined from engineering drawing, All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications are The process for heating/quenching and tempering
job sheet or verbal instructions. obtained in accordance with standard operating achieve the required specifications can be identified. The
procedures. process for annealing to achieve the required
specifications can be identified.

Element 6.7A.2 Set up equipment for heat/quenching tempering and annealing

Criteria 6.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate heating process and/or procedure is The process for heating/quenching and tempering The process for heating/quenching and tempering work
identified. selected in accordance with workplace procedures. The pieces of different materials can be given. The process
process for annealing selected in accordance with for annealing work pieces of different materials can be
workplace procedures. given.

Criteria 6.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment set up according to standard operating The appropriate equipment is correctly set up for the
procedures and manufacturer's instructions. required heat treatment process in accordance with
standard operating procedures and manufacturer's
instructions.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 325 of 1445
 MEM 6.7A A Perform basic incidental heat/quenching, tempering and annealing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 6.7A.3 Operate heating equipment

Criteria 6.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All safety procedures observed. Safety glasses and protective clothing is worn at all times. Safety hazards associated with heat/quenching,
The relevant safety procedures are followed at all times. tempering and annealing materials can be identified.

Criteria 6.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate heating equipment operating procedures Heating equipment is started up and operated in The procedures for starting up and operating heating
followed. accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment can be identified.

Criteria 6.7A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment adjustments are made. Heating equipment is adjusted in accordance with The procedures for adjusting heating equipment can be
standard operating procedures. identified.

Criteria 6.7A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is treated to achieve required result. Material is treated by the processes of heating; annealing; The specifications for heating; annealing; quenching and
quenching and tempering to specification. tempering given materials can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 326 of 1445
 MEM 6.7A A Perform basic incidental heat/quenching, tempering and annealing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the heat treatment of ferrous and non ferrous metals of various types and thicknesses by a range of methods, which may include Oxy acetylene, LPG gas
equipment, forge etc. and used to heat/quench temper and anneal materials to specifications. Work normally would cover one off processes or processes undertaken as incidental
to trade work (eg. Toolmaking, metal spinning etc.) and are undertaken autonomously or as part of a team to predetermined standards of quality and safety. All work carried out to
legislative and regulatory requirements. For more comprehensive or complex heating treatment, Units 6.3A (Carry out heat treatment) and 6.4A (Select heat treatment processes and
test finished product) should also be considered. For continuous or batch heat treatment of materials Unit 7.24A (Operate and monitor machine/process) should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision mechanical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 327 of 1445
 MEM 7.1A A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.1A A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit is to be assessed in conjunction with a production machine or equipment operation unit.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.1A.1 Undertake programmed safety and maintenance checks

Criteria 7.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Checks undertaken safely and to prescribed procedure. All maintenance and safety checks are undertaken safely All maintenance and safety checks to be undertaken for a
and in accordance with work site procedures. specified machine/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 7.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Status/report recorded on proforma or reported orally. The status of all components in the maintenance and The recording/reporting requirements associated with
safety checks are recorded/reported in accordance with maintenance and safety checks can be identified.
work site procedures.

Element 7.1A.2 Undertake programmed maintenance

Criteria 7.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Removal/replacement of consumable components Consumable components are removed/replaced in Consumable components to be removed/replaced can be
undertaken to prescribed procedure and instructions accordance with instructions and work site procedures. identified Adjustment requirements can be identified.
followed. Adjustments are made in accordance with instructions and
work site procedures.

Criteria 7.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fluids and lubricants replaced and/or topped up to The correct fluids are selected Fluids and lubricants are The fluids/lubricants to be replaced and/or topped up
prescribed schedule. replaced and/or topped up in accordance with work site can be identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 328 of 1445
 MEM 7.1A A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken in a team environment to predetermined specifications. Machines/equipment range includes manuals, semi-automatic and automatic machines of a stand-alone
continuous production or process nature. Consumable replacements include air filter, oil wipers, grease containers, tool tips, indicator globes, fluids and lubricants, guides and limit
switch actuators. Adjustments are of a limited nature and include safety guards, stops, wear pads and tool holders, nipping up of glands and adjustment of scrapers and aprons etc.
This unit should not be selected when any of the following units are selected: Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components), Unit 18.6A
(Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components), Unit 7.5A (Perform general machining).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with : - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents. - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The
disadvantage the candidate. candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer
questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection
of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job
training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently
and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit is to be assessed in conjunction with a production machine During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practises at all times; -
or equipment operation unit. The unit could also be assessed in communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
conjunction with units assessing the safety, quality, communication, and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
materials handling, recording and reporting associated with the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
operational maintenance of machines/equipment or other accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
all prerequisites have been satisfied. activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 329 of 1445
 MEM 7.2A A Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.2A A Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.2A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed and protective Safety glasses and protective clothing is worn at all times. Safety hazards associated with the use of shapers,
clothing and safety glasses worn. The relevant safety procedures are followed at all times. planers and slotting machines can be identified.

Element 7.2A.2 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings interpreted, sequence of operations determined All relevant drawings, job instructions and specifications The job requirements can be identified. The sequence of
and tools selected to produce component to are obtained in accordance with work place procedures. operations to achieve the job requirements can be
specification. identified. The tool type and geometry to achieve the
required specifications can be identified. The effect of
tool type and geometry on work pieces of different
materials can be given.

Criteria 7.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cutting parameters determined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 330 of 1445
 MEM 7.2A A Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.2A.3 Perform precision shaping operations

Criteria 7.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Precision shaping operations carried out including The work piece is set up in accordance with specifications. The job set-up requirements can be identified. The tools,
precision flat surfaces, shoulders, slots, keyways, angles and standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, equipment and techniques to be used to set up the work
and dovetails. each of the following features is produced using a shaping piece can be identified. The procedures for setting up the
machine in accordance with workplace procedures and to work piece can be given. The techniques and
specifications: procedures for machining the following can be given:
- flat surfaces - flat surfaces
- shoulders - shoulders
- slots - slots
- keyways - keyways
- angles - angles
- dovetails - dovetails

Element 7.2A.4 Perform precision planing operations

Criteria 7.2A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Precision planing operations carried out including The work piece is set up in accordance with specifications The job set-up requirements can be identified. The tools,
horizontal and vertical surfaces and angles. and standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, equipment and techniques to be used to set up the work
each of the following features is produced using a planing piece can be identified. The procedures for setting up the
machine in accordance with workplace procedures and to work piece can be given. The techniques and
specification: - horizontal surfaces - vertical surfaces. procedures for machining the following can be given: -
horizontal surfaces - vertical surfaces.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 331 of 1445
 MEM 7.2A A Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.2A.5 Perform precision slotting operations

Criteria 7.2A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Precision slotting operations carried out including The work piece is set up in accordance with specifications The job set-up requirements can be identified. The tools,
feathered and tapered keyways, slotting internal cavities, and standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, equipment and techniques to be used to set up the work
dovetails, slotting circular surfaces and internal splines. each of the following features is produced using a slotting piece can be identified. The procedures for setting up the
machine in accordance with workplace procedures and to work piece can be given. The techniques and
specification: - feathered keyways - tapered keyways - procedures for machining the following can be given: -
slotting internal cavities - dovetails - slotting circular feathered keyways - tapered keyways - slotting internal
surfaces - slotting internal splines. cavities - dovetails - slotting circular surfaces - slotting
internal splines.

Element 7.2A.6 Check component for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.2A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component checked for conformance to specification Components are checked visually and dimensionally for The appropriate techniques, tools and equipment to
using appropriate techniques tools and equipment. conformance to specification in accordance with work site measure machined components can be identified.
procedures. Appropriate measuring tools, techniques and
equipment are used to check components for conformance
to specification.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 332 of 1445
 MEM 7.2A A Perform precision shaping/planing/slotting operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is performed to established processes, practices and standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Work is performed to drawings or sketches, specifications and
instructions as appropriate. Work applies to a range of one or more of precision shaping, planing or slotting operations where achievement of the specified tolerance and finish is
mandatory. Precision measuring instruments, standard engineering materials and cutting tools are used.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of precision and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
shaping/planing/slotting operations or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. To be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
assessed as competent in this unit, the individual must operate at accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
least one or more of the precision machining operations identified in involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
elements 7.2A.3, 7.2A.4 and 7.2A.5. Competency in this unit cannot be
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 333 of 1445
 MEM 7.3A A Setting machines (routine) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.3A A Setting machines (routine)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.3A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets or equivalent instructions interpreted Job sheets and/or instructions are obtained in accordance The work to be undertaken can be identified.
correctly and understood. with work place procedures.

Element 7.3A.2 Set machine

Criteria 7.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe working practices are understood and implemented. All work is carried out safely in accordance with standard The relevant safety and standard operating procedures
operating procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 7.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine set in accordance with defined procedures. The machine is set in accordance with standard operating The machine setting procedures can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 7.3A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine adjusted to meet specifications and operational The machine is adjusted to meet specifications and The relevant machine and operational specifications can
requirements. operational requirements in accordance with standard be identified.
operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 334 of 1445
 MEM 7.3A A Setting machines (routine) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.3A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
First-off samples measured for compliance with The first-off samples are measured for compliance with The specifications of the part to be produced can be
specifications. specifications. identified.

Element 7.3A.3 Instruct machine operator

Criteria 7.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operator instructed if necessary on sequencing Where appropriate, the machine operator is instructed on The sequence of operations of the machine can be
settings and any required safety procedures. the sequence of operations and any required safety identified. Where appropriate, required safety procedures
procedures. can be identified.

Element 7.3A.4 Replace worn/damaged tooling

Criteria 7.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Worn or damaged tooling identified and changed as Where appropriate, worn or damaged tooling is identified Common examples of worn or damaged tooling can be
required. and changed in accordance with standard operating identified. The effects of worn or damaged tooling on the
procedures. component to be produced can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 335 of 1445
 MEM 7.3A A Setting machines (routine) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to a range of non-NC/CNC equipment which may be used for removing metal, bending, rolling, joining, extruding, pressing, moulding and die casting on a range of
materials, including metals, plastics, fibre etc. If interpretation of drawings to Australian Standard 1100 or equivalent is required, Unit 9.2A (Interpret technical drawing) should be
selected. For setting automated assembly processes, see Unit 3.7A (Setting multistage continuous process lines). Where setting skills for NC/CNC are required Unit 7.15A (Set
NC/CNC machines/process (basic)) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the routine setting of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
machines or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 336 of 1445
 MEM 7.4A A Setting machines (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.4A A Setting machines (complex)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.6A Perform lathe operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.7A Perform milling operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.8A Perform grinding operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.13A Perform machining operations using horizontal
and/or vertical boring machine
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 5
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.3A Setting machines (routine)
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.25A Advanced machine/process operation 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 6
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.3A Setting machines (routine)
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.26A Advanced plastic processing 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 7
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.3A Setting machines (routine)
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.27A Advanced press operations 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 8

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 337 of 1445
 MEM 7.4A A Setting machines (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.3A Setting machines (routine)
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.25A Advanced machine/process operation 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 9
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.3A Setting machines (routine)
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.26A Advanced plastic processing 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 10
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.3A Setting machines (routine)
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.27A Advanced press operations 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.4A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets or equivalent instructions interpreted Job sheets and/or instructions are followed safely in The work requirements can be identified.
correctly and understood. accordance with work site procedures.

Element 7.4A.2 Set machine

Criteria 7.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe working practices are understood and implemented. All work is carried out safely in accordance with work site The safety features of the machine can be identified. The
procedures. safety precautions to be taken while setting the machine
can be identified.

Criteria 7.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine sequencing set up which may include the The sequence of machine operations is in accordance with The sequencing requirements of the machine's
selection of gears, cams, trip dogs, pin boards or other instructions. operations can be identified. The methods of sequencing
timing mechanisms. the machine's operations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 338 of 1445
 MEM 7.4A A Setting machines (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.4A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine adjusted to meet specifications and operational The tooling, equipment and timing of the machine is Product specifications can be identified. The operational
requirements. adjusted to operational requirements and specifications. requirements of the machine can be identified.

Criteria 7.4A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
First-off samples measured and inspected for compliance The first-off samples are inspected visually and Common product faults or defects can be identified.
with specifications. dimensionally for conformance to specification. Where Methods of adjusting out given faults or defects can be
appropriate, further adjustment is made to achieve given.
specification requirements.

Element 7.4A.3 Instruct machine operator

Criteria 7.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operator instructed if necessary on sequencing The machine operator is instructed on the safety The consequences of not instructing the machine
settings and any required safety procedures. procedures to be followed and the sequencing of the operator on the sequence of the machine and safety
machine. Confirmation is obtained from the machine procedures can be given.
operator that the machine sequence and safety procedures
are understood.

Element 7.4A.4 Replace worn/damaged tooling

Criteria 7.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools changed and settings adjusted to specification as Worn or damaged tooling is replaced and set to The effects of worn/damaged tooling on product quality
required. specification in accordance with work site procedures. can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 339 of 1445
 MEM 7.4A A Setting machines (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. This unit builds on the skills described in Unit 7.3A (Setting machines (routine)) and applies to the setting of a range of
non-numerical control/computer numerical control production machines and processes. This may include manual, semi-automatic and automatic machines. Where numerical
control/computer numerical control skills are required, Unit 7.15A (Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic)) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents. - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The
disadvantage the candidate. candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication answer
questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection
of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job
training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently
and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the setting of machines, or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 340 of 1445
 MEM 7.5A A Perform general machining Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.5A A Perform general machining

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.5A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, instructions and specifications interpreted and All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
understood. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. specifications pertaining to the work to be done can be
identified.

Element 7.5A.2 Determine sequence of operations

Criteria 7.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequence of operations including job set up is A work plan is prepared identifying the sequence of The operations to be performed can be identified. The
determined for maximum efficiency and to meet job operations to be performed. reasons for selecting the chosen sequence of operations
specifications. can be explained. The machines/equipment necessary to
perform those operations can be identified. The method
of job holding to be used can be identified.

Criteria 7.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate material selected and datum established as Appropriate material is selected in accordance with The material to be used can be identified. Where
required. standard operating procedures. appropriate, datum points/ lines can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 341 of 1445
 MEM 7.5A A Perform general machining Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.5A.3 Select and mount tools

Criteria 7.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools for job selected, sharpened and shaped Where appropriate, cutting tools are sharpened and A range of cutting tools and their application can be
as required. shaped to suit the materials to be cut and the operations to identified. The correct geometry for cutting tools for a
be performed in accordance with standard operating range of materials and applications can be identified from
procedures. appropriate data sheets/texts. Worn or damaged cutting
tools can be identified. The benefits of using correctly
sharpened cutting tools can be given. The cutting tools
appropriate to the operations to be performed can be
identified.

Criteria 7.5A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools mounted and positioned correctly. All tools are mounted and positioned correctly in The correct methods of mounting a variety of cutting
accordance with standard operating procedures. tools can be given.

Element 7.5A.4 Perform machining operations

Criteria 7.5A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Basic marking out techniques used where required. Where appropriate, materials are marked out to facilitate The reasons for marking out materials can be given.
machining in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 7.5A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machining parameters set for job requirements and The machining parameters are set to achieve the job
maximum tool life. requirements and maximise tool life in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 7.5A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work held or correctly clamped without damage to Appropriate and sufficient clamping/mounting is used and Safety issues can be explained with regard to correct
product and all safety requirements met. workpiece is not damaged or distorted. clamping.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 342 of 1445
 MEM 7.5A A Perform general machining Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.5A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machining performed in a safe manner utilising all Operations are performed according to the established Safety issues can be explained with regard to adequate
guards, safety procedures and personal protective machining parameters and safety procedures and guards, shields etc. as well as personal protective
clothing and equipment. requirements. Correct coolant/lubricant is used where clothing and equipment.
required.

Element 7.5A.5 Measure components

Criteria 7.5A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked with appropriate instruments or Correct measuring devices selected and used with checks Operator is aware of tolerances, limits etc.
gauges to ensure compliance with specifications. against specifications.

Element 7.5A.6 Adjust and maintain machine

Criteria 7.5A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance and adjustments carried out as Adjustments and lubrication are made according to Operator can describe situations indicating the need for
required which may include slide and collar adjustment, standard operating procedures. Machine appropriately machine adjustment, lubrication and cleaning.
cleaning and lubrication and the like. cleaned.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 343 of 1445
 MEM 7.5A A Perform general machining Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Machining is undertaken on one or more of a range of standard machine tools. Work is undertaken to predetermined specifications. Machines are not CNC (computer numerical
control) machines and may include lathes, mills, planers, shapers, drills, slotters, surface grinders etc. Materials may include standard ferrous and non-ferrous materials. Operations
and set up carried out on those machines are straightforward and may include parallel cutting, slotting, planing, drilling, knurling, cutting flats, non-precision surface grinding
operations etc. Surface grinding operations covered by this unit are those requiring magnetic chucks and grinding of flat surfaces. Machining parameters include speeds, feeds,
stops, coolant and cutting lubricants etc. Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of quality and safety. Drilling operations in this unit exclude those covered
by Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations). Where substantial marking out is required, Unit 12.6A (Mark off/out (general engineering)) should be considered. Where
precision measurement is required, Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) should also be considered. For set up and operation of EDM machines, see Unit 7.14A (Perform
electro-discharge (EDM) machining operations).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with general machining or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 344 of 1445
 MEM 7.6A A Perform lathe operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.6A A Perform lathe operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.6A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed and protective Safety glasses and protective clothing is worn at all times. Safety hazards associated with the use of lathes can be
clothing and safety glasses worn. The relevant safety procedures are followed at all times. identified.

Element 7.6A.2 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings interpreted, sequence of operation determined Drawings and job instructions/specifications are obtained The job requirements can be identified. The sequence of
and tools selected to produce component to in accordance with work site procedures. operations to achieve the job requirements can be
specification. identified. The tool type and geometry to achieve the
required specifications can be identified. The effect on
tool type and geometry for work pieces of different
materials can be given.

Element 7.6A.3 Mount job

Criteria 7.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job set up using instruments such as dial test indicators, Work piece set up in accordance with specifications and The job set up requirements can be identified.
and digital read-out equipment. work site procedures. Where appropriate, dial test Instruments available to assist in the setting up of work
indicators and digital read-out equipment used in pieces and their application can be identified.
accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 345 of 1445
 MEM 7.6A A Perform lathe operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.6A.4 Perform turning operations

Criteria 7.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Speeds and feeds are calculated using appropriate Cutting feeds and speeds appropriate to the job are used. The cutting speeds and feeds appropriate to the job have
mathematical techniques and reference material. been calculated. The consequences of varying speeds
and feeds from the optimum rates calculated can be
given. The effects of different materials on cutting
speeds and feeds can be identified.

Criteria 7.6A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Uses the full range of accessories on a centre lathe Each of the following accessories on a centre lathe are The application of each of the following accessories to
including three and four jaw chucks, centres, face plate, used in accordance with work site procedures: -three jaw lathe operations on a centre lathe can be given: - three
steadies, cross slide and tailstock. chuck - four jaw chuck - centres - face plate - steadies - jaw chuck - four jaw chuck - centres - face plate -
cross slide - tailstock. steadies - cross slide - tailstock.

Criteria 7.6A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Boring, drilling, reaming, single start thread cutting, Each of the following operations is performed on a centre The operations that can be performed on a centre lathe
parting off operations are performed to specification. lathe in accordance with work site procedures and to can be identified. Typical applications for each of the
specification: - boring - drilling - reaming - single start following operations can be given: - boring - drilling -
thread cutting - parting off. reaming - single start thread cutting - parting off.

Element 7.6A.5 Check components for conformance with specifications

Criteria 7.6A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked for conformance to specification Components are checked visually and dimensionally for Appropriate techniques, tools and equipment to measure
using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. conformance to specification in accordance with work site turned components can be identified.
procedures. Appropriate measuring tools, techniques and
equipment are used to check components for conformance
to specification.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 346 of 1445
 MEM 7.6A A Perform lathe operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is performed to established processes, practices and specifications. Work applies to a range of lathes and accessories, precision measuring equipment, cutting tools and
standard engineering materials. Cutting tools are selected using International Standard Organisation (I.S.O.) standards or according to Standard Operating Procedure as appropriate.
Work is performed to drawings, sketches, specifications and instructions as appropriate. Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant drawings, manuals, codes, standards and reference material. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of lathe and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
operations, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 347 of 1445
 MEM 7.7A A Perform milling operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.7A A Perform milling operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.7A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures are observed, protective Safety glasses and protective clothing are worn at all The safety hazards associated with the use of milling
clothing and safety glasses worn. times. The relevant safety procedures are followed at all machines can be identified.
times.

Element 7.7A.2 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings interpreted, sequence of operations determined Drawings and job instructions/ specifications are obtained The job requirements can be identified. The sequence of
and tools selected to produce component to in accordance with work site procedures. operations to achieve the job requirements can be
specification. identified. The cutter type and geometry to achieve the
required specifications can be identified. The effect on
cutter type and geometry for work pieces of different
materials can be given.

Criteria 7.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cutting parameters determined. Cutting feeds and speeds appropriate to the job are used. The cutting feeds and speeds appropriate to the job have
been calculated. The consequences of varying speeds
and feeds from the optimum rates calculated can be
given. The effects of different materials on cutting
speeds and feeds can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 348 of 1445
 MEM 7.7A A Perform milling operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.7A.3 Perform milling operations

Criteria 7.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Milling operations carried out to produce components to The milling operations are carried out in a manner to The specifications of the components to be produced
specification. produce components to specification. can be identified.

Criteria 7.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operations are undertaken using conventional and/or The following cutters are used in conjunction with Conventional and climb milling techniques and their
climb milling techniques and a variety of cutters including conventional and/or climb milling techniques to produce applications can be described. The application of each of
slab, gang, end, shell, slot, form, slitting. components to specification: - slab - gang - shell - slot - the following types of cutter can be given: - slab - gang -
form - slitting. shell - slot - form - slitting.

Criteria 7.7A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The full range of standard accessories are used including Where appropriate, the following accessories are used on The procedures for using dividing heads and rotary
dividing heads and rotary tables as required. a milling machine in accordance with standard operating tables on milling machines can be given. Applications
procedures: - dividing head - rotary table. requiring the use of dividing heads and rotary tables
when milling components can be identified.

Element 7.7A.4 Check components for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.7A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component checked for conformance to specification Components are checked visually and dimensionally for Appropriate techniques, tools and equipment to measure
using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. conformance to specification in accordance with work site milled components can be identified.
procedures. Appropriate measuring tools, techniques and
equipment are used to check components for conformance
to specification.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 349 of 1445
 MEM 7.7A A Perform milling operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is performed to established processes, practices and specifications. Work applies to a range of milling machines including vertical, horizontal and universal types, a range of
precision measuring equipment and standard engineering materials and cutting tools. Cutting tools are selected using International Standard Organisation standards or according to
standard operating procedure as appropriate. Work is performed to drawings or sketches, specifications and instructions as appropriate. Work is carried out autonomously and
employees take responsibility for the quality of their own work.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of milling and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 350 of 1445
 MEM 7.8A B Perform grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.8A B Perform grinding operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.8A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.8A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job requirements determined from specifications and All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
sequence of operations determined. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. sequence of operations to be performed can be
identified. The specifications to be achieved can be
identified.

Criteria 7.8A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate holding devices selected and The work is set up correctly and accurately in accordance A variety of work holding devices/ accessories
applied. with specifications and standard operating procedures. appropriate to grinding tasks can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen work holding
device/accessory can be explained. The tools,
techniques and equipment required to set up the work to
the required accuracy can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the tools, techniques and equipment to be used
to set up the work can be given.

Element 7.8A.2 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.8A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine guards, coolant and dust extraction devices All machine guards, coolant and dust extraction devices All machine guards can be identified. The function of
checked. are checked for correct operation in accordance with coolant and dust extraction devices can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 351 of 1445
 MEM 7.8A B Perform grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.8A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed, protective clothing The correct safety procedures are followed and personal All relevant safety procedures can be identified. All
and safety glasses worn. protective clothing and equipment is worn/used necessary personal protective clothing and equipment
throughout the grinding process. can be identified. The hazards associated with tool and
cutter grinding operations can be identified.

Element 7.8A.3 Select appropriate wheels and accessories

Criteria 7.8A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wheels selected, balanced and dressed based on The grinding wheel selected is safely dressed to form and The standard grinding wheel shapes can be identified. A
knowledge of grinding wheel structure Accessories size required to carry out the grinding task in accordance range of abrasive materials used in grinding wheels can
selected to facilitate production to job specifications. with standard operating procedures. The grinding be identified. The effect of the following grinding wheel
accessories appropriate to the grinding task(s) are selected features on wheel selection and application can be
and correctly used in accordance with standard operating explained: - grain size of abrasive particles - grade or
procedures. strength of bond - bond material. The appropriate
grinding wheel(s) for the given task(s) can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the appropriate grinding wheel
can be given. The procedures for dressing grinding
wheels can be correctly identified. Grinding wheel
dressing tools and their application can be identified.
The appropriate grinding wheel dressing tool(s) for the
given task(s) can be identified. The function and
application of the full range of grinding accessories can
be explained.

Element 7.8A.4 Perform grinding operations

Criteria 7.8A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Grinding machine is set up and adjusted in accordance Grinding media, coolant, machine settings are set up Machine setting procedures can be explained. The
with defined procedures. correctly ready for grinding operation. function of any accessories to be used in conjunction
with the internal/external cylindrical grinding process can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 352 of 1445
 MEM 7.8A B Perform grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.8A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Workpiece is held or clamped appropriately to avoid Appropriate and sufficient clamping/mounting is used to Clamping methods and accessories can be identified and
damage. prevent damage or distortion to the workpiece. the principles of effective clamoing explained.

Criteria 7.8A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Grinding operations are performed safely, utilising all Grinding operations are performed according to the Safety issues and precautions can be explained with
guards, safety procedures and personal protective established machining parameters, safety procedures and regard to adequate guarding and personal protective
clothing and equipment. specifications and standard operating procedures. Correct clothing and equipment. Grinding operations/procedures
coolant/lubricant is used where required. can be explained. The function of any accessories to be
used in conjunction with the grinding process can be
identified.

Element 7.8A.5 Check components for conformance with specifications

Criteria 7.8A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked for conformance to specification The ground components are checked for conformance Tools, techniques and equipment appropriate to the
using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. with specifications in accordance with standard operating checking of ground components for conformance to the
procedures. following specifications can be identified: - dimensions
and tolerances - geometry and tolerances - surface finish.
The tools, techniques and equipment to be used to
check the given ground components for conformance
with specifications can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the tools, techniques and equipment to be used
can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 353 of 1445
 MEM 7.8A B Perform grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is performed to established processes, practices and specifications. Work can apply to one or more of a range of grinding machines including surface, cylindrical and
centreless machines, a range of precision measuring equipment and standard engineering materials and tooling. Work is performed to drawings or sketches, specifications and
instructions as appropriate. Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of grinding and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. To be assessed as competent in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit, the individual must operate at least one or more of the grinding accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
machines identified in Criteria 7.8A.4.1 (Surface grinding carried out to involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
specification as required), Criteria 7.8A.4.2 (Internal and external
grinding carried out to specification as required) or Criteria 7.8A.4.3
(Centreless grinding carried out to specification as required).
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have
been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 354 of 1445
 MEM 7.9A A Perform precision jig boring operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.9A A Perform precision jig boring operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.7A Perform milling operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.9A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed and protective Correct safety procedures are followed and protective The appropriate safety procedures are identified. The
clothing and safety glasses worn. clothing and equipment is worn/used at all times. appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment
can be identified.

Element 7.9A.2 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings interpreted and sequence of operations All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
determined. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. sequence of operations to be followed in carrying out the
work can be identified.

Element 7.9A.3 Select appropriate tools and accessories

Criteria 7.9A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools and accessories selected in accordance with The tools and accessories necessary to perform the
standard operating procedures to meet job specifications. required operations to specification can be identified.
The standard operating procedures applicable to the
work can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 355 of 1445
 MEM 7.9A A Perform precision jig boring operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.9A.4 Mount job

Criteria 7.9A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job set up using instruments such as dial test indicators The work is set up using precision measuring equipment in The precision measuring equipment appropriate to the
and digital read out equipment. accordance with standard operating procedures. work to be mounted can be identified.

Element 7.9A.5 Perform jig boring

Criteria 7.9A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Holes bored relative to coordinate position and to The holes are bored in the correct coordinates and to The coordinates of the holes to be bored can be
specification. specification in accordance with standard operating identified.
procedures.

Criteria 7.9A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Use rotary or tilting rotary table as required. Where appropriate, rotary or tilting rotary tables are used The application of rotary and tilting rotary tables to jig
in accordance with standard operating procedures. boring operations can be given.

Element 7.9A.6 Check components for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.9A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked for conformance to specification The bored components are checked for conformance to A range of precision measuring techniques and their
using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. specification using appropriate techniques, tools and application can be identified. The appropriate measuring
equipment in accordance with standard operating equipment for checking the bored components for
procedures. conformance to specification can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 356 of 1445
 MEM 7.9A A Perform precision jig boring operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is performed to established processes, practices and standards. Work applies to precision jig boring operations using a range of machines including jig boring machines,
milling machines etc. Work is performed to drawings or sketches, specifications and instructions as appropriate. Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of
quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision jig boring or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 357 of 1445
 MEM 7.10A A Perform tool and cutter grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.10A A Perform tool and cutter grinding operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.8A Perform grinding operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.10A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine guards, coolant and dust extraction devices All machine guards, coolant and dust extraction devices All machine guards can be identified. The function of
checked. are checked for correct operation in accordance with coolant and dust extraction devices can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 7.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed, protective clothing The correct safety procedures are followed and personal All relevant safety procedures can be identified. All
and safety glasses worn. protective clothing and equipment is worn/ used necessary personal protective clothing and equipment
throughout the grinding process. can be identified. The hazards associated with tool and
cutter grinding operations can be identified.

Element 7.10A.2 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.10A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings interpreted and sequence of operations All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
determined. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. sequence of operations to be performed can be
identified. The specifications to be achieved can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 358 of 1445
 MEM 7.10A A Perform tool and cutter grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.10A.3 Select appropriate tool and cutter grinding wheels and accessories
Criteria 7.10A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tool and cutter grinding wheels selected, based on Tool and cutter grinding accessories appropriate to the The standard grinding wheel shapes can be identified. A
knowledge of grinding wheel structure, balanced and grinding task(s) are selected and correctly used in range of abrasive materials used in grinding wheels can
dressed. Accessories selected to facilitate production to accordance with standard operating procedures. The be identified. The effect of the following grinding wheel
specification. grinding wheel selected is safely balanced and correctly features on wheel selection and application can be
dressed for the grinding task(s) to be performed in explained: - grain size of abrasive particles - grade or
accordance with standard operating procedures. strength of bond - structure of grain spacing - bond
material. The appropriate grinding wheel(s) for the given
task(s) can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
appropriate grinding wheel can be given. The function
and application of the full range of tool and cutter
grinding accessories can be explained. Grinding wheel
dressing procedures can be correctly identified. Grinding
wheel dressing tools and their application can be
identified. The appropriate grinding wheel dressing
tool(s) for the given task(s) can be identified.

Element 7.10A.4 Perform tool and cutter grinding

Criteria 7.10A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Universal tool and cutter grinding machines operated to The universal tool and cutter grinder is used to correctly The source(s) of data on tool geometry for the full range
sharpen and shape the full range of tools and cutters sharpen and shape a range of tools and cutters in of tools and cutters can be identified. The nomenclature
including side and face cutters, end mill, form relieved accordance with standard operating procedures. used to describe tool geometry can be explained. The
milling cutters, flat, vee and circular form tools and hobs, correct tool geometry for the tools/cutters to be
slitting saws, drills and reamers. sharpened and shaped can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 359 of 1445
 MEM 7.10A A Perform tool and cutter grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.10A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parallel internal and/or external grinding carried out. The appropriate accessories are correctly set up in The accessories to be used when parallel grinding on a
accordance with standard operating procedures to enable tool and cutter grinder can be identified. The procedures
parallel internal and/or external grinding to be carried out. to be followed when parallel grinding on a tool and cutter
The parallel grinding task is completed in conformance grinder can be explained.
with specifications and standard operating procedures.

Criteria 7.10A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Internal and/or external taper grinding carried out to The appropriate accessories are correctly set up in The accessories to be used when grinding tapers on a
drawing specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures to enable tool and cutter grinder can be identified. The procedures
internal and/or external taper grinding to be carried out. to be followed when grinding tapers on a tool and cutter
The taper grinding task is completed in conformance with grinder can be explained.
specifications and standard operating procedures.

Element 7.10A.5 Check components for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.10A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked for conformance to specification The ground components are checked for conformance Tools, techniques and equipment appropriate to the
using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. with specifications in accordance with standard operating checking of ground components for conformance with
procedures. the following specifications can be identified: -
dimensions and tolerances - geometry and tolerances -
surface finish. The tools, techniques and equipment to
be used to check the given ground components for
conformance with specifications can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the tools, techniques and
equipment to be used can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 360 of 1445
 MEM 7.10A A Perform tool and cutter grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers a range of tool and cutter grinding machines and accessories. A range of precision measuring instruments are used. Work is performed to established processes,
practices and standards. A range of precision measuring instruments and standard engineering materials are used. Work is performed to drawings or sketches, specifications and
instructions as appropriate. General off hand grinding is covered by Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations). Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined
standards of quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with tool and cutter grinding or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 361 of 1445
 MEM 7.11A A Complex milling operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.11A A Complex milling operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 7.5A Perform general machining 7.7A Perform milling operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.11A.1 Set up work

Criteria 7.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work is set up to required level of accuracy using The work is set up to the required level of accuracy using The precision measuring equipment appropriate to the
instruments such as dial test indicators and sine bars. appropriate precision measuring equipment in accordance accuracy required in setting up the work can be
with standard operating procedures. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
measuring equipment can be given. The procedures for
accurately setting up the work can be given.

Element 7.11A.2 Identify inserts from International Standard Organisation standards

Criteria 7.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct tool is selected using International Standard The correct milling cutter inserts are selected for the The ISO standards applicable to milling cutter inserts can
Organisation standards to suit cutting parameters. cutting parameters in accordance with ISO standards. be identified. The cutting parameters for the work to be
undertaken can be determined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 362 of 1445
 MEM 7.11A A Complex milling operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.11A.3 Perform complex milling

Criteria 7.11A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Racks and gears are cut and associated calculations The relevant rack and gear calculations are correctly The procedures for cutting racks and gears can be given.
performed. completed. Racks and gears are cut to specification in The calculations to be performed to enable racks and
accordance with standard operating procedures. gears to be cut on a milling machine can be identified.
Any accessories to be used in the manufacture of racks
and gears and their function can be given.

Criteria 7.11A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Helical milling operations are performed, associated The relevant gear trains are correctly set up in accordance The procedures for carrying out helical milling operations
calculations are performed and relevant gear trains set up. with calculations and standard operating procedures. can be given. The calculations to be performed to enable
Helical milling is performed to specification in accordance the helical milling operation to be undertaken can be
with standard operating procedures. identified. Any accessories to be used in the helical
milling process and their function can be given.

Criteria 7.11A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Precision complex milling operations are performed using Where appropriate, the relevant calculations to enable The application of omniversal tables and differential
omniversal tables, differential dividing heads and the like complex milling using omniversal tables and differential dividing heads to complex milling operations can be
as required. dividing heads are completed correctly. Where identified. The calculations to be performed to enable
appropriate, complex milling using omniversal tables and complex milling involving omniversal tables and
differential dividing heads is performed to specification in differential dividing heads can be identified. Any other
accordance with standard operating procedures. accessories to be used in conjunction with the complex
milling operations to be performed and their function can
be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 363 of 1445
 MEM 7.11A A Complex milling operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to a range of milling operations including those requiring complex calculations and jobs requiring high precision or quality using a range of materials including
non-standard metals and alloy. Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of milling and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 364 of 1445
 MEM 7.12A A Complex grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.12A A Complex grinding operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.8A Perform grinding operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.12A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.12A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job requirements are determined from specifications and All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
sequence of operations determined. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. sequence of operations to be performed can be
identified. The specifications to be achieved can be
identified.

Element 7.12A.2 Set up work

Criteria 7.12A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Grinding wheels are selected and dressed to form and The grinding wheel selected is safely dressed to form and The standard grinding wheel shapes can be identified. A
size as required. size required to carry out the grinding task in accordance range of abrasive materials used in grinding wheels can
with standard operating procedures. be identified. The effect of the following grinding wheel
features on wheel selection and application can be
explained: - grain size of abrasive particles - grade or
strength of bond - structure of grain spacing - bond
material. The appropriate grinding wheel(s) for the given
task(s) can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
appropriate grinding wheel can be given. The procedures
for dressing grinding wheels can be correctly identified.
Grinding wheel dressing tools and their application can
be identified. The appropriate grinding wheel dressing
tool(s) for the given task(s) can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 365 of 1445
 MEM 7.12A A Complex grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.12A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work set up to required level of accuracy as per The work is set up correctly and accurately in accordance A variety of work holding devices/accessories
specifications. with specifications and standard operating procedures. appropriate to grinding tasks can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen work holding
device/accessory can be explained. The tools,
techniques and equipment required to set up the work to
the required accuracy can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the tools, techniques and equipment to be used
to set up the work can be given.

Element 7.12A.3 Perform complex grinding

Criteria 7.12A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specialised grinding operations performed on The specialised grinding task is completed in conformance The procedures to be followed when carrying out the
components such as jigs, tools and dies, eccentrics, with specifications and standard operating procedures. given specialised grinding task can be identified. The
threads, gauge shapes and forms. purpose of any accessories to be used while carrying out
the specialised grinding process can be explained. The
reasons for using accessories or specialised functions of
the grinder can be given.

Element 7.12A.4 Check components for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.12A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked for conformance to specification The ground components are checked for conformance Tools, techniques and equipment appropriate to the
using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. with specifications in accordance with standard operating checking of ground components for conformance with
procedures. the following specifications can be identified: -
dimensions and tolerances - geometry and tolerances -
surface finish. The tools, techniques and equipment to
be used to check the given ground components for
conformance with specifications can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the tools, techniques and
equipment to be used can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 366 of 1445
 MEM 7.12A A Complex grinding operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit may be applied to high precision operations such as jig grinding, grinding eccentrics, thread grinding, gauges, shapes and forms etc. Work includes the use of a range of
precision measuring instruments. Grinding operations can be performed on a variety of materials to achieve high levels of precision for dimensions and finish. Work is carried out
autonomously to predetermined standards of quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with complex grinding operations and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 367 of 1445
 MEM 7.13A A Perform machining operations using horizontal and/or vertical boring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.13A A Perform machining operations using horizontal and/or vertical boring machine
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.13A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed and protective Safety glasses and protective clothing is worn at all times. Safety hazards associated with the use of horizontal and
clothing and safety glasses worn. The relevant safety procedures are followed at all times. vertical boring machines can be identified.

Element 7.13A.2 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings interpreted, sequence of operations determined All relevant drawings, job instructions and specifications The job requirements can be identified. The sequence of
and tools selected to produce component to are obtained in accordance with work place procedures. operations to achieve the job requirements can be
specification using International Standard Organisation identified. The tool type and geometry to achieve the
or standard operating procedures. required specifications can be identified. The effect on
tool type and geometry for work pieces of different
materials can be given.

Criteria 7.13A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cutting parameters determined. Cutting feeds and speeds appropriate to the job are used. The cutting speeds and feeds appropriate to the job have
been calculated. The consequences of varying speeds
and feeds from the optimum rates calculated can be
given. The effects of different materials on cutting
speeds and feeds can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 368 of 1445
 MEM 7.13A A Perform machining operations using horizontal and/or vertical boring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.13A.3 Perform boring operations

Criteria 7.13A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Horizontal and vertical boring operations are carried out Horizontal and/or vertical boring operations are carried out The procedures and techniques for carrying out the
including parallel line and taper boring, facing, turning, to specification in accordance with standard operating following horizontal and vertical boring operations can
drilling and reaming to drawing specifications. procedures for each of the following applications: - parallel be given: - parallel boring - taper boring - facing - turning
boring - taper boring - facing - turning - drilling - reaming. - drilling - reaming. The accessories necessary to carry
out the above operations and their function can be
identified.

Element 7.13A.4 Check component for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.13A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked for conformance to specification The bored components are checked for conformance to The appropriate tools, techniques and equipment to
using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. specification using appropriate tools, techniques and measure the bored components can be identified. The
equipment in accordance with standard operating procedures for measuring bored components can be
procedures. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 369 of 1445
 MEM 7.13A A Perform machining operations using horizontal and/or vertical boring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is performed to established processes, practices and standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Work is performed to drawings or sketches, specifications and
instructions as appropriate. Work applies to a range of boring operations, using precision measuring instruments and standard engineering materials and cutting tools. Work is
carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of horizontal and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and vertical boring operations or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 370 of 1445
 MEM 7.14A A Perform electro-discharge machining operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.14A A Perform electro-discharge machining operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.14A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.14A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed, protective clothing Safety glasses and protective clothing are worn at all Safety hazards associated with the use of
and safety glasses worn. times. The relevant safety procedures are followed at all electro-discharge machines can be identified.
times.

Element 7.14A.2 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.14A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings interpreted, sequence of operations All relevant drawings, job instructions and specifications The job requirements can be identified. The sequence of
determined. are obtained in accordance with work place procedures. operations to achieve the job requirements can be
identified.

Criteria 7.14A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct electrode selected to ensure finished component The correct electrode is used to ensure that the finished The electrode type and geometry required to achieve the
conforms to drawing specifications. product conforms to specification. specified outcome can be identified. The effects of
material to be machined on the electrode material and
geometry can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 371 of 1445
 MEM 7.14A A Perform electro-discharge machining operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.14A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrode surface area calculated and process parameters The procedures for producing electrodes for the
set to give safe, accurate and efficient operation. electro-discharge machining process can be given. The
surface area of the electrode is calculated. The machining
parameters necessary to achieve the safe, accurate and
efficient machining of the work piece are
calculated/determined.

Element 7.14A.3 Set up job

Criteria 7.14A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job set up relative to electrode to ensure required The work piece and electrode are appropriately positioned The coordinates of the work pieces relative to the
position is obtained. to enable the safe, accurate and efficient machining of the machine datum are determined. The coordinates of the
required feature(s). feature(s) to be machined can be identified. The
coordinates of the electrode relative to the machine
datum can be identified.

Element 7.14A.4 Perform electro-discharge (EDM)

Criteria 7.14A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electro-discharge machine operated to produce Components are produced to specification using the The procedures for operating the electro-discharge
components to drawing specifications. electro-discharge machining process in accordance with machine to produce components can be given.
standard operating procedures.

Element 7.14A.5 Check components for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.14A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are checked for conformance to The machined components are checked for conformance The tools, techniques and equipment appropriate to the
specification using appropriate techniques, tools and with specifications in accordance with standard operating checking of machined components can be identified. The
equipment. procedures. procedures for checking machined components for
conformance to specification can be given. The reasons
for selecting the tools, techniques and equipment to be
used can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 372 of 1445
 MEM 7.14A A Perform electro-discharge machining operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the skills required to use an electro-discharge machine (EDM). Work is performed to established processes, practices and standards of quality, safety and
workshop procedures. Work applies to a range of electro-discharge machining (EDM) operations and engineering materials. Work is performed to drawings and sketches,
specifications and instructions as appropriate. For electrode manufacture other appropriate machining units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
electro-discharge machining operations or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 373 of 1445
MEM 7.15A A Set NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.15A A Set NC/CNC machine/process (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required to mount work holding fixtures/devices/tools, conduct pre-start checks, set NC/CNC machine, instruct the operator and
replace worn or damaged tooling. The unit applies to the setting of any NC/CNC machines.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic)
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic)
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.15A.1 Obtain job instructions

Criteria 7.15A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets or equivalent instructions understood and Job sheets and/or instructions are obtained in accordance The work to be undertaken can be identified
correctly followed with work place procedures

Element 7.15A.2 Mount work holding fixtures/devices/tools

Criteria 7.15A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine prepared to accept work holding The machine is prepared for the installation/mounting of The work holding fixtures/devices/ tools appropriate to
fixtures/devices/tools appropriate work holding fixtures/devices/tools as the NC/CNC machine/process can be identified The
required in accordance with standard operating correct work holding fixtures/ devices/tools for the
given task(s) can be identified The reasons for selecting
the work holding fixtures/devices/tools chosen can be
given The procedures for mounting work holding
fixtures/devices/tools can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 374 of 1445
MEM 7.15A A Set NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.15A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-set tooling is mounted as required into Appropriate pre-set tooling is mounted in the machine The pre-set tooling available for use in conjunction
machine/equipment in accordance with standard operating procedures with the given NC/CNC machine/process can be
identified The correct pre-set tooling for the given
task(s) can be identified The reasons for selecting the
pre-set tooling chosen can be given The procedures for
mounting pre-set tooling can be identified

Criteria 7.15A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work holding fixtures/devices are set on machine as Appropriate work holding fixtures/ devices/tools are The location of the required work holding
required using standard operating procedures located and mounted on the machine as required in fixtures/devices/tools relative to the machine datum or
accordance with specifications and standard operating zero can be correctly identified
procedures
Criteria 7.15A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tool offset or datum settings are identified/verified Tool offsets and/or datum settings are verified against The reasons for establishing tool offsets can be
against job sheet using standard operating procedures job sheets or instructions in accordance with standard explained The purpose of datum settings can be
operating procedures explained The tool offsets and/or datum settings for the
given task(s) can be correctly identified The source(s)
of information on tool offsets and datum settings can
be identified

Criteria 7.15A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
NC/CNC program loaded, selected and verified in The NC/CNC program is loaded in accordance with The NC/CNC program appropriate to the given task(s)
accordance with job instructions standard operating procedures The NC/CNC program is identified The source(s) of NC/CNC programs can be
loaded is verified in accordance with standard operating identified The procedures for loading NC/CNC
procedures programs can be identified The procedures for verifying
loaded NC/CNC programs can be identified

Element 7.15A.3 Conduct pre-start checks

Criteria 7.15A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating All pre-start checks are undertaken safely in accordance The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified
procedure with standard operating procedures
Criteria 7.15A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures are observed and all safety Correct safety procedures are followed at all times All The safety features and equipment of the NC/CNC
equipment checked for correct operation safety features and equipment are checked for correct machine/process can be identified The purpose and
operation in accordance with standard operating function of the safety features and/or equipment can be
procedures explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 375 of 1445
MEM 7.15A A Set NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.15A.4 Set NC/CNC (numerical control/computer numerical control) machine
Criteria 7.15A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine set/adjusted to meet operational requirements The NC/CNC machine/process is set in accordance with The machine/process setting procedures can be
and specifications specifications and standard operating procedures Where identified The relevant machine and operational
appropriate the NC/CNC machine/process is adjusted to specifications can be identified The adjustments that
meet specifications and operational requirements in can be made to the machine/process can be identified
accordance with standard operating procedures The effect of adjustments on machine and operational
specifications can be explained

Criteria 7.15A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production samples checked for compliance with The first-off samples are measured for compliance with The specifications of the parts or product to be
specifications using standard operating procedures specifications in accordance with standard operating produced can be identified The appropriate measuring
procedures devices for use in checking the parts or product can be
identified

Element 7.15A.5 Instruct machine operator

Criteria 7.15A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operator instructed if necessary ensuring that all safety Where appropriate, the machine operator is instructed The sequence of operations of the NC/CNC
procedures and devices are in place on the sequence of operations, any required safety machine/process can be identified All safety features,
procedures and the standard operating procedures to be devices and equipment associated with the NC/CNC
observed All safety procedures and devices are in place machine/process and their function can be identified
and operational The standard operating procedures applicable to the
machine/process can be identified

Element 7.15A.6 Replace worn/damaged tooling

Criteria 7.15A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, preset tools are replaced, tool Where appropriate, worn or damaged tooling is identified Common examples of worn or damaged tooling can be
offsets adjusted or other corrective action taken using and appropriate corrective action taken in accordance identified The effect of worn or damaged tooling on the
standard operating procedures with standard operating procedures part or product to be produced can be explained The
corrective action to be taken when worn or damaged
tools are detected can be identified The procedures for
adjusting tool offsets can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 376 of 1445
MEM 7.15A A Set NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work applies to setting any NC/CNC (numerical control/computer numerical control) machines. Work is performed to established processes, practices and specifications and
instructions as appropriate. Technical difficulties are resolved in consultation with appropriate technical advisers. Work is carried out autonomously using predetermined
standards of quality and safety. For setting non-NC/CNC machines or processes, refer to Unit 7.3A (Setting machines (routine)).

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the setting of NC/CNC and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
machines and/or processes or other units requiring the exercise of - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 377 of 1445
MEM 7.16A B Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.16A B Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to mount work holding fixtures/devices/tools, set tooling offsets, trial the NC/CNC program, instruct the operator and
replace
worn or damaged tooling. The unit applies to any NC/CNC machine or process. Editing applies to identifying and accessing NC/CNC programs in edit mode in order
to
make changes associated with speeds, feed and operational sequence.
Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process
7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic)
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.8A Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and
shaping
5.9A Automated thermal cutting 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.16A.1 Identify job requirements

Criteria 7.16A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions/plans understood and correctly followed Job sheets and/or instructions are obtained in accordance The work to be undertaken can be identified The
with work place procedures specifications to be achieved can be identified

Element 7.16A.2 Set work holding fixtures/devices/tools

Criteria 7.16A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct ancillary devices selected and attached to Where appropriate, the correct ancillary devices are The ancillary equipment available for use in conjunction
machine using standard operating procedures attached to the NC/CNC machine in accordance with with the NC/CNC machine/process can be identified The
standard operating procedures correct ancillary equipment is selected for the task(s) to be
performed The reasons for selecting the chosen equipment
can be explained The procedures for attaching the ancillary
device(s) to the NC/CNC machine can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 378 of 1445
MEM 7.16A B Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.16A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine prepared to accept work holding devices The machine is prepared for the installation/mounting of The work holding devices appropriate to the NC/CNC
appropriate work holding devices as required in accordance machine/process can be identified The correct work holding
with standard operating procedures devices for the given task(s) can be identified The reasons
for selecting the work holding device(s) chosen can be given
The procedures for mounting work holding devices can be
identified
Criteria 7.16A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work holding fixtures/devices/tools are set to zero or a Appropriate work holding devices are located and mounted The location of the required work holding
datum using appropriate setting devices on the machine as required in accordance with specifications fixtures/devices/tools relative to the machine zero or datum
and standard operating procedures can be correctly identified
Element 7.16A.3 Set tooling offsets
Criteria 7.16A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling offsets are measured and recorded in machine Tool offsets are accurately measured in accordance with The reasons for establishing tool offsets can be explained
controller standard operating procedures Tool offsets entered into the The procedures for measuring tool offsets can be given The
NC/CNC machine/process controller are verified in procedures for entering and verifying tool offsets in the
accordance with standard operating procedures NC/CNC machine/process controller can be given The
measuring techniques/equipment to be used to determine
tool offsets can be identified
Element 7.16A.4 Trial NC/CNC program
Criteria 7.16A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operated to produce first-off samples observing First-off samples are produced safely in accordance with The operating procedures applicable to the NC/CNC
all safety procedures standard operating procedures machine/process can be identified All safety features and
equipment associated with the NC/CNC machine/process
and its function can be identified
Criteria 7.16A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
First-off samples checked for compliance with First-off samples are measured and checked for compliance The specifications of the parts or products to be produced
specifications with specifications in accordance with standard operating can be identified The appropriate measuring devices/
procedures techniques for use in checking the parts or product can be
identified
Criteria 7.16A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program editing to change speeds, feed and operational Where appropriate, the NC/CNC program is edited via the The effects of changes to cutting feeds and speeds on the
sequence requirements undertaken as required to ensure machine/ process controller to ensure the part or product part or product to be produced can be explained The impact
job conforms to specification conforms to specification of changes to the sequence of operations on the part or
product to be produced can be explained The procedures for
editing NC/CNC programs via the machine controller can
be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 379 of 1445
MEM 7.16A B Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.16A.5 Instruct machine operator
Criteria 7.16A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operator instructed if necessary ensuring that all safety Where appropriate, the machine operator is instructed on The sequence of operations of the NC/CNC
procedures and devices are in place the sequence of operations, any required safety procedures machine/process can be identified All safety features,
and the standard operating procedures to be observed All devices and equipment associated with the NC/CNC
safety procedures and devices are in place and operational machine/process and their function can be identified The
standard operating procedures applicable to the
Element 7.16A.6 Replace worn or damaged tooling
Criteria 7.16A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, tools are replaced, tool offsets Where appropriate, worn or damaged tooling is identified Common examples of worn or damaged tooling can be
adjusted or other corrective action taken using standard and appropriate corrective action taken in accordance with identified The effect of worn or damaged tooling on the
operating procedures standard operating procedures part or product to be produced can be explained The
corrective action to be taken when worn or damaged tools
are detected can be identified The procedures for adjusting
tool offsets can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 380 of 1445
MEM 7.16A B Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is performed to established processes, practices and specifications. Work applies to any NC/CNC machine, machining process or operation. Machine operations may include
welding, thermal cutting, metal cutting, forming and shaping etc. All work and work practices are performed to instructions, plans and specifications as appropriate. Technical
difficulties are resolved in consultation with appropriate technical advisers. Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of quality and safety. Editing applies to
identifying and accessing NC/CNC programs in edit mode in order to make changes associated with speeds, feed and operational sequence. Changes are generally made in situ.
Where additional machining skills in excess of Unit 7.5A (Perform general machining) are required then appropriate units should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the setting and editing of NC/CNC machines and/or processes or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 381 of 1445
MEM 7.18A B Basic NC/CNC programming Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.18A B Basic NC/CNC programming

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to identify basic NC/CNC machine program elements, write a basic NC/CNC machine program and operation sheet and
trial
the program. This unit extends to writing a basic program to describe simple machine operations including tool paths using appropriate software for machines which
may
incorporate single spindles, single tools turrets, B axis angular, tool changers, component loaders of a pallet type but excludes multiple spindles.
Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic)
7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.8A Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and
shaping
5.9A Automated thermal cutting 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.18A.1 Identify basic NC/CNC machine program elements

Criteria 7.18A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate program elements are selected for machine The elements of a basic NC/CNC program can be identified
controller The function of those elements in controlling the
operation of an NC/ CNC machine can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 382 of 1445
MEM 7.18A B Basic NC/CNC programming Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.18A.2 Write basic NC/CNC machine program
Criteria 7.18A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering drawings understood and interpreted to All relevant engineering drawings, specifications and The machining operations to be performed in the
define basic machine function and tool path geometry instructions are obtained in accordance with work place manufacture of the given part or product can be identified
procedures The appropriate type(s) of NC/CNC machine to perform
the required machining operations can be identified The
machining operations to be controlled by the program to be
written can be identified The tool path(s) to be followed
when producing the part or product can be identified The
sequence of machining operations to be programmed can be
identified The reasons for selecting the chosen tool path(s)
and sequence of operations can be explained
Criteria 7.18A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coordinates calculated for simple tool path or basic The coordinates of all relevant points on the part or product The zero point of the NC/CNC machine can be identified
machining functions to be produced are calculated accurately

Criteria 7.18A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program written in standard code format in accordance An appropriate NC/CNC program is written in standard code The standard codes used in the writing of NC/CNC programs
with standard operating procedures format in accordance with standard operating procedures can be identified The applications of standard codes in
NC/CNC programming can be explained The procedures for
writing NC/CNC programs in standard code format can be
given
Element 7.18A.3 Write NC/CNC operation sheet
Criteria 7.18A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation sheets produced to specification in All relevant information is included in the NC/CNC The procedures for completing NC/CNC operation sheets
accordance with standard operating procedures operation sheet(s) The NC/CNC operation sheet(s) are can be given The information to be included in NC/CNC
produced in accordance with specifications and standard operation sheets can be identified
operating procedures
Element 7.18A.4 Trial program
Criteria 7.18A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operated in manual mode to test and prove The NC/CNC machine is operated safely in manual mode in The procedures for manual operation of the NC/CNC
program as required accordance with standard operating procedures machine can be identified The reasons for testing and
proving the NC/CNC program can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 383 of 1445
MEM 7.18A B Basic NC/CNC programming Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.18A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program is edited if necessary to adjust operation as Where appropriate the NC/CNC program is edited in The procedures for editing the NC/CNC program via the
required accordance with standard operating procedures machine controller can be given The effects of editing on
the operation of the NC/CNC machine and the part or
product to be produced can be explained
Criteria 7.18A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are checked for conformance to The parts or products produced are checked for The specifications of the part or product can be identified
specification as required conformance with specifications in accordance with standard The measuring equipment/techniques to be used to check
operating procedures for conformance to specification can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 384 of 1445
MEM 7.18A B Basic NC/CNC programming Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Extends to writing a basic program to describe simple machine operations, including tool paths using appropriate software, machine operations may include welding, thermal
cutting, metal cutting, forming and shaping etc. Machines may incorporate single spindles, single tool turrets, B axis angular, tool changers, component loaders of a pallet type
etc., but excludes multiple spindles. Programs are trialed and edited as necessary to adjust operation of machine. Technical difficulties are resolved in consultation with appropriate
technical advisers. Work would be undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality. The program may use common M and G codes but does not include the
programming of advanced operations, using canned cycles and sub-routines. For this level of programming, see Unit 7.19A (Program NC/CNC machining centre). Where
additional machining skills in excess of Unit 7.5A (Perform general machining) are required then appropriate units should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with basic NC/CNC programming and/or other units requiring the and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 385 of 1445
MEM 7.19A B Program NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.19A B Program NC/CNC machining centre

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required to identify basic NC/CNC machine program elements, write a basic NC/CNC machine program and operation sheet and
trial
the program. This unit extends to writing a basic program to describe machine operations including tool paths using appropriate software for machines which may
incorporate single spindles, single tools turrets, B axis angular, tool changers, component loaders of a pallet types but excludes multiple spindle and multiple axis.

Note - Where machining skills in excess of Unit 7.5A (Perform general machining) are required then appropriate units should also be selected This unit has dual
status
and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic)
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic)
7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process 7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.8A Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and
shaping
5.9A Automated thermal cutting 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process 7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.19A.1 Identify basic NC/CNC machine program elements

Criteria 7.19A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate program elements are selected for machine The elements of an NC/CNC program can be identified The
controller function of those elements in controlling the operation of
an NC/ CNC machine can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 386 of 1445
MEM 7.19A B Program NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.19A.2 Write basic NC/CNC machine program
Criteria 7.19A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering drawings understood and interpreted to All relevant engineering drawings, specifications and The machining operations to be performed in the
define machine function and tool path geometry instructions are obtained in accordance with work place manufacture of the given part or product can be identified
procedures The appropriate type(s) of NC/CNC machine to perform
the required machining operations can be identified The
machining operations to be controlled by the program to be
written can be identified The tool path(s) to be followed
when producing the part or product can be identified The
sequence of machining operations to be programmed can be
identified The reasons for selecting the chosen tool path(s)
and sequence of operations can be explained
Criteria 7.19A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coordinates calculated as required for tool path or The coordinates of all relevant points on the part or product The zero point of the NC/CNC machine can be identified
machine functions to be produced are calculated accurately

Criteria 7.19A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Advanced operations using canned cycles and The canned cycles and sub-routines accessible in the
sub-routines are selected and applied appropriately particular NC/CNC machine can be identified The
application of each canned cycle and sub-routine available
can be given Where appropriate the canned cycles and/or
sub-routines to be used in the NC/CNC program can be
identified The reasons for selecting the chosen canned
cycles and/or sub-routines can be explained
Criteria 7.19A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program written in standard code format in accordance An appropriate NC/CNC program is written in standard code The standard codes used in the writing of NC/CNC programs
with standard operating procedures format and incorporating, where appropriate, canned cycles can be identified The applications of standard codes in
and sub-routines NC/CNC programming can be explained The procedures for
writing NC/CNC programs in standard code format can be
given
Element 7.19A.3 Write NC/CNC operation sheet
Criteria 7.19A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation sheets produced to specification in All relevant information is included in the NC/CNC The procedures for completing NC/CNC operation sheets
accordance with standard operating procedure which operation sheet(s) The NC/CNC operation sheet(s) are can be given The information to be included in NC/CNC
includes appropriate Australian Standard where required produced in accordance with specifications and standard operation sheets can be identified Where appropriate,
operating procedures relevant Australian Standards can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 387 of 1445
MEM 7.19A B Program NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.19A.4 Trial program
Criteria 7.19A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operated in manual mode to test and prove The NC/CNC machine is operated safely in manual mode in The procedures for manual operation of the NC/CNC
program accordance with standard operating procedures machine can be identified The reasons for testing and
proving the NC/CNC program can be explained
Criteria 7.19A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program is edited if necessary to adjust operation Where appropriate the NC/CNC program is edited in The procedures for editing the NC/CNC program via the
accordance with standard operating procedures machine controller can be given The effects of editing on
the operation of the NC/CNC machine and the part or
product to be produced can be explained
Criteria 7.19A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are checked to conform to specification The parts or products produced are checked for The specifications of the part or product can be identified
conformance with specifications in accordance with standard The measuring equipment/techniques to be used to check
operating procedures for conformance with specifications can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 388 of 1445
MEM 7.19A B Program NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Extends to writing programs to describe machine operations including tool paths using appropriate software for machines which may incorporate single spindles, single tool
turrets, tool changers, B axis angular, component loaders of the pallet type etc., but excludes multiple spindles and multiple axis. The program may use common M and G codes
and includes the programming of advanced operations, using canned cycles and sub-routines. Programs are trialed and edited as necessary to adjust operation of centre. Technical
difficulties are resolved in consultation with appropriate technical advisers. Work would be undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the programming of NC/CNC machining centres or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 389 of 1445
MEM 7.20A B Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.20A B Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis NC/CNC machining centre
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required to identify basic NC/CNC machine program elements, write a basic NC/CNC machine program and operation sheet and
trial
the program. This unit extends to writing a basic program to describe machine operations including tool paths using appropriate software for machines which may
incorporate multiple spindles, multiple axis/B axis angular, multiple tool turrets, tool changers, component loaders of a pallet types but excludes multiple spindles and
multiple axis.
Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 7.19A Program NC/CNC machining centre 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process
7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic)
7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process 7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 7.19A Program NC/CNC machining centre
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.8A Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and
shaping
5.9A Automated thermal cutting 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process 7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming
7.19A Program NC/CNC machining centre 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.20A.1 Identify basic NC/CNC machine program elements

Criteria 7.20A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate program elements are selected for machine The elements of an NC/CNC program can be identified The
controller function of those elements in controlling the operation of
an NC/ CNC machine can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 390 of 1445
MEM 7.20A B Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.20A.2 Write basic NC/CNC machine program
Criteria 7.20A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering drawings understood and interpreted to All relevant engineering drawings, specifications and The machining operations to be performed in the
define machine function and tool path geometry instructions are obtained in accordance with work place manufacture of the given part or product can be identified
procedures The appropriate type(s) of NC/CNC machine to perform
the required machining operations can be identified The
machining operations to be controlled by the program to be
written can be identified The tool path(s) to be followed
when producing the part or product can be identified The
sequence of machining operations to be programmed can be
identified The reasons for selecting the chosen tool path(s)
and sequence of operations can be explained
Criteria 7.20A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coordinates calculated as required for tool path or The coordinates of all relevant points on the part or product The zero point of the NC/CNC machine can be identified
machine functions to be produced are calculated accurately

Criteria 7.20A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Advanced operations using canned cycles and The canned cycles and sub-routines accessible in the
sub-routines are selected and applied appropriately particular NC/CNC machine can be identified The
application of each canned cycle and sub-routine available
can be given Where appropriate the canned cycles and/or
sub-routines to be used in the NC/CNC program can be
identified The reasons for selecting the chosen canned
cycles and/or sub-routines can be explained
Criteria 7.20A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program written in standard code format in accordance An appropriate NC/CNC program is written in standard code The standard codes used in the writing of NC/CNC programs
with standard operating procedures format and incorporating, where appropriate, canned cycles can be identified The applications of standard codes in
and sub-routines NC/CNC programming can be explained The procedures for
writing NC/CNC programs in standard code format can be
given
Element 7.20A.3 Write NC/CNC operation sheet
Criteria 7.20A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation sheets produced to specification in All relevant information is included in the NC/CNC The procedures for completing NC/CNC operation sheets
accordance with standard operating procedure which operation sheet(s) The NC/CNC operation sheet(s) are can be given The information to be included in NC/CNC
includes appropriate Australian Standard where required produced in accordance with specifications and standard operation sheets can be identified Where appropriate,
operating procedures relevant Australian Standards can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 391 of 1445
MEM 7.20A B Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.20A.4 Trial program
Criteria 7.20A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operated in manual mode to test and prove The NC/CNC machine is operated safely in manual mode in The procedures for manual operation of the NC/CNC
program accordance with standard operating procedures machine can be identified The reasons for testing and
proving the NC/CNC program can be explained
Criteria 7.20A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program is edited if necessary to adjust operation Where appropriate the NC/CNC program is edited in The procedures for editing the NC/CNC program via the
accordance with standard operating procedures machine controller can be given The effects of editing on
the operation of the NC/CNC machine and the part or
product to be produced can be explained
Criteria 7.20A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are checked to conform to specification The parts or products produced are checked for The specifications of the part or product can be identified
conformance with specifications in accordance with standard The measuring equipment/techniques to be used to check
operating procedures for conformance with specifications can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 392 of 1445
MEM 7.20A B Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis NC/CNC machining centre Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Extends to writing programs to describe machine operations including tool paths using appropriate software for machines which include multiple spindles and/or multiple axis/B
axis angular, multiple tool turrets, tool changers and may include component loaders of a pallet type etc. The program may use common M and G codes and includes the
programming of advanced operations, using canned cycles and sub-routines. Programs are trialed and edited as necessary to adjust operation of centre. Technical difficulties are
resolved in consultation with appropriate technical advisers. Work would be undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality. Where machining skills in excess
of 7.5A (Perform general machining) are required then appropriate units should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the programming of multiple spindle, multiple axis NC/CNC and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
machining centres or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 393 of 1445
 MEM 7.21A A Perform complex lathe operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.21A A Perform complex lathe operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 7.5A Perform general machining 7.6A Perform lathe operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.21A.1 Accurately set up work

Criteria 7.21A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work is set up to required level of accuracy using The work is set up to the required level of accuracy using The precision measuring equipment appropriate to the
precision instruments such as dial test indicators etc. appropriate precision measuring equipment in accordance accuracy required in setting up the work can be
with standard operating procedures. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
measuring equipment can be given. The procedures for
accurately setting up the work can be given.

Element 7.21A.2 Identify inserts from International Standard Organisation or other appropriate standards
Criteria 7.21A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct tool is selected using International Standard The correct cutting tool inserts are selected for the cutting The ISO standards applicable to cutting tool inserts can
Organisation standards or other appropriate standards to parameters in accordance with ISO standards. be identified. The cutting parameters for the work to be
suit cutting parameters. undertaken can be determined.

Element 7.21A.3 Perform complex turning

Criteria 7.21A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Speeds and feeds are correctly calculated using The appropriate feeds and speeds are used in performing The appropriate feeds and speeds for complex turning
appropriate mathematical techniques and reference complex turning operations. operation(s) are correctly calculated. The sources of
material. appropriate formulae and data relating to feeds and
speeds can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 394 of 1445
 MEM 7.21A A Perform complex lathe operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.21A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complex turning undertaken which may include single Complex turning operations are performed to specification The techniques and procedures for carrying out each of
and multi-start thread cutting, internal blind hole thread in accordance with standard operating procedures. the following turning operations can be given: - single
cutting, eccentrics, copy and taper turning etc. start thread cutting - multi-start thread cutting - internal
blind hole thread cutting - eccentrics - copy turning -
taper turning.

Criteria 7.21A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-standard turning operations performed as required Where appropriate, the following turning operations are The techniques and procedures for carrying out each of
which may include counterbalancing work on face plates, performed to specification in accordance with standard the following turning operations can be given: - counter
mandrill work, trepanning, heavy (multi-tonne) shafts etc. operating procedures: - counter balancing work on face balancing work on face plates - mandrill work -
plates - mandrill work - trepanning - heavy (multi-tonne) trepanning - heavy (multi-tonne) shafts.
shafts.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 395 of 1445
 MEM 7.21A A Perform complex lathe operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The skills in this unit are applied to more unusual or difficult turning operations including those requiring calculations, or jobs requiring high precision or quality using a range of
materials including non-standard metals and alloys. Work would be performed autonomously using predetermined standards of quality and safety. Skills in this unit are applied to
complex or unusual turning operations including the use of special tools or techniques and where the outcomes require high precision. A variety of materials may be used including
non-standard metals and alloys.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of complex and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
lathe operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 396 of 1445
MEM 7.22A B Advanced programming of CNC wire cut machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.22A B Advanced programming of CNC wire cut machines

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required to write and trial a program for a range of CNC wire cut machines. Programming includes 2 axis tool paths, 4 axis conical
cutting, auto multi-cavity work pieces.
Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic)
7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process 7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic)
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.8A Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and 5.9A Automated thermal cutting
shaping
7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process 7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.22A.1 Write program

Criteria 7.22A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering drawings understood and interpreted to All relevant drawings, specifications and instructions are The operations to be performed in producing the given part
define optimum tool path geometry obtained in accordance with work place procedures The or product can be identified The operations to be
coordinates of all relevant points on the part or product to controlled by the program to be written can be identified
be produced are calculated accurately The tool path(s) to be followed when producing the part or
product can be identified The sequence of operations to be
programmed can be identified The reasons for selecting the
chosen tool path(s) and sequence of operations can be
explained The zero point of the wire cut machine can be
identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 397 of 1445
MEM 7.22A B Advanced programming of CNC wire cut machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.22A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tool path programmed using advanced operations, The canned cycles and sub-routines accessible in the
canned cycles and sub-routines or other appropriate particular NC/CNC machine can be identified The
sub-routines within system application of each canned cycle and sub-routine available
can be given Where appropriate, the canned cycles and/or
sub-routines to be used in the NC/CNC program can be
identified The reasons for selecting the chosen canned
cycles and/or sub-routines can be explained
Criteria 7.22A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program written in standard code format, confirmed and An appropriate NC/CNC program is written in standard
edited as necessary using appropriate routine and code format and incorporates, where appropriate, canned
standard operating procedures cycles and sub-routines The standard codes used in the
writing of NC/CNC programs can be identified The
applications of standard codes in NC/CNC programming can
be explained The procedures for writing NC/CNC programs
in standard code format can be given
Criteria 7.22A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program stored in accordance with standard operating The program is stored in accordance with standard operating The procedures for storing NC/CNC programs can be
procedures procedures identified

Criteria 7.22A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation sheet produced to standard operating All relevant information is included in the NC/CNC The procedures for completing NC/CNC operation sheets
procedure operation sheet(s) The NC/CNC operation sheet(s) are can be given The information to be included in NC/CNC
produced in accordance with specifications and standard operation sheets can be identified
operating procedures
Element 7.22A.2 Trial program
Criteria 7.22A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program downloaded, machining parameters that may The NC/CNC program is downloaded in accordance with The NC/CNC program appropriate to the given task(s) is
include wire offset, wire speed, power settings are standard operating procedures The downloaded NC/CNC identified The procedures for downloading NC/CNC
selected program is verified in accordance with standard operating programs can be identified The procedures for verifying
procedures The appropriate machining parameters are downloaded NC/CNC programs can be identified The
entered into the machine controller in accordance with machining parameters that may be entered into the
standard operating procedures machine controller can be identified The effect of varying
the machining parameters on the product or part produced
can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 398 of 1445
MEM 7.22A B Advanced programming of CNC wire cut machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.22A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine prepared, work piece loaded, aligned, datum Appropriate work holding fixtures/ devices/tools are located The appropriate work holding fixtures/devices/tools can be
and reference points established in accordance with and mounted onto the machine as required in accordance identified The procedures for mounting work holding
standard operating procedures with specifications and standard operating procedures All fixtures/devices tools can be given The location of the
safety features and equipment are checked for correct required work holding fixtures/devices/tools relative to the
operation in accordance with standard operating procedures machine datum or zero can be correctly identified The
All datum and reference points are established in according purpose of datum setting can be explained The pre-start
with standard operating procedures checks to be undertaken can be identified The safety
features and equipment of the NC/CNC machine can be
identified The purpose and function of the safety features
and/or equipment can be explained
Criteria 7.22A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operated in appropriate mode to test and The NC/CNC program is tested and proven in accordance The machine mode appropriate to the testing and proving
prove program, work piece positioning with standard operating procedures The position of the work of the NC/CNC program and the checking of the position
piece is tested for conformance to specification in of the work piece can be identified The procedures to be
accordance with standard operating procedures followed when using the machine in this mode can be
identified The relative position of the work piece to the
machine datum or zero can be identified
Criteria 7.22A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Finished components are checked for conformance with The parts or products produced are checked for The specifications of the part or product can be identified
drawing specifications conformance with specifications in accordance with standard The measuring equipment/techniques to be used to check
operating procedures for conformance to specification can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 399 of 1445
MEM 7.22A B Advanced programming of CNC wire cut machines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit extends to programming a range of CNC wire cut machines. Programming includes 2 axis tool paths, 4 axis conical cutting, auto multi-cavity work pieces. Technical
difficulties are resolved in consultation with appropriate technical advisers. Work is carried out autonomously using predetermined standards of quality and safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the programming of CNC wire cut machines or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 400 of 1445
MEM 7.23B B Program and set up CNC manufacturing cell Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.23B B Program and set up CNC manufacturing cell

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to program operations, set up the cell and test the operation of the cell. The unit extends to CNC machines and associated
integrated equipment/robots used in flexible manufacturing cell. It may include the use of multi-spindle machines, 4 and 5 axis machines and pallet loaded machining
centres.
Note - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards.
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining 7.6A Perform lathe operations
7.7A Perform milling operations 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 7.19A Program NC/CNC machining centre 7.20A Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis
NC/CNC machining centre
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 7.19A Program NC/CNC machining centre 7.20A Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis
NC/CNC machining centre
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 7.28A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.8A Advanced manual thermal cutting, gouging and
shaping
5.9A Automated thermal cutting 7.15A Set NC/CNC machines/process (basic) 7.16A Set and edit NC/CNC machine/process
7.18A Basic NC/CNC programming 7.19A Program NC/CNC machining centre 7.20A Program multiple spindle and/or multiple axis
NC/CNC machining centre
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.23B.1 Program operations

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 401 of 1445
MEM 7.23B B Program and set up CNC manufacturing cell Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.23B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering drawings and manufacturing specifications All relevant drawings, specifications and instructions are The operations to be performed in producing the given part
are interpreted and understood to determine equipment obtained in accordance with workplace procedures or product can be identified The appropriate type(s) of
required NC/CNC machine to perform the required machining
operations can be identified The appropriate means of part
or product transfer between machines can be identified The
reasons for selecting the chosen equipment and machinery
can be explained
Criteria 7.23B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Programs equipment/cell schedule The appropriate NC/CNC programs are loaded/downloaded The NC/CNC programs for use in each of the cell
into the individual machine controllers in accordance with components can be identified The sequence of machining
standard operating procedures Where appropriate, NC/CNC and transfer operations can be identified The means of
programs are written to ensure that the components of the coordinating the operations of all components within the
cell operate in the correct sequence cell can be explained The communication requirements
between components of the cell can be identified
Criteria 7.23B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Links controllers for integration The machine controllers of NC/ CNC machines and transfer The methods of linking machine controllers can be
devices are correctly linked in accordance with standard identified The precautions to be taken when linking
operating procedures machine controllers can be explained The procedures for
linking machine controllers can be given
Element 7.23B.2 Set up cell
Criteria 7.23B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Configures manufacturing cell machines and equipment The machines and equipment are appropriately located in The specifications of the part or product to be produced
to meet production specifications accordance with standard operating procedures to ensure that can be identified The optimum physical relationship
manufacturing cell performance is optimised between the machines and equipment within the cell can be
identified The reasons for selecting this configuration of
machines and equipment can be explained
Criteria 7.23B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Installs and adjusts tooling and work holding devices to All tooling and work holding devices are installed and The appropriate tooling for each component of the cell
meet specifications adjusted, where appropriate, in accordance with standard can be identified The reasons for tooling selection can be
operating procedures given The appropriate work holding devices for each
component of the cell can be identified The reasons for
selecting the chosen work holding devices can be given The
effects of adjustments to tooling and/or work holding
devices on the part or product specifications can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 402 of 1445
MEM 7.23B B Program and set up CNC manufacturing cell Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.23B.3 Test cell operation
Criteria 7.23B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operates and adjusts cell to produce components to The manufacturing cell is operated in accordance with The operating procedures for the manufacturing cell can be
specification standard operating procedures The part or product is identified, or where appropriate, prepared The
checked for conformance with specifications in accordance measurements to be taken to check the part or product for
with standard operating procedures Where appropriate the conformance to specification can be identified The
operation of the cell is adjusted in accordance with standard techniques/equipment to be used to measure the part or
operating procedures to ensure the parts or products product can be identified The effect of adjustments on cell
produced conform to specification The performance of the performance can be explained The causes of non-essential
manufacturing cell is optimised dwell times can be explained Where appropriate, the action
to be taken to minimise dwell times can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 403 of 1445
MEM 7.23B B Program and set up CNC manufacturing cell Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Extends to Computer Numerical Control machines and associated integrated equipment/robots used in a flexible manufacturing cell and other advanced operations. This may
include the use of multi-spindle machines, 4 and 5 axis machines and pallet loaded machining centres. Work is performed to predetermined standards, specifications and quality.
Work is carried out autonomously using predetermined standards of quality and safety. Where machining skills in excess of Unit 7.5A (Perform general machining) are required,
then appropriate units should also be selected. Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) should also be accessed when precision measurement skills are required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of both on and The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the programming and set up of CNC manufacturing cells or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 404 of 1445
 MEM 7.24A A Operate and monitor machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.24A A Operate and monitor machine/process

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4

Element 7.24A.1 Obtain job instructions

Criteria 7.24A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets or equivalent instructions interpreted All relevant documentation is obtained in accordance with The job requirements can be identified.
correctly. work place procedures.

Element 7.24A.2 Conduct pre-start checks

Criteria 7.24A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating Pre-start checks are undertaken in accordance with The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified.
procedure. standard operating procedures.

Criteria 7.24A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures are observed and all safety All safety equipment and guards are checked for correct The safety features of the machine/process being
equipment checked for correct operation. operation in accordance with standard operating operated can be identified. The safety equipment
procedures. The correct safety procedures are followed at associated with the machine/process can be identified.
all times The safety procedures associated with the
machine/process can be identified.

Element 7.24A.3 Operate machine/process

Criteria 7.24A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process started up safely and correctly in The machine/process is started up safely in accordance The machine/process start up procedures can be
accordance with standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 405 of 1445
 MEM 7.24A A Operate and monitor machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.24A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process operating procedures can be
instructions or standard operating procedures. requirements and standard operating procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.24A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components/feed stock is loaded and maintained Components/feed stock are loaded in accordance with The component/feed stock levels to achieve production
consistent with production requirements. production requirements and standard operating requirements can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 7.24A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output is unloaded safely to standard Where appropriate the machine/process output is Where appropriate the machine/process unloading
operating procedure as required. unloaded safely in accordance with standard operating procedures can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 7.24A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output handled and stored in a manner Where appropriate machine/process output is handled and The procedure for handling and storing finished work
not likely to cause damage as required. stored in accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. The consequences of improper
Machine/process output is not damaged during handling handling and storage of finished work can be given.
or storage.

Criteria 7.24A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production data recorded to standard operating All production records are completed in accordance with The production recording requirements can be identified.
procedure. standard operating procedures.

Element 7.24A.4 Monitor machine/process

Criteria 7.24A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process monitored for safe and correct The operation of the machine/process is monitored in The correct operation of the machine/process can be
operation, deviations and faults are identified and accordance with standard operating procedures. Product identified. Examples of product faults and deviations can
reported in accordance with standard operating faults/deviations can be identified. Where appropriate, be given. Where appropriate, the person(s) to whom
procedures. product faults/ deviations detected are reported in faults/deviations are to be reported can be identified.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 406 of 1445
 MEM 7.24A A Operate and monitor machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.24A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency procedures are understood and followed in Where appropriate, the individual correctly follows The emergency procedures associated with the
accordance with standard operating procedures. emergency procedures during drills and/or exercises. machine/process operated and monitored can be
identified. The procedures to be followed in given
situations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 407 of 1445
 MEM 7.24A A Operate and monitor machine/process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to a range of production operations or continuous processes e.g. pressing, punching, plastic moulding, extruding, bending, joining, rolling, forming, drawing, metal
removal, pickling, cylinder filling, printing, painting etc. The work is performed in accordance with clear step by step instructions and procedures documented on job sheets or
similar process instruction documents, operational adjustments to the machine or process by the operator are made using external controls. Where production packaging and
labelling of the finished goods or product is required Unit 11.6A (Production packaging) should also be considered. Basic operation (excluding setting and tool adjustments) of
CNC machines is covered by this unit. This unit should not be selected with any of the following units unless the skills of this unit are being applied to an additional and different
type of machine and or process. Unit 4.1A (Operate furnaces), Unit 4.2A (Gravity die casting), Unit 4.3A (Operate pressure die casting machine), Unit 4.6A (Operate sand
moulding/core moulding machines), Unit 6.1A (Hand forging), Unit 6.2A (Hammer forging), Unit 8.1A (Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work), Unit 8.8A (Operate and control
surface
finishing waste treatment process), Unit 8.4A (Finish work using wet, dry and vapour deposition methods).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation and monitoring and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
of a machine/process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 408 of 1445
 MEM 7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.25A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.25A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, job instructions and specifications are All relevant documentation is obtained in accordance with The job requirements can be identified.
interpreted and task requirements understood including work site procedures.
machine/process selection and settings.

Element 7.25A.2 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.25A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Check safety equipment and guards for correct position All safety equipment and guards are checked for correct The safety features of the machine/process being
and operation. position in accordance with work site procedures. All operated can be identified. The safety equipment
safety equipment and guards are checked for correct associated with the machine/process can be identified.
operation in accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 409 of 1445
 MEM 7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.25A.3 Conduct pre-start checks

Criteria 7.25A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Programmed operational maintenance undertaken to Programmed maintenance schedules are obtained in The programmed operational maintenance requirements
standard operating procedure. accordance with work site procedures. The programmed of the machine/process can be identified.
operational maintenance is undertaken in accordance with
work site procedures and schedules.

Criteria 7.25A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating Pre-start checks are undertaken in accordance with work Pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified.
procedure. site procedures.

Criteria 7.25A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Verify equipment, raw material and tooling, match task Equipment, raw materials and tooling are checked against The equipment, raw material and tooling required to meet
requirement. job requirements. the product specifications can be identified.

Element 7.25A.4 Operate machine/process

Criteria 7.25A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process started up safely and correctly. The machine/process is started up safety in accordance The machine/process start up procedures can be
with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.25A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process operating procedures can be
instructions or standard operating procedures. requirements and work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.25A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components/feed stock is loaded and maintained Components/feed stock are loaded in accordance with The component/feed stock levels to achieve production
consistent with production requirements. production requirements and work site procedures. requirements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 410 of 1445
 MEM 7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.25A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output is unloaded safely to standard Where appropriate the machine/process output is Where appropriate the machine/process unloading
operating procedure as required. unloaded safety in accordance with work site procedures. procedures can be identified.

Criteria 7.25A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output handled and stored in a manner Where appropriate machine/process output is handled and The procedure for handling and storing finished work
not likely to cause damage as required. stored in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The consequences of improper
Machine/process output is not damaged during handling handling and storing of finished work can be given.
or storage.

Criteria 7.25A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production data recorded to standard operating All production records are completed in accordance with The production recording requirements can be identified.
procedure. work site procedures.

Element 7.25A.5 Monitor machine/process

Criteria 7.25A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process monitored for safe and correct The operation of the machine/process is monitored in The correct operation of the machine/process can be
operation. accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.25A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency procedures are understood and followed in The emergency procedures associated with the
accordance with standard operating procedures. machine/process operated and monitored can be
identified. The procedures to be followed in given
situations can be identified.

Element 7.25A.6 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in product/output

Criteria 7.25A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product faults/deviations are recognised from standard Examples of types of product fault/deviations can be
operating procedures, job sheets or other documentation. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 411 of 1445
 MEM 7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.25A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product faults/deviations are rectified in accordance with Product faults/deviations are identified. Appropriate The corrective action to be undertaken to rectify types of
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other corrective action/adjustment is undertaken to return the product fault/deviations can be identified.
documentation and may be achieved by adjustment of product to specification in accordance with work site
machine/process settings within parameters. procedures.

Element 7.25A.7 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults with raw material/feed stock
Criteria 7.25A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Raw material faults/deviations are recognised from Examples of raw material faults/deviations can be given.
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other
documentation.

Criteria 7.25A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Raw material faults/deviations are rectified in accordance Raw material faults/deviations are identified. Appropriate The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
with standard operating procedures, job sheets or other corrective action is undertaken to ensure that raw raw material faults/deviations can be identified.
documentation. material/feed stock conforms to specification in
accordance with work site procedures.

Element 7.25A.8 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in process equipment
Criteria 7.25A.8.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process equipment faults/deviations are identified Examples of process equipment faults/deviations can be
against specifications and reported to standard operating given. Appropriate reporting procedures can be
procedure. identified.

Criteria 7.25A.8.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process equipment faults/deviations are rectified in Process equipment faults/deviations are identified. The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
accordance with standard operating procedures, job Appropriate corrective action is undertaken to ensure that process equipment faults/deviations can be identified.
sheets or other documentation. process equipment conforms to specification in
accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 412 of 1445
 MEM 7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.25A.9 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in machine/process

Criteria 7.25A.9.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process faults/deviations are recognised from Examples of deviations and faults in machine/process
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other can be given.
documentation.

Criteria 7.25A.9.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process faults/deviations are rectified in Machine/process faults/deviations are identified. The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
accordance with standard operating procedures, job Appropriate corrective action is undertaken to ensure that machine/process faults/deviations can be identified.
sheets or other documentation. the machine/process conforms to specification in
accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 413 of 1445
 MEM 7.25A A Advanced machine/process operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit relates to operations where the output of the machine/process can be varied at the discretion of the operator and where recognition/rectification skills are applied based
upon product/material/process knowledge to achieve specified outcomes. Deviations and faults of the machine, raw material, process equipment and process are recognised and
rectified in accordance with standard operating procedures in order to meet the specification. Work is performed autonomously or in teams. Where interpretation of a technical
drawing to Australian Standard 1100/1102 or equivalent is required, Unit 9.2A (Interpret technical drawing) should also be selected. When production packaging and labelling of the
finished goods or product is required then Unit 11.6A (Production packaging) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures and maintenance schedules. - Any relevant product and manufacturing
disadvantage the candidate. specifications. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of
communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be
approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence
of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the
candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by
the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with units addressing the During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling recording and communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
reporting associated with the competent operation, monitoring and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
fault rectification of production machines and processes, or other plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
covered by this unit. Competence in this unit cannot be claimed until accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
all prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 414 of 1445
 MEM 7.26A A Advanced plastic processing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.26A A Advanced plastic processing

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.26A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.26A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, job instructions and specifications are All relevant documentation is obtained in accordance with The job requirements can be identified.
interpreted and task requirements understood including work site procedures.
machine/process selection and settings.

Element 7.26A.2 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.26A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Check safety equipment and guards for correct position All safety equipment and guards are checked for correct The safety features of the machine/process being
and operation. position in accordance with work site procedures. All operated can be identified. The safety equipment
safety equipment and guards are checked for correct associated with the machine/process can be identified.
operation in accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 415 of 1445
 MEM 7.26A A Advanced plastic processing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.26A.3 Conduct pre-start checks

Criteria 7.26A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Programmed operational maintenance undertaken to Programmed maintenance schedules are obtained in The programmed operational maintenance requirements
standard operating standard procedure. accordance with work site procedures. The programmed of the machine/process can be identified.
operational maintenance is undertaken in accordance with
work site procedures and schedules.

Criteria 7.26A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating Pre-start checks are undertaken in accordance with work Pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified.
procedure. site procedures.

Criteria 7.26A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Verify equipment, raw material and tooling match task Equipment, raw material and tooling are checked against The equipment, raw material and tooling required to meet
requirement. job requirements. the product specifications can be identified.

Element 7.26A.4 Operate machine/process

Criteria 7.26A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process started up safely and correctly. The machine/process is started up safely in accordance The machine/process start-up procedures can be
with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.26A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process operating procedures can be
instructions or standard operating procedures. requirements and work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.26A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components/feed stock are loaded and maintained Components/feed stock are loaded in accordance with The component/feed stock levels to achieve production
consistent with production requirements. production requirements and work site procedures. requirements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 416 of 1445
 MEM 7.26A A Advanced plastic processing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.26A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output is unloaded safely to standard Where appropriate, the machine/ process output is Where appropriate, the machine/ process unloading
operating procedure. unloaded safely in accordance with work site procedures. procedures can be identified.

Criteria 7.26A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output handled and stored in a manner Where appropriate, machine/process output is handled The procedure for handling and storing finished work
not likely to cause damage as required. and stored in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The consequences of improper
Machine/process output is not damaged during handling handling and storing of finished work can be given.
or storage.

Criteria 7.26A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production data recorded to standard operating All production records are completed in accordance with The production recording requirements can be identified.
procedure. work site procedures.

Element 7.26A.5 Monitor machine/process

Criteria 7.26A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process monitored for safe and correct The operation of the machine/process is monitored The correct operation of the machine/process can be
operation. according to work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.26A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency procedures are understood and followed in The emergency procedures associated with the
accordance with standard operating procedures. machine/process operated and monitored can be
identified. The procedures to be followed in given
situations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 417 of 1445
 MEM 7.26A A Advanced plastic processing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.26A.6 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in product/output

Criteria 7.26A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product faults/deviations such as short shots, warped Examples of product fault/deviations can be given.
mouldings, dimensional errors are recognised from
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other
documentation.

Criteria 7.26A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product faults/deviations are rectified in accordance with Product faults/deviations are identified. Appropriate The corrective action to be undertaken to rectify types of
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other corrective action/ adjustment is undertaken to return the product fault/deviations can be identified.
documentation and may be achieved by adjustment of product to specification in accordance with work site
machine/process settings within parameters. procedures.

Element 7.26A.7 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults with raw material/feed stock
Criteria 7.26A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Raw material faults/deviations such as contamination, Examples of raw material faults/ deviations can be given.
colour variation are recognised from standard operating
procedures, job sheets or other documentation.

Criteria 7.26A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Raw material faults/deviations are rectified in accordance Raw material faults/deviations are identified. Appropriate The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
with standard operating procedures, job sheets or other corrective action is undertaken to ensure that raw raw material faults/deviations can be identified.
documentation. material/feed stock conforms to specification in
accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 418 of 1445
 MEM 7.26A A Advanced plastic processing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.26A.8 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in tooling

Criteria 7.26A.8.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling faults/deviations resulting in blemishes, missing Tooling faults/deviations are identified. Examples of tooling faults/ deviations can be given.
detail etc. are identified against specification and reported Appropriate reporting procedures can be identified.
to standard operating procedure.

Criteria 7.26A.8.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling faults/deviations are rectified in accordance with Appropriate corrective action is undertaken to ensure that The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other tooling conforms to specification in accordance with work tooling faults/ deviations can be identified.
documentation. site procedures.

Element 7.26A.9 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in machine/process

Criteria 7.26A.9.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process faults/deviations such as short shots, Machine/process faults/deviations are identified. Examples of deviations and faults in machine/process
burn marks, distortion etc. are recognised from standard can be given.
operating procedures, job sheets or other documentation.

Criteria 7.26A.9.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process faults/deviations are rectified in Appropriate corrective action is undertaken to ensure that The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
accordance with standard operating procedures, job the machine/process conforms to specification in machine/process faults/deviations can be identified.
sheets or other documentation. accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 419 of 1445
 MEM 7.26A A Advanced plastic processing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to a range of plastic, rubber processing including injection, blow moulding, processing of fibre reinforced composites, extrusion, thermoforming, vacuum forming,
foaming etc. This unit relates to operations where the output of the machine/process can be varied at the discretion of the operator and where recognition/rectification skills are
applied based upon product/material/process knowledge to achieve specified outcomes. Deviations and faults of the machine, raw material, tooling and process are recognised and
rectified in accordance with standard operating procedures in order to meet the specification. Work is performed autonomously or in teams. Where interpretation of a technical
drawing to Australian Standard 1100/1102 or equivalent is required, Unit 9.2A (Interpret technical drawing) should also be selected. When production packaging and labelling of the
finished goods or product is required then Unit 11.6A (Production packaging) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with advanced plastic processing and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 420 of 1445
 MEM 7.27A A Advanced press operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.27A A Advanced press operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.27A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.27A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, job instructions and specifications are All relevant documentation is obtained in accordance with The job requirements can be identified.
interpreted and task requirements understood including work site procedures.
machine/process selection and settings.

Element 7.27A.2 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.27A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Check safety equipment and guards for correct position All safety equipment and guards are checked for correct The safety features of the machine/process being
and operation. position in accordance with work site procedures. All operated can be identified. The safety equipment
safety equipment and guards are checked for correct associated with the machine/process can be identified.
operation in accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 421 of 1445
 MEM 7.27A A Advanced press operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.27A.3 Conduct pre-start checks

Criteria 7.27A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Programmed operational maintenance undertaken to Programmed maintenance schedules are obtained in The programmed operational maintenance requirements
standard operating procedure. accordance with work site procedures. The programmed of the machine/process can be identified.
operational maintenance is undertaken in accordance with
work site procedures and schedules.

Criteria 7.27A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating Pre-start checks are undertaken in accordance with work Pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified.
procedure. site procedures.

Criteria 7.27A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Verify equipment, raw material and tooling match task Equipment, raw material and tooling are checked against The equipment, raw material and tooling required to meet
requirement. job requirements. the product specifications can be identified.

Element 7.27A.4 Operate machine/process

Criteria 7.27A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process started up safely and correctly. The machine/process is started up safely in accordance The machine/process start-up procedures can be
with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.27A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process is operated in accordance with job The machine/process operating procedures can be
instructions or standard operating procedures. requirements and work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.27A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components/feed stock is loaded and maintained Components/feed stock are loaded in accordance with The component/feed stock levels to achieve production
consistent with production requirements. production requirements and work site procedures. requirements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 422 of 1445
 MEM 7.27A A Advanced press operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.27A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output is unloaded safely to standard Where appropriate, the machine/ process output is Where appropriate, the machine/ process unloading
operating procedure as required. unloaded safely in accordance with work site procedures. procedures can be identified.

Criteria 7.27A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process output handled and stored in a manner Where appropriate, machine/process output is handled The procedure for handling and storing finished work
not likely to cause damage as required. and stored in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The consequences of improper
Machine/process output is not damaged during handling handling and storing of finished work can be given.
or storage.

Criteria 7.27A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production data recorded to standard operating All production records are completed in accordance with The production recording requirements can be identified.
procedure. work site procedures.

Element 7.27A.5 Monitor machine/process

Criteria 7.27A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process monitored for safe and correct The operation of the machine/process is monitored The correct operation of the machine/process can be
operation. according to work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.27A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency procedures are understood and followed in The emergency procedures associated with the
accordance with standard operating procedures. machine/process operated and monitored can be
identified. The procedures to be followed in given
situations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 423 of 1445
 MEM 7.27A A Advanced press operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.27A.6 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in product/output

Criteria 7.27A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product faults/deviations such as splits, warping, Examples of product fault/deviations can be given.
deformation, dimensional errors etc. are recognised from
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other
documentation.

Criteria 7.27A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product faults/deviations are rectified in accordance with Product faults/deviations are identified. Appropriate The corrective action to be undertaken to rectify types of
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other corrective action/ adjustment is undertaken to return the product fault/deviations can be identified.
documentation and may be achieved by adjustment of product to specification in accordance with work site
machine/process settings within parameters. procedures.

Element 7.27A.7 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults with raw material/feed stock
Criteria 7.27A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Raw material faults/deviations such as gauge variation, Examples of raw material faults/ deviations can be given.
hardness, colour variation etc. are recognised from
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other
documentation.

Criteria 7.27A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Raw material faults/deviations are rectified in accordance Raw material faults/deviations are identified. Appropriate The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
with standard operating procedures, job sheets or other corrective action is undertaken to ensure that raw raw material faults/deviations can be identified.
documentation. material/feed stock conforms to specification in
accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 424 of 1445
 MEM 7.27A A Advanced press operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.27A.8 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in tooling

Criteria 7.27A.8.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling faults/deviations resulting in marks, missing Examples of tooling faults/ deviations can be given.
detail, dimensional errors etc. are identified against Appropriate reporting procedures can be identified.
specifications and reported to standard operating
procedure.

Criteria 7.27A.8.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling faults/deviations are rectified in accordance with Tooling faults/deviations are identified. Appropriate The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
standard operating procedures, job sheets or other corrective action is undertaken to ensure that tooling tooling faults/deviations can be identified.
documentation. conforms to specification in accordance with work site
procedures.

Element 7.27A.9 Recognise and rectify deviations and faults in machine/process

Criteria 7.27A.9.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process faults/deviations resulting in splits, Examples of deviations and faults in machine/process
distortion etc. are recognised from standard operating can be given.
procedures, job sheets or other documentation.

Criteria 7.27A.9.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/process faults/deviations are rectified in Machine/process faults/deviations are identified. The correct action to be undertaken to rectify types of
accordance with standard operating procedures, job Appropriate corrective action is undertaken to ensure that machine/process faults/deviations can be identified.
sheets or other documentation. the machine/process conforms to specification in
accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 425 of 1445
 MEM 7.27A A Advanced press operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to a range of metal working press operations including drawing, blanking, bending, coining, sizing, extruding, forming and shaping. This unit relates to operations
where the output of the machine/process can be varied at the discretion of the operator and where recognition/rectification skills are applied based upon product/material/process
knowledge to achieve specified outcomes. Deviations and faults of the machine, raw material, tooling and process are recognised and rectified in accordance with standard
operating procedure in order to meet the specification. Work is performed autonomously or in teams. Where interpretation of a technical drawing to Australian Standard 1100/1102
or equivalent is required, Unit 9.2A (Interpret technical drawing) should also be selected. When production packaging and labelling of the finished goods or product is required
then Unit 11.6A (Production packaging) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with advanced press operation or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 426 of 1445
 MEM 7.28A A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.28A A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process

Element 7.28A.1 Obtain job instructions

Criteria 7.28A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets or equivalent instructions understood and All relevant documentation is obtained in accordance with The job requirements can be identified.
correctly followed. work place procedures.

Element 7.28A.2 Conduct pre-start checks

Criteria 7.28A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating Pre-start checks are undertaken in accordance with The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified.
procedure. standard operating procedures.

Criteria 7.28A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures are observed and all safety All safety equipment and guards are checked for correct The safety features of the machine/process being
equipment checked for correct operation. operation in accordance with standard operating operated can be identified. The safety equipment
procedures. The correct safety procedures are followed at associated with the machine/process can be identified.
all times. The safety procedures associated with the
machine/process can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 427 of 1445
 MEM 7.28A A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.28A.3 Operate NC/CNC machine/process

Criteria 7.28A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Installed NC/CNC program selected and verified in That the correct NC/CNC program is selected and verified The procedures for accessing NC/CNC programs
accordance with job instructions. in accordance with standard operating procedures. installed in the machine controller can be identified. The
procedures for verifying that the correct NC/CNC
program has been selected can be identified. The
NC/CNC program to be used is correctly identified. The
reasons for verifying that the correct NC/CNC program
has been selected can be identified.

Criteria 7.28A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
NC/CNC machine operated safely to product The NC/CNC machine is operated safely in accordance The NC/CNC machine operating procedures can be
specifications using standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. identified.

Criteria 7.28A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine malfunctions identified and reported. Where appropriate, machine malfunctions identified are Examples of machine malfunctions can be given. The
reported in accordance with standard operating procedures for reporting machine malfunctions can be
procedures. identified. Where appropriate, the person to whom
machine malfunctions are to be reported can be
identified.

Criteria 7.28A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production samples checked for compliance to The parts or products produced are checked for The specifications of the product or part to be produced
specification using standard operating procedures. conformance to specification in accordance with standard can be identified. The checks/measurement to be made
operating procedures. can be identified. The measuring instruments/techniques
to be used to check the part or product can be identified.
The frequency with which parts or products are to be
checked can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 428 of 1445
 MEM 7.28A A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.28A.4 Monitor machine/process

Criteria 7.28A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tool wear monitored and where appropriate, preset tools The machine or process is monitored for signs of tool wear Examples of tool wear and the effect on product or part
are replaced, tool offsets identified in NC/CNC program in accordance with standard operating procedures. Where specifications can be given. The corrective procedures to
and adjusted or other corrective action taken using appropriate, corrective action is undertaken in accordance be followed once tool wear has been detected can be
standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. given. Where appropriate, pre-set tools that can be
replaced can be identified. Where appropriate,
adjustments to tool offsets that can be made can be
identified. The effect of adjustments on part or product
specifications can be explained.

Criteria 7.28A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product deviation from specification reported in Where appropriate, part or product deviations from The procedures for reporting deviations of the part or
accordance with standard operating procedures. specification are reported in accordance with standard product from specification can be identified. Where
operating procedures. appropriate, the person to whom part or product
deviations are reported can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 429 of 1445
 MEM 7.28A A Operate NC/CNC machine/process (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The skills described in this unit are meant to apply to a range of NC/CNC machines/processes in a production environment. Work is performed to established processes, practices,
specifications and instructions as appropriate. Technical difficulties are resolved in consultation with appropriate technical advisers. Work is carried out autonomously using
predetermined standards of quality and safety. An appropriate level of measurement skill should be selected with this unit. Where it is required to use tools, then Unit 18.1A (Use
hand tools) should also be selected. Where basic operation excludes setting and tool adjustment skills, then Unit 7.24A (Operate and monitor machine/process) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation of NC/CNC and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
machines/processes or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 430 of 1445
 MEM 7.29A A Perform routine sharpening/maintenance of production tools and cutters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.29A A Perform routine sharpening/maintenance of production tools and cutters
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.4C11 Assist in the provision of on the job training 2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.3A Setting machines (routine)
7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.4C11 Assist in the provision of on the job training 2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.5A Perform general machining
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.29A.1 Obtain job instructions

Criteria 7.29A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets or equivalent instructions interpreted All relevant drawings, instructions and specifications are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
correctly and understood. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. sequence of operations to be performed can be
identified. The specifications to be achieved can be
identified.

Element 7.29A.2 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.29A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine guards, coolant and dust extraction devices All machine guards, coolant and dust extraction devices All machine guards can be identified. The function of
checked for proper operation in accordance with standard are checked for correct operation in accordance with coolant and dust extraction devices can be identified.
operating procedures. standard operating procedures.

Criteria 7.29A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed, protective clothing The correct safety procedures are followed and personal All relevant safety procedures can be identified. All
and safety glasses worn. protective clothing and equipment is worn/used necessary personal protective clothing and equipment
throughout the grinding process. can be identified. The hazards associated with tool and
cutter grinding operations can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 431 of 1445
 MEM 7.29A A Perform routine sharpening/maintenance of production tools and cutters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.29A.3 Production tooling disassembled in preparation for sharpening

Criteria 7.29A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production tooling is disassembled as required to Machine is isolated in accordance with standard operating Basic process for disassembly can be explained, safety
facilitate sharpening in accordance with standard procedures. Correct techniques used for disassembling. issues can be identified and described.
operating procedures.

Element 7.29A.4 Set up machine

Criteria 7.29A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tool and cutter grinding wheels selected, balanced and Tool and cutter grinding accessories appropriate to the The standard grinding wheel shapes can be identified. A
dressed in accordance with job instructions. grinding task(s) are selected and correctly used in range of abrasive materials used in grinding wheels can
accordance with standard operating procedures. The be identified. The effect of the following grinding wheel
grinding wheel selected is safely balanced and correctly features on wheel selection and application can be
dressed for the grinding task(s) to be performed in explained: - grain size of abrasive particles - grade or
accordance with standard operating procedures. strength of bond - structure of grain spacing - bond
material. The appropriate grinding wheel(s) for the given
task(s) can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
appropriate grinding wheel can be given. The function
and application of the full range of tool and cutter
grinding accessories can be explained. Grinding wheel
dressing procedures can be correctly identified. Grinding
wheel dressing tools and their application can be
identified. The appropriate grinding wheel dressing
tool(s) for the given task(s) can be identified.

Criteria 7.29A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fixtures for locating tools/cutters to be sharpened are The appropriate accessories are correctly set up in The accessories and fixtures to be used can be identified.
mounted in accordance with job instructions. accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 432 of 1445
 MEM 7.29A A Perform routine sharpening/maintenance of production tools and cutters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.29A.5 Perform tool and cutter grinding

Criteria 7.29A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools and cutters to be sharpened are mounted in Tools and cutters are mounted correctly in fixtures. Importance of correct mounting can be explained.
predetermined fixtures.

Criteria 7.29A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools and cutters are sharpened in accordance with The universal tool and cutter grinder is used to correctly The procedures for sharpening can be identified.
defined procedures. sharpen and shape a range of tools and cutters in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Element 7.29A.6 Check tools/cutters for conformance to specification

Criteria 7.29A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools/cutters visually inspected and checked, measured The ground components are checked for conformance Tools, techniques and equipment appropriate to the
for conformance to specification in accordance with job with specifications in accordance with standard operating checking of ground components for conformance with
instructions. procedures. the following specifications can be identified: -
dimensions and tolerances - geometry and tolerances -
surface finish. The tools, techniques and equipment to
be used to check the given ground components for
conformance with specifications can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the tools, techniques and
equipment to be used can be explained.

Element 7.29A.7 Production tooling assembled/reassembled

Criteria 7.29A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production tooling is reassembled, inserts installed in Correct procedures are followed for re-assembly. Critical factors for re-assembly can be identified.
accordance with job instructions.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 433 of 1445
 MEM 7.29A A Perform routine sharpening/maintenance of production tools and cutters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.29A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembled tooling is visually inspected and checked, The assembled, tooling is checked against specifications. Specifications can be obtained and interpreted.
measure for conformance to specification in accordance
with job instructions.

Range statement
Work is carried out autonomously to predetermined standards of quality, safety and is performed to defined procedures using fixtures to locate tools/cutters for grinding.
Production tooling may include inserted boring bars, face cutters, gear cutters etc. Equipment includes using a range of tool and cutter grinding machines and accessories. General
off hand grinding/sharpening of tools etc. is covered by Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations). For more advanced tool and cutter grinding operations, see Unit 7.10A
(Perform tool and cutter grinding operations). This unit should not be selected when Unit 7.10A (Perform tool and cutter grinding operations) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with production/process and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
machining or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 434 of 1445
MEM 7.30A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.30A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required for the work which applies to a range of metal spinning lathes (excluding CNC), accessories, measuring equipment, and
engineering standards. Sheet metals may include but are not restricted to steels, aluminium, monel, copper, brass, zinc, pewter, silver, gold, tin, etc., of varying
thicknesses. Work is performed to drawings, sketches, specifications and instructions as appropriate. Spinning does not include hot spinning procedures.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.32A Use workshop machines for basic operations 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 7.30A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.30A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed and protective Appropriate coveralls and footwear are worn and in a Serviceability and appropriate of use safety wear and safe
clothing and safety glasses worn serviceable condition. All work is carried out correctly and work practices are maintained at all times
safely in accordance with workplace procedures
Element 7.30A.2 Determine job requirements
Criteria 7.30A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings are interpreted and sequence of operation All drawings required are used and that the sequence of Information determined from the drawings is clearly
determined operation has been correctly adhered to in accordance with understood and accurately applied
job sheet and workplace practice and procedures Each step of the sequence of operation is able to be
properly explained
Criteria 7.30A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools are selected to produce components to The correct tools are selected throughout spinning operation The operator is able to determine that each tool has been
specifications All tools selected are properly prepared for use properly prepared for use

Criteria 7.30A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Disc size is determined in accordance with appropriate The correct specifications for the job are properly selected The specifications are clearly understood and correctly
procedures interpreted

Criteria 7.30A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Disc is cut to the correct size and tolerance The disc size has been properly selected and is within
drawing tolerance
The correct use of the disc cutter is applied and that the
finished disc is within the specified tolerance

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 435 of 1445
MEM 7.30A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.30A.3 Perform spinning operations
Criteria 7.30A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spinning speeds are calculated for various metals and The operator determine the appropriate speed for the The operator understands why and how lathe speed is
metal thicknesses using appropriate mathematical material type and thickness calculated
techniques and reference materials The lathe speed is set correctly and in accordance with
operating procedures
Criteria 7.30A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct back centre and form chucks are selected and Form chuck is selected from drawings or specifications, The operator is able to correctly determine the type of
mounted in accordance with procedures and correctly and securely mounted by appropriate means. Back form chuck mounting required from 3 possible alternative
specifications centre is selected and prepared for use in conjunction with an methods
appropriate centre/live centre
Criteria 7.30A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Prepare disc is mounted for forming The disc is mounted and centred
The disc properly centred prior to start up to prevent
departure on turning
The operator demonstrates safe working practices and
ensures that they are positioned outside of the disc's travel
path
Criteria 7.30A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A full range of spinning accessories are used including: Accessories are appropriately utilised in accordance with The function and operation of accessory is clearly
back centre, various chucks, trimming accessories, blank operating procedures understood and operated correctly in accordance with the
centre equipment and tee-rest specified procedures
Criteria 7.30A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spinning, beading, trimming, finishing, annealing and Operations are accurately performed using the correct All of the processes used, are fully understood and the
pickling operations are performed to specifications tooling and accessories methods used for each process is applied safely with the
correct utilisation of spinning tools
Element 7.30A.4 Check components for conformance to specifications
Criteria 7.30A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are checked for conformance to The most appropriate method of inspection is utilised in The operator is able to ensure all work is free from damage
specifications using appropriate techniques tools and determining conformance to specifications and defects including: tool marks, cracking, stress marks,
equipment All inspection tools and equipment are used in accordance thinning and incorrect finish etc.
with manufacturer procedures for inspection The operator is able to identify the purpose and need for
the use of inspection tool or equipment and is able to
correctly use them as required

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 436 of 1445
MEM 7.30A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.30A.5 Components removed and stored
Criteria 7.30A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are removed from the spinning lathe Spinning are removed in an appropriate manner for the job No damage has been incurred during removal and stacking,
without marking or any deformation at hand and are stacked in order to prevent further damage prior to packaging

Criteria 7.30A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are correctly stored and packaged as to Spinning is correctly inhibited and packed in accordance with The operator is fully conversant in the workplace packing
avoid oxidation and damage workplace procedures processes and understands the reasons for inhibiting and
packing

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 437 of 1445
MEM 7.30A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously to predetermined specifications. Work can be carried out using hand tools or slide based tools. Work applies to a range of metal spinning lathes
(excluding CNC), accessories, measuring equipment, and engineering standards. Sheet metals including but not restricted to steels, aluminium, monel, copper, brass, zinc, pewter,
silver, gold, tin, etc of varying thicknesses. Work is performed to drawings, sketches, specifications and instructions as appropriate. Spinning does not include hot spinning
procedures. Tool use will include either hand and/or slide tooling of varying design and materials. The correct usage of all basic metal spinning tools must be demonstrated. Where
lathe maintenance to the level of dismantling and replacing components, Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The candidate will be provided with:
- The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation required
working alone - The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents
- Assessment should be conducted in the individual's own work environment - Any relevant workplace procedures
- Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications
evidence where appropriate The candidate will be required to:
- Present evidence for credit for any off the job training related to this unit - perform 6 spinning exercises which will include 2 soft, 2 hard and 2 medium hard material
types and within their range perform all of the spinning processes stipulated by this unit of
competency
- orally or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by an assessor perform
the tasks described by this guide, within the time frame established between the candidate's
supervisor/instructor and the assessor prior to undertaking this assessment

Critical aspects Special notes

Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until pre-requisites have been During assessment the individual will:-
satisfied - demonstrate safe working practices at all times
Where those pre-requisites are factored into this unit as processes etc., then if - communication information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a
the pre-requisite is not held, it is strongly recommended that the assessment safe and efficient working environment
- take responsibility for the quality of their own work
- plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate
- perform all tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures
- perform all tasks to specification
- use accepted engineering technique, practices, processes and workplace procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 438 of 1445
MEM 7.31A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.31A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (complex)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required for more unusual or difficult spinning operations, including those requiring more involved calculations and/or processes, or
jobs
requiring higher precision or quality using mainly brass and brass alloys. This unit also requires the use of a greater range of spinning accessories including the use of
heat.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 7.30A Perform metal spinning lathe operations (basic) 7.32A Use workshop machines for basic operations
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 7.31A.1 Observe safety precautions

Criteria 7.31A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures observed and protective Appropriate coveralls and footwear are worn and in a Serviceability and appropriate of use safety wear and safe
clothing and safety glasses worn serviceable condition All work is carried out correctly and work practices are maintained
safely in accordance with workplace procedures
Element 7.31A.2 Determine job requirements
Criteria 7.31A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings are interpreted and sequence of operation All drawings required are used and that the sequence of Information determined from the drawings is clearly
determined operation has been correctly adhered to in accordance with understood and accurately applied
job sheets and workplace practice and procedures Each step of the sequence of operation is able to be
properly explained
Criteria 7.31A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools are selected to produce components to The correct tools are selected throughout spinning The correct tools are selected for shaping, trimming and
specifications operation. All tools selected are properly prepared for use finishing
The operator is able to determine that each tool has been
properly prepared for use
Criteria 7.31A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Disc size is determined in accordance with appropriate The correct specifications for the job are properly selected The specifications are clearly understood and correctly
procedures interpreted

Criteria 7.31A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Disc is cut to the correct size and tolerance The disc size has been properly selected and is within
drawing tolerance
The correct use of the disc cutter is applied and that the
finished disc is within tolerance as specified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 439 of 1445
MEM 7.31A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 7.31A.3 Prepare form chucks for spinning
Criteria 7.31A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Metal turning lathe is set up for machining form chucks All necessary safety precautions and appropriate operating The operator has achieved competence on the metal
in accordance with standard operating procedures and principles and practices are observed in functioning a metal turning lathe and meets the pre-requisite requirements
standards turning lathe
Criteria 7.31A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Form chuck is prepared for general spinning as per Information from specifications, are applied and any Any necessary preparation or adjustments are free from
drawings and specifications required adjustments to the chuck are appropriately recorded defect and spinnings are able to be produced to existing or
according to workshop and legislative processes and revised specifications, without defect
practices
Criteria 7.31A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Form chuck is prepared for seaming/swaging joints as Information from specifications, are applied and any Any necessary preparation or adjustments are free from
per drawings and specifications required adjustments to the chuck are appropriately recorded defects and the spinning seams or swagings produced are
according to workshop and legislative processes and able to provide for precise joins to existing or revised
practices specifications, without defect
Element 7.31A.4 Perform spinning operations
Criteria 7.31A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spinning speeds are calculated for various metals and The operator determine the appropriate speed for the The operator understands why and how lathe speed is
metal thicknesses using appropriate mathematical material type and thickness. The lathe speed is set correctly calculated
techniques and reference materials and in accordance with operating procedures
Criteria 7.31A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct back centre and form chucks are selected and Form chuck is selected from drawings or specifications, The operator is able to correctly determine the type of
mounted in accordance with procedures and correctly and securely mounted by appropriate means form chuck mounting required from 3 possible alternative
specifications Back centre is selected and prepared for use in conjunction methods
with an appropriate centre/live centre
Criteria 7.31A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Prepare disc is mounted for forming Disc is mounted and centred Disc properly centred prior to start up to prevent departure
on turning
The operator demonstrates safe working practices and
ensures that they are positioned outside of the disc's travel
path
Criteria 7.31A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A full range of spinning accessories are used including: Accessories are appropriately utilised in accordance with The function and operation of accessory is clearly
back centre, holding and sectional chucks, tee-rest, operating procedures understood and operated correctly in accordance with the
compound and additional slides, recessed and cranked specified procedures
followers, rollers and knurling wheels

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 440 of 1445
MEM 7.31A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.31A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spinning, beading, recessing, oval spinning, screw Operations are accurately performed using the correct All of the processes used, are fully understood and the
forming, (thread spinning) seaming, swaging, trimming tooling and accessories methods used for each process is applied safely with the
finishing, annealing and pickling operations are correct utilisation of spinning tools
performed to specifications
Element 7.31A.5 Check components for conformance to specifications
Criteria 7.31A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are checked for conformance to The most appropriate methods of inspection is utilised in The operator is able to ensure all work is free from damage
specifications using appropriate techniques, tools and determining conformance to specifications All inspection and defects including: tool marks, cracking, stress marks,
equipment tools and equipment are used in accordance with thinning and incorrect finish etc.
manufacturer's procedures for inspection The operator is able to identify the purpose and need for
the use of inspection tools or equipment and is able to
correctly use them as required
Element 7.31A.6 Remove and store components
Criteria 7.31A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are removed from the spinning lathe Spinning are removed in an appropriate manner for the job No damage has been incurred during removal and stacking
without marking or any deformation at hand and are stacked in order to prevent further damage prior to packaging

Criteria 7.31A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are correctly stored and packaged as to Spinning is correctly inhibited and packed in accordance with The operator is fully conversant in the workplace packing
avoid oxidation and damage workplace procedures processes and understands the reasons for inhibiting and
packing

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 441 of 1445
MEM 7.31A B Perform metal spinning lathe operations (complex) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The skills in this unit are applied to more unusual or difficult spinning operations including those requiring more involved calculations and/or processes, or jobs requiring higher
precision or quality using mainly brass and brass alloys. This unit also requires the use of a greater range of spinning accessories including the use of heat. Where there is a
requirement to join spun materials or products in addition to, or instead of, (the spinning operation of) swaging, either Unit 5.3A (Soft soldering (basic)), Unit 5.6A (Perform
brazing and/or silver soldering), or Unit 5.4A (Perform routine oxyacetylene welding (fuel gas welding)), or Unit 5.12A (Perform routine manual arc and/or gas metal arc welding)
or all may also be required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The candidate will be provided with:
- The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation required
working alone - The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents
- Assessment should be conducted in the individual’s own work environment - Any relevant workplace procedures
- Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications
evidence where appropriate. The candidate will be required to:
- Present evidence for credit for any off the job training related to this unit - orally or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by an assessor perform
the tasks described by this guide, within the timeframe established between the candidates
supervisor/instructor and the assessor prior to undertaking this assessment.

Critical aspects Special notes

Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until pre-requisites have been During assessment the individual will:
satisfied. - demonstrate safe working practices at all times
Where those pre-requisites are factored into this unit as processes etc., then if - take responsibility for the quality for their own work
the pre-requisite is not held, it is strongly recommended that the assessment - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate
include the full assessment of the pre-requisite unit. - perform all tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures
i.e.: The process of adjusting the form chucks within this unit would require a full - perform all tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures
assessment of the skills and knowledge covered in Unit 7.6A (Perform lathe - perform all tasks to specification
- use accepted engineering technique, practices, processes and workplace procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 442 of 1445
 MEM 7.32A A Use workshop machines for basic operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.32A A Use workshop machines for basic operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 7.32A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 7.32A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job requirements interpreted. Any written instructions have been received and used. Those instructions have been interpreted correctly.

Criteria 7.32A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate machine selected to meet requirements. The machine selected is appropriate for that machining The range of machines and their operations can be
operation. identified.

Element 7.32A.2 Set up machine

Criteria 7.32A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools are selected where appropriate. The tools selected are appropriate for that operation. The range of tools for different purposes can be
identified.

Criteria 7.32A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cutting tools are sharpened as required. The cutting tools have been sharpened to meet job The consequences of incorrect sharpening can be
requirements. identified.

Criteria 7.32A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools are correctly installed using standard operating The tools holder, tools are held in by using the correct The consequences of tool holders, tools being
procedures. bolting/attachments, to suit the machine. incorrectly secured, can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 443 of 1445
 MEM 7.32A A Use workshop machines for basic operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.32A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate guards are set and adjusted as required. Guards have been set correctly. The consequences of not using guards etc., can be
identified.

Element 7.32A.3 Operate machine

Criteria 7.32A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material to be machined is positioned and secured. The material has been positioned correctly on the machine The various methods and manner of clamping can be
and that it has been securely clamped and that the clamps identified.
will not interfere with the machining operations.

Criteria 7.32A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine operated appropriately to suit job and material The machines are used to machine the material in a The operation of machines can be identified. Various
requirements. clamped position, using all necessary safety measures. safety problems can be identified. Consequence of
Appropriate machine settings are used. incorrect speeds and feeds understood.

Element 7.32A.4 Check finished component

Criteria 7.32A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machined component checked against requirements and The finished component is checked for size against The necessary checking procedures have been carried
predetermined finish. specifications. out. The reason for a poorly finished surface, can be
The finished machine surface is acceptable. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 444 of 1445
 MEM 7.32A A Use workshop machines for basic operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. This unit covers basic machining in a
maintenance or jobbing environment. The machines include but are not limited to lathe, radial arm drill, mills etc., and covers the sharpening of tools as required. This unit should
not be selected when Units 7.5A (Perform general machining) or 7.24A (Operate and monitor machine/process) have already been selected. For hand held/power tools use Unit
18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job, off the job of a combination The candidate will have access to:
of on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation required
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents:
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. - Any relevant workplace procedures
- Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications
- Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials
The candidate will be required to:
- Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor
- Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate
- Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit
Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all
elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will:
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, - demonstrate safe working practices at all times;
recording and reporting associated with the routine machining, - communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and and efficient working environment;
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate;
- perform all tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures;
- perform all tasks to specification;
- use accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 445 of 1445
 MEM 7.32A A Use workshop machines for basic operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 7.33A A Operate and monitor basic boiler

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Machine & process operations Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.2C11 Organise and analyse information 7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.2C11 Organise and analyse information 2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 7.33A.1 Select and use personnel protective equipment

Criteria 7.33A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select and use personal protective clothing and Personal protective clothing and equipment is selected The reasons for selecting personal protective clothing
equipment. and used, according to statutory requirements and and equipment can be given.
workplace procedures.

Element 7.33A.2 Carry out pre-operational checks

Criteria 7.33A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conduct pre-operational checks of boiler according to Pre-operational checks of boiler are conducted in The pre-operational checks such as feed water supply,
plant operating procedures. accordance with statutory requirements, manufacturer's boiler water level, fuel supply/heat source, boiler valves
recommendations and plant operating procedures. their operation and position, combustion air supply and
combustion equipment, can be identified.

Criteria 7.33A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify and report maintenance requirements as required. Maintenance requirements are identified and reported in The procedures for identifying and reporting
accordance with workplace procedures. maintenance requirements can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 446 of 1445
 MEM 7.33A A Operate and monitor basic boiler Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.33A.3 Maintain health and safety standards in work area

Criteria 7.33A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify and report hazards and potential hazards in work Hazards and potential hazards in work area are identified The statutory requirements and work place procedures
area. and reported in accordance with statutory requirements for identifying and reporting hazards in the work area
and work place procedures. such as chemical and thermal hazards, manual handling,
guarding of machinery, illumination of work area, rubbish
and combustibles, leakage of steam and fuel etc. can be
given.

Criteria 7.33A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select and use prevention/control measures as required. Prevention/control measures are selected and used in The prevention/control measures can be identified. The
accordance with statutory requirements and workplace reason for selecting the prevention/control method can
procedures. be given.

Element 7.33A.4 Start boiler

Criteria 7.33A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Start boiler and bring on line safely consistent with Boiler is started and brought on line safely, in accordance The processes for starting a boiler such as, heat input,
workplace procedures and production requirements. with statutory requirements, manufacturer's warm up of the reticulation system, steam traps and
recommendations and workplace procedures. steam line purge, systems operation, reticulation line
pressure, steam usage and supply can be identified.

Element 7.33A.5 Conduct hand over/take over procedures

Criteria 7.33A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Confirm operating status of boiler. Operating status of boiler is confirmed in accordance with The processes for confirming operational status of boiler
manufacturer's recommendations and workplace can be identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 447 of 1445
 MEM 7.33A A Operate and monitor basic boiler Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.33A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintain operating log and communicate boiler status Operating log is maintained clearly and accurately, in The procedures for maintaining operating log can be
and operation according to workplace procedures. accordance with statutory requirements and workplace given. The procedures for communicating boiler status
procedures. and operation can be given.
Boiler status and operation is communicated in accordance
with statutory requirements and workplace procedures.

Element 7.33A.6 Operate and monitor boiler

Criteria 7.33A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Boiler operated consistent with production and safety Boiler is monitored in accordance with statutory The procedures for monitoring a boiler such as, steam
requirements. requirements manufacturer's recommendations and reticulation line pressure, usage, supply and quality of
workplace procedures. steam, combustion/heat source system, feed water
system, fuel system combustion air supply, water level,
boiler steam pressures and operation of control/safety
devices etc. can be identified.

Criteria 7.33A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conduct boiler water quality tests to manufacturer's Boiler water quality tests are conducted in accordance The procedures for conducting boiler water quality tests
recommendations and workplace procedures. with manufacturer's recommendations and workplace can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 7.33A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjust boiler water quality as required to manufacturer's Boiler water quality is adjusted according to The procedures for adjusting boiler water quality can be
recommendations and workplace procedures. manufacturer's recommendations and workplace identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 448 of 1445
 MEM 7.33A A Operate and monitor basic boiler Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 7.33A.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Respond to boiler failures/emergencies and notify down Boiler failures/emergencies are responded to in accordance The procedures such as identification of emergency
stream users. with statutory requirements, manufacturer's isolation of heat source, operation of boiler, selection
recommendations and workplace procedures. and application of appropriate fire fighting equipment
and notification of down stream users etc. can be
identified.

Element 7.33A.7 Carry out boiler operational shut-down

Criteria 7.33A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Shut down boiler consistent with workplace procedures, Operational boiler is shut down is performed in accordance The processes and procedures such as confirming water
production and safety requirements. with statutory requirements, manufacturer's level, cooling down, boiler pressure/vacuum and
recommendations and workplace procedures. fuel/heat source isolation etc. when operationally
shutting down a boiler can be identified.

Element 7.33A.8 Carry out boiler shut-down for an internal inspection

Criteria 7.33A.8.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Shut down boiler for internal inspection manufacturer's Boiler is shut down for internal inspection in accordance The processes and procedures such as confirming boiler
recommendations and workplace procedures. with statutory requirements, manufacturer's cooling down, vacuum/pressure, fuel/heat source
recommendations and workplace procedures. isolation, removal of combustion equipment and water
from boiler, isolation form any common connection and
the opening of all access points required for inspection
etc. can be identified.

Criteria 7.33A.8.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Clean boiler internally and externally to manufacturer's Boiler is cleaned internally and externally according to The procedures for cleaning the boiler internally and
recommendations and workplace procedures. statutory requirements, manufacturer's recommendations externally can be identified.
and workplace procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 449 of 1445
 MEM 7.33A A Operate and monitor basic boiler Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 7.33A.9 Store boiler in shut-down mode

Criteria 7.33A.9.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify the appropriate mode of storage. The various modes of boiler storage can be given. The
reason for selecting the mode of boiler storage can be
given.

Criteria 7.33A.9.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Store the boiler in shut-down mode to manufacturer's Boiler is stored in accordance with statutory requirements, The procedures for storing the boiler in shut-down mode
recommendations and work place procedures. manufacturer's recommendations and work place can be identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 450 of 1445
 MEM 7.33A A Operate and monitor basic boiler Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the start up, take over/hand over and shut down of a basic boiler. Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a team, to predetermined standards of quality and
safety. Work includes inspection procedures as specified in the manufacturer's recommendations and workplace procedures, identification of maintenance requirements and hazard
control measures. All work carried out to State/Territory OHS legislation, standards and codes of practice. The boilers covered by this unit would have the following features: Single
fixed combustion air supply, non-modulating single heat source and fixed firing rate, and covers boilers used for all purposes including the generation of steam.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with either maintenance or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
production/process work, or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 451 of 1445
 MEM 8.1A A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.1A A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4

Element 8.1A.1 Load barrels etc., for mass finishing processes

Criteria 8.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machinery is correctly loaded regarding load mass. The components are correctly loaded into the surface The procedures for loading machinery for mass finishing
finishing machinery in accordance with standard operating processes can be given. The distribution of the
procedures. components within the machinery can be identified. The
reasons for distributing the components in the manner
selected can be explained.

Criteria 8.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine access openings are safely secured. The machine access openings are correctly secured in The procedures for securing machine access openings
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The consequences of not securing
machine access openings can be given.

Element 8.1A.2 Jig work for non-electrolytic processes

Criteria 8.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are appropriately secured using standard Where appropriate, the components to be surface finished The procedures for jigging work for non-electrolytic
operating procedures. using a non-electrolytic process are correctly secured in processes can be given. The precautions to be taken
accordance with standard operating procedures. when jigging work for non-electrolytic finishing
processes can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 452 of 1445
 MEM 8.1A A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.1A.3 Wire jig and rack work for electrolytic processes
Criteria 8.1A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct type and size of wire or rack is selected and The type and size of wire or rack appropriate for use in
inspected for conformance to specification. Damaged conjunction with surface finishing using electrolytic
racks are identified for repair or replacement. processes can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen size and type of wire or rack can be given.

Criteria 8.1A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are secured presenting appropriate faces Where appropriate, the components to be surface finished The faces to be surface finished/ coated can be
according to standard operating procedure. using an electrolytic process are correctly secured in identified. The procedures for securing the components
accordance with standard operating procedures. to be surface finished using electrolytic processes can be
given.

Element 8.1A.4 Unload, remove jigs after finishing

Criteria 8.1A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are unloaded and stacked without causing Surface finished components are unloaded and stacked in The procedures for unloading and stacking surface
damage to finish using standard operating procedures. a manner to minimise damage in accordance with standard finished components can be given. The damage that can
operating procedures. be caused by inappropriate handling and storing of
surface finished components can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 453 of 1445
 MEM 8.1A A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and operating procedures. This unit applies to loading and unloading
in preparation for a wide variety of pre-treatment and finishing processes of multiples of similar items. Typical processes include degreasing, de-scaling, surface blasting, flame
cleaning, wet blasting, grinding, polishing, wet coating, powder coating, electroplating, anodising, electroless plating, electrophoretic coating and hot dip metallising.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with wiring, jigging and loading of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
barrels for surface finishing processes or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. To be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
assessed as competent in this unit, the individual must jig work for at accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
least one of the surface finishing processes identified in elements involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
8.1A.2 and 8.1A.3. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all
prerequisites have been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 454 of 1445
MEM 8.2A B Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.2A B Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required for pre-treating common ferrous and non-ferrous work. It can apply to a range of different finishing processes, such as wet
coating, powder coating, electroplating, anodising, electroless plating, electrophoretic coating and hot dip metallising.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials

Element 8.2A.1 Identify job material

Criteria 8.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Common metals, alloys and non-metals are recognised Common metals, alloys and non-metals can be identified The characteristics of common metals, alloys and
from given samples non-metals can be identified The procedures and techniques
for identifying common metals, alloys and non-metals can
be given Simple tests that can be used to assist in the
identification of common metals, alloys and non-metals
can be described
Element 8.2A.2 Identify job surface condition
Criteria 8.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Common surface soils and conditions are recognised Common surface soils and conditions can be identified from The common surface soils and conditions can be identified
given samples The procedures for identifying the type(s) of soil on
surfaces to be finished can be given Simple tests that can be
used to assist in identifying surface soils and conditions can
be described
Element 8.2A.3 Perform pre-treatment processes in correct sequence
Criteria 8.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-treatment processes carried out following standard The appropriate pre-treatment processes are carried out in The pre-treatment processes applicable to a range of
operating procedures accordance with standard operating procedures materials can be identified The pre-treatment processes
applicable to a range of surface soils and conditions can be
identified The procedures for carrying out pre-treatment
processes can be given The pre-treatment processes most
suitable for given materials, surface soils and conditions can
be identified The reasons for selecting the chosen
pre-treatment process can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 455 of 1445
MEM 8.2A B Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-treatment process parameters are monitored to The pre-treatment process parameters are monitored and The parameters to be monitored when using different
ensure they remain within specified limits maintained within specified limits in accordance with pre-treatment processes can be identified The procedures
standard operating procedures for monitoring those parameters can be given The limits
within which the pre-treatment process parameters are to
be maintained can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 456 of 1445
MEM 8.2A B Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and operating procedures. Typical pre-treatment processes include
solvent and aqueous degreasing, pickling, de-scaling, bright dipping, rinsing, pre-plate dipping etc. This unit applies to pre-treatment of common ferrous and non-ferrous work for
finishing by a wide variety of processes, typical of which are, but not limited to: wet coating, powder coating, electroplating, anodising, electroless plating, electrophoretic coating
and hot dip metallising. Adjustments to apparatus/equipment/controls include temperature settings, current/voltage and solution compositions. This unit should not be selected if
Unit 8.3A (Perform electroplating operations) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the pre-treating of work for subsequent surface coatings or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 457 of 1445
MEM 8.3A B Perform electroplating operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.3A B Perform electroplating operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to start up, operate and monitor an electroplating process. It includes recognising and rectifying deviations and faults in
product/equipment/process. It applies to production and jobbing operations in protective coating, engineering or decorative processes. A basic knowledge of
electroplating solutions and handling procedures is required. This unit applies across a range of metal plating processes in the electroplating, electronics, jewellery
manufacture, and metal fabrication industries.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 8.1A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 8.3A.1 Identify electroplating requirements

Criteria 8.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electroplating requirements are identified Relevant information for plating is identified from drawings, Information relevant to plating products, treatment baths,
job instructions and specifications Machine/process settings is understood
requirements are identified, including raw materials, required
finish, appropriate settings
Criteria 8.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Untreated materials and required electroplating Untreated materials and treatments stages are correctly A variety of base materials that can be plated can be
treatment identified identified identified Pre-treatments, treatments and post treatments
can be identified in relation to task requirements
Element 8.3A.2 Prepare for electroplating process
Criteria 8.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials and racking arrangement checked for All incorrectly loaded work is rejected Job surface condition The procedures for rejecting incorrectly loaded work can be
non-conformance to specifications/job requirements is inspected Faults and imperfections are identified and given Effects of rust, corrosion and other contaminants
reported can be explained
Criteria 8.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All plant and equipment relevant to process checked for All plant and equipment is checked for conformance to Required equipment checks can be explained Purpose of
compliance with safety and operational requirements safety and operational requirements in accordance with checking equipment for correct operation can be explained
standard operating procedures Equipment checked includes The procedures for checking all plant and equipment
componentry, electrodes, circuitry equipment, solution associated with the relevant process can be given The
temperature, agitation equipment, filtration and fume hazards associated with electroplating processes can be
extraction identified The operational requirements of all plant and
equipment associated with the relevant process can be
identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 458 of 1445
MEM 8.3A B Perform electroplating operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.3A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instrumentation/gauges are checked for operation Voltage, amperage, temperature readings are checked and Different instruments/gauges, their purpose and typical
confirmed settings can be given

Criteria 8.3A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition of solution is checked Solution levels checked in accordance with standard Effects of contamination can be explained
operating procedure Visible contamination identified such as
solution clarity, oil, surface contamination
Element 8.3A.3 Perform electroplating operations
Criteria 8.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation steps are carried out in correct sequence Materials are moved from tank to tank in correct sequence Importance of avoiding carry over, fully immersing
according to standard operating procedure or work Significant surfaces are fully immersed Satisfactory significant surfaces and maintaining treatment times
instructions electrical contacts are maintained Correct times are observed understood Importance of maintaining satisfactory
for each tank Carry-over is minimised Correct distance electrical contact is understood
from electrodes is maintained
Criteria 8.3A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety precautions are observed Personal protective equipment is worn when necessary Safe The need for personal protective equipment and hazards
handling procedures are followed associated with the electroplating process can be given

Element 8.3A.4 Recognise and rectify process deviations

Criteria 8.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Compliance with operating parameters is ensured Operating parameters are monitored for accuracy Product The range of adjustments permissible for given operating
and treatment deviations are identified and appropriate parameters can be identified, including voltage, current and
adjustments made according to standard operating procedure temperature

Criteria 8.3A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Uncontrollable variances are reported to appropriate Correct reporting procedure is followed Variances outside the control of the operator can be
persons identified and explained

Criteria 8.3A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments are made to rectify process deviation Product faults/deviations are rectified by adjustment of Common faults and imperfections/deviations can be
settings such as voltage, current and temperature within identified Adjustments to suit specific process deviations
permissible limits and in accordance with job sheets, standard can be given
operating procedure or other documentation

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 459 of 1445
MEM 8.3A B Perform electroplating operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.3A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Finished products are visually inspected for compliance Faulty and abnormal appearance and deviations beyond the Faults, abnormal appearances and their causes can be given
to specification control of the operator are reported to appropriate Corrective actions for specific problems can be given
authority Corrective actions within operator control are
identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 460 of 1445
MEM 8.3A B Perform electroplating operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the general operation, monitoring and adjustment of manual, semi and automatic electroplating processes. It includes volume production and "jobbing" involving
rack and barrel type processes. Relevant industries include electroplating, electronics, jewellery manufacture, metal fabrication industries. Electroplating applications may
typically include engineering coatings, protective finishes, decorative plating. Work may be performed autonomously, or in a team. Work is performed to established processes,
practices and standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Straightforward adjustment to process settings relates to controllable variances within defined parameters and
according to standard operating procedure. Knowledge of safe operating procedures, safety and personal protective equipment, hazards of specific solutions is required. Work
instructions may include standard operating procedures, verbal and written job instructions, job cards, specifications, drawings. Basic knowledge of electroplating process, machine
components, treatment solutions, process parameters is covered by this unit. This unit should not be selected if Unit 7.25A (Advanced machine/process operation) has already
been selected. Where simple operating and monitoring of the electroplating process is required Unit 7.24A (Operate and monitor machine/process) should be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the finishing of work using electroplating solutions or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 461 of 1445
 MEM 8.4A A Finish work using wet, dry and vapour deposition methods Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.4A A Finish work using wet, dry and vapour deposition methods
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
8.2A Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials

Element 8.4A.1 Assess preparation of work for correct coating process

Criteria 8.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings and/or operation sheets are interpreted and All relevant drawings, specifications and/or instructions The work to be undertaken can be identified. The coating
understood for coating specification and components are are obtained in accordance with work place procedures. process to be used can be identified. The coating
racked accordingly. The components to be coated are correctly racked in specifications can be identified. The appropriate type of
accordance with standard operating procedures. racking for the coating process can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen rack type can be
explained. The procedures for racking components to be
coated can be given.

Element 8.4A.2 Performs simple mixing and estimating operations

Criteria 8.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mixing ratios calculated and a range of wet coatings The correct mixing ratios for given wet coatings are The source of data on mixing ratios for wet coatings can
mixed and thinned as required to standard operating calculated accurately. Where appropriate the given wet be identified. The mixing ratio for the given task(s) can be
procedure. coatings are mixed and thinned where required in identified. The function of thinners as applied to the
accordance with standard operating procedures. application of wet coatings can be explained. The
procedures to be followed when mixing wet coatings can
be given.

Criteria 8.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities of wet coatings required estimated using The surface area to be coated is calculated correctly. The surface area to be coated can be identified. The
simple surface area calculations. Where appropriate the quantities of wet coating materials coverage rate of the coating material to be applied can be
are correctly estimated in accordance with standard identified. The procedures for estimating quantities of
operating procedures. coating materials can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 462 of 1445
 MEM 8.4A A Finish work using wet, dry and vapour deposition methods Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.4A.3 Perform coating operation

Criteria 8.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment set up to specification using standard The appropriate coating equipment is set up in accordance The types of equipment used for a variety of coating
operating procedures. with specifications and standard operating procedures. processes can be identified. The appropriate coating
equipment for the given task(s) can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen equipment can be
explained. The operating procedures applicable to the
selected coating equipment can be identified.

Criteria 8.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating and applied curing technique monitored to The coating is correctly applied using the appropriate A range of coating techniques can be identified. A range
standard operating procedure. technique in accordance with standard operating of curing techniques can be identified. The appropriate
procedures. The coating is correctly cured using the coating and curing technique for the given task(s) can be
appropriate technique in accordance with standard identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen coating
operating procedures. The coating and curing process are and curing techniques can be explained. The monitoring
monitored for correct operation in accordance with procedures to be followed can be identified. Examples of
standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, coating defects can be given. The causes of coating
coating defects are rectified/reported in accordance with defects can be explained. Where appropriate, the
standard operating procedures. procedures for rectifying coating defects can be
identified. Where appropriate, the procedures for
reporting coating defects can be identified.

Criteria 8.4A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating thickness and colour checked and maintained for The coating thickness and colour is maintained in The coating thickness and colour to be achieved can be
compliance with specifications. accordance with specifications throughout the coating identified. The means of checking coating thickness and
operation. The coating thickness and colour is checked in colour can be identified. The frequency at which checks
accordance with standard operating procedures. are undertaken can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 463 of 1445
 MEM 8.4A A Finish work using wet, dry and vapour deposition methods Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to finishing work using a range of wet and dry organic coatings, typical of which are electrostatic powder coating, electrophoretic coating, industrial spray coating
and lacquering, electroless" (auto catalytic) nickel or copper plating, phosphating, chromating, galvanising, hot tinning, sputter deposition, vacuum evaporation, ion plating, paints,
stains and other liquid finishes. Processing may be carried out in manual, semi or fully automatic plant. Applications may be by hand or utilising a wide range of machines or plants.
Where straightforward monitoring of semi or automatic machine or process is undertaken, then Unit 7.24A (Operate and monitor machine/process) should be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the finishing of work using and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
wet, dry and vapour deposition methods or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 464 of 1445
MEM 8.5A A Prepare and produce specialised coatings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.5A A Prepare and produce specialised coatings

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to prepare and produce specialised industrial films on a variety of work pieces, often on a one-off basis. Typical of the
coatings are heavy (hard) chromium or nickel, heavy electroless nickel, "hard" anodising and selective (brush) plating; also included is the electrodeposition of
"difficult"
metals such as iron and certain alloys.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

8.2A Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials

Element 8.5A.1 Mask and jig work

Criteria 8.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Jigs are secure and masking is adherent and stable The electroplating jigs are secure The masking is in The procedures for ensuring that jigs are secure can be
place and is stable given The reasons for masking work being
electroplated can be given The materials that are to be
used for masking purposes can be identified The
procedures for securing the masking material in place
can be given

Criteria 8.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary auxiliary electrodes and shields are Where appropriate, auxiliary electrodes and shields are The reasons for using auxiliary electrodes and shields
incorporated effectively set up in accordance with standard operating procedures can be explained The procedures for mounting/setting
up auxiliary electrodes and shields can be given
Criteria 8.5A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary jigs and shields are manufactured Where appropriate, jigs and shields are manufactured in The specifications of the jigs and shields to be
accordance with specifications and standard operating manufactured can be identified The procedures for
procedures manufacturing jigs and shields can be given

Element 8.5A.2 Determine operating parameters

Criteria 8.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plating knowledge and/or specifications applied in The operating parameters are correctly calculated The procedures and formulae for calculating operating
correctly computing operating times, currents and/or times, currents and voltages can be given The
voltages specifications of the surface finish to be achieved can
be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 465 of 1445
MEM 8.5A A Prepare and produce specialised coatings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 8.5A.3 Pre-treat and treat work
Criteria 8.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work treated in accordance with specifications using The work is treated in accordance with specifications and The procedures for pre-treating the work can be given
standard operating procedures standard operating procedures The procedures for treating the work after
electroplating can be given The pre and
post-electroplating treatment specifications can be
identified The reasons for pre and post-electroplating
treatment of surfaces can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 466 of 1445
MEM 8.5A A Prepare and produce specialised coatings Metal and Engineering Training Package

Range statement
This unit applies to specialised production of industrial films on a variety of work pieces, often on a one-off basis. Typical of the coatings are heavy (hard) chromium or
nickel, heavy electroless nickel, "hard" anodising and selective (brush) plating; also included is the electrodeposition of "difficult" metals such as iron and certain alloys.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the Criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the production of specialised and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
coatings electrolytically or other units requiring the exercise of the - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 467 of 1445
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
MEM 8.6A A Produce clear and/or coloured and/or sealed anodised films on aluminium Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.6A A Produce clear and/or coloured and/or sealed anodised films on aluminium
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
8.2A Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating

Element 8.6A.1 Perform a series of anodising steps

Criteria 8.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All steps are carried out in the correct sequence All steps in the aluminium anodising process are carried The steps to be carried out in anodising aluminium can
according to standard operating procedure. out in the correct sequence in accordance with standard be identified. The correct sequence of the steps can be
operating procedures. identified. The procedures to be followed when
anodising aluminium can be given.

Criteria 8.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct masking techniques used where required. Where appropriate, the correct masking materials and The reasons for masking surfaces during the anodising
techniques are used in accordance with standard process can be given. The materials and techniques to be
operating procedures. used for masking purposes can be identified. The
procedures for masking materials during anodising can
be given.

Criteria 8.6A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct action is taken to minimise contact marks and The anodising process is carried out in a manner which The causes of contact marks and shielding during the
shielding. minimises contact marks and shielding. anodising process can be identified. The procedures for
minimising contact marks and shielding can be given.

Element 8.6A.2 Assess preparation of work for correct jigging/loading

Criteria 8.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work is correctly connected for the required current flow The work is correctly connected to the required electrical The procedures for connecting the work to the required
and minimum contact marks and shielding. current in accordance with standard operating procedures. electrical current can be given. The electrical current
required for the anodising process can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 468 of 1445
 MEM 8.6A A Produce clear and/or coloured and/or sealed anodised films on aluminium Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All incorrectly loaded work is rejected. All incorrectly loaded work is rejected in accordance with The procedures for rejecting incorrectly loaded work can
standard operating procedures. be given.

Element 8.6A.3 Anodise work by a series of treatment steps

Criteria 8.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All steps are carried out in the correct sequence All steps in the anodising process are carried out in the
according to standard operating procedure. correct sequence in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Element 8.6A.4 Seal or dye and seal anodised work

Criteria 8.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All steps on work are carried out in the correct sequence All steps in the sealing/dye and seal process are carried The steps to be carried out in the seal/dye and seal
according to standard operating procedure. out in the correct sequence in accordance with standard process can be identified. The correct sequence of the
operating procedures. steps can be identified. The procedures to be followed in
the seal/dye and seal process can be given.

Element 8.6A.5 Monitor and control operating parameters

Criteria 8.6A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensure process parameters remain within specified limits. The process parameters are maintained within specified The process parameters to be maintained can be
limits in accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The limits within which each process
parameter is to be maintained can be identified. The
procedures for monitoring and maintaining the process
parameters within the specified limits can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 469 of 1445
 MEM 8.6A A Produce clear and/or coloured and/or sealed anodised films on aluminium Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Applies to the production of sealed anodised films on aluminium and its alloys. Films may be clear or coloured; colouring is produced by dying or by "in bath" processes.
Applications include electrical, decorative, mechanical and architectural purposes.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the anodising of aluminium or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 470 of 1445
 MEM 8.7A A Control surface finish production and finished product quality Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.7A A Control surface finish production and finished product quality
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4

Element 8.7A.1 Understand principles of quality assurance

Criteria 8.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Apply quality assurance standards as per enterprise The quality assurance standards are applied in accordance The quality assurance standards as applied to surface
specifications. with enterprise procedures. finish production and product quality can be identified.

Element 8.7A.2 Apply research or quality data to production process

Criteria 8.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Liaises with in-house/external control laboratories. Appropriate liaison occurs between the individual and the The procedures for liaising with internal/external control
control laboratory in accordance with standard operating laboratories can be given. The role of the control
procedures. laboratory can be identified.

Criteria 8.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correctly interprets data and demonstrates All relevant test and/or production data is obtained in Surface finish specifications can be identified. Any
understanding in recommending process changes. accordance with standard operating procedures. Where deviations of test/production data from specifications
appropriate, changes to the process are recommended in can be identified. The likely causes of those deviations
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be explained. The procedures for recommending
changes to the surface finishing process can be given.

Criteria 8.7A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process changes are effectively implemented. Where appropriate, the changes to the surface finishing The procedures for implementing changes to the surface
process are implemented in accordance with standard finishing process can be given.
operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 471 of 1445
 MEM 8.7A A Control surface finish production and finished product quality Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.7A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Computes and/or makes changes/corrections to The changes to process parameters are calculated on the The procedures and formulae for determining process
processes using laboratory/research data. basis of test and production data collected. parameters can be given. The effect of varying process
parameters on the specification of the surface finish can
be explained.

Element 8.7A.3 Perform quality tests to industry standards

Criteria 8.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Testing performed as required by standard operating The surface coating is tested for conformance with The tests applicable to surface coatings can be
procedures. specification using appropriate tests, testing equipment identified. The equipment and techniques necessary to
and techniques in accordance with standard operating carry out those tests can be identified. The procedures
procedures. for testing surface coatings for conformance to
specification can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 472 of 1445
 MEM 8.7A A Control surface finish production and finished product quality Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Finished product quality control can include tests for hardness, adhesion, deposit stress, thickness, corrosion, resistance and appearance, using standard instruments and
methods. Analyses are confined to the use of basic instruments such as pH meters, hydrometers, stalagmometers, laboratory balances.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the control of surface finish and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
production and product quality or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 473 of 1445
 MEM 8.8A A Operate and control surface finishing waste treatment process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.8A A Operate and control surface finishing waste treatment process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 3
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials

Element 8.8A.1 Load waste product

Criteria 8.8A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Waste from production process obtained via established The waste from the production process is obtained safely The procedures for obtaining waste from the production
procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. process can be given. The hazards associated with
handling waste products can be identified. The
appropriate personal protective equipment and clothing
can be identified.

Criteria 8.8A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Waste loaded in accordance with standard operating The waste is safely loaded in accordance with standard The storage requirements of the waste/effluent can be
procedures for waste/effluent. operating procedures. identified. The procedures for loading the stored
waste/effluent for transport can be identified. The safety
precautions to be taken when handling/loading the
waste/ effluent can be identified.

Element 8.8A.2 Monitor plant for waste by-products

Criteria 8.8A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All process parameters are accurately monitored and All process parameters are monitored in accordance with The process parameters to be monitored can be
recorded to identify waste/effluent. standard operating procedures. The process parameters identified. The procedures for monitoring process
are accurately recorded in accordance with standard parameters and identifying waste/effluent can be given.
operating procedures. The condition of waste/effluent is The procedures for recording process parameters can be
identified from the process parameters recorded. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 474 of 1445
 MEM 8.8A A Operate and control surface finishing waste treatment process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.8A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Recording devices are checked for correct/continuous The recording devices are checked for correct/continuous The process parameter recording devices can be
operation. operation in accordance with standard operating identified. The procedures for checking process
procedures. parameter recording devices can be given.

Element 8.8A.3 Adjust process

Criteria 8.8A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Knowledge of waste treatment processes applied in Appropriate adjustments are made to the waste treatment The adjustments that can be made to the waste treatment
determining appropriate adjustments. process in accordance with standard operating process and their effect on the condition of the waste
procedures. can be explained. The procedures for adjusting process
parameters can be given.

Criteria 8.8A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process parameters checked to ensure they remain within Process parameters are checked for conformance to The procedures for checking process parameters can be
specified limits. specification in accordance with standard operating given. The specified limits for each process parameter
procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 8.8A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All adjustments are made to accord with authority The condition of the waste is maintained in accordance The relevant authority with respect to the
requirements with regard to waste. with the requirements of the relevant authority by making handling/disposal of waste can be identified. The
appropriate adjustments to the process parameters. authority's waste specifications can be identified.

Criteria 8.8A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
In the event of mechanical failure, appropriate corrective Where appropriate, a suitable corrective action is taken in The procedures for handling waste in the event of a
action is undertaken. response to a mechanical failure in accordance with mechanical failure can be given. The corrective action to
standard operating procedures. be taken can be identified. The reasons for taking the
proposed corrective action can be given. The legislative
and regulatory requirements relating to waste
management can be identified. The possible effects of
surface finishing waste on the environment can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 475 of 1445
 MEM 8.8A A Operate and control surface finishing waste treatment process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the purification of metal finishing effluent waters which typically contain cyanides, hexavalent chromium, heavy metal cations, certain anions, greases, etc.
Methods used may include chemical treatments, grease entrapment, metals precipitation and separation, ion exchange, reverse osmosis and gas scrubbing; and involve full or
partial recovery of waste waters and chemicals. Process parameters may include; pH, Oxidisation Reduction Potential (REDOX) or temperature.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation and control of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
surface finishing waste treatment processes or other units requiring plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 476 of 1445
MEM 8.9A B Make up solutions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.9A B Make up solutions

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required to make up solutions and maintain process specific equipment, such a probes and electrodes. Maintenance of solution ratio
and purity is covered by other units.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials

Element 8.9A.1 Prepare solution

Criteria 8.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify appropriate solution for application All relevant job instructions, specifications, etc. are obtained The application for which the solution is required can be
requirements or specifications in accordance with workplace procedures identified The appropriate solutions for a range of
applications can be identified The reason for selecting the
chosen solutions can be given
Criteria 8.9A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Volumes, density and solution concentration calculated The relevant areas, volumes, density and solution
for effective operation concentration are calculated The procedures for
determining the appropriate solution concentration can be
given The effect of solution concentration on the
efficiency of the surface finish process can be identified
Criteria 8.9A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Suitable volume of solution made up from supplier's A suitable volume of the appropriate solution is prepared in The procedures for making up suitable volumes of the
instructions and/or manual in accordance with standard accordance with standard operating procedures solution for the surface finishing process can be given The
operating procedures specification of the solution to be made up can be identified

Criteria 8.9A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spent solutions are referred to waste treatment Spent solutions are sent for waste treatment in accordance The procedures for sending spent solutions for waste
processing in accordance with standard operating with standard operating procedures treatment can be given
procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 477 of 1445
MEM 8.9A B Make up solutions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 8.9A.2 Maintain process specific equipment
Criteria 8.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection of probes and electrodes carried out and Probes and electrodes are inspected in accordance with The procedures for inspecting probes and electrodes can be
meter probes recalibrated as required standard operating procedures Where appropriate, meter given The procedures for recalibrating meter probes can be
probes are calibrated using appropriate equipment and given The equipment and techniques necessary to
techniques in accordance with standard operating procedures recalibrate meter probes can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 478 of 1445
MEM 8.9A B Make up solutions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously and/or in a team environment. Standard operational procedures for solution preparation include compliance with standards, codes, legislation,
company and customer requirements. This unit should not be selected if Unit 18.18A (Electroplate engineering coatings), Unit 18.19A (Electroplate protective coatings) and/or
Unit 18.20A (Electroplate decorative coatings) has been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the maintenance of basic surface finishing solutions or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 479 of 1445
 MEM 8.10A A Manually finish/polish materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.10A A Manually finish/polish materials

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 8.10A.1 Select appropriate finishing procedure

Criteria 8.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface finish specifications understood and correct All relevant job instructions, drawings and specifications The work to be undertaken can be identified. The material
procedure selected. are obtained in accordance with work place procedures. to be finished/polished can be identified. The
specifications of the surface finish can be identified. The
methods of finishing/polishing materials can be
identified. The applications of each finishing/ polishing
method in terms of the materials to be finished/polished
and the surface finished to be achieved can be identified.
The most appropriate finishing/ polishing method for the
work to be undertaken can be identified The reasons for
selecting the chosen finishing method can be given.

Criteria 8.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate finish and/or polishing equipment/media
selected.

Element 8.10A.2 Install and set up grinding and polishing devices

Criteria 8.10A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Endless belt linishers fitted according to standard Endless belts are fitted and correctly adjusted on linishing The procedure for fitting and adjusting endless belts on
operating procedure. machines in accordance with standard operating linishing machines can be given. The tools and
procedures. techniques required to fit and adjust endless belts can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 480 of 1445
 MEM 8.10A A Manually finish/polish materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.10A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Grinding wheels and mops fitted and dressed according Grinding wheels and mops are fitted and dressed on The procedures for fitting and dressing grinding wheels
to standard operating procedure. pedestal grinders in accordance with standard operating and mops can be given. The tools and techniques
procedures. required to fit and dress grinding wheels and mops can
be identified.

Criteria 8.10A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Polishing mops installed and set up according to Polishing mops are installed and set up in polishing The procedures for installing and setting up polishing
standard operating procedure. machines in accordance with standard operating mops can be given. The tools and techniques required to
procedures. install and set up polishing mops can be identified.

Element 8.10A.3 Identify job materials

Criteria 8.10A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Common metals, alloys and non-metals recognised. Common metals, alloys and non-metals can be identified
from given material samples. The appropriate polishing
media to be used in finishing/polishing different types of
material can be identified. The reasons for using different
polishing media on different materials can be given. The
effect of different types and grades of polishing media on
the surface finish achieved can be explained.

Element 8.10A.4 Identify job surface condition

Criteria 8.10A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Common surface imperfections recognised. Common surface imperfections/defects can be identified.
Those surface imperfections/defects that can be
removed/repaired by manual finishing/polishing
procedures can be identified. The procedures for
handling components with surface imperfections/defects
that cannot be removed/repaired can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 481 of 1445
 MEM 8.10A A Manually finish/polish materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.10A.5 Assess processing hazards associated with workpiece size and shape
Criteria 8.10A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hazards correctly identified. The hazards associated with the manual
finishing/polishing process can be identified. The
appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment
can be identified.

Criteria 8.10A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safe working procedures followed. All work is carried out safely in accordance with safety The relevant safety procedures can be identified.
and standard operating procedures.

Element 8.10A.6 Grind, finish, brush and/or polish job

Criteria 8.10A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job surface finished to specification using standard The most appropriate surface finishing/polishing method The appropriate polishing medium for the work to be
operating procedures. and medium is used to finish the surface to specification in undertaken can be identified. The procedures for
accordance with standard operating procedures. finishing the work to specification can be given. The
specification of the surface to be finished can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 482 of 1445
 MEM 8.10A A Manually finish/polish materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Applies to finishing work made from a variety of materials, including cast iron, steel, zinc and its alloys, copper, aluminium and its alloys, bronzes, sterling silver, gold and plastics.
Equipment used includes endless belt grinders, table linishers, pedestal grinders and polishers, felt wheels, fabric mops and brushes, with underhand and overhand techniques and
flexible drive appliances. The variety of media employed includes solid and liquid compositions containing alumina, silicon carbide, diamond dust, tripoli, calcium oxide and iron
oxides. This unit is not intended to apply in situations where touch-up finishing related to maintenance or assembly activities is undertaken.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the manual and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
finishing/polishing of materials or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 483 of 1445
 MEM 8.11A A Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.11A A Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 8.11A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 8.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work requirements determined from job sheet, All relevant drawings, job sheets, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
instructions or other pre-determined specifications in instructions are obtained in accordance with work place specifications applying to the work can be identified and
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures. Where appropriate, the surface/s to be understood.
prepared are inspected by the individual in accordance
with work place procedures.

Criteria 8.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required, appropriate solvent and solvent Correct solvent and application process determined from A variety of surface conditions for which solvents are
application selected to meet job specification. job specifications/instructions. appropriate can be identified. The solvent/s appropriate
to given conditions can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen solvents can be explained.

Criteria 8.11A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required, appropriate mechanical equipment Correct mechanical equipment for cleaning the job surface Appropriate mechanical equipment required for surface
selected to meet job specification. is selected. preparation to meet job specification can be identified.

Criteria 8.11A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work site prepared for surface cleaning activities. Site is prepared with due regard to OH&S requirements Safety issues can be clearly identified and explained,
including site safety, clear working space, other adequate precautions determined and identified,
materials/structures/personnel in the vicinity, isolation of awareness of other site factors that could be affected by
work site where required. the work.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 484 of 1445
 MEM 8.11A A Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.11A.2 Set up equipment

Criteria 8.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment and any required consumables Appropriate equipment is correctly set up in accordance The equipment for the selected method can be identified,
assembled, set up and prepared correctly and safely in with specifications and procedures. Any consumables are assembled and set up as required. The set up procedures
accordance with manufacture’s specifications and safely set up and prepared in accordance with are clearly understood. All safety procedures are
standard operating procedures. specifications and procedures. understood and applied.

Element 8.11A.3 Prepare surfaces using solvents as required

Criteria 8.11A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe working environment for solvent use established The work environment has been established to meet all The requirements for a safe working environment in
according to regulatory requirements and standard safety requirements. which solvents are to be used can be identified. All
operating procedures. relevant regulatory requirements are identified and
understood.

Criteria 8.11A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Solvents applied correctly. Solvents are used correctly and in accordance with The safety and operating procedures to be followed
manufacturer’s specifications, safety requirements and when using solvents to prepare surfaces can be
standard operating procedures. identified. The specifications applying to the surface to
be prepared can be identified, understood and applied.

Criteria 8.11A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Treated surface neutralised and made safe to handle. The solvents used to prepare the surface are neutralised The reasons and methods for neutralising solvents on
according to manufacture’s specifications and standard completion of surface preparation can be identified and
operating procedures. explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 485 of 1445
 MEM 8.11A A Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.11A.4 Prepare surfaces using mechanical means as required

Criteria 8.11A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe working environment for mechanical surface The work environment has been established to meet all The requirements for a safe working environment in
preparation established according to regulatory safety requirements. which mechanical surface preparation means are to be
requirements and standard operating procedures. used can be identified. All relevant regulatory
requirements are identified and understood.

Criteria 8.11A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surfaces prepared using mechanical means. Mechanical equipment is used to prepare surface to The safety and operating procedures to be followed
specified standards in accordance with standard operating when using mechanical equipment to prepare surfaces
procedures. can be identified. The specifications applying to the
surface to be prepared can be identified, understood and
applied.

Criteria 8.11A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical equipment cleaned and checked for damage Mechanical equipment cleaned and checked in accordance The standards procedures and manufacturer’s
and operational faults, in accordance with standard with standard operating procedures. Operational faults specifications for cleaning, checking and storing
operating procedures. identified, faults are recorded and reported in accordance mechanical equipment are understood.
with standard operating procedures. Equipment is stored
in good condition in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 8.11A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment faults recorded and reported in accordance Faults are recorded and reported to appropriate personnel Standard procedures for recording and reporting faulty
with standard operating procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment are understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 486 of 1445
 MEM 8.11A A Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.11A.5 Inspect prepared surface

Criteria 8.11A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface preparation assessed for cleanliness and The surface condition is checked and inspected in The standard operating procedures and job
conformance with specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures and specifications for checking prepared surfaces can be
against job specifications. identified and understood.

Criteria 8.11A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults or defects rectified where required and inspection All rectification work undertaken to meet job specifications Appropriate rectification techniques can be described.
results recorded and reported in accordance with and recording/reporting undertaken using standard The recording/reporting procedures for job inspection
standard operating procedures. operating procedures. can be identified and understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 487 of 1445
 MEM 8.11A A Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a team environment to established predetermined processes, practices and specifications including environmental requirements.
Application of surface preparations can apply to metal and non-metal materials. Solvents refer to a range of cleaning chemicals including acids, hydrocarbons etc. The application of
solvents may include spraying, wiping, brushing etc. Mechanical means/equipment includes the use of hand tools and hand held tools used for surface preparation work. All work
and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the preparation of surfaces and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
using blasting processes and/or solvents or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 488 of 1445
 MEM 8.12A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.12A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
8.16A Control blast coating by-products, materials and 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
emissions

Element 8.12A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 8.12A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work requirements determined from job sheet, All relevant drawings, job sheets, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
instructions or other pre-determined specifications in instructions are obtained in accordance with work place specifications applying to the work can be identified and
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures. Where appropriate, the surface/s to be understood.
Prepared are inspected by the individual in accordance
with work place procedures.

Criteria 8.12A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate abrasive blasting process, equipment and Correct blasting equipment and media for cleaning the job Appropriate blasting equipment and media required for
media identified to meet job specification. surface is selected. surface preparation to meet job specification can be
identified.

Criteria 8.12A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work site prepared for surface cleaning activities. Site is prepared with due regard to OH&S requirements Safety issues can be clearly identified and explained,
including site safety, clear working space, other adequate precautions determined and identified,
materials/structures/personnel in the vicinity, isolation of awareness of other site factors that could be affected by
work site where required. the work.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 489 of 1445
 MEM 8.12A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.12A.2 Set up equipment

Criteria 8.12A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment and any required consumables Appropriate equipment is correctly set up in accordance The equipment for the selected method can be identified,
assembled, set up and prepared correctly and safely in with specifications and procedures. Any consumables are assembled and set up as required. The set up procedures
accordance with manufacture’s specifications and safely set up and prepared in accordance with are clearly understood. All safety procedures are
standard operating procedures. specifications and procedures. understood and applied.

Criteria 8.12A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct rust inhibitor for use in wet abrasive blast Rust inhibitor for use in wet abrasive blast methods is The importance of using an appropriate rust inhibitor in
methods is selected where required. selected where required in accordance with standard wet blasting operations is understood and the selection
operating procedures. procedures can be explained.

Criteria 8.12A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre operational checks are carried out on equipment and Pre operational checks are carried out in accordance with The method and process for undertaking pre operational
faults are rectified or reported for further action. manufacturer’s specifications and standard operating checks can be identified and is understood.
procedures.

Element 8.12A.3 Prepare surfaces using abrasive blasting

Criteria 8.12A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Blasting equipment is operated in accordance with The surface is cleaned in accordance with standard The procedure for using abrasive blasting equipment can
standard operating procedures. operating procedures. Appropriate personal protective be identified. All relevant regulatory requirements are
equipment is used correctly. identified and understood.

Criteria 8.12A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency shut down procedures can be undertaken. Blasting equipment can be shut down in accordance with The safety and standard operating procedures to be
manufacturer’s specifications, safety requirements and followed when shutting down equipment can be
standard operating procedures. identified and are understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 490 of 1445
 MEM 8.12A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.12A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work procedures undertaken to appropriate Work activities performed in accordance with standard The relevant environmental legislation/regulations and
environmental requirements. operating procedures and relevant environmental requirements are understood as well as the use of
legislation/regulations. appropriate operating procedures.

Criteria 8.12A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Abrasive media disposal carried out in accordance with All abrasive media disposal in carried out in accordance The standard operating procedures for abrasive media
standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. disposal can be identified and are understood.

Criteria 8.12A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Blasting equipment is cleaned and disassembled and Blasting equipment cleaned and checked in accordance The standards procedures and manufacturer’s
inspected in accordance with manufacturer’s with standard operating procedures. Operational faults specifications for cleaning, checking and storing blasting
specifications and standard operating procedures. identified, faults are recorded and reported in accordance equipment are understood.
with standard operating procedures. Equipment is stored
in good condition in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 8.12A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment faults are recorded and reported in accordance Faults are recorded and reported to appropriate personnel Standard procedures for recording and reporting faulty
with standard operating procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment are understood.

Element 8.12A.4 Inspect prepared surface

Criteria 8.12A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface preparation assessed for cleanliness and The surface condition is checked and inspected in The standard operating procedures and job
conformance with specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures and specifications for checking prepared surfaces can be
against job specifications. identified and understood.

Criteria 8.12A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults or defects are rectified where required and All rectification work undertaken to meet job specifications Appropriate rectification techniques can be described.
inspection results recorded and reported in accordance and recording/reporting undertaken using standard The recording/reporting procedures for job inspection
with standard operating procedures. operating procedures. can be identified and understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 491 of 1445
 MEM 8.12A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Range statement
This unit is designed to be used where a basic level of skill is desired in surface preparation by abrasive blasting. Equipment used includes but is not limited to electric and diesel
compressors, blast pots, blast rooms, centrifugal blast machines, water pressure washers to 35,000 kpa, air hoses and nozzles, and specified hand and power tools. Routine
maintenance tasks may include cleaning, lubricating, consumable replacements, and simple equipment repairs and adjustments using engineering principles, tools, equipment and
procedures to statutory and regulatory requirements. Specific health and safety issues include noise, heat stress, compressed air, high pressure water, dust full body cover and
particulate matter, hazardous materials and by-products. Personal protection equipment includes blast helmets, air respirators, eye protection, safety boots, and noise protection.
The majority of work is in a team environment and uses predetermined procedures and standards for safety and quality with all work and work practices undertaken to regulatory
and legislative requirements. Reference is made to supplier information and specifications as well as accepted and appropriate Australian and International Standards.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with surface cleaning or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 492 of 1445
 MEM 8.13A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.13A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (advanced)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
8.12A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic) 8.16A Control blast coating by-products, materials and 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
emissions

Element 8.13A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 8.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work requirements determined from job sheet, All relevant drawings, job sheets, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
instructions or other specifications in accordance with instructions are obtained in accordance with work place specifications applying to the work can be identified and
standard operating procedures. procedures. Where appropriate, the surface(s) to be understood.
prepared are inspected by the individual in accordance
with work place procedures.

Criteria 8.13A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate abrasive blasting process and equipment Correct blasting process and equipment for cleaning the Appropriate blasting process and equipment required for
selected to meet job specification. job surface is selected. surface preparation to meet job specification can be
identified. Features of the various types of dry, vacuum
automatic rotary, centrifugal and water blasting
(including HP and UHP) can be described. Selection
procedures for blast nozzles can be described.

Criteria 8.13A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate abrasive blasting media and equipment Correct blasting media for cleaning the job surface is Appropriate blasting media required for surface
selected to meet job specification. selected. preparation to meet job specification can be identified.
Features of various types of blasting media can be
described, including identification and comparison of
size, shape, hardness, density, general composition and
efficiency.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 493 of 1445
 MEM 8.13A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.13A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work site prepared for surface cleaning activities. Site is prepared with due regard to OH&S requirements Safety issues can be clearly identified and explained,
including site safety, clear working space, other adequate precautions determined and identified,
materials/structures/personnel in the vicinity, isolation of awareness of other site factors that could be affected by
work site where required. the work.

Element 8.13A.2 Set up equipment

Criteria 8.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment and any required consumables Appropriate equipment is correctly set up in accordance The equipment for the selected method can be identified,
assembled, set up and prepared correctly and safely in with specifications and procedures. Any consumables are assembled and set up as required. Correct pressures
accordance with manufacture’s specifications and safely set up and prepared in accordance with selected to suit blast nozzle, media and consumption
standard operating procedures. specifications and procedures. Appropriate media sample differentials. The set up procedures are clearly
testing carried out and non-conformance rectified and understood. All safety procedures are understood and
reported where required and in accordance with applied. Media sampling and testing procedures are
specifications and procedures. identified and understood.

Criteria 8.13A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct rust inhibitor for use in wet abrasive blast Rust inhibitor for use in wet abrasive blast methods is The importance of using an appropriate rust inhibitor in
methods is selected where required. selected where required in accordance with standard wet blasting operations is understood and the selection
operating procedures. procedures can be explained.

Criteria 8.13A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre operational checks are carried out on equipment and Pre operational checks are carried out in accordance with The method and process for undertaking pre operational
faults are rectified or reported for further action. manufacturer’s specifications and standard operating checks can be identified and is understood.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 494 of 1445
 MEM 8.13A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.13A.3 Inspect surface prior to cleaning

Criteria 8.13A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspect work piece prior to cleaning in accordance with Work piece is inspected and any faults identified in The inspection procedure is identified and understood.
standard operating procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures. Unsuitable work pieces can be determined in
consideration of job specifications.

Criteria 8.13A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identified faults/defects requiring remedial or pre Identified faults/defects requiring remedial or pre treatment Standard operating procedures for identifying
treatment action are reported as required. action are reported in accordance with standard operating faults/defects can be identified and are understood.
procedures.

Element 8.13A.4 Prepare surfaces using abrasive blasting

Criteria 8.13A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Blasting equipment is operated in accordance with The surface is cleaned in accordance with standard The procedure for using abrasive blasting equipment can
standard operating procedures. operating procedures. Appropriate personal protective be identified. All relevant regulatory requirements are
equipment is used correctly. Safe work practices are identified and understood. Safe work practices when
applied when working with compressed air. working with compressed air can be described.

Criteria 8.13A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency shut down procedures can be carried out. Blasting equipment can be shut down in accordance with The safety and standard operating procedures to be
manufacturer’s specifications, safety requirements and followed when shutting down equipment can be
standard operating procedures. identified and are understood.

Criteria 8.13A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work procedures undertaken to appropriate Work activities performed in accordance with standard The relevant environmental legislation/regulations and
environmental requirements. operating procedures and relevant environmental requirements are understood as well as the use of
legislation/regulations. appropriate operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 495 of 1445
 MEM 8.13A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.13A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Abrasive media disposal carried out in accordance with All abrasive media disposal in carried out in accordance The standard operating procedures for abrasive media
standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. disposal can be identified and are understood.

Criteria 8.13A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Blasting equipment is cleaned and disassembled and Blasting equipment cleaned and checked in accordance The standards procedures and manufacturer’s
inspected in accordance with manufacturer’s with standard operating procedures. Operational faults specifications for cleaning, checking and storing blasting
specifications and standard operating procedures. identified, faults are recorded and reported in accordance equipment are understood.
with standard operating procedures. Equipment is stored
in good condition in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 8.13A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment faults are recorded and reported in accordance Faults are recorded and reported to appropriate personnel Standard procedures for recording and reporting faulty
with standard operating procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment are understood.

Element 8.13A.5 Inspect prepared surface

Criteria 8.13A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface preparation assessed for cleanliness and The surface condition is checked and inspected in The standard operating procedures and job
conformance with specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures and specifications for checking prepared surfaces can be
against job specifications. identified and understood.

Criteria 8.13A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults or defects are rectified where required and All rectification work undertaken to meet job specifications Appropriate rectification techniques can be described.
inspection results recorded and reported in accordance and recording/reporting undertaken using standard The recording/reporting procedures for job inspection
with standard operating procedures. operating procedures. can be identified and understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 496 of 1445
 MEM 8.13A A Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a team environment using accepted standards for safety, quality and procedures. This unit is designed to be used where an
advanced level of skill is desired in surface preparation using abrasive blasting. Media used includes, but is not limited to garnet, illmenite, slags, steel grit, steel shot, water, glass
bead and soda. Specific environmental matters include noise, dust and particulate matter, run off, storm water and wastes. The operation and maintenance of compressed air
systems and associated items, including emergency shut down procedures, is included. Reference is made to supplier information and specifications as well as accepted and
appropriate Australian and International standards. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision mechanical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. A description of the accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
steps/stages of workplace operations observed and the skills involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
displayed in performing the workplace tasks and the processes
understanding involved and described during the assessment. This
includes a date record of achievements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 497 of 1445
 MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
8.16A Control blast coating by-products, materials and 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
emissions

Element 8.14A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 8.14A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work requirements determined from job sheet, All relevant drawings, job sheets, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified and
instructions, drawings or visual inspection. instructions are obtained in accordance with workplace specifications applying to the work can be identified and
procedures. understood.

Criteria 8.14A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Required protective coating materials are identified All relevant information and job requirements are All relevant information is interpreted correctly.
according to job specification. considered.

Criteria 8.14A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Required protective coating application equipment All relevant information and job requirements are All relevant information is interpreted correctly.
identified according to job requirements. considered.

Criteria 8.14A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work site prepared for application of protective coating. Site is prepared with due regard to OH&S requirements Safety issues can be clearly identified and explained,
including site safety, clear working space, other adequate precautions determined and identified,
materials/structures/personnel in the vicinity, isolation of awareness of other site factors that could be affected by
work site where required. the work.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 498 of 1445
 MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.14A.2 Work piece prepared for application of protective coating

Criteria 8.14A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface condition inspected for readiness for application Inspection is comprehensive and specifications are Deviation from specified surface finish/condition can be
of protective coating according to specification. considered during inspection. identified.

Criteria 8.14A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unsuitable work pieces/surfaces and fabrication defects Standard workplace procedures are used to identify, select Standard workplace procedures for identifying
are identified and appropriate remedial action or reporting and apply the appropriate treatment or actions to rectify unsuitable work items can be followed and explained.
undertaken in accordance with standard operating items with surface or fabrication defects.
procedures.

Criteria 8.14A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are masked where protective coating Surface required as 'no paint areas' identified and Method of locating areas to be protected from coating
application is not specified. protected using standard masking procedures and process and masked is understood.
techniques.

Criteria 8.14A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conditions for overspray identified. Precautions undertaken to prevent overspray in the The areas subject to overspray and requiring protection
workplace using standard procedures. can be identified and described.

Element 8.14A.3 Equipment prepared for application of surface coating materials

Criteria 8.14A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Required plant and equipment basic operations Operation of plant and equipment using standard
understood. operating procedures is understood and can be
described.

Criteria 8.14A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance is undertaken on plant and Routine maintenance is undertaken on plant and Standard operating procedures for plant and equipment
equipment in accordance with standard operating equipment in accordance with standard operating maintenance of plant and equipment can be identified
procedures. procedures. and understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 499 of 1445
 MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.14A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Status/reports recorded by proforma or orally in All required maintenance records/reports are prepared and The requirements for completion and processing of
accordance with standard operating procedures. details communicated. maintenance reports are understood.

Criteria 8.14A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conventional coating application equipment assembled Equipment is assembled in accordance with manufacturer's Assembly specifications and procedures are understood
in accordance with equipment requirements and standard specifications and standard operating procedures. and can be described.
operating procedures.

Element 8.14A.4 Apply single pack coatings

Criteria 8.14A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating product type, solvent, uses, mixing procedure, Coating type and appropriate solvents identified, standard Workplace procedures for identifying coating types and
clean up and safety requirements are identified as workplace procedures required for mixing processes, processing solvents, mixing and safe handling practices
appropriate. clean-up and safe handling are identified. are understood and can be described.

Criteria 8.14A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct method of determining wet film thickness in Workplace procedures are used for determining the wet The workplace procedures for determining the wet film
accordance with specified dry film is demonstrated. film thicknesses of a coating from the specified dry film thickness of a coating from the specified dry film
thickness. Required thickness is calculated in accordance thickness are understood. Calculations can be
with product volume solids. undertaken using a specified formulation.

Criteria 8.14A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating material is thinned to suit the application method Standard operating procedures are applied for thinning Standard operating procedure for thinning coating
and to achieve required film thickness. coating materials and the application of the specified film materials for use in applying the specified film thickness
thickness coating to a substrate. coating to a substrate are understood.

Criteria 8.14A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating applied using specified application method and Protective coating is applied to comply with an established Standard operating procedures to apply protective
standard operating procedures. standard using specified methods and standard operating coatings to comply with an established standard are
procedures. understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 500 of 1445
 MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.14A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating application and curing technique monitored Coating application and curing techniques are controlled The procedures for controlling coating application and
according to standard operating procedure. using standard operating procedures. curing techniques are understood.

Element 8.14A.5 Clean and store equipment

Criteria 8.14A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conventional coating application equipment is cleaned, Disassembly, cleaning and checking for functionality of Standard operating procedure for disassembly, cleaning
disassembled and inspected for damage. spraying equipment and associated items is undertaken in and checking is understood.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 8.14A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty equipment is recorded and reported to appropriate Standard operating procedures are used to report on any Standard operating procedures for recording and
personnel in accordance with standard operating damage or faulty parts and communication with reporting defective parts are understood.
procedures. appropriate personnel is undertaken.

Criteria 8.14A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating application equipment is stored in accordance Procedure for storage is followed including any hazard Standard operating procedures for storage and
with standard operating procedures. reduction and/or protection of equipment and protection of equipment are understood and can be
components. described.

Element 8.14A.6 Inspect finish surface

Criteria 8.14A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface finish assessed for profile size differences and Surface condition of the work piece, including profile size The standard operating procedures and other relevant
uses. properties and problems is checked according to standard standards for assessing the profile of the surface finish
operating procedures and other acceptable standards. are understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 501 of 1445
 MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.14A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating thickness is determined using appropriate Thickness is determined using mechanical, electronic or Dry film thickness testing instruments can be identified
instruments and results compared with job specifications. other appropriate instruments. Test results compared with and used.
job specifications, drawings etc.

Criteria 8.14A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Total surface inspected for conformance to specification Inspection is undertaken comprehensively as required by Standard operating procedures for surface inspection are
in accordance with standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. understood, including the extent and detail of inspection
as required.

Criteria 8.14A.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection results are recorded and reported in All required inspection records/reports are prepared and The requirements for completion and processing of
accordance with standard operating procedures. details communicated. inspection reports are understood.

Element 8.14A.7 Selected and maintain personal protective equipment (PPE)

Criteria 8.14A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate personal protective equipment for coating Personal protective equipment, suitable for applying The standard procedure for identifying and selecting the
application selected according to job requirements and protective coatings is selected. required personal protective equipment is understood.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 8.14A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Personal protective equipment is used appropriately in Appropriate personal protective equipment is used in The workplace standard procedure for the use of
accordance with manufacturer's specifications and workplace operations in accordance with standard personal protective equipment is understood.
standard operating procedures. procedures.

Criteria 8.14A.7.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ancillary support attachments identified and used. Select the appropriate supports to use with personal The use and selection of appropriate supports to use
protective equipment in standard operational practices. with personal protective equipment in standard
operational practices is understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 502 of 1445
 MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.14A.7.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Personal protective equipment is maintained in Personal protective equipment items are checked for The standard procedures and manufacturer's
accordance with manufacturer's specification and serviceability in accordance with manufacturer's specifications for inspecting and maintaining personal
standard operating procedures. specifications. Faulty items are recorded and reported protective equipment in the workplace is understood.
using standard workplace procedures to appropriate
personnel for remedial action.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 503 of 1445
 MEM 8.14A A Apply protective coatings (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit is designed to be used where a basic level of skill is desired to spray single pack protective coatings not limited to brush, roller and conventional spray equipment. Work is
undertaken autonomously or as part of a team environment using predetermined standards of safety, quality and operating procedures. Specific health and safety matters include
interpretation of MSDS warnings, materials sensitivity, hazardous goods, breathable air and introduction of compressed air into the body. Personal protective equipment includes
hand protection, full body protection, respirators, air fed hoods and foot protection. Noise and heat protection may also be necessary. Specific understanding is required of given
supplier information and product details. Reference is made to supplier information and specifications as well as accepted and appropriate Australian and International standards.
All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. Where required, unit 11.4A (Undertake dogging/crane chasing) and unit 11.10A (Operate mobile
load shifting equipment) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with surface cleaning and coating and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 504 of 1445
 MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
8.14A Apply protective coatings (basic) 8.16A Control blast coating by-products, materials and 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
emissions

Element 8.15A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 8.15A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work requirements determined from job sheet, All relevant drawings, job sheets, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
instructions or other specifications in accordance with instructions are obtained in accordance with work place specifications applying to the work can be identified and
standard operating procedures. procedures. Where appropriate, the surface(s) to be understood.
coated are inspected by the individual in accordance with
work place procedures.

Criteria 8.15A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate coating system and material selected to meet Correct coating system and material for the job surface and Appropriate coating system and material required to meet
job specification. use is selected. job specification can be identified. Features of the
various types of coating materials, including drying and
curing requirements, can be described. Selection
procedures for coating material can be described.

Criteria 8.15A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate coating process and equipment selected to Correct coating process and equipment for applying the Appropriate coating process and equipment required for
meet job specification. selected coating material is selected. surface coating to meet job specification can be
identified. Application features of the various types of
coating materials, methods, can be described. Selection
procedures for coating process and equipment can be
described, including conventional, airless and plural
component.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 505 of 1445
 MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.15A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work site prepared for surface coating activities. Site is prepared with due regard to OH&S requirements Safety issues can be clearly identified and explained,
including site safety, clear working space, other adequate precautions determined and identified,
materials/structures/personnel in the vicinity, isolation of awareness of other site factors that could be affected by
work site where required. the work.

Element 8.15A.2 Work piece prepared for application of protective coating

Criteria 8.15A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface condition inspected for readiness for application Inspection is comprehensive and specifications are Deviation from specified surface finish/condition can be
of protective coating according to specification. considered during inspection. identified.

Criteria 8.15A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unsuitable work pieces/surfaces and fabrication defects Standard workplace procedures are used to identify, select Standard workplace procedures for identifying
are identified and appropriate remedial action or reporting and apply the appropriate treatment or actions to rectify unsuitable work items can be followed and explained.
undertaken in accordance with standard operating items with surface or fabrication defects.
procedures.

Criteria 8.15A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are masked where protective coating Surfaces required as ‘no paint areas’ identified and Method of locating areas to be protected from coating
application is not specified. protected using standard masking procedures and process and masked is understood.
techniques.

Criteria 8.15A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conditions for overspray identified. Precautions undertaken to prevent overspray in the The areas subject to overspray and requiring protection
workplace using standard procedures. can be identified and described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 506 of 1445
 MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.15A.3 Equipment prepared for application of surface coating materials

Criteria 8.15A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Required plant and equipment basic operations Operation of plant and equipment using standard
understood. operating procedures is understood and can be
described.

Criteria 8.15A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance is undertaken on plant and Routine maintenance is undertaken on plant and Standard operating procedures for routine maintenance
equipment in accordance with standard operating equipment in accordance with standard operating of plant end equipment can be identified and understood.
procedures. procedures.

Criteria 8.15A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Status/reports recorded by proforma or orally in All required maintenance records/reports are prepared and The requirements for completion and processing
accordance with standard operating procedures. details communicated. maintenance reports are understood.

Criteria 8.15A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating application equipment assembled in accordance Equipment is assembled in accordance with Assemble specifications and procedures are understood
with equipment requirements and standard operating manufacturer’s specifications and standard operating and can be described.
procedures. procedures.

Criteria 8.15A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Personal protective equipment is selected and maintained Appropriate personal protective equipment is selected and The procedure for selecting and maintaining personal
in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and maintained in accordance with job requirements, protective equipment is identified and understood.
standard operating procedures. manufacturer’s specifications, OH&S requirement s and
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 507 of 1445
 MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.15A.4 Apply coatings using conventional, airless and plural component equipment
Criteria 8.15A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating product type, solvent, uses, mixing procedure, Work piece is inspected and any faults identified in The inspection procedure is identified and understood.
clean up and safety requirements are identified as accordance with standard operating procedures. Unsuitable work pieces can be determined in
appropriate. consideration of job specifications.

Criteria 8.15A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct method of determining wet film thickness in Workplace procedures are used for determining the wet The workplace procedures for determining wet film
accordance with specified dry film is demonstrated. film thickness of a coating from the specified dry film thickness of a coating from the specified dry film
thickness. Required thickness is calculated in accordance thickness are understood. Calculations can be
with product volume solids. undertaken using a specified formulation.

Criteria 8.15A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating material is thinned to suit the application to suit Standard operating procedures are applied for thinning Standard operating procedures for thinning coating
the application method and to achieve required film coating materials and the and the application of the materials for use in applying the specified film thickness
thickness. specified film thickness coating to a substrate. coating to a substrate are understood.

Criteria 8.15A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating applied using specified application method and Protective coating applied to comply with an established Standard operating procedures to apply protective
standard operating procedures. standard using specified methods and standard operating coatings to comply with an established standard are
procedures. understood.

Criteria 8.15A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating application and curing technique monitored Coating application and curing techniques are controlled The procedures for controlling coating application and
according to standard operating procedure. using standard operating procedures. curing techniques are understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 508 of 1445
 MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.15A.5 Clean and store equipment

Criteria 8.15A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating application equipment is cleaned, disassembled Disassembly, cleaning and checking for functionality of Standard operating procedure for disassembly, cleaning
and inspected for damage. spraying equipment and associated items is undertaken in and checking is understood.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 8.15A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty equipment is recorded and reported to appropriate Standard operating procedures are used to report on any Standard operating procedures for recording and
personnel in accordance with standard operating damage or faulty parts and communication with reporting defective parts are understood.
procedures. appropriate personnel is undertaken.

Criteria 8.15A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating application equipment is stored in accordance Procedure for storage is followed including any hazard Standard operating procedures for storage and
with standard operating procedures. reduction and/or protection of equipment and protection of equipment are understood and can be
components. described.

Element 8.15A.6 Inspect finished surface

Criteria 8.15A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface finish assessed for profile size differences and Surface condition of the work piece, including profile size The standard operating procedures and other relevant
uses. properties and problems is checked according to standard standards for assessing the profile of the surface finish
operating procedures and other acceptable standards. are understood.

Criteria 8.15A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coating thickness is determined using appropriate Thickness is determined using mechanical, electronic or Dry film thickness testing instruments can be identified
instruments and results compared with job specifications. other appropriate instruments. Test results compared with and used.
job specifications, drawings etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 509 of 1445
 MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.15A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Total surface inspected for conformance to specification Inspection is undertaken comprehensively as required by Standard operating procedures for surface inspection are
in accordance with standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. understood, including the extent and detail of inspection
as required.

Criteria 8.15A.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection results are recorded and reported in All required inspection records/reports are prepared and The requirements for completion and processing of
accordance with standard operating procedures. details communicated. inspection reports are understood.

Element 8.15A.7 Calculate, estimate and cost application of protective coating

Criteria 8.15A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface area of work piece, materials, labour and Appropriate inspection and assessment methods used. The standard methods and procedures for determining
equipment assessed. surface area of various shapes of materials are
understood and can be described.

Criteria 8.15A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cost of materials, labour, handling and equipment Calculations are undertaken in accordance with standard The standard procedures for calculating costs are
determined. operating procedures and specifications. identified and understood.

Criteria 8.15A.7.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results recorded and reported as an estimate for the Calculated costs are recorded and reported in accordance The standard operating procedures for recording and
application of a protective coating system. with standard operating procedures. reporting calculated costs are identified and understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 510 of 1445
 MEM 8.15A A Apply protective coatings (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a team environment using accepted standards for safety, quality and procedures. This unit is designed to be used where an
advanced level of skill is desired in all types of spray application protective coatings (including conventional, two pack, plural component). It includes inspection and interpretation
of the results using all current industry knowledge and equipment. Test equipment included but not limited to Holiday and Pin Hole testing, wet and dry film thickness gauges,
temperature, relative humidity and dew point, hardness, gloss, adhesion and cure testing and soluble salts. Reference is made to supplier information and specifications as well as
accepted and appropriate Australian and International standards. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision mechanical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. A description of the accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
steps/stages of workplace operations observed and the skills involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
displayed in performing the workplace tasks and the process
understanding involved and described during the assessment. This
includes a date record of achievements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 511 of 1445
 MEM 8.16A A Control blast coating by-products, materials and emissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.16A A Control blast coating by-products, materials and emissions
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 1
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials

Element 8.16A.1 Apply specific health and safety matters in surface preparation
Criteria 8.16A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Products, hazardous materials and processes used in The products, hazardous materials and processes
blaster cleaning and coating operations can be identified. associated with surface preparation and protective
coating application can be described. The by-products,
materials and emissions created by the blasting and
coating process including associated hazards can be
described.

Criteria 8.16A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensure appropriate safety procedures are applied. Control the emissions and by-products relative to the Understanding the requirements of safety procedures to
worksite by using the appropriate standard safety be observed when handling, controlling and transporting
procedures for the worksite and the blasting industry. the by-products.

Criteria 8.16A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unsafe working conditions are identified and reported to The workplace's standard operating procedure for The standard procedure for reporting unsafe working
appropriate personnel. reporting unsafe working conditions to appropriate conditions associated with the control of by-products
personnel is applied. can be identified and understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 512 of 1445
 MEM 8.16A A Control blast coating by-products, materials and emissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.16A.2 Control by-products, materials and emissions

Criteria 8.16A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
By-products, materials and emissions are contained using Samples of the by-products are collected as well as the The established procedures for collecting samples and
established procedures. method of storage and eventual removal from site to an containing workplace by-products and emissions can be
appropriate waste treatment facility using standard identified and understood.
operating procedures.

Criteria 8.16A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
By-products, materials and emissions are monitored and By-product and emissions monitoring and transfer to the The by-product collection equipment operation methods
directed to appropriate treatment or storage area. specific treatment and storage area is undertaken in and the standard operating procedures for their disposal
accordance with standard operating procedures. are understood.

Criteria 8.16A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Monitoring devices are checked for correct/continuous The checking of monitoring devices for correct equipment The manufacturer's operational standards for workplace
operation. operation is carried out in accordance with manufacturers waste control monitoring equipment and procedures for
and standard operating procedures to ensure their maintenance, identification of malfunction and/or
continued operation. operational wear can be identified and understood.

Criteria 8.16A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Status/reports recorded and reported. Monitoring devices checking reports are recorded and Procedures for recording and reporting are identified and
reported in accordance with standard operating understood.
procedures.

Element 8.16A.3 By-product, materials and emissions disposed

Criteria 8.16A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Waste treatment processes applied in accordance with The waste treatment process is implemented to meet The waste treatment process can be identified and
standard operating procedures. statutory authorities regulations in accordance with understood.
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 513 of 1445
 MEM 8.16A A Control blast coating by-products, materials and emissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 8.16A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Treatment processes are carried out in accordance with Recording and reporting of all results of waste treatment The requirements for accurately recording and reporting
standard operating procedures and to meet authority processes undertaken to standard operating procedures. are understood and can be described.
requirements with regards to waste.

Range statement
This unit applies to the identification, evaluation and control of blaster coating by-products, materials and emissions. Work is undertaken autonomously or as part of a team
environment using accepted standards for safety, quality and procedures. It includes common containment practices and regulatory waste removal processes, documentation and
implementation etc. Reference is made to supplier information and specifications as well as accepted and appropriate Australian and International standards. All work and work
practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered Present evidence of credit for any off-the job training related to this unit. All tools, equipment,
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual alone or as part materials and documentation required; All safety clothing and personal safety equipment. The
of a team. Assessment should be conducted in the individual's own trainee will be permitted to refer to the following documents: Any relevant workplace
work environment. procedures; any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The trainee will be
required to orally or by other methods of communication: Answer all questions put by the
assessor; perform the tasks described by this guide; within a time frame established between
the students supervisor/instructor and the assessor prior to taking this assessment; identify
colleagues who can be approached for the collection of evidence where appropriate.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will:- Demonstrate safe working practices at all times;
involved in the workplace training which address safety, quality, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
communication, recording and reporting associated with the control of and efficient working environment; take responsibility for the quality of their own work; plan
by-products materials and emissions produced by the blaster coater tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; perform all tasks in
industry or other units requiring exercise of the skills and knowledge accordance with standard operating procedures; perform all tasks to specifications.
covered by this unit.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 514 of 1445
MEM 8.18A A Electroplate engineering coatings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.18A A Electroplate engineering coatings

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to apply engineering metallic/ceramic coatings to ferrous and non-ferrous metals and some non-metallic materials eg
plastics.
Processes may include electroplating, electroforming, electroless plating. Coatings may include standard hard chroming, heavy nickel, electroless nickel, nickel
composites,
heavy deposits of nickel, copper, bronze up to 10mm. Straightforward operation/monitoring of electroplating processes, is covered by Unit 8.3A (Perform
electroplating
operations).

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 8.1A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work 8.3A Perform electroplating operations
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 8.18A.1 Select treatments and processes/equipment for producing engineering finishes
Criteria 8.18A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate treatment processes are selected according Material condition is assessed and suitability for plating is Base materials can be identified including cast iron, brass,
to base metal type, surface condition and relevant job determined steels with machine welded sections Effect of plating
specifications process on different materials can be given Effects of
conditions that affect engineering finishes, such as porosity,
hardness, corrosion, protective films, surface finish of
untreated material can be given
Specialised pre-treatment processes relating to base material
type, plating process used and engineering finishes can be
given
Criteria 8.18A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process parameters are selected to achieve required Process parameters are calculated/determined for given task Process parameters for current density, temp, agitation rate
coating Current densities are determined/ selected where necessary, dwell times, etching times, strike
times/currents, deposition rate/time can be given Surface
areas calculated to apply correct current Requirements for
de-embrittlement can be given Specific surface finishes are
related to post machining/grinding allowances and other
requirements Standards operating procedure, work
instructions for pre/post treatments/processes are
understood
Criteria 8.18A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment is selected Equipment is selected based on product configuration, Application of different types of equipment to the type of
product requirements and specifications work processed can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 515 of 1445
MEM 8.18A A Electroplate engineering coatings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.18A.2 Prepare work for engineering finishes

Criteria 8.18A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Products are correctly masked (stopped off) for Areas for masking are identified from drawings/instructions Masking materials can be given including wax, lacquers,
selective plating Correct masking materials are selected Products are masked tapes, foils Masking techniques/ application of materials
correctly and excess materials removed from area to be can be given
plated Masking is continuous i.e. no gaps/ holidays/
porosity/completely covers areas to be excluded from
plating process
Criteria 8.18A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, conforming anodes are constructed Anode correctly sized for given job Correct materials used Principles of current distribution and role of conforming/
and fitted correctly and sufficient current carrying capacity Anode positioned auxiliary anodes can be given Methods of
correctly and secured constructing/fabricating and fitting anodes can be given
Current capacity of conforming/auxiliary anodes can be
given
Criteria 8.18A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable shields and robbers are constructed and Shields and robbers sized correctly Appropriate materials Principles of current distribution and role of shields and
fitted used for given job Shields/robbers positioned/secured robbers can be given Materials used to construct shields
correctly robbers and their properties, applications can be identified
Methods for constructing/fabricating can be given Methods
of attachment and positioning of shields/robbers in relation
to workpiece, to achieve desired current distribution can be
given
Criteria 8.18A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-treatment processes are carried out, where Mechanical/chemical pre-treatment carried out as Appropriate mechanical/chemical pre-treatment processes
applicable appropriate can be given

Element 8.18A.3 Monitor and control operating conditions and processes for engineering coatings
Criteria 8.18A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operating parameters are set to produce required surface Dwell, etch and plating times are set correctly Appropriate current densities for etching, striking and
conditions/specifications Voltages/currents are set correctly for electrolytic plating can be given Surface areas can be calculated and
operations Solution maintenance requirements are identified required current computed Solutions can be analysed/tested
Temperatures are maintained using simple test including density, titration, pH Additions
required to adjust solutions to required strength can be
computed Acceptable temperature ranges can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 516 of 1445
MEM 8.18A A Electroplate engineering coatings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 8.18A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface conditions of finished components are Adhesion confirmed, surface appearance checked for pores, Finish requirements and permissible tolerances can be given
monitored and confirmed and abnormalities identified inconsistency of plate, correct thickness, hardness and
ductility
Criteria 8.18A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective actions are taken to rectify non-conforming Appropriate corrective action is taken including Types of abnormalities, their causes and related corrective
conditions adjusting/solutions/times/reprocessing or additional actions can be given
processing
Element 8.18A.4 Maintain solutions for engineering finishes
Criteria 8.18A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Solution compositions are checked and confirmed to pH, density and titration readings are taken correctly. The purpose and application of simple tests including pH,
specification/operating range Solution concentrations are determined from titration test titration, density can be given Solutions, solution
and/or laboratory reports compositions and operating ranges for processes relative to
engineering coatings can be given, including cleaning/
pre-treatment, electroplating and post treatment
Criteria 8.18A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustment requirements/additions are determined Required solution additions are calculated Calculations for additions/adjustments to solution are
understood

Criteria 8.18A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Additions are made to adjust solution composition to Replenishment chemicals are added correctly. Relevant Safe working procedures for handling chemicals relative to
correct operating range OH&S requirements are applied when handling chemicals and engineering finishes and for safely adding to baths are
adding to baths. understood Effects of adding chemicals too quickly (e.g.
overheating) can be explained Procedures for measuring
out materials can be given eg use of scales, volumetric
measurement devices Operating parameters of solutions
can be given, including temperature, agitation rate and
similar parameters

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 517 of 1445
MEM 8.18A A Electroplate engineering coatings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Range statement
This unit covers pre-treatment and application of engineering metallic/ceramic coatings to ferrous and non-ferrous metals and some non-metallic materials eg plastics. Coatings
may include hard chroming, heavy nickel, electroless nickel, nickel composites, heavy deposits of nickel, copper, bronze up to 10mm. Application of engineering coatings may
relate to wear resistance, corrosion protection, reclamation of worn components, manufacture of components (electroforming). Processes may include electroplating,
electroforming, electroless plating. Operating parameters can include treatment times and currents, bath pH temperatures and densities, anode conditions, addition agent content,
cleanliness of contacts etc., make-up, maintenance of solution levels and purity. Applicable knowledge of basic electrical principles, basic chemistry, basic electro chemistry,
metallurgy, measurement, techniques for plating, impurities and imperfections, corrective actions, solutions and compositions for engineering finishes is included in this unit.
Work is performed to established processes, practices, standard operating procedures and specifications. Work is carried out autonomously using pre-determined standards of
quality and safety. OHS activities are undertaken to legislative requirements where applicable. All work is undertaken to accepted industry OH&S practices and to legislative
requirements where applicable. For surface preparation operations Unit 8.11A (Undertake surface preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means and Unit 8.12A (Prepare
surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic)) should be selected as appropriate. Straightforward operation of electroplating process is covered by Unit (8.3A Perform electroplating
operations). Where pre-treatment operations only are carried out Unit 8.2A (Pre-treat work for subsequent surface coating) should be selected. For basic inspection of completed
or partly completed products produced by others Unit 15.4 (Perform inspection (basic)) should be selected. Where dogging/lifting is undertaken, the appropriate materials
handling units should be selected. For construction of anodes, shields/robbers etc, the appropriate fabrication units should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting
associated with electroplating engineering coatings or other units requiring the
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 518 of 1445
MEM 8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to apply protective finishes to a range of ferrous and non-ferrous materials using processes such as electroplating,
electroforming, electroless plating. Typical protective finishes may include copper, nickel, zinc, tin. Straightforward operation/monitoring of electroplating
processes, is
covered by Unit 8.3A (Perform electroplating operations).

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 8.1A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work 8.3A Perform electroplating operations
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 8.19A.1 Select treatments and processes/equipment for producing protective finishes
Criteria 8.19A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate treatment processes are selected Base material is identified and appropriate treatment Different base materials and their properties are understood,
processes are selected according to base metal type, surface including cold rolled steel, non ferrous metals Effect of
condition and relevant job specifications Material condition protective treatment process on different materials can be
is assessed and suitability for plating is determined given Effects of conditions that affect protective finishes
can be given Different pre-treatment processes and their
application can be given Pre-treatment processes can be
related to surface condition of material e.g. heavy scale

Criteria 8.19A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process parameters are selected to achieve required Correct process parameters are selected. Current and Process parameters can be identified and related to each
finish processing time is calculated and set correctly Relevant other, including current density, temperature, agitation rate,
standard operating procedures/ specifications identified and process (deposition) time Differences between chromate
interpreted conversion coatings can be given Requirements for
de-embrittlement can be given Post treatment processes
can be described Procedures for pre/process/post treatments
can be given
Criteria 8.19A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment is selected Equipment selection is based on product configuration, Application of different equipment to the type of work
features, process/ production requirements and specifications processed can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 519 of 1445
MEM 8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.19A.2 Monitor and control protective finish processes and operating conditions
Criteria 8.19A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operating parameters are set to produce required Dwell and plating times are correctly controlled Process parameters and their meanings can be given,
protective finish/specifications Appropriate current densities are applied to electrolytic including dwell time, current density, current, temperature
operations Current is computed from surface area of work Current computations are understood Procedures for
and current densities Temperatures are controlled within testing plate thickness can be given
operating parameters Operation of thickness measuring
equipment understood
Criteria 8.19A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface condition of finished components is monitored Acceptable appearance of work at each stage of process is Acceptable appearances for each stage of operation can be
and confirmed and abnormalities identified known and confirmed at appropriate intervals Conformance given Different abnormalities can be given Thickness
to thickness specifications is monitored and confirmed as specifications can be given Requirements for chromate or
appropriate other post treatments can be given
Criteria 8.19A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective actions are taken to rectify non-conforming Corrective action taken as appropriate including Types of defects, their causes and related corrective actions
conditions adjusting/solutions/times/reprocessing or additional can be given
processing
Criteria 8.19A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-treatment processes are carried out, where Mechanical/chemical pre-treatment carried out as Appropriate mechanical/chemical pre-treatment processes
applicable appropriate can be given

Element 8.19A.3 Maintain solutions for protective finishes

Criteria 8.19A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Solution compositions are checked and confirmed to Concentration and pH is determined by simple testing The purpose and application of simple tests incl pH and
specification/operating range procedures concentration can be given Solutions, solution
compositions and operating ranges for processes relative to
protective finishes can be given, including
cleaning/pre-treatment, electroplating and post treatment
Criteria 8.19A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustment requirements/additions identified Required chemical/solution additions are correctly calculated Calculations for additions/adjustments to solution are
Replenishment schedule for brighteners is applied correctly understood Use of replenishment schedule for brighteners
is understood

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 520 of 1445
MEM 8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 8.19A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Additions made to adjust solution composition to Replenishment chemicals are added correctly Relevant Safe working procedures for handling chemicals relative to
correct operating range OH&S requirements are applied when handling chemicals and protective finishes and for safely adding to baths are
adding to baths understood Effects of adding chemicals too quickly (e.g.
overheating) can be explained Procedures for measuring
out materials can be given eg use of scales, volumetric
measurement devices Operating parameters of solutions
can be given, including temperature, agitation rate and
similar parameters
Criteria 8.19A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Purification procedures are carried out as appropriate Purification procedures appropriate to impurities/ Purification procedures for protective finish solutions are
contamination undertaken understood, including filtration, electrolytic treatments,
chemical precipitation and zinc dust treatments Level of
impurities and permissible limits can be given Effects of
impurities can be explained
Criteria 8.19A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Anodes are maintained to ensure correct operation Anode baskets/bags and anode materials are replaced, Different anode arrangements incl use of baskets & bags,
replenished and sufficient anode/ cathode ratio ensured conforming anodes can be given Correct performance of
Anode checked for satisfactory working condition anodes and operating conditions understood
Element 8.19A.4 Maintain equipment for protective finishes
Criteria 8.19A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performance of ancillary equipment is checked and Performance of various ancillary equipment is checked, Correct operation of anodes and appropriate remedial
remedial actions taken as necessary including correct operation/ control of anodes Remedial action is understood Correct operation and cleaning
action is taken according to standard operating procedures requirements of cleaning filters is understood Performance
requirements and basic maintenance checks for rectifier, bus
bars, agitation, heating/cooling, extraction and tank linings
understood Effect of maintenance schedules on plant
performance can be given
Criteria 8.19A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical contacts are maintained Condition of electrical contacts is checked and correct Methods for detecting unsatisfactory contact are
operation confirmed Corrective action is taken to rectify understood eg heat, fluctuating current readings Importance
faults of maintaining satisfactory electrical contact can be
explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 521 of 1445
MEM 8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 8.19A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process transfer equipment is maintained Condition of racks, jigs & barrels checked Build up on Effects of build up on cathode contacts and damage to rack
cathode contacts stripped as required and equipment coatings can be given
maintained in serviceable condition . Condition of rack
coating is monitored and racks placed out of service for
recoating as per standard operating procedure

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 522 of 1445
MEM 8.19A A Electroplate protective finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Range statement
This unit covers pre-treatment and application of protective finishes to a range of ferrous and non-ferrous materials using processes such as electroplating, electroforming,
electroless plating. Typical protective finishes may include copper, nickel, zinc, tin. Typical applications would include wear resistance, corrosion protection, reclamation of
worn components, manufacture of components (electroforming). Processing may apply to manual, semi or fully automatic still or barrel plating environments and may include
volume production and "one-off" components. Operating parameters can include calculation and setting of treatment times and currents, bath pH, temperatures and densities,
solution levels and compositions, purification procedures. Maintenance of solutions includes typical tests for pH and concentration, calculation of adjustments to relevant
solutions. Maintenance of process equipment includes anode condition, electrical contacts etc. Use of plating techniques, solutions and compositions for protective finishes,
recognition and assessment of impurities and imperfections and associated corrective actions are integral to all applications. Basic principles of chemistry, electro chemistry and
metallurgy apply to this level of work as part of this unit. Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety. All work is
undertaken to accepted industry OH&S practices and to legislative requirements where applicable. For surface preparation operations Unit 8.11A (Undertake surface preparation
using solvents and/or mechanical means) and Unit 8.12A (Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic)) should be selected as appropriate. Straightforward operation of
electroplating process is covered by Unit (8.3A Perform electroplating operations). Where pre-treatment operations only are carried out Unit 8.2A (Pre-treat work for
subsequent surface coating) should be selected. For basic inspection of completed or partly completed products produced by others Unit 15.4 (Perform inspection (basic)) should
be selected. Where dogging/lifting is undertaken, the appropriate units materials handling units should be selected. For construction of anodes, shields/robbers etc, the appropriate
fabrication units should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting
associated with electroplating protective finishes or other units requiring the
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 523 of 1445
MEM 8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Surface finishing Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to apply decorative finishes to a range of ferrous and non-ferrous materials using processes such as electroplating,
electroforming, electroless plating. Typical decorative finishes may include copper, nickel, zinc, tin. Straightforward operation/monitoring of electroplating
processes, is
covered by Unit 8.3A (Perform electroplating operations).

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

7.1A Operational maintenance of machines/equipment 8.1A Wire, jig and barrel load/unload work 8.3A Perform electroplating operations
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 8.20A.1 Select treatments and processes/equipment for producing protective finishes
Criteria 8.20A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate treatment processes are selected according Base metal is identified, condition is assessed and suitability Specific pre-treatments for common base metals and soils
to base metal type, surface condition and relevant job for plating is determined Pretreatment selected according can be given, including degreasing, soak/cleaning,
specifications to base metal type, surface condition and relevant job electrolytic cleaning, activating dips Pre-treatment
specifications processes can be related to surface condition of material
Different base metals and their properties are understood
Effect of decorative treatment process on different metals
can be given Effects of conditions that affect decorative
finishes can be given
Criteria 8.20A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mass treatment processes are selected and carried out, Surface condition assessed suitable for plating Appropriate Different mechanical pretreatment processess are
where applicable mass treatment process selected Treatment operation understood
carried out correctly
Criteria 8.20A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-plating treatments identified The need for strikes/activation treatment is identified Need The functions of stirkes/activation treatment can be given
for copper undercoat or equivalent is identified Copper or equivalent pre-plate processes can be identified
for specific base metals
Criteria 8.20A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process parameters are selected to achieve required Correct process parameters are selected. Current and Process parameters can be identified and related to each
coating processing time is calculated and set correctly. Relevant other, including current density, temperature, agitation rate,
standard operating procedures/ specifications performance process (deposition) time Post treatment processes can be
requirement of finish identified and interpreted Plating described Procedures for pre/process/post treatments can be
sequence is selected to achieve desired specification and/or given Applicable Australian Standards covering selection
service requirements of the finish of type, coatings and thickness requirements for interior
and external service conditions can be given

MEM 8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 524 of 1445
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Criteria 8.20A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment is selected Equipment selection is based on product configuration, Application of different equipment to the type of work
features, process/ production requirements and specifications processed can be given

Element 8.20A.2 Monitor and control decorative finish processes and operating conditions
Criteria 8.20A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operating parameters are set to produce required Appropriate current densities are applied Current is Process parameters and their meanings can be given,
decorative finish/specifications computed from surface area of work and current densities including , current density, voltage, temperature and
Temperatures and agitation are controlled within operating agitation Current computations are understood Effects of
parameters parameters on performance understood
Criteria 8.20A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plate appearance and final finish is monitored and Plate appearance is monitored and confirmed at each plating Acceptable appearances for each stage of operation and for
confirmed and abnormalities identified stage Acceptable appearance of work at each stage of final specification/quality can be given. Different
process is known and confirmed at appropriate intervals abnormalities associated with decorative plating and their
Conformance to specifications/customer requirements is causes can be given including poor/uneven
monitored and confirmed as appropriate brightness/texture, inadequate levelling, roughness, pitting,
poor adhesion, blistering, burning poor plate coverage
(particularly chromium), incorrect colour (particularly flash
brass, gold) Thickness specifications can be given
Requirements for post treatments can be given
Criteria 8.20A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective actions are taken to rectify non-conforming Corrective action taken as appropriate including Types of defects, their causes and related corrective actions
conditions adjusting/solutions/times/reprocessing or additional can be given
processing
Criteria 8.20A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-treatment processes are carried out, where Mechanical/chemical pre-treatment carried out as Appropriate mechanical/chemical pre-treatment processes
applicable appropriate. can be given.

Criteria 8.20A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Racks, jigs and barrels checked for correct loading Correct loading of racks, jigs and barrels is determined Factors affecting plate distribution are understood
according to conditions and factors affecting plate Suitability of racks/jigs can be related to different conditions
distribution

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 525 of 1445
MEM 8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.20A.3 Maintain solutions for decorative finishes

Criteria 8.20A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Solution compositions are checked and confirmed to PH, temperature and titration is determined by simple The purpose and application of simple control tests
specification/operating range testing procedures including PH, temperature and titration can be given
Solutions, solution compositions and operating ranges for
processes relative to decorative finishes can be given,
including cleaning/pretreatment, plating and post treatment

Criteria 8.20A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustment requirements/additions identified Test results are interpreted correctly Required Calculations for additions/adjustments to solution are
chemical/solution additions are correctly calculated understood Use of replenishment schedule for
Replenishment schedule for brighteners/additives is applied brighteners/additives is understood
correctly
Criteria 8.20A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Additions made to adjust solution composition to Replenishment chemicals are added correctly. Relevant Safe working procedures for handling chemicals relative to
correct operating range OH&S requirements are applied when handling chemicals and decorative finishes and for safely adding to baths are
adding to baths. understood Effects of adding chemicals too quickly (e.g.
overheating) can be explained Procedures for measuring
out materials can be given eg use of scales, volumetric
measurment devices Operating parameters of solutions can
be given, including temperature, agitation rate and similar
parameters
Criteria 8.20A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Purification procedures are carried out as appropriate Purification procedures appropriate to Purification procedures/treatments, plating out, carbon and
impurities/contamination undertaken chemical treatments for decorative finish solutions are
understood Level of impurities and permissable limits can
be given Effects of impurities can be given
Criteria 8.20A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Anodes are maintained to ensure correct operation Anode baskets/bags and anode materials are replaced, Different anode arrangements incl use of baskets & bags,
replenished and sufficient anode/cathode ratio ensured. conforming anodes can be given. Correct performance of
Anode checked for satisfactory working condition anodes and operating conditions understood

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 526 of 1445
MEM 8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 8.20A.4 Maintain equipment for decorative finishes

Criteria 8.20A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performance of ancillary equipment is checked and Performance of various equipment is checked, including Correct operation of anodes and appropriate remedial
remedial actions taken as necessary correct operation/ control of anodes, operation of filtration action is understood Correct operation and cleaning
equipment, rectifier, bus bars, agitation, heating/cooling, requirements of cleaning filters is understood Performance
extraction and tank linings Remedial action is taken requirements and basic maintenance checks for rectifier, bus
according to standard operating procedures bars, agitation, heating/cooling, extraction and tank linings
understood Effect of maintenance schedules on plant
performance can be given
Criteria 8.20A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical contacts are maintained Condition of electrical contacts is checked and correct Methods for detecting unsatisfactory contact are
operation confirmed. Corrective action is taken to rectify understood eg heat, fluctuating current readings.
faults. Importance of maintaining satisfactory electrical contact
can be explained
Criteria 8.20A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process transfer equipment is maintained Condition of racks, jigs & barrels checked. Build up on Effects of build up on cathode contacts and damage to rack
cathode contacts stripped as required and equipment coatings can be given.
maintained in serviceable condition. Condition of rack
coating is monitored and racks placed out of service for
recoating as per standard operating procedure

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 527 of 1445
MEM 8.20A A Electroplate decorative finishes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Range statement
This unit covers the application of decorative finishes to a range of ferrous and non-ferrous materials using processes such as electroplating, electroforming, electroless plating,
electrophoretic coating. Typical decorative finishes would include nickel, chrome, copper, silver, gold and rhodium. Typical applications would include household fittings,
hardware, artifacts and accessories. Processing may apply to manual, semi or fully automatic still or barrel plating environments and may include volume production and "one-off"
components. Operating parameters can include calculation and setting of treatment times and currents, bath pH, temperatures and densities, solution levels and compositions,
purification procedures. Maintenance of solutions includes typical tests for pH density and titration, calculation of adjustments to relevant solutions. Maintenance of process
equipment includes anode condition, electrical contacts etc. Use of plating techniques, solutions and compositions for decorative finishes, recognition and assessment of impurities
and imperfections and associated corrective actions are integral to all applications. Basic principles of chemistry, electro chemistry and metallurgy apply to this level of work.
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety. For pre-treatment operations Unit 8.11 Undertake surface
preparation using solvents and/or mechanical means and/or Unit 8.12 Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting (basic) should be selected. For basic inspection of completed or partly
completed products produced by others unit 15.4 Perform inspection (basic) should be selected. All work is undertaken to accepted industry OH&S practices and to legislative
requirements where applicable. Where dogging/lifting is undertaken, the appropriate units materials handling units should be selected. For construction of anodes, shields/robbers
etc, the appropriate fabrication units should be selected. For straightforward operation/monitoring of electroplating processes, unit 8.3A Perform electroplating operations should
be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting
associated with electroplating decorative finishes or other units requiring the
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 528 of 1445
MEM 9.1A A Draw and interpret sketch Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.1A A Draw and interpret sketch

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 2

Element 9.1A.1 Prepare freehand sketch

Criteria 9.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sketch correctly and appropriately drawn. The sketch is correctly drawn with appropriate views The object(s) to be sketched can be identified. The
where applicable. number of views necessary to convey all relevant
information about the objects to be sketched can be
identified.

Criteria 9.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sketch depicts object or part. The object is appropriately represented in the sketched
view(s). Where appropriate, the objects represented in the
sketch are correctly labelled and/or identified.

Criteria 9.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dimensions obtained correctly. The dimensions of the object are obtained correctly using The measuring techniques/instruments to be used to
appropriate measuring techniques/instruments. The units obtain the dimensions of the object can be identified.
of measurement used in preparing the sketch are clearly The reasons for selecting the chosen measuring
identified. techniques/instruments can be explained.

Criteria 9.1A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dimensions shown clearly. All necessary dimensions are shown clearly on the sketch. The key dimensions to be conveyed by the sketch can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 529 of 1445
 MEM 9.1A A Draw and interpret sketch Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.1A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions shown clearly. All necessary instructions/ information is conveyed by the The information/instructions to be conveyed by the
appropriate use of notes in the sketch. sketch can be identified. Where appropriate, symbols to
be used in the sketch and their purpose/meaning are
identified.

Criteria 9.1A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Base line or datum point indicated. Where appropriate, the base line, centre line and/or datum The function of base lines, centre lines and datum points
point for the object is clearly indicated on the sketch. can be explained. The appropriate base line, centre line
and/or datum point for the object being sketched can be
identified.

Element 9.1A.2 Interpret details from freehand sketch

Criteria 9.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components, assemblies or objects recognised as Where appropriate, the relationship between the views
required. contained in the sketch can be identified. The number of
objects represented in the sketch can be identified. The
objects represented in the sketch can be correctly
identified.

Criteria 9.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dimensions identified as appropriate to field of The units of measurement used in the preparation of the
employment. sketch can be identified. The dimensions of the key
features of the object(s) depicted in the sketch can be
correctly identified.

Criteria 9.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions identified and followed as required. The instructions contained in the sketch can be
identified. The actions to be undertaken in response to
those instructions can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 530 of 1445
 MEM 9.1A A Draw and interpret sketch Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.1A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material requirements identified as required. Where appropriate, the materials from which the object(s)
are made can be identified from the sketch.

Criteria 9.1A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Symbols recognised as appropriate in sketch. Where appropriate, any symbols used in the sketch can
be identified and correctly interpreted.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 531 of 1445
 MEM 9.1A A Draw and interpret sketch Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Sketches may be applied to any of the full range of engineering disciplines. Sketches will consist of a single plane drawing with dimensions and specifications gained by hand
measuring equipment. The level of symbol knowledge applied in this unit will be appropriate to the field and level of employment of the person interpreting the sketch. Where any
drawing sketch, chart, diagram is only used as the technique for communication then this unit does not apply, see Unit 1.1F (Undertake interactive workplace communication).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the drawing and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
interpretation of sketches or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 532 of 1445
 MEM 9.2A A Interpret technical drawing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.2A A Interpret technical drawing

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 4

Element 9.2A.1 Interpret technical drawing

Criteria 9.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components, assemblies or objects recognised as The relationship between the views contained in the
required. drawing can be identified. The number of
objects/components contained in the drawing can be
identified. The objects represented in the drawing can be
correctly identified.

Criteria 9.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dimensions identified as appropriate to field of The units of measurement used in the preparation of the
employment. drawing can be identified. The dimensions of the key
features of the objects depicted in the drawing can be
correctly identified.

Criteria 9.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions identified and followed as required. The instructions contained in the drawing can be
identified. The actions to be undertaken in response to
those instructions can be given.

Criteria 9.2A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material requirements identified as required. The materials from which the object(s) are made can be
identified from the drawing.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 533 of 1445
 MEM 9.2A A Interpret technical drawing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.2A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Symbols recognised as appropriate in drawing. Any symbols used in the drawing can be identified and
interpreted correctly.

Element 9.2A.2 Select correct technical drawing

Criteria 9.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing checked and validated against job requirements The drawing is checked against job requirements/related The procedures for checking and validating drawings
or equipment. equipment in accordance with standard operating against job requirements and/or the related equipment
procedures. can be given. The reasons for validating the drawing
against the job requirements and/or related equipment
can be explained.

Criteria 9.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing version checked and validated. The drawing version is confirmed as being current in The version of the drawing can be identified. The source
accordance with standard operating procedures. Where of information with respect to the current version of the
appropriate, the current version of the drawing is obtained drawing can be identified. The procedures for obtaining
in accordance with standard operating procedures. current versions of drawings can be given. The reasons
for validating that the current version of the drawing is
being used can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 534 of 1445
 MEM 9.2A A Interpret technical drawing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Technical drawing interpretation is applied to any of the full range of engineering disciplines. Technical drawings may utilise perspective, exploded views or hidden view
techniques. Drawings are provided to Australian Standard 1100 and/or Australian Standard 1102 and their equivalents from the full range of engineering disciplines. Standard
symbols to Australian Standard 1100 and/or Australian Standard 1102 or equivalent as above, are recognised in field of employment. Technical drawings may include symbol
glossaries. Where interpretation of any drawing sketch, chart, diagram is required and is provided at a lower level than Australian Standard 1100/Australian Standard 1102 or their
equivalent then these skills are covered by Unit 9.1A (Draw and interpret sketch). Where any drawing sketch, chart, diagram is only used as the technique for communication then
this unit does not apply, see Unit 1.1F (Undertake interactive workplace communication).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the interpretation of technical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
drawings or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 535 of 1445
 MEM 9.3A A Prepare basic engineering drawing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.3A A Prepare basic engineering drawing

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 9.3A.1 Identify drawing requirements

Criteria 9.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements and purpose of drawing determined from All relevant job requirements and specifications are The requirements and purpose of the drawing to be
customer and/or work specification and associated obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. produced can be identified. The requirements and
documents. purpose of the engineering parts list can be identified.

Criteria 9.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify and collect all data necessary to produce the All relevant data/information necessary to produce the The data/information necessary to produce the drawing
drawing. drawing is obtained in accordance with workplace can be identified. The purpose(s) for which the data/
procedures. information is to be obtained can be given. The sources
of relevant data/ information can be identified.

Criteria 9.3A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing requirements confirmed with relevant personnel The timeframe for completion of the drawing(s) can be
and timeframes for completion established. given. The person(s) who can confirm drawing
requirements can be identified.

Element 9.3A.2 Prepare or make changes to engineering drawing

Criteria 9.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select drafting equipment appropriate to the drawing The drafting equipment used to produce the drawing is The method of drawing preparation can be identified.
method chosen. appropriate to the drawing method chosen. The reasons for selecting the chosen drawing method
can be given. The drafting equipment necessary to
prepare the drawing using the method chosen can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 536 of 1445
 MEM 9.3A A Prepare basic engineering drawing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Apply drafting principles to produce a drawing that is The drawing produced/changed is in conformance with The procedures for producing an initial drawing can be
consistent with standard operating procedures within the the relevant standard. given. The procedures for changing an existing drawing
enterprise. can be given. The drafting principles to be applied to the
production/changing of a drawing can be given. The
standards to which the drawing is to be produced can be
identified.

Criteria 9.3A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Undertake all work safely and to prescribed procedure. All work is undertaken safely and in accordance with
workplace procedures.

Criteria 9.3A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Completed drawing is approved in accordance with The completed drawing is approved in accordance with The procedures for checking and approving drawings
standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. can be given. The persons responsible for checking and
approving drawings can be identified.

Element 9.3A.3 Prepare engineering parts list

Criteria 9.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components parts identified and organised by The component parts list is produced with part name, The consequences of inappropriate/incomplete
component type and/or in accordance with description of part, material specification or part number, components parts lists can be explained.
organisation/customer requirements. quantities and all other details specified by the customer
and/or organisational procedures.

Element 9.3A.4 Issue drawing

Criteria 9.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complete drawings and or parts lists records in Completed drawings and or parts lists are recorded in The procedures for recording completed drawings and or
accordance with standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. parts lists can be given. The reasons for recording
completed drawings and or parts lists can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 537 of 1445
 MEM 9.3A A Prepare basic engineering drawing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.3A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Copy/issue approved drawings and or parts lists to Where appropriate, approved drawings and or parts lists The procedures for copying approved drawings and or
relevant personnel in accordance with standard operating are copied in accordance with standard operating parts lists can be given. The procedures for issuing
procedures. procedures. Where appropriate, approved drawings and or approved drawings and or parts lists can be given. The
parts lists are issued to relevant personnel in accordance personnel to whom copies of approved drawings and or
with standard operating procedures. parts lists can be issued can be identified.

Criteria 9.3A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Approved drawings and or parts lists stored and The approved drawings and or parts lists is appropriately The procedures for filing approved drawings and or parts
catalogued in accordance with standard operating handled and stored in accordance with standard operating lists can be given. The procedures for safe handling and
procedures. procedures. storage of drawings and or parts lists can be given. The
consequences of inappropriate handling and storage of
approved drawings and or parts lists can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 538 of 1445
 MEM 9.3A A Prepare basic engineering drawing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to any of the full range of engineering disciplines. Drafting and drawing equipment includes the use of Computer Aided Drafting systems. Where a more extensive
Computer Aided Drafting System is used for design, then Unit 9.9B (Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system), should also be considered. Applied to the fields of
mechanical, electrical/electronic, fabrication, fluid power. Specifications may be obtained from design information, customer ideas/concepts/expectations/requirements, sketches,
preliminary layouts. Consultations may include reference to appropriate personnel including technical supervisory, manufacturers, suppliers, contractors, customers, etc. Drawing
records may include cataloguing, issuing security classifications, filing, preparing distribution lists. Drawings, copies may be issued in hard copy, photographic, slide or
transparency form including presentation as a single drawing and/or with other drawings, support documentation as a package.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the preparation of basic and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
engineering drawings or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 539 of 1445
 MEM 9.4B A Electrical/electronic detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.4B A Electrical/electronic detail drafting

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 9.3A Prepare basic engineering drawing

Element 9.4B.1 Prepare/make changes to electrical/electronic schematics and drawings

Criteria 9.4B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Schematic drawn to indicate relative positioning of The electrical/electronic schematic is drawn correctly and The relative position of the electrical/electronic
electrical/electronic components. indicates the relative position of the components. components can be identified. The symbols used in
electrical/electronic schematics and drawings can be
correctly identified.

Criteria 9.4B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical/electronic drawings produced to include all The electrical/electronic drawings produced include all The specifications of all components can be identified.
relevant specifications. relevant specifications. The circuit specifications can be identified.

Criteria 9.4B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Schematic/drawing completed to Australian Standard Electrical/electronic schematics/drawings are produced in The requirements of AS1102 or equivalent with respect
1102 or equivalent. conformance with AS1102 or equivalent. to electrical/electronic schematics/drawings can be
identified.

Element 9.4B.2 Determine component and/or material requirement

Criteria 9.4B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components and/or materials are selected from The circuit/component specifications are obtained in The design specifications of the circuit/components can
supplier/manufacturer's catalogues using design accordance with work place procedures. be identified. The appropriate components and materials
specifications. are selected from supplier/manufacturers' catalogues.
The reasons for selecting the chosen components and/or
materials can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 540 of 1445
 MEM 9.4B A Electrical/electronic detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of drawings produced under supervision, in accordance with instructions and specifications to Australian Standard 1102 or equivalent using
predetermined design specifications. Drawings include plans, schematics, layouts, circuit diagrams and charts. This unit applies to all electrical/electronic areas. Manual drafting or
drawing equipment is used or where a CAD system is used, Unit 9.9B (Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system) and/or Unit 9.10B (Create 3D models using
computer aided design system) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the preparation of basic and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
engineering drawings or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 541 of 1445
 MEM 9.5A A Basic engineering detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.5A A Basic engineering detail drafting

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 9.3A Prepare basic engineering drawing

Element 9.5A.1 Prepare assembly, layout and detail drafting

Criteria 9.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings prepared in plane orthogonal, isometric Drawings are prepared using appropriate projections and The appropriate projection for the drawing purpose can
projection or equivalent including auxiliary views and views in accordance with AS1100 or equivalent. be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
sections to Australian Standard 1100. projection can be given. The reasons for including
auxiliary views in drawings can be given.

Criteria 9.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Layout, assembly and component drawings are prepared Layout, assembly and component drawings are produced The specifications for the components, layout and/or
from specification. in conformance with specification. assembly can be identified.

Criteria 9.5A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings dimensioned and labelled using supplied All relevant dimensions, tolerances and instructions are The dimensions, tolerances and instructions relevant to
tolerances in accordance with Australian Standard 1100. included in the drawing. the component, layout and/or assembly can be identified.
The requirements of AS1100 or equivalent with respect
to dimensions, tolerances and labels can be identified.

Criteria 9.5A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing produced to specification in accordance with Drawings are produced to specification in accordance with The procedures for producing component, layout and/or
standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. assembly drawings can be given. The drawing
specifications can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 542 of 1445
 MEM 9.5A A Basic engineering detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.5A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Standard symbols to Australian Standard 1100 or Standard symbols in accordance with AS1100 or The reasons for using symbols in drawings can be
equivalent are used to specify requirements. equivalent are appropriately used in the drawings explained. The common symbols used in drawings to
produced. AS1100 or equivalent can be identified and interpreted
correctly.

Element 9.5A.2 Determine component and/or material requirement

Criteria 9.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components and/or materials are selected from The component specifications are obtained in accordance The design specifications of the component can be
supplier/manufacturer's catalogues using design with work place procedures. identified. The appropriate components and materials are
specifications. selected from supplier/ manufacturers' catalogues. The
reasons for selecting the chosen components and/or
materials can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 543 of 1445
 MEM 9.5A A Basic engineering detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of drawings to Australian Standard 1100 or equivalent where the critical dimensions and associated tolerances and design specifications are
predetermined. Manual drafting or drawing equipment is used or where a CAD (Computer aided design) system is used, Unit 9.9B (Create 2D drawings using computer aided design
system) and/or Unit 9.10B (Create 3D models using computer aided design system) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with engineering detail drafting or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 544 of 1445
 MEM 9.6B A Advanced engineering detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.6B A Advanced engineering detail drafting

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 9.3A Prepare basic engineering drawing 9.5A Basic engineering detail drafting

Element 9.6B.1 Prepare assembly, layout and detail drawing

Criteria 9.6B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specification requirements determined. All relevant work instructions, requirements are obtained The specifications and/or requirements of the
in accordance with workplace procedures. component, assembly or layout to be drawn can be
identified.

Criteria 9.6B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering calculations undertaken to determine all The functional operation of the component/assembly to
dimensions including limits and fits, surface texture, be drawn can be identified. Surfaces which are to be in
datum references an geometric tolerances where contact or separated can be identified. The appropriate
appropriate to ensure functional operation and suitability. type of fit for contacting surfaces can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen type of fit can be given.
The effect of surface finish on the performance/operation
of surfaces can be identified. Appropriate datum points
can be identified. All appropriate lineal, diametral and
geometric tolerances are calculated in accordance with
standard operating procedures. The procedures for
determining tolerances can be given.

Criteria 9.6B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All drawings produced to Australian Standard 1100 or All drawings are produced in accordance with AS1100 or The requirements of AS1100 or equivalent for the
equivalent. equivalent. drawing(s) to be produced can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 545 of 1445
 MEM 9.6B A Advanced engineering detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 9.6B.2 Interpret specifications and select material, components and/or assemblies
Criteria 9.6B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components, material and/or assemblies selected from All relevant data sheets, catalogues, etc. are obtained in The specifications of the components, materials and/or
data sheets or manufacturers' catalogue to meet accordance with workplace procedures. assemblies can be identified. The appropriate
specifications. components and materials are selected from
supplier/manufacturers' catalogues. The reasons for
selecting the chosen components and/or materials can be
given.

Element 9.6B.3 Check drawings

Criteria 9.6B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings checked to ensure compliance with Drawings are checked for conformance to specification in The procedures for checking and approving drawings
specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The reasons for checking drawings can be
explained. The drawing specifications can be identified.

Criteria 9.6B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings checked to ensure that assembly/fabrication is Drawings are checked to ensure that assembly/fabrication The methods of manufacture/assembly/fabrication can
possible. is possible in accordance with standard operating be identified from the drawing(s) being checked.
procedures. Unnecessary or inappropriate tolerances can be
identified. The reasons for checking the drawings to
ensure that manufacturing/assembly is possible, efficient
and cost effective can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 546 of 1445
 MEM 9.6B A Advanced engineering detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of assembly, layout and detail drawings to Australian Standard 1100 or equivalent. Skills covered by this unit are applied individually or in a team
environment where comprehensive responsibility for the production of the drawing is exercised, critical dimensions and associated tolerances are determined where required.
Manual drafting and drawing equipment is used or where a CAD (Computer aided design) system is used, Unit 9.9B (Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system)
and/or Unit 9.10B (Create 3D models using computer aided design system)

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with engineering detail drafting or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 547 of 1445
 MEM 9.7B A Advanced mechanical detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.7B A Advanced mechanical detail drafting

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 9.3A Prepare basic engineering drawing 9.5A Basic engineering detail drafting
9.6B Advanced engineering detail drafting

Element 9.7B.1 Prepare mechanical assembly, layout and detail drawing

Criteria 9.7B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All drawings produced to Australian Standard 1100 or All drawings are produced in accordance with AS1100 or The function of each component within the
equivalent. equivalent. The function of each component within the assembly/layout can be identified. The manufacturing,
assembly/layout is represented in accordance with design fabrication and assembly procedures to be used in
specifications/operational requirements. All components producing the components/assemblies can be identified.
can be manufactured, fabricated and assembled in The reason for ensuring that all components are correctly
accordance with the specifications contained in the orientated to existing or proposed structures and
drawings. Where appropriate, all components are correctly services can be explained. The reasons for
orientated to surrounding structures and services. Where updating/modifying drawings to incorporate changes to
appropriate, drawings are modified to ensure conformance specifications, production, assembly and fabrication
to specification AS1100 or equivalent, and/or changes to methods and availability of standard hardware items, etc
production, assembly and fabrication requirements and/or can be explained.
the availability of standard hardware items etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 548 of 1445
 MEM 9.7B A Advanced mechanical detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of mechanical assembly, mechanical layout and detail drawings to AS1100 or equivalent. Skills covered by this unit are applied individually or in
a team environment where comprehensive responsibility for the production of the drawing is exercised, critical dimensions and associated tolerances are determined where required.
Manual drafting and drawing equipment is used or where a CAD system is used, Unit 9.9B (Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system) and/or Unit 9.10B (Create 3D
models using computer aided design system) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with mechanical detail drafting or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 549 of 1445
 MEM 9.8B A Advanced structural detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.8B A Advanced structural detail drafting

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 4

Element 9.8B.1 Prepare fabrication/structural assembly, layout and detail drawing

Criteria 9.8B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All drawings produced to Australian Standard 1100 or All drawings are produced in accordance with AS1100 or The function of each component within the
equivalent. equivalent. The function of each component within the assembly/layout can be identified. The manufacturing,
assembly/layout is represented in accordance with design fabrication and assembly procedures to be used in
specifications/operational requirements. All components producing the components/assemblies can be identified.
can be manufactured, fabricated and assembled in The reason for ensuring that all components are correctly
accordance with the specifications contained in the orientated to existing or proposed structures and
drawings. Where appropriate, all components are correctly services can be explained. The reasons for
orientated to surrounding structures and services. Where updating/modifying drawings to incorporate changes to
appropriate, drawings are modified to ensure conformance specifications, production, assembly and fabrication
to specification AS1100 or equivalent, and/or changes to methods and availability of standard hardware items, etc
production, assembly and fabrication requirements and/or can be explained.
the availability of standard hardware items etc.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 550 of 1445
 MEM 9.8B A Advanced structural detail drafting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of fabrication/structural assembly, fabrication/structural layout and detail drawings to AS 1100 or equivalent. Skills covered by this unit are
applied individually or in a team environment where comprehensive responsibility for the production of the drawing is exercised, critical dimensions and associated tolerances are
determined where required. Manual drafting and drawing equipment is used or where a CAD system is used, Unit 9.9B (Create 2D drawing using computer aided design system)
and/or Unit 9.10B (Create 3D models using computer aided design system) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with structural detail drafting or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 551 of 1445
 MEM 9.9B B Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.9B B Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.9C10 Perform computer operations 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 9.9B.1 Prepare CAD environment

Criteria 9.9B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System variables are customised to suit standard All relevant manuals, instructions and operation The CAD software system can be identified. The system
operating procedure. procedures for the CAD software and hardware being variables that can be customised can be identified. The
used, are obtained in accordance with work place procedures for customising identified system variables
procedures. Where appropriate, the relevant system can be given. The reasons for customising the system
variables are customised to suit the applicable drafting variables can be explained. The applicable drafting
standards/procedures. standards/ procedures can be identified.

Criteria 9.9B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Menus are customised to suit standard operating Where appropriate, menus are customised to suit the The procedures for customising menus can be given.
procedure. applicable drafting standards/procedures. The reasons for customising menus can be explained.

Criteria 9.9B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing defaults are customised to standard operating Where appropriate, the system defaults are customised to The procedures for customising system defaults can be
procedure. suit the applicable drafting standards/procedures. given. The reasons for customising system defaults can
be explained.

Criteria 9.9B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Macros are developed to standard operating procedure. Where appropriate, macros are developed in accordance The procedures for developing macros can be given. The
with standard operating procedures and in conformance reasons for developing macros can be explained.
with the applicable drafting standards/procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 552 of 1445
 MEM 9.9B B Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 9.9B.2 Create 2D drawings

Criteria 9.9B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings are created using the full capability of the Drawings are created using the appropriate drawing The drawing features of the CAD software system can be
available software system. features of the software system. identified. The reasons for using specialised software
features can be explained.

Criteria 9.9B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing entities are linked to database attributes to suit Where appropriate, drawing entities are linked to database The procedures for linking drawing entities to database
job requirements. attributes in accordance with standard operating attributes can be explained.
procedures.

Criteria 9.9B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Detailed views are created using various scales to meet Detailed views of the object being drawn are produced in The appropriate scale for the drawing to be printed can
job requirements. accordance with standard operating procedures. Drawing be identified. The procedures for printing drawing files
files are printed at the appropriate scale in accordance with can be given. The procedures for creating additional
standard operating procedures. views of the object being drawn can be given.

Element 9.9B.3 Produce output

Criteria 9.9B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Files are saved in various formats to standard operating Drawing files are saved in the appropriate format in The procedures for saving drawing files can be given.
procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures. The various formats in which drawing files can be saved
can be identified. The reasons for using different formats
when saving drawing files can be explained.

Criteria 9.9B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Linked entities are listed in a bill of materials format to Bills of material are produced from the drawing The procedures for producing bills of material can be
meet job requirements. files/database in accordance with standard operating given.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 553 of 1445
 MEM 9.9B B Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.9B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Supplementary data is extracted from drawing to meet job Supplementary data is extracted from the drawing file to The procedures for extracting data with respect to drawn
requirements and may include area, lengths, angles and meet job requirements in accordance with standard shapes/ features can be given. The properties of
perimeters. operating procedures. shapes/sections/ features that can be extracted from the
drawing file can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 554 of 1445
 MEM 9.9B B Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of 2D drawings, linked bills of material, file management and associated customisation of installed software including the use of macros, menus
and default settings; file formats may include IGES, DXF, HPGL. Entity means any single item created on the screen and includes for example: lines, arcs, circles, text, hatch and
dimensions. Attribute means properties associated with an entity and includes for example: layer or level, line type, line width, colour and text. Drawings include plans, diagrams,
charts and electrical/electronic circuits. Applies to the fields of mechanical, electrical/electronic, fabrication, fluid power. 2D drawings may be produced from 3D models created
using computer aided design system. Where detail drafting skills are required, the following units should be considered: Unit 9.4B (Electrical/electronic detail drafting), Unit 9.5A
(Basic engineering detail drafting), Unit 9.6B (Advanced engineering detail drafting).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with computer aided drafting of 2D and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
drawings or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 555 of 1445
 MEM 9.10B B Create 3D models using computer aided design system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.10B B Create 3D models using computer aided design system
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.9C10 Perform computer operations 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 9.9B Create 2D drawings using computer aided design
system

Element 9.10B.1 Prepare 3D environment

Criteria 9.10B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coordinate system is established to job requirement. The relevant job instructions, specifications, etc. are The purpose for which the 3D model is to be developed
obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. can be identified. The appropriate coordinate system for
the job can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen coordinate system can be given.

Criteria 9.10B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Orientation is established to job requirement. The orientation of the model with respect to the
coordinate system can be identified.

Criteria 9.10B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Views are established to job requirement. The number of views required to establish the model can
be identified.

Element 9.10B.2 Create and modify 3D model

Criteria 9.10B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Entities are created in 3D space to job requirement. The appropriate entities are created in 3D space in The procedures for creating entities in 3D space can be
conformance with job requirements. given. The entities that can be created/manipulated in 3D
space can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 556 of 1445
 MEM 9.10B B Create 3D models using computer aided design system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.10B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Entities are manipulated in 3D space to job requirement. The entities are manipulated in 3D space in accordance The procedures for manipulating entities in 3D space can
with job requirements and standard operating procedures. be given.

Criteria 9.10B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surfaces are created in 3D space to job requirement Ruled and revolved surfaces are created in 3D space in The procedures for creating ruled and revolved surfaces
including ruled and revolved. accordance with job requirements and standard operating in 3D space can be given. The applications of ruled and
procedures. revolved surfaces can be identified.

Criteria 9.10B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Existing 3D model is modified to job requirement. Where appropriate, existing 3D models are modified in The procedures for modifying existing 3D models can be
accordance with job requirements and standard operating given. The reasons for modifying existing 3D models can
procedures. be explained.

Element 9.10B.3 Produce output from 3D model

Criteria 9.10B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
File is saved in various formats for retrieval as per Drawing files are saved in the appropriate format in The procedures for saving drawing files can be given.
standard operating procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures. The various formats in which drawing files can be saved
can be identified. The reasons for using different formats
when saving drawing files can be explained.

Criteria 9.10B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Physical properties are extracted to job requirement The physical properties of shapes created in 3D space are The procedures for extracting data with respect to the
including volume, mass and centre of gravity. extracted from the drawing file to meet job requirements in physical properties of shapes created in 3D space can be
accordance with standard operating procedures. given. The physical properties of shapes created in 3D
space that can be extracted from the drawing file can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 557 of 1445
 MEM 9.10B B Create 3D models using computer aided design system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the production of 3D models utilising computer equipment. Operations at this level include, but are not limited to, the creation and manipulation of entities such
arcs and lines and primitives such as spheres, cones, cylinders and boxes using industrial software. Applies to the fields of mechanical, electrical/electronic, fabrication, fluid power.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with 3D modelling using a CAD and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
system or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 558 of 1445
 MEM 9.11A A Apply basic engineering design concepts Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.11A A Apply basic engineering design concepts

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 9.11A.1 Determine design requirements

Criteria 9.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design requirement is established from job sheets, All relevant drawings, job sheets, instructions and The design requirements can be identified.
instructions or in consultation with appropriate people. specifications are obtained in accordance with workplace
procedures. Where appropriate, relevant personnel are
consulted as to the design requirements. Where
appropriate, the object, plant or equipment to which
engineering design concepts are to be applied are
inspected by the individual.

Criteria 9.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design concepts are established and may include The functional requirements of the design can be
consideration of process, material, quantity, cost and identified. The material(s) appropriate to the environment
outcome. in which the object(s) to be designed is to operate can
be identified. The processes to be used in the
manufacture of the object(s) can be identified. Where
appropriate the costs associated with the manufacture of
the object(s) can be calculated. The reasons for selecting
the chosen design concept can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 559 of 1445
 MEM 9.11A A Apply basic engineering design concepts Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.11A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, codes, regulations and technical Where appropriate, design limitations imposed by relevant All relevant codes, standards and regulations applying
documentation are consulted to establish design codes, standards and regulations are accurately to the object to be designed can be identified. The impact
limitations in accordance with standard operating determined. of the applicable codes, standards and regulations on
procedures. the design requirements of the object can be explained.

Criteria 9.11A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sources of expert assistance are identified and used as Where appropriate, assistance is sought from relevant Sources of expert assistance in the design process can
required. sources in accordance with standard operating be identified.
procedures.

Element 9.11A.2 Create design

Criteria 9.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design meets end use requirement. The end use requirements of the design can be clearly
identified.

Criteria 9.11A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design meets all legislative and regulatory requirements. The design complies with the relevant codes, standards,
legislative and regulatory requirements.

Criteria 9.11A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design concept verified in accordance with standard The design concept is verified in accordance with The procedures for verifying design concepts can be
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. identified.

Criteria 9.11A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design outcome is produced as per job requirements and The design object is presented in a form appropriate to the The means by which the design concept is to be
may include sketch, drawing, prototype, document, model job requirements and in accordance with standard presented can be identified.
or finished product. operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 560 of 1445
MEM 9.11A A Apply basic engineering design concepts Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit is intended to cover in situ design skills by personnel who will then be responsible for the manufacture of the design outcome either individually or as part of a team. This
unit includes the determination of requirements such as location, assembly or other parts of the manufacturing or engineering process and where the designer must consider the
impact of the design on other equipment, process or personnel, for example safety aspects of the design. Design tasks undertaken include the application of design concepts to eg:
the fabrication and modification of structures, plant and equipment, design of tooling and gauges, production control systems, fluid power layouts, electrical circuits etc. Applies to
the fields of mechanical, production, electrical/electronic, fabrication and fluid power.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
- Orally, or by other means of communication, answer questions put by an assessor. - Identify
colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the drawing and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
interpretation of sketches or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 561 of 1445
MEM 9.21A A Interpret and produce curved 3-dimensional shapes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 9.21A A Interpret and produce curved 3-dimensional shapes

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Drawing, drafting & design Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to produce and interpret lines plan drawings manually or using CAD equipment. Typical applications include marine
vessel
construction.

Element 9.21A.1 Identify drawing/lofting requirements

Criteria 9.21A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements of lines drawing/lofting are determined

Criteria 9.21A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data necessary to produce drawing/lofting are identified

Element 9.21A.2 Determine drawing/lofting procedure and equipment

Criteria 9.21A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lines drawing/lofting procedures are outlined and
understood

Criteria 9.21A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate drawing equipment/accessories are outlined

Element 9.21A.3 Apply drawing/lofting procedures

Criteria 9.21A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate drawing equipment/accessories are set-up to
suit requirements

Criteria 9.21A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drafting/lofting procedures to suit specified drawing are
applied

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 562 of 1445
MEM 9.21A A Interpret and produce curved 3-dimensional shapes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 9.21A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, any alterations to offset
measurements are recorded

Criteria 9.21A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings/loftings are consistent with operation
procedures and industry requirements

Element 9.21A.4 Submit lines plan drawings

Criteria 9.21A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Completed drawings in accordance with industry
standards are submitted

Criteria 9.21A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, altered offset measurements and
relevant information related to drawing are supplied

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 563 of 1445
MEM 9.21A A Interpret and produce curved 3-dimensional shapes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to drawing and lofting principles relevant to procedures used to produce lines plan drawings and loftings. Common applications include marine vessel
construction. In a marine setting, tasks may be related to a variety of hull designs, section development such as curved and raking transom, conical development and camber
development methods. General arrangement plans may also be addressed to provide a greater drawing diversity. Drawing practices should be completed using manual drafting and
drawing equipment. All drawings/data should comply with industry requirements. Basic lofting is covered by Unit 12.7A (Mark out structural fabrications and shapes). Where a
CAD system is used for basic drawing, Unit 9.3A (Prepare basic engineering drawing) should also be selected. Where more extensive CAD system is used for design then Unit 9.9B
(Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system) should also be considered. Where transfer of lines to lofting floor or other surface is carried out, Unit 12.7A (Mark
off/out structural fabrications and shapes) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with computer aided drafting of 2D drawings or other units requiring and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 564 of 1445
 MEM 10.1A AB Erect structures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.1A B Erect structures

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.17A Weld using gas metal arc welding process 5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
5.4A Perform routine oxy acetylene welding 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering) 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.12A Perform routine manual metal arc welding 5.15A Weld using manual metal arc welding process
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.7A Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 5
5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 5.17A Weld using gas metal arc welding process 5.50A Perform routine gas metal arc welding
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.7A Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 6
5.4A Perform routine oxy acetylene welding 5.7A Manual heating and thermal cutting 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.7A Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 10.1A.1 Inspect and prepare erection site

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 565 of 1445
 MEM 10.1A B Erect structures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site checked for correct location, dimensions and levels. All relevant drawings, specifications and instructions are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. The location, dimensions and levels applicable to the work to
site is checked for correct location, dimensions and, where be undertaken can be identified. Where appropriate, the
appropriate, levels in accordance with standard operating technique/equipment to be used to check the site levels
procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 10.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-compliance with specifications reported to Where appropriate, any non-compliances with The procedures to be followed if the location,
appropriate authority. specifications detected are reported to the appropriate dimensions and/or levels of the site do not comply with
authority in accordance with standard operating the specifications can be given. The appropriate
procedures. authority to which non-compliances are to be reported
can be given.

Criteria 10.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Minor alterations, corrections or adjustments undertaken Where appropriate, authorised alterations, corrections or Any alterations, corrections or adjustments to be made
with approval of appropriate authority. adjustments are made to the site and/or structure in to the site can be identified. Any alterations, corrections
accordance with standard operating procedures. or adjustments to be made to the structure can be
identified. The appropriate authority to approve
alterations, corrections or adjustments to the site and/or
structure can be identified. Approval for any alterations,
corrections or adjustments to be made has been received
from the appropriate authority. The methods/techniques
to be utilised in carrying out the alterations, corrections
can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
methods/techniques can be explained.

Criteria 10.1A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All surfaces and materials/components prepared for use. Where appropriate, surfaces, materials and/or components The material and components to be used in the structure
are prepared for use in accordance with specifications and can be identified. Any preparation of surfaces required
standard operating procedures. prior to commencing the erection of the structure can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 566 of 1445
 MEM 10.1A B Erect structures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.1A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Structure components identified and checked against All components of the structure are checked for The specification of the components of the structure can
specifications. conformance to specification in accordance with standard be identified. The procedures for checking the
operating procedure. components of the structure can be given.

Element 10.1A.2 Erect structures

Criteria 10.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work carried out safely and in accordance with All work is carried out safely to specification and in The safety procedures to be followed while undertaking
defined procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. the work can be identified. All safety equipment and
personal protective clothing to be used/worn while
undertaking the work can be identified. The hazards
associated with the erection of structures can be
identified.

Criteria 10.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Structure components prepared for correct sequential All components of the structure are prepared for correct The sequence in which components of the structure are
erection. sequential erection in accordance with standard operating to be erected can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 10.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components erected and fixed according to All components of the structure are erected and fixed in The methods of fixing/fastening the components of the
specifications. conformance to specifications and in accordance with structure can be identified. The methods of
standard operating procedures. lifting/moving the components of the structure can be
identified. The methods of locating/holding the
components of the structure prior to fixing/fastening can
be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
methods of lifting/moving and locating/holding the
components of the structure can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 567 of 1445
 MEM 10.1A B Erect structures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.1A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Structure adjusted to specifications. The structure is checked for conformance to specifications The procedures to be followed if the structure does not
in accordance with standard operating procedures. Where comply with the specifications can be identified. The
appropriate, the approved adjustments are made to the authority to whom non-conformances are to be reported
structure in accordance with specifications and standard can be identified. The procedures for checking the
operating procedures. structure for conformance to specification can be given.
Where appropriate, adjustments to be made to bring the
structure into specification can be identified. The
appropriate authority to approve adjustments to the
structure can be identified. Approval for any adjustments
to be made has been received from the appropriate
authority.

Criteria 10.1A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All reports, documentation completed correctly to All required reports and documentation are completed The reports and/or documentation to be completed
required specifications. correctly and in accordance with standard operating before, during and after erection of the structure can be
procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 568 of 1445
 MEM 10.1A B Erect structures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work generally undertaken in team environment (but not exclusively). Structures covered by this unit are those requiring a location/erection process different to workshop
assembly techniques described in Unit 5.11A (Assemble fabricated components). The structure would typically be of a substantial size and load bearing and/or building regulations
may apply. Specifications for the structure would be supplied via engineering drawings or the like and would include site location information. Structures include metal frameworks,
stairways, walkways, vessels, tanks, platforms, conveyors and moving lines, etc. including associated railings, foundations, footings completed prior to commencement of
installation work. Levelling and alignment undertaken is of a straightforward nature using plumb bob/lines and levels. Where lifting or rigging skills are required, appropriate units
should be accessed. Where design skills are required, refer to Unit 9.11A (Apply basic engineering design concepts). All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and
legislative requirements. When mark-off/out skills are required, then Unit 12.7A (Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes) should also be selected. Where welds are required
to meet legislative or regulating requirements then appropriate welding units should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the erection of structures or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 569 of 1445
 MEM 10.2A A Terminate and connect electrical wiring Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.2A A Terminate and connect electrical wiring

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 3
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 10.2A.1 Prepare for electrical wiring termination and connection

Criteria 10.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work undertaken safely and to workplace procedures All work is undertaken in accordance with work site Safety hazards associated with the termination and
and state/territory regulations and legislative procedures and relevant statutory requirements. connection of electrical wiring can be identified. Relevant
requirements. statutory requirements associated with the termination
and connection of electrical wiring can be identified.

Criteria 10.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials checked for correct specifications. Materials are checked for conformance to specifications. Appropriate specifications for wiring materials can be
identified.

Criteria 10.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preparation of work undertaken or checked/inspected for Where appropriate, new installation site checked for The location of the work to be undertaken can be
correct location and specifications eg: cable trays, correct location and specifications in accordance with identified. Any wiring support and/or protection
brackets, trenches etc. work site procedures. Where appropriate, existing requirements can be identified. The specifications of
installation inspected for correct location and wiring support and/or protection requirements can be
specifications in accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Element 10.2A.2 Connect electrical wiring

Criteria 10.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Terminations/connections made to specifications, All terminations/connections made to specification and The relevant regulatory requirements can be identified.
manufacturers' requirements and to safety and comply with manufacturers' and regulatory requirements. The manufacturers' requirements can be identified.
state/territory regulations and legislative requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 570 of 1445
 MEM 10.2A A Terminate and connect electrical wiring Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All brackets, clamps, holders etc. adjusted and fixed to All wiring support requirements are adjusted and fixed to The appropriate wiring support technique can be
specifications. specification. identified. Alternative wiring support techniques can be
given.

Criteria 10.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All cables, wires, conductors and connections etc. All cables, wires, conductors and connections are marked, The marking, tagging and labelling requirements for
marked/tagged and labelled to specification. tagged and labelled to specification. cables, wires, conductors and connections can be
identified.

Criteria 10.2A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All completed wiring and connections tested for The completed wiring and connections are tested for Appropriate tests for wiring and connections can be
compliance with specifications. compliance to specification, safety in accordance with identified.
work site procedures.

Criteria 10.2A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All reports, documentation completed correctly to All reports/documents completed in accordance with The data to be recorded/reported and the frequency of
required specifications. regulatory and work site procedures. recording/reporting can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 571 of 1445
 MEM 10.2A A Terminate and connect electrical wiring Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work generally undertaken as part of team, (but not exclusively). Work is to be undertaken in accordance with relevant regulations and/or legislation. Connection of wiring includes
termination and connection of cords and cables, excluding specialist cables, of all types, sizes and materials. Termination and connection includes the utilisation of a range of
methods including clamping, pin connection, soldered joints, plugs, sockets etc., clamping of cables and wires, sealing entry points where required. This unit covers
soldering/desoldering in the context of termination, disconnection or reconnection of electrical wiring and circuits. Soldering/desoldering of electrical/electronic components may
also require the selection of Unit 5.1A (Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components) or Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering) as applicable. All
testing undertaken on completed circuits where not connected to main supply using appropriate methods eg: continuity and resistance checks. Specifications obtained from
electrical/electronic circuit drawings and data sheets. Electrical services include power supplies, control, wiring, etc. This unit does not cover the competencies required for
energising and testing of the circuit. If these skills are required the competencies covered in Unit 10.3A (Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 1000vAC/1500vDC))
must be satisfied. Termination and connection of specialist cables such as mineral insulated, steel wire, armoured cables etc, is covered in Unit 10.11A (Terminate and connect
specialist cables).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
- Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training to this unit. Assessors must
be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the
unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the termination and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
connection of electrical wiring, or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 572 of 1445
MEM 10.3A A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.3A A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits up to 1000vAC/1500vDC
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 8
This unit covers the competencies required to plan and prepare for the installation, install the wiring/enclosures and/or support systems and commission and test the
installed wiring system. The installation of electrical wiring/systems and or enclosures includes the full range of installation materials and techniques. Where required
work
is undertaken by or under the direction of an appropriately licensed person.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.49A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment which
use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC

Element 10.3A.1 Plan the installation

Criteria 10.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Special work, hazard and safety requirements determined All relevant circuits, drawings, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified The hazard
and incorporated in plan instructions obtained in accordance with standard and safety requirements applicable to the work to be
operating procedures All relevant work, hazard and undertaken can be correctly identified Where
safety requirements are incorporated into the work plan appropriate, work permit requirements can be identified
Criteria 10.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work plan/strategy devised and confirmed in A work plan is prepared in accordance with legislative The legislative and regulatory requirements appropriate
accordance with legislative and regulatory requirements and regulatory requirements and standard operating to the work to be done can be identified The work
and standard operating procedures procedures Where appropriate, the work plan is planning procedures can be identified The sequence of
confirmed/authorised by the appropriate operations to be performed can be given The reasons
person/authority in accordance with standard operating for selecting the chosen sequence of operations in the
work plan can be explained Where appropriate, the
person/ authority with whom the work plan is to be
confirmed can be identified

Element 10.3A.2 Prepare for electrical installation

Criteria 10.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work undertaken safely and to workplace All work is undertaken safely in accordance with relevant
procedures, state/territory regulations and legislative legislative and regulatory requirements and standard
operating procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 573 of 1445
MEM 10.3A A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials checked for correct specifications All materials are checked for conformance to The specifications of all materials to be used while
specification in accordance with standard operating undertaking the work can be identified The procedures
procedures for checking materials against specifications can be
given The procedures to be followed if materials do not
conform to specification can be given

Element 10.3A.3 Install the wiring/enclosures and/or support systems

Criteria 10.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All cables/wires/conduit/enclosures and support systems All cables/wires/conduit/enclosures and support systems The techniques, tools and equipment required to install
are installed to specifications using correct and are correctly installed in accordance with specifications the following can be identified: - cables - wires - conduit
appropriate techniques, tools and equipment using appropriate techniques, tools and equipment - enclosures - support systems The items to be installed
in carrying out the work can be identified
Criteria 10.3A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cabling is marked or labelled for identification and to The cabling is marked or labelled for identification in The marking and/or labelling requirements of cabling
specification accordance with specifications and standard operating can be identified The reasons for marking and/or
procedures labelling cables can be given

Element 10.3A.4 Commission and test the installed wiring system

Criteria 10.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All completed wiring/systems and enclosures tested for All completed wiring/systems and enclosures are tested The procedures and equipment available to test wiring,
compliance with specifications, regulations, and for compliance with specifications, relevant regulatory systems and enclosures can be identified Appropriate
legislative requirements, utilising appropriate test and legislative requirements The appropriate test test equipment and procedures for the work undertaken
procedures and equipment equipment and procedures are carried out in conformance can be identified The reasons for selecting the chosen
with standard operating procedures test equipment and procedures can be explained
Criteria 10.3A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, the installation may be energised Where appropriate, the installation is energised and Test procedures to be carried out on energised
and tested for compliance with specifications tested for compliance with specifications in accordance installations can be identified Where appropriate, the
with standard operating procedures reasons for carrying out tests on energised installations
can be explained
Criteria 10.3A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Any identified faults are rectified to specification Where appropriate, identified faults are rectified to Common wiring system faults can be identified The
specification in accordance with standard operating method(s) of rectifying common faults can be given
procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 574 of 1445
MEM 10.3A A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.3A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All reports, documentation completed correctly to All reports, documentation are completed correctly in The reports/documentation to be completed during and
required specifications accordance with standard operating procedures after the work is undertaken can be identified

Element 10.3A.5 Perform emergency first aid

Criteria 10.3A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Situation assessed to identify points of danger to the All potential points of danger are considered when Dangers present in electrical rescue are identified
injured person and potential rescuer, including the planning a rescue or provision of assistance
assessment of electrical hazards
Criteria 10.3A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical hazards are isolated in accordance with All electrical hazards are isolated in accordance with Appropriate standards and procedures are identified
established procedures for electrical rescue regulatory requirements, Work safe standards or site
procedures
Criteria 10.3A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Rescue/recovery of injured person, or assistance to Appropriate procedures are followed for the Recognised procedures for the movement and
injured person undertaken in accordance with recognised movement/treatment of injured, including: treatment of injured persons are identified Appropriate
standards/procedures Contact made with appropriate - clearing of airways local medical and rescue services identified
medical and rescue authorities - CPR (cardio-pulmonary resuscitation)
- care of spinal injuries
- treatment of cuts/lesions etc
- treatment of burns/scalds
- treatment of shock

Criteria 10.3A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Details of first aid given recorded Details of first aid are accurately recorded The details to be recorded of first aid given can be
identified The procedures for recording first aid given
can be identified The reasons for recording first aid
given can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 575 of 1445
MEM 10.3A A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work generally undertaken as part of a team. Work is to be undertaken in accordance with relevant regulation or legislation. Installation of electrical wiring/systems and/or
enclosures, including specialist cables, includes the full range of installation materials and techniques. The installation includes the utilisation of a range of methods, tools,
equipment appropriate to the work. All testing includes the use of polarity testers, phase rotation testers, insulation resistance/continuity testers and voltage testers etc.
Specifications/regulations and drawings can refer to legislative Acts, SAA Wiring Rules Standards specifications, electrical and architectural drawings. Electrical installations can
refer to any wiring circuits which are directly or indirectly connected to a power supply system. Where precision electrical/electronic measurement is required, see Unit 12.4A
(Precision electrical/electronic measurement). For specialist cables Unit 10.11A (Terminate and connect specialist cables) should also be selected .

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. - Standards and procedures
for the provision of emergency first aid. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by
other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues
who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. -
Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be
satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the
unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation and testing and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
of electrical wiring and circuits or other units requiring the exercise - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 576 of 1445
 MEM 10.4A A Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.4A A Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.9C10 Perform computer operations 9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 10.4A.1 Install program

Criteria 10.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Download software in accordance with the requirements Appropriate data transfer device(s)/procedure(s) are The appropriate and correct program loading technique
of Unit 2.9C10.4.3. selected. The software is transferred accurately. is selected. The reasons for selecting the chosen
program loading technique can be explained.

Criteria 10.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate checks undertaken during and after down The appropriate checks are undertaken during and after The checks to be undertaken during and after
loading to ensure data transfer is accurate and complete. downloading in accordance with manufacturer's/standard downloading can be identified. The reasons for checking
operating procedures. that the data transfer is accurate and complete can be
given. The action to be taken if data transfer is inaccurate
and/or incomplete can be identified.

Element 10.4A.2 Verify machine/system/process operation

Criteria 10.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate checks undertaken after downloading to The machine operation or process output is verified for The specifications relating to the transferred data can be
ensure machine operation or process output is accurate accuracy and conformance to specifications in accordance identified. The correct operation of the machine or
to specification. with manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. process can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 577 of 1445
 MEM 10.4A A Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specific problems in machine operation or process output Specific problems in machine operation or process output Specific machine operations or process outputs being
being controlled by the programmable controller are being controlled by the programmable controller can be controlled by the programmable controller are
identified in accordance with standard operating identified in accordance with standard operating understood and specific problems can be identified in
procedures procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 10.4A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specific changes required to operating parameters within Specific changes required to operating parameters within Operating parameters within the software program are
the software program are derived in accordance with the software program can be derived in accordance with understood and specific changes required to correct
standard operating procedure. standard operating procedure. problems can be derived in accordance with standard
operating procedure.

Criteria 10.4A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments/changes made to operating parameters in Adjustments/changes are made to operating parameters in Standard operating procedures are understood and all
accordance with standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures adjustments/changes to operating parameters are made
accordingly.

Criteria 10.4A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final check of machine operation or process output taken Final check of machine operation or process output is The required specification to be met and functions to be
to ensure that these are in accordance with taken to ensure that these are in accordance with controlled can be identified and machine operation or
specifications. specifications. process output are verified in a final check.

Element 10.4A.3 Report on changes

Criteria 10.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Changes and adjustments reported in accordance with The report is made to standard operating procedures. Reporting process is known and understood.
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 578 of 1445
 MEM 10.4A A Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specific problems in machine operation or process output Methodical procedure used to identify problems. Methodical approach can meet a variety of situations.
being controlled by the programmable controller are
identified in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 10.4A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specific changes required to operating parameters within Relevant and appropriate changes are made. Procedures to change parameters and their implications
the software program are derived in accordance with are understood.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 10.4A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments/changes made to operating parameters in Changes made in accordance with standard operating
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures.

Criteria 10.4A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final check of machine operation or process output taken Evidence that checks are carried out is present. Reasons for checks understood.
to ensure that these are in accordance with
specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 579 of 1445
 MEM 10.4A A Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or as part of team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work place procedures. Work generally undertaken at location
of programmable controller* but could be undertaken with data link off-site. Operational parameters include timer, counter and set point settings. All specifications and procedures
gained from a range of circuit drawings, engineering data sheets, step print out, manufacturer's procedure and data books. Program languages may include ladder diagram,
functional block diagram, instruction lists etc. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. For routine downloading of PLC, CNC or NC
programs from disk, tape or direct means not requiring program or data adjustment or checks against specification, see Unit 2.9C10 (Perform computer operations). Verification of
machine /process/system operation includes interpreting the program, excluding multi-loop and control sequencing programs. *Programmable controllers include PLC and DCS or
similar devices.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
verification of programmable controller programs or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 580 of 1445
 MEM 10.5A A Commission programmable controller programs Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.5A A Commission programmable controller programs

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.9C10 Perform computer operations 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.4A Enter and change programmable controller
operational parameters

Element 10.5A.1 Commission programmable controller program

Criteria 10.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program format and operational intent determined and All relevant circuit drawings, ladder diagrams, engineering The intended operation of the program can be identified.
understood. data sheets, manufacturer's procedures and data sheets The format of the program can be identified.
are obtained in accordance with workplace procedures.

Criteria 10.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program instructions checked for compliance with The program instructions are checked for compliance with The program specifications can be identified. The
specifications using appropriate techniques. specifications using appropriate techniques in accordance procedures and techniques for checking that program
with manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. instructions comply with specifications can be identified.
The procedures for dealing with any non-conformances
with specifications can be identified.

Criteria 10.5A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Software timers, counter set to specifications where Where appropriate, software timers and/or counters are set The procedures for setting software timers and counters
required. to specifications in accordance with can be identified. The function of software timers and
manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. counters can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 581 of 1445
 MEM 10.5A A Commission programmable controller programs Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.5A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program stepped through manually and outputs checked The program is stepped through manually and all outputs The procedures for manually stepping through the
and measured for compliance with specifications. checked for conformance to specifications in accordance program can be identified. The checks that can be made
with manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. of program outputs can be identified. The techniques to
be used in checking program outputs can be identified.
The measurements to be taken during the checking of
program outputs can be identified. The instruments to be
used to take those measurements can be identified.

Criteria 10.5A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable edit program to meet specifications. Where appropriate, the program is edited to ensure The procedures for editing programs can be identified.
conformance to specifications in accordance with
manufacturer's/standard operating procedures.

Criteria 10.5A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
External inputs checked for compliance with The external inputs are checked for compliance with The external inputs can be identified. The checks to be
specifications utilising correct and appropriate specifications using appropriate techniques and made to ensure that the external inputs comply with
techniques. equipment in accordance with manufacturer's/standard specifications can be identified. The techniques and
operating procedures. equipment to be used in undertaking those checks can
be identified.

Criteria 10.5A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, program is run and total operation Where appropriate, the program is run in conformance The procedures for running the program can be
checked for compliance with specifications. with the manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. identified. The operational processes controlled by the
Where appropriate, the operation of the processes being programmable logic controller can be identified. The
controlled is checked for conformance to specifications in specifications of the operational process can be
accordance with manufacturer's/standard operating identified. Where appropriate, the techniques and
procedures. equipment to be used to check the operational process
for conformance to specifications can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 582 of 1445
 MEM 10.5A A Commission programmable controller programs Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.5A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, final adjustments undertaken to meet Where appropriate, the program is adjusted to ensure The adjustments that can be made to the program can be
operational specifications using standard operational conformance to operational specifications in accordance identified. The effects of those adjustments on the
procedures. with manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. operational processes controlled by the program can be
explained. The procedures to be followed when adjusting
programs can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 583 of 1445
 MEM 10.5A A Commission programmable controller programs Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or as part of team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work place procedures. Work undertaken on location. This
unit relates to the adjustment and commissioning of the programmable controller program to specification only. All programmable controller programs include single and multi-loop
programs and control sequencing of processes. All specifications and procedures gained from circuit drawings, ladder diagrams, engineering data sheets, program print-out
manufacturer's procedures and data books. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. It is assumed that this unit will normally be accessed
in conjunction with units of skill that relate to the operational processes controlled by the programmable controller. Programmable controllers include PLC and DCS or similar
devices.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies cover by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
verification of programmable controller programs or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 584 of 1445
 MEM 10.6A A Install machine/plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.6A A Install machine/plant

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.9A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components components

Element 10.6A.1 Inspect and prepare installation site

Criteria 10.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site checked for correct location, dimension and levels All relevant drawings, specifications and instructions are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
etc utilising appropriate measuring equipment. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. The location, dimensions and levels applicable to the work to
site is checked for correct location, dimensions and where be undertaken can be identified. Where appropriate, the
appropriate levels, in accordance with standard operating technique/equipment to be used to check the site levels
procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 10.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-compliance with specification reported to Where appropriate, any non-compliances with The procedures to be followed if the location,
appropriate authority. specifications detected are reported to the appropriate dimensions and/or levels of the site do not comply with
authority in accordance with standard operating the specifications can be given. The appropriate
procedures. authority to which non-compliances are to be reported
can be given. The specification of the machine/plant can
be identified. The procedures for checking the
machine/plant can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 585 of 1445
 MEM 10.6A A Install machine/plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.6A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alteration, correction undertaken with approval of Where appropriate, authorised alterations, corrections or Any alterations, corrections or adjustments to be made
appropriate authority. adjustments are made to the site and/or machine/plant in to the site can be identified. Any alterations, corrections
accordance with standard operating procedures. or adjustments to be made to the machine/plant can be
identified. The appropriate authority to approve
alterations, corrections or adjustments to the site and/or
machine/plant can be identified. Approval for any
alterations, corrections or adjustments to be made has
been received from the appropriate authority.

Criteria 10.6A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All surfaces, materials and components prepared for use. Where appropriate, surfaces, materials and/or components The material and components to be used in the
are prepared for use in accordance with specifications and installation of the machine/plant can be identified. Any
standard operating procedures. preparation of surfaces required prior to commencing the
installation of the machine/plant can be identified.

Element 10.6A.2 Install machine/plant

Criteria 10.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work carried out safely and in accordance with site All work is carried out safely to specification and in The safety procedures to be followed while undertaking
procedures and to Australian Standards. accordance with codes, standards and standard operating the work can be identified. All safety equipment and
procedures. personal protective clothing to be used/worn while
undertaking the work can be identified. All relevant
codes and standards can be identified.

Criteria 10.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine components prepared for correct sequential All components of the machine/plant are prepared for The sequence in which components of the machine/plant
installation. correct sequential installation in accordance with standard are to be installed can be identified.
operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 586 of 1445
 MEM 10.6A A Install machine/plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.6A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/plant installed in accordance with All components of the machine/plant are installed and The methods of fixing/fastening the components of the
manufacturer's and site specifications. fixed in conformance to specifications and in accordance machine/plant can be identified. The methods of
with standard operating procedures. lifting/moving the components of the machine/plant can
be identified. The methods of locating/holding the
components of the machine/plant prior to
fixing/fastening can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen methods of lifting/moving and
locating/holding the components of the machine/plant
can be given.

Criteria 10.6A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine modifications/alterations undertaken to standard The machine/plant is checked for conformance to The procedures to be followed if the machine/plant
operating procedures where required. specifications in accordance with standard operating installation does not comply with the specifications can
procedures. Where appropriate, the approved adjustments be identified. The authority to whom non-conformances
are made to the machine/plant in accordance with are to be reported can be identified. The procedures for
specifications and standard operating procedures. checking the machine/plant for conformance to
specification can be given. Where appropriate,
adjustments to be made to bring the machine/plant into
specification can be identified. The appropriate authority
to approve adjustments to the machine/plant can be
identified. Approval for any adjustments to be made has
been received from the appropriate authority.

Criteria 10.6A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/plant levelled, aligned, coupled and connected Where appropriate, the machine/plant is levelled, aligned, All connections and couplings to be made to the
(excluding electrical connections) in accordance with coupled and connected (excluding electrical connections) machine/plant can be identified. The levelling and
specifications. to specification in accordance with alignment requirements of the machine/plant can be
manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. Where identified. Where appropriate, the person(s) responsible
appropriate, any electrical connections are scheduled with for making any electrical connections can be identified.
the appropriate persons in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 587 of 1445
 MEM 10.6A A Install machine/plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.6A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site cleaned and cleared of all debris and left in safe state. The installation site is cleared of all debris, cleaned and left The requirements for cleaning and clearing the
in a safe state in accordance with OH and S requirements installation site can be identified. Where appropriate, the
and standard operating procedures. equipment required to clean and/or clear the site can be
identified.

Criteria 10.6A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All reports, documentation completed correctly to All required reports and documentation are completed The reports and/or documentation to be completed
required specifications. correctly and in accordance with standard operating before, during and after the installation of the
procedures. machine/plant can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 588 of 1445
 MEM 10.6A A Install machine/plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work generally undertaken in team environment, (but not exclusively). This unit applies to installation where the equipment being installed requires substantial modification to the
existing site and/or connecting equipment and excludes minor modifications. Installation covered by this unit also excludes electrical installation. Where existing machines/plant are
replaced by the same or similar machine/plant, Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) applies. Machine/plant includes rotating equipment
and machinery such as pumps, compressors, drive units, blowers, etc; production equipment and plant, process equipment, plant and machinery, engineering plant and machine
tools etc. Work undertaken utilising new or existing external and internal locations and sites. Foundations, footings, beds and frameworks completed prior to installation and
commissioning. All specifications applied via engineering drawings, written or verbal instructions. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative
requirements. Routine modifications and alterations are of a minor nature not requiring specification changes or technical recording. Examples would be fitting of spacers, spool
pieces, relocation of brackets, alignment of holes etc. If balancing skills or manufacture of gaskets are required, these should be accessed from appropriate units. Where design
skills are required refer to Unit 9.11A (Apply basic engineering design concepts).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation of machines and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and/or plant, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 589 of 1445
MEM 10.7B B Modification of control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.7B B Modification of control systems

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to plan the commissioning procedure, assess the control system performance, adjust the control system, and undertake
commissioning modifications. Control loop/system components incorporate all instruments and devices that make up or control a loop/system including sensing
devices,
control devices, actuator and transducers. Control systems can mean closed or open loop or continuous or step processes. Loops/systems can incorporate the use of
pneumatics, hydraulics, electrical/electronics or a combination of these.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring
10.3A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
1000vAC/1500vDC)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.48A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits
18.49A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment which 18.51A Fault find repair/rectify complex electrical circuits
use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.2C11 Organise and analyse information 2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.6C10 Plan a complete activity
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations 2.10C5 Write reports
2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
statistical computations
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering
components
18.10A Equipment condition monitoring and recording 18.16B Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring 18.18A Maintain pneumatic system components
results
18.19A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems 18.20A Maintain hydraulic system components 18.21A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems
18.22A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls 18.23B Modify fluid power system operation 18.53B Modify fluid power control systems
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 590 of 1445
MEM 10.7B B Modification of control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.60A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single & 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation
multiple loop control systems sensors, transmitters and final control elements
18.67A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi
element systems
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 5.2A High reliability soldering and desoldering
components
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.56A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and
components
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.58A Modify electronic equipment 18.59B Modify electronic systems

18.65A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and

components
Pre-requisite units - Path 5
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.88A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning 18.92A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial
systems and components refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls
Pre-requisite units - Path 6
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.90A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems 18.92A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial
and components refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls
Pre-requisite units - Path 7
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.89A Maintain and repair large central air handling 18.90A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems
systems and components
18.93B Maintain and repair integrated industrial
refrigeration and/or large air handling system controls
Pre-requisite units - Path 8
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 591 of 1445
MEM 10.7B B Modification of control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.60A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single &
equipment components multiple loop control systems
18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation 18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components 18.67A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi
sensors, transmitters and final control elements element systems

Element 10.7B.1 Plan commissioning procedure

Criteria 10.7B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control system format and operational intent All relevant drawings, circuits, specifications, data sheets and The work to be undertaken can be identified The control
determined and understood instructions obtained in accordance with workplace system format can be identified The operational intent of
procedures All necessary approvals for the work are obtained the processes being controlled by the control system can be
in accordance with work place procedures identified The specifications of the control system and the
processes being controlled can be identified Any regulatory
and legislative requirements associated with the
commissioning procedure can be identified
Criteria 10.7B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Commissioning procedures are effectively sequenced to The procedures for commissioning the control system can
meet requirement of components and control be identified The sequential requirements of the
application components of the systems being controlled can be
identified The commissioning procedures are effectively
sequenced to meet the requirements of the system
components and the control application The reasons for
selecting the chosen commissioning sequence can be
explained
Element 10.7B.2 Check control system installation
Criteria 10.7B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Verify that all system components are installed All system components are checked for correct installation All components of the operational processes can be
correctly to specifications in conformance to specifications using standard operating identified The installation specifications for each
procedures component of the operational processes can be identified
Any measurements to be taken to ensure conformance to
specifications can be identified The measuring techniques
and equipment appropriate to the measurements to be
taken can be identified
Criteria 10.7B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate test equipment is functional and calibrated All test equipment to be used is checked for correct function Test equipment and techniques appropriate to the
before use and is calibrated before use in accordance with standard commissioning of the control system can be identified The
operating procedures reasons for selecting the chosen test equipment and
techniques can be explained The calibration procedures for
the selected test equipment can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 592 of 1445
MEM 10.7B B Modification of control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.7B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components or control loop/system powered up and The components and/or the control loop/system are The procedures for energising components and/or the
checked for correct supply in accordance with energised and checked for correct supply in accordance with control loop/ system can be identified The supply
specifications specifications and standard operating procedures requirements of components and the control loop/system
can be identified
Criteria 10.7B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All readings/measurements are correctly obtained, All readings/measurements are correctly obtained, The recording requirements for readings/measurements
interpreted and recorded interpreted and recorded in accordance with standard taken can be identified
operating procedures
Element 10.7B.3 Adjust control system and assess performance
Criteria 10.7B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control loop/system components adjusted to meet Where appropriate the control loop/ system components The adjustments that can be made to the control
control characteristics, application and process are adjusted in accordance with standard operating loop/system components can be identified The effects of
specifications utilising appropriate techniques procedures to ensure that control characteristics, application those adjustments on the control characteristics and
and process specifications are achieved operational processes can be explained
Criteria 10.7B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final verifications including any operational adjustments The appropriate measurements/tests are undertaken in The appropriate measurements/tests to be undertaken to
made to ensure required performance accordance with standard operating procedures to ensure the verify control system and process operation can be
control system and process operation conforms to identified The reasons for selecting the chosen
specification measurements/tests can be explained
Element 10.7B.4 Commissioning modifications undertaken
Criteria 10.7B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary modifications to change performance in order Where appropriate, the authorised modification to the The procedures to be followed if the operational
to meet manufacturer's or operational specifications or control system and/or process components carried out in specifications of the control system and/or process cannot
safety and legislative requirements are undertaken or accordance with standard operating procedures be achieved can be identified The effect of changes to
actioned control system components on system performance can be
explained The appropriate authority to approve any
modifications to the control system and/or process
components can be given Where appropriate, the relevant
authority has approved any modification to be undertaken
Criteria 10.7B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Provide reports on system/process characteristics for All relevant reports on the commissioning of the control The reporting requirements associated with the
warranty, handover, legislative, etc. purposes system are completed in accordance with standard operating commissioning of control systems can be identified
procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 593 of 1445
MEM 10.7B B Modification of control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.7B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All modifications documented and result recorded to Where appropriate, all relevant reports on the modifications The requirements for recording modifications to control
standard operating procedure made to the control system and/or process components are systems and/or process components can be identified The
completed in accordance with standard operating procedures reasons for recording modifications to control systems
and/or process components can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 594 of 1445
MEM 10.7B B Modification of control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work generally undertaken in a team environment, but not exclusively. Commissioning involves the development of a commissioning procedure, testing of operation and
adjustment to conform with specification. Control loop/system components incorporate all instruments and devices which make up or control a loop/system, including sensing
devices, control devices, actuators and transducers. Control systems can mean closed or open loop on continuous or step process control systems. Loop/system control can
incorporate the use of pneumatics, electrical, electronics, hydraulics or a combination. All specifications supplied via engineering/circuit drawings, data sheets, written or verbal
instructions. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by this unit The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the commissioning and modification of control systems or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 595 of 1445
 MEM 10.8B A Undertake commissioning procedures for plant and/or equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.8B A Undertake commissioning procedures for plant and/or equipment
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
10.6A Install machine/plant 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.3A Use tools for precision work 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.9A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering
components components
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.90A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems
and components
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.89A Maintain and repair large central air handling
systems
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring 10.3A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
1000vAC/1500vDC)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.49A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment which
use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 10.8B.1 Plan commissioning procedure

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 596 of 1445
 MEM 10.8B A Undertake commissioning procedures for plant and/or equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.8B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Commissioning procedure is undertaken and approvals The appropriate sequence of events in the commissioning All necessary approvals for the work are obtained in
obtained in accordance with standard operating of the machine/plant can be identified. accordance with site procedures. All procedures
procedures. documentation pertaining to the commissioning
procedures is obtained in accordance with work site
procedures.

Element 10.8B.2 Assess system performance

Criteria 10.8B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct measuring/test devices used. The performance tests appropriate to the machine/plant to Appropriate measuring/testing devices are selected in
be commissioned can be identified. accordance with work site procedures and machine/plant
specifications.

Criteria 10.8B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All necessary measurements/readings taken at The measurements to be taken to ensure conformance to All measurements/readings are safely taken in
appropriate points. specifications can be identified. The correct points at accordance with work site procedures.
which measurements are to be taken can be identified.

Criteria 10.8B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All variances from specifications recorded to standard All variations from specification can be identified. The Variations in machine/plant performance from
operating procedure. reasons for detected variations from performance specification are recorded in accordance with work site
specifications can be given. procedures.

Element 10.8B.3 Adjust plant

Criteria 10.8B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plant/system performance adjusted to design and Appropriate adjustments to bring the machine/plant into Appropriate adjustments are made to the machine/plant
operational specifications utilising appropriate and line with operational specifications can be identified based to bring it into specification in accordance with work site
correct techniques Technical difficulties are resolved in on engineering principles or appropriate technical advice. procedures.
consultation with appropriate technical advisors.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 597 of 1445
 MEM 10.8B A Undertake commissioning procedures for plant and/or equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 10.8B.4 Make reports

Criteria 10.8B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Produce report/logs on completed The reporting requirements relevant to the machine/plant All appropriate reports in accordance with standard
system/plant/machinery/status/ performance as required being commissioned can be identified. operating procedures.
in accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 598 of 1445
 MEM 10.8B A Undertake commissioning procedures for plant and/or equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work generally undertaken as part of team role. Technical difficulties are resolved in consultation with appropriate technical advisors. Plant and/or equipment includes rotating
equipment and machinery, production equipment, plant and machinery, process equipment, and machine tools etc. Commissioning work, which may be of an
electrical/electronic/mechanical nature, is undertaken on internally or externally located plant and/or equipment that is new, or replacement, or has been extensively modified (by
people usually outside of the commissioning individual or team). This unit is not intended to be used by electrical/electronic/mechanical maintenance personnel completing their
own work, including return to service work. These activities are covered in Unit 18.4A (Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment and/or Unit 9.11A (Apply basic engineering
design concepts) and/or Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) and/or 18.48A (Fault find repair/rectify basic circuits) and/or 18.54A (Fault
find test calibrate instrumentation, sensors, transmitters and final control elements). All work undertaken to specifications supplied via engineering drawings and data sheets,
written and verbal instructions, regulatory and legislative requirements. Additional specialisation units may be required for some specialist applications eg: fluid power,
instrumentation and PLC, electrical/electronic etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant drawings, manuals, catalogues, codes, standards, regulations and reference material
relevant to the work. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of
communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be
approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence
of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the
candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by
the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the commissioning of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for their own work; - plan tasks in all
machines and plant, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in accordance with
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use accepted
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will
be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 599 of 1445
 MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
10.10A Install pipework and pipework assemblies 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems
components

Element 10.9A.1 Inspect and prepare installation site

Criteria 10.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site checked for correct location, dimension and levels, All relevant drawings, specifications and instructions are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
etc. utilising appropriate measuring equipment. obtained with workplace procedures. The site is checked location, dimensions and levels applicable to the work to
for correct location, dimensions and where appropriate, be undertaken can be identified. Where appropriate, the
levels, in accordance with standard operating procedures. technique/equipment to be used to check the site levels
can be identified.

Criteria 10.9A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-compliance with specification reported to Where appropriate, any non-compliance to specifications The procedures to be followed if the location,
appropriate authority. detected are reported to the appropriate authority in dimensions and/or levels of the site do not comply with
accordance with standard operating procedures. the specifications can be given. The appropriate
authority to which non-compliances are to be reported
can be given. The specification of the refrigeration/air
conditioning plant and equipment can be identified. The
procedures for checking the refrigeration/air conditioning
plant and equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 600 of 1445
 MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.9A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alteration, correction undertaken with approval of Where appropriate, authorised alterations, corrections or Any alterations, corrections or adjustments to be made
appropriate authority. adjustments are made to the site and/or refrigeration/air to the site can be identified. Any alterations, corrections
conditioning plant and equipment in accordance with or adjustments to be made to the refrigeration/air
standard operating procedures. conditioning plant and equipment can be identified. The
appropriate authority to approve alterations, corrections
or adjustments to the site and/or structure can be
identified. Approval for any alterations, corrections or
adjustments to be made has been received from the
appropriate authority.

Criteria 10.9A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All surfaces, materials and components prepared for use. Where appropriate, surfaces, materials and/or components The materials and components to be used in the
are prepared or use in accordance with specifications and installation of the refrigeration/air conditioning plant and
standard operating procedures. equipment can be identified. Any preparation of surfaces
required prior to commencing the installation of the
refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment can be
identified.

Element 10.9A.2 Install refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment

Criteria 10.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work carried out safely and in accordance with site All work is carried out safely to specification and in The safety procedures to be followed while undertaking
procedures and to Australian Standards. accordance with all relevant codes, standards and the work can be identified. All safety equipment and
standard operating procedures. personal protective clothing to be used/worn while
undertaking the work can be identified. All relevant
codes and standards can be identified.

Criteria 10.9A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration/air conditioning plant and All components of the refrigeration/air conditioning plant The sequence in which components of the
equipment/components are prepared for correct are prepared for correct sequential installation in refrigeration/air conditioning plant are to be installed can
sequential installation. accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
installation sequence can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 601 of 1445
 MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.9A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration/air conditioning plant and All components of the refrigeration/air conditioning plant The methods of fixing/fastening the components of the
equipment/components are installed in conformance with are installed and fixed in conformance to specifications refrigeration/air conditioning plant can be identified. The
manufacturers' and site specification. and in accordance with standard operating procedures. methods of lifting/moving the components of the
refrigeration/air conditioning plant can be identified. The
methods of locating/holding the components of the
refrigeration/air conditioning plant prior to
fixing/fastening can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen methods of lifting/moving and
locating/holding the components of the refrigeration/air
conditioning plant can be given.

Criteria 10.9A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine modifications/alterations of the refrigeration/air The refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment is The procedures to be followed if the refrigeration/air
conditioning plant and equipment are undertaken to checked for conformance to specifications in accordance conditioning plant does not comply with the
standard operating procedures where required. with standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, specifications can be identified. The authority to whom
the approved modifications/alterations are made to the non-conformances are to be reported can be identified.
refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment in The procedures for checking refrigeration/air
accordance with specifications and standard operating conditioning plant and equipment for conformance to
procedures. specifications can be given. Where appropriate,
modifications/alterations to be made to bring the
refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment into
specification can be identified. The appropriate authority
to approve modifications/alterations to the
refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment can be
identified. Approval for any modifications/alterations to
be made has been received from the appropriate
authority.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 602 of 1445
 MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.9A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment Where appropriate, the refrigeration/air conditioning plant All connections and couplings to be made to the
levelled, aligned, coupled and connected in accordance and equipment is levelled, aligned, coupled and connected refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment can be
with specifications. to specification in accordance with identified. The levelling and alignment requirements of
manufacturers'/standard operating procedures. Where the refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment
appropriate, electrical connections are scheduled with the can be identified. Where appropriate, the person(s)
appropriate person(s) in accordance with standard responsible for making electrical connections can be
operating procedures. All necessary permits and identified. All services to be connected to the
clearances associated with the connection of services to refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment can be
the refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment are identified. All state/territory regulations and legislation
obtained in accordance with the relevant legislation and relating to the services to be connected can be identified.
regulations.

Criteria 10.9A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration system is charged with refrigerant and The refrigeration system is charged with the correct The procedures for charging refrigeration systems with
lubricant in accordance with standard operating refrigerant, to specifications in accordance with standard refrigerant and lubricants can be given. The procedures
procedures. operating procedures. The refrigeration system is checked for checking refrigeration systems for leaks can be given.
for leaks using appropriate tools, techniques and The appropriate refrigerant and lubricant can be
equipment in accordance with standard operating identified.
procedures.

Criteria 10.9A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site cleaned and cleared of all debris and left in a safe The installation site is cleared of all debris, cleaned and left The requirements for cleaning and clearing the
state. in a safe state in accordance with occupational health and installation site can be identified. Where appropriate, the
safety requirements and standard operating procedures. equipment required to clean and or clear the site can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 603 of 1445
 MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 10.9A.3 Start up refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment

Criteria 10.9A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment is Pre-start checks are undertaken in accordance with The procedures for checking refrigeration/air
started up in accordance with standard operating standard operating procedures. The refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment prior to start-up can be
procedures. conditioning plant and equipment is started up safely and given. The reasons for carrying out pre-start checks can
correctly in accordance with standard operating be explained. The safety procedures to be followed when
procedures. starting up refrigeration/air conditioning plant and
equipment can be given. All appropriate safety
equipment can be identified and its application given.
The procedures for starting the refrigeration/air
conditioning plant and equipment can be given. The
consequences of not following prescribed start-up
procedures can be explained.

Criteria 10.9A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment is The refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment is The procedures for operating the refrigeration/air
operated, monitored and adjusted to specification. operated, monitored and adjusted to specification using conditioning plant and equipment can be given. The
appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in procedures, tools, techniques and equipment required to
accordance with standard operating procedures. monitor the performance of the refrigeration/air
conditioning plant and equipment can be identified. The
procedures for adjusting the refrigeration/air
conditioning plant and equipment to specification can be
given.

Criteria 10.9A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All reports, documentation completed correctly to All reports and documentation are completed correctly and The reports and/or documentation to be completed
required specifications. in accordance with standard operating procedures. before, during and after the installation and start-up of
refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 604 of 1445
 MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of safety, quality and workshop procedures. Refrigeration/air conditioning systems
include commercial, industrial and transport applications - Refer to Field Definitions. Refrigeration/air conditioning components include, but not limited to compressors, evaporators,
condensers, valves, controllers, fans, solenoids, sensors, thermostats, switches, recorders, etc. Controls may be mechanical, pneumatic, electric, electronic and may be
sequenced/controlled by programmable controllers or computer systems. All work is to be undertaken in accordance with all relevant state or territory legislation and regulatory
requirements. Modifications and alterations are of a routine/minor nature and do not require specification changes or technical recording. For example, the fitting of spacers,
relocation of brackets, alignment of holes, etc. Work is undertaken utilising new or existing internal or external locations and sites. Footings, foundations, beds and frameworks are
completed prior to installation. This unit should not be selected with Unit 10.6A (Install machine/plant), but appropriate air conditioning/refrigeration would still be required where
Unit 10.6A (Install machine/plant) is substituted for Unit 10.9A (Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment). Where any extensive fitting, alignment is required,
then Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) and Unit 18.9A (Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering components) may also
need to be considered. Where modifications involve electrical disconnection and reconnection, then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment (which use up to
1000vAC/1500vDC)), should also be considered. If brazing/silver soldering skills are required, Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver soldering) should also be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. Assessment should be conducted in an environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
that the individual is familiar with. relevant drawings, manuals, catalogues, codes, standards, regulations and reference material
relevant to the work. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of
communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be
approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence
of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the
candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by
the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for their own work; - plan tasks in all
refrigeration/air conditioning plant and equipment or other situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in accordance with
competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use accepted
covered by this unit. engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks involved will
be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 605 of 1445
 MEM 10.9A A Install refrigeration and air conditioning plant and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.10A A Install pipework and pipework assemblies

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 10.10A.1 Plan the installation

Criteria 10.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantity and type of pipework and pipework assemblies Appropriate specifications are obtained. Specifications are interpreted to select correct types and
are selected according to specifications. quantities.

Criteria 10.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate sequence for the installation of pipework Sequence determined with regard to type of installation, Sequence can be determined for a range of situations,
and pipework assemblies determined. site conditions, other structures present, work integrated materials and conditions.
with other site activities.

Criteria 10.10A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work site prepared for installation of pipework and Site is prepared with due regard to OHS including site Safety issues can be clearly identified and explained,
pipework assemblies. safety, clear working space, other adequate precautions determined and applied, awareness
materials/structures/personnel in vicinity, isolation of work of other site factors that could be effected by the work.
site where required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 606 of 1445
 MEM 10.10A A Install pipework and pipework assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 10.10A.2 Pipework and pipework assemblies prepared for assembly

Criteria 10.10A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pipework is cleaned in accordance with standard All pipework and assemblies are cleaned to specifications The procedures for cleaning pipework and assemblies
operating procedures. safely, in accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The solvents/cleaning materials to be used
in cleaning the pipework and assemblies can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
solvent/cleaning material can be explained. The
solvents/cleaning materials to be used on a variety of
pipe materials and piping applications can be given. The
precautions to be taken when using solvents/cleaning
materials can be given.

Criteria 10.10A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pipework and assemblies are purged in accordance with Pipework and assemblies are purged safely in accordance The reasons for purging pipework and assemblies can be
standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures using appropriate explained. A variety of purging materials and their
tools, techniques and equipment. application can be given. The appropriate purging
material for the given pipework and assemblies can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen purging
material can be given. The precautions to be taken when
purging pipework and assemblies can be given. The
tools, techniques and equipment required to purge
pipework and assemblies can be identified.

Criteria 10.10A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pipework and assemblies are capped/sealed. Pipework and assemblies are capped/sealed to The procedures for capping/sealing pipework and
specification in accordance with standard operating assemblies can be given. The methods of
procedures. capping/sealing pipework and assemblies can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
capping/sealing method can be given. The reasons for
capping/sealing pipework and assemblies can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 607 of 1445
 MEM 10.10A A Install pipework and pipework assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 10.10A.3 Install pipework and assemblies

Criteria 10.10A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Enclosures/hangers/support systems are installed Appropriate enclosures/hangers/support systems are The location/layout of pipework and assemblies can be
without damage or distortion to the surrounding installed in the correct location, in accordance with identified. A variety of enclosures/hangers/ support
environment or other services. standard operating procedures without damage or systems and their application can be given. The method
distortion to the surrounding environment or other of attachment of the enclosures/hangers/support
services. systems to the surrounding environment can be
identified. The precautions to be taken installing
enclosures/hangers/support systems can be identified.
The procedures to be followed when installing
enclosures/hangers/support systems can be given.

Criteria 10.10A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pipework and assemblies are installed without damage or Pipework and assemblies are installed in correct location in The procedures for installing pipework and assemblies
distortion to either pipework, assemblies or surrounding accordance with standard operating procedures without can be given. The method of attachment of the pipework
environment or other services. damage or distortion to pipework, assemblies, surrounding and assemblies to the enclosures/hangers/support
environment or other services. systems can be identified. The precautions to be taken
when installing pipework and assemblies can be
explained.

Criteria 10.10A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Leak test pipework in accordance with standard operating The installed pipework and assemblies are leak tested in The procedures for leak testing pipework and assemblies
procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures using can be given. The precautions to be taken when leak
appropriate tools, techniques and equipment. The installed testing is being carried out can be explained. The tools,
pipework and assemblies are free of leaks and conform to techniques and equipment necessary to carry out leak
specifications. testing of pipework and assemblies can be identified. The
operational specification of the system incorporating the
installed pipework and assemblies can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 608 of 1445
 MEM 10.10A A Install pipework and pipework assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.10A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All ancillary devices and materials are installed to All required ancillary devices and materials are installed All ancillary devices and materials to be installed in
specification in accordance with standard operating safely to specification in accordance with standard conjunction with the pipework and assemblies can be
procedures. operating procedures. identified. The procedures for installing ancillary devices
and materials can be given. The precautions to be taken
when installing ancillary devices and materials can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 609 of 1445
 MEM 10.10A A Install pipework and pipework assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of safety, quality and workshop procedures. Work may be undertaken at the installation
site given appropriate facilities and equipment are available or at a remote location. Pipework refers to pipes and tubes made from ferrous and non-ferrous metals and plastics.
Piping accessories include flanges, joints, valves, unions, collars, etc. Ancillary components include insulation materials, valve control systems, etc. Enclosures include metal and
PVC ducts, etc. Support systems include pipe/tube bundle support, ties, unistrut, trays, ladder racks, etc. Where pipework and assemblies are to be part of a system/process
covered by legislative/regulatory requirements, the units relating to the appropriate welding certificates for the pipe material and application must be accessed. Where pipework is to
be cut by mechanical or thermal methods, or welding processes used, the appropriate unit(s) should be accessed. Where the pipework is to be formed and shaped using mechanical
and/or thermal techniques, Unit 5.10A (Undertake fabrication, forming, bending and shaping), should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation of pipework and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and accessories or other competencies requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 610 of 1445
 MEM 10.11A A Terminate and connect specialist cables Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 10.11A A Terminate and connect specialist cables

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 10.11A.1 Prepare for termination and connection of specialist cables

Criteria 10.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work undertaken safely and to workplace procedures, All work is undertaken in accordance with work site Safety hazards associated with the termination and
appropriate regulations and legislative requirements. procedures and relevant statutory requirements. connection of cables, and the work environment, can be
identified. Relevant statutory requirements associated
with the termination and connection of specialist cables
can be identified.

Criteria 10.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct cables and materials selected in accordance with Cables and materials are checked for condition and Appropriate specifications for specialist cables and
job requirements. conformance to specifications. materials can be identified.

Criteria 10.11A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Certification documentation obtained where appropriate. Appropriate documentation, certifying work to be carried Correct and appropriate documentation and approvals
out, is obtained. are identified.

Criteria 10.11A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preparation of work undertaken or checked/inspected for Where appropriate, new installation site checked for The location of the work to be undertaken can be
correct locations and specifications. correct location and specifications in accordance with identified. Any wiring support and/or protection
work site procedures. Where appropriate, existing requirements can be identified. The specifications of
installation inspected for correct location and wiring support and/or protection requirements can be
specifications in accordance with work site procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 611 of 1445
 MEM 10.11A A Terminate and connect specialist cables Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 10.11A.2 Connect specialist cables

Criteria 10.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Terminations/connections made to specifications, All terminations/connections made to specification and The relevant statutory requirements can be identified.
manufacturers requirements and to safety and comply with manufacturer's and regulatory requirements. The manufacturers' requirements can be identified.
state/territory regulations and legislative requirements.

Criteria 10.11A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment and wiring are installed in a manner that does All installations are undertaken to ensure that the full The purpose of the use of the specialist cable installation
not reduce the type of protection afforded by the protection provided by the specialist cable installation is is identified. The installation meets the manufacturers'
equipment design. maintained. requirements.

Criteria 10.11A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All cabling, connections and terminations are tested for All cabling, connections and terminations tested in Appropriate tests for specialist cables can be identified.
compliance with specifications. accordance with specifications.

Criteria 10.11A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All cables, wires, conductors and connections are All cables, wires, conductors and connections are marked, The marking, tagging and labelling requirements for
marked/tagged and labelled to specifications. tagged and labelled to specification. cables, wires, conductors and connections can be
identified.

Criteria 10.11A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All reports, documentation completed correctly in All reports/documents completed in accordance with The data to be recorded/reported and the frequency of
accordance with relevant specifications and regulatory regulatory and work site procedures. recording/reporting can be identified.
requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 612 of 1445
 MEM 10.11A A Terminate and connect specialist cables Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Specialist cables include, but not confined to
- Mineral insulate cables (MIMS)
- Steel wire (SWA - normally described as Steel Wire Armoured cables)
- Other sheathed cables such as piloted cables, composite screened cables, braided cables
- Cable installations requiring specialised glands, fittings and enclosures
Work undertaken autonomously or as part of a team environment. Work undertaken in the field or workshop environment. Work undertaken in accordance with relevant
regulations, legislation and specifications. All testing undertaken on completed circuits where not connected to main supply using appropriate methods eg: continuity and
resistance checks. Specifications obtained from electrical/electronic circuit drawings, data sheets and manufacturers' manuals. Special fittings must be used for each type of
specialist cable. The cables are often rigid and require the use of bending tools and techniques which do not deform the cable, thus causing damage to the insulation etc. Also
compounds such as resins may be required for sealing purposes. Most types of specialist cable are designed to either exclude or minimise the ingress of gas or liquids, or to
minimise the danger of flash. Termination and connection therefore requires particular techniques, and, in some cases testing. All specifications and procedures are obtained from
circuit drawings, data sheets, instructions and regulatory requirements. All work is to be conducted in accordance with relevant legislative and regulatory requirements. For
termination and connection of signal and data cables Unit 18.63A (Terminate signal and data cables) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the termination and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
connection of specialist cables, or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all pre-requisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 613 of 1445
MEM 10.13A A Assemble and install equipment and accessories/ancillaries Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit MEM 10.13A A Assemble and install equipment and accessories/ancillaries
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Installation & commissioning Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required for assembling and installing equipment and ancillaries/accessories. It does not cover installation requiring substantial
modification to the existing site or where components are replaced by the same or similar, type. Typical applications may include marine vessel manufacture.
Installation
and testing within manufacturer specifications is covered by Unit 25.12A (Install and test operations of marine auxiliary systems).

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 10.13A.1 Inspect and prepare the installation site

Criteria 10.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site checked for location, dimension, levels, etc. Site is checked and dimensions and measurements taken Appropriate leveling and measuring equipment can be
utilising appropriate measuring equipment. according to job requirements and industry standards. identified and benefits of choice explained.

Criteria 10.13A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non compliance with specification reported to Non compliance reported according to procedural standards. Procedural standards can be identified. Non compliance and
appropriate authority. the impact of such can be explained.

Criteria 10.13A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alteration, correction undertaken with approval of Where required, alterations or corrections undertaken as Requirement for adherence to procedures can be stated.
appropriate authority. directed.

Criteria 10.13A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All surfaces, materials and components prepared for use. Surfaces, materials and components prepared for use. Preparatory requirements and processes can be explained.
Component parts checked against specification where
necessary.
Element 10.13A.2 Install machinery/plant and equipment
Criteria 10.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work carried out safely and in accordance with site All work is carried out safely and in accordance with Hazards are identified and safe working procedures can be
procedures, standard operating procedures and legislative manufacturer's, site and legislative requirements. stated. Legislative requirements can be explained.
requirements.
Criteria 10.13A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/equipment components prepared for correct Machinery/plant or equipement is prepared according to All parts can be identified and sequence of installation can
sequential installation. specifications and established procedures. be stated.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 614 of 1445
MEM 10.13A A Assemble and install equipment and accessories/ancillaries Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 10.13A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Install machinery/plant or equipment in accordance with Machinery/plant or equipment is installed in accordance with Installation procedures can be explained
manufacturer's and site specifications. manufacturer's and site specific requirements.

Criteria 10.13A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine modification/alterations undertaken to Modifications/alterations, where necessary, are carried out Reasons for modifications/alterations are identified and
operating procedures where required. to industry standard without jeopardising structural or impact of modifications/alterations can be stated.
watertight integrity.
Criteria 10.13A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/equipment levelled, aligned, connected or Machine/equipment levelled, aligned, connected or coupled Procedures for leveling and aligning can be explained.
coupled where required (excluding electrical connections according to specifications. Through hull fittings are Impacts of mis-allignment can be stated.
) packed/sealed to make watertight.
Criteria 10.13A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site cleaned and cleared of all debris and left in safe Site is cleaned to an acceptable level in terms of safety and Cleaning procedures can be identified and hazards stated.
state. cleanliness and all debris removed.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 615 of 1445
MEM 10.13A A Assemble and install equipment and accessories/ancillaries Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously and/or as part of a team where appropriate. Applies to installation to pre-determined positions/locations using drawings, instructions etc.
Equipment and accessories/ancillaries may include toe rails, cleats, bollards, bow-rollers, fairleads, staunchions, railings, non-powered and powered winches, engines and driving
mechanisms, auxiliary power plants, desalinating units, stabiliser units, , powered/non-powered davits, pumps and compressors etc. Work undertaken utilising new external and
internal locations and sites. Foundations, footings, beds and framework completed prior to installation practices. All specifications applied via engineering drawings, written or
verbal instructions. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. Where positions are determined, alignments undertaken, testing within
manufacturer specifications is required etc. Unit 25.12A (Install and test operations of marine auxiliary systems) should be selected. Where installation requires substantial
modification to the existing site, and is being replaced by the same or similar, type Unit 10.6A (Install machine/plant), Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit
engineering components), Unit 18.9A (Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering components) and Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components ) should be accessed. For production-related assembly work, Unit 3.2A (Precision assembly) should be selected. Do not select this unit if Unit 3.2A (Precision
assembly) has already been selected. Where load shifting equipment such as ride on fork lifts/pallet trucks is used, Unit 11.10A (Operate mobile load shifting equipment) should
also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of on and off The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the assembly and installation of equipment and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
accessories/ancillaries or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 616 of 1445
 MEM 11.1A B Erect/dismantle scaffolding and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.1A B Erect/dismantle scaffolding and equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 11.1A.1 Erect scaffold/equipment

Criteria 11.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures. All relevant job instructions, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The safety
procedures are obtained in accordance with work place procedures to be followed can be identified.
procedures. All work is undertaken safely and in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 11.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Erection site prepared to meet job requirements. The erection site is prepared in accordance with standard The erection site can be identified. The procedures for
operating procedures. preparing a site for the erection of scaffolding and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 11.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary signage and barriers placed in appropriate All necessary signage and barriers are appropriately The signs and barriers to be put in place and their
position. placed in accordance with standard operating procedures. location can be identified. The reasons for placing signs
and barriers in appropriate positions can be given.

Criteria 11.1A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment is erected to plan and in The scaffolding/equipment is erected in the planned The procedures for erecting scaffolding/equipment can
accordance with acceptable safe work practices, sequence and in accordance with relevant codes, be given. The relevant codes, standards and regulatory
Australian Standards and equipment manufacturer's standards, regulations and manufacturer's requirements. requirements can be identified. The sequence of
requirements. operations in erecting the scaffolding/equipment can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 617 of 1445
 MEM 11.1A B Erect/dismantle scaffolding and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.1A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment checked for safety and The scaffolding/equipment is checked for conformance to The procedures for checking the scaffolding/equipment
operational requirements. safety and operational requirements in accordance with for conformance to safety and operational requirements
standard operating procedures. can be given.

Element 11.1A.2 Dismantle scaffold/equipment

Criteria 11.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work undertaken safely and to prescribed procedure. All work is undertaken safely and in accordance with The safety procedures to be followed when dismantling
standard operating procedures. scaffolding/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment dismantled in accordance with site The scaffolding/equipment is dismantled safely in The procedures for dismantling scaffolding/equipment
procedures and critical structural and safety accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The critical structural requirements of
requirements. scaffolding/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site cleaned and cleared of all tools, excess material and The site is cleaned and cleared of all tools, excess material The procedures for cleaning and clearing the site can be
debris and left in a safe state. and debris and left in a safe state in accordance with given. The reasons for cleaning and clearing the site can
standard operating procedures. be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 618 of 1445
 MEM 11.1A B Erect/dismantle scaffolding and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken to state or territory legislative requirements. Equipment range includes: standing prefabricated tower scaffolds and bracket scaffolds. Work undertaken with
supervision or in a team environment.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the erection/dismantling of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
scaffolding and equipment or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 619 of 1445
 MEM 11.2A B Erect/dismantle complex scaffolding and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.2A B Erect/dismantle complex scaffolding and equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
11.1A Erect/dismantle scaffolding and equipment 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 11.2A.1 Erect scaffold/equipment

Criteria 11.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures. All relevant job instructions, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The safety
procedures are obtained in accordance with work place procedures to be followed can be identified.
procedures. All work is undertaken safely and in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 11.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Erection site prepared to meet job requirements. The erection site is prepared in accordance with standard The erection site can be identified. The procedures for
operating procedures. preparing a site for the erection of scaffolding and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 11.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary signage and barriers placed in appropriate All necessary signage and barriers are appropriately The signs and barriers to be put in place and their
position. placed in accordance with standard operating procedures. location can be identified. The reasons for placing signs
and barriers in appropriate positions can be given.

Criteria 11.2A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment is erected to plan and in The scaffolding/equipment is erected in the planned The procedures for erecting scaffolding/equipment can
accordance with acceptable safe work practices, sequence and in accordance with relevant codes, be given. The relevant codes, standards and regulatory
Australian Standards and equipment manufacturer's standards, regulations and manufacturer's requirements. requirements can be identified. The sequence of
requirements. operations in erecting the scaffolding/equipment can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 620 of 1445
 MEM 11.2A B Erect/dismantle complex scaffolding and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.2A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment checked for safety and The scaffolding/equipment is checked for conformance to The procedures for checking the scaffolding/equipment
operational requirements. safety and operational requirements in accordance with for conformance to safety and operational requirements
standard operating procedures. can be given.

Element 11.2A.2 Alter and/or repair scaffolding/equipment

Criteria 11.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alterations/repairs coordinated in accordance with safety The alterations/repairs being undertaken are coordinated The alterations/repairs to be carried out on the
work practices, Australian Standards and equipment in accordance with relevant codes, standards, regulations, scaffolding/equipment can be identified. The safety
manufacturer's requirements. safety and operating procedures. procedures to be followed when altering/repairing
scaffolding/equipment can be given. The relevant codes,
standards and regulations can be identified.

Criteria 11.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alterations/repairs inspected for safety and operational The alterations/repairs undertaken are inspected for The procedures for inspecting the alterations/repairs can
requirements. conformance to safety and operational requirements. be given. The safety and operational requirements of the
scaffolding/ equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scope of alteration/repair confirmed and understood. The scope of the alteration/repair to be undertaken can
be identified. The reasons for undertaking the
alteration/repair can be given.

Criteria 11.2A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Existing scaffold/equipment is inspected for suitability of The existing scaffolding/equipment is inspected to ensure The requirement of the alteration/ repair with respect to
alterations/repair requirements. that the proposed alteration/repair will not adversely affect the existing scaffolding/equipment can be identified. The
the safety and operational performance of the likely effect of the alteration/ repair on the safety and
scaffolding/equipment. operational performance of the scaffolding/ equipment
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 621 of 1445
 MEM 11.2A B Erect/dismantle complex scaffolding and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.2A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials, equipment and tools required for alteration The tools, equipment and techniques required to
determined. alter/repair the scaffolding/equipment can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, equipment
and techniques can be given.

Criteria 11.2A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work completion recorded/reported to appropriate Work completion is reported/recorded in accordance with The procedures for recording/reporting work completion
authority. standard operating procedures. can be given. The authority to whom work completion is
to be reported/ recorded can be given.

Element 11.2A.3 Dismantle scaffold/equipment

Criteria 11.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work undertaken safely and to prescribed procedure. All work is undertaken safely and in accordance with The safety procedures to be followed when dismantling
standard operating procedures. scaffolding/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment dismantled in accordance with site The scaffolding/equipment is dismantled safely in The procedures for dismantling scaffolding/equipment
procedures and critical structural and safety accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The critical structural requirements of
requirements. scaffolding/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.2A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site cleaned and cleared of all tools, excess material and The site is cleaned and cleared of all tools, excess material The procedures for cleaning and clearing the site can be
debris and left in a safe state. and debris and left in a safe state in accordance with given. The reasons for cleaning and clearing the site can
standard operating procedures. be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 622 of 1445
 MEM 11.2A B Erect/dismantle complex scaffolding and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work to be undertaken to state/territory legislative requirements. Equipment range includes: prefabricated scaffolds, tube and fittings scaffolds, cantilevered hoists, bracket
scaffolds, and catch platforms, fall protection devices, cantilevered and spurred scaffolds, platforms and course-ways. Work undertaken with assistants as required or in a team
environment with supervision.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the erection/dismantling of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
scaffolding and equipment or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 623 of 1445
 MEM 11.3A A Coordinate erection/dismantling of complex scaffolding/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.3A A Coordinate erection/dismantling of complex scaffolding/equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
11.1A Erect/dismantle scaffolding and equipment 11.2A Erect/dismantle complex scaffolding and equipment 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 11.3A.1 Coordinate erection of scaffold/equipment

Criteria 11.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures. All relevant job instructions, specifications and The work to be undertaken can be identified. The safety
procedures are obtained in accordance with work place procedures to be followed can be identified.
procedures. All work is undertaken safely and in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 11.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Erection site prepared to meet job and safety The erection site is prepared in accordance with standard The erection site can be identified. The procedures for
requirements. operating procedures. preparing a site for the erection of scaffolding and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 11.3A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary signage and barriers placed in appropriate All necessary signage and barriers are appropriately The signs and barriers to be put in place and their
position. placed in accordance with standard operating procedures. location can be identified. The reasons for placing signs
and barriers in appropriate positions can be given.

Criteria 11.3A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment erection coordinated in The scaffolding/equipment is erected in the planned The procedures for erecting scaffolding/equipment can
accordance with acceptable safe work practices, sequence and in accordance with relevant codes, be given. The relevant codes, standards and regulatory
Australian Standards and equipment manufacturer's standards, regulations and manufacturer's requirements. requirements can be identified. The sequence of
requirements. operations in erecting the scaffolding/equipment can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 624 of 1445
 MEM 11.3A A Coordinate erection/dismantling of complex scaffolding/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.3A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Completed scaffolding/equipment inspected for safety The scaffolding/equipment is checked for conformance to The procedures for checking the scaffolding/equipment
and compliance with design, operational and statutory design, safety and operational requirements in accordance for conformance to design, safety and operational
requirements. with standard operating procedures. requirements can be given.

Element 11.3A.2 Alterations, repairs of scaffolding/equipment coordinated

Criteria 11.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scope of alteration/repair confirmed and understood. The scope of the alteration/repair to be undertaken can
be identified. The reasons for undertaking the
alteration/repair can be given.

Criteria 11.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Existing scaffolding/equipment is inspected and The existing scaffolding/equipment is inspected to ensure The requirement of the alteration/repair with respect to
alterations/repairs determined. that the proposed alteration/repair will not adversely affect the existing scaffolding/equipment can be identified. The
the safety and operational performance of the likely effect of the alteration/repair on the safety and
scaffolding/equipment. operational performance of the scaffolding/equipment
can be given.

Criteria 11.3A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials, equipment and tools required for alterations The tools, equipment and techniques required to
determined. alter/repair the scaffolding/equipment can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, equipment
and techniques can be given.

Criteria 11.3A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Existing or new load requirements determined using load The new or existing load requirements for the The procedures for determining/ calculating load
tables. scaffolding/equipment are correctly determined in requirements can be given. The new/existing load
accordance with standard operating procedures. requirement can be identified using load tables.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 625 of 1445
 MEM 11.3A A Coordinate erection/dismantling of complex scaffolding/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.3A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alteration/repairs coordinated in accordance with safety The alterations/repairs being undertaken are coordinated The alteration/repair to be carried out on the
work practices, Australian Standards and equipment in accordance with relevant codes, standards, regulations, scaffolding/equipment can be identified. The safety
manufacturer's requirements. safety and operating procedures. procedures to be followed when altering/repairing
scaffolding/equipment can be given. The relevant codes,
standards and regulations can be identified.

Criteria 11.3A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alterations/repairs inspected for safety and operational The alteration/repair undertaken is inspected for The procedures for inspecting the alteration/repair can
requirements. conformance to safety and operational requirements. be given. The safety and operational requirements of the
scaffolding/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.3A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work completion reported to appropriate personnel and Work completion is reported/recorded in accordance with The procedures for recording/reporting work completion
recorded. standard operating procedures. can be given. The authority to whom work completion is
to be reported/recorded can be given.

Element 11.3A.3 Inspect completed scaffolding/equipment

Criteria 11.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The critical structural and safety areas of the The critical structural and safety areas of the The critical structural and safety areas of the
scaffolding/equipment are inspected for damage, scaffolding/equipment are inspected for faults/defects in scaffolding/equipment can be identified. The procedures
corrosion and wear. accordance with standard operating procedures. for inspecting the scaffolding/equipment can be given.
Common faults/defects in scaffolding/equipment can be
described.

Criteria 11.3A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment and structure is checked against The scaffolding/equipment is inspected for conformance The scaffolding/equipment and structure specified in the
the type of scaffolding/equipment and structure specified to specification in accordance with standard operating plan can be identified. Any variation of the erected
in plan. procedures. scaffolding/equipment from specification can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 626 of 1445
 MEM 11.3A A Coordinate erection/dismantling of complex scaffolding/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.3A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection log is completed. The inspection log is completed in accordance with The details of the inspection to be recorded in the
standard operating procedures. inspection log can be identified. The procedures for
recording inspection details can be given.

Criteria 11.3A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Potential safety and design/structural hazards are Where appropriate, potential safety and design/structural Common hazards associated with scaffolding/equipment
reported for rectification. hazards are reported for rectification in accordance with can be identified. The means of rectifying those hazards
standard operating procedures. can be identified. The hazard reporting procedures can
be given.

Element 11.3A.4 Dismantling of scaffold/equipment coordinated

Criteria 11.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work is coordinated safely and to standard operating All work is undertaken safely and in accordance with The safety procedures to be followed when dismantling
procedure. standard operating procedures. scaffolding/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.3A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scaffolding/equipment dismantling is coordinated and The scaffolding/equipment is dismantled safely in The procedures for dismantling scaffolding/equipment
removed from site in accordance with standard operating accordance with standard operating procedures. The can be given. The critical structural requirements of
procedures and critical structural and safety dismantled scaffolding/equipment is removed from the site scaffolding/equipment can be identified. The procedures
requirements. in accordance with standard operating procedures. for removing scaffolding/equipment from the site can be
given.

Criteria 11.3A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Site clearance is co-ordinated. Surplus material, The site is cleaned and cleared of all tools, excess material The procedures for cleaning and clearing the site can be
equipment, tools and debris are removed and site left in and debris and left in a safe state in accordance with given. The reasons for cleaning and clearing the site can
safe and operational state. standard operating procedures. be explained.

Criteria 11.3A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work completion reported to appropriate authority. Work completion is reported to the appropriate authority
in accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 627 of 1445
 MEM 11.3A A Coordinate erection/dismantling of complex scaffolding/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work to be undertaken to state/territory legislative requirements. Equipment range includes: suspended scaffolds, cantilevered cranes, loading platforms, hung scaffolds etc. Unit
applies to individuals coordinating a scaffolding team or employed in a supervisory capacity.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the coordination of the and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
erection/dismantling of scaffolding/equipment or other units requiring plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 628 of 1445
 MEM 11.4A A Undertake dogging/crane chasing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.4A A Undertake dogging/crane chasing

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 11.4A.1 Attach lifting gear to loads

Criteria 11.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All work undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures. All work is undertaken safely in accordance with standard The safety procedures to be followed when attaching
operating procedures. lifting gear to loads can be given. The work to be
undertaken can be identified.

Criteria 11.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load is inspected and best lifting method determined. The load to be lifted is inspected. A variety of lifting methods and their application can be
identified. The most appropriate lifting method for a
particular load can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen lifting method can be given.

Criteria 11.4A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate load shifting equipment is selected. A range of load shifting equipment and their application
can be identified. The most appropriate load shifting
device for a particular load can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen load shifting equipment can be
given.

Criteria 11.4A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lifting gear is inspected and damaged or worn items are The lifting gear is examined for faults or wear in The procedures for inspecting lifting gear can be given.
labelled and rejected. accordance with standard operating procedures. Where Common faults in lifting gear can be identified. The
appropriate, faulty or worn items are labelled and rejected procedures for rejecting faulty lifting gear items can be
in accordance with standard operating procedures. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 629 of 1445
 MEM 11.4A A Undertake dogging/crane chasing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.4A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, safe working loads are calculated to Where appropriate, the safe working load of the lifting The procedures for determining/ calculating safe working
Australian Standards. gear is calculated in accordance with Australian Standards loads can be given.
and standard operating procedures.

Criteria 11.4A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lifting gear is attached to load in most appropriate and The load is safely attached to the lifting gear in the most A variety of methods of attaching lifting gear to loads
safe manner and to specifications where required. appropriate way in accordance with specifications and/or can be identified. The most appropriate means of
standard operating procedures. attaching lifting gear to particular loads can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the chosen means of attaching
the lifting gear to the load can be given. The lifting
specifications for the load to be lifted can be identified.

Element 11.4A.2 Move loads

Criteria 11.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load moving is performed to acceptable safe working The load is moved in accordance with the relevant The relevant standards, codes and regulations pertaining
practices, Australian Standards, codes of practice and standards, codes, regulations and safety procedures. to the movement of loads can be identified. The safety
specifications. procedures to be followed when moving loads can be
given.

Criteria 11.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lifting gear is connected to load mover using safe and The load shifting gear is safely attached to the load mover The procedures for attaching lifting gear to load movers
appropriate techniques. in the most appropriate way in accordance with standard can be given. The methods of attaching lifting gear to
operating procedures. load movers can be identified. The most appropriate
method of attaching lifting gear to the load mover can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen method
of attachment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 630 of 1445
 MEM 11.4A A Undertake dogging/crane chasing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.4A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate communication and signal methods are used The load movement is coordinated using appropriate The procedures for coordinating the movement of loads
to coordinate the load movement in a safe manner. communication and signal methods. can be given. The applications of hand, verbal and
whistle signals can be identified. The meaning of each
hand, verbal and whistle signal to be used in
coordinating the movement of loads can be correctly
given.

Criteria 11.4A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load is grounded or put down in accordance with The load is lowered and grounded safely in accordance The procedures for grounding lifted loads can be given.
prescribed procedure, in a safe and stable manner. with standard operating procedures. The reasons for ensuring the load is in a stable position
when grounded can be given.

Criteria 11.4A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All lifting gear is detached from load mover and load. All lifting gear is detached from the load mover and the The procedures for removing lifting gear from the load
load in accordance with standard operating procedures. mover and the load can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 631 of 1445
 MEM 11.4A A Undertake dogging/crane chasing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken to state/territory legislative requirements. Equipment range may include: slings, ropes, shackles, eye bolts, spreader beams, chain blocks etc. Signals include:
stop, raise, lower, slew, luff, extend boom and retract boom, using hands, verbal and whistles. Signals are given both within sight and out of sight of equipment operators. This unit
is not intended to apply to machine loading and simple straight lifts where knowledge of codes and signals is not required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with crane chasing and dogging or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 632 of 1445
 MEM 11.5A A Pick and process order Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.5A A Pick and process order

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4

Element 11.5A.1 Receive order

Criteria 11.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Order to be picked is received and checked for errors. The order to be picked is received and checked for errors The procedures for receiving orders can be given.
in accordance with standard operating procedures. Where Common errors in given orders can be identified. The
appropriate, errors detected in orders received are dealt procedures to be followed when errors are detected in
with in accordance with standard operating procedures. the orders received can be given.

Criteria 11.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product to be picked is identified. The product(s) to be picked and the quantities to be
picked can be identified from the order.

Element 11.5A.2 Pick order

Criteria 11.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate materials handling equipment selected and Where appropriate, the most suitable materials handling The materials handling equipment available to assist in
used, if required. equipment is used in accordance with standard operating order picking can be identified. The application of each
procedures. type of materials handling equipment available can be
identified. The procedures for using materials handling
equipment can be given. The reasons for selecting the
chosen materials handling equipment to pick given
orders can be explained.

Criteria 11.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Products to be picked are located using standard The ordered products are located and picked in The procedures for locating products can be given. The
operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. location of given products can be correctly identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 633 of 1445
 MEM 11.5A A Pick and process order Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.5A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Order is picked accurately either by manual handling or The order is picked accurately using the appropriate
the use of materials handling equipment. handling technique.

Criteria 11.5A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product is handled according to storage and handling All products are handled and stored in accordance with The safe handling procedures for products within the
requirements identified from standard operating the product requirements and standard operating store or warehouse can be identified. The source of
procedure regulations. procedures. storage and handling requirements for individual
products can be identified. The consequences of using
inappropriate handling and storage techniques can be
given.

Element 11.5A.3 Finalise order picking

Criteria 11.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Picked order is checked against documentation. The picked order is checked against documentation in The procedures for checking orders can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 11.5A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Picked order is placed in correct area for consolidation. The picked order is placed in the correct area for The area for order consolidation can be identified. The
consolidation in accordance with standard operating procedures for consolidating orders can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 11.5A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Enterprise documentation is completed. The relevant documentation is completed in accordance The documentation to be completed once the order has
with standard operating procedures. been picked can be identified. The procedures for
recording picked orders can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 634 of 1445
 MEM 11.5A A Pick and process order Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously in a store or warehouse environment or as part of a team. If materials handling equipment skills are needed, Unit 11.10A (Operate mobile load
shifting equipment) should be accessed. This unit applies where the employee has to exercise knowledge of the enterprise product range and the procedures, practices and
standards for the storage and handling of a product. Simple handling of goods not requiring the ability to identify different products or to interact with inventory records and stock
location systems is covered by Units 11.10A (Operate mobile load shifting equipment) or Unit 11.11A (Manual handling). All work undertaken to legislative and regulatory
requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the picking and processing of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
orders or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 635 of 1445
 MEM 11.6A A Production packaging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.6A A Production packaging

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 2

Element 11.6A.1 Undertake packaging

Criteria 11.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Packaging requirements identified from instructions or All relevant job instructions, specifications, procedures, The packaging requirements can be identified. Any
determined by safety, storage conditions, site and etc. are obtained in accordance with work place relevant legislative requirements can be identified.
legislative requirements. procedures.

Criteria 11.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Packaging undertaken to standard operating procedures. The finished products are packaged in accordance with The procedures for packaging the finished product can
standard operating procedures. be given. The packaging materials to be used can be
identified.

Element 11.6A.2 Label packaged items

Criteria 11.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensure identification labels, tags and stickers are correct The appropriate identification labels, tags and stickers are All relevant identification labels, tags and stickers can be
and appropriately placed and attached. correctly placed and attached in accordance with standard identified. The placement requirements for identification
operating procedures. labels, tags and stickers can be identified. The
procedures for attaching identification labels, tags and
stickers can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 636 of 1445
 MEM 11.6A A Production packaging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Packaged items stored in safe, orderly and retrievable The packaged products are correctly stored in accordance The procedures for storing packaged products can be
manner and the location in the warehouse/store recorded. with standard operating procedures. The location of the given. The location in which the packaged products are
packaged products is recorded in accordance with to be placed can be identified. The procedures for
standard operating procedures. recording the placement of packaged products in the
store/warehouse can be given. The procedures for
handling packaged products can be given. The
consequences of inappropriate handling and storing of
packaged products can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 637 of 1445
 MEM 11.6A A Production packaging Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the packaging of finished goods for storage or transport. Finished goods include assemblies, sub-assemblies, individual or multiple components. Work undertaken
autonomously and/or in a team environment. Procedures undertaken include standards, codes, legislative, company and customer requirements. Packaging material generally
determined from instructions, written or verbal. Packaging methods include manual processes, semi-automated or fully automated packaging equipment. Competencies in this unit
are typically performed in a production/process environment. This unit is not intended to apply in situations where simple interim packing, storage and/or stacking are undertaken in
context of a production function.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with production packaging or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 638 of 1445
 MEM 11.7A A Administer inventory procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.7A A Administer inventory procedures

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic

Element 11.7A.1 Use inventory procedures

Criteria 11.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory procedures understood and carried out to Inventory procedures carried out in accordance with work The tasks to be completed in following inventory
standard operational procedures. site requirements. procedure can be identified.

Criteria 11.7A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requisition, purchase, shipping and invoice Requisition, purchase, shipping and invoice documents The documents to be completed for requisition,
documentation used as required to standard operational completed, where appropriate, in accordance with work purchase, shipping and invoice purposes can be
procedures. site procedures. identified. Applications for each of the requisition,
purchase, shipping and invoice documents can be given.

Criteria 11.7A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inward/outward recording/filing system understood, All goods inward and outward from the store are recorded The information to be recorded for inward/outward
accessed and maintained to standard operational and filed in accordance with work site procedures. goods can be identified. The filing procedures for
procedures. Information about inward/outward goods movements can inward/outward goods can be identified.
be accessed from filing system in accordance with work
site procedures.

Criteria 11.7A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Customer orders maintained to standard operational Customer's order filled in accordance with work site Customer requirements can be identified from orders.
procedures. procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 639 of 1445
 MEM 11.7A A Administer inventory procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.7A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Returned orders booked back using standard operational Returned orders are booked back in accordance with work The procedures for booking back return orders can be
procedures. site procedures. identified.

Element 11.7A.2 Requisition goods

Criteria 11.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requisition procedures understood and carried out to Goods are requisitioned in accordance with work site The procedures for requisitioning goods can be
standard operational procedures. procedures. identified.

Criteria 11.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods requisitioned on time. Requisitioned goods are received on time. The required delivery time for the goods can be
identified. The lead time from requisitioning to delivery of
the goods can be identified.

Criteria 11.7A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All recording completed and filed correctly in accordance All records completed and filed in accordance with work The recording requirements for requisitioned goods can
with site procedures. site procedures. be identified. The procedure for filing requisition
documents can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 640 of 1445
 MEM 11.7A A Administer inventory procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Standard operational procedures undertaken include Just-in-Time, Kan Ban etc. All work and work practices undertaken
to regulatory and legislative requirements. This unit refers to administering inventory procedures using manual or electric systems to support and/or maintain stores or inventory
systems, for example, Just-in-Time or Kan Ban system. Where routine activity within standard operating procedure is undertaken, refer to Unit 2.2C11 (Organise and analyse
information) or Unit 2.9C10 (Perform computer operations).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documents required.
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant workplace
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any relevant codes,
disadvantage the candidate. standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by
other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues
who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. -
Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be
satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit
as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with inventory procedures, or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 641 of 1445
 MEM 11.8A A Package materials (stores and warehouse) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.8A A Package materials (stores and warehouse)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 2

Element 11.8A.1 Determine packaging requirements

Criteria 11.8A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine safety or special requirements. All relevant work instructions, material and safety data The material to be packaged can be identified. The
sheets are obtained in accordance with work place source of information on the characteristics of the
procedures. material to be packaged can be identified. Any safety or
special requirements to be taken into account when
packaging the material can be identified.

Criteria 11.8A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine storage requirements to meet safety, storage The storage requirements of the material can be
conditions, site and legislative requirements. identified. Any relevant legislative requirements can be
identified.

Criteria 11.8A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine transport and store requirements. The requirements for transporting the packaged material
can be identified. The requirements of the
store/warehouse with respect to the material to be
packaged can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 642 of 1445
 MEM 11.8A A Package materials (stores and warehouse) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 11.8A.2 Undertake packaging

Criteria 11.8A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Undertake most appropriate packaging method. The material is packaged using the most appropriate The methods of packaging available and their application
method in accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. The packaging materials and
techniques required for each packaging method can be
identified. The procedures for packaging materials can be
given.

Criteria 11.8A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensure seal, compression and correct packaging material The correct packaging materials have been used, the The procedures for sealing packaged materials can be
used. package has been sealed and movement of materials within given. The use of packing to prevent movement of
the package minimised in accordance with standard materials within a package can be explained. The reasons
operating procedures. for selecting the chosen packaging materials can be
given.

Element 11.8A.3 Label packaged items

Criteria 11.8A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensure labels, identification stickers are attached and The packaged products are correctly labelled in The procedures for labelling packaged products can be
describe accurately content of package and are placed in accordance with standard operating procedures. given. The information to be included in the label can be
appropriate location. identified. The method of attaching the label to the
package can be identified. The appropriate location for
the label can be identified. The consequences of
incomplete or inaccurate labelling of packaged products
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 643 of 1445
 MEM 11.8A A Package materials (stores and warehouse) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workplace procedures. Major areas of consideration in selecting
appropriate packaging include stacking, storage, weight, size, material type and expected life and transport requirements. Packaging includes sequenced packaging and point of
pick up packaging, packaging materials and methods. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. Competencies covered by this unit are
typically performed in a store or warehouse and often relate to receive or despatch functions.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the packaging of materials in and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
stores and warehouses or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 644 of 1445
 MEM 11.9A A Handle/move bulk fluids/gases Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.9A A Handle/move bulk fluids/gases

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4

Element 11.9A.1 Determine handling methods

Criteria 11.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Type of material determined from labels, colour codes, The labels, colour codes and signs used to identify bulk
signage. fluids and gases can be identified. Given examples of
labels, colour codes and signs, the type of material can
be correctly identified.

Criteria 11.9A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material properties understood. All relevant instructions, charts, manufacturer's The properties of a range of materials can be identified.
specifications and information sheets are obtained in
accordance with workplace procedures.

Criteria 11.9A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All relevant uncertainties and unknowns clarified with The procedures for dealing with unknown materials
appropriately qualified and authorised authority. and/or materials whose properties are unknown can be
identified. The source(s) of appropriate information
about the unknown materials can be identified. Where
appropriate, the relevant authorisations have been
received before handling/moving unknown materials. All
relevant uncertainties and unknowns about the
material(s) have been clarified by the appropriate
authority.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 645 of 1445
 MEM 11.9A A Handle/move bulk fluids/gases Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.9A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All relevant safety and emergency procedures All safety procedures are followed at all times in All relevant safety and emergency procedures can be
understood and implemented as required. accordance with standard operating procedures. Where identified. All relevant personal protective clothing and
appropriate, emergency and safety procedures are equipment can be identified. The function of personal
followed correctly during drills and exercises. protective equipment and clothing can be explained.

Criteria 11.9A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All relevant codes of practice and regulations understood All work is carried out in conformance to the relevant The relevant codes of practice and regulatory
and observed. codes of practice and regulatory requirements. requirements can be identified.

Criteria 11.9A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate handling methods undertaken. All materials are handled using correct and appropriate The procedures for handling a range of materials can be
methods in accordance with standard operating identified. The reasons for using these procedures when
procedures. handling the range of materials can be explained.

Element 11.9A.2 Store bulk fluids/gases

Criteria 11.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct storage conditions determined from The storage instructions, manufacturer's specifications The storage conditions for a range of materials can be
instructions/manufacturer's specifications/directions. and/or directions are obtained in accordance with identified.
workplace procedures.

Criteria 11.9A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Containers checked for safe and clean use. The storage container is checked for cleanliness and The procedures for checking storage containers before
safety before use, in accordance with standard operating use can be identified. The cleaning requirements of
procedures. storage containers for a range of materials can be
identified. The safety requirements of storage containers
for a range of materials can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 646 of 1445
 MEM 11.9A A Handle/move bulk fluids/gases Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.9A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Containers filled/emptied in accordance with standard Storage containers are filled/ emptied in accordance with The procedures for filling/emptying storage containers
operating procedures, regulations/legislative standard operating procedures and relevant for a range of materials can be identified. The relevant
requirements. regulatory/legislative requirements. regulatory/legislative requirements applying to the filling
and emptying of storage containers for a range of
materials can be identified.

Criteria 11.9A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Containers handled and moved in accordance with site Where appropriate, the storage containers are handled and
procedures, regulations/legislative requirements. moved in accordance with standard operating procedures
and relevant regulatory/legislative requirements.

Criteria 11.9A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Containers correctly labelled and stored to standard All containers are correctly labelled and stored in The labelling requirements of bulk fluids and gases can
operational procedures, regulations/legislative accordance with standard operating procedures and be identified. The procedures for labelling and storing a
requirements. relevant regulatory/legislative requirements. range of materials can be identified. The relevant
regulatory/legislative requirements applying to the
storage of a range of materials can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 647 of 1445
 MEM 11.9A A Handle/move bulk fluids/gases Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workplace practices. Emergency procedures predetermined by
appropriately qualified and authorised personnel. Material properties determined from instructions, charts, manufacturers' specifications and information sheets. All work and work
practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. Refers to all vessels used to store bulk fluids/gases. Bulk refers to commercial quantities of fluids and gases greater
than the quantities required by individuals to do their own jobs.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the handling and movement and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
of bulk fluids and gases or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 648 of 1445
 MEM 11.10A A Operate mobile load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.10A A Operate mobile load shifting equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4

Element 11.10A.1 Conduct routine operation and safety checks of load shifting equipment
Criteria 11.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine pre-use checks undertaken in accordance with Routine pre-use checks carried out in accordance with The pre-use checks to be undertaken for the particular
manufacturer's specifications and regulatory safety manufacturer's, regulatory and work site requirements. load shifting device can be identified.
requirements.

Criteria 11.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-compliance with specification reported for Variations of the load shifting device from manufacturer's The manufacturer's specifications for the load shifting
repair/replacement using standard operating procedure. specifications reported to appropriate person for device can be identified. The person to whom variations
repair/replacement. from specification are to be reported can be identified.

Element 11.10A.2 Shifts loads

Criteria 11.10A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate load shifting device selected. Examples of load shifting devices appropriate to the
loading task and lift can be given. The most appropriate
load shifting device can be identified.

Criteria 11.10A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load shifting device operated within design The load shifting device is operated within design The safe working load and any design limitations
specifications and safe working load in accordance with specifications and safe working loads. applying to the selected load shifting device can be
standard operating procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 649 of 1445
 MEM 11.10A A Operate mobile load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.10A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load is lifted, ensuring balance, vision of operation and The load lifted is balanced, the operator has good vision The hazards with respect to the load, the operator and
protection of load. of the area of operation and the load is adequately others when loads are being lifted can be identified.
protected in accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 11.10A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe and efficient path of movement selected and used. The load is moved safely and efficiently to its destination The hazards associated with the movement of loads can
in accordance with work site procedures. be identified. The most direct, safe path for movement of
the load can be identified.

Criteria 11.10A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Path of movement is checked and monitored for The path of movement is checked and monitored for Potential obstacles and hazards that would affect the
obstacles and hazards and safely maintained. obstacles and hazards and safely maintained. safety of the path of movement of the load can be
identified.

Element 11.10A.3 Place loads

Criteria 11.10A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Loads are placed ensuring safety, stability, protection of All loads are placed safely and the stability and protection The requirements for load protection can be identified.
material and avoidance of hazards on site. of the load material is ensured at all times in accordance The hazards to the load, the operator and others during
with work site procedures. the placing of loads can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 650 of 1445
 MEM 11.10A A Operate mobile load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Load shifting equipment includes front end loaders/back hoe, ride on fork lifts/pallet trucks, scissor lifts/boom lifts. Load
shifting equipment is operated within limits of manufacturer's recommended procedures and safe working loads. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and
legislative requirements. This unit applies to loading tasks and lifts where knowledge of codes and signals is not required. If the use of hand tools is required, see Unit 18.1A (Use
hand tools).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. - The type of data and the frequency with which data is to be accessed/recorded.
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant workplace
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation of load shifting and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
equipment, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 651 of 1445
 MEM 11.11A A Manual handling Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.11A A Manual handling

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 2

Element 11.11A.1 Lift materials manually

Criteria 11.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material weight determined correctly utilising most The weight of the material to be lifted/moved is determined The procedures/techniques for determining the weight of
appropriate technique. correctly by using the most appropriate materials to be moved and/or lifted can be identified.
procedure/technique. Any limitations on the weight of materials to be moved
and/or lifted can be identified. Where appropriate, the
equipment to be used to determine the weight of
materials can be identified.

Criteria 11.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lifting techniques undertaken to Worksafe Australia All lifting is carried out safely in accordance with Worksafe Australia Standards for lifting can be
Standards and standard operating procedures. Types of Worksafe Australia Standards and standard operating identified. The effect of types of movement methods,
movement, methods, storage, height and position procedures. storage height and position on the lifting techniques to
considered. be used can be explained. Where appropriate, the
procedures for manual handling of materials can be
identified.

Element 11.11A.2 Move/shift materials manually

Criteria 11.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment selected where required. Where appropriate, the correct equipment is selected to A range of moving/shifting equipment and its application
manually move materials. can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
moving/shifting equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 652 of 1445
 MEM 11.11A A Manual handling Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.11A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is placed safely and securely on moving Where appropriate, the material to be moved is placed The loading procedures for a range of moving/shifting
equipment. safely and securely onto the moving equipment. equipment can be identified. The safe handling
requirements of the materials to be placed on the
moving/shifting equipment can be identified. Where
appropriate, the procedures for fastening materials onto
moving/ shifting equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.11A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is relocated ensuring safety of personnel and The material is relocated safely in accordance with The path to be traversed with the material/moving
security of material. standard operating procedures. equipment can be identified. The hazards associated with
the movement of the material/moving equipment
amongst other personnel, equipment and materials can
be identified. The safety procedures to be followed when
moving materials/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 11.11A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material is unloaded from moving equipment and placed Where appropriate, the material is unloaded from the The storage requirements of the material being moved
in a safe and secure manner. moving equipment and placed in a safe and secure manner can be identified.
in accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 653 of 1445
 MEM 11.11A A Manual handling Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Material weight is determined utilising scales or interpreting signage. Moving/shifting equipment includes hand trolleys
wheelbarrows, motorised/hand pallet trucks (not sit on), hand carts, dedicated production or process lifting equipment eg: baskets, spreader bars, cradles or the like attached to
lifting equipment etc. Maximum manual lifting weight limited to Worksafe Australia Standards. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements
and standard operating procedures where applicable.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with manual handling or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 654 of 1445
 MEM 11.12A A Purchase materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.12A A Purchase materials

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 6

Element 11.12A.1 Determine purchasing requirements

Criteria 11.12A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consult with client, customer, user as appropriate. Appropriate consultation occurs with the The client, customer and/or user can be identified.
client/customer/user.

Criteria 11.12A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material specifications determined from orders, All relevant instructions, orders, requisitions, technical The material/component specifications can be identified.
instructions and/or technical drawings. drawings and/or bills of material obtained in accordance The source(s) of additional information/advice with
with workplace procedures. respect to material/component specification can be
identified.

Criteria 11.12A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities, price limitations and delivery requirements The quantities of materials/ components to be purchased
determined from orders, instructions. can be identified. The price limitations on materials/
components to be purchased can be identified. The
delivery requirements can be identified.

Element 11.12A.2 Prepare purchase order/list

Criteria 11.12A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Purchase order/list developed to standard operational Purchase orders/lists are prepared in accordance with The procedures for ordering materials/components can
procedure. standard operating procedures. be identified. The appropriate purchase order forms can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 655 of 1445
 MEM 11.12A A Purchase materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 11.12A.3 Purchase material

Criteria 11.12A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Standard operational procedures followed. Materials are purchased in accordance with standard Where appropriate, preferred/ contracted suppliers of
operating procedures. materials/ components can be identified. The procedures
for purchasing materials/components can be identified.

Criteria 11.12A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Supplier/vendor informed of requirements and The supplier/vendor is informed of the material/component The appropriate supplier(s)/ vendor(s) of a range of
specifications. requirements and specifications in accordance with materials/components can be identified. The procedures
standard operating procedures. to be followed in informing supplier(s)/vendor(s) of the
purchase requirements can be given.

Criteria 11.12A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Purchasing schedules adjusted where required to Where appropriate, purchasing schedules are adjusted in The procedures for adjusting purchasing schedules can
standard operational procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified. The reasons for adjusting purchasing
schedules can be explained. Where appropriate, approval
to adjust the purchasing schedule is received from the
relevant authority. The personnel affected by a change in
purchasing schedules can be identified. Where
appropriate, all relevant personnel are informed of the
adjustment to the purchasing schedule.

Criteria 11.12A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate paperwork/contracts exchanged to standard All paper work/contracts associated with the purchasing
operational procedure. of materials/components can be identified and their
application given. The appropriate paper work/contracts
are exchanged in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 656 of 1445
 MEM 11.12A A Purchase materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.12A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records/files maintained accurately using standard All relevant records/files are completed/maintained The records/files to be completed/maintained of
operating procedures. accurately in accordance with standard operating purchases made can be identified. The recording/filing
procedures. procedures can be identified.

Range statement
Purchasing schedules developed to site procedures and for pre-contracted suppliers/vendors. Contracts/paperwork generated manually or electronically utilising on-site system.
Purchasing can cover one-off or multiple quantities of raw materials, components, equipment etc. Purchasing specifications are determined from standard engineering drawings and
data sheets, instructions written or verbal. All work and work practices undertaken to regulations or legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the purchasing of materials or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 657 of 1445
 MEM 11.13A A Undertake warehouse receival process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.13A A Undertake warehouse receival process

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
11.11A Manual handling

Element 11.13A.1 Check supplier documentation

Criteria 11.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Supplier documentation checked against order according The order is obtained in accordance with workplace The procedures for checking supplier documentation
to standard operating procedure. procedures. The supplier's documentation is checked against the order can be given.
against the initiating order in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

Element 11.13A.2 Confirm the quality and quantity of received goods

Criteria 11.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quality and quantity of goods checked against order and The quality and quantity of goods received is checked The procedures for checking the quality and quantity of
supplier documentation. against the order and supplier documentation in goods received can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 11.13A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Incorrect and damaged goods identified and appropriate Where appropriate, the required action is taken with The procedures to be followed when incorrect and/or
action taken according to standard operating procedure. respect to incorrect and/or damaged goods identified in damaged goods are detected can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Element 11.13A.3 Unloading of goods arranged

Criteria 11.13A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods requiring special unloading procedures are The unloading requirements of the goods can be
identified.. identified from the relevant documentation.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 658 of 1445
 MEM 11.13A A Undertake warehouse receival process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.13A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods unloaded using manual handling or appropriate The goods are unloaded safely using the most appropriate The most appropriate means of unloading the goods can
lifting equipment. unloading method in accordance with standard operating be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
procedures. unloading method can be given The procedures for
unloading goods can be given.

Criteria 11.13A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Carrier or supplier documentation signed or processed The carrier or supplier documentation is signed/processed The procedures for signing carrier or supplier
according to standard operating procedure. in accordance with standard operating procedures. documentation can be given. The reasons for ensuring
the accuracy of the documentation being processed can
be explained.

Element 11.13A.4 Prepare, locate and store received goods

Criteria 11.13A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods are prepared for storage according to standard Goods are prepared for storage in accordance with The procedures for preparing goods for storage can be
operating procedure. standard operating procedures. given.

Criteria 11.13A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Signs, codes or labels applied according to standard The appropriate signs, codes or labels are applied to the The procedures for identifying goods to be stored can be
operating procedure. goods to be stored in accordance with standard operating given. The method of identification to be applied to the
procedures. goods can be given.

Criteria 11.13A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory records documentation completed. Inventory records are accurately completed. The records to be completed can be identified.

Criteria 11.13A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Storage location identified. The storage location is accurately recorded. The procedures for locating goods in the
store/warehouse can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 659 of 1445
 MEM 11.13A A Undertake warehouse receival process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.13A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods stored in correct location using appropriate The goods are stored in the correct location in the The correct location of the store/ warehouse in which
materials handling techniques. store/warehouse using the most appropriate materials given goods are to be stored can be identified. The
handling technique. materials handling technique to be used can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen materials
handling technique can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 660 of 1445
 MEM 11.13A A Undertake warehouse receival process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. This unit applies to the receipt of goods in a store or warehousing environment applying knowledge of the warehouse
and systems and procedures. Complementary communication, planning and quality skills are described in the appropriate core units. If load shifting equipment operation skills are
required, Unit 11.10A (Operate mobile load shifting equipment) should be accessed. If hazardous goods are received and handled, Unit 13.3A (Work safely with industrial chemicals
and materials) should also be accessed. If the received goods are bulk fluids or gases (i.e. large commercial quantities), then Unit 11.9A (Handle/move bulk fluids/gases) may also
apply. All work undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the undertaking of warehouse and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
receival processes or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 661 of 1445
MEM 11.14A A Undertake warehouse dispatch process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.14A A Undertake warehouse dispatch process

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to arrange and consolidate orders, prepare the goods and dispatch them. This unit applies to the dispatch of goods in a store
or
warehousing environment and the application of the knowledge of warehouse systems and procedures.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
11.6A Production packaging 11.11A Manual handling
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
11.8A Package materials (stores and warehouse) 11.11A Manual handling

Element 11.14A.1 Arrange and consolidate orders

Criteria 11.14A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Packed orders are consolidated into customer or carrier The packaged orders are consolidated into customer or The procedures for consolidating orders can be given
batches according to standard operating procedure carrier batches in accordance with standard operating The reasons for consolidating orders into
procedures customer/carrier batches can be explained
Criteria 11.14A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consolidated goods placed into correct dispatch area The consolidated goods are placed in the correct dispatch The correct dispatch area for the given
area customer/carrier can be identified

Element 11.14A.2 Goods prepared for dispatch

Criteria 11.14A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods packed, shrink-wrapped and/or palletised Goods for dispatch are packed, shrink-wrapped and/or The procedures for packing goods for dispatch can be
palletised in accordance with standard operating given The materials and techniques used for packing
procedures goods for dispatch can be identified
Criteria 11.14A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods labelled and appropriate documentation attached The goods for dispatch are correctly labelled and the The procedures for labelling goods for dispatch can be
according to standard operating procedure appropriate documentation attached in accordance with given The method of attaching the label and
standard operating procedures appropriate documentation can be identified The
documentation to be included with the dispatched goods
can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 662 of 1445
MEM 11.14A A Undertake warehouse dispatch process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.14A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods placed in dispatch area ready for loading The goods are placed in the dispatch area ready for The goods pick-up schedule and any special carrier
according to pick-up schedule and carrier requirements loading in accordance with pick-up schedule and carrier requirements can be identified
requirements

Element 11.14A.3 Dispatch goods

Criteria 11.14A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Carrier and customer documentation checked Carrier and customer documentation is checked in The procedures for checking customer and carrier
accordance with standard operating procedures documentation can be given
Criteria 11.14A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Loading and transportation requirements are accurately The loading and transportation requirements are The loading and transportation requirements can be
communicated to driver and received from the driver accurately communicated to the driver and received from identified
the driver
Criteria 11.14A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Goods loaded onto vehicle using appropriate materials The goods are loaded onto the vehicle using appropriate The appropriate materials handling technique is
handling techniques materials handling techniques selected to load the goods onto the transport vehicle
The reasons for selecting the chosen materials handling
technique can be given
Criteria 11.14A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory records documentation completed The inventory records are accurately completed The inventory records to be completed can be
identified The consequences of inaccurate or
incomplete inventory records can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 663 of 1445
MEM 11.14A A Undertake warehouse dispatch process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. This unit applies to the dispatch of goods in a store or warehouse environment applying knowledge of warehouse
systems and procedures. Complementary communication, planning and quality skills are described in appropriate core units. If load shifting equipment operation skills are
required, Unit 11.10A (Operate mobile load shifting equipment) should be accessed. If hazardous goods are dispatched, Unit 13.3A ( Work safely with industrial chemicals and
materials) should also be accessed. If the dispatched goods are bulk fluids and gases (i.e. large commercial quantities), then Unit 11.9A (Handle/move bulk fluids/gases) may also
apply. All work undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
disadvantage the candidate. Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the undertaking of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
warehouse dispatch processes or other units requiring the exercise of - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 664 of 1445
 MEM 11.15A A Manage warehouse inventory system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.15A A Manage warehouse inventory system

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.1C12 Apply quality systems 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 11.7A Administer inventory procedures

Element 11.15A.1 Monitor warehouse record keeping processes

Criteria 11.15A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Monitoring procedures developed for requisition, Warehouse record keeping processes are monitored in The documentation to be completed for requisition,
purchase, shipping and invoice documentation. accordance with relevant procedures. purchase, shipping and invoice purposes can be
identified. The reasons for monitoring the above
documentation can be explained. The frequency at which
the above documentation should be monitored can be
identified. Document monitoring procedures have been
developed and implemented.

Criteria 11.15A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discrepancy reporting procedures established for Discrepancy reporting procedures are being followed by The reasons for reporting discrepancies between
warehouse and other personnel in accordance with warehouse and other relevant personnel. warehouse records can be explained. The person(s)
standard operating procedure. responsible for reporting detected discrepancies can be
identified. Discrepancy reporting procedures have been
developed and implemented.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 665 of 1445
 MEM 11.15A A Manage warehouse inventory system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.15A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Audit and achieve procedures followed according to The records of audits of warehouse record keeping The reasons for auditing record keeping procedures can
standard operating procedure. processes have been appropriately maintained in be explained. The frequency with which audits are to be
accordance with established audit procedures. Warehouse conducted can be identified. The audit procedures can
and other relevant personnel comply with the be identified. Where appropriate, the actions undertaken
requirements of the warehouse record keeping procedures. to ensure warehouse record keeping procedures are
followed can be identified and explained. Warehouse and
other relevant personnel can identify the relevant
warehouse record keeping procedures.

Element 11.15A.2 Supervise production of inventory system reports

Criteria 11.15A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Regular inventory reports prepared in accordance with Regular inventory reports are prepared in accordance with The inventory reporting requirements can be identified.
standard operating procedure. standard operating procedures. The frequency with which inventory reports are to be
completed can be identified.

Criteria 11.15A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Special stock level and other inventory reports prepared Where appropriate, special stock level and other inventory Where appropriate, the requirements of the special
as required. reports are prepared in accordance with standard reports can be identified. The sources of stock/inventory
operating procedures. information for inclusion in reports can be identified.
Customer satisfaction with inventory system reports is
sought.

Criteria 11.15A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments to inventory reporting procedures made to Changes in procedures are discussed with relevant Where appropriate, the adjustments to be made to the
meet internal and external customer requirements. workplace staff Any adjustment produce a positive inventory reporting procedures can be identified. Where
outcome. appropriate, the reasons for making the adjustments to
the inventory reporting procedures can be explained. The
procedures for implementing the adjustments to the
inventory reporting procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 666 of 1445
 MEM 11.15A A Manage warehouse inventory system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 11.15A.3 Analyse inventory reports

Criteria 11.15A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reconciliation of inventory records against production or Inventory records are reconciled in accordance with The inventory reconciliation procedures can be
purchase of sales records undertaken in accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The sources of information/data necessary to
standard operating procedure. enable the inventory records to be reconciled can be
identified.

Criteria 11.15A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Major trends, not requiring sophisticated statistical The trends that can be identified/ interpreted from
analysis, identified. inventory records can be identified. The reasons for
monitoring trends contained in inventory records can be
explained. Given sample inventory reports, major trends
can be identified.

Criteria 11.15A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory system relationship to manufacturing process The inventory requirements of manufacturing processes
e.g J.I.T. (Just-in-time) understood. can be identified. The effects of insufficient/excessive
inventory on the manufacturing process and
organisational viability can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 667 of 1445
 MEM 11.15A A Manage warehouse inventory system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the supervision of a warehouse inventory system used by other warehouse, production, maintenance or management personnel. Records can be computer
based or manual. If computer based records are used, relevant computer units may also need to be accessed. Where skills are required to maintain/supervise application of quality
procedures, then Unit 15.12B (Maintain/supervise application of quality procedures) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the management of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
warehouse inventory systems or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 668 of 1445
 MEM 11.16A A Order materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.16A A Order materials

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 2

Element 11.16A.1 Prepare purchase order/list

Criteria 11.16A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Purchase order/list prepared to standard operating Purchase orders/lists are prepared in accordance with The procedures for ordering materials/components can
procedure. standard operating procedures. be identified. The appropriate purchase order forms can
be identified.

Criteria 11.16A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material specifications, price limitations, quantities and All relevant instructions, requisitions, technical drawings The material/component specifications can be identified.
delivery requirements determined from instructions, and/or bills of material are obtained in accordance with The sources of additional information/advice with
requisitions etc. work place procedures. respect to the material/component specification can be
identified. The quantities of materials/components to be
ordered can be identified. The price limitations on
materials/components to be purchased can be identified.
The delivery requirements can be identified.

Element 11.16A.2 Purchase order

Criteria 11.16A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Supplier/vendor informed of requirements and The supplier/vendor is informed of the material/component The appropriate supplier(s)/ vendor(s) of a range of
specifications according to standard operating requirements and specifications in accordance with materials/components can be identified. The procedures
procedure. standard operating procedures. to be followed in informing supplier(s)/vendor(s) of the
purchase requirements can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 669 of 1445
 MEM 11.16A A Order materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.16A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Supplier/vendor followed up to achieve delivery as Where appropriate, the supplier/vendor is contacted to The delivery requirements can be identified. The
required. ensure the materials/components are delivered as required. procedures to be followed if the required delivery cannot
Where appropriate, the relevant personnel are informed of be achieved can be given. The person(s) to be informed
the supplier/vendor's inability to supply the of the inability of a supplier/vendor to supply the
materials/components as required. materials/components by the required time.

Criteria 11.16A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, goods directly received and checked Where appropriate, goods are received in accordance with The procedures for receiving goods can be identified.
for damage. standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, goods The checks to be undertaken of materials/components
are checked visually for faults and/or damage. Where delivered can be identified. Common defects/damage to
appropriate, faults and/or damaged goods are rejected in materials/components can be identified. The procedures
accordance with standard operating procedures. for dealing with faulty or damaged materials/ components
can be identified.

Criteria 11.16A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records/files completed accurately according to standard All relevant records/files are accurately The records/files of ordered goods to be
operating procedure. completed/maintained in accordance with standard completed/maintained can be identified. The
operating procedures. recording/filing procedures can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 670 of 1445
 MEM 11.16A A Order materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to purchasing activities carried out by other than the purchasing officer eg: maintenance, service, stores, warehouse personnel. The work is undertaken
autonomously or as part of team.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the ordering of materials or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 671 of 1445
 MEM 11.17A A Organise and lead stocktakes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.17A A Organise and lead stocktakes

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 11.7A Administer inventory procedures

Element 11.17A.1 Plan stocktake

Criteria 11.17A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory lists prepared and distributed. Inventory lists are prepared and distributed in accordance The procedures for printing and distributing inventory
with standard operating procedures. lists can be given. The personnel participating in the
stocktake can be identified.

Criteria 11.17A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Warehouse and/or production areas allocated to each Each individual/team is assigned a section of the The areas of the warehouse and/or production areas to
individual or team assisting in stocktake. warehouse/production area in which to undertake the which individuals or teams are to be assigned can be
stocktake. identified.

Element 11.17A.2 Brief participants in stocktake

Criteria 11.17A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Clear directions and appropriate documentation and All participants in the stocktake are briefed on the The directions to participants can be identified. The
equipment provided to each individual or team requirements of the stocktake. All participants are necessary documentation and equipment to carry out the
participating in stocktake. provided with the appropriate documentation and stocktake can be identified.
equipment to undertake the stocktake.

Element 11.17A.3 Generate stocktake reports

Criteria 11.17A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Written or computer reports collected from individuals or The stock counts are collected from the individuals/teams. The information to be collected from individuals/teams
teams on stock counts. can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 672 of 1445
 MEM 11.17A A Organise and lead stocktakes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.17A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory data is confirmed to match stock levels. The inventory data is compared with stock counts in The procedures for comparing inventory data with stock
accordance with standard operating procedures. counts/levels can be given.

Criteria 11.17A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Stock discrepancy report prepared and distributed Where appropriate, stock discrepancy reports are prepared The procedures for preparing and distributing stock
according to standard operating procedure. and distributed in accordance with standard operating discrepancy reports can be given.
procedures.

Element 11.17A.4 Adjust inventory documentation

Criteria 11.17A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory documentation is reconciled to match physical Inventory documentation is reconciled with physical stock The regulatory requirements with respect to inventory
stock in accordance with regulatory and operating levels in accordance with regulations and standard reconciliation can be identified. The procedures for
procedures. operating procedures. reconciling inventory documentation with physical stock
levels can be given.

Criteria 11.17A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Stocktake information is reconciled with audit Stocktake information is reconciled with audit The audit requirements with respect to stock levels can
requirements. requirements. be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 673 of 1445
 MEM 11.17A A Organise and lead stocktakes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the skills involved in organising and leading stocktakes in accordance with enterprise stocktaking policies, practices and procedures. Stocktakes can be undertaken
using a variety of equipment including calculators, scanners and portable computers. All work undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with stocktaking or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 674 of 1445
 MEM 11.18A A Organise and maintain warehouse stock receival and/or dispatch system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.18A A Organise and maintain warehouse stock receival and/or dispatch system
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
11.6A Production packaging 11.11A Manual handling 11.13A Undertake warehouse receival process
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
11.8A Package materials (stores and warehouse) 11.11A Manual handling 11.13A Undertake warehouse receival process
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
11.6A Production packaging 11.11A Manual handling 11.14A Undertake warehouse despatch process
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
11.8A Package materials (stores and warehouse) 11.11A Manual handling 11.14A Undertake warehouse despatch process

Element 11.18A.1 Allocate/coordinate work activities in receival and/or despatch areas

Criteria 11.18A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment and/or staff are allocated to meet receival Appropriate staff and equipment are allocated to stock The receival and despatch schedules can be identified.
and/or despatch schedules. receival and despatch areas to meet the work schedules. The staff and equipment required to meet those
schedules can be identified.

Criteria 11.18A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate documentation distributed and collected. The appropriate documentation is distributed and The appropriate documentation and its purpose can be
collected. identified.

Criteria 11.18A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Contingency procedures developed and implemented for Contingency procedures are in place to overcome receival The contingency procedures to overcome receival and
receival and despatch problems. and despatch problems. Where appropriate, the despatch problems can be given. The reasons for having
contingency procedures are implemented to overcome contingency plans can be explained. The types of
receival and/or despatch problems. receival and despatch problems that the contingency
plans are developed to overcome can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 675 of 1445
 MEM 11.18A A Organise and maintain warehouse stock receival and/or dispatch system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 11.18A.2 Maintain stock receival and/or despatch system

Criteria 11.18A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information is provided and extracted accurately The relevant information is accurately put into the stock The procedures for the input and extraction of
according to standard operating procedure. receival and despatch system in accordance with standard information can be given. The information to be input
operating procedures. The relevant information can be and/or extracted can be identified.
extracted from the receival and despatch system in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 11.18A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Receival and despatch reports produced as required. Where appropriate, receival and despatch reports are The procedures for preparing receival and despatch
produced in accordance with standard operating reports can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 11.18A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications to despatch and/or receival system are Where appropriate, the despatch and/or receival systems The procedures for modifying the despatch/receival
made according to standard operating procedure. are modified in accordance with standard operating system can be given. The reasons for modifying the
procedures. despatch/receival system can be identified.

Criteria 11.18A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Major problems with receival and/or despatch system Where appropriate, major problems with the Typical problems experienced in stock receival/despatch
identified and reported according to standard operating receival/despatch system are reported to the appropriate systems can be identified. The person to whom major
procedure. authority in accordance with standard operating problems with stock receival/despatch systems are to be
procedures. reported can be identified.

Criteria 11.18A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Participates in continuous improvement of despatch The implementation of improvements in the stock Improvements in the stock receival and despatch system
and/or receival systems. receival/despatch system is planned in accordance with can be identified. The procedures for changing the stock
standard operating procedures. receival and dispatch system can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 676 of 1445
 MEM 11.18A A Organise and maintain warehouse stock receival and/or dispatch system Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Organising and maintaining warehouse receival and dispatch areas includes the configuration of receival and despatch areas, taking into account customer and supplier needs,
documentation and system requirements and enterprise quality practices and procedures. All work undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements. Special requirements of
products, materials and location are taken into account.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with warehouse stock receival and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
dispatch systems or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 677 of 1445
 MEM 11.19A A Undertake tool store procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.19A A Undertake tool store procedures

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 11.7A Administer inventory procedures 11.11A Manual handling
11.13A Undertake warehouse receival process

Element 11.19A.1 Order tooling

Criteria 11.19A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling requirements are identified and consolidated Where appropriate, order documents are obtained in The relevant order documents can be identified. The
from order documentation and liaison with trade and accordance with workplace procedures. Relevant trade and relevant personnel to be consulted with respect to their
production personnel according to standard operating production personnel are consulted and their tooling tooling requirements can be identified. The procedures
procedure. requirements identified in accordance with work place for determining tooling requirements can be given.
procedures. The tooling requirements identified are
consolidated in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 11.19A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tooling identified from supplier catalogues All relevant manuals, data sheets, supplier catalogues, The appropriate tooling can be identified. The tooling
and manuals, including correct tooling range by size, tooling specifications and instructions are obtained in specifications can be identified.
hardness, quality etc. accordance with work place procedures.

Criteria 11.19A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling order placed according to standard operating Tooling orders are placed with appropriate suppliers in The procedures for ordering tooling can be identified.
procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures. Preferred/contracted suppliers can be identified. Where
appropriate, ordering limitations and/or authorisation
requirements can be identified. Where appropriate,
orders are authorised by the relevant authority.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 678 of 1445
 MEM 11.19A A Undertake tool store procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 11.19A.2 Tooling orders received

Criteria 11.19A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling orders received from main receival warehouse or Tooling orders are received in accordance with standard The procedures for the receipt of ordered tooling can be
direct from supplier according to standard operating operating procedures. identified.
procedure.

Criteria 11.19A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling unpacked and placed in correct location. Tooling is unpacked and checked for conformance to The storage requirements and location of a range of tools
order and specifications in accordance with standard can be identified.
operating procedures. The tooling is appropriately stored
in the correct location in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

Element 11.19A.3 Tooling maintained

Criteria 11.19A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling cleaned and protected where appropriate. Where appropriate, tooling is cleaned and protected in The procedures for cleaning a range of tooling can be
accordance with standard operating procedures. given. The procedures for applying protective coatings,
packaging etc. for a range of tooling can be identified.
The reasons for cleaning and protecting tooling can be
explained.

Criteria 11.19A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling supplies monitored to ensure maintenance of Tooling stock levels are maintained to ensure adequacy of Where appropriate, minimum stock levels of tools can be
contingency stock. supply to trade and production personnel by monitoring identified. The rate of consumption of a range of tooling
tool store records and stock levels in accordance with can be identified from tool store records. The lead time
standard operating procedures. for the supply of a range of tooling can be identified from
tool store records.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 679 of 1445
 MEM 11.19A A Undertake tool store procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 11.19A.4 Tooling distributed

Criteria 11.19A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling issued to users according to standard operating Tooling is issued in accordance with standard operating The procedures for issuing tooling to trade and
procedure. procedures. production personnel can be identified.

Criteria 11.19A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Enterprise documentation procedures followed. Where appropriate, enterprise documentation is completed Where appropriate, documentation to be completed on
in accordance with standard operating procedures. tooling issued can be identified.

Criteria 11.19A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Procedures against unauthorised use of tooling Where appropriate, procedures to prevent unauthorised The persons authorised to access tooling from the tool
established and/or followed. use of tooling are developed and implemented. Tooling is store can be identified Where appropriate, any limitations
issued ensuring that procedures aimed at preventing on access to tooling can be identified. Where
unauthorised use of tooling are followed. appropriate, procedures to prevent unauthorised use of
tooling can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 680 of 1445
 MEM 11.19A A Undertake tool store procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the management and storage of enterprise owned tooling and associated consumable items used in engineering. Tooling includes hand tools, cutting tips for
lathes, mills and other metal removal machines, grinding wheels, special steel etc. Tooling can be permanent or disposable. The work would normally be undertaken in a specialist
store or warehouse. Engineering knowledge and drawing interpretation skills would often be required and should be accessed from appropriate units.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with tool store procedures or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 681 of 1445
 MEM 11.20A A Perform advanced warehouse computer operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.20A A Perform advanced warehouse computer operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.9C10 Perform computer operations

Element 11.20A.1 Identify programs appropriate to purpose

Criteria 11.20A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Range of programs available on system identified. The range of programs available on the computer system
can be identified. The application of each program can be
identified.

Criteria 11.20A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct selection of word processing, spreadsheet, The correct program can be selected for a range of given
database or special purpose program made. applications/requirements.

Element 11.20A.2 Manipulate data for analysis and/or report generation

Criteria 11.20A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data manipulated through merging of files, transfer of Data is manipulated in accordance with standard operating The data required for analysis or report generation can
information between programs or other strategies to procedures for analysis and/or report generation. be identified. The procedures for performing the
generate desired outcome. following operations can be given: - merging of files -
transfer of information between programs.

Element 11.20A.3 Edit program

Criteria 11.20A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Categories in warehouse information system Categories are created/deleted in the warehouse The procedures for creating/deleting categories within
created/deleted to cater for changes in stock lines. information system in accordance with standard operating the warehouse information system can be given. The
procedures. reasons for creating/deleting categories within the
warehouse information system can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 682 of 1445
 MEM 11.20A A Perform advanced warehouse computer operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.20A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Report formats generated and/or modified. Report formats are generated and/or modified in The procedures for generating reports can be given. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for modifying reports can be given. The
reasons for modifying report formats can be identified.

Criteria 11.20A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Access control requirements identified. Access to the warehouse information system is controlled The requirements for controlling access to the
in accordance with standard operating procedures. information system can be identified. The procedures for
controlling access to the warehouse information system
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 683 of 1445
 MEM 11.20A A Perform advanced warehouse computer operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to operations on warehouse computer information systems beyond that covered by Unit 2.9C10 (Perform computer operations) and relevant material handling
units; it identifies the level of computer skills needed rather than inventory system or product knowledge required. There is to be further development of units covering computer
competencies which may result in this unit being broadened to cover a wider range of areas or being changed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with warehouse computer and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 684 of 1445
 MEM 11.21A A Advanced operation of load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.21A A Advanced operation of load shifting equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
11.10A Operate mobile load shifting equipment

Element 11.21A.1 Determine lifting and loading requirements

Criteria 11.21A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load is identified and checked against safe working load The load is checked against safe working loads, The safe working load of truck and/or containers can be
of final position/location and/or relevant specifications or specifications and/or regulations in accordance with work identified. The load is identified and its weight confirmed.
regulations. site procedures.

Criteria 11.21A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Special handling requirements of load identified, if Any special handling requirements of the load can be
applicable. identified.

Criteria 11.21A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load is lifted correctly and placed in final The load is placed in such a manner that the required load Load distribution requirements of the truck or container
position/location to achieve specified balance of load. balance across the length of the truck or container is can be identified.
achieved in accordance with work site procedures.

Element 11.21A.2 Work in confined spaces or conditions of restricted visibility

Criteria 11.21A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load is collected and manoeuvred without damage to The load is raised and manoeuvred without damage to the The hazards associated with moving loads in confined
load or collision with obstacles according to standard load or collision with obstacles in accordance with work spaces can be identified.
operating procedure. site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 685 of 1445
 MEM 11.21A A Advanced operation of load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 11.21A.3 Identify and carry loads that require special care
Criteria 11.21A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Loads requiring special care are identified. The special handling requirements of loads are identified.
Examples of loads requiring special care can be given.

Criteria 11.21A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Loads are carried in accordance with special requirements The loads are moved in accordance with any special
of product according to standard operating procedures handling requirements, regulatory requirements and work
and/or regulations. site procedures.

Element 11.21A.4 Operate forklifts in special traffic conditions

Criteria 11.21A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Forklifts are operated in areas of heavy traffic. Loads are moved safely and efficiently in areas of heavy The hazards associated with the operation of fork lifts in
traffic in accordance with work site procedures. areas of heavy traffic can be identified.

Criteria 11.21A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Forklifts are operated over difficult or uneven surfaces. Loads are moved safely and efficiently over difficult or The hazards associated with the operation of fork lifts
uneven terrain in accordance with work site procedures. over difficult or uneven terrain can be identified.

Criteria 11.21A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Forklifts operated in areas shared with the general public, Loads are moved safely and efficiently in areas shared The hazards associated with the operation of fork lifts in
as required. with the general public in accordance with regulatory areas shared with the general public can be identified.
requirements and work site procedures. The regulatory requirements associated with the
operation of fork lifts in areas shared with the general
public can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 686 of 1445
 MEM 11.21A A Advanced operation of load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to advanced forklift and loadshifting skills above those required for general operation. To be credited with this unit it is expected that an employee would be
competent in situations indicated by all elements and performance criteria. This unit is intended to cover load shifting applications where special purpose equipment/accessories
requiring advanced operational skills, eg: heavy, out of balance, awkward and irregular shaped loads traversing over rough, broken or uneven surfaces, high rise situations, are
used. All work undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer
questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection
of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job
training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently
and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation of load shifting and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
equipment, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 687 of 1445
 MEM 11.22A A Operate fixed/moveable load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 11.22A A Operate fixed/moveable load shifting equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Materials handling Unit Weight 4

Element 11.22A.1 Conduct routine operation and safety checks of load shifting equipment
Criteria 11.22A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operational principles of load shifting equipment The operational principles of the load shifting equipment
understood. can be explained.

Criteria 11.22A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine pre-use checks undertaken in accordance with Routine pre-use checks are carried out in accordance with The pre-use checks to be undertaken for the particular
manufacturer's specifications and regulatory safety manufacturer's and regulatory requirements and standard load shifting device can be identified.
requirements. operating procedures.

Criteria 11.22A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Non-compliance with specification reported using Variations of the load shifting device from manufacturer's The manufacturer's specifications for the load shifting
standard operating procedures. specifications are reported to the appropriate person in device can be identified. The person to whom variations
accordance with standard operating procedures. from specifications are to be reported can be identified.

Element 11.22A.2 Pick up loads

Criteria 11.22A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate load shifting device selected. Examples of load shifting devices appropriate to the
loading task and lift can be given. The most appropriate
load shifting device can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen load shifting device can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 688 of 1445
 MEM 11.22A A Operate fixed/moveable load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.22A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load shifting device operated within design The load shifting device is operated within design The safe working load and any design limitations
specifications and safe working load. specifications and safe working loads. applying to the selected load shifting device can be
identified.

Criteria 11.22A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Load is lifted/rolled, ensuring balance, vision of The load lifted/rolled is balanced, the operator has good The hazards with respect to the load, the operator and
operation, safety of personnel and protection of load. vision of the area of operation and the load is adequately others when loads are being lifted can be identified.
protected in accordance with standard operating Methods of protecting the load during the relocation of
procedures. the load can be identified.

Element 11.22A.3 Shift load

Criteria 11.22A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required, load moved at appropriate and safe The load is moved safely and efficiently to its destination The hazards associated with the movement of loads can
speed using safe and efficient path. in accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified. The most direct, safe path for movement of
the load can be identified.

Criteria 11.22A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Path of movement is monitored for obstacles and hazards The load is always moved along a path that is free of Potential obstacles and hazards that would affect the
during shifting process. obstacles and hazards. safety of the path of movement of the load can be
identified.

Element 11.22A.4 Place load

Criteria 11.22A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Loads are lowered at appropriate and safe rate. Loads are lowered at an appropriate and safe rate in The effect of load lowering rates on the safety of the
accordance with standard operating procedures. load, the individual and other personnel can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 689 of 1445
 MEM 11.22A A Operate fixed/moveable load shifting equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 11.22A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Loads are placed ensuring stability, protection of material All loads are placed safely and the stability and protection The requirements for load protection can be identified.
and avoidance of hazards on site. of the load material is ensured at all times in accordance The hazards to the load, the individual and other
with standard operating procedures. personnel during the placing of loads can be identified.

Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Load shifting equipment is operated within the limits of manufacturer's recommended procedures and safe working loads.
Movable and fixed load shifting equipment may include pendant cranes, yard, workshop and store travelling overhead cranes, monorail hoists and chain blocks (manual, air or
electric etc.), pivoting slewing jib rails etc. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. This unit applies to load shifting/lifting where
knowledge of codes and signals is not required. When using dedicated lifting equipment or devices where decisions regarding loads and methods of attachment are not required,
Unit 11.11A (Manual handling) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the operation of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
fixed/moveable load shifting equipment or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 690 of 1445
 MEM 12.1A A Use comparison and basic measuring devices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.1A A Use comparison and basic measuring devices

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 2

Element 12.1A.1 Select and use comparison and/or basic measuring devices
Criteria 12.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identify and select appropriate measuring devices to The correct device is selected to sort or categorise items in The correct device for comparison or measurement to be
undertake required comparison or measurement using accordance with standard operating procedures. undertaken can be identified and justified as meeting
standard operating procedures. comparison or measurement need.

Criteria 12.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Undertake measurement or sorting of items using All devices are correctly handled and appropriately The application of the device can be identified. The
comparison and/or basic measuring device. applied in undertaking the comparison or measurement. procedures for the correct use of devices can be
identified.

Element 12.1A.2 Maintain comparison and/or basic measuring devices

Criteria 12.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensure basic care and storage to manufacturer's The preset device is stored and maintained in accordance The procedures for maintaining and storing the preset
standards or standard operating procedures. with manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. device can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 691 of 1445
 MEM 12.1A A Use comparison and basic measuring devices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or as part of team work. Comparison measurements undertaken in production environment or at work station. These may include length, angle, size,
temperature, pressure, weight, voltage, resistance and amperage. Comparison devices may include go-no-go, thread angle and taper gauges, temperature gauges, pressure gauges,
measuring gauges, weight scales, overlay indicator, digital devices, preset verniers and micrometers. All comparative measurements undertaken to standard operating procedures
and to regulatory and legislative requirements. Basic measuring devices may include linear measuring devices, measuring to within 1mm graduation. This may include rules, tapes
and retractable tapes. This unit should not be selected if Unit 2.5C11 (Measure with graduated devices) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the use of preset comparison and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measuring devices or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 692 of 1445
 MEM 12.2A A Electrical/electronic measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.2A A Electrical/electronic measurement

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 2

Element 12.2A.1 Use electro-measuring devices to measure variables

Criteria 12.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate device or equipment and setting selected to The appropriate electro-measuring device and setting is The applications of a range of electro-measuring devices
achieve required outcome. selected and used in accordance with standard operating can be given. The application of the settings on each
procedures to obtain specified electrical measurements. electro-measuring device can be explained. For a given
range of measurements to be taken, the appropriate
device and setting can be identified. The procedures for
obtaining electrical measurements can be identified.

Criteria 12.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate connections made to achieve required The appropriate connections are made between the The connections to be made between the
outcome according to standard operating procedure. electro-measuring device(s) and the circuitry in electro-measuring device and the circuitry to be tested
accordance with standard operating procedures for taking can be identified for each type of electrical measurement.
specified electrical measurements. The procedures for connecting electro-measuring
devices to circuitry can be identified.

Criteria 12.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Readings obtained and interpreted correctly Conversion The specified electrical measurements are obtained and The correct scale for each setting on the
made where necessary, into the units of measurement correctly interpreted in accordance with standard electro-measuring device can be identified. Where
required. operating procedures. Where appropriate, the readings appropriate, the scale factor to be applied to readings
taken are converted into the units of measurement taken from the electro-measuring device can be
required. identified. The units applying to electrical and electronic
measurements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 693 of 1445
 MEM 12.2A A Electrical/electronic measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.2A.2 Maintain electro devices

Criteria 12.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine care and storage of devices undertaken to All electro-measuring devices are maintained and stored in The maintenance and storage requirements of a range of
manufacturer's specifications or standard operating accordance with manufacturer's specifications and electro-measuring devices can be identified. The
procedures. standard operating procedures. procedures for maintaining and storing a range of
electro-measuring devices can be identified. The
specifications of selected electro-measuring devices can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 694 of 1445
 MEM 12.2A A Electrical/electronic measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the measurement of voltage, current, resistance, power, frequency etc. on AC and DC circuits up to 1000v, using appropriate measuring devices. Measuring
devices may include analogue/digital mulitmeters, tong testers, oscilloscopes, potentiometers, etc. Electrical/electronic measuring devices may require the connection or
disconnection of circuitry. Adjustment of measuring devices may include zero and linear adjustment. Work may be undertaken autonomously or as part of a team. For simple
measurement tasks such as reading of fixed devices, testing continuity, and tasks requiring the use of devices mounted in measuring jigs etc. Unit 2.5C11 (Measure with graduated
devices) and/or Unit 12.1A (Use comparison and basic measuring devices) should be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the taking of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
electrical/electronic measurements or other units requiring the exercise plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 695 of 1445
 MEM 12.3A A Precision mechanical measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.3A A Precision mechanical measurement

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)

Element 12.3A.1 Use precision measurement equipment

Criteria 12.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select appropriate precision equipment to achieve The application of a range of precision mechanical
specified outcome. measuring equipment can be given. For a given range of
measurements to be taken the appropriate precision
mechanical measuring device can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen precision mechanical
measuring device can be explained.

Criteria 12.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate measuring techniques used. The appropriate precision mechanical measuring device is The procedures/techniques for obtaining a range of
selected and used in accordance with standard operating mechanical measurements can be identified.
procedures/techniques to obtain specified mechanical
measurements.

Criteria 12.3A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measure accurately to finest graduation of instrument. A range of precision mechanical measuring devices can be The accuracy to which a range of precision mechanical
read accurately to the finest graduation of the device in measuring devices can be read can be identified. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for reading graduated mechanical measuring
devices can be given.

Criteria 12.3A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Readings and measurements are interpreted correctly and For a range of precision mechanical measuring devices, all The units of measurement used in conjunction with
accurately. readings and measurements are interpreted correctly and precision mechanical measurement can be identified.
accurately.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 696 of 1445
 MEM 12.3A A Precision mechanical measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.3A.2 Set comparative measuring devices

Criteria 12.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment set to specifications utilising manufacturer's Where appropriate, measuring devices are set to The procedures for setting comparative measuring
or standard operating procedures and techniques. specification using appropriate tools and equipment, in devices can be identified. The specifications of the
accordance with manufacturer's/ standard operating equipment to be set can be identified. The tools and
procedures. equipment to be used in setting comparative measuring
devices can be identified.

Element 12.3A.3 Maintain precision equipment

Criteria 12.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measuring equipment adjusted and maintained to All precision mechanical measuring devices are maintained The adjustments that can be made to a range of precision
required accuracy, utilising manufacturer's or standard and adjusted, where appropriate, in accordance with mechanical measuring devices can be identified. The
operating procedures and techniques. manufacturer's/standard operating procedures. procedures for adjusting and maintaining a range of
precision mechanical measuring devices can be given.

Criteria 12.3A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Care and storage of equipment undertaken to All precision mechanical measuring devices are stored in The procedures for storing precision mechanical
manufacturer's specifications or standard operating accordance with manufacturer's specifications and measuring devices can be given. The specifications of
procedures. standard operating procedures. precision mechanical measuring devices can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 697 of 1445
 MEM 12.3A A Precision mechanical measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or as part of team environment. Work undertaken in field (in situ) or workshop/laboratory environment. This unit covers comprehensive measuring
skills where judgement is required in the selection of the most appropriate techniques/devices and results interpreted/analysed. Measurement undertaken may include length,
circular, straightness, flatness, hardness, angles, finishes, textures, roundness, squareness, alignment and coordinate measurement on equipment where equipment is fabricated,
maintained or repaired. Applications may include precision and/or complex use of slip gauges, engineering squares, angle deckers, sine bars, angle gauges, polygons, dividing
heads, rotary tables, precision levels, micrometers, height gauges, hardness testers, and texture measuring equipment etc. All specifications obtained from engineering drawings and
data sheets and/or manufacturer's instructions/data. All measurement/test procedures undertaken to standard operating procedures or manufacturer's recommended procedure. All
work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision mechanical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 698 of 1445
 MEM 12.4A A Precision electrical/electronic measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.4A A Precision electrical/electronic measurement

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 4
Notes - It is recommended that this unit be assessed in conjunction with electric and/or electronic competency units. This unit has dual status and is to be regarded
as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C

Element 12.4A.1 Use equipment for precision measurement

Criteria 12.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications interpreted accurately from drawings, All relevant drawings, specifications, data sheets and The specifications of the circuitry and/or components to
instructions. instructions obtained in accordance with standard be tested can be identified.
operating procedures.

Criteria 12.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment selected to achieve specified The application of a range of precision
outcome. electrical/electronic measuring devices can be given. The
appropriate precision electrical/ electronic measuring
device(s) to undertake the required measurements can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
precision electrical/electronic measuring device can be
explained.

Criteria 12.4A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate measuring technique used. The appropriate precision electrical/ electronic measuring The procedures/techniques for obtaining a range of
device is selected and used in accordance with standard electrical/ electronic measurements can be given.
operating procedures/ techniques to obtain specified
electrical/electronic measurements.

Criteria 12.4A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Readings and measurements are interpreted correctly and For a range of precision electrical/ electronic measuring The units of measurement used in conjunction with
accurately. devices, all readings and measurements are interpreted precision electrical/electronic measurement can be
correctly and accurately. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 699 of 1445
 MEM 12.4A A Precision electrical/electronic measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.4A.2 Set measuring devices

Criteria 12.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment set up to specifications utilising Precision electrical/electronic measuring devices are set to The procedure for setting a range of precision
manufacturer's or standard operating techniques. specification using appropriate tools and equipment, in electrical/electronic measuring devices can be identified.
accordance with manufacturer's/standard operating The specifications of the equipment to be set can be
procedures. identified. The tools and equipment to be used in setting
precision electrical/ electronic measuring devices can be
identified.

Element 12.4A.3 Maintain precision equipment

Criteria 12.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measuring equipment adjusted and maintained to All precision electrical/electronic measuring devices are The adjustments that can be made to a range of precision
required accuracy, utilising manufacturer's specifications maintained and adjusted, where appropriate, in accordance electrical/ electronic measuring devices can be identified.
or standard operating techniques. with manufacturer's/ standard operating procedures. The procedures for adjusting and maintaining a range of
precision electrical/electronic measuring devices can be
given.

Criteria 12.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Care and storage of equipment undertaken to All precision electrical/electronic measuring devices are The procedures for storing precision electrical/electronic
manufacturer's specifications or standard operating stored in accordance with manufacturer's specifications measuring devices can be given. The specifications of
procedures. and standard operating procedures. precision electrical/electronic measuring devices can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 700 of 1445
 MEM 12.4A A Precision electrical/electronic measurement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or as part of team environment. Work undertaken in field (in situ) and/or workshop/laboratory environment. This unit covers the definition of what
needs to be measured, the selection of appropriate measuring devices and calibration and care of devices to obtain accurate, precision measurements. Measurements may include
peak and transient voltages, transient frequencies, digital wave form analysis etc. Measurements include a range of frequencies and may be undertaken on full range of
electrical/electronic equipment including A.C., D.C. analog and digital equipment, microwave etc. Precision measuring/test equipment may include analog and digital meters, cathode
ray oscilloscope, bridges and potentiometers, wattmeters and digital probes etc. All specifications obtained from circuit drawings, engineering data sheets and/or manufacturer's
instructions/data. All measurement test procedures undertaken to standard operating procedures or manufacturer's recommended procedures. All work and work practices
undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision electrical/electronic and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurement or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 701 of 1445
 MEM 12.5B A Calibrating measuring equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.5B A Calibrating measuring equipment

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Measurement Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement

Element 12.5B.1 Check equipment for correct operation

Criteria 12.5B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate checks made of components, leads, The measuring equipment is checked for faults using The correct operation of the measuring equipment can be
fasteners, etc. for wear, loose connections or other faults. appropriate tools and equipment in accordance with identified. All wearing parts, connections and
standard operating procedures. components of the measuring equipment can be
identified. The checks that are to be made of wearing
parts, connections and components can be identified.
The procedures for checking the equipment for correct
operation can be given. Where appropriate, the fault(s) in
the measuring equipment can be identified. Where
appropriate, the effects of the detected faults on the
performance/accuracy of the measuring equipment can
be explained. The tools and equipment to be used when
checking the measuring equipment can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 702 of 1445
 MEM 12.5B A Calibrating measuring equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.5B.2 Validate/calibrate precision measuring equipment

Criteria 12.5B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assess calibration of precision measuring equipment to The calibration of the measuring equipment is checked for The specifications of the measuring equipment can be
manufacturer's specifications and/or standard operating conformance to specifications using appropriate identified. The tools and equipment required to check the
procedures. techniques in accordance with standard operating calibration of the measuring equipment can be identified.
procedures and all relevant codes, standards and The procedures for checking the calibration of the
legislative/regulatory requirements. measuring equipment can be given. Any codes,
standards, legislative or regulatory requirements
applicable to the measuring equipment and/or its
calibration can be identified.

Criteria 12.5B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is calibrated against appropriate physical The measuring equipment is calibrated against the The appropriate physical standard against which the
standards using correct calibration devices, equipment, appropriate physical standard in accordance with standard measuring equipment is to be calibrated can be identified.
techniques and procedures. operating procedures and all relevant codes, standards The procedures for calibrating the measuring equipment
and legislative/regulatory requirements. can be given. The tools and equipment required to
calibrate the measuring equipment can be identified.

Criteria 12.5B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is recommissioned in accordance with The measuring equipment is recommissioned in The procedure for commissioning the measuring
standard operating procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures and all equipment can be identified. The calibration records to
relevant codes, standards and legislative/regulatory be kept/ maintained can be identified.
requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 703 of 1445
 MEM 12.5B A Calibrating measuring equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the calibration skills used in the setting, adjustment, validation or verification of precision mechanical and/or electrical, electronic measuring instruments using
reference standards in accordance with predetermined procedures. Recommissioning may include sealing, tagging, identification or storage in accordance with standard operating
procedure. This unit is not meant to apply to simple zeroing, external adjustment or manual adjustment for size range e.g. micrometers etc., these skills are covered by Unit
2.5C11(Measure with graduated devices), Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) or Unit 12.4A (Precision electrical/electronic measurement) as appropriate. Procedures may
involve use of electronic setting equipment and the selection or determination of an appropriate external standard calibration involves the use of techniques, tools and equipment
to meet manufacturer's specifications and/or national standards or equivalent.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the calibration of measuring and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
equipment or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 704 of 1445
 MEM 12.6A A Mark off/out (general engineering) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.6A A Mark off/out (general engineering)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing

Element 12.6A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 12.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings, job instructions and specifications are All relevant job instructions, drawings, specifications and The work to be marked off/out can be identified. The
interpreted and understood. procedures are obtained in accordance with workplace specifications of the work can be identified. The
procedures. proposed manufacturing process can be identified.

Criteria 12.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate methods and sequencing selected The procedures for marking off/out work can be given.
consistent with proposed manufacturing process using The appropriate method and sequence of marking out
standard operating procedures. can be identified. The tools, equipment and techniques
required to mark out the work can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen marking off/out method
and sequence can be explained.

Element 12.6A.2 Transfer dimension

Criteria 12.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate tools and equipment all marking All marking off/out is carried out to specification using
off/out carried out to specifications. appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 12.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Datum points correctly established. The datum points are established correctly in accordance The purpose of establishing datum points when marking
with standard operating procedures. off/out work can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 705 of 1445
 MEM 12.6A A Mark off/out (general engineering) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.6A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dimensions transferred and correct and appropriate The dimensions transferred to the work are correct and in The method of determining/ calculating dimensions
calculations are used where required. accordance with specifications. Where appropriate, required for marking out purposes can be given.
additional dimensions required for marking off/out
purposes are correctly calculated.

Element 12.6A.3 Make templates as required

Criteria 12.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate template material selected. The appropriate template material is selected. Materials suitable for the manufacture of templates and
their application can be given. The most appropriate
template material is selected for given work requirements.
The reasons for selecting the chosen template material
can be given.

Criteria 12.6A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates produced to specifications and appropriate to Templates are produced to specification in accordance The procedures for producing templates appropriate to
desired use. with standard operating procedures. their application can be given.

Criteria 12.6A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct storage procedures followed including labelling Templates are stored and handled correctly in accordance The procedures for storing and handling templates can
and identification to standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. Templates are be given. The labelling and identification to be placed on
appropriately labelled and marked for identification in templates can be identified. The consequences of
accordance with standard operating procedures. inappropriate handling and storing of templates can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 706 of 1445
 MEM 12.6A A Mark off/out (general engineering) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the marking off/out techniques used for the transfer of dimensions from engineering drawings, prints or plans. This unit covers marking out on engineering
components, jigs and fixtures, castings, templates, dies and tooling etc. Work is undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop
procedures. The task may be performed in the workshop or in situ. Marking off/out is undertaken using appropriate tools and equipment; templates are produced as required.
Equipment may include marking out tables, surface tables, rotary tables, dividing heads etc., vee blocks, cylinder squares, sine bars and the like, vernier height gauges, protractors,
straight edge and set squares etc. Marking off/out techniques may apply to a range of materials and shapes. This unit is not intended to cover the skills used in a simple transfer of
a dimension or marking a location point associated with general engineering and maintenance functions. For these skills see Unit 7.5A (Perform general machining), Unit 18.6A
(Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) or Unit 18.14A (Tool, gauge and die manufacture). Where a higher level of calculation, measurement or
precision work is required see Unit 2.13C5 (Perform mathematical computations), Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) or Unit 18.3A (Use tools for precision work)
respectively. For marking out structural fabrications and shapes refer Unit 12.7A (Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the marking off/out of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
components or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 707 of 1445
MEM 12.7A B Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.7A B Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to transfer the dimensions from the detail drawing to work, make templates as required, develop patterns and or transfer
measurements to structures, interpret relevant codes, standards and symbols and estimate quantities of material from drawings. The unit applies to the marking off/out
of
general fabrications and shapes using appropriate tools and equipment.

Element 12.7A.1 Transfer dimensions from a detail drawing to work or surface

Criteria 12.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications and work requirements determined and Job instructions and specifications are obtained in The work to be undertaken can be identified The
understood using correct and appropriate calculations accordance with work site procedures All necessary specifications applicable to the work to be done can be
calculations are performed correctly and accurately identified
Criteria 12.7A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Marking out carried out to specifications or standard The marking off/out is carried out accurately using The tools and equipment to be used in the preparation of
operating procedures using appropriate tools and appropriate techniques, procedures and equipment Marking the marking off/out can be identified
equipment off/out is checked against specifications
Criteria 12.7A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Datum points correctly established All datum points are correctly established and appropriately The datum points can be identified
marked

Element 12.7A.2 Make templates/patterns as required

Criteria 12.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate template/pattern material chosen Materials that can be used for the preparation of templates
and their application can be given The appropriate
template material for the given application can be
Criteria 12.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Templates produced to specifications The template is produced to specification in accordance with The manufacturing allowances that have to be considered
standard operating procedures All manufacturing allowances when developing patterns can be identified
are correctly and accurately calculated
Criteria 12.7A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct storage procedures followed including labelling Templates are labelled and stored in accordance with Template labelling and identification procedures can be
and identification to standard operating procedures standard operating procedures identified The appropriate storage requirements of
templates can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 708 of 1445
MEM 12.7A B Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 12.7A.3 Develop patterns and/or transfer measurements to structures
Criteria 12.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate development and/or measurement Patterns are developed/lay out equipment assembled and The three development methods and their application can
sequence chosen and applied structures are marked off/out using the appropriate be identified The appropriate method(s) of
method(s) in accordance with standard operating procedures development/marking off/out of a range of given objects
can be identified
Criteria 12.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowances for fabrication and assembly correctly Fabrication and assembly allowances are correctly The appropriate fabrication and assembly allowances can be
determined and transferred determined and transferred to the pattern identified The effects of material type and thickness on
fabrication and assembly allowances can be identified The
sources of data on fabrication and assembly allowances can
be identified
Criteria 12.7A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measurement transfer/layout of components is checked
to ensure accuracy/set out

Element 12.7A.4 Interpret relevant codes, standards and symbols

Criteria 12.7A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant standards/codes and symbols interpreted All relevant standards and codes can be identified The
meaning of symbols used in the standards/codes can be given

Criteria 12.7A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements of standards/codes interpreted and applied Where applicable, the requirements of the codes/standards The requirements of the codes/ standards applicable to the
to materials and processes are correctly applied during the geometric work to be done can be identified
development/marking off/out process
Element 12.7A.5 Estimate quantities of materials from detail drawings
Criteria 12.7A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials correctly identified The material(s) from which the component/assembly is to
be manufactured can be identified

Criteria 12.7A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities estimated from drawing Material and component quantities are correctly determined
from drawings and job specifications

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 709 of 1445
MEM 12.7A B Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.7A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material wastage minimised Material wastage is minimised during the development of The benefits of minimising material wastage can be given
patterns/ templates and the marking off/out of structures

Range statement
This unit applies to marking out of general fabrications and shapes. In a marine setting, it includes basic lofting/set out for construction of marine vessels and may include items
such as stem and transom development and use of tables of offsets that reflect chine and hull configuration. Where more extensive lofting practices are used, Unit 9.21A
(Interpret and produce curved 3 dimensional shapes) should be considered. Work is undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop
procedures. All work and work practices carried out to industry, regulatory and legislative requirements. The task may be performed in the workshop or in-situ. Marking out is
undertaken using appropriate tools and equipment. Templates and patterns are produced as required. Equipment may include marking out and surface tables, dividers, protractors,
squares etc. In a marine setting this may include lofting surfaces, straightedges, stringlines, french curves, templates, etc. Marking out techniques may apply to a range of materials
and shapes. For marking out general engineering components refer to Unit 12.6A (Mark off/out (general engineering)).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the marking off/out of structural fabrications and shapes or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 710 of 1445
MEM 12.7A B Mark off/out structural fabrications and shapes Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to marking out of general fabrications and shapes. Work is undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures.
The task may be performed in the workshop or in situ. Marking out is undertaken using appropriate tools and equipment. Templates and patterns are produced as required.
Equipment may include marking out and surface tables, dividers, protractors, squares, etc. Marking out techniques may apply to a range of materials and shapes. For marking out
general engineering components refer to Unit 12.6A (Mark off/out (general engineering)).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the marking off/out of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
structural fabrications and shapes or other units requiring the exercise plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 711 of 1445
 MEM 12.19A A Measure components using coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.19A A Measure components using coordinate measuring machine

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 4

Element 12.19A.1 Identify job requirements

Criteria 12.19A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job sheets or equivalent instructions interpreted All information for loading, setting probes and measuring The operator can identify and explain all the required
correctly. components is interpreted. information on job sheets or equivalent.

Element 12.19A.2 Load components

Criteria 12.19A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating Pre-start check procedure is correctly identified. The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified
procedures. and each step/check can be explained.

Criteria 12.19A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures are observed and all safety Operator follows safety procedures at all times. All safety issues pertaining to the equipment setup can
equipment checked for correct operation. be outlined.

Criteria 12.19A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct fixture/clamping device selected. The correct fixture/clamping device is selected in The procedure for selecting fixture/clamping device can
accordance with the standard operating procedure. be explained. Different fixtures/clamping devices and
their uses can be explained. Storage location and
condition can be outlined.

Criteria 12.19A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component and fixtures loaded and clamped in Component is correctly positioned and clamped using Different fixing/clamping methods can be outlined.
accordance with standard operating procedures. suitable techniques/accessories.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 712 of 1445
 MEM 12.19A A Measure components using coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.19A.3 Set probes

Criteria 12.19A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-measurement manual hits are taken for manual The correct number/position of hits is taken and alignment The procedure for undertaking pre-measurement manual
alignment in accordance with standard operating determined. hits for manual alignment is identified. The reason for
procedures. taking pre-measurement manual hits can be explained.

Criteria 12.19A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Probe configuration is checked for compliance to The probe/s configuration is verified as correct according The procedure for checking probe configuration can be
specification. to specifications. explained.

Element 12.19A.4 Measure components

Criteria 12.19A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part program selected, run and verified according to Correct part program is selected. Part program is activated The procedure for running and verifying part program is
standard operating procedure. correctly. Program is verified and correct operation identified. The reasons for verifying part program can be
confirmed. explained.

Criteria 12.19A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are measured according to standard The correct measuring techniques are used. The reason for location and number of measurements
operating procedure. taken can be explained.

Criteria 12.19A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results interpreted and non-conforming/out of tolerance Results are correctly interpreted and explained. Out of Methods/techniques for interpreting results can be
measurements identified and reported. tolerance measurements reported correctly. Required outlined. The meaning of different results can be
changes to process machine identified. explained. Reporting procedures and recommendations
for adjustment can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 713 of 1445
 MEM 12.19A A Measure components using coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.19A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part program correct shut down and components Operator demonstrates how to shut down the part Key aspects of shutting down part program can be
removed according to standard operating procedure. program. Operator removes components safely and explained. The main steps to removing a component
without damage. safely can be explained.

Criteria 12.19A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coordinate measuring machine, accessories and Operator cleans machine and site correctly. Operator All required cleaning tasks can be outlined and the
surrounds left in a clean, safe condition. leaves machine in a safe condition. importance of cleaning the CMM outlined. Effects of
excess contamination can be explained. Requirements for
leaving CMM in safe condition can be outlined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 714 of 1445
 MEM 12.19A A Measure components using coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The skills described in this unit apply to a range of Co-ordinate Measuring Machines (CMM) used mainly in a production environment. The operator is responsible for determining
requirement for adjustment of the manufacturing process after measurement of components with the CMM. Work is performed to established processes, practices, standard
operating procedures and specifications. Work is carried out autonomously using pre-determined standards of quality and safety. Operators would be expected to have competence
in basic setting and adjusting machines. An appropriate level of measurement skill should be selected with this unit. Where it is required to use tools then unit 18.1A (Use hand
tools) should also be selected. Where basic operation excludes setting up components and manually aligning probes, Unit 7.24A (Operate and monitor machine/process) should be
selected. Where other machines/processes are to be adjusted as a consequence of the CMM operation, appropriate machining/process operation units should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with basic operation of a and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
coordinate measuring machine and/or processes or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 715 of 1445
 MEM 12.20A A Set and operate coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.20A A Set and operate coordinate measuring machine

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 2

Element 12.20A.1 Determine job requirements

Criteria 12.20A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions/plans and relevant job specifications All necessary information is interpreted from job sheets, The operator can identify and explain all of the required
understood and correctly followed. instructions. information on job sheets/instruction.

Criteria 12.20A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawing information interpreted correctly and the range The required information is identified from the drawing and Typical information and tolerances can be identified and
of tolerances applying to components is understood. the tolerance range applying to the component is explained.
identified.

Element 12.20A.2 Set up/orient components

Criteria 12.20A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-start checks undertaken to standard operating Pre-start check procedure is correctly identified. The pre-start checks to be undertaken can be identified
procedures. and each step can be explained.

Criteria 12.20A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct safety procedures are observed and all equipment Operator follows safe procedures at all times. Safety issues pertaining to the equipment and setup can
checked for safe operation. be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 716 of 1445
 MEM 12.20A A Set and operate coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.20A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The most appropriate method of clamping is determined The correct fixture/clamping device/method is selected The procedure for selecting the appropriate
to minimise clamping and maximise measuring access. from a range of fixtures/devices/methods. The location of fixture/clamping device/method can be explained. The
the clamping device allows maximum access for principles and functions of various fixtures/clamping
measurement. devices/methods is explained. The setting up/orientation
procedure selected is the most efficient, safe and
accurate method. Storage location and condition can be
outlined.

Criteria 12.20A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component/fixture/clamping devices correctly set up and The component to be measured is correctly and accurately The reasons for the location of the component and
oriented. positioned and secured. fixtures/clamping devices can be explained. The reasons
for each step in the setup procedure can be explained.
Alternative methods of fixing/clamping can be outlined.

Element 12.20A.3 Select and activate part programs

Criteria 12.20A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part program is identified according to standard operating Correct part program is selected by number or name. The procedure for determining the correct part program
procedure. from list is identified according to standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 12.20A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part program is verified. The program selected reflects any upgrades in the The procedure for verifying changes/upgrades to part
drawing/plan. programs can be explained.

Criteria 12.20A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Selected part program is activated according to standard Part program is activated correctly. The procedure for activating the selected part program
operating procedure. can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 717 of 1445
 MEM 12.20A A Set and operate coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.20A.4 Prepare CMM

Criteria 12.20A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine probe configuration according to The probe configuration is correctly determined according Different probe configurations can be identified and
specifications. to specifications. explained. Various probes and their uses can be
explained.

Criteria 12.20A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Probe configuration is adjusted on CMM according to The method for adjusting probes is correctly The procedure for adjusting probes configuration can be
standard operating procedures. demonstrated. explained.

Criteria 12.20A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Probe angles checked for compliance and adjusted as Probe angles are checked for compliance and adjusted as The reasons for setting probe angles can be explained.
required. required. The procedure for checking probe angles can be
outlined.

Criteria 12.20A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Re-set/re-calibrate CMM. The CMM is correctly re-set/re-calibrated to The procedure for re-setting/re-calibration can be
specifications. outlined. The reasons for re-setting/re-calibration can be
explained. The precautions to be taken to reduce the
need for re-setting/re-calibration can be outlined.

Criteria 12.20A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Manually align probes for one off components. The correct number and positions of manual hits is taken. The procedure for undertaking pre-measurement manual
hits for manual alignment is identified. The reasons for
taking pre-measurement manual hits can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 718 of 1445
 MEM 12.20A A Set and operate coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.20A.5 Edit part programs

Criteria 12.20A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part program edited to compensate for errors or changes Problems/errors in program identified. Program correctly The procedure used for editing can be outlined. The
to component specifications. edited to ensure accurate operation. reasons for editing can be explained.

Element 12.20A.6 Measure components

Criteria 12.20A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components measured and checked for conformance to Results are checked against drawings/ specifications and Procedure for interpretation of results can be outlined.
specification. non conformance identified.

Criteria 12.20A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Produce data/report. The component report is printed/stored in computer as The procedure for maintaining records is explained. The
required. Report forwarded to the appropriate personnel. details required by various personnel and the procedure
for forwarding reports is explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 719 of 1445
 MEM 12.20A A Set and operate coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The skills described in this unit apply to a range of Co-ordinate Measuring Machines (CMM). Work is performed to established processes, practices, standard operating
procedures and specifications. Work is carried out autonomously using pre-determined standards of quality and safety. The procedures apply to both one off and multiple
components. Appropriate levels of measurement, computer operations and drawing skills should be selected with this unit. Where a range of hand tools is required Unit 18.1A
(Use hand tools) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with operating and setting and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
coordinate measuring machines and/or processes or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 720 of 1445
 MEM 12.21A A Program coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.21A A Program coordinate measuring machine

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement

Element 12.21A.1 Identify part program parameters

Criteria 12.21A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Job specifications and requirements correctly All specifications/drawings/instructions are correctly The procedure for producing the part program can be
established. interpreted and the parameters of the part program explained. The specifications for the program can be
understood. outlined.

Criteria 12.21A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate units are selected to comply with The correct units for the part program are selected The criteria for selecting specific units can be identified.
specifications. according to standard operating procedures.

Criteria 12.21A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part program name is specified according to standard The part program name complies with current The procedures and parameters for naming programs can
operating procedures. identification/quality system. be outlined.

Element 12.21A.2 Establish single probe configurations

Criteria 12.21A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Single probe configuration is determined according to The probe configuration is correctly determined. The procedure for determining probe configuration can
standard operating procedures. be outlined. The reasons for selecting single probe
configuration can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 721 of 1445
 MEM 12.21A A Program coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.21A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Probe angles are determined and qualified in accordance Probe angles are correctly calculated/determined and The procedure for determining/calculating probe angles
with standard operating procedure. qualified. can be explained. The correct procedure and parameters
for qualification can be outlined.

Element 12.21A.3 Position/align component

Criteria 12.21A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component/part positioned and oriented correctly. The component/part is positioned/aligned/secured to The reasons for the specific location and
appropriate orientation on CMM table and complies with aligning/securing the component/part can be explained.
probe configuration and calibrated angles. The method of securing/clamping can be justified.

Criteria 12.21A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Manual alignment created according to standard An appropriate number of hits taken to create an accurate The methodology used to create manual alignment for
operating procedure. manual alignment. the part can be explained.

Criteria 12.21A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Single Direct Computer Control (DCC) alignment is The correct procedure for creating DCC alignment is The procedure and reasons for creating a single DCC
created according to standard operating procedure. demonstrated. alignment can be explained.

Element 12.21A.4 Measure features

Criteria 12.21A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Features are measured correctly. The part features are measured in the correct sequence The correct procedure for measuring component/part
and location in a single work plane. features in a single plane can be explained.

Criteria 12.21A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Probe movement parameters are defined in accordance The parameters are correctly defined and verified. The criteria for defining probe movement can be outlined.
with standard operating procedures. The procedure for verifying correct probe movement can
be outlined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 722 of 1445
 MEM 12.21A A Program coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.21A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Basic features dimensioned according to specifications. Basic feature such as circles, points etc are correctly Dimensioning techniques can be explained Standard
dimensioned. dimensioning techniques are followed.

Criteria 12.21A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operator notes reported. Explanatory notes for the operator are produced and The operator notes are logical, clear and relevant. The
inserted. reasons for explanatory operator notes can be outlined.

Criteria 12.21A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dimension descriptions are inserted. All necessary dimension descriptions are inserted in Dimension descriptions are adequate for the task. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. procedure and parameters can be outlined. References
are made to relevant standards.

Element 12.21A.5 Verify and backup the program

Criteria 12.21A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Execution and accuracy of program verified according to The part program is run and the accuracy of the results The procedure for running the program can be outlined.
standard operating procedure. verified. The program runs without fault and within the
parameters required. The procedure for verifying the
results can be explained.

Criteria 12.21A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Edit program if required. Where non-conformance is identified from verification Editing process and reasons can be explained. Final
procedure, appropriate editing is undertaken. program is free from errors.

Criteria 12.21A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results output to various formats according to standard Results output to printer, disc or other format as required. The procedures used to output results to various formats
operating procedure. can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 723 of 1445
 MEM 12.21A A Program coordinate measuring machine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.21A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Archive and backup program. Part program correctly archived and backup copies The method used to archive the program is outlined. The
produced according to standard operating procedures. procedure used to backup is outlined. Access limitations
by personnel and quality control guidelines can be
explained.

Range statement
The skills in this unit extend to writing basic programs to measure features of a part in a single work plane using a single probe. The program produced may be used on a range of
Coordinate Measuring Machines and would be suitably archived and backed up. Programs are trialed and edited as necessary. Work would be undertaken autonomously using
predetermined standards of quality. For programming using multiple probes and more than one plane Unit 12.22A (Program coordinate measuring machine (advanced)) should be
selected. Appropriate levels of measuring, computer and engineering drawing skills should be selected with this unit.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with basic programming of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
coordinate measuring machines and/or processes or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 724 of 1445
 MEM 12.22A A Program coordinate measuring machine (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 12.22A A Program coordinate measuring machine (advanced)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Measurement Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement

Element 12.22A.1 Determine program requirements

Criteria 12.22A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part parameters and measurement requirements Job sheets, drawings and/or instructions correctly The program specifications can be outlined. The
determined. interpreted, job requirements established and the required procedure for producing the program can be explained.
parameters of the program are understood.

Criteria 12.22A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program attributes are determined and established The part program name complies with current identification The parameters for selecting attributes can be outlined.
according to standard operating procedures. system. The correct units are selected.

Element 12.22A.2 Determine probe configuration for multiple probes

Criteria 12.22A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Probe configuration determined according to standard Suitable probes are selected and probe configuration is The reason for selecting multiple probes can be
operating procedure. correctly determined. explained. The procedure for determining multiple probe
configuration can be outlined.

Criteria 12.22A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine probe angles and qualify multiple probes. The probe angles for each probe are correctly determined The procedure for determining probe angles can be
and qualified. explained. The qualification procedure can be outlined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 725 of 1445
 MEM 12.22A A Program coordinate measuring machine (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 12.22A.3 Create multiple Direct Computer Control (DCC) alignment

Criteria 12.22A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Multiple DCC alignment is created according to standard Multiple DCC alignment is correctly created. The procedure for creating DCC alignment can be
operating procedure. outlined. The critical differences between single and
multiple DCC alignment can be explained.

Criteria 12.22A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
DCC sub-routines are integrated. New and/or existing DCC sub-routines are integrated into Problems due to integrating sub-routines can be
the program. explained. Advantages to be gained through integration
of DCC sub-routines can be outlined.

Element 12.22A.4 Construct advanced geometric features

Criteria 12.22A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Geometric features determined and constructed. The geometric features for the program are correctly The procedure for constructing geometric features can
constructed in a logical sequence. be explained. The reasons for constructing features in
the sequence followed can be explained.

Criteria 12.22A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Features dimensioned according to standard operating All necessary dimensions/notes/instructions are included The dimensioning techniques comply with relevant
procedures. in the program. standards. All notes/instructions are clear and logical.

Element 12.22A.5 Review and maintain part programs/system

Criteria 12.22A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Part programs are reviewed/edited to comply with The program is reviewed against specifications and The procedures and parameters for editing, archiving and
changes to specifications. correctly edited. backing up programs can be explained. The effects of
editing particular sections of the program can be
outlined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 726 of 1445
 MEM 12.22A A Program coordinate measuring machine (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 12.22A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System wide options are changed. System wide operations are changed to ensure the most The effects on other programs of changing software or
efficient operation of the program. Appropriate checks are hardware options can be explained. The procedures for
made to ensure the integrity of the system is maintained. changing system-wide options can be outlined.

Criteria 12.22A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Programs are archived and backed up according to Archive and backing up procedures are correctly followed. Archive and backup procedures can be given. The
standard operating procedures. procedures for archiving can be explained. Backup
options can be outlined. The list of recipients or those
with access rights to the programs can be outlined.

Criteria 12.22A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results output to various formats according to standard Results output to printer, disc or other format as required The procedures for producing/storing results/reports can
operating procedure. Appropriate personnel notified. be explained. The list of recipients or those with access
to the programs can be outlined. The procedure for
notifying personnel of completion of the program is
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 727 of 1445
 MEM 12.22A A Program coordinate measuring machine (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The skills in this unit extend to writing programs to measure features of parts in multiple planes using multiple probes. The program produced may be used on a range of Coordinate
Measuring Machines and would be suitably archived and backed up. Programs are trialed and edited as necessary. Work would be undertaken autonomously using predetermined
standards of quality. For programming using single probes in a single plane Unit 12.21A (Program coordinate measuring machine) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with programming of coordinate and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measuring machines and/or processes or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 728 of 1445
 MEM 13.1A A Perform emergency first aid Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.1A A Perform emergency first aid

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 1
Notes - Competencies for recognised first aid qualifications are determined by such bodies as St Johns Ambulance etc. and are not covered within these standards.

Element 13.1A.1 Perform emergency first aid

Criteria 13.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct procedures for CPR (cardio pulmonary The correct procedures for CPR are demonstrated on a The instances where CPR should be applied can be
resuscitation) demonstrated on a mannequin. mannequin. given. The procedures for preparing a person for the
administration of CPR can be identified. The procedures
to be followed when performing CPR on a child and an
adult can be given. The dangers and precautions to be
taken when administering CPR can be explained.

Criteria 13.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
First aid treatment of injuries carried out. The appropriate first aid treatment for the full range of The first aid procedures to be applied in situations where
injuries can be demonstrated during simulated exercises. the following injuries have occurred can be identified: -
burns/scalds - fractures - cuts and abrasions - poisoning
- foreign bodies in eyes - concussion - shock.

Criteria 13.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Details of first aid given recorded. The details to be recorded of first aid given can be
identified. The procedures for recording first aid given
can be identified. The reasons for recording first aid
given can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 729 of 1445
 MEM 13.1A A Perform emergency first aid Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 13.1A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Understanding of relevant regulatory and legislative The relevant regulatory and legislative requirements with
requirements demonstrated. respect to emergency first aid can be identified. The
impact of those regulatory/ legislative requirements on
the individual and others can be explained.

Range statement
This unit covers basic first aid and the management of life threatening situations where an unconscious person requires breathing and cardiac emergency resuscitation (EAR and
CPR). The competencies required for situations involving isolation of persons from hazardous electrical situations are covered in Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired
equipment up to 1000 volts AC and 1500 volts DC) and Unit 10.3A (Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 1000 volts AC and 1500 volts DC)). This unit does not meet all
of the requirements expected of designated First Aid Officers.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of first aid or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 730 of 1445
MEM 13.2A A Undertake occupational health and safety activities in the workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.2A A Undertake occupational health and safety activities in the workplace
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 3
This unit covers the competencies required to apply the principles of OHS in the workplace and undertake a safety audit for the employee’s area of responsibility. It
apples to those who need OHS competencies beyond those inherent in their jobs.

Element 13.2A.1 Apply principles of OHS in a workplace

Criteria 13.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Understanding of basic OHS principles of hazard The principles of hazard identification, assessment and
identification, assessment and control demonstrated control as applied to the workplace can be given The
procedures for hazard identification, assessment and
control can be given
Criteria 13.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Understanding of OHS legislation as it is applied in the The application of the OHS legislation in the
workplace is demonstrated workplace can be explained

Element 13.2A.2 Carry out safety audit

Criteria 13.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Regular safety audit in the area of responsibility is Regular safety audits of the individual's area(s) of The procedures for conducting safety audits can be
carried out in accordance with appropriate standards responsibility are carried out in accordance with the given The safety standards applicable to the
relevant standards and standard operating procedures individual's area(s) of responsibility can be identified
The frequency at which safety audits should be
conducted can be identified

Element 13.2A.3 Identify health and safety improvements

Criteria 13.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
On the basis of safety audit or as required, formulate The procedures for implementing OHS improvements
recommendations and identify hazards to be rectified can be given The means of rectifying given or
identified hazards can be stated The reasons for
selecting the chosen means of rectifying the hazard can
be given The authority to whom recommended OHS
improvements are to be reported can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 731 of 1445
MEM 13.2A A Undertake occupational health and safety activities in the workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 13.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Make safety improvements using standard operating Where appropriate, safety improvements are made in The procedures for making safety improvements can be
procedures accordance with standard operating procedures given
Criteria 13.2A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
OHS training needs identified Where appropriate, OHS training is initiated in The requirement for OHS training in the individual's
accordance with standard operating procedures area(s) of responsibility can be identified The
objectives of the training can be identified The
procedures for initiating OHS training can be given

Element 13.2A.4 Follow requirements of enterprise OHS program including emergency procedures
Criteria 13.2A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ensure that requirements of OHS program satisfied in The requirements of the OHS program and procedures in The procedures for accident investigation can be given
the area of responsibility, for example, accident the individual's area(s) of responsibility are being met The emergency procedures can be given The role of the
investigation, emergency procedures individual in carrying out accident investigations and
emergency procedures can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 732 of 1445
MEM 13.2A A Undertake occupational health and safety activities in the workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit is intended to apply to employees requiring additional Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) competencies beyond those inherent in their job.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
disadvantage the candidate. Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the undertaking of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
occupational health and safety activities in the workplace or other - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 733 of 1445
 MEM 13.3A A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.3A A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 2

Element 13.3A.1 Use personal protection equipment

Criteria 13.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate safety clothing and personal Appropriate safety clothing and personal safety The hazards associated with the industrial
safety equipment is selected and used correctly. equipment is used correctly in accordance with work site chemicals/materials being used can be identified. The
procedures. appropriate safety clothing and personal safety
equipment required to safely handle the industrial
chemicals/materials being used can be identified.

Element 13.3A.2 Identify emergency procedures

Criteria 13.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency procedures are understood and demonstrated Emergency procedures are demonstrated during a The procedures to be followed in the event of an
as laid down in approved safety instructions. simulated emergency or drill. emergency can be identified.

Element 13.3A.3 Observe safe working practices

Criteria 13.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hazardous areas and materials are identified and special The hazardous areas and materials can be identified. Any
handling procedures identified and understood. special handling requirements for the industrial
chemicals/materials being used can be identified. The
consequences of inappropriate handling of hazardous
materials can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 734 of 1445
 MEM 13.3A A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 13.3A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All equipment and hazardous materials are used in All equipment and hazardous materials are used in The correct use of equipment and hazardous materials
accordance with specifications and correct procedures. accordance with specifications and work site procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 13.3A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All safety signs, symbols and labels are correctly Common safety signs, symbols and labels can be
identified and understood. interpreted correctly. The sources of additional
information with respect to hazardous materials can be
identified.

Criteria 13.3A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material safety data sheets understood and applied. The appropriate material safety data sheets are obtained in The appropriate material safety data sheet for hazardous
accordance with work site procedures. The requirements materials used can be identified.
of the material safety data sheets are followed while
handling hazardous materials in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 13.3A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe manual handling procedures are used. All manual handling undertaken safely and in accordance Safe manual handling procedures can be identified.
with work site procedures.

Criteria 13.3A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Housekeeping duties are performed according to Housekeeping duties are performed in accordance with The consequences of not maintaining a clean and safe
standard operating procedure to maintain a safe working work site procedures. working environment can be given.
environment.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 735 of 1445
 MEM 13.3A A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit may be applied in a workplace in which materials and chemicals which are subject to codes and regulations are stored and used, for example, chemicals, explosives,
solvents, dangerous materials, acids, noxious waste products etc. Personal protection includes goggles, filter masks, air helmets, safety boots and appropriate clothes/garments.
This unit describes the competencies which are beyond those safety requirements normally applied in the workplace as described in Unit 1.2F (Apply principles of Occupational
Health & Safety (OH&S) in work environment) or specifically described in individual units such as Welding.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. - All safety clothing and personal safety equipment. The candidate will be permitted
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant
disadvantage the candidate. product and manufacturing specifications. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by
other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues
who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. -
Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be
satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit
as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with working with industrial and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
chemicals and materials, or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 736 of 1445
 MEM 13.4A A Work safely with molten metals/glass Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.4A A Work safely with molten metals/glass

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 2

Element 13.4A.1 Use personal protection equipment

Criteria 13.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate safety clothing used correctly, as specified Appropriate safety clothing and personal safety The hazards associated with molten metal/glass can be
in Standard Operating Procedure (SOP). equipment is used correctly in accordance with standard identified. The appropriate safety clothing and personal
operating procedures. safety equipment required when working with molten
metal/glass can be identified.

Element 13.4A.2 Identify emergency procedures

Criteria 13.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Emergency procedures demonstrated as laid down in Emergency procedures are demonstrated during a The procedures to be followed in the event of an
approved safety instructions. simulated emergency or drill. emergency can be identified.

Element 13.4A.3 Observe safe working practices

Criteria 13.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hazardous areas and materials identified. The hazardous areas and materials can be identified.

Criteria 13.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety signs and symbols identified and understood. Common safety signs and symbols can be interpreted
correctly.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 737 of 1445
 MEM 13.4A A Work safely with molten metals/glass Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 13.4A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment used according to specifications and standard All equipment is used in accordance with specifications The correct use of equipment can be identified. The
operating procedures. and standard operating procedures. procedures for using the equipment can be given.

Criteria 13.4A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is maintained in good order. All equipment is maintained in good order in accordance The routine maintenance procedures for equipment used
with standard operating procedures. in conjunction with molten metal/glass can be identified.
The frequency with which routine maintenance should
be carried out can be identified.

Criteria 13.4A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hazardous items identified and removed from hot material Where appropriate, all hazardous items are removed from Items that are likely to be a hazard if encountered in a hot
area. hot material areas in accordance with standard operating material area can be identified. The procedures for
procedures. removing hazardous items from hot material areas can be
identified. Where appropriate, the person(s) to be
notified of hazardous items in a hot material area can be
identified.

Criteria 13.4A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Housekeeping duties performed according to standard Housekeeping duties are performed in accordance with The consequences of not maintaining a clean and safe
operating procedure to maintain a safe working standard operating procedures. working environment can be given.
environment.

Element 13.4A.4 Identify hazardous conditions operating in a heavy engineering environment

Criteria 13.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hazards identified and planning undertaken to maintain Where appropriate, hazardous conditions are identified The hazards associated with working in a heavy
safe work environment. and reported/actioned in accordance with standard engineering environment can be explained. All hazardous
operating procedures. The work environment is maintained areas and materials can be identified. The procedures for
free of hazards at all times. rectifying identified hazards can be given. The planning
necessary to maintain a safe work environment can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 738 of 1445
 MEM 13.4A A Work safely with molten metals/glass Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit may be applied in all workplaces in which there is molten metal or molten glass, for example, foundries, die casting operations, glass operations or molten glass etc. All
work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with working with molten and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
metal/glass or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 739 of 1445
MEM 13.5B A Manage occupational health and safety for a workplace or section of a workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.5B A Manage occupational health and safety for a workplace or section of a workplace
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 12
This unit covers the competencies required to assist in the development of OHS policy, understand and implement OHS principles for prevention of injury and disease
through progressive use of the hierarchy of control, perform safety audits of the workplace, and maintain accident/incident records and statistics.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.2A Undertake Occupational Health & Safety activities in
the workplace

Element 13.5B.1 Assist in development and implementation of OHS policy

Criteria 13.5B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discussions with consultative forums on OHS matters Records/minutes of discussions with consultative forums The procedures for initiating discussions with the
facilitated on OHS matters are kept Meetings with the relevant relevant consultative forums can be given The relevant
consultative forums to discuss OHS matters are scheduled consultative forums can be identified The frequency of
The individual participates appropriately in discussions to be held with the relevant consultative
consultation forum discussions forums can be identified
Criteria 13.5B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Healthy and safe work practices and procedures Appropriate records are kept for monitoring the The work practices and procedures developed in
developed effectiveness of work practices and procedures with conjunction with the relevant consultative forums can
respect to the safety of the working environment be identified The effect of those work practices and
procedures on the safety of the working environment
can be explained The procedures for monitoring the
success of the work practices and procedures developed
can be given The variables to be recorded during the
monitoring process can be identified The sources of
information on occupational health and safety issues
can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 740 of 1445
MEM 13.5B A Manage occupational health and safety for a workplace or section of a workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 13.5B.2 Understand and implement OHS principles of prevention of injury and disease through
progressive use of hierarchy of control of hazards
Criteria 13.5B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accident investigations conducted with view to Where appropriate, accidents are investigated in The procedures for conducting accident investigations
discovering cause accordance with standard operating procedures can be given The hierarchy of control of hazards can be
identified The reasons for progressively implementing
the hierarchy of control of hazards can be explained
Where appropriate, the likely causes of accidents
investigated can be identified

Element 13.5B.3 Perform safety audit of workplace in accordance with relevant regulations and codes of practice
Criteria 13.5B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Areas requiring hazard rectification identified The results of safety audits are obtained in accordance The hazards to be rectified can be identified
with work place procedures
Criteria 13.5B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preferred hazard control mechanisms in context of The principles of hazard control can be given The
good OHS principles identified mechanisms for controlling hazards can be identified
Criteria 13.5B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The need for expert advice to identify and control Where appropriate, expertise external to the workplace The areas of occupational health and safety for which
hazards identified is obtained to assist in the identification and control of the workplace lacks acknowledged expertise can be
workplace hazards identified The procedures for accessing expertise
external to the workplace can be given

Element 13.5B.4 Maintain accident records and statistics

Criteria 13.5B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accident/incident records maintained Accident and incident records are maintained in The procedures for recording accidents and incidents
accordance with standard operating procedures can be given
Criteria 13.5B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records analysed for trends or particular problem areas The accident and incident reports are analysed and any
identified trends or problem areas are identified The probable
causes of the trends or problem areas detected can be
explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 741 of 1445
MEM 13.5B A Manage occupational health and safety for a workplace or section of a workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to a person who requires the skill and knowledge to manage the Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) of a workplace or section of a workplace.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
disadvantage the candidate. Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the management of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
occupational health and safety in the workplace or other units - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 742 of 1445
MEM 13.6A A Monitor occupational health and safety factors for an enterprise or section of an enterprise Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.6A A Monitor occupational health and safety factors for an enterprise or section of an enterprise

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to carry out standard OHS measurements, evaluate data, maintain records and report hazards. The measurements would be
of a
routine type and data collected would typically relate to factors associated with temperature, noise (noise meter) and dust (draeger tubes).

Element 13.6A.1 Carry out standard OHS measurement

Criteria 13.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data collected using standard equipment in accordance The required measurements are accurately taken and The measurements to be taken and recorded can be
with manufacturer's specifications recorded in accordance with manufacturer's specifications identified The procedures for taking each type of
and standard operating procedures measurement can be given The tools, techniques and
equipment required to carry out the measurements can
be identified

Element 13.6A.2 Evaluate data

Criteria 13.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data from measurements taken evaluated to identify The OHS standards for each factor being measured can
non-conformance with OHS standards be identified Any variations between the data collected
and the appropriate OHS standard can be identified
Where appropriate, the probable causes of the variation
of the data collected from the OHS standard can be
explained

Element 13.6A.3 Maintain records

Criteria 13.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records are maintained in accordance with standard The records of the OHS factors monitored are The procedures for maintaining records of OHS factors
operating procedures maintained in accordance with standard operating measured can be given

Element 13.6A.4 Hazards reported

Criteria 13.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results requiring remedial action are reported to Where appropriate, hazards detected are reported in The procedures for reporting hazards detected can be
appropriate personnel using standard operating accordance with standard operating procedures given The authority to whom hazards are to be
procedures reported can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 743 of 1445
MEM 13.6A A Monitor occupational health and safety factors for an enterprise or section of an enterprise Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Measurements taken would be of a routine type. Where complex procedures or complex analysis are required, the services of an Occupational Health and Safety (OHS)
hygienist should be accessed. Data collected would typically relate to factors associated with temperature, noise (noise meter), dust (draeger tubes). This unit should not also be
selected where Unit 15.10B (Perform laboratory procedures) has been selected.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
disadvantage the candidate. Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the monitoring of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
occupational health and safety factors for the enterprise, or other - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 744 of 1445
 MEM 13.7A A Maintain water cooling towers and treatment systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.7A A Maintain water cooling towers and treatment systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 13.7A.1 Apply principles of Australian Standard 3666 or equivalent

Criteria 13.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Causes of corrosion, scale, algae and The causes of corrosion, scale and algae can be
treatment/prevention understood. explained. Appropriate methods of treating/preventing
occurrence of corrosion, scale and/or algae in water
cooling towers and treatment systems can be identified.

Criteria 13.7A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Psychometrics of cooling towers, legionella precautions The psychometrics of cooling tower operation can be
and AS3666 and/or other relevant regulations explained. The requirements of AS3666 and/or other
understood. relevant regulations pertaining to water cooling towers
and treatment systems can be identified. The precautions
to be taken to prevent contamination of the systems by
legionella bacteria can be explained.

Element 13.7A.2 Assess reticulation system

Criteria 13.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant water conditions assessed against The condition of the water in the cooling tower/treatment The procedures for testing the condition of the water in
specifications using standard procedures and test system is tested in accordance with standard operating the cooling tower and/or treatment system can be given.
equipment. procedures. The specifications of the water condition can be
identified. The test equipment and techniques required to
test the condition of the water can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 745 of 1445
 MEM 13.7A A Maintain water cooling towers and treatment systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 13.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition of water circulation system assessed and The results of the water condition tests are compared
appropriate action determined. with the water specifications. Variations of the test
results from specification can be identified. The
procedures to be followed when variations of water
condition from specification are detected can be given.

Criteria 13.7A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Regulating, filtering, conditioning/dosing, pumping The reticulation system components are tested for correct The correct operation/performance of the following
systems performance tested. operation/performance using appropriate equipment and reticulation system components can be described: -
techniques in accordance with standard operating regulators - filters - conditioners - pumps. The tests to be
procedures. applied to each of the system components to check their
performance can be identified. The procedures for
testing reticulation system components can be given.
The test equipment and techniques can be identified.

Element 13.7A.3 Measure water properties

Criteria 13.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment correctly used and applied. The water properties are tested using appropriate The water properties to be tested can be identified. The
techniques and equipment in accordance with standard procedure for testing water properties can be given. The
operating procedures. appropriate test equipment and techniques can be
identified.

Criteria 13.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant water properties accurately determined and The test results are determined and accurately recorded.
recorded.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 746 of 1445
 MEM 13.7A A Maintain water cooling towers and treatment systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 13.7A.4 Maintain reticulation/treatment systems

Criteria 13.7A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Water temperature control system correctly adjusted to The water temperature control system is adjusted to The water temperature specifications can be identified.
specification. specification in accordance with standard operating The procedures for adjusting the water temperature can
procedures. be given.

Criteria 13.7A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System flow adjusted to specification and sub-systems The water flow in the system is adjusted to specification The water flow specifications can be identified. The
correctly balanced. and sub-systems correctly balanced in accordance with procedures for adjusting water flow and balancing
standard operating procedures. sub-systems can be given.

Criteria 13.7A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults reported to appropriate personnel according to Where appropriate, system faults are reported to The procedures for reporting system faults can be given.
standard operating procedure. appropriate personnel in accordance with standard The person to whom faults are to be reported can be
operating procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 747 of 1445
 MEM 13.7A A Maintain water cooling towers and treatment systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit refers to maintenance activities associated with large water reticulation systems. Work is carried out within specifications of State Health regulations or equivalent, or
Australian Standard - AS3666.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance of water and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
cooling towers and treatment systems or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 748 of 1445
 MEM 13.13A A Work safely with ionizing radiation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 13.13A A Work safely with ionizing radiation

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Occupational health & safety Unit Weight 4

Element 13.13A.1 Identify the hazards and effects of ionizing radiation in the workplace
Criteria 13.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production of x-rays and gamma rays is explained in Properties of x-rays and gamma rays and principal
relation to radiographic testing activities. radioactive sources used in industrial radiography can be
explained.

Criteria 13.13A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Attenuation factors of ionizing radiation and the Attenuation factors can be explained.
biological effects on living tissue are outlined.

Criteria 13.13A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The biological effects of radiation are identified. Effects of radiation are recognised. The known biological effects of radiation can be
explained.

Element 13.13A.2 Apply radiation exposure limits and controls

Criteria 13.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
S. I. units of radiation are explained as per the National The different SI units of radiation can be explained,
Health and Medical Research Council/ statutory including:
requirements. - becquerel
- sievert
- gray

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 749 of 1445
 MEM 13.13A A Work safely with ionizing radiation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 13.13A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Exposure limits for personnel as laid down by the Exposure limits for personnel as laid down by the
radiation authorities in Australia are stated and adhered radiation authorities in Australia can be stated.
to.

Criteria 13.13A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Minimum exposure rates/distances are determined from Calculations are performed and charts interpreted The three exposure reduction factors can be explained,
calculations and charts. correctly. including:
- time
- distance
- shielding

Element 13.13A.3 Select and use radiation monitoring equipment

Criteria 13.13A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The tools and equipment necessary to monitor radiation Correct monitoring equipment is utilised. The procedures for establishing safe working barriers
are selected and used as required. can be explained.

Criteria 13.13A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Techniques and system verification checks necessary to Radiation is monitored effectively. Relevant techniques and checks can be explained.
monitor radiation are selected and applied.

Element 13.13A.4 Respond to emergency situations

Criteria 13.13A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Procedures for dealing with both x-ray and gamma-ray Emergency response procedures are carried correctly and Emergency procedures can be explained. Emergency
emergency situations are demonstrated. in a logical sequence. situations, causes and appropriate responses can be
fully explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 750 of 1445
 MEM 13.13A A Work safely with ionizing radiation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit describes the underpinning safety knowledge and skills required that must be applied when working with ionizing radiation in open or closed sites; on fabrications,
structures and components across a wide range of industries. It is a pre-requisite to undertaking any other radiographic competency standards unit. The work can relate to
scheduled and un-scheduled maintenance activities, using general tools, specific radiographic testing equipment as specified in maintenance documentation, testing procedures or
operators instructions.
All testing must be completed with particular attention to personal and OH&S regulations. Certification against Australian Standards may be achieved where assessment in this
unit of competency is carried out in conjunction with an examining authority as described in ISO 9712. Materials and chemicals, which are subject to codes and regulations, for
example, chemicals, explosives, solvents, dangerous materials, acids, or noxious waste products safe work habits must be stored and used in accordance with safe work practices.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or through a The candidate will be provided with:-
combination of both on and off the job. An individual working alone · all tools, equipment, materials and documentation required.
or as part of a team would demonstrate the competencies covered in
this unit. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the The candidate will be permitted access to the following documents: -
candidate. · any relevant workplace procedures;
· any relevant product and manufacturing specifications;
· any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials.

The candidate will be required to:

· orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor about
processes, events or tasks being undertaken;
· identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence, where
appropriate;
· present evidence of any off-job training related to this unit
· perform the tasks within the time frames established between the candidates
supervisor/instructor and the assessor, prior to the assessment;

Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and

consistently perform all elements of this unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge.
Activities should closely simulate a workplace environment and conditions due to the critical
nature of this work.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 751 of 1445
 MEM 13.13A A Work safely with ionizing radiation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Critical aspects Special notes
The candidate should demonstrate sufficient underpinning knowledge During assessment the individual will:
of: · demonstrate safe working practices at all times;
· OH&S requirements · communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
· metallurgy associated with the level of application in this unit and efficient working environment;
· take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with other units · plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate;
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, · perform all tasks to specifications and use accepted NDT techniques, practices, processes
recording and reporting associated with non-destructive testing in and workplace procedures;
accordance with relevant standards and procedures, or other units · tasks will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace activities.
requiring the exercise of skills and knowledge covered in this unit.
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have
been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 752 of 1445
 MEM 14.1B A Schedule material deliveries Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 14.1B A Schedule material deliveries

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Planning Unit Weight 8
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards

Element 14.1B.1 Identify material requirements

Criteria 14.1B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials required are identified from appropriate The appropriate documentation for a given product is The material type(s) and quality required can be
documentation including type and quality. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. identified.

Criteria 14.1B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quantities required are estimated in accordance with The material requirements and specifications can be
standard operating procedures. identified. The procedures for estimating quantities can
be given. The quantities of material required are
estimated in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Element 14.1B.2 Schedule material delivery

Criteria 14.1B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Delivery requirements and dates are determined from Material deliveries are scheduled in accordance with the The material ordering/requisitioning procedures can be
production plans, or job sequencing requirements. requirements of the job/process/production targets and identified. The material delivery requirements can be
standard operating procedures. identified. The effects of non-availability of materials on
production plans and/or job sequencing can be
explained. The procedures for determining lead times for
material supply can be given. The procedures for
determining material stock levels can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 753 of 1445
 MEM 14.1B A Schedule material deliveries Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 14.1B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material supply followed up and problems reported Material supply orders/requisitions are followed up in The material supply procedures can be given. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. Where persons responsible for material supply can be identified.
appropriate, problems with material supply are reported in The persons to whom material supply problems are to be
accordance with standard operating procedures. reported can be identified.

Criteria 14.1B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material orders are processed in accordance with Material orders are processed in accordance with standard The procedures for requisitioning/ ordering materials can
established organisational practice and procedures. operating procedures. be given. The consequences of not following
organisational procedures for material supply can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 754 of 1445
 MEM 14.1B A Schedule material deliveries Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the estimating, planning, scheduling of material delivery requirements for production process purposes so that materials are available in quantities and
specifications required. Scheduling is undertaken in accordance with established organisational practices and procedures, based on familiar processes. If scheduling is based on
engineering drawings and supporting engineering data, appropriate skill units should be accessed. This unit is not intended to be used by personnel carrying out maintenance and
installation.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the scheduling of material and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
deliveries or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 755 of 1445
 MEM 14.2B A Basic process planning Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 14.2B A Basic process planning

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Planning Unit Weight 8
Notes - Appropriate technical units relating to the process being planned are also required.

Element 14.2B.1 Review process specifications

Criteria 14.2B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Supporting engineering and production data is examined, Where appropriate, relevant engineering and production The role of engineering and production data in process
where required. data is obtained in accordance with work place planning can be explained.
procedures.

Criteria 14.2B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The production processes to be used are determined. The production processes to be used can be identified.

Criteria 14.2B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications are obtained and examined. All relevant job instructions, drawings, specifications and The specifications of the product to be produced can be
procedures are obtained in accordance with workplace given.
procedures.

Element 14.2B.2 Determine production sequence

Criteria 14.2B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Steps required for the process are identified and flow Where appropriate, the production process is represented The individual steps in the production process can be
charts produced where required. by a flow chart in accordance with workplace procedures. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen steps
and sequence of operations can be explained. The
reasons for producing flow charts of production
processes can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 756 of 1445
 MEM 14.2B A Basic process planning Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 14.2B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material and parts lists are prepared. Material and parts lists are prepared for the production The procedures for preparing material and parts lists can
process in accordance with standard operating be given.
procedures.
Criteria 14.2B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling and/or equipment requirements are documented. Tooling and/or equipment requirements are documented in The procedures for documenting tooling and equipment
accordance with standard operating procedures. requirements can be given.

Criteria 14.2B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Quality assurance steps and specifications are identified. Where appropriate, the quality assurance steps are The quality assurance procedures can be given. The
included in the process flow chart in accordance with specifications of the product can be identified. The
workplace procedures. quality assurance steps in the production process can be
identified.

Criteria 14.2B.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process steps are documented and clearly represented. The process steps are clearly documented in accordance The procedures for documenting process plans can be
with standard operating procedures. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 757 of 1445
 MEM 14.2B A Basic process planning Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Applies to one of a range of processes in manufacturing eg: machining, pressing, assembly. Applies to a stage of the overall production process. Does not apply to interfacing
between processes. Work for the process element is planned over the specified timeframe taking into account resources available and required. Process plan establishes detailed
steps required, and milestones against which progress can be checked. Plan is developed in accordance with accepted organisation practice and procedures. If planning is based on
engineering drawings and supporting engineering data, appropriate skills units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with process planning or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 758 of 1445
 MEM 14.3B A Undertake basic production scheduling Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 14.3B A Undertake basic production scheduling

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Planning Unit Weight 8
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards. Appropriate technical units relating to the production/manufacturing process
also required.

Element 14.3B.1 Identify production requirements and capacities

Criteria 14.3B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering production data is identified. All relevant production data is obtained in accordance The source of engineering production data can be
with work place procedures. identified.

Criteria 14.3B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inventory capacities and requirements are identified. The inventory capacity can be identified. The inventory
requirements can be identified. The persons responsible
for determining inventory levels can be identified.

Criteria 14.3B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Procurement and supply requirements and constraints are The materials required to produce the given product can
identified. be identified. The material supply procedures can be
given. The material supply lead times can be identified.
The effect of material supply lead times on production
scheduling can be explained.

Criteria 14.3B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production capacity and constraints are identified. The production capacity for given products can be
identified. The factors affecting production capacity can
be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 759 of 1445
 MEM 14.3B A Undertake basic production scheduling Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 14.3B.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Standard times are identified. The sources of information on standard times can be
identified. The standard times for given manufacturing
processes can be identified.

Element 14.3B.2 Prepare schedule for production of a component/part

Criteria 14.3B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production of component is scheduled in accordance The production schedule for given component(s) is The procedures for scheduling production can be given.
with production, inventory, procurements, time produced in accordance with standard operating The factors to be considered when scheduling
constraints, supply capacities and requirements. procedures. production and their impact on the schedule produced
can be explained. The persons to be consulted during the
scheduling process can be identified. The procedures
for revising production schedules to take account of
unforeseen occurrences can be given.

Criteria 14.3B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Schedule is documented in accordance with accepted The production schedule is documented in accordance The procedures for documenting production schedules
organisation procedures. with standard operating procedures. can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 760 of 1445
 MEM 14.3B A Undertake basic production scheduling Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Applies to the scheduling of the manufacture of a single component; the scheduling of a single assembly function; or for a single small production work unit or production cell, or
work station or work unit; or a single production process where there are only a small number of constraints or variables. The scheduling applies to only a part of the overall
production process.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with production scheduling or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 761 of 1445
 MEM 15.1A A Perform basic statistical quality control Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.1A A Perform basic statistical quality control

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Quality Unit Weight 2

Element 15.1A.1 Take samples

Criteria 15.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Difference between population and sample understood The appropriate sampling scheme is applied to the given The difference between population and sample can be
and various sampling schemes applied in accordance production process in accordance with standard operating explained. A variety of sampling schemes and their
with standard operating procedures. procedures. application can be given. The sampling scheme to be
applied to a given situation can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen sampling scheme can be
given. The sampling procedures to be followed can be
given.

Element 15.1A.2 Apply statistical process to monitor production

Criteria 15.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Concept of variation in terms of average and spread Data produced from samples taken in conformance to The concept of variation can be explained in terms of
understood. Data used to produce relevant statistical sampling procedures is obtained in accordance with average and spread. The procedures for obtaining
information eg: average and range and the plotting of standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, tally, sampling data can be given. The average and range of
charts such as tally, run or control charts. run or control charts are produced from sampling data. given sampling data can be determined. The types of
charts that can be produced to assist in the monitoring of
products can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 762 of 1445
 MEM 15.1A A Perform basic statistical quality control Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data interpreted accurately and information presented to Information identified from sampling data is reported to the The information contained in given sampling data can be
appropriate authority utilising standard operating appropriate authority in accordance with standard interpreted accurately. The procedures for reporting
procedure. operating procedures. information obtained from sampling data can be given.
The person to whom information obtained from sampling
data is to be reported can be identified.

Range statement
This unit is intended to apply to the collation and interpretation of statistical data in the context of statistical quality control, for example, tally, run or control charts. When the
production and interpretation of charts and graphs not dependent on knowledge and understanding of the implications for quality are required, Unit 2.8C10 (Perform computations)
should be accessed. Uncontrolled variations are reported to appropriate authority.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with statistical quality control or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 763 of 1445
 MEM 15.3A A Use improvement processes in team activities Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.3A A Use improvement processes in team activities

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Quality Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.3C11 Operate in a work based team environment

Element 15.3A.1 Identify areas for improvement and/or solve problems

Criteria 15.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Participate in team selection of improvement tools and The individual participates in the team's selection of the Improvement tools and methods that may be applied to
methods appropriate to the situation. improvement tools and methods to be used. the situation/ problem can be identified. A preferred
improvement tool and/or method can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the preferred improvement tool
and/or method can be explained.

Criteria 15.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Working in teams, process improvement tools are used to The process improvement tools are used by the team to The procedures to be followed when using process
identify improvements and/or solve problems. identify improvements and/or solve problems. improvement tools in the team environment can be
explained. The individual's role in identifying
improvements and/or solving problems can be identified.

Element 15.3A.2 Implement improvement strategy

Criteria 15.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Working in teams, improvement strategies are The individual participates in the implementation of The improvement strategies to be implemented can be
implemented as required in accordance with standard improvement strategies in accordance with standard identified. The reasons for implementing the
operating procedures. operating procedures. improvement strategies can be explained. The procedures
for implementing the improvement strategies can be
given. The individual's role in implementing the
improvement strategies can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 764 of 1445
 MEM 15.3A A Use improvement processes in team activities Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
In conjunction with work team further action Where appropriate, further action is recommended in Where appropriate, further action to be taken by the
recommended where required using standard operating accordance with standard operating procedures. individual and/or the work team can be identified. The
procedure. procedures for initiating further action can be identified.

Element 15.3A.3 Monitor implementation of improvement

Criteria 15.3A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performance monitored for change utilising feedback The appropriate feedback data is collected and collated in The data necessary to measure the results of the
data. accordance with standard operating procedures. implementation of the improvement strategy can be
identified. The procedures for collecting and collating
feedback data can be identified. The desired performance
can be identified. Any discrepancies between desired
and actual performance can be identified. The
performance trends can be identified from the data
collected.

Element 15.3A.4 Evaluate improvement

Criteria 15.3A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Analytical tools used to evaluate improvement as Where appropriate, analytical tools are used to evaluate The analytical tools to be used to evaluate the
required. the improvement strategy implemented in accordance with improvement strategy implemented can be identified. The
standard operating procedures. procedures for evaluating improvement can be given.

Criteria 15.3A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
In conjunction with work team further action Where appropriate, further action is recommended in Where appropriate, further action to be taken by the
recommended where required using standard operating accordance with standard operating procedures. individual and/or the work team can be identified. The
procedure. procedures for initiating further action can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 765 of 1445
 MEM 15.3A A Use improvement processes in team activities Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the skills required for quality circle participation using problem solving techniques. Techniques should include flow charts, cause and effect diagrams, pareto
charts, histograms, run charts and graphs, control charts, scattergrams etc. as required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working as part required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
of a team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the use of improvement and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
processes or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 766 of 1445
 MEM 15.4A A Perform inspection (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.4A A Perform inspection (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Quality Unit Weight 2

Element 15.4A.1 Inspect products

Criteria 15.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Products tested for conformance to specifications in Products are tested for conformance to specifications in The product specifications can be identified. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. accordance with work site procedures. appropriate measurements/tests to check conformance to
specifications can be identified.

Element 15.4A.2 Keep records

Criteria 15.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test status identification is made on conforming and Inspection results are recorded accurately in accordance The data to be recorded and the frequency of recording
non-conforming products and records accurately kept with work site procedures. Individuals producing required can be identified. The consequences of not
using standard operating procedures. parts/products informed of part/product keeping accurate records can be given.
conformance/non-conformance to specification in
accordance with work site procedures.

Element 15.4A.3 Provide feedback

Criteria 15.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Products tested/inspected/measured after rework or Reworked/repaired products are tested for conformance to The non-conformances of a product that can be removed
repair. specification in accordance with work site procedures. by rework/repair can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 767 of 1445
 MEM 15.4A A Perform inspection (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Deficiencies or deviations reported to standard operating Inspection results are recorded accurately in accordance The data to be recorded with respect to
procedures. with work site procedures. Individual reworking/repairing reworked/repaired products can be identified.
part informed of conformance/non-conformance of
reworked/repaired product to specification in accordance
with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 768 of 1445
 MEM 15.4A A Perform inspection (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to those whose duties include the basic inspection of completed or partly completed products produced by others. Inspection is carried out according to site
quality plan or specifications, and applies to a range of manufacturing enterprises. Uses a range of measuring equipment/devices/tools. Location and frequency of checks/tests and
measurements undertaken to standard operating procedures. In general, verification should be made as close as possible to the point of production of the feature or characteristic.
Inspection may involve "first piece inspection", fixed interval, sample etc. Depending on the inspection process other technical units may need to be accessed, for example,
appropriate measurement units. This unit is not intended to be applied to maintenance personnel carrying out their day-to-day activities, for example, fault finding, remedial and
checking activities, these skills are covered by other units, eg. Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed in the workplace. The competencies The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
covered by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The
disadvantage the candidate. candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer
questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection
of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job
training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently
and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the inspection process, or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 769 of 1445
 MEM 15.5A A Perform inspection (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.5A A Perform inspection (advanced)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Quality Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
15.4A Perform inspection (basic)

Element 15.5A.1 Select inspection/test procedures

Criteria 15.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate methods of inspection selected and Where appropriate, the relevant inspection method for the A range of inspection methods and their application can
implemented. product/process is implemented in accordance with be identified. The appropriate inspection method for the
standard operating procedures. process/product can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen inspection method can be
explained. The procedures for implementing inspection
methods can be identified.

Criteria 15.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection/test procedures monitored to ensure desired The inspection/test procedures are monitored in The desired/target outcomes of the inspection/test
outcomes. accordance with standard operating procedures to ensure procedures can be identified. The actual outcomes of the
desired outcomes are achieved. inspection/test procedures can be identified. Any
discrepancies/trends detected from the inspection/test
results can be identified. The reasons for any
discrepancies/ trends detected can be explained. The
procedures for monitoring inspection/test procedures
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 770 of 1445
 MEM 15.5A A Perform inspection (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.5A.2 Control inspection/test environment and equipment

Criteria 15.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Environmental conditions monitored to ensure reliability Environmental conditions are monitored in accordance The effects of environmental conditions on test
of tests and results. with standard operating procedures. equipment and the results obtained can be explained.
The procedures for monitoring environmental conditions
can be identified. The acceptable range of variations to
environmental conditions can be identified.

Criteria 15.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/instruments checked for correct calibration. The calibration of measuring equipment is checked for The correct operation of the measuring equipment can be
conformance to specifications using appropriate identified. The specifications of the measuring
techniques in accordance with standard operating equipment can be identified. The procedures for
procedures and all relevant codes, standards and checking the calibration of the measuring equipment can
legislative/regulatory requirements. be given. Any codes, standards, legislative or regulatory
requirements applicable to the measuring equipment
and/or calibration can be identified.

Criteria 15.5A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration of equipment/instruments is initiated or Where appropriate, the calibration of measuring equipment Where appropriate, the procedures for initiating the
undertaken against appropriate standard as required. is initiated in accordance with standard operating calibration of measuring equipment can be identified.
procedures. Where appropriate, the measuring equipment Where appropriate the physical standard against which
is calibrated against the appropriate standard in the measuring equipment is to be calibrated can be
accordance with standard operating procedures and all identified. Where appropriate, the procedures for
relevant codes, standards and legislative, regulatory calibrating the measuring instrument can be given.
requirements. Where appropriate, the tools and equipment required to
calibrate the measuring equipment can be identified.

Criteria 15.5A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration records maintained to standard operating Calibration records are maintained in accordance with The procedures for recording calibration details can be
procedure. standard operating procedures. identified. The reasons for keeping calibration records
can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 771 of 1445
 MEM 15.5A A Perform inspection (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.5A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
If equipment/instruments are found to be out of Where appropriate, out of calibration equipment is The procedures to be followed when measuring
calibration validity of previous results checked and detected and reported to the appropriate authority in equipment is found to be out of calibration can be
reported to standard operating procedure. accordance with standard operating procedures. Where identified. The reasons for checking results obtained
appropriate, the results obtained with out of calibration with out of calibration measuring equipment can be
measuring equipment are checked for validity in explained. The authority to whom out of calibration
accordance with standard operating procedures. measuring equipment is to be reported can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 772 of 1445
 MEM 15.5A A Perform inspection (advanced) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to a range of manufacturing enterprise. Inspection involves working autonomously and taking responsibility for overseeing inspection processes and
environment. Uses a wide range of equipment/instruments and takes responsibility for the reliability of inspection results to ensure conformance to specifications. This unit is not
intended to be applied to maintenance personnel carrying out their day-to-day activities, for example, fault finding, remedial and checking activities, these skills are covered by other
units, eg Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the inspection process or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 773 of 1445
 MEM 15.7B A Conduct product and/or process capability studies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.7B A Conduct product and/or process capability studies

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations 2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple
statistical computations
15.1A Perform basic statistical quality control 15.8B Perform advanced statistical quality control

Element 15.7B.1 Conduct process capability studies

Criteria 15.7B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Procedure for conducting capability study selected. The process to be studied can be identified. The
procedure for conducting the process capability study
can be given. The reasons for selecting the chosen
procedure can be explained.

Criteria 15.7B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instructions for personnel conducting trial run prepared.

Criteria 15.7B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data analysed and the process capability calculated All relevant data is accurately collected and collated The data is used to calculate the process capability The
procedures for calculating process capability can be
given

Criteria 15.7B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Possible number of product defects from a particular The procedures for estimating the possible number of
process estimated product defects can be given The possible number of
product defects for given situations can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 774 of 1445
 MEM 15.7B A Conduct product and/or process capability studies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.7B.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reports listing various options from process capability Reports listing the various options identified from the The various options for improving the process can be
studies prepared process capability study are prepared in accordance with identified The benefits of each option can be explained
workplace procedures

Element 15.7B.2 Set control limits

Criteria 15.7B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Optimum target mean to suit process capability The procedures for determining the optimum target mean
determined. can be given. The optimum target mean can be identified.

Criteria 15.7B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control limits for subgroup average, range and standard The procedures for setting control limits can be given.
deviation calculated. The control limits can be calculated.

Criteria 15.7B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Warning limits for subgroup average, range and standard The procedures for setting warning limits can be given.
deviation calculated. The warning limits can be calculated.

Criteria 15.7B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Course of action resulting from out of control situation The concept of "out of control" situations can be
and documented to standard operating procedure. explained. The action to be taken when an "out of
control" situation is detected can be identified. The
procedures for documenting "out of control" situations
can be given.

Criteria 15.7B.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design specifications based on an analysis of data Process design specifications can be determined from
recommended. process capability data.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 775 of 1445
 MEM 15.7B A Conduct product and/or process capability studies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.7B.3 Select sampling plans

Criteria 15.7B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Acceptable quality level determined. The acceptable level of quality can be identified.

Criteria 15.7B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate sampling plan to suit production schedule A variety of sampling plans and their application can be
selected and acceptable quality limits determined, taking given. The sampling plan to be applied to a given
into account specified producer and consumer risks. situation can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen plan can be given. The acceptable quality limits
can be identified. The risks associated with identifying
acceptable quality limits for the producer and customer
can be explained.

Criteria 15.7B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sampling plan documented including implementation The sampling plan and implementation strategy are The procedures for documenting sampling plans can be
strategy. documented in accordance with standard operating given. The procedures for implementing sampling plans
procedures. can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 776 of 1445
 MEM 15.7B A Conduct product and/or process capability studies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit includes the analysis of data from a production section or processes using appropriate statistical techniques. Consultation may be required with production or process
personnel and is undertaken within the enterprise's total quality plan.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the conduct of product or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process capability studies or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 777 of 1445
 MEM 15.8B A Perform advanced statistical quality control Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.8B A Perform advanced statistical quality control

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations 2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple
statistical computations
15.1A Perform basic statistical quality control

Element 15.8B.1 Construct control charts

Criteria 15.8B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control charts/proformas including the determination of Control charts, including control limits are constructed The procedures for constructing control charts and
control limits from sample data completed. from sample data in accordance with standard operating control limits can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 15.8B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
State of controlled and uncontrolled variables The state of controlled and uncontrolled variables can be
understood and identified. identified from given data.

Criteria 15.8B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Uses 1, 2 and 3 sigma limits to measure and describe Population dispersion can be described in terms of 1, 2
population dispersion. and 3 sigma limits. The population dispersion for given
data can be calculated in terms of 1, 2 and 3 sigma limits.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 778 of 1445
 MEM 15.8B A Perform advanced statistical quality control Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit involves the understanding of statistical processes and the application of these processes to the maintenance and improvement of a quality system.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with statistical quality control or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 779 of 1445
 MEM 15.10B A Perform laboratory procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.10B A Perform laboratory procedures

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 8

Element 15.10B.1 Work under laboratory conditions

Criteria 15.10B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conduct independent tests under controlled conditions. All relevant drawings, circuits, specifications, instructions The tests to be undertaken can be identified. The
and data are obtained in accordance with standard conditions under which the tests are to be undertaken
operating procedures. Tests are conducted independently can be identified. The testing procedures to be followed
under controlled conditions in accordance with standard are established. The reasons for conducting tests under
operating procedures. controlled conditions can be explained. The need for
tests to be conducted independently can be explained.

Element 15.10B.2 Perform calibration

Criteria 15.10B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment verified and calibrated to meet agreed quality The measuring equipment is checked for correct The quality standards against which the measuring
standards. calibration against the agreed quality standards in equipment is to be calibrated can be identified. The
accordance with standard operating procedures and the correct operation of the measuring equipment can be
relevant codes, standards, legislative and regulatory identified. The specifications of the measuring equipment
requirements. Where appropriate, the measuring can be identified. The tools and equipment required to
equipment is calibrated in accordance with standard check the calibration of the measuring equipment can be
operating procedures and relevant codes, standards, identified. The procedures for checking the calibration of
legislative and regulatory requirements. the measuring equipment can be given. Any codes,
standards, legislative or regulatory requirements
applicable to the measuring equipment and/or calibration
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 780 of 1445
 MEM 15.10B A Perform laboratory procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.10B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration status safeguarded against unauthorised The calibration status of the equipment is safeguarded The procedures for preventing unauthorised adjustment
adjustment of equipment. against unauthorised adjustment in accordance with of equipment can be identified. The reasons for
standard operating procedures. protecting equipment against unauthorised adjustment
can be explained.

Criteria 15.10B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accurate records kept for reference purposes. Accurate records of measuring equipment calibrated are The records to be kept with respect to the calibration of
kept and maintained in accordance with standard measuring equipment can be identified. The reasons for
operating procedures. keeping accurate calibration records can be explained.

Criteria 15.10B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment periodically recalled for adjustment, Test equipment is recalled for adjustment, repair and The procedures for recalling test equipment for
repair and re-calibration. re-calibration in accordance with standard operating adjustment, repair and re-calibration can be identified.
procedures. The frequency of test equipment recall can be identified.
The reasons for recalling test equipment can be
explained.

Criteria 15.10B.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Documentary evidence covering identification of All relevant records are completed and maintained in All relevant documentation relating to the
equipment, frequency of re-calibration, calibration status accordance with standard operating procedures. All calibration/re-calibration of test equipment can be
and procedures for recall, handling and storage, relevant documented procedures are maintained in identified. The procedures for completing the relevant
adjustment, repair, calibration, installation and use accordance with standard operating procedures. documentation can be identified. The procedures for the
maintained. recall, handling, storage, adjustment, repair, installation
and use of test equipment can be identified.

Criteria 15.10B.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration to reference standards of known accuracy Reference standards or specific criteria are used as the Sources of reference standards can be described, as well
such as national or international standards traced, or basis for calibration. as procedures to be used in the absence of reference
where these do not exist, to specifically developed standards.
criteria.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 781 of 1445
 MEM 15.10B A Perform laboratory procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.10B.3 Write reports

Criteria 15.10B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results documented and reports provided as required. All test results are documented in accordance with The reports to be prepared/provided with respect to the
standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, test equipment being tested can be identified. The
reports are prepared/provided on the tests carried out on procedures for preparing/ providing reports on tests
the test equipment in accordance with standard operating carried out on test equipment can be identified.
procedures.

Element 15.10B.4 Verify quality status

Criteria 15.10B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Independent inspections, tests and audits conducted Where appropriate, inspections, tests and audits are The auditing processes to be applied to testing
Design and servicing process monitored. conducted in accordance with standard operating procedures can be identified. The use of information from
procedures. Where appropriate, the results of inspections, the inspections, tests and audits conducted in the
tests and audits are used to inform the design and development of design and servicing of
servicing process. products/equipment can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 782 of 1445
 MEM 15.10B A Perform laboratory procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit would apply to an individual working autonomously and following scientific procedures under controlled conditions. A range of sophisticated equipment used to provide
independent feedback on quality processes and procedures. All work would be carried out to predetermined standard operating procedures. This unit would be taken in
conjunction with appropriate technical units.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the performance of laboratory and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
procedures or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 783 of 1445
 MEM 15.11B A Exercise external quality assurance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.11B A Exercise external quality assurance

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
15.4A Perform inspection (basic) 15.5A Perform inspection (advanced)

Element 15.11B.1 Liaise with external suppliers

Criteria 15.11B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The exact quality requirements communicated to The exact quality requirements are communicated to the The exact quality requirements of the product/material to
suppliers. supplier in accordance with standard operating be supplied can be identified. The procedures to be
procedures. followed to ensure the supplier understands the quality
requirements can be given.

Criteria 15.11B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Agreed quality assurance system negotiated. The agreed quality assurance system is negotiated with The requirements of a quality assurance system to
the supplier in accordance with standard operating ensure the supplied product/material conforms to the
procedures. quality requirements can be given. The procedures for
negotiating agreements with suppliers can be given.

Criteria 15.11B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Verification method and systems and procedures for The procedures for verifying that the agreed quality
dispute settlement established and agreed. assurance system is being utilised by the supplier can be
given. The procedures for dispute resolution can be
given.

Criteria 15.11B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Recording system of procured products or services An appropriate system for recording and tracing products The procedures for recording procured products or
which ensures traceability established. or services procured is implemented in accordance with services can be given. The means of tracing procured
standard operating procedures. products or services can be identified. The reasons for
tracing procured products or services can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 784 of 1445
 MEM 15.11B A Exercise external quality assurance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.11B.2 Check for conformance to specifications

Criteria 15.11B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The requirements of all relevant documentation including All relevant drawings, specifications, documentation etc. The specifications of the product/material to be supplied
contract specifications, drawings and purchase orders are obtained in accordance with work place procedures. or service to be provided can be identified.
obtained and understood.

Criteria 15.11B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The conformance of the procured product or service to all The product/material or service provided is checked for Any variations from documented
of the documented requirements is established. conformance to documented requirements/specifications. requirements/specifications can be identified.

Element 15.11B.3 Assess external suppliers

Criteria 15.11B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assessment and evaluation of suppliers' capability Suppliers' capability to provide the required The procedures for assessing/ evaluating a supplier's
and/or quality system conducted. product/material or service is assessed in accordance with capability to supply the required product/material or
standard operating procedures. Suppliers' quality systems service can be given. The procedures for evaluating a
are evaluated in accordance with standard operating supplier's quality system can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 15.11B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Suppliers' goods or services evaluated. Suppliers' goods or services are evaluated in accordance The procedures for evaluating a supplier's goods or
with standard operating procedures. services can be given. Any equipment and techniques
required to carry out the evaluation procedures can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 785 of 1445
 MEM 15.11B A Exercise external quality assurance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This standard is applied to a wide range of supplier enterprises so that purchased supplies meet quality standards and that adequate documents are prepared and maintained to
standard operating procedures.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the exercise of external and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
quality assurance or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 786 of 1445
 MEM 15.12B A Maintain/supervise application of quality procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.12B A Maintain/supervise application of quality procedures

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 4

Element 15.12B.1 Improve quality system

Criteria 15.12B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications interpreted to meet customer needs The specifications of the product or service to be provided The specifications to be achieved in providing the
(internal and external). are obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. service or producing the product can be identified. The
team's supplier(s) and customer(s) can be identified. The
possible effects of supplying products and/or services to
customers that do not comply with specifications can be
explained.

Criteria 15.12B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Leadership role as a supplier in ensuring quality within a The products and/or services supplied to the team's The procedures to be followed in producing the product
customer chain is taken. customer(s) conform to specifications at all times. and/or supplying the service can be given. The checks to
be undertaken to ensure the product/service complies
with specifications can be identified. The personnel
responsible for the quality of the product/service
provided can be identified. The actions to be taken when
a non-conformance to specifications is detected can be
identified. The reasons for taking those actions can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 787 of 1445
 MEM 15.12B A Maintain/supervise application of quality procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.12B.2 Collect and summarise data

Criteria 15.12B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data recorded and interpreted accurately in accordance All data collected is accurately recorded in accordance The procedures for recording data collected can be
with standard operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. given. The possible trends that can be identified from the
collected data can be identified. The actual trends
indicated by given samples of data can be correctly
identified.

Criteria 15.12B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data is used to produce relevant statistical information Where appropriate, relevant statistical information is The reasons for collecting data can be given. The
eg: average and range or the production of charts such as correctly calculated from the collected data. Where statistical information to be calculated can be identified.
tally, run or control charts. appropriate, tally, run and control charts are produced The use of statistics in interpreting production data can
from the collected data. be explained. The functions of tally, run or control charts
in representing production data can be given. The trends
indicated by the statistical information calculated and/or
the charts produced can be correctly identified. The
action to be taken in response to any trends identified
can be stated. The reasons for taking the action
proposed can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 788 of 1445
 MEM 15.12B A Maintain/supervise application of quality procedures Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Standards are applicable to the supervision or maintenance of a quality improvement system either individually or in a team situation. The definition of customer is wide and applies
to the next person or organisation receiving the product or service.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to:
- Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by an assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the supervision and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
maintenance of the application of quality procedures or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisities accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 789 of 1445
 MEM 15.15A A Examine trading practices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.15A A Examine trading practices

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Quality Unit Weight 5
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
12.1A Use comparison and basic measuring devices 16.2A Participate in formal interviews and negotiations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 16.4A Perform internal/external customer service

Element 15.15A.1 Explain the requirements of Trade Measurement legislation relating to trading practices
Criteria 15.15A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Legislation requirements that apply to trading practices Relevant sections of the legislation relating to trading The term “trading practices” is defined. Relevant
are explained. practices are identified and explained. sections of legislation across a range of trading
environments can be applied. The range of trading
environments is understood and can be described.

Criteria 15.15A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Policy guidelines that apply to trading practices are Relevant organisational policy and procedures can be Relevant policy and procedures across a range of trading
explained. identified and applied in regard to trading practices. environments can be applied.

Element 15.15A.2 Inspect trading practices for compliance

Criteria 15.15A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trading practice methods employed on premises are Methods utilised for advertising and the sale of goods Trading practices relevant to a range of business types
examined for compliance with legislative requirements employed on the premises are examined for compliance are identified
with legislative requirements The manner in which a
measuring instrument is used on the premises is examined
for compliance

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 790 of 1445
 MEM 15.15A A Examine trading practices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.15A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Incidents of non-compliance are identified and, where Incidents of non-compliance in a range of trading Processes for evidence collection are explained
appropriate, activities are undertaken to prove the breach environments can be identified Action to be undertaken is Processes for evidence handling are explained
of legislation determined by the organisation’s enforcement policy
Sufficient and relevant evidence is gathered to prove a
breach

Criteria 15.15A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results of inspection are documented All results of the inspection are recorded accurately Any specific reporting procedures can be identified and
explained

Element 15.15A.3 Finalise inspection and take appropriate action

Criteria 15.15A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trading practice information relevant to the inspection is The trader is advised of the results of the inspection The The trader’s concerns are responded to satisfactorily
communicated to the trader trader’s enquiries and concerns are discussed Legislative The trader has been given relevant advice
requirements and obligations are explained to the trader
where appropriate The trader is advised of reporting
procedures and possible outcomes for any breaches
detected The trader is provided with relevant information
brochures

Criteria 15.15A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine and apply approved procedures to remedy Notices are completed in accordance with organisational Wording of notices issued is accurate Legislative
non-compliance guidelines Follow-up activities are planned as required requirements and obligations for the issuing of notices
are understood Organisation’s policy guidelines for
return visits are understood and can be explained

Criteria 15.15A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complete inspection documentation in accordance with All results of the inspection are recorded accurately in the Any specific reporting procedures can be identified and
organisational procedures organisation’s information files All breach reports are explained
completed in accordance with organisational guidelines
Recommendations are clear and accurate

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 791 of 1445
 MEM 15.15A A Examine trading practices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole.

Range Name Description

Legislation and policies Enabling legislation, organisational procedures and policies, workplace, health & safety, enforcement policies
Trading practices Methods of sale of goods, advertising, use of measuring instrument, position of measuring instruments, misrepresentations, environmental factors, suitability of
instrument, over pricing, incorrect measurement

Activities used to prove a Trial purchases, observation/surveillance, photographs, seizure of documentations, articles, measuring instruments, testing the measuring instruments
breach of legislation

Marketplace intelligence Complaints, other state jurisdiction, organisational directives, product history, trader history, individual's observation

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
part of a team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) is required.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the conduct of routine field inspections, inspecting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
pre-packed articles, investigating consumer complaints, using and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
maintaining equipment and standards, performing plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
verification/certification or in-service inspection and the safety, accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
associated with examining trading practices, or other units requiring Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 792 of 1445
 MEM 15.15A A Examine trading practices Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have

been satisfied.

The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements and their

related performance criteria. Compliance with inspection procedures,
audit procedures, test procedures and legislative requirements.
Assessment to be conducted over time across a range of workplace
scenarios; continuous learning/assessment (re-qualification) required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 793 of 1445
 MEM 15.16A A Inspect pre-packed articles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.16A A Inspect pre-packed articles

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Quality Unit Weight 8
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
12.1A Use comparison and basic measuring devices 16.2A Participate in formal interviews and negotiations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 16.2A Participate in formal interviews and negotiations

Element 15.16A.1 Explain the requirements of Trade Measurement legislation relating to pre-packed articles
Criteria 15.16A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Legislative requirements that apply to pre-packed articles Relevant sections of the legislation relating to pre-packed The term “pre-packed articles” is defined. Relevant
are explained. articles can be identified and explained. Procedures for sections of legislation across a range of pre-packed
measurement determination are adhered to. articles can be applied. The range of packing types can
be described.

Criteria 15.16A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Approved markings as they apply to all pre-packed Quantity statement or measurement marking form, size
articles offered for sale are described. and position are explained. Pre-packed articles exempted
from the requirements of legislation are outlined.

Element 15.16A.2 Inspect pre-packed articles for compliance with marking requirements
Criteria 15.16A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-packed articles are examined for the marking of Quantity and unit pricing statements, size, position and All symbols for units of measurement can be described
quantity statements and unit pricing in accordance with form are assessed correctly for compliance with legislation. accurately. Qualifying statements are used appropriately.
legislative requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 794 of 1445
 MEM 15.16A A Inspect pre-packed articles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.16A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pre-packed articles are examined for the marking of packer Marking of packer identification, size, position and form Pre-packed articles exempted from the requirements of
identification. are compared correctly against legislation. packer identification are outlined.

Criteria 15.16A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results of examination are documented for further action. Any marking non-compliance is recorded accurately for Sufficient details are obtained to identify the article when
further action when finalising the inspection. it has been packed elsewhere.

Element 15.16A.3 Measure pre-packed articles

Criteria 15.16A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Articles are selected for check-measuring in accordance Articles to be check-measured are selected in accordance Marketplace intelligence, legislative requirements and
with marketplace intelligence, legislative requirements with organisational guidelines. organisational procedures are used in relation to
and organisational procedures. selecting pre-packed articles. The impact of
environmental factors on pre-packed articles can be
explained.

Criteria 15.16A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product handling and disposal requirements are assessed Products are handled in a safe manner. Disposal of Use of protective clothing and equipment is identified
and complied with in accordance with Workplace, Health products is completed in a safe manner. Consideration is and understood. Checking of hazardous product data
and Safety requirements, environmental considerations given to any impact on the environment. Articles seized or sheet can be undertaken.
and public sector auditor’s requirements. purchased with public monies, are disposed of in
accordance with auditor’s instructions or organisational
guidelines.

Criteria 15.16A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specialised equipment and measuring devices are The most appropriate equipment and measuring devices The organisation’s policy and procedures can be
selected in accordance with organisational procedures. are selected for the measurement of the pre-packed understood and explained. The accuracy and suitability
articles. of the measuring devices used to check pre-packed
articles can be described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 795 of 1445
 MEM 15.16A A Inspect pre-packed articles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.16A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Articles are check-measured in accordance with The most appropriate methods for determining the Procedures for determining the measurement method of
organisation’s procedures to determine compliance with measurement of pre-packed articles are used. The number pre-packed articles are used in accordance with
legislation. of articles to check-measure are selected in accordance organisational guidelines and best practice.
with legislative requirements.

Criteria 15.16A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results of check-measurements are documented for The check-measurement results are documented in Sufficient details of the article are obtained, including
further action. accordance with organisational guidelines. Measurement samples where appropriate. Methods of determining the
non-compliance is recorded for further action. tare weight of packages can be described.

Element 15.16A.4 Finalise inspection and take appropriate action

Criteria 15.16A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trading practice information relevant to the inspection is The trader is advised of the results of the inspection. The The trader’s concerns are responded to satisfactorily.
communicated to the trader. trader’s enquiries and concerns are discussed. Legislative The trader has been given relevant advice.
requirements and obligations are explained to the trader
where appropriate. The trader is advised of reporting
procedures and possible outcomes for any breaches
detected. The trader is provided with relevant information
brochures.

Criteria 15.16A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine and apply approved procedures to remedy Notices are completed in accordance with organisational Wording of notices issued is accurate. Legislative
non-compliance. guidelines. Follow-up activities are planned as required. requirements and obligations for the issuing of notices
are understood. Organisation’s guidelines for return
visits are understood and can be explained.

Criteria 15.16A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complete inspection documentation in accordance with Results of the inspection are recorded accurately in Any specific reporting procedures can be identified and
organisational procedures. organisation’s information files. Breach reports are explained.
completed in accordance with organisational guidelines
Recommendations are clear and accurate.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 796 of 1445
 MEM 15.16A A Inspect pre-packed articles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole.

Range Name Description

Legislation and policies Enabling legislation, organisational policies and procedures, workplace, health and safety, environmental legislation, enforcement policies, auditor's instructions

Marketplace intelligence Complaints, other state jurisdiction, organisational directives, product history, trader history, individual's observation
Specialist equipment Reference standards and test equipment, safety equipment, product handling equipment, measuring equipment
Incorrect packages Incorrect measurement, over pricing, incorrect marking of packages
Documentation Organisational forms, notices, field books, product handling sheets, evaluation form or report
Workplace, health & Storage of test equipment, site/premise conditions, handling of dangerous materials, safety clothing, manual handling techniques, product disposal,
safety considerations transportation of test equipment

Reference material International handbook, Australian standards, organisational policies and procedures, AQS guidelines
Environmental Disposal of hazardous materials, weather conditions, storage methods and conditions
considerations

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
part of a team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) required

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 797 of 1445
 MEM 15.16A A Inspect pre-packed articles Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the conduct of routine field inspections, examining trading communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
practices, investigating consumer complaints, using and maintaining and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
equipment and standards, performing verification/certification or plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
in-service inspection and the safety, quality, communication, materials accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
handling, recording and reporting associated with inspecting accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
pre-packed articles, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot activities
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied.

The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements and their

related performance criteria. Compliance with inspection procedures,
audit procedures, test procedures and legislative requirements is
required. Assessment to be conducted over time across a range of
workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) is required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 798 of 1445
 MEM 15.17B A Use and maintain reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.17B A Use and maintain reference standards

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 3
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 11.11A Manual handling 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement
12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 12.5B Calibrating measuring equipment 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 15.17B.1 Identify the appropriate class of reference standard suitable to verify a range of trade measuring
instruments
Criteria 15.17B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tolerances required for reference standards are Correct reference manuals are accessed to gain appropriate Legal metrology is defined. The hierarchy of reference
researched in relation to testing a range of trade information concerning tolerances for reference standards in relation to legal metrology is explained.
measuring instruments. standards. Australian legal units of measurement used for trade are
described. The organisations involved in legal metrology
in Australia can be identified.

Criteria 15.17B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The correct classes of reference standards are selected to Correct class of reference standard is identified and Application of different classes of reference standards
test a range of trade measuring instruments. matched with the appropriate trade measuring instrument. used to test measuring instruments is explained.

Element 15.17B.2 Use reference standards and test equipment in a safe and metrologically sound manner
Criteria 15.17B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Standards Laboratory purpose and function are Major function and purpose of the Standards Laboratory
explained. can be outlined.

Criteria 15.17B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
An operational assessment on reference standards and Operational assessment on reference standards and test The actions to be taken if reference standards and test
test equipment is performed prior to use. equipment is completed in accordance with organisational equipment are found to be defective can be described.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 799 of 1445
 MEM 15.17B A Use and maintain reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.17B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Documented operating procedures for reference Documented operating procedures for reference standards The actions to be taken if reference standards and test
standards and test equipment are accessed and followed. and test equipment are accessed. Reference standards equipment are found to be defective can be described.
and test equipment is operated correctly during instrument
tests.

Criteria 15.17B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety requirements for the use of reference standards Workplace, health and safety requirements relating to Personal responsibility for workplace, health and safety
and test equipment within the work environment are reference standards and test equipment are identified and requirements can be described.
demonstrated. followed.

Element 15.17B.3 Store and transport reference standards and test equipment to maintain their integrity
Criteria 15.17B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specialised equipment and reference standards are stored Test equipment and reference standards storage Variations from storage specifications and procedures
in accordance with organisational procedures. specifications and procedures are researched prior to requiring appropriate approval can be explained.
storage. Storage specification and procedures are
followed.

Criteria 15.17B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specialised equipment and reference standards are Specialised equipment, reference standards and transport Variations from transport specifications and procedures
transported in accordance with organisational specifications and procedures are researched prior to requiring appropriate approval can be explained.
procedures. transportation. Transport specifications and procedures
are followed.

Element 15.17B.4 Perform required maintenance of reference standards and test equipment
Criteria 15.17B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance requirements of reference standards and Maintenance requirements for reference standards and Maintenance required for test equipment where
test equipment are identified. test equipment are researched. manufacturer's requirements are unavailable, can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 800 of 1445
 MEM 15.17B A Use and maintain reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.17B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Regular maintenance of reference standards and test Minor calibration/maintenance is completed according to A range of maintenance and calibration procedures can
equipment is undertaken in accordance with maintenance manufacturer's specification. Maintenance register is be described.
register. maintained as required.

Criteria 15.17B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defective reference standards and test equipment are Malfunction of or damage to reference standards or test Procedure for reporting faults can be outlined.
identified and reported for repair. equipment is identified and reported for repair.

Element 15.17B.5 Interpret documentation relating to the use of maintenance of reference standards and test equipment
Criteria 15.17B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information contained in the Certificate of Verification is The class of a reference standard and its duration of Action to be taken where legal traceability can not be
checked and compared with reference standards and test validity are identified from a Certificate of Verification. confirmed, can be described. The purpose of Certificates
equipment being used. Certificate documentation is used to prove legal of Verification issued under the national legislation is
traceability. explained.

Criteria 15.17B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reference standards are used in accordance with The interpretation of Certificates of Verification in relation Graphs and tables within Certificates are understood and
documented instructions and certificates. to the use of reference standards is applied. can be used accurately.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 801 of 1445
 MEM 15.17B A Use and maintain reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole.

Range Name Description

Legislation and policies Enabling legislation, organisational policies and procedures, workplace, health and safety, environmental legislation
Reference material Australian standards, verifying authorities handbook, manufacturers operating manuals, organisational procedures, quality assured manual
Specialists equipment Reference standards, measuring devices, safety equipment
Operating procedures Manufacturers specifications, industry guidelines, Australian Standards, legislation, organisational procedures and guidelines
Reference standards Mass, volume, density, area, length, master meters, temperature
Maintenance of test Cleaning and painting, electrical safety testing and tagging, continuity and pressure testing, manufacturers service requirements
equipment and reference
standards

Workplace Health & Storage and transportation of test equipment, handling of test equipment, handling of hazardous materials, safety clothing, manual handling techniques,
Safety Considerations site/premises conditions

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
part of a team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) required

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 802 of 1445
 MEM 15.17B A Use and maintain reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
been satisfied. plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements and their accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
related performance criteria. Compliance with inspection procedures, Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
audit procedures, test procedures and legislative requirements. activities
Assessment to be conducted over time across a range of workplace
scenarios; continuous learning/assessment (re-qualification) is
required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 803 of 1445
 MEM 15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 11.11A Manual handling 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement
12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 12.5B Calibrating measuring equipment 15.4A Perform inspection (basic)
15.5A Perform inspection (advanced) 15.15A Examine trading practices 15.16A Inspect pre-packed articles
15.17B Use and maintain reference standards 16.2A Participate in formal interviews and negotiations 16.4A Perform internal/external customer service
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 15.18B.1 Receive and document the complaint

Criteria 15.18B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allegations are recorded in accordance with All relevant information is sought from complainant. The different methods of complaint lodgements can be
organisational procedures. Complaint details are recorded accurately. Interpersonal described.
communication and listening skills are used while
communicating with the complainant.

Criteria 15.18B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complaints are screened to ensure that they are relevant Complaint information is assessed for its relevance to Organisational policy guidelines concerning complaints
to trade measurement and are assessed to determine trade measurement. Allocation of priority and planning of can be explained.
priority. a number of complaints and other work activities is
undertaken.

Criteria 15.18B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complainant is advised of investigative process and Information is given to complainant in regards to the Organisational guidelines in regard to timelines are
timeframes for feedback. investigative process and appropriate timelines for described.
feedback.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 804 of 1445
 MEM 15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.18B.2 Plan the investigation

Criteria 15.18B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The information received is assessed for possible Potential breaches are identified from available Relevant legislation can be researched and applied to the
breaches in relation to the legislation. information. complaint investigation.

Criteria 15.18B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trader history and complaint precedence is researched. Organisational information systems are accessed and The organisation’s information database can be
relevant information obtained. accessed to research complaint precedence.

Criteria 15.18B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Suitable equipment and personnel are organised to Suitable equipment and personnel are determined and The equipment required to investigate a range of
undertake the investigation. organised. Personnel are briefed concerning the complaints is described. The organisation’s guidelines
requirements of the investigation. for the deployment of personnel are explained.

Criteria 15.18B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Enforcement policies and procedures are researched to The organisation’s enforcement policies and procedures The range of possible investigation activities available
ascertain appropriate action to be implemented. are accessed and appropriate course of action is can be described.
established.

Element 15.18B.3 Investigate the complaint

Criteria 15.18B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preliminary investigation to gather prima facie evidence is Surveillance of trading premises is conducted. Information Elements of offence can be identified. Available
conducted in accordance with organisational is gathered to verify the complainant’s allegations. surveillance methods for a range of complaints and
procedures. premises can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 805 of 1445
 MEM 15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.18B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evidence is gathered to substantiate a breach in Evidence is gathered to prove all elements of a breach The evidence required to prove a range of breaches of
accordance with investigative practices. Appropriate investigative techniques are used. The legislation can be described.. A range of investigation
integrity of evidence is maintained. methods is outlined. The required procedures for the
handling of evidence to maintain its integrity can be
explained.

Criteria 15.18B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The relevant components of a routine field inspection are All appropriate aspects of a routine field inspection are The reasons for selecting relevant components of a
conducted in accordance with organisational procedures. undertaken. routine field inspection are understood.

Element 15.18B.4 Finalise the complaint investigation

Criteria 15.18B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information relevant to the inspection is communicated to The trader is advised of the results of the inspection. The Traders’ concerns are responded to satisfactorily.
the trader. trader’s enquiries and concerns are discussed. Legislative
requirements and obligations are explained to the trader
where appropriate. The trader is advised of reporting
procedures and possible outcomes for any breaches
detected. The trader is provided with relevant information
brochures.

Criteria 15.18B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine and apply approved procedures to remedy Notices are completed in accordance with organisational Wording of notices issued is accurate. Legislative
non-compliance. guidelines. Follow-up activities are planned as required. requirements and obligations for the issuing of notices
can be explained. Organisation’s policy guidelines for
return visits can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 806 of 1445
 MEM 15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.18B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complete inspection documentation in accordance with All results of the inspection are recorded accurately in Specific reporting procedures can be identified and
organisational procedures. organisation’s information files. Breach reports are explained.
completed in accordance with organisational guidelines
Recommendations are clear and accurate.

Element 15.18B.5 Complete complaint file documentation

Criteria 15.18B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complainant is advised of outcome of the investigation. Outcomes of the investigation are communicated to the Complaint outcome classifications are correctly used and
complainant within specified organisational timeframes. understood.
Interpersonal communication and listening skills are used
while communicating with the complainant.

Criteria 15.18B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complaint documentation is completed in accordance All activities including the results of the investigation are Complaint documentation procedures can be explained.
with organisational guidelines. recorded accurately in the complaint file. Specific reporting procedures can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 807 of 1445
 MEM 15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole.

Range Name Description

Legislation and policies Enabling legislation, organisational policies and procedures, workplace, health and safety, environmental legislation, enforcement policies
Documentation Organisational forms, notices, field books, product handling sheets, educational material/brochures
Reference material Uniform test procedures, International handbook, Australian standards, Investigation method guidelines
Environmental Disposal of hazardous materials, weather conditions, storage methods and conditions
considerations

Complaints may include Measuring instruments, pre-packed articles, trading practices, servicing licensees, public weighbridge licensees, fair trading matters relating to trade measurement
reference to:

Organisational procedures Trial purchase, surveillance, witness statements, verification/in-service inspection procedures, pre-packed articles inspection procedures, trading practices
covering preliminary inspection procedures, routine field inspection procedures
investigation

Sources of information Business/company details, organisational database, searches from other government agencies
Specialists equipment Reference standards, test equipment, safety equipment
Workplace, Health and Storage and transportation of test equipment, site/premises conditions, disposal of dangerous materials, storage of seized equipment/products, specific safety
Safety Considerations equipment and clothing, manual handling techniques, product handling equipment

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
part of a team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) required

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 808 of 1445
 MEM 15.18B A Investigate consumer complaints Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the conduct of routine field inspections, examining trading communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
practices, inspecting pre-packed articles, using and maintaining and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
equipment and standards, performing verification/certification or plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
in-service inspection and the safety, quality, communication, materials accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
handling, recording and reporting associated with investigating accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
consumer complaints, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot activities
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied.

The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements and their

related performance criteria. Compliance with inspection procedures,
audit procedures, test procedures and legislative requirements.
Assessment to be conducted over time across a range of workplace
scenarios; continuous learning/assessment (re-qualification) is
required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 809 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 12
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
11.11A Manual handling 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
12.5B Calibrating measuring equipment 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 15.4A Perform inspection (basic)
15.5A Perform inspection (advanced) 15.15A Examine trading practices 15.16A Inspect pre-packed articles
15.17B Use and maintain reference standards 15.18B Investigate consumer complaints 16.2A Participate in formal interviews and negotiations
16.4A Perform internal/external customer service 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 15.19B.1 Develop a work plan to conduct field inspections

Criteria 15.19B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Traders are identified for inspection in accordance with The organisation’s information system is accessed The organisation’s inspection priorities are understood
organisational priorities. correctly and interrogated for relevant trader information. and applied.
Information is collected in accordance with the
organisation’s inspection priorities. Trading environments
and instruments to be tested are identified and selected.

Criteria 15.19B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine field inspections are scheduled to compliment Appropriate strategies are used to schedule inspection A range of options can be developed for dealing with
other inspection activities whilst maximising activities. Identification of priorities and their integration conflicting priorities.
organisational efficiencies and effectiveness. into routine field inspections are undertaken.

Criteria 15.19B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment is identified and accessed. Equipment required to undertake scheduled work activities A range of equipment used for various tasks can be
identified. The test equipment is accessed correctly. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 810 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.19B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specific inspection arrangements are made with the Arrangements for the provision of test equipment are Arrangements are made only when necessary.
trader. negotiated with the trader. Awareness of the operational Alternative contact arrangements are explained.
needs of the trader is demonstrated.

Criteria 15.19B.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant reference and/or technical information and The criteria for selection of instruments for test such as A range of environmental factors that impinge on
trader history is researched. previous individual instrument history, environmental measuring instruments is explained.
factors, and performance problems of various models of
instruments are used.

Element 15.19B.2 Maintain test equipment during a field inspection

Criteria 15.19B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment is transported in accordance with Test equipment transportation specifications and Variations from transport specifications and procedures
manufacturer’s specifications and organisational procedures are accessed and complied with prior to requiring appropriate approval can be explained.
procedures. transportation.

Criteria 15.19B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment is operated within manufacturers’ Test equipment operating specifications and procedures Variations from operating specifications and procedures
specifications and organisational procedures. are accessed and complied with. requiring appropriate approval can be explained.

Criteria 15.19B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Failures and repairs of test equipment are reported in Minor calibration/repairs are completed according to Types of failure that might occur and possible remedies
accordance with organisational procedures. manufacturer’s specifications. Faults are recognised and in a range of test equipment are described. Preventative
reported in accordance with organisational procedures. work practices to maintain equipment in good working
order is described. Preventative maintenance of
equipment is described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 811 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.19B.3 Conduct initial on-site assessment of the trading premises

Criteria 15.19B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surveillance of the trading premises is undertaken to Surveillance of trading premises is conducted Information Methods of surveillance that can be undertaken are
evaluate the trading practices in use. gathered during surveillance is evaluated accurately to described.
identify non-compliance.

Criteria 15.19B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Officer establishes their identity with the trader or The organisation’s identification procedure is used (e.g., Legislative requirements for the inspection are explained.
responsible person and explains the purpose of the ID card). The purpose of the inspection is explained and
inspection. clarified with the trader.

Criteria 15.19B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Local workplace, health and safety issues relevant to the Workplace, health and safety information specific to the Personal responsibility for workplace, health and safety
premises are identified and appropriate action is taken to trading environment is obtained from the trader. All is understood. Workplace, health and safety issues
comply. specific workplace, health and safety requirements are relating to a range of occupational and business
complied with. environments can be identified.

Criteria 15.19B.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measuring instruments used for trade are identified and Considerations concerning the operational efficiency of Operational efficiency of the trader does not compromise
the inspection planned with minimal disruption to the the trader are made in determining the inspection strategy. the inspection effectiveness. A range of contingencies
trader. can be developed to facilitate minimal disruption to the
trader.

Criteria 15.19B.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Locations for product return or disposal are identified for Advice is sought from the trader concerning the method of Action that would be taken if incorrect disposal occurs
later use. product return/disposal. Inspection and confirmation of can be described.
the correct return/disposal point are undertaken.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 812 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.19B.4 Inspect instruments and/or trading practices

Criteria 15.19B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measuring instruments are selected for inspection in Organisational information system is interrogated The organisation’s information system can be used to
accordance with organisational guidelines. accurately for individual instrument history at trader’s access information such as certification and inspection
premises. Performance trends of particular models of records. Research methods used to determine instrument
instruments are considered. performance trends are described.

Criteria 15.19B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment is used in accordance with organisational Organisational procedures are complied with in the use of Workplace, health and safety requirements can be
procedures taking into consideration workplace health test equipment. All relevant workplace, health and safety described for a range of test procedures and working
and safety factors. requirements are implemented. environments.

Criteria 15.19B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant test procedures for verification and in-service Relevant test procedures are followed. Data plate A range of environmental and operational factors that
inspection are conducted in accordance with information and instrument errors are recorded in may adversely influence the accuracy of instruments and
organisational procedures. accordance with organisation’s procedures. Environmental action required to remedy their effect can be identified.
and operational factors adversely influencing the
accuracy of instruments are identified and action taken to
remedy their effect.

Criteria 15.19B.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection of pre-packed articles is conducted in Pre-packed articles are identified for inspection. Packaging Pre-packed articles legislation can be applied across a
accordance with organisational procedures. information and check-measurement results are recorded in range of trading environments. Organisational guidelines
accordance with organisation’s guidelines. Incorrect for the selection of pre-packed articles for inspection can
packages are identified and action taken to remedy their be explained.
non-compliance.

Criteria 15.19B.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trading practices are identified and action taken to Sales transactions conducted on the premises are A range of non-compliance issues for trading practices
remedy any non-compliance. monitored. Advertising used on or outside the premises is can be described.
assessed. Incorrect trading practices are identified and
action taken to remedy non-compliance.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 813 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.19B.5 Undertake an investigation where a breach is detected

Criteria 15.19B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evidence relating to the breach is gathered. Sufficient evidence can be gathered to prove a breach. All Strategies used to prove breaches of trading practices
elements of an offence are considered and proved. including trial purchases, can be described.

Criteria 15.19B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trader and witnesses are interviewed for supporting Interview questions are prepared in a logical manner to The format and procedure for conducting an interview in
evidence. cover all elements of an offence. Appropriate recording accordance with organisational guidelines can be
methods are used during the interviews and the taking of explained. The principles of natural justice, requirements
statements. Assertive communication and active listening of appropriate legislation, judges or court rules, the
skills are used to maintain control of the interview. organisation’s code of conduct are understood and
Strategies for managing and reducing conflict are used. applied. Assertive communication and active listening
Awareness of cultural and gender issues are skills can be applied in a range of interviewing situations.
demonstrated. Strategies for handling conflict can be described.
Sensitivity to cultural and gender issues that influence
the communication/interviewing process is explained.

Criteria 15.19B.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Chain of evidence is maintained. Evidence can be identified/labelled and/or secured as Maintenance of evidence integrity can be explained.
required by organisational procedures. Possession of the Recording and secure storage of evidence in accordance
evidence is monitored to maintain its integrity. with organisational procedures can be explained.

Element 15.19B.6 Complete documentation for inspection

Criteria 15.19B.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instrument and trader information is recorded accurately Ownership details and instrument information is recorded Types of ownership entities for legal responsibilities can
for the organisation’s information system. accurately. be described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 814 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.19B.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection documentation is completed in accordance All inspection data is recorded accurately, clearly and Appropriate forms can be identified and used for
with organisational procedures. concisely. Recording of information is consistent with inspection outcomes including non-compliance and
organisational procedures. rejection notices, instrument performance records, fees
and trader’s files.

Element 15.19B.7 Advise trader of inspection outcomes

Criteria 15.19B.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The trader is advised of instrument test, pre-packed Relevant information is communicated to the trader Suitable environment to communicate inspection
article and trading practice results where appropriate. Information is provided in a timely manner. Assertive outcomes with trader can be identified. Assertive
communication and active listening skills are used to communication and active listening skills can be applied
explain information to the trader. Strategies for managing in a range of trader environments. Strategies for handling
and reducing conflict are used. Awareness of cultural and conflict situations can be described. Sensitivity to
gender issues are demonstrated. cultural and gender issues that influence the
communication process is explained.

Criteria 15.19B.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The trader’s enquiries and concerns are discussed. Accurate product knowledge is presented to the trader. Verbal and non-verbal communication strategies can be
Questions requiring clarification are researched for further identified to ensure comprehension of information being
advice to the trader. Assertive communication and active discussed.
listening skills are used to explain information to the trader.
Strategies for managing and reducing conflict are used.
Awareness of cultural and gender issues are
demonstrated.

Criteria 15.19B.7.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Legislative requirements, obligations and possible Discussion of information between the trader and Corrective solutions for a range of scenarios can be
corrective solutions are explained to the trader where inspector is clear and accurate. identified. Legislative requirements for a range of trading
appropriate. environments are explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 815 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.19B.7.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The trader is advised of reporting procedures and Discussion of reporting procedures and outcome options Reporting processes and outcomes can be outlined in
possible outcomes for any detected breaches. in relation to detected breaches is clear and accurate. accordance with organisational procedures. Accurate
interpretation of enforcement guidelines can be
explained.

Criteria 15.19B.7.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plan follow-up activities if required. The need for follow-up activities is identified Follow-up Methods for conducting a follow-up activity can be
activities are planned. explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 816 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole.

Range Name Description

Legislation and policies Enabling legislation, uniform test procedures, organisational policies and procedures and policies, workplace, health and safety and enforcement policies
Specialist equipment Specific test equipment, reference standards, safety equipment, product handling equipment
Incorrect packages May include short measure, over pricing, incorrect marking of packages
Trading practices May include advertising, over the counter sales, correct use of measuring instruments, method of sale of goods, positioning of instruments, environmental
factors, suitability of instrument, over pricing, incorrect measurement

Documentation May include organisational forms, notices, field books, evaluation form or report, fees, servicing licensee forms, educational material/brochures
Information systems May include organisation's databases, business/company details
Workplace, health & May include storage of test equipment, site/premises conditions, disposal of dangerous materials, storage of seized equipment, specific safety equipment and
safety considerations clothing

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
part of a team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) is required.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing examining trading practices, inspecting pre-packed communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
articles, investigating consumer complaints, performing and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 817 of 1445
 MEM 15.19B A Conduct a field inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

verification/certification or in-service inspection, communication, plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
materials handling, recording and reporting associated with accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
conducting a routine field inspection, or other units requiring the accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been activities
satisfied. The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements
and their related performance criteria. Compliance with inspection
procedures, audit procedures, test procedures and legislative
requirements is required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 818 of 1445
MEM 15.20B B Perform verification/certification or in-service inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.20B B Perform verification/certification or in-service inspection

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 12
This unit is designed for those performing trade measurement inspection/certification activities in public or private enterprises. The unit covers the competency
required
to test a range of measuring instruments used for trade.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
11.11A Manual handling 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
12.5B Calibrating measuring equipment 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 15.17B Use and maintain reference standards
16.2A Participate in formal interviews and negotiations 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 15.20B.1 Describe the design and application of basic components in trade measuring instruments
Criteria 15.20B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The fundamental operating features for a range of Operating features of instruments are correctly identified The major components and functions of an instrument can
measuring instruments are identified and used be explained

Criteria 15.20B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The purpose of major components within the range of Components are correctly identified and located on an The purpose of major components and functions of an
measuring instruments is described instrument instrument can be explained

Element 15.20B.2 Determine the type of inspection required for a range of measuring instruments
Criteria 15.20B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Instrument is assessed to determine whether a The instrument is examined for existing Differences in the application of tolerances being applied
verification/certification or in-service tolerance is to be verification/certification marks are explained
applied for inspection
Criteria 15.20B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The processes required for both the Process variations between verification/ certification and Process variations between verification/ certification and
verification/certification and in-service of a range of in-service inspection are identified in-service inspection are explained
measuring instruments are explained
Criteria 15.20B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tolerances are identified for the determined Appropriate tolerances are applied to the measuring Appropriate tolerances are explained for a range of
inspection instruments being inspected measuring instruments

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 819 of 1445
MEM 15.20B B Perform verification/certification or in-service inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 15.20B.3 Perform inspection of measuring instruments to determine compliance
Criteria 15.20B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operating environment of the instrument is Environmental factors are identified for the instrument Environmental factors that may not result in an instrument
analysed to determine its impact on the instrument being tested rejection but other remedial actions are identified

Criteria 15.20B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sources of any possible operational error in the use of Identification of operational errors relevant to the type of
measuring instruments/systems are identified instrument being tested is demonstrated

Criteria 15.20B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specialised equipment is selected and used in the Suitable test equipment is selected and correct use of the test Specialised equipment that may be required from other
prescribed manner for the inspection equipment is demonstrated organisations are identified

Criteria 15.20B.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conduct inspection of measuring instrument in Measuring instruments are tested in accordance with the The action to be taken where a conflict occurs between
accordance with appropriate test procedures and appropriate test procedures Workplace, health and safety uniform test procedures and those test procedures contained
workplace, health and safety guidelines issues are identified and appropriate action taken in Certificates of Approval can be explained
Element 15.20B.4 Finalise inspection and take appropriate action
Criteria 15.20B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine and implement the appropriate action to be Where non-compliance is identified, existing Removal of verification/certification marks is impractical
undertaken verification/certification marks are removed and appropriate on some instruments and the appropriate action to be taken
notices and instructions are provided to the trader Advice in these circumstances is explained
for resolving detected problems is provided to the trader
Criteria 15.20B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performance trends of particular models of measuring Performance information can be identified and a technical
instruments are identified and reported report prepared

Criteria 15.20B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The information is recorded in the organisation's The organisation’s information files are completed Methods to monitor performance trends can be explained
information system

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 820 of 1445
MEM 15.20B B Perform verification/certification or in-service inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole. The following measuring instruments are indicative of the level, complexity and range of instruments applicable to this unit:
simple measuring instruments and auxiliary devices, alcohol measuring instruments, fuel dispensers - retail, bulk flowmeters, miscellaneous measuring instruments, weighing
instruments less than 100kg, high-capacity measuring instruments, vehicle tanks, milk tanks. Where work requires measuring instruments of a lower level of complexity and
range, and lower scope relating to uniform test procedures, reference material etc. Unit 15.4A (perform inspection (basic)) or Unit 15.5A (Perform inspection (advanced)) should
Range Name Description
Legislation and policies Enabling legislation, organisational policies and procedures, workplace, health and safety, environmental legislation, enforcement policies,
conditions of licence
Monitoring Specific test equipment, random inspections, surveillance, complaint inspection, comparison/analysis of data over time, collation of statistical
information, auditing of servicing licensees
Specialist equipment Reference standards, safety equipment, product handling equipment, test equipment, specialised test equipment vehicles
Range of measuring instruments Length of measures and measuring instruments, area measuring instruments, measures of volume, liquor measuring instruments, liquid measuring
instruments, weighing instruments, milk tanks, vehicle tanks, liquefied gas flow meters, electronic metering systems, natural gas flow meters,
dimensional measuring instruments, supplementary measuring instrument, auxiliary devices
Reference material NSC Certificates of Approval, manufacturers product specifications, Australian standards, WHS Legislation, Uniform Test Procedures, organisational
procedures and guidelines, Certificates of Verification
Forms of documentation used Non-compliance notices, reflect/incorrect notices, fees, organisational reporting forms
Workplace, Health and Safety Storage and transportation of test equipment, site/premises conditions, specific safety equipment and clothing, manual handling techniques
Considerations
Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by this unit The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) required
Critical aspects Special notes

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 821 of 1445
MEM 15.20B B Perform verification/certification or in-service inspection Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
conduct of routine field inspections, conducting audits on servicing licensees and be selected. communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to
ensure a safe
public weighbridges, examining trading practices, inspecting pre-packed articles, and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
investigating consumer complaints, using and maintaining equipment and - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
standards and the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
and reporting associated with verification/certification or in-service inspection, accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been workplace activities
satisfied.

The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements and their related
performance criteria. Compliance with inspection procedures, audit procedures,
test procedures and legislative requirements. Assessment to be conducted over
time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 822 of 1445
MEM 15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Quality Unit Weight 4
This unit is designed for those performing trade measurement inspection/certification activities in public or private enterprises. The unit covers the competency
required
to audit the work undertaken by servicing licensees/certifiers and the operations undertaken by public weighbridge licensees.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
11.11A Manual handling 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
12.5B Calibrating measuring equipment 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 15.17B Use and maintain reference standards
15.20B Perform verification/certification or in-service 16.2A Participate in formal interviews and negotiations 16.4A Perform internal/external customer service
inspection
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 15.21B.1 Explain the licensing system for servicing licensees and public weighbridges
Criteria 15.21B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Major components of the licensing system for Major components of the licensing system for certification
certification of measuring instruments are described of measuring instruments such as legislative requirements,
eligibility, conditions of licence including provision of
competent employees, provision of reference standards, use
of test procedures, and use of reporting documentation and
quality assurance systems can be explained
Criteria 15.21B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Major components of the licensing system for public Major components of the licensing system for public
weighbridges are described weighbridge such as legislative requirements, eligibility,
conditions of licence including provision of competent
employees, maintaining accuracy of the public weighbridge,
weighing methods and obligations, and use of reporting
documentation, can be explained
Criteria 15.21B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The requirements for issuing servicing and public The process for issuing servicing and public weighbridge
weighbridge licences in accordance with legislation and licences specifically the activities undertaken by trade
organisational procedures are described measurement personnel can be described

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 823 of 1445
MEM 15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 15.21B.2 Identify measuring instruments for audit of certifiers
Criteria 15.21B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Servicing licensee’s documentation is monitored for Servicing licensee’s documentation is evaluated for its The process for handling incomplete forms can be described
compliance with organisational requirements completeness of information Lodgement of servicing
licensee’s documentation is monitored for compliance with
the specific timeframes required by the administering
authority
Criteria 15.21B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Organisational procedures are used to generate a list of Selection of instruments for auditing is conducted in Certifier’s performance history has been considered when
measuring instruments to be audited accordance with organisational procedures Audits are selecting instruments
scheduled to compliment other inspection activities whilst
maximising organisational efficiencies and effectiveness

Element 15.21B.3 Conduct performance audits on certifiers

Criteria 15.21B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inspection of measuring instruments is performed to Measuring instruments are tested in accordance with Inspection variations between verification inspection and
determine compliance in accordance with legislation and organisational procedures and legislative requirements an audit inspection can be identified and explained
organisational procedures Instrument errors are recorded
Criteria 15.21B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The certifier’s procedures and documentation are The certifier’s documentation is assessed for accuracy
assessed to ensure legislative requirements are met against the instrument certified and legislative requirements

Criteria 15.21B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results of audit are recorded in the organisation’s Audit reports are completed accurately and in a timely Reporting variations for a range of instruments can be
information system manner outlined

Criteria 15.21B.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Action required to remedy non-compliance is Appropriate remedial action to be undertaken is determined
determined and applied and implemented Where non-compliance is identified,
existing identification marks are removed and appropriate
notices and instructions are provided to the trader Advice
for resolving detected problems is provided to the trader
Any detected breach is investigated and reported in
accordance with organisational guidelines

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 824 of 1445
MEM 15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 15.21B.4 Examine public weighbridge licensee’s operations for compliance with legislation
Criteria 15.21B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Licensee’s documentation is assessed for compliance The licensee’s documentation is assessed for accuracy Requirements to complete a public weighbridge ticket can be
with legislation and organisational requirements against the public weighbridge instrument certified and described Methods to complete a public weighbridge ticket
legislative requirements Signage, certificates and public can be described Requirements for authority to operate a
weighbridge tickets are assessed for accuracy and public weighbridge are described
completeness Public weighbridge operator’s authorisation is
Criteria 15.21B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operator’s ability to undertake public weighbridge The evaluation of the operator’s ability to perform the “Duties of Operator of Public Weighbridge” can be
duties is observed for compliance with legislation duties of a public weigher is undertaken explained

Criteria 15.21B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Action required to remedy non-compliance is Appropriate action to be undertaken is determined and A range of options to remedy non-compliance can be
determined and applied. implemented Advice for resolving any non-compliance is explained
provided to the trader including any written notices Any
detected breach is investigated and reported in accordance
with organisational guidelines

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 825 of 1445
MEM 15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole.
Range Name Description
Legislation and policies Enabling legislation, workplace, health & safety practices, organisational policies and procedures Licensing conditions, enforcement policies
Recommendations for further action Oral and written instructions, warnings, cautions, infringement notices, non-compliance notices, legal action
Reference material Uniform test procedures, inspectors handbook, NSC certificates of approval, organisational procedures and guidelines
Documentation Application forms, certification forms, non-compliance forms, public weighbridge tickets, documents as specified by Legislation, educational
material/brochures, batch test historgrams
Workplace Health and safety considerationsStorage of test equipment, site/premises conditions, manual handling techniques, specific safety equipment and clothing

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by this unit The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) is required.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
conduct of routine field inspections, examining trading practices, investigating communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
consumer complaints, using and maintaining equipment and standards, and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
performing verification/certification or in-service inspection and the safety, - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting associated in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
with conducting audits of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees, or accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been workplace activities
satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 826 of 1445
MEM 15.21B B Conduct audits of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

of servicing licensees and public weighbridge licensees, or other units Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this activities
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites
have been satisfied.

The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements and their

related performance criteria. Compliance with inspection procedures,
audit procedures, test procedures and legislative requirements.
Assessment to be conducted over time across a range of workplace
scenarios; continuous learning/assessment (re-qualification) required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 827 of 1445
 MEM 15.22A A Verify reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 15.22A A Verify reference standards

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Quality Unit Weight 8
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 15.22A.1 Identify the categories and levels of verification for reference standards
Criteria 15.22A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The categories of reference standards that the Verifying status for the organisation is checked. Relevant categories of reference standards for which the
organisation is authorised to verify is identified. organisation is authorised to verify can be identified.

Criteria 15.22A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The classes of reference standards required to verify a Suitable reference standards within standards hierarchy A range of classes for reference standards can be
range of standards are identified. are researched and identified for verification. identified.

Criteria 15.22A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tolerances for a range of reference standards are Correct reference manuals are accessed to gain appropriate Appropriate tolerance can be explained for a range of
identified. information concerning tolerances for reference reference standards.
standards.

Criteria 15.22A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tolerances for a range of reference standards are Appropriate tolerance can be explained for a range of
described. reference standards.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 828 of 1445
 MEM 15.22A A Verify reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 15.22A.2 Maintain suitable environmental conditions to facilitate verification of reference standards
Criteria 15.22A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reference standard details are recorded in accordance The organisation's information tracking documentation is Current status of client's reference standards can be
with organisational guidelines. completed. identified.

Criteria 15.22A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sources of possible operational error in the verification of Identification of operational error relevant to the
reference standards are identified. verification is demonstrated.

Criteria 15.22A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Required atmospheric conditions for the verification of a Appropriate atmospheric conditions are identified for the Atmospheric factors required for verifying a range of
range of reference standards are applied. verification to be conducted. Where atmospheric reference standards can be described. Remedial action
conditions are found to be unsuitable for verification, for atmospheric deficiencies can be described.
remedial action is determined and undertaken.

Criteria 15.22A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Environmental conditions are assessed to determine Environmental conditions are identified for the verification Environmental factors that may adversely influence the
whether a verification can be conducted. to be completed. Where environmental conditions are integrity of the reference standards can be identified.
found to be unsuitable for verification, remedial action is Remedial action for a range of environmental deficiencies
determined and undertaken. can be described.

Element 15.22A.3 Examine the design and required markings for a range of reference standards
Criteria 15.22A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The identification marking required for reference Identification marks on reference standards are located. Requirements for identification marking on reference
standards is located and explained. standards are understood and can be explained.

Criteria 15.22A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design features of a range of reference standards are Design features are researched in appropriate reference The purpose of design specifications can be explained.
correctly identified and applied. material and identified on a range of reference standards.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 829 of 1445
 MEM 15.22A A Verify reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 15.22A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The function of major components for a range of Major components are correctly identified and located on The purpose of the major components and functions of
reference standards is described and applied. a range of reference standards. reference standards can be explained.

Criteria 15.22A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The fundamental features of a range of reference Fundamental features are correctly identified and located The fundamental features of reference standards can be
standards are identified and explained. on a range of reference standards. explained.

Element 15.22A.4 Perform verification of reference standards

Criteria 15.22A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A variety of reference standards are verified. Verification processes are undertaken in relation to various The process for maintaining integrity of results including
types of reference standards. Test equipment used in the calculations is understood an can be explained.
verification processes is used in accordance with
organisational guidelines. Methodology for verification is
applied in accordance with organisational guidelines.

Criteria 15.22A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Uncertainty and tolerances for reference standards are Uncertainty requirements and maximum permissible errors The reference material for uncertainty and maximum
applied. at verification are researched for reference standards. permissible errors for a variety of reference standards can
Uncertainty and maximum permissible errors for reference be accessed and explained.
standards are applied.

Criteria 15.22A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results of verification are documented and Certificate of Verification work sheets are completed. Verification results The process for producing Certificates of Verification in
Verification issued in accordance with organisational are recorded accurately Certificates of Verification are accordance with verifying authority status can be
procedures. completed and issued in accordance with organisational explained.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 830 of 1445
 MEM 15.22A A Verify reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The range of variables provides information about the context in which the unit of competency is carried out. It allows for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth and between organisations and workplaces. It allows for different work requirements, work practices, and knowledge. The range of variables also provides a focus
for assessment and relates to the unit as a whole.

Range Name Description

Reference material Australian standards, verifying authorities handbook, manufacturers operating manuals, organisational procedures, ISO guide, quality control manuals
Forms of documentation Fees, verification work sheets, Certificate of Verification
used

Operating procedures Manufacturer's specifications, industry guidelines, Australian Standards, Legislation, Organisational procedures and guidelines
Reference standards Mass, volume, density, area, length, master meters, temperature
Legislation and Policies Enabling legislation, Workplace Health and Safety legislation, organisational procedures and guidelines
Specialist Equipment Reference Standards, measuring devices, safety equipment
Workplace Health & Storage and transportation of test equipment, handling of test equipment, handling of hazardous materials, safety clothing, manual handling techniques,
Safety Considerations site/premises conditions

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
part of a team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge. Assessment is to be
conducted over time across a range of workplace scenarios; continuous learning/assessment
(re-qualification) required

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the use and maintenance of equipment and standards, or communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 831 of 1445
 MEM 15.22A A Verify reference standards Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
prerequisites have been satisfied. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted trade measurement techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
The unit requires integrated demonstration of all elements and their Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
related performance criteria. Compliance with inspection procedures, activities
audit procedures, test procedures and legislative requirements.
Assessment to be conducted over time across a range of workplace
scenarios; continuous learning/assessment (re-qualification) is
required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 832 of 1445
 MEM 16.1B A Give formal presentations and take part in meetings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 16.1B A Give formal presentations and take part in meetings
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Communication Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit can be regarded as a Specialisation band A unit from C11 onwards

Element 16.1B.1 Participate in formal meetings

Criteria 16.1B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A set agenda is understood and followed. The agenda is followed during the meeting. The topics for discussion during the meeting can be
identified.

Criteria 16.1B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Meeting conventions are followed. The meeting rules/conventions are followed at all times. Meeting conventions can be identified.

Criteria 16.1B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discussion is focussed on the objectives of the meeting. Discussions are focussed on the objectives of the The objective of the meeting can be identified.

Element 16.1B.2 Give formal presentations

Criteria 16.1B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Presentation of a technical, job related or trade nature is A prepared technical/job related presentation is given The topic/subject on which a presentation is to be made
given. clearly and concisely. Where appropriate, visual aids can be identified.
and/or handout materials are used.

Criteria 16.1B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Presentations are accurate and structured and all The information presented in the presentation is accurate The structure of the presentation can be identified. The
necessary content is included. and factual. The presentation is logically structured. All information to be conveyed can be identified. Any
relevant material is included in the presentation. conclusions, recommendations are made on the basis of
information contained in the presentation.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 833 of 1445
 MEM 16.1B A Give formal presentations and take part in meetings Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 16.1B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sources are acknowledged. The sources of information used in the presentation are The sources of information used in the presentation can
acknowledged. be identified.

Range statement
This unit is intended to cover the communication skills needed when individuals are required to make formal presentations and participate in meetings governed by formal rules or
well-established conventions. For example, meetings which have a formal chairperson, minutes are recorded, and where roles are relatively well-defined.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with : - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. The
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer
questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection
of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job
training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently
and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
applicable to the individual's work and/or units requiring the exercise communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 834 of 1445
 MEM 16.2A B Participate in formal interviews and negotiations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 16.2A B Participate in formal interviews and negotiations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Communication Unit Weight 4

Element 16.2A.1 Plan and conduct interviews

Criteria 16.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plan and initiate interview to achieve a specified purpose. The interview is appropriately planned and initiated. The purpose of the interview can be given. The need to
initiate the interview can be explained. The procedures to
be followed in planning the interview can be identified.

Criteria 16.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Suitable questions appropriate to the purpose are used. Suitable questions appropriate to the purpose of the The detail/information to be obtained from the interview
interview are used to obtain details and/or information. can be identified. Questions appropriate to the
detail/information to be obtained can be prepared.

Criteria 16.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discretion and confidentiality are exercised where Where appropriate, detail and/or information obtained is The need to treat details and/or information discreetly
appropriate. treated discreetly and confidentially. and confidentially can be explained.

Element 16.2A.2 Participate in interviews

Criteria 16.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate preparation is undertaken. Appropriate preparation for the interview is undertaken. All necessary preparations for the interview can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 835 of 1445
 MEM 16.2A B Participate in formal interviews and negotiations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 16.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Active listening skills are employed. Active listening skills are utilised during the interview. Active listening techniques that can be applied in
interview situations can be described.

Criteria 16.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Self-presentation is appropriate to the purpose. The individual's presentation during the interview is The effect(s) of the individual's presentation during the
appropriate to the purpose of the interview. interview upon the interview, can be explained.

Criteria 16.2A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Questions are asked where appropriate. Questions are asked at appropriate times during the The effect(s) of the timing of questions on the
interview. interviewee can be explained.

Criteria 16.2A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Follow-up activities are clarified and reported in Where appropriate, follow-up activities to be undertaken The need to follow-up issues raised during the interview
accordance with standard operating procedure. are clarified. Where appropriate, follow-up activities are can be explained. The procedures for reporting the
reported in accordance with standard operating outcomes of follow-up activities can be identified.
procedures.

Element 16.2A.3 Take part in negotiations

Criteria 16.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Language appropriate to the other party is used. Language appropriate to the other party(s) is used The parties to be involved in the negotiations can be
throughout the negotiations. identified. The reasons for using appropriate language
can be explained.

Criteria 16.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Own and others needs/wants are stated and clarified. The individual's needs/wants are stated. The needs/wants The reasons for clarifying the needs/ wants of others can
of others are clarified. be explained. The needs/wants of the individual can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 836 of 1445
 MEM 16.2A B Participate in formal interviews and negotiations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 16.2A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Represent the views of fellow employees including own The individual represents the views of fellow team or The views of fellow team or group members can be
group or team to others. group members during the negotiations. identified. The views of fellow team or group members
are clarified and confirmed.

Criteria 16.2A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select appropriate communication medium. The individual uses appropriate communication media A range of communication media can be identified. The
during the negotiations. appropriate communication media is selected. The
reasons for selecting the chosen communication medium
can be given.

Criteria 16.2A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Follow-up activities are clarified and reported in Where appropriate, follow-up activities to be undertaken The need to follow-up issues raised during negotiations
accordance with standard operating procedure. are clarified. Where appropriate, follow-up activities are can be explained. The procedures for reporting the
reported in accordance with standard operating outcomes of follow-up activities can be identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 837 of 1445
 MEM 16.2A B Participate in formal interviews and negotiations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the skills needed for effective communication in more formal on-site or small group situations where ideas are defined and specific outcomes are sought. The topics
covered are often formally identified and records may be kept. Interviews could include job recruitment and progression, performance reviews, grievance, etc. This unit does not
cover the skills needed for participation in formal group processes such as meetings which are covered by Unit 16.1B (Give formal presentations and take part in meetings). For
interviews associated with assessment, see Unit 17.2A (Conduct workplace assessment).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with formal interviews and/or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
negotiations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 838 of 1445
 MEM 16.3B A Advanced customer service Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 16.3B A Advanced customer service

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Communication Unit Weight 2
Notes - Pre-requisite skills for this unit are covered by core units 1.1F, 1.3F, and 2.1C12.

Element 16.3B.1 Identify customer relationship to enterprise

Criteria 16.3B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
For repeat customers, formal customer identification For repeat customers, customer identification details are The procedures for identifying repeat customers can be
details obtained and checked, for example by order, obtained and checked in accordance with standard given. The procedures for checking customer
requisition or account number according to standard operating procedures. identification details can be given. The identification
operating procedure. details to be sought from repeat customers can be
identified.

Criteria 16.3B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Customer is identified as a new or repeat customer. The customer is identified correctly as a new or repeat The distinction between new and repeat customers can
customer. be explained.

Element 16.3B.2 Identify customer requirements

Criteria 16.3B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Customer requirements identified from order or other The means by which customer requirements are
verbal or written communication. identified can be given. The customer requirements can
be identified from a number of given sources.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 839 of 1445
 MEM 16.3B A Advanced customer service Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 16.3B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Degree to which customer requirements can be met is The degree to which customer requirements can be met is The price of the required product or service can be
clearly communicated including details such as price, clearly and promptly communicated, using appropriate identified. The quantities of the product available can be
delivery date, quantity or quality. means. identified. The quality of the product available can be
identified. The delivery date of the product or service can
be identified. The ability to supply the customer's
requirements can be identified. The procedures for
informing the customer of the degree to which the
customer's requirements can be met can be identified.
The reasons for informing the customer promptly of the
ability/inability to meet the customer's requirements can
be explained.

Criteria 16.3B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alternatives proposed for any inability to completely Where appropriate, alternative products and/or services Alternative products and/or services that may meet the
satisfy customer requirements. are proposed to the customer. customer's requirements can be identified.

Element 16.3B.3 Action customer requirements

Criteria 16.3B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Identified appropriate action to implement customer The appropriate action is taken to meet customer The procedures for actioning customer orders can be
requirements is undertaken, for example filling or entering requirements. identified. The procedures for recording and actioning
of order, corrective action to resolve complaints, or repair customer complaints can be identified. The procedures
or service to customer equipment. for initiating repairs and/or service to customer
equipment can be identified. The procedures for initiating
action to correct errors made while attempting to meet
customer requirements can be identified For a range of
customer requirements, the appropriate action to be
taken can be identified. The reasons for taking the action
identified can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 840 of 1445
 MEM 16.3B A Advanced customer service Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 16.3B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Customer requirements not able to be met immediately are Customer requirements not able to be immediately met are The procedures for recording customer requirements not
recorded and follow-up checks undertaken according to recorded in accordance with standard operating able to be immediately met can be identified. The
standard operating procedure. procedure. Unmet customer requirements are followed up procedures for following up on unmet customer
in accordance with standard operating procedures. requirements can be identified.

Element 16.3B.4 Promote better customer service

Criteria 16.3B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Methods of improving customer service are identified Where appropriate, methods of improving customer The procedures for reporting/ recommending
and reported. service are reported/recommended in accordance with improvement to customer service can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 841 of 1445
 MEM 16.3B A Advanced customer service Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the knowledge and skills required for the provision of comprehensive assistance to customers across a range of products and services. Situations covered would
be beyond simple sales or enquiries and could include the taking of one-off or special orders requiring detailed descriptions, the handling of complaints referred for more detailed
assistance than the initial point of contact, work as a designated liaison officer etc. Customers can be internal or external. Customer liaison can be undertaken through telephone,
written, e-mail or face-to-face contact. Typical applications of this unit would be found in warehouses, service and design departments.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with customer service or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 842 of 1445
 MEM 16.4A A Perform internal/external customer service Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 16.4A A Perform internal/external customer service

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Communication Unit Weight 2

Element 16.4A.1 Identify customer requirements

Criteria 16.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Customer requirements identified from verbal or written The means by which customer requirements are
communication. identified can be given.

Criteria 16.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Degree to which customer requirements can be met is Customer requirements can be met is clearly and promptly The cost of the required product or service can be
clearly communicated including details such as cost, communicated, using appropriate means. identified. The quantities of the available product can be
delivery date, quantity or quality. identified. The quality of the available product can be
identified. The delivery date of the product or service can
be identified. The reasons for informing the customer
promptly of the ability/inability to meet the customer
requirements can be explained.

Criteria 16.4A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alternatives proposed for any inability to completely Where appropriate, alternative products and/or services Alternative products and/or services that may meet the
satisfy customer requirements. are proposed to the customer in accordance with standard customer's requirements can be identified.
operating procedures.

Element 16.4A.2 Action customer requirements

Criteria 16.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate action taken to implement customer Appropriate action taken to implement customer The procedures for actioning customer orders can be
requirements. requirements in accordance with standard operating identified. The procedures for recording and actioning
procedures. customer complaints can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 843 of 1445
 MEM 16.4A A Perform internal/external customer service Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 16.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Customer requirements not able to be met are recorded Customer requirements not able to be met are recorded and The procedure for recording customer requirement which
and followed up. follow up checks undertaken according to standard are not met can be identified. The procedures for
operating procedures. following up on customer requirements which are not met
can be identified.

Range statement
This unit covers the knowledge and skills required for the provision of assistance to internal/external customers across a range of products and services. Situations covered would
go beyond simple sales and enquiries and could include taking one-off or special orders requiring detailed descriptions or handling of complaints. Customers liaison can be
undertaken through telephone, written, e-mail or face to face contact. Typical applications of this unit would be found in service and design departments. This unit should not be
selected when Unit 16.3B (Advanced customer service) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with customer service or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 844 of 1445
 MEM 17.1A A Assist in development and deliver training in the workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 17.1A A Assist in development and deliver training in the workplace
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Training Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit is intended to equate with Workplace Trainer Category 1 This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and
Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.4C11 Assist in the provision of on the job training

Element 17.1A.1 Plan for delivery of on-the-job training

Criteria 17.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Objectives of training and competency to be achieved are The competencies to be achieved through the training
identified. can be identified.

Criteria 17.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Role in provision of training clarified. The role of the trainer in the provision of training can be
described.

Element 17.1A.2 Deliver on-the-job training

Criteria 17.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Training objectives explained to trainee. The trainer explains the training objectives and
competencies to be achieved to the trainee.

Criteria 17.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Training carried out using appropriate techniques: logical The training is carried out using appropriate techniques. The training techniques to be used in delivering the
presentation; sound communication methods; training can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
explanation, demonstration; practice; feedback. chosen training techniques can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 845 of 1445
 MEM 17.1A A Assist in development and deliver training in the workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 17.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Trainee progress monitored and constructive feedback Positive feedback is provided to the trainee throughout The procedures for recording trainee progress can be
provided to trainee. the training program. Trainee progress is monitored and given. The reasons for providing positive feedback can
recorded in accordance with standard operating be given.
procedures.

Element 17.1A.3 Review training program

Criteria 17.1A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Training program evaluated according to standard The training program is evaluated in accordance with The procedures for evaluating training programs can be
operating procedure. standard operating procedures. given. The reasons for evaluating training programs can
be explained.

Criteria 17.1A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Training data recorded according to standard operating Training data is recorded in accordance with standard The training records to be kept can be identified. The
procedure. operating procedures. procedures for recording training data can be given.

Criteria 17.1A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Report on training according to standard operating Reports on training completed and training required, are The procedures for preparing training reports can be
procedure. completed in accordance with standard operating given.
procedures.

Criteria 17.1A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Promote training according to standard operating Training is promoted within the workplace in accordance The procedures for promoting training in the workplace
procedure. with standard operating procedures. can be given. The reasons for promoting training in the
workplace can be explained/

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 846 of 1445
 MEM 17.1A A Assist in development and deliver training in the workplace Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Training is delivered in a one-to-one or small group situation. The training may be structured or informal and based on co-operation between trainer and other training personnel.
Both underpinning knowledge and practical skills are covered by the training. Training may be applied to technical, induction, OHS, or other areas. Normal supervision of an
apprentice is covered by Unit 2.4C11 (Assist in the provision of on the job training). This unit does not cover assessment. Assessor skills are covered in Unit 17.2A (Conduct
workplace assessment).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the development and delivery and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
of training or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 847 of 1445
 MEM 17.2A A Conduct workplace assessment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 17.2A A Conduct workplace assessment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Training Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)

Element 17.2A.1 Identify and plan assessment requirements

Criteria 17.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Area and purpose of assessment identified in The area and purpose of the assessment can be
consultation with appropriate personnel and person(s) identified. The persons to be consulted when
being assessed. determining the assessments to be carried out can be
identified.

Criteria 17.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate competency standard(s) and assessment All relevant competency standards and assessment guides The relevant competencies can be identified.
guides identified and selected as required. are obtained in accordance with workplace procedures.

Criteria 17.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evidence required to established competency determined The evidence required to establish competency can be
in accordance with industry assessment procedure. identified. The reasons for identifying the evidence to be
obtained can be given. The industry assessment
procedure can be given.

Criteria 17.2A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evidence required and assessment arrangements The evidence required and the assessment arrangements The reasons for discussing and confirming the
discussed and confirmed in an appropriate way with are discussed and confirmed with the person being assessment arrangements with the person being
person being assessed. assessed. assessed can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 848 of 1445
 MEM 17.2A A Conduct workplace assessment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 17.2A.2 Carry out assessment

Criteria 17.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Agreed assessment procedure implemented in a manner, The assessment is carried out in an appropriate manner at The time and location of the assessment can be
time and location to maximise active participation from a time and location agreed to by all parties. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen time and
assessee(s). location for the assessment can be given.

Criteria 17.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evidence consistent with the agreed assessment Evidence is gathered in accordance with the agreed The methods of gathering the evidence can be identified.
procedure is gathered using appropriate and specified methods and procedures. The evidence gathered is The reasons for using the selected methods of obtaining
methods and tools and documented according to agreed documented in accordance with standard operating evidence can be explained. The procedures for
industry or site procedures. procedures. documenting the assessment can be given.

Criteria 17.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evaluation and assessment decisions made in accordance The evidence is evaluated and assessment decisions made The procedures for evaluating the gathered evidence can
with agreed assessment procedures. in accordance with the agreed assessment procedures. be given.

Criteria 17.2A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Clear and appropriate feedback provided to person(s) Clear and appropriate feedback is provided to the The need to provide clear and positive feedback to the
assessed. assessee. assessee can be given.

Criteria 17.2A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Provide advice to assessee(s) on training needs, appeal Where appropriate, advice is provided to the assessee on The appeals procedure can be given. Where appropriate
mechanisms as appropriate. training needs and/or the appeals procedures. the further training required by the assessee can be
identified.

Element 17.2A.3 Record results and review the procedure

Criteria 17.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assessment results recorded in accordance with industry Assessment results are recorded in accordance with The procedures for recording assessment results can be
or site procedures. standard operating procedures. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 849 of 1445
 MEM 17.2A A Conduct workplace assessment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 17.2A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records kept/stored in a manner appropriate to Records are safely and securely stored in accordance with The need to keep records securely stored can be
maintenance of confidentiality and safety. standard operating procedures. explained. The procedures for storing assessment
records can be given.

Criteria 17.2A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assessment procedure reviewed in co-operation with The assessment procedure is reviewed in cooperation with The procedures for reviewing assessments undertaken
person being assessed and revised if appropriate. the assessee. Where appropriate, the assessment can be given. The reasons for evaluating assessment
procedure is revised in accordance with standard methods/procedures can be explained. The procedures
operating procedures. for revising assessment procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 850 of 1445
 MEM 17.2A A Conduct workplace assessment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Appropriate assessment techniques will be selected based on assessor knowledge of the competency to be assessed or in conjunction with someone who is competent (technical
expert). Methods may include observation, documentation, demonstration, projects, oral tests, computer based assessment, written tests, etc. Purpose of assessment may include
recognition of prior learning, determination of award classification level or identification of training needed. Evidence gathered should address task skills, task management,
contingency management application. Assessment methods and tools should address issues such as clarity, reliability, validity of results, fairness in assessment application and
cost effectiveness of process. Assessment may be undertaken on an individual basis or in groups. This unit is intended to equate to national competency standards Assessment
Standard Unit: Conduct assessment in accordance with an established procedure and the Extension Unit: Plan and review assessment. This competency also meets the assessment
skills required to be a recognised MERS ITAB workplace assessor.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with workplace assessment or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 851 of 1445
 MEM 18.1A B Use hand tools Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.1A B Use hand tools

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2

Element 18.1A.1 Use hand tools

Criteria 18.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate hand tools selected according to the task The appropriate hand tools are selected in accordance The task(s) to be performed can be identified. The
requirements. with the task requirements. appropriate hand tools for the task(s) to be performed
can be selected from a range of hand tools provided. The
reasons for selecting the chosen hand tools can be
explained.

Criteria 18.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hand tools used to produce desired outcomes to job The appropriate hand tools are used to produce the The outcomes to be achieved by the use of hand tools
specifications which may include finish, tension, size or desired outcomes to job specifications. can be identified. The job specifications to be achieved
shape. by the use of hand tools can be identified.

Criteria 18.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All safety requirements are adhered to before, during and All safety procedures are followed at all times and The safety procedures to be followed before, during and
after use. appropriate personal protective clothing and safety after the use of hand tools can be identified. The
equipment are used. personal protective clothing and safety equipment to be
used when using hand tools can be identified.

Criteria 18.1A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unsafe or faulty tools identified and marked for repair Where appropriate, unsafe or faulty tools identified before, Common faults and/or defects in hand tools can be
according to designated procedures before, during and during or after use are marked for repair in accordance identified. The procedures for marking unsafe or faulty
after use. with standard operating procedures. tools for repair can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 852 of 1445
 MEM 18.1A B Use hand tools Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.1A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Routine maintenance of tools, including hand sharpening Where appropriate, hand tools are maintained/sharpened The routine maintenance requirements of a range of hand
undertaken according to standard operational using appropriate techniques in accordance with standard tools can be identified. The procedures for
procedures, principles and techniques. operating procedures. maintaining/sharpening a range of hand tools can be
identified. The techniques to be used in
maintaining/sharpening a range of hand tools can be
identified.

Criteria 18.1A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hand tools are stored safely in appropriate location All hand tools are safely stored in the appropriate location The storage location of a range of hand tools can be
according to standard operational procedures and in accordance with manufacturer's/standard operating identified. The procedures for storing a range of hand
manufacturer's recommendations. procedures. tools can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 853 of 1445
 MEM 18.1A B Use hand tools Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures involving the use of various hand tools,
including but not limited to hacksaws, hammers, punches, screwdrivers, sockets, wrenches, scrapers, chisels, gouges, wood planes and files of all cross-sectional shapes and types.
Applications may include hand tools used for adjusting, dismantling, assembling and finishing of items or components and the finishing, cutting, scraping of metallic and
non-metallic material to size and shape. This includes simple tapping and threading. Routine maintenance tasks may include cleaning, lubricating, tightening, simple tool repairs,
hand sharpening and adjustments using engineering principles, tools, equipment and procedures. This unit should not be selected if the hand tool is dedicated to a single operation
or machine and if only a machine specific/customised tool is used. For using power tools used for hand held operations see Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the use of hand tools or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 854 of 1445
 MEM 18.2A A Use power tools/hand held operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.2A A Use power tools/hand held operations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2

Element 18.2A.1 Use power tools

Criteria 18.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate power tools selected according to the task The appropriate power tools are selected in accordance The task(s) to be performed can be identified. The
requirements. with the task requirements. appropriate power tools for the task(s) to be performed
can be selected from a range of power tools provided.
The reasons for selecting the chosen power tools can be
explained.

Criteria 18.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Power tools used following a determined sequence of The appropriate power tools are used to produce the The outcomes to be achieved by the use of power tools
operations which may include clamping, alignment and desired outcomes to job specifications. Where can be identified. The job specifications to be achieved
adjustment to produce desired outcomes to job appropriate, workpiece is clamped in accordance with by the use of power tools can be identified. The need to
specifications which may include finish, size or shape. standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, the secure workpieces when using power tools can be
power tool is aligned and adjusted to achieve the desired explained. A range of clamping/securing devices and
outcome. their application can be identified. The adjustments that
can be made to a range of power tools can be identified.
The tools and procedures to be used in adjusting a range
of power tools can be identified. The need to align
power tools to achieve the required outcomes can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 855 of 1445
 MEM 18.2A A Use power tools/hand held operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All safety requirements are adhered to before, during and All safety procedures are followed at all times and The safety procedures to be followed before, during and
after use, appropriate personal protective clothing and safety after the use of power tools can be identified. The
equipment are used, personal protective clothing and safety equipment to be
used when using power tools can be identified.

Criteria 18.2A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unsafe or faulty tools identified and marked for repair Where appropriate, unsafe or faulty tools identified before, Common faults and/or defects in power tools can be
according to designated procedures before, during and during or after use are marked for repair in accordance identified. The procedures for marking unsafe or faulty
after use. with standard operating procedures. tools for repair can be given.

Criteria 18.2A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operational maintenance of tools, including hand Where appropriate, power tools are maintained/sharpened The operational maintenance requirements of a range of
sharpening, undertaken according to standard workplace using appropriate techniques in accordance with standard power tools can be identified. The procedures for
procedures, principles and techniques. operating procedures. maintaining/sharpening a range of power tools can be
identified. The techniques to be used in
maintaining/sharpening a range of power tools can be
identified.

Criteria 18.2A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Power tools stored safely in appropriate location All power tools are safely stored in the appropriate The storage location of a range of power tools can be
according to standard workshop procedure and location in accordance with manufacturer's/ standard identified. The procedures for storing a range of power
manufacturer's recommendations. operating procedures. tools can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 856 of 1445
 MEM 18.2A A Use power tools/hand held operations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures involving the use of various power tools,
including but not limited to electric or pneumatic drills, grinders, jigsaws, nibblers, cutting saws, sanders, planers, routers, pedestal drills and pedestal grinders. Applications may
extend to loosening and fastening of items or components and the finishing, cutting, grinding of metallic and non-metallic materials and/or tool bits to size and shape. Routine
maintenance tasks may include cleaning, lubricating, tightening, simple tool repairs and adjustments using engineering principles, tools, equipment and procedures to statutory and
regulatory requirements. This unit should not be selected if the power tools used are dedicated to an operation or machine, ie. nut-runner, air drill, power driver etc. For using hand
tools see Unit 18.1A (Use hand tools).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the use of power tools in and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
hand held operations or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 857 of 1445
 MEM 18.3A B Use tools for precision work Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.3A B Use tools for precision work

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 18.3A.1 Use tools to produce precision work to specifications

Criteria 18.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct tools, processes and equipment selected All relevant drawings, specifications, instructions etc. are The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
according to outcome requirements. obtained in accordance with work place procedures. specifications to be achieved can be identified. The
appropriate tools, processes and equipment required to
carry out the work to the required specifications are
selected. The reasons for selecting the chosen tools,
processes and equipment can be explained.

Criteria 18.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work area prepared and made safe. The work area(s) is prepared and made safe prior to the The hazards associated with using the selected tools,
work being carried out in accordance with standard processes and equipment can be identified. The safety
operating procedures. procedures to be followed to ensure the safety of the
individual and other personnel can be given. The area(s)
in which the work is to be carried out can be identified.
Any hazards associated with carrying out the work in
those area(s) can be identified.

Criteria 18.3A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools used according to acceptable engineering The appropriate tools are used to produce the specified The procedures for using the selected tools can be
principles, methods, applications and procedures to outcomes in accordance with standard operating given. The engineering principles to be applied during
produce specified outcome. procedures. the use of the tools can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 858 of 1445
 MEM 18.3A B Use tools for precision work Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.3A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools and equipment inspected for safe and proper All tools and equipment used are checked for safe and The manufacturer's specifications of the tools and
working order before, during and after use. proper working order before, during and after use, in equipment selected can be identified. The safe and
accordance with standard operating procedures. proper function of tools and equipment selected can be
identified. The procedures for checking tools and
equipment for correct and safe operation can be given.

Criteria 18.3A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unsafe or faulty tools/equipment identified, repaired Where appropriate, unsafe or faulty tools and equipment Common faults and/or defects in tools and equipment
where appropriate, or marked for repair and/or disposal, are marked for repair in accordance with standard used/selected can be identified. The procedures for
according to prescribed procedure. operating procedures. Where appropriate, unsafe or faulty marking unsafe or faulty tools and equipment for repair
tools are repaired/maintained in accordance with standard can be given. The repairs/operational maintenance that
operating procedures. can be made to the tools and equipment used/selected
can be identified. The procedures for
repairing/maintaining the tools and equipment
used/selected can be given.

Element 18.3A.2 Tools and equipment stored appropriately

Criteria 18.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition of tools/equipment checked and appropriately The condition of all tools and equipment is checked for The procedures for checking tools and equipment prior
actioned. conformance to specifications and safe and proper to storage can be identified.
operation prior to storage, in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

Criteria 18.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools prepared for storage in appropriate location to All tools and equipment are safely stored in the The storage location of the tools and equipment
standard workshop procedures and manufacturer's appropriate location in accordance with standard used/selected can be identified. The procedures for
recommendations. operating procedures. storing tools and equipment used/selected can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 859 of 1445
 MEM 18.3A B Use tools for precision work Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures involving the use of a variety of tools,
instruments and power equipment to perform precision tasks. Where specifications are interpreted from engineering drawings, detailed/technical sketches and associated
documents, Unit 9.2A (Interpret technical drawing) should be accessed. Skill applications involve precision tasks, including cutting out, drilling, fitting, tapping, filing, reaming,
lapping, broaching, burnishing, scraping, polishing, hand held grinding, chiselling to achieve precision outcomes on a range of metallic and non-metallic materials. Inspection and
preventative maintenance of tools and equipment involves the visual checking of leads, connections, sharpening of cutting equipment and the repair of associated tools. Tools
covered by this unit include any tools required to achieve precision outcomes. Where precision measurement is required, Unit 12.3 A (Precision mechanical measurement) should
be accessed. Where precision marking out is required, Unit 12.6 A (Mark off/out (general engineering)) should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the use of tools for precision and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
work or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 860 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.5A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.7A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and
components mechanical transmission assemblies
18.9A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.4A.1 Perform preventative maintenance tasks and adjustments

Criteria 18.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance schedule read and task The preventative maintenance schedule is obtained in The preventative maintenance tasks to be undertaken
requirements determined.. accordance with work place procedures. can be identified. The purpose of preventative
maintenance can be explained.

Criteria 18.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate maintenance principles and Preventative maintenance tasks are carried out using The procedures for carrying out the maintenance tasks
techniques, routine maintenance tasks are performed on appropriate tools, techniques, equipment and procedures. identified in the preventative maintenance schedule can
mechanical equipment, components or sub-assemblies be given. The tools, equipment, techniques and/or
using correct tools, equipment and procedures. procedures to be applied in carrying out the preventative
maintenance tasks can be identified. The reasons for
selecting chosen tools, equipment, techniques and/or
procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 861 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.4A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical equipment, components, sub-assemblies All components of the system being maintained are The safety procedures to be followed when carrying out
checked visually and with test equipment, using checked visually and with test equipment to ensure correct preventative maintenance can be given. The procedures
prescribed procedures and safety requirements to ensure function or to determine malfunction in accordance with for checking/testing the components of the system being
correct function or determine malfunction. safety and standard operating procedures. maintained can be given. The relevant test equipment
and techniques required to test the components of the
system can be identified. The correct function of the
components of the system being maintained can be
described. The visual checks to be undertaken can be
identified.

Criteria 18.4A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments made to equipment or components to The system being maintained and/or its components are The procedures for adjusting the system being
ensure specifications are met using acceptable fitting adjusted in conformance with specifications using maintained and/or its components can be given. The
techniques and procedures, observing all safety appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in safety procedures to be followed when adjusting the
requirements. accordance with standard operating procedures. system and/or its components can be given. The
adjustments that can be made to the system and/or its
components can be identified. The operational
specifications of the system and its components can be
identified. The tools, techniques and equipment
necessary to carry out the adjustments can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques
and equipment can be given.

Element 18.4A.2 Diagnose and locate faults

Criteria 18.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment component function determined and All relevant drawings, specifications, manuals and The equipment function and operational requirements
understood by reference to engineering drawings, documentation are obtained in accordance with work place can be identified.
technical manuals and or consultation with appropriate procedures. Where appropriate, relevant personnel are
personnel. consulted with respect to the function and operational
requirements of the equipment.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 862 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance reports checked, reviewed and faults Relevant maintenance reports are obtained in accordance Any recurring faults or failures can be identified. The
diagnosed. with work place procedures. likely causes of any recurring faults or failures can be
given.

Criteria 18.4A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consultation with operators and other relevant plant Operators and other relevant personnel are consulted with All relevant information likely to assist in locating the
personnel is carried out to assist in locating faults. respect to equipment faults, failures and out of fault obtained from operators and other personnel can be
specification operation. identified. The reasons for consulting with operators
and other relevant personnel can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, test equipment selected and applied Where appropriate, test equipment is used in accordance The test equipment that is available to assist in fault
in accordance with defined requirements and procedures with standard operating procedures to assist in fault detection/location can be identified. The test
to assist fault location. location. Where appropriate, the test results are recorded procedures, techniques and their application can be
in accordance with standard operating procedures. given. Where appropriate, the reasons for selecting the
chosen test(s) can be given. The procedures for
recording test results can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition diagnosed and localised at component The test results are used to identify the fault condition at
level using appropriate test equipment and procedures. the component level.

Criteria 18.4A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty condition evaluated and appropriate corrective The appropriate action is taken to rectify the fault in the The cause of the fault(s) can be identified. The means of
action taken. system component(s) in accordance with standard correcting the fault(s) can be identified. The reasons for
operating procedures. selecting the chosen means of correcting the fault(s) can
be explained. The procedures to be followed in
undertaking the corrective action can be given. The
tools, equipment and techniques to be used in
undertaking the corrective action can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen tools, equipment and
techniques can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 863 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.4A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults documented to standard operating procedures. The faults detected and the maintenance activities carried The procedures for documenting faults and maintenance
out in correcting the fault are documented in accordance activities undertaken can be given. The reasons for
with standard operating procedures. documenting faults and maintenance activities
undertaken can be explained.

Element 18.4A.3 Repair or overhaul mechanical system

Criteria 18.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine or equipment isolated safely or checked for The machine or equipment is safely isolated or checked for The procedures for isolating the machine or equipment
isolation. isolation in accordance with standard operating can be given. The procedures for checking the machine
procedures. or equipment for isolation can be given. The reasons for
confirming that the machines or equipment to be
maintained/overhauled have been isolated prior to
commencing work can be explained.

Criteria 18.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty equipment, component or sub-assembly removed The faulty component is removed from the system using The procedures for removing the faulty component can
from system using appropriate engineering principles, appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in be given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be
tools, equipment and procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. used in removing the faulty component can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques,
equipment and procedures can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replaceable items selected from manufacturer's The relevant catalogues are obtained in accordance with The appropriate replacement parts can be identified. The
catalogues and obtained by appropriate means. workplace procedures. The appropriate replacement parts procedures for obtaining replacement parts can be given.
are obtained in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 864 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.4A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct repair procedure, tools and equipment selected Serviceable parts/items can be identified. The appropriate
and prepared for use on serviceable items. repair procedures can be identified. The tools,
equipment and techniques to be used to repair the
serviceable parts/items can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen repair procedure, tools, equipment
and techniques can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate engineering principles, designated The serviceable items are repaired/ overhauled in The specifications of the serviceable parts/items can be
procedures, correct tools, equipment and safe workshop conformance to specifications in accordance with standard identified.
practices, serviceable items repaired or overhauled to operating procedures.
manufacturer's or site specifications.

Criteria 18.4A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components checked with precision instruments to Where appropriate, repaired/ overhauled components are The precision measuring instruments to be used to check
ensure conformance to specifications where applicable. checked with precision instruments to ensure conformance the repaired/overhauled components can be identified.
to specifications. The reasons for selecting the chosen precision
measuring instruments and techniques can be given.

Element 18.4A.4 Fit and adjust mechanical equipment

Criteria 18.4A.4.0 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All electrical, safety and site requirements adhered to All relevant electrical, safety and site requirements are The electrical, safety and site requirements impacting on
throughout maintenance cycle. adhered to during the maintenance cycle. the maintenance to be carried out can be identified.

Criteria 18.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fitting requirements determined and sequential assembly The fitting requirements for assembling components can
planning is carried out where applicable. be identified. The appropriate sequence of assembly
tasks can be determined and explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 865 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance report completed to standard operating The maintenance report is completed in accordance with The procedures for reporting/documenting maintenance
procedures and conveyed to designated personnel. standard operating procedures and conveyed to the undertaken/completed can be given. The
appropriate person. person/authority to whom the report/documentation is to
be given can be identified.

Criteria 18.4A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sound fitting principles and techniques applied in the Components are prepared and assembled using The requirements of the assembly in terms of
preparation and assembly of component parts using appropriate fitting techniques and principles. specifications, operational performance, quality and
fastening equipment and methods which ensure safety can be identified. Examples of situations where
conformance to specifications, operational performance, other assembly techniques may be used can be given.
quality and safety.

Criteria 18.4A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable maintenance practices correct gland Where appropriate, gland packing, jointing or gasket The purpose of using gland packing, jointing or gasket
packing, jointing, gasket materials selected and applied materials are applied using acceptable engineering materials can be explained. The reasons for selecting
correctly in conformance to specifications and practices. particular jointing or packing materials can be given.
operational requirements. Examples of other applications of jointing and/or packing
materials can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct lubrication requirements determined by Where appropriate, suitable lubricants are applied to the The applications of different types of lubricants can be
appropriate means and attended to where applicable assembly using acceptable engineering practices. identified. The consequences of using inappropriate or
using mechanical or manual applications. no lubricant can be explained.

Criteria 18.4A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate wedges and levelling devices used to level Where appropriate, suitable tools, techniques and The procedures for levelling mechanical equipment can
mechanical equipment as appropriate. equipment are used to level mechanical equipment. be given. The tools, techniques and equipment required
to level mechanical equipment can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and
equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 866 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.4A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct alignment and balancing functions performed Where appropriate, suitable alignment and balancing The procedures for aligning and balancing mechanical
where appropriate. functions are performed on the mechanical equipment. equipment can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment required to carry out the aligning and
balancing functions can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.4.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final adjustments are performed on mechanical Components are checked for conformance to The types of adjustment applicable to the components
equipment to align to operational specifications using specifications. Where appropriate, components are being assembled can be identified. The consequences of
acceptable engineering principles, fitting techniques and adjusted to achieve conformance to specifications in not adjusting the components to conform to
procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. specifications can be given. The procedures for
adjusting the components can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.4.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical equipment tested for accuracy and correct Where appropriate, the mechanical equipment is tested for The procedures for testing the mechanical equipment for
operation where applicable, and returned to service to accuracy and correct operation. The mechanical equipment accuracy and correct operation can be given. The tools,
specifications using acceptable procedures. is returned to service in accordance with standard techniques and equipment required to test the
operating procedures. mechanical equipment can be given. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given. The procedures for returning to service
mechanical equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.4A.4.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate work and safety clearances obtained All appropriate work and safety clearances are obtained The work and safety clearances to be obtained during
throughout maintenance cycle. during the maintenance cycle. the maintenance cycle can be identified. The reasons for
obtaining work and safety clearances can be explained.
The authority/person from whom work and safety
clearances are to be obtained can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 867 of 1445
 MEM 18.4A A Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit should be selected where an integrated level of skills in maintenance and overhaul of most types of mechanical equipment required. This unit is meant to build on skills
covered by the specialist prerequisites. Where individual skills are required, specialist units should be selected. Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using
predetermined standards of safety, quality and workshop procedures. Where applicable all replacement items are selected from manufacturer's catalogues in conformance to
specifications and operational requirements. Specifications interpreted from engineering drawings, detailed technical sketches and sources of technical data. Where extensive
system knowledge for safe shut down/isolation of machinery/equipment is required see Unit 18.11A (Shut down/isolate machines/equipment).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
overhaul of mechanical equipment or other units requiring the exercise plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 868 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.5A.1 Perform routine bearing checks during operation and non-operation
Criteria 18.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing installation inspected and task requirements The bearing installation is inspected. The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
determined by most appropriate means. reasons for identifying the work to be undertaken can be
given.

Criteria 18.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing installation checked during operation using The bearing installation is checked for signs of The procedures for checking bearings during operation
standard procedures of listening, feeling, observing malfunction using appropriate techniques in accordance using sensory means and test equipment can be given.
and/or correct and appropriate test equipment. with standard operating procedures. The reasons for selecting the chosen techniques to
check the bearing installation can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Seal condition checked for seal and wear leaks using The bearing seals are checked for wear and leaks in The procedures for checking bearing seals for leaks and
correct and appropriate means. accordance with standard operating procedures. wear can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lubricating devices checked for correct operation using The lubricating devices are checked for correct operation The procedures for checking lubricating devices for
correct and appropriate tools and techniques. using appropriate tools, equipment and techniques in correct operation can be given. The tools, equipment and
accordance with standard operating procedures. techniques to be used in checking lubricating devices
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 869 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.5A.2 Diagnose bearing faults

Criteria 18.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Visual and sensory inspection of bearing arrangement Bearings are inspected using sensory techniques in
performed. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, given manufacturer's specifications Where appropriate, the bearing installation is tested for The equipment manufacturer's specifications can be
and diagnostic equipment, bearings tested for correct correct operation or to determine malfunction in identified.
operation or malfunction using acceptable techniques, accordance with standard operating procedures.
tools and procedures.

Criteria 18.5A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate knowledge of engineering principles, Faulty bearings are identified for replacement. The reasons for deciding to replace/not replace given
faulty bearings identified for replacement. bearings can be given. The timeframe in which the
bearing should be replaced can be identified. Where
appropriate, the need for further monitoring of the
bearing can be identified. The reasons for deciding to
replace the faulty bearing immediately or at the next
scheduled machine down time can be explained.

Criteria 18.5A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, causes of failure identified using Where appropriate, the failed bearing is tested using The procedures for testing failed bearings can be given.
correct and appropriate techniques and equipment. appropriate tests, techniques and equipment in Common causes of bearing failure and their indicators
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. The tools, techniques and equipment
to be used to test failed bearings can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen tests, tools, techniques
and equipment can be given. The cause(s) of the bearing
failure can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 870 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.5A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate corrective action taken to avoid Where appropriate, corrective action is undertaken to The corrective action to be undertaken for given causes
recurrences. avoid a recurrence of bearing failure. of bearing failure can be identified.

Element 18.5A.3 Identify bearing requirements for replacement or installation

Criteria 18.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing installation inspected and task requirements The bearing installation is inspected. The work to be undertaken can be identified. The
determined. reasons for identifying the work to be undertaken can be
given.

Criteria 18.5A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate knowledge of bearings and The application of a range of bearings can be identified.
engineering principles, operational function of bearings The operational function of each given bearing can be
to be installed or replaced is determined and understood. given. The mounting and lubricating requirements of
each given bearing can be given.

Element 18.5A.4 Remove bearings

Criteria 18.5A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate bearing removal techniques and The procedures for removing a range of bearings can be
tools determined. given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be used
to remove given bearings can be identified. The reasons
for minimising damage to shafts and housings during
bearing removal can be explained.

Criteria 18.5A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearings removed from shafts or bearing housings using Bearings are removed from shafts and/or bearing housings The type of bearing to be removed can be identified. The
correct and appropriate technique, minimising damage to using the most appropriate technique in accordance with bearing removal procedure, tools, technique and
component. standard operating procedures. equipment to be used can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen procedure, tools, technique and
equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 871 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.5A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition of serviceable items such as shafts and The shafts and housings are inspected using appropriate The procedures for measuring and testing shafts and
housings inspected using correct and appropriate measuring and test equipment in accordance with standard housings can be given. The tools, equipment and
measuring and test equipment. operating procedures. techniques to be used to measure/test the shafts and
housings can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen procedures, tests, tools, equipment and
techniques can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceable items repaired using correct and appropriate Serviceable shafts and housings are repaired using Serviceable shafts and housings can be identified. The
engineering, techniques, tools and equipment. appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in reasons for deciding that shafts and housings are
accordance with standard operating procedures. serviceable/ unserviceable can be given. The procedures,
tools, techniques and equipment to be used to repair
housings and shafts can be identified.

Element 18.5A.5 Install plain bearings

Criteria 18.5A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Standard replaceable items for plain, wrapped, flanged, All relevant parts lists, catalogues, drawings, etc. are Replaceable items can be identified. The specifications of
split bush and thrust bearings selected from obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. the replaceable items can be identified. The appropriate
manufacturer's parts lists, catalogues or engineering replaceable items for given situations can be identified.
drawings. The reasons for selecting the chosen replaceable items
can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate installation techniques and tools The procedures for installing plain bearings can be
selected. given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be used
to install plain bearings can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 872 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.5A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing sized to correct clearance using correct and Plain bearings are sized to the correct clearance using The procedures for determining the appropriate
appropriate technique, tools and equipment. appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in clearances for a range of plain bearings can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures. The procedures for "sizing" plain bearings can be given.
The tools, techniques and equipment to be used to
"size" the plain bearings can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lubrication requirements catered for to meet specification The plain bearing is lubricated in accordance with The lubrication requirements of given plain bearings can
and/or application requirements. specifications and operational requirements. be identified.

Criteria 18.5A.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing fitted using correct and appropriate installation The bearing is installed using appropriate techniques,
techniques, tools and equipment. tools and equipment.

Criteria 18.5A.5.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing tensioned down and run following standard Where appropriate, the bearing is tensioned down and run The procedures for tensioning down plain bearings can
operating procedures or manufacturer's in accordance with standard operating procedures. be given.
recommendations.

Criteria 18.5A.5.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final clearance, adjustments and lubrication checked and The installed plain bearing is inspected for conformance to The operational specifications of the plain bearing can be
correct and appropriate action taken where required. specifications using appropriate tools, techniques and identified. The procedures for inspecting installed plain
equipment. Where appropriate, the plain bearing is bearings can be given. The procedures for adjusting
adjusted to conform to specifications in accordance with installed plain bearings to specification can be given.
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 873 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.5A.6 Install anti-friction bearings

Criteria 18.5A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Standard replaceable ball and roller anti-friction bearings All relevant parts lists, catalogues, drawings, etc. are Replaceable anti-friction bearings can be identified. The
selected from manufacturer's catalogues, spare parts lists obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. specifications of the replaceable items can be identified.
or interpreted from engineering drawing to meet The appropriate replacement items for given situations
specifications. can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
replacement items can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing inside/outside diameters determined from The inside and outside diameters of anti-friction bearings The appropriate instruments to measure bearing
specifications or manufacturer's catalogue and checked are measured accurately using appropriate measuring diameters can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
using appropriate measuring instruments. instruments. chosen measuring instruments can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Shafts and housings size checked for correct fit and Shafts and housings are measured accurately using The sources of information with respect to shaft and
clearances using appropriate measuring instruments. appropriate measuring instruments. housing fits and clearances can be identified. The shaft
and housing diameters are checked for conformance to fit
and clearance requirements.

Criteria 18.5A.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate installation techniques selected. The procedures for installing a range of anti-friction
bearings can be given. The tools, equipment and
techniques required to install given anti-friction bearings
can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
installation technique, tools and equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.5A.6.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate engineering principles bearings fitted Anti-friction bearings are fitted to shafts and housings
to shafts or housings using correct and appropriate tools, using appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in
equipment, techniques to meet specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 874 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.5A.6.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing sealed and capped where appropriate, to Where appropriate, bearing seals and caps are installed in The procedures for installing bearing seals and caps can
specifications. conformance with specifications and standard operating be given.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 875 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures involving the installation and replacement of plain, ball and roller
bearings. Rotational plain bearings include plain bush, wrapped bush, flanged bush, split bush, self-lubricating and thrust bearings for radial, thrust and combination radial and
thrust loading applications. Ball and roller bearings may include, but are not limited to, self-aligning ball bearings with cylindrical bore, taper bore (and adaptor sleeve), taper bore
(and unthreaded adaptor sleeve); single row deep groove ball bearings, magneto bearings (separable ball bearings), single row angular contact ball bearings, double row angular
contact ball bearings, spherical roller bearings, including narrow type and C design, spherical roller bearings (NV, N NS Type) double row cylindrical roller bearings, linear ball
bearings, needle roller bearings, taper roller bearings, single thrust ball bearings, double thrust ball bearings, single thrust ball bearings with spherical housing washer and seating
ring, spherical roller thrust bearings, radial bearings with cylindrical, tapered bore (and adaptor or withdrawal sleeve) and associated bearings for radial, axial and combination radial
and axial applications. Tasks include routine bearing checks during operation, and non-operation bearing fault diagnostics, bearing removal, replacement, installation and
lubrication using acceptable engineering principles, correct tools and equipment. Methods include the use of press, dowel, keys, keeper plate, heat, shrink and associated methods.
The use of hydraulic and mechanical mounting and dismounting tools is included. All bearing replacements selected from spare parts lists, manufacturer's catalogues, engineering
drawings and data sheets. All lubrication requirements attended to according to bearing manufacturer's specifications, standard operating procedures and lubricant supplier's
instructions. Where no diagnostic skills are required and where straightforward removal and replacement of pre-manufactured bearings is undertaken, Unit 18.6A
(Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components) should be regarded as sufficient.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with fault diagnosis, installation and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and removal of bearings or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 876 of 1445
 MEM 18.5A A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.6A.1 Dismantle and inspect engineering components

Criteria 18.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are inspected and task requirements The tasks to be performed can be identified.
analysed.

Criteria 18.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are clearly marked to aid in reassembly. The component parts are appropriately marked for The reason for identifying parts can be explained.
identification purposes using work site procedures.

Criteria 18.6A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools and equipment selected and The component is prepared for dismantling using work site The tools and equipment to be used to dismantle the
component/s prepared for dismantling. procedures. components can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the tools and equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.6A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components dismantled using appropriate engineering The components are dismantled using work site The reason for utilising the selected technique to
principles, techniques, procedures, tools and equipment. procedures and appropriate techniques, tools and dismantle the components can be given. Two examples
equipment. of situations where other dismantling techniques may be
selected can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 877 of 1445
 MEM 18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.6A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operational specifications for components obtained from Operational specifications for the component/s are An alternative source of the operational specifications
appropriate source and interpreted and understood. obtained. can be identified. The specifications relevant to the
components to be repaired/replaced can be identified.

Criteria 18.6A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Damaged or faulty components assessed against The component/s are visually and dimensionally checked The consequences of having components that do not
operational specifications. against the operational specifications using work site comply with operational specifications can be explained.
procedures.

Criteria 18.6A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components identified for repair, replacement, Where required the component parts that are to be The reason(s) for identifying parts for repair, replacement
adjustment or manufacture. repaired, replaced or manufactured are marked or manufacture can be given. Two examples of situations
appropriately using work site procedures. where parts would be identified for repair can be given.
Two examples of situations where parts would be
identified for replacement can be given. Two examples of
situations where parts would be identified for
manufacture can be given.

Element 18.6A.2 Repair/Replace faulty components

Criteria 18.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components repaired or adjusted to conform to Repaired components are visually and dimensionally The types of adjustment applicable to the components
specifications. checked for conformance to specifications. Components being repaired/fitted can be identified. Two examples of
are adjusted to achieve conformance to specifications the consequences of not adjusting components to
where appropriate. conform to specifications can be given.

Criteria 18.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Method of repair determined as appropriate. Appropriate methods of repair can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 878 of 1445
 MEM 18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.6A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable replacement parts selected from Replacement parts selected conform to specifications. The features and/or dimensions upon which replacement
manufacturers' catalogue and assessed against parts are to be selected can be identified. The process of
specifications. identifying replacement parts from "third party"
supplier's catalogues can be described.

Element 18.6A.3 Manufacture parts/components

Criteria 18.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts/component specifications determined by most Three potential sources of parts/components
appropriate means. specifications can be identified.

Criteria 18.6A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials selected to meet specification requirements. The material properties required can be identified. The
reason for selecting particular material(s) can be
explained.

Criteria 18.6A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials marked out according to specification using Where required, material is marked out to specification The reasons for selecting the marking out method, tools
most appropriate tools, methods and equipment. using work site procedures. and/or equipment used can be explained.

Criteria 18.6A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
New components drilled, scraped, filed, reamed, tapped, Where required, appropriate manufacturing operations are The manufacturing operations to be utilised in the
threaded etc. in conformance to specifications using performed using work site procedures. production of new components can be identified. The
appropriate workshop practices. sequence of operations to be used in the production of
new components can be determined and explained.

Criteria 18.6A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Completed components inspected for compliance with Component parts are measured and checked against The consequences of component parts not complying
dimensions. specifications. with specifications can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 879 of 1445
 MEM 18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.6A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, component parts are marked for The component parts are appropriately marked for The reasons for identifying parts prior to assembly can
identification prior to assembly. identification purposes, where required. be explained.

Element 18.6A.4 Fit engineering components into assemblies or subassemblies

Criteria 18.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fitting requirements and sequential assembly planning is The fitting requirements for assembling components can
carried out where applicable. be identified. The appropriate sequence of assembly
tasks can be determined and explained.

Criteria 18.6A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate fitting principles and techniques applied in Components are prepared and assembled using The requirements of the assembly in terms of
the preparation and assembly of component parts using appropriate fitting techniques and principles. specifications, operational performance, quality and
fastening equipment and methods which ensures safety can be identified. Two examples of situations
conformance to specifications, operational performance, where other assembly techniques may be used can be
quality and safety. given.

Criteria 18.6A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable engineering practices, correct gland Where appropriate, gland packing, jointing or gasket The purpose of using gland packing, jointing or gasket
packing, jointing/gasket materials selected and applied materials are applied, using acceptable engineering materials can be explained. The reasons for selecting
correctly in conformance to specifications and practices. particular jointing or packing materials can be given. Two
operational requirements. examples of other applications of jointing and/or packing
materials can be given.

Criteria 18.6A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct lubrication requirements determined by Appropriate lubricants are applied to the assembly using The applications of different types of lubricants can be
appropriate means and attended to where applicable. acceptable engineering practices, where required. identified. The consequences of using inappropriate or
no lubricant can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 880 of 1445
 MEM 18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.6A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final adjustments are performed on component assembly Components are checked for conformance to specification. The types of adjustment applicable to the components
to meet operational specifications using acceptable Where appropriate components are adjusted to achieve being assembled can be identified. Two examples of the
engineering principles, fitting techniques and procedures. conformance to specifications. consequences of not adjusting components to conform
to specification can be given.

Criteria 18.6A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Out of specification modification/alterations approved by Where appropriate, any approved The reasons for modifying/altering
appropriate authority, recorded and documented to modifications/alterations are recorded to work site components/assemblies to an out of specification
standard operating procedure. procedures. situation can be given. The need to have approval for
out of specification modifications can be explained. The
reasons for documenting out of specification
modifications can be given.

Criteria 18.6A.4.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final component assembly inspected for compliance to The final assembly is inspected and conformance to Return to service procedures can be identified. The
operational specifications and returned to service operational specifications checked. Where appropriate the consequences of not following work site return to
according to standard operating procedure. final assembly is returned to service in accordance with service procedures can be explained.
work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 881 of 1445
 MEM 18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. This unit includes the fitting and
maintenance of engineering components involving the dismantling, repair, replacement, assembling and final fitting of items, sub-assemblies and assemblies. All specifications
interpreted from engineering drawings, detailed/technical sketches and associated data sheets. Tasks undertaken utilising engineering and maintenance principles, designated
procedures, correct and appropriate tools, equipment and safe workshop practices. Where applicable replacement parts selected from manufacturer's catalogues in conformance
with specifications and operational requirements. Appropriate fitting principles and techniques are utilised in the assembly of component parts using fastening equipment and
methods which ensures conformance to specifications, operational performance, quality and safety. This includes the straight forward removal and replacement of pre-manufactured
bearings and seals. Using acceptable maintenance procedures, appropriate lubrication, gland packing, jointing/gaskets, seals, materials are selected and applied in conformance to
application requirements and specifications as applicable. Using acceptable workshop practices new components manufactured including by marking out, drilling, scraping, filing,
reaming, tapping or threading to specifications. This unit does not address machining competencies and welding, if these are required, the appropriate units should also be
accessed. Where additional or higher marking out skills are required, refer Unit 12.6A (Mark off/out (general engineering)). The knowledge and skills associated with the installation,
removal, repair or replacement of mechanical seals is covered by Unit 18.12A (Mechanical seals - installation and removal). For high pressure fluid power seals see Unit 18.20A
(Maintain hydraulic system components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, material and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. drawings, manuals, parts lists, catalogues and information relevant to the work. The candidate
will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by
the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units An individual would be expected to demonstrate competency in this unit at all times. The
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, individual may be required to make judgements based on knowledge of the properties of
recording and reporting associated with the dismantling, repairing, engineering materials, surface finishes, tolerances, limits and fits, lubrication, seals, standard
replacing, assembling and fitting of engineering components, or other hardware items, bearings and standard engineering components. During assessment, the
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; - communicate information
this unit. Competence in this unit cannot be claimed until all about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe and efficient working
prerequisites have been satisfied. environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; - plan tasks in all
situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in accordance with

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 882 of 1445
 MEM 18.6A A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use accepted engineering
techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 883 of 1445
 MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.9A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components components

Element 18.7A.1 Undertake maintenance checks of mechanical drives and mechanical transmission components
Criteria 18.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles of mechanical drives and mechanical The principles of operation of a range of mechanical
transmission components understood. drives and transmissions can be given.

Criteria 18.7A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The function of the main parts of the designated The function of the main components of a range of
mechanical drive/transmission assembly understood. mechanical drives and transmissions can be given.

Criteria 18.7A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate maintenance principles, techniques, Mechanical drives, transmissions and their components Examples of common malfunctions in mechanical drives,
tools and equipment, mechanical drive/transmission are checked for conformance to specification and transmissions and their components can be given. The
components checked for wear, distortion, tensions, malfunction using appropriate tools and equipment in procedures for checking mechanical drives,
misalignment, fatigue, lubrication, slackness, tooth wear, accordance with standard operating procedures. transmissions and their components for malfunction can
breakages and other related malfunctions. be given. The tools, techniques and equipment required
to check the mechanical drives, transmissions and their
components for conformance to specification can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen tools,
techniques and equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 884 of 1445
 MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.7A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly identified as requiring further diagnosis, repair The outcomes of the maintenance checks are documented The mechanical drive/transmission is identified for
or adjustment and findings documented by appropriate in accordance with standard operating procedures. further diagnosis, repair or adjustment. The reasons for
means. deciding to repair, adjust or carry out further diagnosis
can be explained. The procedures for documenting the
outcomes of maintenance checks can be given.

Element 18.7A.2 Adjust mechanical drives and transmission assemblies

Criteria 18.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustment requirements determined by appropriate The extent of adjustment to be undertaken can be
means. identified.

Criteria 18.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustment method suitable for the type of drive or All relevant instructions, manuals, drawings, The procedures for adjusting different types of drives
transmission assembly being serviced, determined from specifications, etc. are obtained in accordance with and transmissions can be given. The method of
manufacturer's instruction sheets, standard workshop workplace procedures. adjustment to be applied to given situations can be
manuals/procedures or other appropriate means. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen method
of adjustment can be given.

Criteria 18.7A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustment tools and equipment selected according to The tools, equipment and techniques to be used to
the type of assembly being serviced. adjust a variety of mechanical drives and transmissions
can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
tools, techniques and equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.7A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate maintenance principles, techniques, Mechanical drives and transmissions are adjusted in
tools and equipment, drives/transmission components accordance with specifications and standard operating
tensioned, aligned balanced or adjusted to procedures.
manufacturer's/site specifications according to safe
workshop practices.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 885 of 1445
 MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.7A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drive/transmission assembly checked after adjustment Adjusted mechanical drives and transmissions are The procedures for checking adjusted mechanical drives
for correct operation or identified for further diagnosis or checked for correct operation and conformance to and transmissions can be given. The reasons for
repair. specification in accordance with standard operating deciding to identify the mechanical drive or transmission
procedures. Where appropriate, mechanical drives and for further repair or diagnosis can be given.
transmissions are identified for further diagnosis or repair.

Criteria 18.7A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service report completed. The service report is completed in accordance with The procedures for completing service reports can be
standard operating procedures. given.

Criteria 18.7A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Further diagnosis or repair requirements actioned by Where appropriate, further diagnosis or repair is carried The procedure for referring mechanical drives and
appropriate means. out in accordance with standard operating procedures. transmissions for further diagnosis or repair can be
given.

Element 18.7A.3 Diagnose faults

Criteria 18.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports read and visual and sensory inspection of The mechanical drive/transmission is inspected for signs The service history of the mechanical drive/transmission
the drive/transmission assembly undertaken. of malfunction. can be identified.

Criteria 18.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Given manufacturer's specifications and where applicable The mechanical drive/transmission is tested using The operational specifications of the mechanical
diagnostic equipment drive/transmission assembly tested appropriate tools, techniques and equipment for drive/transmission can be identified. The procedures for
using sound maintenance principles and procedures. conformance to operational specifications in accordance carrying out diagnostic tests can be given. The
with standard operating procedures. diagnostic tests to be carried out can be identified. The
appropriate tools, techniques and equipment required to
carry out the tests can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tests, tools, techniques and
equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 886 of 1445
 MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.7A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults localised at the component level and identified for The faulty component(s) are identified and marked for The procedures for marking components for repair or
repair or replacement. repair or replacement in accordance with standard replacement can be given. The reasons for identifying
operating procedures. components for repair or replacement can be given.

Criteria 18.7A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault causes analysed and preventative measures to The appropriate preventative measures to be undertaken The likely causes of the fault/ failure can be explained.
avoid re-occurrence developed, documented and are documented in accordance with standard operating The preventative measures to be undertaken to avoid
actioned by appropriate means. procedures. Where appropriate, the preventative measures recurrence of the fault/failure can be given. The
are initiated in accordance with standard operating procedures for documenting preventative measures to be
procedures. undertaken can be given.

Criteria 18.7A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements for repair or replacement actioned by The appropriate repairs/replacements are initiated in
appropriate means. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Element 18.7A.4 Repair mechanical drives/transmission assemblies

Criteria 18.7A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports read and visual and sensory inspection of The mechanical drive/transmission to be repaired is The service history of the mechanical drive/transmission
the drive/transmission assembly undertaken. inspected for signs of malfunction. can be identified.

Criteria 18.7A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Task requirements ascertained. The work to be undertaken can be identified.

Criteria 18.7A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools and equipment selected according to the type of The tools, techniques and equipment to be used to
assembly being serviced. service the mechanical drive/transmission can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen tools,
techniques and equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 887 of 1445
 MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.7A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical drive/transmission assembly dismantled The mechanical drive/transmission is dismantled using
using appropriate maintenance principles, techniques, appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in
tools, equipment and safe workshop practices. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.7A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceable items repaired using appropriate maintenance Serviceable items are repaired using appropriate tools, Serviceable items can be identified.
procedures according to manufacturer's specifications techniques and equipment in accordance with standard
and standard workshop practices. operating procedures.

Criteria 18.7A.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Standard replaceable items selected using manufacturer's All relevant drawings, parts lists, specifications and Replaceable items can be identified. Appropriate
catalogues, spare parts lists, engineering specifications manuals are obtained in accordance with workplace replacement parts are selected in accordance with
and obtained by appropriate means. procedures. specifications.

Criteria 18.7A.4.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component parts refitted to mechanical The mechanical drive/transmission is reassembled using
drive/transmission assembly using sound maintenance appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in
principles, techniques, tools and equipment in accordance with standard operating procedures.
accordance with manufacturer's/site specifications.

Element 18.7A.5 Final adjustment and commissioning

Criteria 18.7A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate maintenance principles and procedures Mechanical drives and transmissions are adjusted in The tools, equipment and techniques to be used to
drive/transmission components tensioned, balanced, accordance with specifications and standard operating adjust a variety of mechanical drives and transmissions
aligned or adjusted to suit specifications and operational procedures. can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
requirements. tools, techniques and equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 888 of 1445
 MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.7A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drive/transmission assembly checked after adjustment Adjusted mechanical drives and transmissions are The procedures for checking adjusted mechanical drives
and operational performance analysed. checked for correct operation and conformance to and transmissions can be given.
specifications in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 18.7A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly commissioned on conformance to The mechanical drive/transmission is commissioned in The procedures for commissioning mechanical drives
specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. and transmissions can be given.

Criteria 18.7A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service report completed by appropriate means. The service report is completed in accordance with The procedures for completing service reports can be
standard operating procedures. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 889 of 1445
 MEM 18.7A A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures involving the adjustment, repair, replacement
of mechanical drives/transmission assemblies and associated components. Drive devices may include worm and worm wheel, line shafts, plumber blocks, pulleys, sprockets, belts,
taper bush assemblies, roller chains, chain drives, mechanical and hydraulic couplings, compression couplings, disc type flexible couplings, spider type, chain couplings, universal
joints, bevel gearing, rack and pinion gearing, dog toothed clutches, cone type clutches, expanding shoe type clutches, friction/plate type clutches, centrifugal clutches, toggle
action linkages, magnetic clutches, sprag clutches, band type brakes and other associated drive components. Spare parts replacements selected from manufacturer's catalogues or
engineering specifications. All adjustments, removal, repair, replacement and installation practices in conformance to safe workshop practices utilising appropriate maintenance
principles, techniques, tools, equipment and procedures. Lubrication requirements attended to according to supplier's instructions and recommendations. Assemblies tested using
appropriate methods for conformance to specifications and operational requirements. This unit should not be selected where either Unit 18.42A (Diagnose and repair manual
transmissions) or Unit 18.44A (Diagnose and repair drive line and final drives) or Unit 18.43A (Diagnose and repair automatic transmissions) are also selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
mechanical drives and transmissions or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 890 of 1445
 MEM 18.8A A Balance equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.8A A Balance equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.8A.1 Check balance

Criteria 18.8A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles of equipment balance testing understood. The principles of balancing can be explained. The
reasons for testing equipment for balance can be given.
The effect of out of balance components on
machine/equipment operation and life can be given.

Criteria 18.8A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate balancing check procedure selected. Several procedures for checking the balance of
equipment can be identified. The most appropriate
procedure to be applied to selected balancing situations
can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
balancing check procedure can be given.

Criteria 18.8A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component set up correctly and to site/manufacturer's The component to be balanced is set up in accordance The procedures for setting up the component to be
procedure for balance check. with standard operating procedures. balanced can be given.

Criteria 18.8A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Balance/out of balance determined and compared to The balancing equipment is operated in accordance with The procedures for operating the balancing equipment
specification requirements. standard operating procedures. can be given. The specifications of the component to be
balanced can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 891 of 1445
 MEM 18.8A A Balance equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.8A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Out of balance readings recorded to prescribed Out of balance readings are recorded in accordance with The procedures for recording out of balance readings
procedures. standard operating procedures. can be given.

Element 18.8A.2 Balance equipment

Criteria 18.8A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles and methods of rigid and/or flexible rotation The principles of rigid and flexible rotation balancing can
balancing understood. be explained. The methods of rigid and flexible rotation
balancing can be described.

Criteria 18.8A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Techniques of single and/or multi-plane balancing used The techniques of single and multiple plane balancing
appropriate to application. can be described For given balancing situations the
appropriate balancing technique can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen balancing technique
can be given.

Criteria 18.8A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment balanced utilising correct procedures. Equipment is balanced using the appropriate techniques in The procedures for balancing out of balance equipment
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The precautions to be taken when adding
or removing material to achieve balance can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 892 of 1445
 MEM 18.8A A Balance equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken with minimum supervision or team environment. Equipment may range from static balancing devices to sophisticated electronic dynamic balancing machines.
Work may be undertaken in the field, on-site or in a workshop environment. Balancing may include the addition or removal of material. All specifications for machine operation and
degree of balance to be supplied. Wheel and tyre balancing is covered in Unit 18.38A (Maintain and repair wheels and tyres).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the balancing of equipment or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 893 of 1445
 MEM 18.9A A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.9A A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering components
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.9A.1 Undertake levelling and alignment measurements/readings

Criteria 18.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles of levelling and alignment understood and The principles of levelling and alignment can be
utilised. explained. The effects on equipment performance and life
of non-level or out of alignment components can be
given.

Criteria 18.9A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Task requirements determined by inspection of The equipment to be levelled and/or components aligned The tasks to be undertaken can be identified.
equipment to be levelled and/or components to be are inspected.
aligned.

Criteria 18.9A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct appropriate levelling and/or alignment procedure The procedures for levelling and aligning
selected. equipment/components can be given. The appropriate
levelling and aligning procedures can be selected for
given tasks. The reasons for selecting the chosen
levelling and/or aligning procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 894 of 1445
 MEM 18.9A A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.9A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate levelling or alignment The appropriate levelling/aligning equipment is set up in The equipment, tools and techniques to be used to
devices/equipment selected and set up to standard accordance with standard operating procedures. align/level the equipment/components can be identified.
operating procedures or manufacturer's recommendation. The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques
and equipment can be given. The procedures for setting
up the levelling/aligning equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.9A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measurements/readings taken accurately and recorded All measurements are taken accurately and recorded in The procedures for recording measurements taken can be
correctly to standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. given.

Element 18.9A.2 Perform levelling and/or alignment tasks

Criteria 18.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate engineering principles, The appropriate techniques, tools, equipment and
techniques, tools and equipment selected. procedures to carry out the levelling and/or alignment
tasks can be identified.

Criteria 18.9A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Levelling realignment calculations performed using The calculations to be performed to enable the
correct and appropriate method for levelling/alignment equipment/components to be aligned/levelled can be
application. identified.

Criteria 18.9A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment levelled to specifications using correct and The equipment is levelled and/or aligned to specification The procedures for levelling/aligning
appropriate technique. using the appropriate techniques in accordance with equipment/components can be given.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.9A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Levelling and alignment task completed to specifications. The equipment/components are checked for conformance The procedures for checking equipment/components for
to specifications in accordance with standard operating conformance to specification for level and alignment can
procedures. be given. The required measuring devices, tools and
techniques can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 895 of 1445
 MEM 18.9A A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures involving the levelling of equipment and the
alignment of component parts. The use of appropriate engineering principles, techniques, tools and equipment is integral to all application tasks. Included is the use of a variety of
tools and equipment not limited to: precision levels, spirit levels, line levels, optical levels, electronic levels, laser levels, dial indicators, special type dial indicator fixtures, magnetic
bases, feeler gauges, bench centres, vee blocks, plumb and line, folding wedges, straight edges, shimpack materials, dumpy levels and other associated levelling and alignment
equipment. Included is the setting up and use of alignment measuring devices and precision levelling devices. Level or out of alignment calculation performed using most
appropriate means for the type of application being performed. Level and alignment specifications obtained from engineering drawings, data sheets or manufacturers specifications.
All adjustments performed according to designated procedures in conformance to specifications.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the levelling and alignment of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
machines and engineering components or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 896 of 1445
MEM 18.10A B Equipment condition monitoring and recording Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.10A B Equipment condition monitoring and recording

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to undertake condition monitoring. This unit applies to specialist monitoring activities undertaken as a part of a
preventative
maintenance plan of program.
Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.10A.1 Undertake condition monitoring

Criteria 18.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles and methods of equipment condition Correct principals for monitoring are used and procedures Description of the application of principals and methods
monitoring understood and applied followed can be made for a variety of situations

Criteria 18.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate conditions monitoring technique selected Appropriate technique selected for the situation
to achieve required outcomes

Criteria 18.10A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Checks undertaken correctly, safely and to standard Standard operating procedures are followed
operating procedures

Criteria 18.10A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results plotted and deviations from specification Results are properly recorded and deviation reports prepared Appropriate records can be identified for a variety of
reported to appropriate authority/recorded and submitted situations

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 897 of 1445
MEM 18.10A B Equipment condition monitoring and recording Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies where specialist monitoring activities are undertaken as part of a preventive maintenance or total productive maintenance plan or program. Work is undertaken
autonomously or as part of a team environment. Techniques may include one or more of the following: built-in systems (software and site displays), vibration monitors, infra-red
and ultraviolet non-destructive testing. Monitoring undertaken in workshop, laboratory or in situ environment; readings undertaken to the accuracy of monitoring equipment
limitations or to site specifications where applicable. Results recorded/plotted to predetermined procedure and technique. All work and work procedures undertaken to standard
operating procedures and/or equipment manufacturer's recommendations. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory or legislative requirements. Where only routine
maintenance checking and diagnostic skills are applied, other appropriate units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of both on The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be demonstrated by required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
an individual working alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with equipment condition monitoring and recording or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 898 of 1445
 MEM 18.11A B Shut down and isolate machines/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.11A B Shut down and isolate machines/equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)

Element 18.11A.1 Shut down machine/equipment

Criteria 18.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/equipment operational function determined and All relevant instructions, procedures and documentation is The operational function of the machine/equipment can
understood. obtained in accordance with work place procedures. be described.

Criteria 18.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Shut down sequence undertaken safely and to standard The machine/equipment is shut down safely in accordance The shut down sequence can be identified. The
operating procedures. with standard operating procedures. procedures for shutting down the machine/equipment
can be given. The safety precautions to be taken when
shutting down the machine/ equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.11A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/equipment depressurised/emptied/de-energised The machine/equipment is The procedures for depressurising/emptying/bleeding
bled to standard operating procedures. depressurised/emptied/de-energised/bled in accordance fluids from the machine/equipment can be given. The
with standard operating procedures. reasons for depressurising/emptying/bleeding fluids
from the machine/equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.11A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe shut down of machine/equipment verified. The safe shut down of the machine/equipment is verified The procedures for verifying machine/equipment shut
in accordance with standard operating procedures. down can be given. The reasons for verifying
machine/equipment shut down can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 899 of 1445
 MEM 18.11A B Shut down and isolate machines/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.11A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety/security lock off devices and signage installed to All safety/security lock off devices and signage are The safety/security lock off devices and signage to be
standard operating procedure. installed in accordance with standard operating installed can be identified. The reasons for installing lock
procedures. off devices and signage can be explained. The
procedures for installing lock off devices and signage
can be given.

Criteria 18.11A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/equipment left in clean and safe state. The machine/equipment is left in a clean and safe state. The reasons for ensuring the machine/equipment is left
in a clean, safe state can be given.

Element 18.11A.2 Isolate machine/equipment

Criteria 18.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/equipment operational function determined and All relevant instructions, procedures and documentation is The operational function of the machine/equipment can
understood. obtained in accordance with work place procedures. be described.

Criteria 18.11A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Isolation methods and points recognised and identified. The isolation methods and points for the
machine/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.11A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Isolation undertaken safely and to standard operating The machine/equipment is isolated in accordance with The isolation procedures for the machine/equipment can
procedures. standard operating procedures. be given.

Criteria 18.11A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safe isolation of machine/equipment verified. The safe isolation of the machine/equipment is verified in The procedures for verifying machine/equipment
accordance with standard operating procedures. isolation can be given. The reasons for verifying
machine/ equipment isolation can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 900 of 1445
 MEM 18.11A B Shut down and isolate machines/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.11A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety/security lock off devices and signage installed to All safety/security lock off devices and signage are The safety/security lock off devices and signage to be
standard operating procedure. installed in accordance with standard operating installed can be identified. The reasons for installing lock
procedures. off devices and signage can be explained. The
procedures for installing lock off devices and signage
can be given.

Criteria 18.11A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machine/equipment left in clean and safe state. The machine/equipment is left in a clean and safe state. The reasons for ensuring the machine/equipment is left
in a clean, safe state can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 901 of 1445
 MEM 18.11A B Shut down and isolate machines/equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Shut down/isolation undertaken autonomously or as part of team work. Machines/equipment range includes manual, semi automatic and automatic machines of a stand alone,
continuous production or process nature. Shut down/isolation means and includes isolation of mechanical, electrical drives, pipework (pressure) rotating equipment etc. utilising
electrical lock off isolators, mechanical and power driven valves etc. Relevant regulations, Australian Standards and legislative requirements governing isolation and shutdown
complied with. This unit requires extensive system knowledge that excludes the straightforward starting/stopping of machinery/equipment through the use of simple switching,
including use of emergency switches.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the isolation and shut down and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
of machines and equipment or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 902 of 1445
 MEM 18.12A A Mechanical seals - installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.12A A Mechanical seals - installation and removal

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering
components
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.12A.1 Determine mechanical seal requirements

Criteria 18.12A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles of mechanical seals understood. The principles of operation of mechanical seals can be
explained. A range of applications of mechanical seals
can be given.

Criteria 18.12A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operational function of mechanical seal components The essential components of a range of mechanical seal
understood. designs can be identified. The function of the essential
components of mechanical seals can be explained.

Criteria 18.12A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
For new mechanical seal installation, specifications All relevant drawings, instructions, specifications and data The specifications of the mechanical seal to be installed
interpreted from engineering drawings etc. are obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. can be identified. The procedures for installing new
mechanical seals can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 903 of 1445
 MEM 18.12A A Mechanical seals - installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.12A.2 Dismantle mechanical seal installations

Criteria 18.12A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical seal assembly examined and correct and The mechanical seal assembly is examined in accordance The tools and equipment required to dismantle a
appropriate dismantling techniques, tools and equipment with workshop procedures. mechanical seal assembly can be identified. The
selected. techniques for dismantling mechanical seal assemblies
can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
tools, equipment and techniques can be explained.

Criteria 18.12A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using correct and appropriate engineering techniques The mechanical seal assembly is dismantled in accordance The hazards associated with the removal and dismantling
and safe workshop procedures mechanical seal assembly with appropriate engineering techniques and safe of mechanical seals can be identified. The procedures for
dismantled. workshop procedures. dismantling mechanical seal installations can be given.

Criteria 18.12A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All component parts examined for wear, including All mechanical seal components are examined for wear and The failure patterns of mechanical seal components can
housing, shafts, primary sealing elements; secondary checked for conformance to specifications. Where be explained. Examples of worn or failed components can
seals, seat assembly etc., to determine need for repair or appropriate, mechanical seal components are marked for be identified. The mechanical seal components able to be
replacement. repair or replacement in accordance with workshop repaired can be identified. The wear limits within which
procedures. mechanical seal components are able to be repaired can
be identified. The procedures for marking mechanical seal
components for repair or replacement can be given.

Criteria 18.12A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, serviceable items repaired by Where appropriate, serviceable items are repaired using
appropriate means. appropriate engineering techniques and safe workshop
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 904 of 1445
 MEM 18.12A A Mechanical seals - installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.12A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Primary sealing elements and secondary seals removed Where appropriate, the primary sealing element and The techniques for removing primary sealing elements
for replacement where required using correct and secondary seals are removed from the mechanical seal and secondary seals from the mechanical seal can be
appropriate engineering techniques and tools. using appropriate techniques and tools in accordance with identified. The tools required to remove primary sealing
workshop procedures. elements and secondary seals from the mechanical seal
can be identified.

Element 18.12A.3 Select replaceable items

Criteria 18.12A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replaceable items selected using manufacturer's All relevant manufacturers' catalogues, spare parts lists, The specifications of the mechanical seal or component
catalogues, spare parts lists, engineering specifications specifications are obtained in accordance with workplace can be identified. The appropriate replacement
or sample, using standard operating procedures. procedures. Where appropriate, sample mechanical seals mechanical seal or component can be identified. The
or components are obtained in accordance with workplace procedures for identifying replacement items can be
procedures. given. The reasons for selecting the chosen mechanical
seal or component can be explained.

Element 18.12A.4 Reassemble mechanical seal installations

Criteria 18.12A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using correct and appropriate engineering techniques The mechanical seal components are fitted to the shaft and The procedures to be followed when fitting mechanical
and tools, mechanical seal components fitted together housing using appropriate tools and techniques in seals can be identified. The tools and techniques to be
including seal head, secondary seals, seat assembly, accordance with workshop procedures. used in the fitting of mechanical seals can be identified.
shaft and housing.

Criteria 18.12A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical seal assembly tensioned and adjusted to The mechanical seal is adjusted and tensioned in The manufacturer's specified mechanical seal tension can
manufacturer's specifications. accordance with manufacturer's specifications and be identified. The procedures for adjusting mechanical
workshop procedures. seal tensions can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 905 of 1445
 MEM 18.12A A Mechanical seals - installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.12A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical seal assembly tested using appropriate The mechanical seal assembly is tested for compliance The procedures for testing mechanical seals can be
methods for compliance with specifications and with specifications and operational performance in identified. The operational specifications and
operational performance. accordance with workshop procedures. requirements of the mechanical seal can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 906 of 1445
 MEM 18.12A A Mechanical seals - installation and removal Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workplace procedures. Tasks involve the checking, installation, removal and replacement of a
range of mechanical seals including carbon, stellite, neoprene and other associated materials. Skills covered by this unit include the knowledge of appropriate applications for a
range of mechanical seals and the ability to remove, select, repair or replace all component parts of the seal. All removal and installation practices to be undertaken in conformance
to safe workplace practices and procedures, using correct tools and equipment. Seal replacements selected from manufacturer's catalogues, spare parts lists or engineering
specifications. Included is the fitting of mechanical seals in new installations according to specifications interpreted from engineering drawings. Lubrication requirements attended
to according to supplier's instructions and recommendations or specifications. Mechanical seal assembly tested using appropriate methods for compliance with specifications and
operational performance. For straightforward replacement of seals, see Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components) or Unit 18.6A
(Dismantle/repair/replace assemble and fit engineering components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation and removal and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
of mechanical seals or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 907 of 1445
 MEM 18.13A A Gland packing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.13A A Gland packing

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.13A.1 Inspect glands and gland packing

Criteria 18.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Principles of gland packing understood. The principles of gland packing can be explained.

Criteria 18.13A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Stuffing box assembly and gland packing inspected and The stuffing box and gland packing are inspected in The procedures for inspecting glands can be given. The
job requirements determined. accordance with standard operating procedures. tasks to be undertaken can be identified.

Element 18.13A.2 Remove gland packing

Criteria 18.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate engineering techniques, tools and The gland packing is extracted/removed in accordance The procedures for removing gland packing can be
equipment, gland extracted or removed. with standard operating procedures. given. The tools, techniques and equipment required to
remove gland packing can be identified.
MEM 18.13A A Gland packing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.13A.3 Replace or top up gland packing

Criteria 18.13A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate gland packing selected and cut The appropriate gland packing is cut to size and shape in The various types of gland packing and their application
to size and shape to conform with application and/or conformance with specifications and standard operating can be identified. The appropriate gland packing for
specifications. procedures. given situations can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen gland packing can be given. The
gland packing specifications can be identified. The
methods of cutting gland packing to size and shape can
be given.

Criteria 18.13A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The stuffing box is filled with packing material and the The stuffing box is filled with packing material and The procedures for reassembling the gland can be given.
gland is reassembled using standard operating reassembled in accordance with standard operating
procedures or manufacturer's recommended procedure. procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 908 of 1445
 MEM 18.13A A Gland packing Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workplace procedures. Tasks involve the packing and repacking of stuffing boxes and glands
with correct and appropriate packing materials selected to meet application or from specifications or to manufacturer's requirements. Packing materials include, but are not limited,
to carbon, hemp, rubber, leather, teflon, felt, neoprene. Packing types include, but are not limited to, ribbon flat, square, round, moulded, dry and lubricated. Applications include,
but are not limited to, packing for: high or low temperatures and pressures, solids, gases, liquids. All packing tasks to be undertaken in conformance to safe workshop practices
and procedures using correct tools and equipment. Packing materials selected from specifications, manufacturer's catalogues or to conform to operational requirements of the
system being serviced. Packing techniques to be applied according to standard operating procedures/supplier's instructions and acceptable engineering principles. All work and
work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. Skills undertaken to maintain simple gland top-ups in non-critical applications and routine gland maintenance
are covered by Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with gland packing or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 909 of 1445
 MEM 18.14A A Tool, gauge and die manufacture Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.14A A Tool, gauge and die manufacture

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.13C5 Perform mathematical computations 6.7A Perform basic incidental heat/quenching, tempering 7.5A Perform general machining
and annealing
7.6A Perform lathe operations 7.7A Perform milling operations 7.8A Perform grinding operations
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement
12.6A Mark off/out (general engineering) 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.3A Use tools for precision work 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.15A Tool and die maintenance
components
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.14A.1 Prepare to manufacture tool, gauge or die i.e. (tooling)

Criteria 18.14A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine tooling requirements from customer's All relevant drawings, prints and/or sample components, The customer's tooling requirements are identified.
components drawings, prints or sample component. specifications and instructions obtained in accordance
with workplace procedures.

Criteria 18.14A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling type and design conceptualised and planned The type of tooling to be manufactured can be identified.
with reference to customer's specifications (written or The machine(s) in which the tooling is to be used can be
verbal) for numbers, finish, quality and material. identified. The tooling design concept can be explained
Production machine to be used to produce components is in terms of customer specifications and proposed
assessed and comprehended in tooling design. production machine(s). The performance requirements of
the tooling can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 910 of 1445
 MEM 18.14A A Tool, gauge and die manufacture Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.14A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tool design is interpreted and visualised from tooling Where appropriate, the tool design is sketched or drawn in
drawings, prints or plan and checked against customer accordance with relevant standards and workplace
requirements. procedures. Where appropriate, tooling drawings are
obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. The
tooling drawings are checked for conformance to customer
specifications and production requirements.

Criteria 18.14A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Selected production machine mounting requirements Where appropriate, the mounting requirements of the The method of mounting the tooling in the production
determined to ensure any special or additional provisions tooling have been incorporated into the tooling design. machine into which it is to be installed can be identified.
are incorporated in tooling design.

Element 18.14A.2 Manufacture tooling

Criteria 18.14A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate materials selected and obtained to meet The physical properties of a range of tool steels can be
tooling requirements for strength, durability, component identified. The appropriate materials for each component
finish, heat treatment qualities where necessary and of the tooling to be produced can be identified. The
accounting for materials availability. reasons for selecting the chosen materials can be
explained in terms of: - strength - durability - component
finish - heat treatment requirements - availability.

Criteria 18.14A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Selected material tested for hardness as appropriate to aid Where appropriate, tooling materials are tested for The procedures for hardness testing materials can be
selection of machine tools, hand tools and hand held hardness in accordance with standard operating identified. The effect of material hardness on
power tools to be used to fashion or shape tooling procedures. machinability of the material can be explained. The
components. appropriate machinery and tools to be used to fashion or
shape tooling components can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen machinery and tooling can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 911 of 1445
 MEM 18.14A A Tool, gauge and die manufacture Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.14A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plan developed to sequence and stage manufacturing A sequential plan has been prepared for the manufacture The reasons for establishing a sequential plan for the
process, including establish datum, mark out, rough out of the required tooling and where appropriate, the plan is manufacture of tooling can be given. Where appropriate,
(machine or fashion), stress relieve/heat treat, finish size, documented in accordance with standard operating the procedures for documenting plans for the
fashion and fit, assemble componentry. procedures. manufacture of tooling can be identified.

Element 18.14A.3 Perform machining operations

Criteria 18.14A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate machines and machining process selected The tooling components are shaped/ produced to The appropriate machines and machining processes to
from a range of standard tool room machines to specifications using appropriate machines and machining shape/produce the required tooling components can be
shape/produce tooling components to specifications. processes. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
machines and machining processes can be given.

Element 18.14A.4 Use hand and hand held power tools

Criteria 18.14A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
A range of hand and hand held power tools are selected The appropriate hand and hand held power tools are used The hand and hand held power tools to be used to
and used to fashion/manufacture tooling components to to fashion/ manufacture tooling components to fashion/manufacture the required tooling components
specification Where practical, components sample or specification. Where appropriate, sample components or can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
section produced for testing. sections are utilised to test the tooling components being hand and hand held power tools can be given.
manufactured.

Element 18.14A.5 Assemble tooling components

Criteria 18.14A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable tool making techniques and All tooling components are assembled and fitted to The procedures for fitting/ assembling the tooling
procedures, components checked and fitted/assembled specification, using acceptable tool making techniques components can be identified. The precautions to be
correctly to specifications. and procedures. taken when fitting/assembling tooling components can
be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 912 of 1445
 MEM 18.14A A Tool, gauge and die manufacture Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.14A.6 Trial tooling

Criteria 18.14A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
First-off component is checked with precision The first-off component/product is checked using The appropriate precision instruments for checking the
instruments against specification. appropriate precision instruments for conformance to components produced can be identified. The
specification. specifications of the finished product can be identified.

Criteria 18.14A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling is modified as necessary to produce components Where appropriate, the tooling is modified using Where appropriate, the causes of any non-conformance
to specification. appropriate tool making techniques and procedures to to specification can be identified. Where appropriate the
ensure that the components/products produced comply tool making techniques/procedures to be applied to
with specifications. return the tooling to specification can be identified.

Criteria 18.14A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modified tooling is re-trialed and component produced Where appropriate, the first-off component/product The procedures for reporting/ recording the conformance
Conformance to specification is verified and reported produced by the modified tooling is checked using of the component/product produced by the tooling to
consistent with standard operating procedures. appropriate precision instruments for conformance to specifications can be identified.
specification. The conformance of the component/ product
to specification is reported/ recorded in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.14A.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where necessary all deviations or modifications to Where appropriate, modifications or alterations to original The procedures for recording/reporting modifications
original tooling design, prints or plans recorded and tooling design are recorded/reported in accordance with and/or alterations to tooling design can be identified.
reported consistent with standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 913 of 1445
 MEM 18.14A A Tool, gauge and die manufacture Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment; this unit is meant to cover skills required to manufacture and trial all types of production tooling. The tooling being
produced may include, but not be limited to, the following types: press tools, jigs, fixtures, gauges, special purpose machines and equipment, forging dies, extruding dies, die
casting (high & low pressure and gravity feed), plastic moulds (injection, compression, blow and foam) and glass moulds or dies requiring precision manufacture. A normal range of
tool room equipment would be used which may include lathe, mills, copy/duplicator, grinders, EDM and wire cut equipment, precision measurement, hand and power tools. Where
simple welding or brazing skills are required, see Unit 5.12A (Perform routine manual metal arc welding), Unit 5.50A (Perform routine gas metal arc welding) and Unit 5.6A (Perform
brazing and/or silver soldering) as appropriate.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the manufacture of tools, and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
gauges and dies or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 914 of 1445
 MEM 18.15A A Tool and die maintenance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.15A A Tool and die maintenance

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Notes - Where simple welding or brazing skills are required, see Unit 5.12A (Perform routine manual arc welding) and Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver
soldering).
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 6.7A Perform basic incidental heat/quenching, tempering 7.5A Perform general machining
and annealing
7.6A Perform lathe operations 7.7A Perform milling operations 7.8A Perform grinding operations
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.3A Precision mechanical measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.15A.1 Identifies and analyses defects in tooling

Criteria 18.15A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defects determined from any of the following: production All relevant information with respect to defective tooling is Common tooling defects can be identified from a range of
components produced, production reports or tool obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. The sample products/components. The probable causes of
inspections. defective tooling is examined for signs of breakage, wear, tooling failure can be identified. The reasons for
etc. selecting the probable causes of tooling failure can be
explained.

Criteria 18.15A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequence of maintenance operations planned. A sequential plan has been prepared for the The reasons for establishing a sequential plan for the
repair/maintenance of the defective tooling and where repair/ maintenance of defective tooling can be given.
appropriate, the plan is documented in accordance with Where appropriate, the procedures for documented plans
standard operating procedures. for the repair/ maintenance of defective tooling can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 915 of 1445
 MEM 18.15A A Tool and die maintenance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.15A.2 Disassembles and assesses tooling components

Criteria 18.15A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Disassemble tooling and assess condition of components The defective tooling is disassembled in accordance with The procedures for disassembling defective tooling can
against prints, drawings, manufacturer's drawings etc. acceptable tool making techniques and procedures. All be identified. The specifications of all tooling
relevant drawings, specifications and sample components can be identified. The precision instruments
products/components obtained in accordance with work to be used to check tooling components for conformance
place procedures. All tooling components are checked for to specification can be identified. The reasons for
conformance to specifications. selecting the chosen precision instruments can be
explained.

Criteria 18.15A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Worn/damaged parts replaced/reconditioned. Worn/damaged components are marked for repair or The procedures for identifying worn/damaged tooling
replacement in accordance with standard operating components for repair or replacement can be identified.
procedures. The reasons for deciding to repair or replace
worn/damaged components can be given.

Element 18.15A.3 Obtains and prepares replacement materials

Criteria 18.15A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials obtained to meet tooling requirements. Where appropriate, tooling components are tested for The appropriate materials for each component of the
hardness in accordance with standard operating tooling to be replaced can be identified. The required
procedures. The appropriate materials are obtained for physical properties of the tooling to be replaced can be
manufacture of replacement tooling components in identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen materials
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be explained in terms of: - strength - durability -
component finish - heat treatment requirements -
availability. The procedures for hardness testing
materials can be identified.. The procedures for obtaining
tooling materials can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 916 of 1445
 MEM 18.15A A Tool and die maintenance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.15A.4 Manufacture/repair tooling components

Criteria 18.15A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate hand and hand held power tools are selected The appropriate hand and handheld power tools are used The hand and heldheld power tools to be used to
and used. to fashion/manufacture tooling components to fashion/manufacture the required tooling components
specification. Where appropriate, sample components or can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
sections are utilised to test the tooling components being hand and hand-held power tools can be given.
manufactured.

Criteria 18.15A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate machining process chosen from a range of The tooling components are shaped/ produced to The appropriate machines and machining processes to
standard tool room machines. specifications using appropriate machines and machining shape/produce the required tooling components can be
processes. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
machines and machining processes can be given.

Criteria 18.15A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Machining parameters set to produce components to The effect of machining parameters on the surface finish
specification. and tolerances achievable from machining processes can
be explained. The machining parameters appropriate to
given machining tasks and specifications can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
machining parameters can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 917 of 1445
 MEM 18.15A A Tool and die maintenance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.15A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate heat treatment initiated according to Where appropriate, the tool steel is heat treated in
specification. accordance with heat treatment procedures and
specifications. Where appropriate, the heat treatment of
tooling components initiated in accordance with
standard operating procedures can be identified. The
heat treatment requirements of a range of given tool
steels to achieve specified hardness can be identified.
The procedures for heat treating tool steels can be
identified. Where appropriate, the procedures for
initiating the heat treatment of tool steels can be
identified.

Element 18.15A.5 Assemble tooling components

Criteria 18.15A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using acceptable tool making techniques and All tooling components are assembled and fitted to The procedures for fitting/ assembling the tooling
procedures, tooling components checked and assembled specification using acceptable tool making techniques and components can be identified. The precautions to be
correctly in conformance with specifications. procedures. taken when fitting/assembling tooling components can
be given.

Element 18.15A.6 Measure production components

Criteria 18.15A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production components are checked with precision The first-off component/product is checked using The appropriate precision instruments for checking the
instruments to ensure conformance to specifications as appropriate precision instruments for conformance to components produced can be identified. The
required. specification. specifications of the finished product can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 918 of 1445
 MEM 18.15A A Tool and die maintenance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.15A.7 Identify potential production/maintenance problems

Criteria 18.15A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conditions leading to tooling failure identified and Where appropriate, the conditions that lead to the failure The common causes of tooling failure can be identified.
recorded. of the given set of tooling are recorded in accordance with The procedures for documenting tooling failures can be
standard operating procedures. identified. The conditions leading to the failure of a given
set of tooling can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen mode of failure can be explained.

Criteria 18.15A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Recurrent faults identified and solutions initiated. Where appropriate, design modifications/alterations to Where appropriate, previous faults with the given set of
rectify recurring faults or failure trends are initiated in tooling can be identified. Where appropriate, any
accordance with standard operating procedures. commonalities of causes of failures or trends/events
associated with tooling failure can be identified.
Appropriate solutions can be proposed for a range of
recurrent faults that may occur in tooling. The reasons
for selecting the chosen solutions can be explained. The
procedures for initiating modifications/alterations to
tooling design can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 919 of 1445
 MEM 18.15A A Tool and die maintenance Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This standard may be applied in a tool room situation which involves a great deal of autonomy based on a sound knowledge of the operation of production tooling. The tooling
being maintained may include any of the following: press tools, plastic moulds, forging dies, die casting, or jigs and fixtures, gauges etc. requiring precision repair. For simple
maintenance not requiring precision repair, see Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components). Normal range of tool room equipment would be used
which may include lathes, mills, grinders, hand and power tools used for precision work.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance of tools and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
dies or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 920 of 1445
 MEM 18.16B A Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring results Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.16B A Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring results
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
statistical computations
12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.3A Use tools for precision work 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.10A Equipment condition monitoring and recording
components
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.16B.1 Analyse condition monitoring results

Criteria 18.16B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Records/graphs/results of condition monitoring The results of condition monitoring of plant/equipment are The operational specifications of the plant/equipment
examined, analysed and problem areas identified. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures. being monitored can be identified. Any trends and/or
deviations from operational specifications can be
identified.

Criteria 18.16B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Necessary calculations/computations undertaken. The appropriate calculations are performed using the The calculations to be applied to condition monitoring
condition monitoring data collected. results to enable the collected data to be analysed can be
identified. The reasons for undertaking the identified
calculations can be given.

Criteria 18.16B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate reports/determinations of analyses Reports based on the analysis of the condition monitoring The procedures for reporting the analysis of condition
undertaken to prescribed site procedure. data are prepared in accordance with standard operating monitoring data can be given.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 921 of 1445
 MEM 18.16B A Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring results Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.16B.2 Develop recommendations

Criteria 18.16B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Recommendations developed based on previous history, The previous history of the plant/equipment being
results, specifications, legislative requirements. monitored can be identified. Any relevant legislative
requirements can be identified. The operational
specifications of the plant/equipment can be identified.
The recommendations with respect to action to be taken
can be identified. The reasons for the recommendations
made can be given. The expected effect of the
recommendations on the operational performance of the
plant/equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.16B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Report recommendations to appropriate authority. The recommendations are reported to the appropriate The procedures for reporting recommendations can be
authority. given. The authority/person to whom the
recommendations are to be made can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 922 of 1445
 MEM 18.16B A Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring results Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Analysis/recommendations undertaken autonomously. This unit is intended to apply to the analysis of data generated by a continuous plant and equipment condition monitoring
program. The analysis of condition monitoring and production of recommendations is undertaken autonomously. Recommendations may be in writing or verbal. If production of
formal reports is required, then appropriate communication units should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the analysis of plant and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
equipment monitoring results or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 923 of 1445
MEM 18.17B B Modify mechanical systems and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.17B B Modify mechanical systems and equipment

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
This unit covers the competencies required to determine the requirements of the modification, undertake the modification and evaluate the modified mechanical
system/equipment. Modifications covered by this unit are changes to plant and equipment which lead to desired changes in performance of the system or equipment.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
statistical computations
12.3A Precision mechanical measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.3A Use tools for precision work 18.5A Bearings - fault diagnosis installation and removal 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering
components
18.7A Maintain and repair mechanical drives and 18.9A Levelling and alignment of machines and engineering 18.10A Equipment condition monitoring and recording
mechanical transmission assemblies components
18.11A Shut down and isolate machines/equipment 18.16B Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
results components

Element 18.17B.1 Determine modification requirements

Criteria 18.17B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance reports and system output information All relevant maintenance reports, production data, drawings, The desired changes in performance of the plant/equipment
analysed circuits, condition monitoring data, specifications, can be identified
instructions, etc. are obtained in accordance with work place
procedures
Criteria 18.17B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defective components, sub-assemblies and design faults The plant/equipment is inspected for correct location, The specifications of the plant/ equipment and its
identified alignment, operation, performance and conformance to performance requirements can be identified The procedures
specifications using appropriate maintenance techniques and for inspecting the plant/equipment against specifications
procedures can be given Where appropriate, defective components,
sub-assemblies and design faults can be identified The effect
of defective components, sub-assemblies and design faults
on the performance of plant/equipment can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 924 of 1445
MEM 18.17B B Modify mechanical systems and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.17B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective action plan developed The planned modifications are documented and approved in The action to be taken to achieve the desired changes in
conformance to standard operating procedures performance can be identified The reasons for taking the
action identified can be explained The procedures for
documenting the proposed modifications to the
plant/equipment can be identified The authority from
whom approval to undertake the proposed modifications is
to be obtained can be identified
Element 18.17B.2 Undertake standard modifications to mechanical systems and equipment
Criteria 18.17B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification options for overcoming parts failures, Typical part failure modes can be identified The causes of
design faults identified those part failures can be given The action to be taken to
correct part failures and design faults can be explained For
given part failures and/or design faults, the options for
modifying the plant/equipment can be identified and
explained
Criteria 18.17B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Failed components, sub-assembly replacements selected For given components and/or sub-assemblies, appropriate
from manufacturer's catalogue standard replacements can be identified from
manufacturers'/suppliers' catalogues
Criteria 18.17B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification designs developed in conjunction with, and Where appropriate, drawings of the modified components The procedures for modifying drawings of components
approved by appropriate authority and/or sub-assemblies are prepared and authorised in and/or sub-assemblies can be identified The procedures for
accordance with standard operating procedures authorising changes made to drawings of plant/ equipment
can be identified
Criteria 18.17B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification recorded to standard operating procedure The approved modifications undertaken are recorded in The procedures for recording modifications undertaken can
accordance with standard operating procedures be identified

Element 18.17B.3 Evaluate modified mechanical system/equipment

Criteria 18.17B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alterations evaluated for effectiveness and efficiency The modified plant/equipment is operated and its The procedures for checking the operation of the modified
performance monitored to ensure conformance with the plant/ equipment against required performance
required performance specifications specifications can be explained The effectiveness/efficiency
of the modifications can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 925 of 1445
MEM 18.17B B Modify mechanical systems and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.17B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Effectiveness/efficiency reported and recorded Where appropriate, the efficiency/ effectiveness of the The procedures for reporting/ recording the effectiveness/
modifications undertaken are reported/recorded in efficiency of the modifications in achieving the desired
accordance with standard operating procedures performance can be identified
Criteria 18.17B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results checked against specifications The tests to be undertaken to check the performance of the
modified plant/equipment can be identified The test results
have been compared with the specification of the modified
plant/equipment
Criteria 18.17B.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Additional modification/changes if required, Where appropriate, further modifications to the Where appropriate, the need for further modifications to
recommended plant/equipment are recommended in accordance with the plant/ equipment can be explained in terms of the effect
standard operating procedures of the modifications undertaken on the plant/equipment
and the required performance specifications

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 926 of 1445
MEM 18.17B B Modify mechanical systems and equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Modifications covered by this unit are changes to plant and equipment which lead to desired changes in performance. Maintenance schedules are required for mechanical machines
and systems, including stationary, stand-alone machines, and manual, semi-automatic and automatic process systems. Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment.
Analysis functions include interpretation and integration of data from process control instrumentation and condition monitoring systems. Modifications include approved minor
design changes and/or replacement of components or sub-assemblies using equivalent parts listed in manufacturer's catalogue. This unit applies to existing equipment or the
installation of new or replacement equipment. Where drafting skills to Australian Standard 1100 are required, see Unit 9.3A (Prepare basic engineering drawing).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by this unit The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the modification of mechanical systems and equipment or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 927 of 1445
 MEM 18.18A B Maintain pneumatic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.18A B Maintain pneumatic system components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.18A.1 Check pneumatic system components

Criteria 18.18A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components identified correctly. The full range of pneumatic system components can be
identified.

Criteria 18.18A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operational function of each The characteristics and operational function of each
system component are understood. pneumatic system component can be identified.

Criteria 18.18A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component inspected A range of pneumatic system components are inspected The procedures for inspecting and testing pneumatic
and tested. and tested in accordance with standard operating system components can be identified. The equipment
procedures. required to test pneumatic system components can be
identified.

Criteria 18.18A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against All relevant data sheets and specifications are obtained in The specifications of each pneumatic system component
specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. Pneumatic components not operating
in accordance with specifications can be identified. The
reason for pneumatic components not operating in
accordance with specification can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 928 of 1445
 MEM 18.18A B Maintain pneumatic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.18A.2 Identify, repair/replace faulty pneumatic system components

Criteria 18.18A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty system components localised and malfunction All relevant pneumatic circuits, drawings, instructions, The individual components within the pneumatic system
confirmed by inspection and testing using fluid power manuals and data sheets obtained in accordance with can be identified. The safety procedures to be followed
principles, procedures and safety requirements. workplace procedures. The individual components within when working on pneumatic components can be
the pneumatic system are checked for correct operation in identified. Where appropriate, faulty system components
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 18.18A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty system components dismantled and repaired to Faulty system components are dismantled and repaired to The procedure for repairing pneumatic system
manufacturer's/site specifications. manufacturer's/site specifications in accordance with components can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.18A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's Where appropriate, replacement parts are selected from the The parts to be replaced can be identified. The reasons
catalogue according to required specifications. manufacturers'/suppliers' catalogues in conformance with for replacing the parts identified can be given.
specifications.

Criteria 18.18A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components reassembled and tested for correct The pneumatic system components are reassembled in
operation assessed against specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. The
pneumatic components are tested for correct operation
and conformance to specifications in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.18A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of the pneumatic system confirmed to The operation of the pneumatic system is checked for The correct operation of the pneumatic system can be
standard operating procedure. conformance to specification in accordance with standard identified. The procedures for checking pneumatic
operating procedures. system operation can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 929 of 1445
 MEM 18.18A B Maintain pneumatic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.18A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures adopted according to Where appropriate, repaired/replaced pneumatic system Where appropriate, the follow up procedures with
standard operating procedure. components are checked for correct operation in respect to repaired/replaced pneumatic system
accordance with standard follow up procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.18A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, service reports completed using Where appropriate, service reports are completed in The reporting/recording procedures can be identified.
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. The reasons for completing service reports for pneumatic
systems components repaired/replaced can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 930 of 1445
 MEM 18.18A B Maintain pneumatic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken using predetermined standards of safety, quality and work procedures. Pneumatic system components identified, inspected and assessed using fluid power
principles to predetermined specifications interpreted from data sheets and circuit diagrams. Repairs and replacements to site or manufacturers specifications. Pneumatic system
components may include high pressure seals, linear, rotary actuators, directional control valves, proportional valves, timers, counters, sensors, pneumatic motors, pressure control
valves, lines, hoses and other associated equipment. Correct operational function of equipment components confirmed and commissioned in conformance to specification, using
standard operating procedures. For straightforward removal/replacement of components from a pneumatic system, see Unit 18.55A (Dismantle replace and assemble engineering
components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance of pneumatic and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
system components or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 931 of 1445
 MEM 18.19A A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.19A A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.18A Maintain pneumatic system components 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.19A.1 Undertake preventative maintenance checks/adjustments on pneumatic systems

Criteria 18.19A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components, assemblies or sub-assemblies are Pneumatic system components are prepared for Common pneumatic system components can be
identified and prepared for inspection/preventative inspection/preventative maintenance in accordance with identified.
maintenance. work site procedures.

Criteria 18.19A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Visual inspection and testing with appropriate test The pneumatic system and its components are inspected Pneumatic system/component faults that can be
equipment is carried out according to fluid power and tested safely in accordance with work site procedures. determined by visual inspection can be identified. The
principles, procedures and safety requirements. application of common pneumatic system/component
test equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.19A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scheduled preventative maintenance tasks are performed Scheduled preventative maintenance tasks are performed Scheduled preventative maintenance tasks can be
including obvious repairs and adjustments according to in accordance with work site procedures. Where identified. The manufacturer's specifications can be
manufacturer's specification using fluid power appropriate, obvious repairs are performed on the identified.
techniques/practices. pneumatic system/components in accordance with work
site procedures. Where appropriate, pneumatic
system/components are adjusted to return the system to
manufacturer's specification in accordance with work site
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 932 of 1445
 MEM 18.19A A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.19A.2 Undertake fault finding on pneumatic systems

Criteria 18.19A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Designated pneumatic system components are identified The pneumatic system and its components are visually Common pneumatic system and component faults can be
and a visual inspection of the system is carried out for inspected for indications of correct/incorrect operation in identified.
the collection of fault finding data. accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.19A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System operator consulted where appropriate and Where appropriate, the system operator is consulted with
additional data collected. respect to the fault being investigated.

Criteria 18.19A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance reports and preventative maintenance Maintenance reports and preventative maintenance Any previous faults in the pneumatic
schedules checked and reviewed for additional fault schedules are obtained in accordance with work site system/components can be identified. Any previous
finding data. procedures. maintenance carried out on the pneumatic
system/components can be identified.

Criteria 18.19A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using fluid power principles checks and tests are Appropriate test equipment and techniques are used to Typical checks/tests that can be carried out on
undertaken using appropriate test equipment and check/test pneumatic system/component operation in pneumatic systems/components and their application
techniques. accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. Pneumatic system/component tests
and testing techniques can be identified.

Criteria 18.19A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions are identified and verified. Apparent faults/malfunctions are verified/confirmed in Apparent faults/malfunctions can be identified.
accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.19A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions documented or reported by All verified faults/malfunctions are documented or The documentation/reporting requirements with respect
appropriate means to designated personnel and actioned. reported in accordance with work site procedures. The to verified faults/malfunctions can be identified. The
repair/overhaul of the pneumatic system is initiated in procedures for initiating repair and/or overhaul of the
accordance with work site procedures. pneumatic system can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 933 of 1445
 MEM 18.19A A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.19A.3 Repair and/or overhaul pneumatic power system

Criteria 18.19A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System or sub-assembly isolated safely and residue The pneumatic system is isolated and depressurised safely The hazards associated with working on pneumatic
pressure discharged in accordance with prescribed in accordance with work site procedures. The pneumatic systems/components can be identified. The procedures
procedures or checked for correct isolation. system is checked to ensure isolation and for isolating and depressurising pneumatic systems can
depressurisation in accordance with work site procedures. be identified.

Criteria 18.19A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Isolated system or sub-assembly tagged according to The isolated pneumatic system is tagged in accordance The tagging requirements for isolated systems can be
designated means. with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.19A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component or sub-assembly removed from system using The pneumatic components/sub-assembly are removed
correct removal principles and techniques. from the system in accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.19A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components or sub-assemblies dismantled, examined and The pneumatic components/sub-assemblies are The structure of typical pneumatic components can be
verified for replacement, overhaul or repair, using correct dismantled in accordance with work site procedures. The identified. The specifications of pneumatic components
and appropriate techniques and procedures. pneumatic components/sub-assemblies and their parts are and their constituent parts can be identified. The reasons
examined for conformance to specification. Components for deciding to repair, replace or overhaul pneumatic
outside specification and not repairable are marked for components can be given.
replacement in accordance with work site procedures.
Components outside specification and able to be returned
to specification are marked for repair/overhaul in
accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.19A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturers Replacement parts selected from manufacturers'
catalogues to meet specifications. catalogues in compliance with specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 934 of 1445
 MEM 18.19A A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.19A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items repaired/overhauled, using correct and Faulty items repaired/overhauled in accordance with work The appropriate repair/overhaul procedures can be
appropriate principles, techniques and procedures. site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.19A.3.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component or sub assembly items refitted to equipment The pneumatic component/sub-assembly is refitted into
and tested for correct operation assessed against the system in accordance with work site procedures. The
specifications. pneumatic component/sub-assembly is tested for correct
operation and compliance to specifications in accordance
with work site procedures.

Element 18.19A.4 Recommission pneumatic system

Criteria 18.19A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System or sub-assembly recommissioned according to The pneumatic system/sub-assembly is recommissioned to System recommissioning procedures can be identified.
prescribed procedures, to specifications. specification in accordance with standard operating The pneumatic system operational specifications can be
procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.19A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using fluid power principles and system application The pneumatic system/sub-assembly is checked/tested for
techniques correct operation of the system is verified. correct operation in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 18.19A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures are instigated. Where appropriate, follow up procedures are initiated in Any appropriate follow up maintenance or operational
accordance with work site procedures. checks can be identified.

Criteria 18.19A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports updated and All maintenance records/reports are updated and The maintenance recording/reporting requirements can
completed by appropriate designated means. completed in accordance with work site procedures. be identified. The consequences of inaccurate or
incomplete recording/reporting of maintenance/service
activities can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 935 of 1445
 MEM 18.19A A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. This unit relates to the use of pneumatic test equipment including leak testers, escape rate gauges, hand held pressure
testers and other appropriate equipment. The use of hand tools, power tools and specialist tools is included. Work tasks include the preventative maintenance, testing diagnostic
fault finding, adjustment, repair, replacement and overhauling of pneumatic systems to predetermined standards of quality, safety and work practices and procedures. Pneumatic
components identified, inspected and correct operational function assessed using fluid power principles to predetermined specifications, interpreted from data sheets,
manufacturer's catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. Preventative maintenance schedules undertaken on a periodic basis and appropriate documentation
maintained. Tests, checks, adjustments, repair, replacement and overhaul undertaken on pneumatic assemblies/sub-assemblies, stationary/mobile equipment, pneumatic power tools
to site or manufacturer's specifications. Appropriate follow up procedures instigated, adopted and appropriate documentation maintained. Where required, work is undertaken to
legislative and regulatory requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
pneumatic systems or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 936 of 1445
 MEM 18.20A B Maintain hydraulic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.20A B Maintain hydraulic system components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.20A.1 Check hydraulic system components

Criteria 18.20A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components identified correctly. The full range of hydraulic system components can be
identified.

Criteria 18.20A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operational function of each The characteristics and operational function of each
system component are understood. hydraulic system component can be identified.

Criteria 18.20A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component inspected A range of hydraulic system components are inspected The procedures for inspecting and testing hydraulic
and tested. and tested in accordance with standard operating system components can be identified. The equipment
procedures. required to test hydraulic system components can be
identified.

Criteria 18.20A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against All relevant data sheets and specifications are obtained in The specifications of each hydraulic system component
specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. Hydraulic components not operating in
accordance with specifications can be identified. The
reasons for hydraulic components not operating in
accordance with specification can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 937 of 1445
 MEM 18.20A B Maintain hydraulic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.20A.2 Identify, repair/replace faulty hydraulic system components

Criteria 18.20A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty system components localised and malfunction All relevant hydraulic circuits, drawings, instructions, The individual components within the hydraulic system
confirmed by inspection and testing using fluid power manuals and data sheets obtained in accordance with can be identified. The safety procedures to be followed
principles, procedures and safety requirements. workplace procedures. The individual components within when working on hydraulic components can be
the hydraulic system are checked for correct operation in identified. Where appropriate, faulty system components
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 18.20A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty system components dismantled and repaired to Faulty system components are dismantled and repaired to The procedure for repairing hydraulic system
manufacturer's/site specifications. manufacturer's/site specifications in accordance with components can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.20A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's Where appropriate, replacement parts are selected from the The parts to be replaced can be identified. The reasons
catalogues according to required specifications. manufacturers'/suppliers' catalogues in conformance with for replacing the parts identified can be given.
specifications.

Criteria 18.20A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components reassembled and tested for correct The hydraulic system components are reassembled in
operation and assessment against specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. The
hydraulic components are tested for correct operation and
conformance to specifications in accordance with standard
operating procedures.

Criteria 18.20A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of the hydraulic system confirmed to The operation of the hydraulic system is checked for The correct operation of the hydraulic system can be
designated operating procedure. conformance to specification in accordance with standard identified. The procedures for checking hydraulic system
operating procedures. operation can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 938 of 1445
 MEM 18.20A B Maintain hydraulic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.20A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures adopted according to Where appropriate, repaired/replaced hydraulic system Where appropriate, the follow up procedures with
standard operating procedure. components are checked for correct operation in respect to repaired/replaced hydraulic system
accordance with standard follow up procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.20A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, service reports completed using Where appropriate, service reports are completed in The reporting/recording procedures can be identified.
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. The reasons for completing service reports for hydraulic
system components repaired/replaced can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 939 of 1445
 MEM 18.20A B Maintain hydraulic system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken using predetermined standards of safety, quality and work procedures. Hydraulic system components identified, inspected and assessed using fluid power
principles to predetermined specifications interpreted from data sheets and circuit diagrams. Repairs and replacements to site or manufacturer's specifications. Hydraulic system
components may include high pressure seals, linear, rotary actuators, directional control valves, proportional valves, timers, counters, sensors, pumps, pressure control valves,
lines, hoses and other associated equipment. Correct operational function of equipment components confirmed and commissioned in conformance to specifications, using standard
operating procedures. For straightforward removals/replacement of components from a Hydraulic system, see Unit 18.55A (Dismantle replace and assemble engineering
components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance of hydraulic and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
system components or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 940 of 1445
 MEM 18.21A A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.21A A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.20A Maintain hydraulic system components 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.21A.1 Undertake preventative maintenance checks/adjustments on hydraulic systems

Criteria 18.21A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components, assemblies or sub-assemblies are Hydraulic system components are prepared for Common hydraulic system components can be identified.
identified and prepared for inspection/preventative inspection/preventative maintenance in accordance with
maintenance. work site procedures.

Criteria 18.21A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Visual inspection and testing with appropriate test The hydraulic system and its components are inspected Hydraulic system/component faults that can be
equipment is carried out according to fluid power and tested safely in accordance with work site procedures. determined by visual inspection can be identified. The
principles, procedures and safety requirements. application of common hydraulic system/component test
equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.21A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scheduled preventive maintenance tasks are performed Scheduled preventative maintenance tasks are performed Schedules preventative maintenance tasks can be
including obvious repairs and adjustments according to in accordance with work site procedures. Where identified. The manufacturer's specifications can be
manufacturer's specification using fluid power appropriate, obvious repairs are performed on the identified.
techniques/practices. hydraulic system/components in accordance with work
site procedures. Where appropriate, hydraulic
system/components are adjusted to return the system to
manufacturer's specification in accordance with work site
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 941 of 1445
 MEM 18.21A A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.21A.2 Undertake fault finding on hydraulic systems

Criteria 18.21A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Designated hydraulic system components are identified The hydraulic system and its components are visually Common hydraulic system and component faults can be
and a visual inspection of the system is carried out for inspected for indications of correct/incorrect operation in identified.
the collection of fault finding data. accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.21A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System operator consulted where appropriate and Where appropriate, the system operator is consulted with
additional data collected. respect to the fault being investigated.

Criteria 18.21A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance reports and preventative maintenance Maintenance reports and preventative maintenance Any previous faults in the hydraulic system/components
schedules checked and reviewed for additional fault schedules are obtained in accordance with work site can be identified. Any previous maintenance carried out
finding data. procedures. on the hydraulic system/components can be identified.

Criteria 18.21A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using fluid power principles, checks and tests are Appropriate test equipment and techniques are used to Typical checks/tests that can be carried out on hydraulic
undertaken using appropriate test equipment and check/test hydraulic system/component operation in systems/components and their application can be
techniques. accordance with work site procedures. identified. Hydraulic system/component test and testing
techniques can be identified.

Criteria 18.21A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions are identified and verified. Apparent faults/malfunctions are verified/confirmed in Apparent faults/malfunctions can be identified.
accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.21A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions documented or reported by All verified faults/malfunctions are documented or The documentation/reporting requirements with respect
appropriate means to designated personnel and actioned. reported in accordance with work site procedures. The to verified faults/malfunctions can be identified. The
repair/overhaul of the hydraulic system is initiated in procedures for initiating repair and/or overhaul of the
accordance with work site procedures. hydraulic system can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 942 of 1445
 MEM 18.21A A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.21A.3 Repair and/or overhaul hydraulic system

Criteria 18.21A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System or sub-assembly isolated safely and residue The hydraulic system is isolated and depressurised safely The hazards associated with working on hydraulic
pressure discharged in accordance with prescribed in accordance with work site procedures. The hydraulic systems/components can be identified. The procedures
procedure and checked for correct isolation. system is checked to ensure isolation and for isolating and depressurising hydraulic systems can
depressurisation in accordance with work site procedures. be identified.

Criteria 18.21A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Isolated system or sub-assembly tagged according to The isolated hydraulic system is tagged in accordance The tagging requirements for isolated systems can be
designated means. with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.21A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components or sub-assembly removed from system The hydraulic components/sub-assembly are removed
using correct removal principles and techniques. from the system in accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.21A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components or sub-assemblies dismantled, examined and The hydraulic components/sub-assemblies are dismantled The structure of typical hydraulic components can be
verified for replacement, overhaul or repair, using correct in accordance with work site procedures. The hydraulic identified. The specifications of hydraulic components
and appropriate techniques and procedures. components/sub-assemblies and their parts are examined and their constituent parts can be identified.
for conformance to specification. Components outside
specification and not repairable are marked for replacement
in accordance with work site procedures. Components
outside specification and able to be returned to
specification are marked for repair/overhaul in accordance
with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.21A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturer's Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's
catalogues to meet specifications. catalogues in compliance with specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 943 of 1445
 MEM 18.21A A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.21A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items repaired/overhauled, using correct and Faulty items repaired/overhauled in accordance with work The appropriate repair/overhaul procedures can be
appropriate principles, techniques and procedures. site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.21A.3.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component or sub-assembly items refitted to equipment The hydraulic component/sub-assembly is refitted into the
and tested for correct operation assessed against system in accordance with work site procedures. The
specifications. hydraulic component/sub-assembly is tested for correct
operation and compliance with specifications in
accordance with work site procedures.

Element 18.21A.4 Recommission hydraulic system

Criteria 18.21A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System or sub-assembly recommissioned according to The hydraulic system/sub-assembly is recommissioned to System recommissioning procedures can be identified.
prescribed procedures to specifications. specification in accordance with work site procedures. The hydraulic system operational specifications can be
identified.

Criteria 18.21A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using fluid power principles and system applications The hydraulic system/sub-assembly is checked/tested for
techniques correct operation of the system is verified. correct operation in accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.21A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures are instigated. Where appropriate, follow up procedures are initiated in Any appropriate follow up maintenance or operational
accordance with work site procedures. checks can be identified.

Criteria 18.21A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports updated and All maintenance records/reports are updated and The maintenance recording/reporting requirements can
completed by appropriate designated means. completed in accordance with work site procedures. be identified. The consequences of inaccurate or
incomplete recording/reporting of maintenance/service
activities can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 944 of 1445
 MEM 18.21A A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. This unit relates to the use of hydraulic test equipment including leak testers, escape rate gauges, hand held pressure
testers and other appropriate equipment. The use of hand tools, power tools and specialist tools included. Work tasks include the preventative maintenance, testing, diagnostic
fault finding, adjustment, repair, replacement and overhauling of hydraulic systems to predetermined standards of quality, safety and work practices and procedures. Hydraulic
components identified, inspected and correct operational function assessed using fluid power principles to predetermined specifications, interpreted from data sheets,
manufacturer's catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. Preventative maintenance schedules undertaken on a periodic basis and appropriate documentation
maintained. Tests, checks, adjustments, repair, replacement and overhaul undertaken on hydraulic assemblies/sub-assemblies, stationary/mobile equipment, hydraulic power tools
to site or manufacturers specifications. Appropriate follow up procedures instigated, adopted and appropriate documentation maintained. Where required, work is undertaken to
legislative and regulatory requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. The candidate
will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by
the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with maintaining and repairing and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
hydraulic systems, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 945 of 1445
 MEM 18.22A A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.22A A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.18A Maintain pneumatic system components 18.19A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems
components
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.20A Maintain hydraulic system components 18.21A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems
components
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.22A.1 Install/replace fluid power systems and controls

Criteria 18.22A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fluid power control principles and system/circuit System/circuit diagrams, system operation and control The system operational requirements and specifications
diagrams interpreted and understood. data obtained in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The application of common fluid power
system components and controllers can be identified.

Criteria 18.22A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/circuit components identified and inspected for System/circuit components are checked/inspected for The system/circuit components can be identified.
compliance with specifications. compliance with specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 946 of 1445
 MEM 18.22A A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.22A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequential installation undertaken according to The installation of the fluid power system and controls is Any special installation requirements can be identified.
manufacturer's specifications and standard operating undertaken in accordance with manufacturer's
procedure. specifications and work site procedures..

Element 18.22A.2 Check and adjust fluid power system control sequence and operation
Criteria 18.22A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Controls and system operation checked against Appropriate test equipment is used to check control and Fluid power test equipment and application can be
operational specifications using appropriate test system operation against specification in accordance with identified.
equipment and application principles/techniques. work site procedures.

Criteria 18.22A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments performed to sequence system to meet/align Where appropriate, the system is adjusted to ensure that The correct operational sequence of the system can be
to operational requirements and specifications. the sequence of operations conforms to operational identified. Typical adjustments to correct sequencing
requirements in accordance with work site procedures. variations from specification can be given.

Criteria 18.22A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications/alterations recorded and reported in Any modifications/alterations to the system are The consequences of not recording/reporting
accordance with standard operating procedures. recorded/reported in accordance with work site modifications to systems can be given. The procedures
procedures. for recording/reporting modifications/alterations can be
identified.

Criteria 18.22A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Controls and system operation checked and The operation of the controls and system is checked for The operational and control specifications can be
commissioned to specifications. conformance to specification. The system is commissioned identified. The fluid power system commissioning
in accordance with work site procedures. procedures can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 947 of 1445
 MEM 18.22A A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.22A.3 Fault find fluid power systems control circuit

Criteria 18.22A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/circuit diagrams, data sheets interpreted and All relevant system/circuit diagrams and data sheets are The system components and their specifications can be
understood. obtained in accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.22A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/circuit components identified and inspected. The system/circuit components are checked/inspected for
conformance to specifications.

Criteria 18.22A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/circuit traced and action of components The system/circuit components are checked for correct
diagnosed to identify and localise faults. operation in accordance with work site procedures.
Components not conforming to operational specification
identified and fault localised in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 18.22A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/circuit parts tested using appropriate test Appropriate tests are conducted on system/circuit parts in Common test equipment and its application can be
equipment and application principles. accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.22A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/circuit parts assessed against operational System/circuit parts are checked for conformance to
specifications. specifications.

Criteria 18.22A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition localised at the component level. The component(s) not complying with operational
specification can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 948 of 1445
 MEM 18.22A A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.22A.3.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty condition evaluated, root cause analysed and An appropriate corrective action plan is documented in Typical causes of component failure can be given. The
corrective action planned. accordance with work site procedures. cause of the faulty condition in the component(s) can be
identified Appropriate procedures for rectifying the
faulty condition can be identified.

Element 18.22A.4 Maintain, repair/replace system control components

Criteria 18.22A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct maintenance procedures applied according to Appropriate maintenance is carried out in accordance with The appropriate maintenance schedule and procedures
standard operating procedure. work site procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 18.22A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair procedures selected and applied using correct and Where appropriate, control components repaired in Appropriate control component repair procedures can be
appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. accordance with work site processors. identified.

Criteria 18.22A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items tested, repaired or replaced using sequential Faulty items tested for conformance to specification in Any special installation requirements can be identified.
installation procedures according to manufacturer's accordance with work site procedures. Repaired/replaced Component and operational specifications can be
recommendations. components installed in accordance with manufacturer's identified. Typical test equipment and its application can
requirements and work site procedures. be identified.

Criteria 18.22A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturer's Where appropriate, replacement items are selected from
catalogues to meet specifications. manufacturer's catalogues in conformance with
specifications.

Criteria 18.22A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System control components reassembled using Where appropriate, control components reassembled in
appropriate principles and procedures according to accordance with work site procedures.
specifications required.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 949 of 1445
 MEM 18.22A A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.22A.5 Check and adjust sequence of fluid power system controls
Criteria 18.22A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using circuit diagrams and fluid power system control Circuit diagrams are obtained in accordance with work site Circuit sensors and controllers can be identified.
principles identify circuit sensors and controllers. procedures.

Criteria 18.22A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Make necessary adjustments to sequence system control Where appropriate, the control system is adjusted to The operational requirements/specifications of the
circuit to meet operational specification. ensure conformance to operational specification in system can be identified. Common adjustments that can
accordance with work site procedures. be made to control systems and their effect can be
identified.

Criteria 18.22A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of system control circuit checked The operation of the control system is checked for
against operational specification. conformance to operational specifications in accordance
with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.22A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation confirmed. The correct operation of the control system has been
confirmed.

Criteria 18.22A.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fluid power system controls commissioned to The fluid power control system is commissioned to The procedures for commissioning fluid power control
specifications. specification in accordance with work site procedures. systems can be identified.

Criteria 18.22A.5.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures adopted. Where appropriate, maintenance and/or service follow up Any maintenance/service follow up procedures can be
procedures are initiated in accordance with work site identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.22A.5.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service/maintenance report completed to standard Maintenance and/or service reports are completed in The maintenance/service recording/reporting
operating procedures. accordance with work site procedures. requirements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 950 of 1445
 MEM 18.22A A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures, autonomously or in a team environment. This unit relates to the
installation/repair/replacement and maintenance of fluid power systems controls. System circuit/components identified, traced, inspected and operational function assessed and
verified using fluid power principles to predetermined specifications interpreted from data sheets and circuit diagrams. Installation, adjustment, repairs, replacements and overhauls
undertaken to site or manufacturer's specifications using working knowledge and application of principles of fluid power systems control sequencing which may include : PLCs,
relay logic control systems, unitised/modular sensors, transducers, timers, counters and associated equipment. If skills beyond the sequencing of PLC controls are required, then
Units 10.4A (Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters) and/or Unit 10.5A (Commission programmable controller programs) should also be accessed.
Correct operational function of the fluid power system controls verified and commissioned in conformance to specifications.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. The candidate
will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by
the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with maintaining, repairing and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
replacing fluid power controls, or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 951 of 1445
 MEM 18.23B A Modify fluid power system operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.23B A Modify fluid power system operation

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 2.8C10 Perform computations
2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
statistical computations
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.10A Equipment condition monitoring and recording 18.16B Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring
components results
18.18A Maintain pneumatic system components 18.19A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems 18.20A Maintain hydraulic system components
18.21A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems 18.22A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.23B.1 Determine modification requirements

Criteria 18.23B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service/maintenance reports and system output Service/maintenance reports and system output Fluid power system performance, faults history and
information interpreted and analysed correctly. information is obtained in accordance with work site variations from operational specification can be
procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.23B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge and principles of fluid power systems, Faults attributable to poor design can be identified
defective components, sub-assemblies and design faults Defective components/sub-assemblies can be identified.
are identified.

Criteria 18.23B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Defective components and design faults verified utilising Components/sub-assemblies are checked/tested for Appropriate test equipment and its application can be
appropriate means and techniques. conformance to specification in accordance with work site identified. Techniques for verifying design faults can be
procedures. Design faults are confirmed in accordance identified.
with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 952 of 1445
 MEM 18.23B A Modify fluid power system operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.23B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective action plan researched and developed in Relevant information with respect to the modification Personnel to be consulted during the modification
consultation with appropriate personnel. requirements is obtained. An appropriate action plan to process can be identified. Sources of information
overcome system problems is developed in accordance relevant to the modification requirements identified.
with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.23B.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification/design options investigated to overcome The modification/design options available to overcome
parts failure or design faults. system faults can be identified. The cost associated with
the available options can be determined. The benefits
associated with the available options can be determined.

Criteria 18.23B.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Most appropriate modifications design option developed, The specifications pertaining to the selected The most appropriate modification/design option can be
selected and specifications prepared. modification/design option are determined in accordance identified. The procedures for undertaking the selected
with work site procedures. modification/design option can be identified.

Element 18.23B.2 Undertake modifications to fluid power systems

Criteria 18.23B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components selected from manufacturer's Replacement components conforming to predetermined
catalogue to meet specifications. specifications can be identified from manufacturer's
catalogues.

Criteria 18.23B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications undertaken or delegated to appropriate Where appropriate, modifications to fluid power systems The modifications to be undertaken can be identified.
personnel and supervised. undertaken in accordance with work site procedures.
Where appropriate, work delegated to appropriate
personnel and supervised in accordance with work site
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 953 of 1445
 MEM 18.23B A Modify fluid power system operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.23B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications recorded and documented according to The modifications to the fluid power system are The requirements for recording/reporting modifications
standard operating procedures. recorded/reported in accordance with work site to fluid power systems can be identified.
procedures.

Element 18.23B.3 Monitor and evaluate repaired or modified fluid power system
Criteria 18.23B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modified/repaired fluid power systems monitored and The operation of the modified/repaired fluid power system The revised operational specification of the fluid power
operation system assessed for compliance with is checked for compliance with operational specifications system can be identified. The frequency of checks for
operational specifications. in accordance with work site procedures. compliance against operational specifications can be
given.

Criteria 18.23B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications/repairs evaluated for effectiveness, The effectiveness and efficiency of the
efficiency and compliance with operational specifications. modifications/repairs can be identified. Any variations
from operational specifications can be identified.

Criteria 18.23B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, further corrective action recommended Where applicable, further corrective action initiated and Any further modifications/repairs that could improve the
to appropriate personnel, instigated and monitored until monitored in accordance with work site procedures. Where effectiveness and efficiency of the fluid power system
desired efficiencies/outcomes are achieved. appropriate, additional action is initiated until desired can be identified. Personnel to whom recommendations
outcomes are achieved in accordance with work site are to be made can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.23B.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evaluation reports completed to standard operating Where appropriate, evaluation reports on the The appropriate reporting requirements can be identified.
procedure. modifications/repairs undertaken are completed in
accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 954 of 1445
 MEM 18.23B A Modify fluid power system operation Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Analysis tasks performed utilising service/maintenance reports including interpretation and integration of data from
process controls, instrumentation and condition monitoring systems in consultation with appropriate personnel. Using sound working knowledge and principles of fluid power
systems, defective components, sub-assemblies, design faults are identified and appropriate redesign action commissioned. This action may include replacement of components,
sub-assemblies using equivalent parts lists in manufacturer's catalogues. Preparation for redesign specifications, associated drawing changes/modifications, personally undertaken
or delegated to appropriate personnel and supervised. All regulative, legislative requirements adhered to. Modifications covered by this unit are changes to fluid power systems
and equipment that lead to desired changes in system performance. Where the modification requires the knowledge of PLC program installation or commissioning, then Unit 10.4A
(Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters) and Unit 10.5A (Commission programmable controller programs) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. - Identify
colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the modification of fluid and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
power system operations, or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 955 of 1445
 MEM 18.24A A Maintain and repair engine cooling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.24A A Maintain and repair engine cooling systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.24A.1 Assess cooling system operation

Criteria 18.24A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Heat transfer characteristics; water treatment; and The principles of heat transfer as applied to cooling
corrosion principles and terminology understood. systems can be explained. The effect of water treatment
and corrosion on the effectiveness of cooling system
operation can be given.

Criteria 18.24A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant information obtained and correctly interpreted All information relevant to the cooling system is obtained The components of the cooling system and their
prior to any testing. in accordance with work place procedures. function can be identified.

Criteria 18.24A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System checks undertaken safely and to prescribed The cooling system is checked safely in accordance with The checks to be carried out on cooling systems can be
procedures. standard operating procedures. identified. The procedures for carrying out cooling
system checks can be given. The hazards associated
with testing cooling systems can be identified.

Criteria 18.24A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Water/air flows, pressures and temperatures correctly The water/air flows, pressures and temperatures of the The procedures for measuring water/air flows, pressures
determined and recorded. cooling system are accurately measured and recorded in and temperatures in cooling systems can be given. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. necessary tools, techniques and equipment to carry out
the above tests can be identified. The procedures for
recording test results can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 956 of 1445
 MEM 18.24A A Maintain and repair engine cooling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.24A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and Any variations of test results from specifications can be
appropriate corrective action determined. identified. The likely causes of those variations can be
explained. The faulty component(s) can be identified.
The appropriate corrective action to be taken can be
identified. The reasons for identifying the corrective
action to be taken can be explained.

Criteria 18.24A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment adapted and used correctly. Where appropriate, the test equipment is adapted for use The reasons for adapting test equipment can be given.
on the cooling system being tested. The precautions to be taken when adapting test
equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.24A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Coolant test samples correctly obtained and tested. Coolant test samples are obtained in accordance with The procedures for taking coolant test samples can be
standard operating procedures. The coolant samples are given. The procedures for testing coolant samples can be
tested in accordance with standard operating procedures. given. The tools, techniques and equipment required to
carry out tests on coolant samples can be identified. The
reasons for testing coolant samples can be explained.

Criteria 18.24A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component parts correctly assessed for re-use or Faulty components can be identified for repair or
replacement. replacement. The reasons for identifying faulty
components for repair or replacement can be given.

Element 18.24A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.24A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component wear and clearances correctly determined Cooling system components are checked for wear and The procedures for testing components for wear and
using appropriate test equipment and manufacturers clearances using appropriate equipment in accordance clearances can be given. The appropriate measuring/test
recommendations. with standard operating procedures. equipment can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen measuring/test equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 957 of 1445
 MEM 18.24A A Maintain and repair engine cooling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.24A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components correctly selected for All relevant specifications, parts lists, catalogues etc are Replacement parts can be identified. The procedures for
application using manufacturers data. obtained in accordance with work place procedures. obtaining replacement parts can be given.
Where appropriate, replacement parts are obtained in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.24A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components removed and refitted to engine following Cooling system components are removed and refitted to The procedures for removing/replacing cooling system
prescribed procedures. the engine in accordance with standard operating components from the engine can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 18.24A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test and repair activities are accurately recorded. Test and repair activities undertaken on the cooling The procedures for recording test and repair activities
system are accurately recorded in accordance with can be given.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.24A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engine free of coolant leaks and cooling system contains The engine is tested for coolant leaks after repair in The procedures for checking coolant levels and engine
the correct level of additive/inhibitor after repair work is accordance with standard operating procedures. The coolant leaks can be given. The correct amount of
carried out. coolant level is checked after repair in accordance with additive/ inhibitor to be added to the coolant can be
standard operating procedures. The coolant contains the identified.
correct amount of additive/inhibitor after the repair.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 958 of 1445
 MEM 18.24A A Maintain and repair engine cooling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Cooling system testing would typically require the person to obtain air and/or water flows, temperatures and pressures; assessing serviceability and repair of a range of
flow/pressure regulators; sensors, actuators and solenoids on shutter type systems or fan drives; or water type inter/after and oil coolers. Typical symptoms of faults would be
coolant pressures/the presence of steam, gases, oil, fuel or air. This unit would typically apply to engine or vehicle cooling systems. On large stationary plant, cooling systems may
include the use of cooling towers. All work undertaken to manufacturers specifications and standard operating procedures.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
engine cooling systems or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 959 of 1445
 MEM 18.25A A Service combustion engines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.25A A Service combustion engines

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.25A.1 Check and assess items for serviceability

Criteria 18.25A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceable replacement items correctly assessed Items removed from the engine are checked for Items removed from the engine that are serviceable can
regarding serviceability. serviceability. Items removed from the engine are checked be identified. Items removed from the engine that are
for conformance to specifications. unserviceable and are to be replaced can be identified.
The specifications of the items removed can be
identified.

Criteria 18.25A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement fluids/items correctly determined for All relevant manufacturer's data is obtained in accordance The replacement fluids and items can be correctly
application using manufacturers data. with work place procedures. identified from manufacturer's data.

Criteria 18.25A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Abnormal appearance/condition of serviceable Where appropriate, fluids and items having abnormal Common defects that can be identified from the items'
items/fluids identified and reported to appropriate appearance are reported to the appropriate authority. appearance can be given. The procedures for reporting
authority. items/fluids with abnormal appearance can be given. The
person to whom the abnormal appearance of the items is
to be reported can be identified.

Criteria 18.25A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lubricant, cooling system additives and filtering The principles of operation of the lubrication system can
principles understood. be given. The principles of operation of the cooling
system can be given. The function of filters can be given.
The purpose of a range of additives can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 960 of 1445
 MEM 18.25A A Service combustion engines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.25A.2 Perform servicing procedures

Criteria 18.25A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engine fluids flushed, cleaned and replaced with correct The engine fluids are flushed from the engine in The procedures for flushing fluids from the engine can
fluid and/or additives, and to the correct accordance with standard operating procedures. The be given. The reasons for ensuring any residual/spilt
level/concentration according to manufacturers engine is cleaned of any residual fluids. The engine fluids fluids are removed from the engine can be given. The
recommendations. are replaced with the correct fluids in accordance with appropriate grade and type of replacement fluid can be
standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, fluid identified. The procedures for replacing engine fluids can
additives are added in the correct proportion in be given. The correct proportions of additive to be used
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 18.25A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceable items removed and replaced according to Serviceable items are removed and replaced in accordance The procedures for removing/ replacing serviceable items
manufacturers recommended procedures. with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.25A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engine free of lubricant, water and air leaks after servicing The engine is checked for lubricant, water and air leaks The procedures for checking serviced engines for leaks
work. after servicing in accordance with standard operating can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.25A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hoses, wiring, ducts etc. correctly secured after servicing All wires, hoses, ducts are correctly secured after The methods of fastening/securing wires, hoses, ducts,
work. servicing. etc can be identified.

Criteria 18.25A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Minor running adjustments made to specification. Minor running adjustments are made to specification in The minor running adjustments to be made can be
accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The procedures for undertaking minor running
adjustments can be given. The specifications pertaining
to those adjustments can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 961 of 1445
 MEM 18.25A A Service combustion engines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.25A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test samples correctly obtained from system as Test samples are correctly obtained in accordance with The procedures for taking test samples can be given. The
determined by standard operating procedures. standard operating procedures. samples to be taken can be identified.

Element 18.25A.3 Report activities

Criteria 18.25A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Servicing activities accurately recorded on report Servicing activities undertaken are reported in accordance The procedures for reporting service activities
sheet/proforma; or accurate oral report given. with standard operating procedures. undertaken can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 962 of 1445
 MEM 18.25A A Service combustion engines Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the assessment and replacement of serviceable items such as filters/conditioners, coolants, lubricants and hydraulic fluids, additives, etc; and the carrying out
of servicing activities to predetermined procedures or manufacturers specifications, including minor running adjustments. Servicing activities may include obtaining and
despatching samples for spectrographic or laboratory analysis. Adjustments are limited to "running adjustments" typical of which are vee belt tensions, shroud clearances, linkage
adjustments, etc. This unit should not be selected if Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the servicing of combustion and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
engines or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 963 of 1445
 MEM 18.26A B Test compression ignition fuel systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.26A B Test compression ignition fuel systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.26A.1 Assess fuel system operation

Criteria 18.26A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fuel injection principles and component part The principles of fuel injection can be explained. The
functions/operation understood. function/operation of each component in a fuel injection
system can be identified.

Criteria 18.26A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plant/equipment started, operated and shutdown to Diesel plant/equipment is started/ operated and shut down The procedures for starting up, operating and shutting
prescribed procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. down diesel plant and equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.26A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Checks undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures. Operational checks of the diesel fuel system are safely The operational checks to be made on the diesel fuel
undertaken in accordance with standard operating system can be identified. The procedures for carrying out
procedures. operational checks on diesel fuel systems can be given.

Criteria 18.26A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Flows, pressures, speeds correctly determined and Fuel flows, pressures and engine speed are correctly The methods of determining flows, pressures and speeds
recorded. determined and recorded in accordance with standard can be identified. The tools, techniques and equipment
operating procedures. to be used to measure flows, pressures and speeds can
be identified. The procedures for carrying out the above
tests can be given. The procedures for recording test
results can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 964 of 1445
 MEM 18.26A B Test compression ignition fuel systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.26A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plant operating characteristics and parameters The plant operating characteristics can be identified. The
understood. plant operating parameters can be identified.

Criteria 18.26A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data is correctly interpreted regarding serviceability. The serviceability of the fuel system can be determined
from the test results and plant operating characteristics
and parameters. The reasons for the decisions made with
respect to serviceability can be explained.

Criteria 18.26A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly interpreted regarding serviceability. For unserviceable systems the likely faults can be
identified. The reasons for identifying the likely faults
can be given.

Criteria 18.26A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Governing characteristics and terminology understood. The principles of governing can be explained. The
function of the governor on the given plant/equipment
can be identified.

Criteria 18.26A.1.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment used correctly. All test equipment is used correctly in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 965 of 1445
 MEM 18.26A B Test compression ignition fuel systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Operation of plant and equipment would be performed within the persons licensing limits or as determined by relevant regulations. Fuel system components include diesel injectors,
fuel pumps, governing apparatus and replacement would require the person to time the high pressure fuel pump or injectors to engine. Final adjustment may include the setting of
low/high or no load/full load speed and/or droop, sensitivity, stability, promptness etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance of diesel fuel and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
systems or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 966 of 1445
 MEM 18.27A B Overhaul engine fuel system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.27A B Overhaul engine fuel system components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.27A.1 Clean and assess parts

Criteria 18.27A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components disassembled according to manufacturers Manufacturer's procedures are obtained in accordance The sequence for disassembling engine fuel components
recommendation's. with work place procedures. The engine fuel system can be identified.
components are disassembled in accordance with
manufacturer's procedures.

Criteria 18.27A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specialised tools used correctly. Where appropriate, specialised tools are correctly used. Any specialised tools required and their application can
be identified.

Criteria 18.27A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts are assessed visually for abnormal wear or defects. Parts are visually checked for abnormal wear or defects. Common defects and examples of abnormal wear can be
identified from given samples.

Criteria 18.27A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns The characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns
associated with pumps/governors/injectors understood. for fuel system components can be identified. Examples
of wear patterns and their cause can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 967 of 1445
 MEM 18.27A B Overhaul engine fuel system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.27A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cleaning method/solution and procedure The method of cleaning fuel system components can be
selected. identified. The appropriate solvents for cleaning fuel
systems can be identified. The procedures for cleaning
fuel systems can be given.

Criteria 18.27A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts correctly protected and stored ready for Fuel system parts are appropriately protected and stored The procedures for protecting and storing fuel system
reassembly. in accordance with standard operating procedures. components can be given.

Criteria 18.27A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts made identifiable according to their original location Parts are identified according to their original location in The procedures for marking fuel system components in
in the pump/injector and protected and stored as the pump/injector in accordance with standard operating readiness for reassembly can be given.
required for reassembly. procedures.

Element 18.27A.2 Record and interpret measurements

Criteria 18.27A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measurements are accurately obtained and recorded. Fuel system components are accurately measured. The measuring instruments to be used to measure fuel
Measurements taken are recorded accurately in system components can be identified. The reason for
accordance with standard operating procedures. selecting the chosen measuring instruments can be
given. The procedures for recording fuel system
component measurements can be given.

Criteria 18.27A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measurements and part condition correctly interpreted The specifications, parts lists, etc. of fuel system The measurements taken and the component
when determining reuse/replacement. components are obtained in accordance with work place specifications are compared and out of specification
procedures. parts identified. Parts to be reused/replaced can be
identified. The reasons for the decisions made with
respect to reuse/replacement can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 968 of 1445
 MEM 18.27A B Overhaul engine fuel system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.27A.3 Recondition and set up equipment

Criteria 18.27A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fuel system and governing functions, characteristics, The principles of operation of diesel fuel systems can be
applications and terminology understood. explained.

Criteria 18.27A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components identified as faulty are reconditioned and Faulty components are replaced or reconditioned in The procedures for reconditioning faulty fuel system
replaced. accordance with standard operating procedures. components can be given. The procedures for replacing
faulty fuel system components can be given.

Criteria 18.27A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components assembled according to manufacturer's Fuel system components are assembled in accordance The procedures for assembling fuel system components
specifications. with manufacturer's specifications and procedures. can be given. The specifications of the fuel system
components can be identified.

Criteria 18.27A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment used correctly. All test equipment is used correctly in accordance with The procedures for testing fuel system components can
standard operating procedures. be given. The tools, techniques and equipment required
to carry out fuel system component tests can be
identified.

Criteria 18.27A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components tested and set to specifications. Fuel system components are tested and set to The procedures for setting fuel system components can
specifications in accordance with standard operating be given.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 969 of 1445
 MEM 18.27A B Overhaul engine fuel system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit refers to work typically undertaken on large stationary or mobile diesel engines and would entail the rebuilding/setting up of diesel fuel pumps, governors, injectors and
associated equipment. Governor types include mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic and electronic. Fuel system types typically include port and helix, sleeve metering, unit injection,
distributor and pressure/time. All work undertaken to manufacturer's specifications and standard operating procedures.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the overhaul of engine fuel and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
system components or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 970 of 1445
 MEM 18.28A B Maintain and repair engine lubrication systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.28A B Maintain and repair engine lubrication systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.28A.1 Assess lubrication system operation

Criteria 18.28A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant information is obtained and correctly interpreted All relevant instructions, specifications, procedures, etc. The operation of the lubrication system can be identified.
prior to any testing. are obtained in accordance with work place procedures.

Criteria 18.28A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Checks undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures. The lubrication system is checked safely in accordance The procedures for testing/checking lubrication systems
with standard operating procedures. can be given. The precautions to be taken when
checking lubrication systems can be identified.

Criteria 18.28A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Flows, pressures, temperatures correctly determined and Oil flows, pressures and temperatures are correctly The tests to be undertaken can be identified. The
recorded. determined and recorded in accordance with standard equipment and techniques to be used to determine oil
operating procedures. flows, pressures and temperatures can be identified. The
procedures for recording lubrication system test results
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 971 of 1445
 MEM 18.28A B Maintain and repair engine lubrication systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.28A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and The specifications of the lubrication system components
appropriate corrective action determined. can be identified. Faulty components can be identified.
The appropriate corrective action can be identified. The
reasons for proposing the identified corrective action can
be given.

Criteria 18.28A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Lubricant fluid characteristics, terminology and The characteristics of lubricants can be explained. The
applications understood. application of a variety of lubricants can be identified.

Criteria 18.28A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment used correctly. All test equipment is used correctly in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.28A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results of spectrographic or laboratory analysis correctly Where appropriate, the results of lubricating oil tests are The procedures for analysing lubricating oil samples can
evaluated and recommendations made regarding obtained in accordance with standard operating be given. The reasons for undertaking lubricating oil
adjustments to future maintenance activities. procedures. analysis can be explained. The likely causes of a range of
out of specification test results can be given. The
appropriate corrective action to be taken can be given.
The implications of out of specification test results on
maintenance schedules and requirements can be
explained.

Criteria 18.28A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Auxiliary lubrication systems assessed for correct Where appropriate, auxiliary lubrication systems are The reasons for installing auxiliary lubrication systems
operation. checked for correct operation. on diesel plant and equipment can be given. The
operation of the auxiliary lubrication system can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 972 of 1445
 MEM 18.28A B Maintain and repair engine lubrication systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.28A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.28A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components correctly selected using Replacement components are correctly selected.
manufacturer's data.

Criteria 18.28A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components removed and refitted to engine following Lubrication system components are removed and refitted The procedures for removing/replacing lubrication
prescribed procedures. to the engine in accordance with standard operating system components can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 18.28A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final adjustments made that bring system in line with The lubrication system is adjusted in conformance to The adjustments that can be made to the lubrication
specifications. specifications and standard operating procedures. system can be identified. The procedures for adjusting
lubrication systems can be given.

Criteria 18.28A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test and repair activities accurately recorded. All test and repair activities are accurately recorded in The procedures for recording test and repair activities
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.28A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engine free of lubricant leaks after repair work is carried The engine is free of lubricant leaks after the repair work is The procedures for checking lubrication systems for
out. carried out. leaks can be given.

Criteria 18.28A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component wear and clearances correctly determined Lubrication system components are checked for wear and The measuring equipment and techniques to be used to
using appropriate test equipment and manufacturer's clearance in accordance with standard operating determine lubrication system component wear and
recommendations. procedures. clearances can be identified. The procedures for
determining wear and clearances can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 973 of 1445
 MEM 18.28A B Maintain and repair engine lubrication systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Lubrication system testing would require obtaining flow, temperature and pressure measurements. Adjustments may include setting of bypass/regulating/relief valves to specified
pressures of flows and typical symptoms of faults would be lubrication pressures/temperatures that are too low/high; excessive or too little consumption/flow, etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
engine lubrication systems or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 974 of 1445
 MEM 18.29A A Tune diesel engine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.29A A Tune diesel engine

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.26A Test compression ignition fuel systems 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.26A Test compression ignition fuel systems 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.29A.1 Compression test engine

Criteria 18.29A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Injectors removed and fuel system for each cylinder The injectors are removed from each cylinder and the fuel The procedures for removing injectors from cylinders can
isolated correctly. system isolated in accordance with standard operating be given. The reasons for isolating the fuel system can
procedures. be given.

Criteria 18.29A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate adaptors selected and fitted. Appropriate adaptors are fitted to the cylinders in Appropriate adaptors can be identified. The reasons for
accordance with standard operating procedures. using adaptors can be given. The procedures for fitting
adaptors to the cylinders can be given.

Criteria 18.29A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Readings obtained are accurately recorded and Compression readings are obtained and recorded The procedures for compression testing diesel engines
interpreted. accurately in accordance with standard operating can be given. The procedures for recording compression
procedures. readings can be given. The compression readings are
compared with specifications and any deviations
identified. The likely causes of any detected deviations
from specification can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 975 of 1445
 MEM 18.29A A Tune diesel engine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.29A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Compression readings corrected for adaptor used. The compression readings taken are corrected for the The corrections required to be made to compression
adaptor used. readings to take account of the adaptor used can be
identified. The reasons why corrections have to be made
to the compression readings taken can be explained.

Element 18.29A.2 Perform tune up

Criteria 18.29A.2.0 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
If applicable, firing pressures accurately determined and Where appropriate, firing pressures are adjusted to The procedures for adjusting firing pressures can be
adjusted to specification. specification in accordance with standard operating given. The firing pressures to be achieved can be
procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.29A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engine started, operated, loaded, and shut down safely. The engine is started, operated, loaded and shut down The procedures for starting, operating, loading and
safely in accordance with standard operating procedures. shutting down diesel engines can be given. The hazards
associated with starting, operating, loading and shutting
down diesel engines can be given.

Criteria 18.29A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment correctly applied. All test equipment is correctly applied in accordance with The test equipment to be used in the tuning of diesel
standard operating procedures. engines can be identified. The procedures for carrying
out tests on diesel engines can be given.

Criteria 18.29A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Air restriction, boost, back pressure, flow tests performed The appropriate tests are carried out in accordance with The manufacturer's recommended tests can be identified.
according to manufacturer's recommendations. standard operating procedures. The reasons for conducting the tests can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 976 of 1445
 MEM 18.29A A Tune diesel engine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.29A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Readings recorded and variances from specifications All test readings are recorded in accordance with standard The procedures for recording test results can be given.
correctly determined. operating procedures. Variations from specifications of any test result can be
identified.

Criteria 18.29A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Density of exhaust smoke correctly determined. The density of exhaust smoke is correctly determined in The procedures for determining exhaust smoke density
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The equipment and techniques required to
measure exhaust smoke density can be identified. The
reasons for determining exhaust smoke density can be
given.

Criteria 18.29A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Valve clearance and/or timing correctly adjusted. Valve clearance and/or timing is correctly adjusted in The procedures for adjusting valve clearances and/or
accordance with standard operating procedures. timing can be given. The clearances and timing to be
achieved can be identified.

Criteria 18.29A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Injection pump or injector timing adjusted to Injector pump or injector timing is adjusted to specification The procedures for adjusting injector pump and injector
specification. in accordance with standard operating procedures. timing can be given. The timing and pressures to be
achieved can be identified.

Criteria 18.29A.2.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Governor rack travel, torque spring load limit, overspeed The governor rack travel, torque spring load limit, The procedures for adjusting the governor rack travel,
trips, aneroid or fuel ratio control adjusted to overspeed trips, aneroid or fuel ratio control is adjusted to torque spring load limit, overspeed trips, aneroid or fuel
specification. specification in accordance with standard operating ratio control can be given. The governor specifications
procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 18.29A.2.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Injector opening pressure correctly determined and The injector opening pressure is adjusted to specification The procedures for adjusting injector opening pressure
adjusted. in accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The injector opening pressure to be
achieved can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 977 of 1445
 MEM 18.29A A Tune diesel engine Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers tune up procedures and the evaluation of engine performance on compression ignition engines. The person performing these tasks should be able to demonstrate
an understanding of the theories and be able to carry out manufacturers procedures associated with servicing, adjusting and evaluating engine performance and be able to perform
the following: remove injectors, install a compression gauge, carry out a compression test and interpret the test results; carry out a machine stall test or engine load test to determine
engine condition by measuring air inlet restriction, boost pressure, exhaust back pressure and crankcase pressure; evaluate exhaust smoke and determine corrective action if
required; adjust engine valve clearances; check and adjust injection pump timing on in-line pumps and rotary pumps using either spill, pin, mark or dial gauge methods; time and
calibrate unit injectors; adjust governor settings - maximum speed/idle speed; test and adjust injectors; be able to isolate injectors on a running engine to determine cylinder misfire.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the tuning of diesel engines and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 978 of 1445
 MEM 18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.30A.1 Use test instruments

Criteria 18.30A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electron theory, current, voltage and resistance principles The principles of electron theory can be explained. The
understood. terms current, voltage and resistance can be defined in
terms of electrical circuits. The relationships between
current, voltage and resistance for a variety of given
electrical circuits can be identified.

Criteria 18.30A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select, correctly use and maintain test instruments For a variety of electrical circuits the correct test The instruments to be used to measure current, voltage
appropriate for determining current, voltage and instrument is selected and appropriately used to measure and resistance can be identified. The procedures for
resistance. the current, voltage and resistance of specified circuit measuring current, voltage and resistance can be given.
components or sections of circuitry. Test equipment is The units of current, voltage and resistance can be
maintained in accordance with standard operating identified. The procedures for maintaining electrical test
procedures. equipment can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 979 of 1445
 MEM 18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.30A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical drawings and manufacturers diagrams correctly The function of a variety of electrical circuits can be
interpreted. identified from given electrical drawings/diagrams. The
symbols used in electrical drawings/diagrams can be
correctly identified. The components of a variety of
electrical circuits can be identified from given electrical
drawings/diagrams.

Criteria 18.30A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Series, parallel and series parallel circuits correctly The differences between series and parallel electrical
determined. circuits can be explained. A variety of electrical circuits
can be correctly identified as being series, parallel, or
combined series and parallel.

Criteria 18.30A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Basic electrical laws understood and correctly applied. Ohms law can be identified and applied to determine the
required values of voltage, current and resistance for a
range of electrical circuits. The laws for determining the
resistance of series and parallel circuits can be identified
and applied to determine the resistance of a range of
electrical circuits.

Criteria 18.30A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
AVR test instruments correctly connected into circuits. Electrical test instruments are correctly connected into
given circuits to determine the required values of current,
voltage and resistance.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 980 of 1445
 MEM 18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.30A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Meters read to standard accuracy; and wave form and A general purpose oscilloscope can be correctly The function of a general purpose oscilloscope can be
quantities determined using general purpose connected to a given electrical circuit and adjusted in explained. The procedures for connecting a general
oscilloscope. accordance with standard operating procedures to purpose oscilloscope into given electrical circuits can be
measure wave forms at nominated points in the circuit. identified. The use of wave forms in the diagnosis of
electrical circuits can be explained. The accuracy to
which a range of electrical test equipment can be read
can be identified.

Criteria 18.30A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Multipliers and shunts correctly used and applied. The use of multipliers and shunts in the measurement of
electrical circuits can be identified. The procedures for
using multipliers and shunts can be given.

Element 18.30A.2 Test battery

Criteria 18.30A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Chemical battery operating principles understood. The operation of a chemical battery can be explained.

Criteria 18.30A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrolyte level is correctly determined and specific For given batteries, the specific gravity of the electrolyte is The function of the electrolyte in batteries can be
gravity readings temperature corrected. correctly determined and corrected where appropriate for identified. The procedures for measuring the specific
temperature variations in accordance with standard gravity of the electrolyte can be given. The effect of
operating procedures. The electrolyte level for a number of temperature on the specific gravity of the electrolyte can
given batteries is correctly determined in accordance with be explained.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.30A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Dry charge preparation and recharging of batteries is Where appropriate, dry batteries are safely prepared for The procedures for preparing dry batteries for charging
carried out correctly. charging in accordance with standard operating can be given. The procedures for recharging batteries
procedures Batteries are safely recharged in accordance can be identified. The hazards associated with
with standard operating procedures. charging/recharging of batteries can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 981 of 1445
 MEM 18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.30A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Discharge testing performed according to prescribed Where appropriate, batteries are safely discharge tested in The purpose of discharge testing of batteries can be
procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. explained. The procedures for discharge testing batteries
can be identified. The hazards associated with the
discharge testing of batteries can be identified.

Criteria 18.30A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement batteries correctly selected for application. The specifications applied to batteries can be correctly
identified. For given battery specifications, replacement
batteries can be identified from supplier catalogues.

Element 18.30A.3 Assess and repair wiring faults

Criteria 18.30A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wiring faults correctly isolated. The correct tests are carried out on given electrical circuits Examples of common faults in electrical wiring can be
and where appropriate, wiring faults are correctly given. The causes of the common faults in electrical
identified. wiring can be explained. The test procedures for isolating
wiring faults can be identified.

Criteria 18.30A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement cables/wires correctly sized. All relevant drawings, circuits, specifications and The specifications of cables and wires used in given
instructions are obtained in accordance with work place electrical circuits can be identified. For given cable/wire
procedures. specifications, replacement cables/wires can be identified
from supplier catalogues.

Criteria 18.30A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Insulation quality correctly determined. The specification of the insulation materials can be
identified. For given insulation specifications,
replacement insulation materials can be identified from
supplier catalogues.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 982 of 1445
 MEM 18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.30A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wiring looms correctly made up for application and Where appropriate, wiring looms are made up in The procedures for making up wiring looms can be given.
securely fixed. accordance with specifications and securely fixed in The procedures for fixing wiring looms can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures. The appropriate fixing points and methods for wiring
looms can be identified.

Criteria 18.30A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wiring terminations stripped, fitted, prepared and made Where appropriate, wiring is correctly terminated in The procedures for stripping, fitting and preparing wiring
correctly. accordance with specifications and standard operating terminations can be given. The procedures for soft and
procedures. hard soldering/crimping of wiring terminations can be
identified. The specifications of the wiring terminations
to be carried out can be identified.

Criteria 18.30A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrosion removed, neutralised and appropriate Where appropriate, corrosion is removed and/or The effect of corrosion on the performance of electrical
protective coating applied. neutralised from terminals and connections, and circuits and connections can be explained. The
appropriate protective coatings applied in accordance with procedures for corrosion removal and/or neutralisation
standard operating procedures. can be given. A range of coatings to stop/inhibit
corrosion can be identified.

Criteria 18.30A.3.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relays, solenoids, contacts and circuits are correctly A range of circuit components are tested for correct The correct operational relays, solenoids and contacts
tested and repaired/replaced. operation in accordance with standard operating can be explained. Common faults in relays, solenoids,
procedures. Where appropriate, faulty circuit components contacts and circuits can be identified. The causes of
are repaired in accordance with standard operating faults in relays, solenoids, contacts and circuits can be
procedures. Where appropriate, the faulty circuit given. The procedures for testing circuit components can
components are replaced in accordance with standard be identified. The specifications of circuit components
operating procedures. can be identified. For given circuit components,
appropriate replacements can be selected from suppliers'
catalogues.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 983 of 1445
 MEM 18.30A A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to testing and repair activities associated with 12, 24 and 36 volt wiring systems on vehicles, plant and stationary equipment. The system extends to wiring,
switching mechanisms and circuit protection devices. This unit should not be selected with any of the following Units: Unit 18.45A (Fault find/repair AC and DC electrical
equipment/components which use up to 240 volts single phase supply (non-interconnected)), or Unit 18.46A (Fault find/repair AC and DC electrical equipment/components, which
use up to 1000 volts AC or 1500 volts DC single phase supply (non-interconnected)). Except in exceptional circumstances this unit should not be selected with Unit 18.56A
(Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) or Unit 18.66A (Diagnose and repair microprocessor based equipment). If soldering of wires/connections is required see
Unit 5.1A (Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
low voltage electrical systems or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 984 of 1445
 MEM 18.31A A Diagnose and repair low voltage starting systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.31A A Diagnose and repair low voltage starting systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.30A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.31A.1 Assess starting motor operation

Criteria 18.31A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Magnetism, induced voltage and electromagnetism, The concepts of magnetism, electromagnetism and
electric motor principles understood. induced voltage can be explained. The construction of
electric motors can be identified. The principles of
operation of electric motors can be explained.

Criteria 18.31A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Starting motor component functions and The components of common starting motors can be
multi-pole/winding/shunt wiring arrangements are identified. The function of starting motor components
understood. can be given. The effect of multi-pole/winding/shunt
wiring arrangements on starting motor performance can
be explained.

Criteria 18.31A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cranking motor drive mechanism correctly performance The cranking motor drive mechanism is safely tested for The tests that can be used to check the performance of
tested. correct operation in accordance with standard operating the cranking motor drive mechanism can be identified.
procedures. The test procedures can be given. The hazards
associated with testing the performance of cranking
motor drive mechanisms can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 985 of 1445
 MEM 18.31A A Diagnose and repair low voltage starting systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.31A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Starter locked armature current, voltage and torque The concept of "locked armature" can be explained in
correctly determined. terms of current, voltage and torque. The starter locked
armature specifications can be identified. The procedures
for determining locked armature current, voltage and
torque can be given. The tools and equipment necessary
to determine starter locked armature current, voltage and
torque can be identified.

Element 18.31A.2 Test and repair starting motors

Criteria 18.31A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Starting motors dismantled and assembled according to Given starting motors can be dismantled and assembled in The manufacturer's recommended
manufacturer's recommendations. accordance with manufacturer's dismantling/assembling procedures for given starting
recommendations/procedures using appropriate tools, motors can be identified. The tools and equipment
techniques and equipment. necessary to dismantle/assemble starting motors can be
identified.

Criteria 18.31A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Testing performed to determine shorts to ground, turn Given starting motors are checked for electrical faults in The range of electrical tests that can be applied to
shorts, winding continuity, etc. accordance with standard operating procedures. starting motors can be identified. The purpose of each of
these tests can be explained. The equipment required to
carry out the tests can be identified. The electrical testing
procedures can be given.

Criteria 18.31A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Solenoid, relays and over-temperature devices correctly For given starting motors, the solenoids, relays and The function of solenoids, relays and over-temperature
tested. over-temperature devices are tested for conformance to devices can be explained. The procedures for testing
specification using appropriate techniques and equipment solenoids, relays and over-temperature devices for
in accordance with standard operating procedures. correct operation can be identified. The operational
specifications of the solenoids, relays and
over-temperature devices can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 986 of 1445
 MEM 18.31A A Diagnose and repair low voltage starting systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.31A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Starter engagement mechanism is tested and adjusted For the given starting motor, the engagement mechanism The procedures for testing and adjusting starter
where possible ie: pinion clearance. is checked for correct operation and conformance with engagement mechanisms can be given. The
specifications in accordance with standard operating specifications of the starter engagement mechanism can
procedures. Where appropriate the starter engagement be identified.
mechanism is adjusted to specification in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.31A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Starting system free of excessive voltage drops. For given starting motors, the starting system is checked The effect of voltage drops on starting system operation/
for excessive voltage drops in accordance with standard performance can be explained. The causes of voltage
operating procedure. drops in the starting system can be given. The
procedures for checking starting systems for excessive
voltage drops can be given.

Criteria 18.31A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Starting and charging circuit connections are correctly For given starting motors, all circuit connections are The effect of loose, poorly joined and/or inappropriate
made, tightened and insulated. checked for conformance to specifications in accordance insulation on starting motor performance/operation can
with standard operating procedures. be explained. The specifications of all circuit connections
can be identified.

Criteria 18.31A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Starter locked armature current, voltage and torque The repaired/overhauled starting motor is tested to ensure
correctly determined. that the locked armature current, voltage and torque
conform to specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 987 of 1445
 MEM 18.31A A Diagnose and repair low voltage starting systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers engine electrical starting systems and would require extensive use of AVR test equipment. Starting motors include axial and coaxial type starters with drive
arrangements such as Dyer, Positork, Sprag clutch, over running clutch and inertia drive. If soldering of wires is required see Unit 5.1A (Manual soldering/desoldering -
electrical/electronic components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
low voltage starting systems or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 988 of 1445
 MEM 18.32A A Maintain and repair induction/exhaust systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.32A A Maintain and repair induction/exhaust systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.32A.1 Assess induction/exhaust system operation

Criteria 18.32A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Supercharging, filtering, inter/after cooling principles, The principles of supercharging, filtering, inter and after
terminology and applications are understood. cooling can be explained using appropriate terminology.
A variety of applications of supercharging, filtering inter
and after cooling can be identified.

Criteria 18.32A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant information is obtained and correctly interpreted All relevant instructions, drawings, specifications, The performance and operational specifications of the
prior to any testing. catalogues and manufacturer's documentation are induction/exhaust system can be identified.
obtained in accordance with workplace procedures.

Criteria 18.32A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Checks undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures. The induction/exhaust system is safely checked for correct The procedures for testing induction/exhaust systems
operation in accordance with standard operating for correct operation can be identified. The safety
procedures. precautions to be followed when testing
induction/exhaust systems can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 989 of 1445
 MEM 18.32A A Maintain and repair induction/exhaust systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.32A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Flows, pressures, temperatures correctly determined and The flows, pressures and temperatures of the given The equipment necessary to test flows, pressures and
recorded. induction/exhaust system are accurately determined using temperatures can be identified. The procedures for
appropriate techniques and equipment in accordance with testing flows, pressures and temperatures associated
standard operating procedures. Where appropriate, flows, with induction/exhaust systems can be identified. The
pressures and temperatures are recorded in accordance procedures for recording flows, pressures and
with standard operating procedures. temperatures can be given.

Criteria 18.32A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and Where appropriate, the faulty component is isolated in Common faults associated with induction/exhaust
appropriate corrective action determined. accordance with standard operating procedures. systems can be identified. The causes of those common
faults can be given. The procedures for correcting faults
in induction/exhaust systems can be identified. The
appropriate corrective action for a variety of common
faults can be identified.

Criteria 18.32A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test instruments and equipment used correctly. All test instruments and equipment are used safely and
correctly in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Element 18.32A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.32A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component wear and clearances correctly determined Component parts are checked visually and dimensionally The component specifications/tolerances can be
using manufacturer's recommendations. for wear in accordance with standard operating identified. The actions to be taken if the components are
procedures. outside of specification can be identified. The action to
be taken if the components are "just" within specification
can be identified. For the given component(s) the action
to be taken can be explained. The measuring instruments
to be used to carry out dimensional checks on
components can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 990 of 1445
 MEM 18.32A A Maintain and repair induction/exhaust systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.32A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components correctly selected using Where appropriate, replacement components are selected
manufacturer's data. from supplier catalogues in conformance to manufacturer's
specifications.

Criteria 18.32A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components removed and refitted to engine following Components are removed from and fitted to engines safely The procedures for removing/fitting components to
prescribed procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. engines can be identified. The safety precautions to be
followed when removing/fitting components to engines
can be identified.

Criteria 18.32A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test and repair activities are accurately recorded. All test and, where appropriate, repair activities, are The procedures for recording test and repair activities
recorded in accordance with standard operating undertaken on induction/exhaust systems can be
procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.32A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engine free of air/exhaust leaks after repair work is carried The induction/exhaust system is checked for leaks in The consequences of air/exhaust leaks on the safe
out. accordance with standard operating procedures. operation of the induction/exhaust system can be
explained. The procedures for testing for leaks in
induction/exhaust systems can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 991 of 1445
 MEM 18.32A A Maintain and repair induction/exhaust systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Supercharging apparatus includes turbo charging equipment. Testing procedures would typically require the person to understand the operation of the apparatus installed to
balance fuel injection to boost pressure; and control devices installed to prevent excessive turbocharger RPM and/or boost pressure. Typical faults would be associated with
excessive air inlet restrictions, excessive exhaust back pressures, too much/little boost pressure, ineffective inter/after cooling, etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
induction/exhaust systems or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 992 of 1445
 MEM 18.33A A Perform engine bottom-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.33A A Perform engine bottom-end overhaul

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.33A.1 Dismantle, clean and assess parts

Criteria 18.33A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns All relevant parts lists, specifications, manuals and The characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns
associated with crankshaft and piston assemblies procedures are obtained in accordance with work place as applied to crankshaft and piston assemblies can be
understood and parts correctly assessed for re-use or procedures. described. The specifications of crankshaft and piston
replacement. assemblies can be identified. Given components can be
correctly identified for re-use or replacement. The
reasons for identifying the components for re-use or
replacement can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 993 of 1445
 MEM 18.33A A Perform engine bottom-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.33A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engine removed from plant, top end components The engine is removed from plant, top end components The procedures for dismantling the block assembly can
removed and block assembly dismantled according to removed and block assembly dismantled in accordance be given. The procedures for removing the engine from
manufacturers recommendations. with standard operating procedures. the plant can be given. The procedures for removing the
top end from the engine can be given. The tools,
techniques and equipment to be used can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques
and equipment can be given. The hazards associated
with the removal of engines/engine components can be
identified.

Criteria 18.33A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts assessed for abnormal wear or defects. All parts are checked for abnormal wear or defects. The action to be taken when abnormal wear or defects
are observed in the engine components can be given.

Criteria 18.33A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cleaning solution and procedure selected. Parts are cleaned using appropriate solutions and The procedures for cleaning engine parts can be given.
procedures. The cleaning solution to be used can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen cleaning solution can
be given.

Criteria 18.33A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts racked or set out according to their original location Engine parts are racked or set out according to their The procedures for racking and/or setting out of parts in
in the engine. original position in readiness for reassembly in accordance readiness for reassembly can be given.
with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.33A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns Engine components are correctly assessed for re-use or Engine components not conforming to specification can
associated with crankshaft and piston assemblies replacement. be identified.
understood and parts correctly assessed for re-use or
replacement.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 994 of 1445
 MEM 18.33A A Perform engine bottom-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.33A.2 Record and interpret measurements

Criteria 18.33A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measurements are accurately obtained and recorded. Measurements are accurately obtained and recorded in The measuring instruments to be used to measure engine
accordance with standard operating procedures. components can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen measuring instruments can be given. The
procedures for recording engine measurements can be
given.

Criteria 18.33A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Readings correctly interpreted regarding replacement or The concept of under/over size of replacement parts can
re-use and appropriate under or oversize of replacement be explained. The replacement parts required can be
parts determined. correctly identified as being under or over size. The
reasons for identifying replacement parts as under or
over size can be given.

Element 18.33A.3 Recondition components

Criteria 18.33A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ridges, gaps, tapers, ovality, protrusions identified and All ridges, gaps, tapers, protrusions and ovality are The procedures for removing ridges, gaps, tapers, ovality
necessary corrective action taken. removed in accordance with standard operating and protrusions can be given. The tools, techniques and
procedures. equipment required to correct the above faults can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen tools,
techniques and equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.33A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools and equipment correctly utilised. All tools and equipment are correctly used.

Criteria 18.33A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components assembled according to manufacturers Engine bottom end components are assembled in The procedures for assembling engine bottom ends can
specifications. accordance with specification and standard operating be given. The precautions to be taken when assembling
procedures. engine bottom ends can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 995 of 1445
 MEM 18.33A A Perform engine bottom-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.33A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Bearing clearances correctly determined by calculation or Bearing clearances are determined using the appropriate The methods of determining bearing clearances can be
direct measurement. method in accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen method
can be given. Bearing clearances can be calculated. The
procedure for determining bearing clearances can be
given.

Range statement
This unit refers to work typically undertaken in a bottom end engine overhaul. It includes cylinder honing using hand held power tools, replacement of bearings, piston rings and
similar activities but not major machining such as crankshaft grinding, cylinder boring and tunnel boring.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the overhaul of engine and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
bottom ends or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 996 of 1445
 MEM 18.34A A Perform engine top-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.34A A Perform engine top-end overhaul

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components components

Element 18.34A.1 Dismantle clean and assess parts

Criteria 18.34A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns All relevant parts lists, specifications, manuals and The characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns
associated with valve operating mechanisms and cylinder procedures are obtained in accordance with work place as applied to valve operating mechanisms and cylinder
head understood. procedures. heads. The specifications of valve operating mechanisms
and cylinder heads can be identified. Given components
can be correctly identified for re-use or replacement. The
reasons for identifying the components for re-use or
replacement can be given.

Criteria 18.34A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cylinder head and ancillary components disassembled The cylinder head and ancillary components are The procedures for dismantling cylinder heads and
according to manufacturers recommendations. dismantled in accordance with standard operating ancillary equipment can be given. The tools, techniques
procedures. and equipment to be used can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given. The hazards associated with the removal
of cylinder heads and ancillary equipment can be
identified.

Criteria 18.34A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts assessed for abnormal wear or defects. All parts are checked for abnormal wear or defects. The action to be taken when abnormal wear or defects
are observed in the engine components can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 997 of 1445
 MEM 18.34A A Perform engine top-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.34A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate cleaning solution and procedure selected. Parts are cleaned using appropriate solutions and The procedures for cleaning engine parts can be given.
procedures. The cleaning solution to be used can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen cleaning solution can
be given.

Criteria 18.34A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts correctly cleaned and stored ready for reassembly. Parts are correctly cleaned and stored ready for The procedures for storing parts in readiness for
reassembly. reassembly can be given.

Criteria 18.34A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts racked or set out according to their original location Engine parts are racked or set out according to their The procedures for racking and/or setting out of parts in
in the engine. original position in readiness for reassembly in accordance readiness for reassembly can be given can be given.
with standard operating procedures.

Element 18.34A.2 Record and interpret measurements

Criteria 18.34A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Measurements accurately obtained and recorded using Measurements are accurately obtained and recorded in The measuring instruments to be used to measure engine
appropriate measuring equipment. accordance with standard operating procedures. components can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen measuring instruments can be given. The
procedures for recording engine measurements can be
given.

Criteria 18.34A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts replaced or reused, and appropriate under/over size The concept of under/over size of replacement parts can
of replacement parts determined. be explained. The replacement parts required can be
correctly identified as being under or over size. The
reasons for identifying replacement parts as under or
over size can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 998 of 1445
 MEM 18.34A A Perform engine top-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.34A.3 Recondition cylinder head

Criteria 18.34A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cylinder head correctly pressure tested for serviceability. The cylinder head is correctly pressure tested in The procedures for pressure testing cylinder heads can
accordance with standard operating procedures. be given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be
used to pressure test cylinder heads can be given. The
reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and
equipment can be given. The cylinder head
specifications can be identified. The cylinder head can be
identified as serviceable or requiring repair/ replacement.
The reasons for identifying the cylinder head as
serviceable or requiring repair/replacement can be given.

Criteria 18.34A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spring tensions, valve and guide dimensions and surface Spring tensions, valve and guide dimensions and surface The procedures for measuring spring tension, valve and
flatness measured and recorded. flatness are measured and recorded in accordance with guide dimensions and surface flatness can be given. The
standard operating procedures. tools, techniques and equipment required to measure the
above can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen tools, techniques and equipment can be given.
The procedures for recording cylinder head and valve
mechanism measurements can be given.

Criteria 18.34A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cylinder head removed according to manufacturers The cylinder head is removed from the engine in The procedures for removing the cylinder head from the
specification. accordance with standard operating procedures. engine can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment to be used in removing the cylinder head from
the engine can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen tools, techniques and equipment can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 999 of 1445
 MEM 18.34A A Perform engine top-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.34A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Grinding and cleaning equipment correctly utilised. Valves and valve seats are ground in accordance with The procedures for grinding valves and valve seats can
standard operating procedures. The cylinder head and be given. The tools, techniques and equipment required
ancillary equipment are cleaned using appropriate to grind valves and valve seats can be identified. The
solutions in accordance with standard operating reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and
procedures. equipment can be given. The procedures for cleaning
cylinder heads and ancillary equipment can be given.
The solutions to be used to clean cylinder heads and
ancillary equipment can be given. The reasons for
selecting the chosen cleaning solution can be given.

Criteria 18.34A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operational parameters of cylinder head components are Cylinder head components are correctly identified for The operational parameters of cylinder head components
understood and applied in determining whether repair or replacement in accordance with standard can be identified. Measurements taken are compared to
components are reconditioned or replaced. operating procedures. specifications to determine serviceability of parts. Parts
outside operational specifications are identified for
repair/replacement. The reasons for identifying parts for
repair/replacement can be given.

Criteria 18.34A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Injectors sleeves, sealing washers, plugs, cappings etc. All cylinder head components are replaced in accordance The procedures for reassembling cylinder heads and
replaced correctly. with specifications and standard operating procedures. their components can be given. The tools, techniques
and equipment to be used to reassemble cylinder heads
can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
tools, techniques and equipment can be given. The
precautions to be taken when reassembling cylinder
heads can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1000 of 1445
 MEM 18.34A A Perform engine top-end overhaul Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers top-end overhaul of all types of engines and work associated with the reconditioning of cylinder heads including determining the causes of failures, replacement of
inserts, guides and injector sleeves, grinding of valves and seats, crack/twist/bend testing etc. It includes both the reconditioning of original parts, crack repairs using non-welding
techniques and sizing and fitting of replacement parts.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the overhaul of engine top and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
ends or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1001 of 1445
 MEM 18.35A A Diagnose and repair braking systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.35A A Diagnose and repair braking systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.35A.1 Check and assess braking system

Criteria 18.35A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Friction and heat principles, braking system types, The principles of friction and heat as applied to braking
arrangements, components including anti-lock systems, systems can be explained. A variety of braking system
functions, and applications understood. types and arrangements can be identified. The function
of the components of the braking systems can be
identified. Typical applications of different types of
braking systems can be given.

Criteria 18.35A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Braking system assessed for compliance with ADR The braking system is checked for compliance with ADR The requirements of the relevant Australian Design Rule
regulations of appropriate standard. regulations in accordance with standard operating applying to brakes can be identified. The procedures for
procedures. checking braking systems for compliance with ADR
regulations can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1002 of 1445
 MEM 18.35A A Diagnose and repair braking systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.35A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceability of friction materials correctly assessed. Friction materials are checked for serviceability. Examples of worn and defective friction materials can be
correctly identified from given samples. The
specifications of the braking system can be identified.
The friction material can be identified as being
serviceable or to be replaced. The reasons for identifying
the friction material as being serviceable or to be
replaced can be given.

Criteria 18.35A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Braking system control devices assessed for compliance
with specifications.

Criteria 18.35A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Minimum operating dimensions measured, recorded and The brake operating dimensions are measured and The procedures for measuring brake operating
corrective action determined. recorded in accordance with standard operating dimensions can be given. The tools, techniques and
procedures. equipment to be used can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given. The procedures for recording brake
operating dimensions can be given. Any variation of
brake operating measurement from specification can be
identified. The corrective action to be taken can be
identified. The reasons for identifying the chosen
corrective action can be given.

Criteria 18.35A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults correctly diagnosed to component level and The operation of the braking system is checked for Faulty braking system components can be identified The
appropriate corrective action determined. conformance to specification in accordance with standard corrective action to be taken can be identified. The
operating procedures. reasons for identifying the chosen corrective action can
be given. The procedures for checking braking system
operation can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1003 of 1445
 MEM 18.35A A Diagnose and repair braking systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.35A.2 Repair and overhaul braking system components

Criteria 18.35A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns All relevant parts lists, specifications, manuals and The characteristics of surface finishes and wear patterns
associated with braking components understood and procedures are obtained in accordance with work place as applied to braking system components can be
measurements and part condition correctly interpreted procedures. described. The specifications of the braking system can
when determining re-use/replacement. be identified. Given components can be correctly
identified for re-use/replacement. The reasons for
identifying the components for re-use or replacement can
be given.

Criteria 18.35A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Braking system components removed, disassembled and Braking system components are removed, dismantled and The procedures for removing and dismantling braking
handled correctly. handled correctly in accordance with standard operating system components can be given. The precautions to be
procedures. taken when handling braking systems components can
be identified. The tools, techniques and equipment to be
used in removing and dismantling braking system
components can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen tools, techniques and equipment can be
given.

Criteria 18.35A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components cleaned using appropriate fluid and Braking system components are cleaned using appropriate The procedures for cleaning braking system components
procedure. solutions in accordance with standard operating can be given. The solutions to be used when cleaning
procedures. braking system components can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen cleaning fluid can be
given.

Criteria 18.35A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Friction material to reaction member clearance adjusted to The brake clearance is adjusted in accordance with The procedure for adjusting brake clearances can be
specification. standard operating procedures. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1004 of 1445
 MEM 18.35A A Diagnose and repair braking systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.35A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tooling and equipment correctly applied. All tools and equipment are used appropriately.

Criteria 18.35A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hydraulic/air/vacuum system free of leaks/restrictions The hydraulic/air/vacuum system is free of The procedures for checking for hydraulic, air and
after repair work. leaks/restrictions. vacuum system leaks and restrictions can be given.

Criteria 18.35A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All levers, linkages and pedal clearances adjusted to All levers, linkages and pedal clearances are adjusted in The procedures for adjusting levers, linkages and pedal
specifications. accordance with specification and standard operating clearances can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 18.35A.2.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Braking system re-commissioned and tested according to The braking system is tested for conformance with The procedures for recommissioning the braking system
manufacturers recommendations or appropriate specifications/ regulations in accordance with standard can be given. The procedures for testing braking
standard/regulation. operating procedures. The braking system is systems can be given. The tests to be carried out on the
recommissioned in accordance with standard operating braking system can be identified. The tools, techniques
procedures. and equipment required to test the braking system can be
given. The reasons for selecting the chosen tools,
techniques and equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1005 of 1445
 MEM 18.35A A Diagnose and repair braking systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers braking systems associated with mobile equipment including mechanical, hydraulic, air and electrically operated types. Arrangements may include drum/disc
wheel/track brakes; anti locking braking systems; transmission brakes and service; park and emergency brakes.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
braking systems or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1006 of 1445
 MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 10
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation 18.69B Maintain, repair instrumentation process control
sensors, transmitters and final control elements analysers
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components
equipment components
18.69B Maintain, repair instrumentation process control
analysers

Element 18.36B.1 Perform preventative maintenance tasks on scientific analysis equipment

Criteria 18.36B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine specification requirements from manufacturers' All relevant manufacturers' manuals, maintenance The specifications of the scientific analysis equipment
manuals, maintenance schedules and other relevant schedules and documentation are obtained in accordance can be identified.
documents. with work place procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1007 of 1445
 MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.36B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of characteristics of scientific analysis The principles of operation of the scientific analysis
equipment and principles of operation, specification equipment can be identified. The application(s) of the
requirements interpreted, defined and understood. scientific analysis equipment can be identified. The
effects on the results of scientific analysis undertaken
with equipment outside of its operational specifications
can be explained.

Criteria 18.36B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using sound working knowledge of the characteristics For given scientific analysis equipment, preventative The benefits of preventative maintenance strategies with
and principles of operation, preventative maintenance maintenance is carried out in accordance with standard respect to scientific analysis equipment can be explained.
schedules are performed on scientific analysis equipment operating procedures. The preventative maintenance procedures for given
to service and maintain at optimum operating condition. scientific analysis equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.36B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using correct electrical and electronic test equipment, Given scientific analysis equipment is checked for correct The application of a range of electrical and electronic test
techniques and procedures, specified scientific analysers operation using appropriate test equipment, techniques equipment can be identified. The techniques and
are diagnosed within the system or within the laboratory and procedures. procedures to be used when testing scientific analysis
to determine correct operation or malfunction. equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.36B.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine specification requirements from manufacturers'
manuals, maintenance schedules and other relevant
documents.

Criteria 18.36B.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate electrical/electronic test equipment and The given scientific analysis equipment is monitored for The procedures for localising detected malfunctions can
procedures, correct operation of analysers is tested, correct operation/malfunction using appropriate test be identified. The reasons for monitoring apparent
and/or fault condition identified, localised and monitored. equipment, techniques and procedures. Where correct operation or malfunction can be explained.
appropriate, the malfunction is localised in accordance Common causes of scientific analysis equipment
with standard operating procedures. malfunction can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1008 of 1445
 MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.36B.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation confirmed and/or faults and For the given scientific analysis equipment, correct The procedures for confirming correct
malfunctions identified and confirmed. operation/ malfunction is confirmed in accordance with operation/malfunction of scientific analysis equipment
standard operating procedures. can be identified.

Element 18.36B.2 Complete fault documentation

Criteria 18.36B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions documented or reported to Where appropriate, faults/malfunctions are The procedures for recording/documenting
standard operating procedures. recorded/documented in accordance with standard faults/malfunctions in scientific analysis equipment can
operating procedures. be identified.

Element 18.36B.3 Plan corrective action

Criteria 18.36B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective action planned autonomously or in The role of the individual in the planning of any
consultation with appropriate personnel and actioned. corrective action to be taken with respect to scientific
analysis equipment can be identified. The sequential
steps in carrying out any required corrective action can
be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
sequence of events can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1009 of 1445
 MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.36B.4 Repair, replace, overhaul scientific analysis equipment

Criteria 18.36B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scientific analysis equipment examined and verified for Given scientific analysis equipment is examined using The specification of the components to be repaired,
repair, replacement or overhaul using correct appropriate tools, equipment, techniques, principles and replaced or overhauled can be identified. The tools and
equipment/tools and appropriate principles, techniques procedures. Where appropriate, faulty/ malfunctioning equipment to be used in the repair, replacement or
and procedures. components are identified for repair, replacement or overhaul of scientific analysis equipment componentry
overhaul using appropriate tools, equipment, techniques, can be identified. The principles, techniques and
principles and procedures. procedures to be followed in the repair, replacement or
overhaul of scientific analysis equipment components
can be given. The reasons for repairing, overhauling or
replacing the faulty components can be given.

Criteria 18.36B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturers' parts All relevant suppliers' catalogues are obtained in Replacement components are selected from suppliers'
lists or catalogues according to specifications required. accordance with work place procedures. catalogues in conformance to nominated specifications.

Criteria 18.36B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items obtained by appropriate means. Where appropriate, replacement items are obtained in The procedures for obtaining replacement components
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.36B.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items repaired or overhauled using correct Given faulty items are repaired or overhauled using Examples of common items that can be repaired or
principles, techniques, equipment/tools and procedures. appropriate tools, equipment, techniques, principles and overhauled can be identified. The tools, equipment and
procedures. techniques to be used in the repair/overhaul of faulty
components can be identified. The principles and
procedures to be followed when repairing/overhauling
faulty components can be identified.

Criteria 18.36B.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired, overhauled and replacement items prepared for Components to be refitted/fitted into scientific analysis The preparation requirements of items to be refitted/fitted
refitting according to standard workshop procedures. equipment are prepared in accordance with specifications into scientific analysis equipment can be identified.
and standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1010 of 1445
 MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.36B.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scientific analysis equipment refitted using correct Components of scientific analysis equipment are The procedures for refitting/fitting components into
principles, tools, equipment and procedures. refitted/fitted using appropriate tools, equipment, scientific analysis equipment can be identified.
techniques, principles and procedures.

Criteria 18.36B.4.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refitted scientific analysers prepared for testing and Given refitted scientific analysis equipment is prepared for The procedures for preparing scientific analysis
calibration. testing and calibration in accordance with standard equipment for testing and calibration can be identified.
operating procedures. The reasons for preparing scientific analysis equipment
for testing and calibration can be explained.

Element 18.36B.5 Calibrate and test scientific analysis equipment

Criteria 18.36B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scientific analysis equipment calibrated against physical The given scientific analysis equipment is correctly The appropriate physical standard against which the
standards using correct calibration devices, equipment, calibrated against the physical standard using appropriate scientific analysis equipment is to be calibrated can be
techniques and procedures. devices, equipment, techniques and procedures. identified. The procedures for calibrating scientific
analysis equipment can be identified. The devices,
equipment and techniques to be followed in calibrating
scientific analysis equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.36B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibrated scientific analysers tested using appropriate Calibrated scientific analysis equipment is tested for The test procedures to be applied to calibrated scientific
test equipment including electrical and electronic test conformance with specifications using appropriate test analysis equipment can be identified. The equipment to
equipment. equipment, techniques and procedures. be used to test calibrated scientific analysis equipment
can be identified. The reasons for testing calibrated
scientific analysis equipment can be explained.

Criteria 18.36B.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration and analysis data collected by appropriate Calibration and test data is recorded in accordance with The procedures for recording calibration and calibration
means. standard operating procedures. test data can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1011 of 1445
 MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.36B.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration and analysis data interpreted and understood. Where appropriate, trends, variations, fluctuations etc.
in calibration and test data identified. The probable
causes of trends, variations and fluctuations detected
can be explained.

Criteria 18.36B.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration and analysis data assessed in accordance The test and calibration data is compared with the The operational specifications of the scientific analysis
with manufacturers' data sheets, codes of practice and scientific analysis equipment operational specifications. equipment can be identified. The procedures for dealing
safety procedures. with test and calibration data within/outside
specifications can be identified.

Element 18.36B.6 Re-install and recommission scientific analysis equipment

Criteria 18.36B.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scientific analysis equipment put into service. Given scientific analysis equipment is recommissioned in The procedures for recommissioning scientific analysis
accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment can be identified. All necessary connections
and precautions to be taken during recommissioning can
be identified.

Criteria 18.36B.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports completed to standard operating All necessary service reports are completed in accordance The procedures for reporting completed
procedures. with standard operating procedures. servicing/maintenance on scientific analysis equipment
can be identified.

Element 18.36B.7 Service reports completed

Criteria 18.36B.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports completed using appropriate means. All necessary service reports are completed in accordance
with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1012 of 1445
 MEM 18.36B A Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Tasks performed in laboratory, workshop or
on-site environments using electrical and electronic test equipment. Extends to the interpretation of electrical and electronic circuit diagrams; the use of specific calibration devices
for laboratory and process analysers employing the principles of spectrometry (infra-red, visible, ultraviolet) both dispersive and non-dispersive, chromatography (gas, liquid),
optical refraction, atomic radiation and x-rays. Tasks involve laboratory, workshop and site work safely utilising solid, liquid and gaseous samples for calibration, electronic test
equipment, associated tools, calibration charts, laboratory data and manufacturers' data sheets. Employs the use of high pressure gas cylinders, liquid chemicals and associated
equipment during calibration. The interpretation of operating sequences for program operated devices is included. Where high reliability soldering and desoldering is required Unit
5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
scientific analysis equipment or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1013 of 1445
 MEM 18.37A A Diagnose and repair low voltage charging systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.37A A Diagnose and repair low voltage charging systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.30A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.37A.1 Assess generator/alternator operation

Criteria 18.37A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Magnetism, induced voltage and electromagnetism The concepts of magnetism, electromagnetism and
principles understood. induced voltage can be explained. The construction of
generators and alternators can be identified. The
principles of operation of generators and alternators can
be explained.

Criteria 18.37A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alternating and direct current generating principles; The methods of generating alternating and direct current
voltage/current regulation methods; and for low voltage systems can be identified. The methods
diode/condenser types and action understood. of regulating voltage and current generated can be
identified. The function of diode and condenser types of
regulator can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1014 of 1445
 MEM 18.37A A Diagnose and repair low voltage charging systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.37A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Charging system performance checked and variances The charging system is safely tested for correct operation The tests that can be used to check the performance of
from system specifications accurately recorded. in accordance with standard operating procedures. Where the charging system can be identified. The test
appropriate, variations from system specifications are procedures can be given. The hazards associated with
accurately recorded in accordance with standard operating the testing of the performance of charging systems can
procedures. be identified. The charging system specifications can be
identified. The test equipment to be used in checking low
voltage charging systems can be identified. The
procedures for recording charging system
performance/variations from specifications can be
identified.

Element 18.37A.2 Test and repair generators/alternators

Criteria 18.37A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Generators/alternators dismantled and assembled Given generators/alternators are correctly and safely The procedures for dismantling and reassembling
correctly. dismantled and reassembled in accordance with standard generators/alternators can be identified. The tools and
operating procedures. equipment to be used in dismantling and reassembling
generators/alternators can be identified. The safety
precautions to be followed when working with
generators/alternators can be given.

Criteria 18.37A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Charging faults determined to component level. Charging faults in given generator/ alternator systems are The procedures for identifying charging faults can be
safely identified in accordance with standard operating identified. The test equipment to be used in identifying
procedures. charging faults can be identified.

Criteria 18.37A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Testing performed to determine shorts to ground, turn Short circuit and winding continuity tests are conducted in The procedures for testing short circuits and winding
shorts and winding continuity etc. accordance with standard operating procedures. continuity can be identified. The test equipment to be
used in testing for short circuits and winding continuity
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1015 of 1445
 MEM 18.37A A Diagnose and repair low voltage charging systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.37A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alternator/generator is tested for normal and maximum The given alternator/generator output is tested for The specifications of generator/ alternator output can be
output. conformance to specification in accordance with standard identified. The test equipment to be used to determine
operating procedures. alternator/generator output can be identified. The
procedures for testing alternator/generator output can be
given.

Criteria 18.37A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Voltage and/or current regulators, cut-outs and relays are Given voltage and current regulators, cut-outs and relays The procedures for testing voltage and current
correctly tested and adjusted to specification. are tested for correct operation and conformance to regulators, cut-outs and relays can be identified. The
specifications in accordance with standard operating methods of adjusting voltage and current regulators,
procedures. Where appropriate, voltage and current cut-outs and relays can be given. The operational
regulators, cut-outs and relays are adjusted to specifications of voltage and current regulators, cut-outs
specification in accordance with standard operating and relays can be identified. The test equipment to be
procedures. used to check the operation of voltage and current
regulators, cut-outs and relays can be identified.

Criteria 18.37A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition of power/exciter diodes correctly determined. The condition of given power/exciter diodes is safely The procedures for testing diodes can be identified. The
determined in accordance with standard operating test equipment to be used to test diodes can be
procedures. identified. The precautions to be taken when testing
diodes can be given.

Criteria 18.37A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All faulty components are replaced according to All relevant supplier catalogues are obtained in The components of generators/ alternators that can be
manufacturers' recommendations ie: brush gear, bearings, accordance with work place procedures. Where replaced can be identified. The specifications of the
diodes, contacts, relays, etc. appropriate, faulty components are replaced in accordance faulty generator/alternator components can be identified.
with specifications and standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1016 of 1445
 MEM 18.37A A Diagnose and repair low voltage charging systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.37A.2.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Charging system free of excessive voltage drops and The given generator/alternator charging system is checked The effect of voltage drops on charging system
connections are correctly soldered, tightened and for excessive voltage drops in accordance with standard operation/ performance can be explained. The causes of
insulated. operating procedures. The given generator/alternator voltage drops in the charging system can be given. The
charging system is checked to ensure all connections procedures for checking charging systems for excessive
conform to specification in accordance with standard voltage drops can be given. The effect of loose, poorly
operating procedures. soldered and/or inappropriate insulation on charging
system operation can be explained. The specifications of
all circuit connections can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1017 of 1445
 MEM 18.37A A Diagnose and repair low voltage charging systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit refers to a wide variety of generators, alternators and both electro-mechanical and specialist electronic regulating apparatus and applies to testing and repair activities
associated with 12, 24 and 36 volt charging systems on vehicles, plant and stationary equipment. All work carried out to legislative and regulatory requirements. If specialist
electronic skills are required, appropriate competency units should be selected. This unit should not be selected with any of the following units: 18.45A (Fault find/repair electrical
equipment/components up to 240v single phase supply) or Unit 18.46A (Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 1000vAC/1500vDC). If soldering of wires is
required see Unit 5.1A ( Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic components.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
low voltage (L.V.) charging systems or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1018 of 1445
 MEM 18.38A A Maintain and repair wheels and tyres Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.38A A Maintain and repair wheels and tyres

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.38A.1 Assess wheel condition

Criteria 18.38A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Rim/tyre designs, constructions, codes, balancing, The design and construction of a variety of rims and
fastening principles and terminology understood. tyres can be described. The principles of fastening and
balancing of wheels can be given. The relevant codes
and standards can be identified.

Criteria 18.38A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fastening components correctly assessed for damage The wheel fastening components are checked for damage Damaged fastening components can be identified from
and security. and security. given samples. The procedures for checking wheels for
secure fastening can be given. The reasons for checking
fastening components for damage and security can be
given.

Criteria 18.38A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Abnormal tyre wear recognised and cause of fault Abnormal tyre wear can be identified from given samples.
correctly determined. The causes of abnormal tyre wear can be identified. The
reasons for identifying the chosen cause of tyre wear can
be given.

Criteria 18.38A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unsafe tyre and/or wheel condition recognised and Examples of unsafe tyre and wheel condition can be
remedial action determined. identified. The causes of the unsafe tyre and wheel
conditions can be identified. The corrective action to be
taken can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1019 of 1445
 MEM 18.38A A Maintain and repair wheels and tyres Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.38A.2 Repair and maintain wheel

Criteria 18.38A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety procedures associated with tyre/wheel removal, The procedures for removing, handling, inflating,
handling, inflation, assembly and disassembly, and assembling/ disassembling and fastening of tyres and
fastening understood and adhered to. wheels can be given. The safety precautions to be taken
when working with wheels and tyres can be identified.
The tools, techniques and equipment required to carry
out the above procedures can be identified. The reasons
for identifying the chosen tools, techniques and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.38A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wheels/tyres safely removed and replaced using Wheels/tyres are safely removed and replaced using
standard procedures and appropriate tools and appropriate tools and equipment in accordance with
equipment. standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.38A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools and equipment correctly applied and utilised. All tools and equipment are correctly and appropriately
used.

Criteria 18.38A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ballasting and/or inflation of tyres performed safely and Ballasting and/or inflation of tyres is undertaken safely in
to specification. accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.38A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Static/dynamic balancing of wheels performed to Wheels are balanced to specification in accordance with The procedures for static and dynamic balancing of
specification. standard operating procedures. wheels can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment to be used for balancing can be identified.
The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques
and equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1020 of 1445
 MEM 18.38A A Maintain and repair wheels and tyres Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.38A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Rim/tyre/tube faults repaired to specifications, Faults in rims/tyres/tubes are repaired to specification in Repairable rim, tyre and tube faults can be identified. The
regulations or codes. accordance with standard operating procedures. procedures for repairing these faults can be given. The
tools, techniques and equipment to be used to repair the
above faults can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the tools, techniques and equipment chosen can be
given. Examples of unrepairable rim, tyre and tube faults
can be given.

Criteria 18.38A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair activities accurately recorded. All repair activities are recorded in accordance with The procedures for recording repairs undertaken on rims,
standard operating procedures. tyres and tubes can be given.

Criteria 18.38A.2.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wheel bearings are correctly lubricated to specification. Wheel bearings are lubricated in accordance with The procedures for lubricating wheel bearings can be
specification and standard operating procedures. given. Types of wheel bearing lubricant and their
application can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1021 of 1445
 MEM 18.38A A Maintain and repair wheels and tyres Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the basic maintenance and repair of wheel rims and to the full range of wheel/tyre assemblies, plant and equipment using appropriate regulations, codes of
practice, manufacturers' specifications or in-house standards as a guide for assessment repair and assembly. For complex rim repairs appropriate fitting or welding units may be
required, for example, Unit 18.3A (Use tools for precision work) and Unit 18.6A (Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
wheels and tyres or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1022 of 1445
 MEM 18.39A A Diagnose and repair track type undercarriage Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.39A A Diagnose and repair track type undercarriage

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.39A.1 Assess track assembly

Criteria 18.39A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Track type undercarriage operating principles and The operating principles of track type undercarriage can
terminology understood. be explained.

Criteria 18.39A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Links, pins, sprockets, idlers, rollers, pads, etc assessed All relevant specifications, parts lists, manuals, The procedures for checking track type undercarriage
for wear/damage/re-use/replacement; and corrective procedures, etc are obtained in accordance with work components for wear can be given. The tools, techniques
action determined. place procedures. Track type undercarriage components and equipment required to check track type
are checked for wear and damage using appropriate tools, undercarriage components for wear can be identified.
techniques and equipment in accordance with standard The reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques
operating procedures. and equipment can be given. The specifications of the
rack type undercarriage components can be identified.
Worn or damaged components can be identified for
repair or replacement. The reasons for identifying
components for repair and replacement can be given. The
action to be taken to overcome the wear and/or damage
detected can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1023 of 1445
 MEM 18.39A A Diagnose and repair track type undercarriage Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.39A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Track frame alignment checked and variances from The track frame is checked for alignment in accordance The procedures for aligning track frames can be given.
specifications correctly determined. with standard operating procedures. The tools, techniques and equipment required to align
track frames can be identified. The reasons for selecting
the chosen tools, techniques and equipment can be
given. Variations from alignment specifications can be
identified.

Element 18.39A.2 Repair and maintain track assemblies

Criteria 18.39A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety procedures associated with removal and Track undercarriage components are safely removed and The procedures for removing and replacing track type
replacement of track undercarriage components followed. replaced in accordance with standard operating undercarriage components can be given. The
procedures. precautions to be taken when removing and replacing
track type undercarriage components can be identified.

Criteria 18.39A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Track tension correctly set to specification. Track tension is correctly set to specification in The procedures for setting track tension can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.39A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Clearances adjusted to specification. Clearances are adjusted to specification in accordance The procedures for adjusting clearances can be given.
with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1024 of 1445
 MEM 18.39A A Diagnose and repair track type undercarriage Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit also refers to mobile plant equipment that utilise crawler belts and/or chain link.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
track type undercarriage or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1025 of 1445
 MEM 18.40A A Maintain and repair suspension systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.40A A Maintain and repair suspension systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.40A.1 Assess suspension systems

Criteria 18.40A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Steering geometry, alignment, suspension systems All relevant specifications, parts lists, manuals and The operation of suspension systems and the effects of
operation and terminology understood. procedures are obtained in accordance with standard steering geometry and alignment can be described.
operating procedures.

Criteria 18.40A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components assessed for security, wear and faults and The suspension components are checked for wear, faults The procedures for checking suspension system
corrective action determined. and security in accordance with standard operating components for wear, faults, security and conformance
procedures. to specification can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment to be used to check/test suspension systems
can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
tools, techniques and equipment can be given. The
action to be taken to correct non-conformance to
specification can be identified. The reasons for
identifying the action to be taken can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1026 of 1445
 MEM 18.40A A Maintain and repair suspension systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.40A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Spring arrangements, control arms/links, dampening and Spring arrangements, control arms/ links and dampening
control devices tested for correct operation. devices are tested for correct operation in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.40A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Axle alignment/tracking assessed and variance from Axle alignment/tracking is checked for conformance to Variances of axle alignment from specification can be
specification determined. specification in accordance with standard operating identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.40A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Auto/manual levelling devices performance tested. Automatic/manual levelling devices are tested for correct
operation in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Element 18.40A.2 Maintain and repair suspension systems

Criteria 18.40A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Axles aligned to specification. Axles are aligned to specification in accordance with The procedures for aligning axles can be given. The axle
standard operating procedures. alignment specifications can be identified. The tools,
techniques and equipment required to maintain and
repair suspension systems can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.40A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Ride height adjusted to specification. The ride height is adjusted to specification in accordance The procedures for adjusting ride height can be given.
with standard operating procedures. The ride height specifications can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1027 of 1445
 MEM 18.40A A Maintain and repair suspension systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.40A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Suspension system re-gassed to specification. The suspension system is re-gassed to specification in The procedures to be followed in re-gassing suspension
accordance with standard operating procedures. systems can be given. The precautions to be taken when
re-gassing suspension systems can be identified.

Criteria 18.40A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Suspension components safely removed and replaced Suspension components are safely removed and replaced The procedures for the removal and replacement of
according to standard procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. suspension systems can be given. The precautions to be
taken when removing/replacing suspension systems can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1028 of 1445
 MEM 18.40A A Maintain and repair suspension systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to maintenance and repair activities associated with suspension systems of all types of wheeled and/or tracked plant/vehicles'.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
suspension systems or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1029 of 1445
 MEM 18.41A A Maintain and repair steering systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.41A A Maintain and repair steering systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.41A.1 Assess steering system operation

Criteria 18.41A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant information is obtained and correctly interpreted All relevant specifications, parts lists, manuals and The operation of the steering system and its components
prior to any testing. procedures are obtained in accordance with standard can be described.
operating procedures.

Criteria 18.41A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Performance tests undertaken on primary and/or The steering system is tested for correct performance in The procedures for testing steering system performance
emergency steering systems safely and to prescribed accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given. The tests to be undertaken can be
procedures. identified. The tools, techniques and equipment
necessary to maintain and repair steering systems can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen tools,
techniques and equipment can be given. The precautions
to be taken when testing steering systems can be given.

Criteria 18.41A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Flows, pressures, alignment angles correctly determined All rest results and measurements are recorded in The procedures for recording test results can be given.
and recorded. accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1030 of 1445
 MEM 18.41A A Maintain and repair steering systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.41A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and The faulty components can be identified. The corrective
appropriate corrective action determined. action to be taken can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen corrective action can be given.

Criteria 18.41A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Power assisted steering component functions, wheel/axle The operation of power assisted steering systems can be
alignment principles, terminology and applications described. The effects of wheel/axle alignment on
understood. steering system operation can be explained.

Criteria 18.41A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment used correctly. All test equipment is used correctly and appropriately in
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Element 18.41A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.41A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component wear and clearances correctly determined Steering system components are measured using The measuring equipment to be used can be identified.
using appropriate test equipment and manufacturers appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in The reasons for selecting the chosen measuring
recommendations. accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment can be given. The procedures for checking
components for wear and clearance can be given.

Criteria 18.41A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components correctly selected using Replacement components can be selected using
manufacturers data. manufacturer's data.

Criteria 18.41A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components removed and refitted following prescribed Steering system components are removed and refitted in The procedures for removing and refitting steering
procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. system components can be given. The precautions to be
taken when removing and refitting steering system
components can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1031 of 1445
 MEM 18.41A A Maintain and repair steering systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.41A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Alignment adjustments made that bring wheel/axles in Wheels and axles are aligned to specification in The procedures for aligning wheels and axles can be
line with specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. given.

Criteria 18.41A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test and repair activities accurately recorded. Test and repair activities are accurately recorded in The procedures for recording test and repair activities
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.41A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments made to primary and/or emergency steering The steering system is adjusted in accordance with The procedures for adjusting primary and emergency
systems that bring system in line with specifications. specifications and standard operating procedures. steering systems can be given. The effect of adjustments
on the steering system specifications can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1032 of 1445
 MEM 18.41A A Maintain and repair steering systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers manual, hydraulically assisted, full hydraulic, articulated; and track type hydrostatic, clutch and differential type steering systems for vehicles, mobile plant and
equipment.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
steering systems or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1033 of 1445
 MEM 18.42A B Diagnose and repair manual transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.42A B Diagnose and repair manual transmissions

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.42A.1 Assess clutch/transmission operation

Criteria 18.42A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Clutch and release mechanism types and principles of The principles of operation of a variety of clutches can
operation understood. be given. The functions of the components of a variety
of clutches can be identified.

Criteria 18.42A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Power flows, gear types and ratios, torque multiplication, The principles of operation of manual transmissions can
synchronising and shifting principles understood. be explained. The concepts of gear ratios, torque
multiplication and synchronisation can be explained.

Criteria 18.42A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant information obtained and correctly interpreted All relevant specifications, parts, lists, manuals and
prior to any testing. procedures are obtained in accordance with work place
procedures.

Criteria 18.42A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preliminary checks undertaken safely and to prescribed The clutch and transmission are checked for correct The procedures for checking clutches and transmissions
procedures. operation. for correct operation can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1034 of 1445
 MEM 18.42A B Diagnose and repair manual transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.42A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and Faulty clutch and/or transmission components can be
appropriate corrective action determined. correctly identified. The appropriate action to correct the
faulty component(s) can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen corrective action can be explained.

Criteria 18.42A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment adapted and used correctly. Test equipment is used correctly in accordance with The test equipment to be used in checking/testing
standard operating procedures. clutches and transmissions for correct operation can be
identified. The reasons for selected the chosen test
equipment can be given. The procedures for testing
clutches and transmissions, including any necessary
adaptation of test equipment, can be given.

Criteria 18.42A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component parts correctly assessed for re-use or Component parts can be correctly identified for re-use or
replacement. replacement. The reasons for identifying components to
be re-used or replaced can be given.

Element 18.42A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.42A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component wear and clearances correctly determined The clutch/transmission components are tested for The procedures for checking clutch and transmission
using appropriate test equipment and manufacturers conformance to specification in accordance with standard components for wear and clearance can be given. The
recommendations. operating procedures. tools, techniques and equipment to be used to determine
component wear and clearance can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.42A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components correctly selected using Replacement components can be identified using
manufacturers data. manufacturer's data.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1035 of 1445
 MEM 18.42A B Diagnose and repair manual transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.42A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components removed and refitted to clutch/transmission Components are removed from and refitted to The procedures for removing and refitting clutch and
assembly following prescribed procedures. clutch/transmission assemblies in accordance with transmission components can be given.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.42A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments made correctly using appropriate Clutch and transmission components are correctly The procedures for adjusting clutch and transmission
tooling/equipment and manufacturers data. adjusted using appropriate tools, techniques and components can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment. equipment to be used to maintain and repair clutch and
transmission assemblies can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given. The effects of the adjustments on clutch
and transmission operation can be explained.

Criteria 18.42A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test and repair activities are accurately recorded. Test and repair activities are accurately recorded in The procedures for recording test and repair activities
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.42A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Clutch/transmission assembly free of excessive noise and The clutch/transmission assembly is free of excessive The clutch/transmission assembly specifications can be
operates to specification after repair work is carried out. noise and operates in conformance to specifications. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1036 of 1445
 MEM 18.42A B Diagnose and repair manual transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers diagnosis and repair activities associated with wheeled and/or tracked plant/vehicles, single/multi plate type clutch assemblies, counter shaft type transmissions,
power take offs and transfer cases. Testing and assessment of performance would typically require operation of the plant or equipment. If hydraulic clutch assembly is used then
competency Unit 18.18A (Maintain pneumatic system components) may need to be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
manual transmissions or other units requiring the exercise of the skills plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1037 of 1445
 MEM 18.43A B Diagnose and repair automatic transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.43A B Diagnose and repair automatic transmissions

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.43A.1 Assess converter/transmission operation

Criteria 18.43A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Torque converter, simple and compound planetary The principles of operation of automatic transmissions
gearing, and hydraulic control operating principles can be given. The function of torque converters,
understood. planetary gearing and hydraulic controls in automatic
transmissions can be given.

Criteria 18.43A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant information obtained and correctly interpreted All relevant specifications, parts, lists, manuals and
prior to any testing. procedures are obtained in accordance with work place
procedures.

Criteria 18.43A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preliminary checks undertaken safely and to prescribed The automatic transmission is checked for correct The procedures for checking automatic transmissions for
procedures. operation. correct operation can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1038 of 1445
 MEM 18.43A B Diagnose and repair automatic transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.43A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and Faulty automatic transmission components can be
appropriate corrective action determined. correctly identified. The appropriate action to correct the
faulty component(s) can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen corrective action can be explained.

Criteria 18.43A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment adapted and used correctly. Test equipment is used correctly in accordance with The test equipment to be used in checking/testing
standard operating procedures. automatic transmissions for correct operation can be
identified. The reasons for selected the chosen test
equipment can be given. The procedures for testing
automatic transmissions, including any necessary
adaptation of test equipment, can be given.

Criteria 18.43A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component parts correctly assessed for re-use or Component parts can be correctly identified for re-use or
replacement. replacement. The reasons for identifying components to
be re-used or replaced can be given.

Element 18.43A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.43A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component wear and clearances correctly determined The transmission components are tested for conformance The procedures for checking automatic transmission
using appropriate test equipment and manufacturers to specification in accordance with standard operating components for wear and clearance can be given. The
recommendations. procedures. tools, techniques and equipment to be used to determine
component wear and clearance can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.43A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components correctly selected using Replacement components can be identified using
manufacturers data. manufacturer's data.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1039 of 1445
 MEM 18.43A B Diagnose and repair automatic transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.43A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components removed and refitted to Components are removed from and refitted to the The procedures for removing and refitting automatic
converter/transmission assembly following prescribed automatic transmission assembly in accordance with transmission components can be given.
procedures. standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.43A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments made correctly using appropriate Automatic transmission components are correctly The procedures for adjusting automatic transmission
tooling/equipment and manufacturers data. adjusted using appropriate tools, techniques and components can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment. equipment to be used to maintain and repair automatic
transmission assemblies can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given. The effects of the adjustments on
automatic transmission operation can be explained.

Criteria 18.43A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test and repair activities are accurately recorded. Test and repair activities are accurately recorded in The procedures for recording test and repair activities
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.43A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Converter/transmission assembly free of excessive noise The automatic transmission assembly is free of excessive The automatic transmission assembly specifications can
and operates to specification after repair work is carried noise and operates in conformance to specifications. be identified.
out.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1040 of 1445
 MEM 18.43A B Diagnose and repair automatic transmissions Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers diagnostic and repair activities associated with automatic, semi automatic and hydrostatic transmissions, and fluid coupling/torque converter assemblies. Control
of lockup/shifting etc. can be either fully hydraulic or electronic. Testing and assessment of performance would typically require operation of the plant or equipment.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
automatic transmissions or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1041 of 1445
 MEM 18.44A B Diagnose and repair drive line and final drives Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.44A B Diagnose and repair drive line and final drives
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.44A.1 Assess drive line and final drive operation

Criteria 18.44A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Universal and constant velocity joints, The principles of operation of drive lines and final drives
conventional/limited slip and locking, differential action can be given. The functions of universal and constant
and conventional/swing axle operating principles velocity joints, differentials and axles can be given.
understood.

Criteria 18.44A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant information obtained and correctly interpreted All relevant specifications, parts lists, manuals and
prior to any testing. procedures are obtained in accordance with work place
procedures.

Criteria 18.44A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preliminary checks undertaken safely and to prescribed The drive line and final drive are checked for correct The procedures for checking drive lines and final drives
procedures. operation. for correct operation can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1042 of 1445
 MEM 18.44A B Diagnose and repair drive line and final drives Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.44A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and Faulty drive line and final drive components can be
appropriate corrective action determined. correctly identified. The appropriate action to correct the
faulty component(s) can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen corrective action can be explained.

Criteria 18.44A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test equipment adapted and used correctly. Test equipment is used correctly in accordance with The test equipment to be used in checking/testing drive
standard operating procedures. lines and final drives for correct operation can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen test
equipment can be given. The procedures for testing drive
lines and final drives, including any necessary
adaptation of test equipment, can be given.

Criteria 18.44A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component parts correctly assessed for reuse or Component parts can be correctly identified for re-use or
replacement. replacement. The reasons for identifying components to
be re-used or replaced can be given.

Element 18.44A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.44A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component wear and clearances correctly determined The drive line and final drive components are tested for The procedures for checking drive line and final drive
using appropriate test equipment and manufacturers conformance to specification in accordance with standard components for wear and clearance can be given. The
recommendations. operating procedures. tools, techniques and equipment to be used to determine
component wear and clearance can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and
equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.44A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components correctly selected using Replacement components can be identified using
manufacturers data. manufacturer's data.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1043 of 1445
 MEM 18.44A B Diagnose and repair drive line and final drives Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.44A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components removed and refitted to driveline and final Components are removed from and refitted to drive line The procedures for removing and refitting drive line and
drive assemblies following prescribed procedures. and final drive assemblies in accordance with standard final drive components can be given.
operating procedures.

Criteria 18.44A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments made correctly using appropriate Drive line and final drive components are correctly The procedures for adjusting drive line and final drive
tooling/equipment and manufacturers data. adjusted using appropriate tools, techniques and components can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment. equipment to be used to maintain and repair drive line
and final drive assemblies can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, techniques and equipment
can be given. The effects of the adjustments on drive
line and final drive operation can be explained.

Criteria 18.44A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test and repair activities are accurately recorded. Test and repair activities are accurately recorded in The procedures for recording test and repair activities
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.44A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drive line and final drive assemblies free of excessive The drive line and final drive assembly is free of excessive The drive line and final drive assembly specifications can
noise and operates to specification after repair work is noise and operates in conformance to specifications. be identified.
carried out.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1044 of 1445
 MEM 18.44A B Diagnose and repair drive line and final drives Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers diagnosis and repair activities associated with wheeled and/or tracked plant/vehicles, drive line and final drive assemblies used in conventional and all wheel drive
equipment. Testing and assessment of performance would typically require operation of plant and equipment.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
drive lines and final drives or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1045 of 1445
MEM 18.45A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 250v single phase supply Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.45A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 250v single phase supply
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to locate and rectify faults in equipment and components using up to 240v single phase power, where they are
disconnected
from their electrical supply. This would typically cover plug-in appliances. When work involves disconnection and reconnection of fixed-wired equipment, Unit
18.49A
(Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment (which use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)) must also be selected.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 18.45A.1 Locate fault

Criteria 18.45A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component function determined and All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics The function of the electrical equipment/component
understood by reference to circuit diagrams, schematics, are obtained in accordance with work place procedures within the circuit can be identified The hazards
manual and/or consultation with technical adviser Where appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in associated with the electrical equipment/component can
accordance with work place procedures be identified The relevant regulatory requirements can
be identified
Criteria 18.45A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required equipment is correctly isolated from Where appropriate, the electrical equipment/component The electrical equipment/component isolation
power supply is isolated from the power supply in accordance with procedures can be identified The test equipment to be
standard operating procedures Where appropriate, the used to verify isolation of the electrical
isolated electrical equipment/component is tagged in equipment/circuit can be identified
accordance with standard operating procedures Where
appropriate, the electrical equipment/component is
checked for isolation from the power supply in
accordance with standard operating procedures

Criteria 18.45A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate built-in fault indicators, error codes Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators located and The errors indicated by built-in devices can be correctly
examined and correctly interpreted and results recorded read/recorded in accordance with standard operating identified
to standard operating procedures procedures Where appropriate, error code interpretation
documents are obtained in accordance with standard
operating procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1046 of 1445
MEM 18.45A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 250v single phase supply Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.45A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component is checked and tested using The electrical equipment/component is checked and The procedures for testing electrical
correct and appropriate techniques, procedures, tools tested for correct operation using appropriate tools, test equipment/components for correct operation can be
and test equipment equipment, techniques and procedures identified The tools, equipment and techniques to be
used to test the operation of the electrical
equipment/component can be identified The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, equipment and
techniques can be explained

Criteria 18.45A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Check and test results are correctly interpreted and Variations from specifications indicated by initial test The specifications of the electrical
where required verified results are verified using appropriate tools, test equipment/component can be identified Variations
equipment, techniques and procedures between test results and specifications can be identified
Criteria 18.45A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component fault is identified and localised Faults in electrical equipment/ components are identified The procedures for localising faults in electrical
and localised using appropriate tools, test equipment, equipment/components can be given
techniques and procedures
Criteria 18.45A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component fault/s are correctly recorded to The faults in the electrical equipment/components are The procedures for recording/reporting faults in
standard operating procedure recorded/reported in accordance with standard operating electrical equipment/components can be identified
procedures

Element 18.45A.2 Rectify faults

Criteria 18.45A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using correct and appropriate techniques, procedures, Where appropriate, the electrical The appropriate techniques/procedures for returning
tools and equipment, equipment/component/s repaired, equipment/components are repaired, replaced or adjusted the electrical equipment/components to specification
replaced or adjusted to specification or manufacturers to specification in accordance with standard operating can be identified The specifications of the electrical
requirements. procedures Supplier catalogues are obtained in equipment/components can be identified The
accordance with work place procedures adjustments that can be made to electrical
equipment/components can be identified Replacement
components can be selected from supplier catalogues

Criteria 18.45A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component checked and tested using correct The appropriate test instruments are used to confirm The procedures for confirming the electrical
and appropriate techniques, procedures, tools and that the electrical equipment/components have been equipment/components have been returned to
equipment for compliance with site or manufacturers returned to specification specification can be identified
specifications

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1047 of 1445
MEM 18.45A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 250v single phase supply Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.45A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, rectifications report recorded to Where appropriate, the rectification of the electrical The procedures for recording electrical
standard operating procedures equipment/ components is recorded in accordance with equipment/component rectifications can be identified
standard operating procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1048 of 1445
MEM 18.45A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 250v single phase supply Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the competencies required to locate and rectify faults in equipment and components using up to 240v single phase power, where they are disconnected from
their electrical supply. This would also typically cover plug-in appliances. This unit should not be selected if Unit 18.46A (Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components
which use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC) has been selected. When work involves disconnection and reconnection of fixed-wired equipment, Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect
fixed wired equipment (which use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)) must also be selected. Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards
of quality, safety and work procedures. Work performed in situ. The following definitions are included to clarify the constituent parts of the competency, but do not by
themselves define the competency. Circuits and systems cover industrial control systems for supply, switching, lighting, motor control, etc. using AC and DC power supplies
incorporating a range of components, e.g.: switches, fuses, circuit breakers, relays, transformers, thyristors, regulators, motors, etc. All specifications and procedures gained
from schematics, circuit diagrams/drawings, engineering data sheets and manufacturers' hand books. Fault finding techniques may include testing for voltage, current, frequency,
polarity, phase, circuit continuity, insulation resistance, earth continuity etc. This unit also covers basic mechanical disconnection, dismantling and re-assembly of equipment
components, enclosures, drives etc. Correct and appropriate tools and equipment may include continuity testers, ammeters, voltmeters, multimeters, tong testers, wattmeters,
cathode ray oscilloscopes, etc. a range of hand and hand held power tools such as pliers, screwdrivers, spanners, etc. All work and work practices undertaken to relevant
statutory authorities where required. This may include controls or switching via contactors, relays, programmable controllers or other electronic switching devices. This unit
covers electrical rescue, including electrical shock victim rescue methods and procedures, basic first aid for shock, burns and bleeding, expired air resuscitation, external cardiac
compression, and cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the fault finding and repair and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
of AC and DC electrical equipment/components or other units - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1049 of 1445
MEM 18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 1000vAC/1500vDC

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to locate and rectify faults in equipment and components using up to 1000vAC/1500vDC single and multi-phase power
where
they are disconnected from their electrical supply. When work involves disconnection and reconnection of fixed-wired equipment, Unit 18.49A
(Disconnect/reconnect
fixed wired equipment (which use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)) must also be selected.

Pre-requisite units - Path 1

12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 18.46A.1 Locate fault

Criteria 18.46A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component function determined and All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics The function of the electrical equipment/component
understood by reference to circuit diagrams, schematics, are obtained in accordance with work place procedures within the circuit can be identified The hazards
manual and/or consultation with technical adviser Where appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in associated with the electrical equipment/component can
accordance with work place procedures be identified The relevant regulatory requirements can
be identified
Criteria 18.46A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required, equipment is correctly isolated from Where appropriate, the electrical equipment/component The electrical equipment/component isolation
power supply is isolated from the power supply in accordance with procedures can be identified The test equipment to be
standard operating procedures Where appropriate, the used to verify isolation of the electrical
isolated electrical equipment/component is tagged in equipment/circuit can be identified
accordance with standard operating procedures Where
appropriate, the electrical equipment/component is
checked for isolation from the power supply in
accordance with standard operating procedures

Criteria 18.46A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators, error codes, Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators located and The errors indicated by built-in devices can be correctly
examined and correctly interpreted and results recorded read/recorded in accordance with standard operating identified
to standard operating procedures procedures Where appropriate, error code interpretation
documents are obtained in accordance with standard
operating procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1050 of 1445
MEM 18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.46A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component is checked and tested using The electrical equipment/component is checked and The procedures for testing electrical
correct and appropriate techniques, procedures, tools tested for correct operation using appropriate tools, test equipment/components for correct operation can be
and test equipment equipment, techniques and procedures identified The tools, equipment and techniques to be
used to test the operation of the electrical
equipment/component can be identified The reasons
for selecting the chosen tools, equipment and
techniques can be explained

Criteria 18.46A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Check and test results are correctly interpreted and Variations from specifications indicated by initial test The specifications of the electrical
where required verified results are verified using appropriate tools, test equipment/component can be identified Variations
equipment, techniques and procedures between test results and specifications can be identified
Criteria 18.46A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component fault in identified and localised Faults in electrical equipment/ components are identified The procedures for localising faults in electrical
and localised using appropriate tools, test equipment, equipment/components can be given
techniques and procedures
Criteria 18.46A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component fault/s are correctly recorded to The faults in the electrical equipment/components are The procedures for recording/reporting faults in
standard operating procedure recorded/reported in accordance with standard operating electrical equipment/components can be identified
procedures

Element 18.46A.2 Rectify fault/s

Criteria 18.46A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using correct and appropriate techniques, procedures, Where appropriate, the electrical The appropriate techniques/ procedures for returning
tools and equipment, equipment/component/s are equipment/components are repaired, replaced or adjusted the electrical equipment/components to specification
repaired, replaced or adjusted to specifications or to specification in accordance with standard operating can be identified The specifications of the electrical
manufacturer's requirements procedures Supplier catalogues are obtained in equipment/components can be identified The
accordance with workplace procedures adjustments that can be made to electrical
equipment/components can be identified Replacement
components can be selected from supplier catalogues

Criteria 18.46A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/component is checked and tested using The appropriate test instruments are used to confirm The procedures for confirming the electrical
correct and appropriate techniques, procedures tools and that the electrical equipment/components have been equipment/components have been returned to
equipment for compliance with site or manufacturer's returned to specification specification can be identified
specifications

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1051 of 1445
MEM 18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.46A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, rectifications report recorded to Where appropriate, the rectification of the electrical The procedures for recording electrical
standard operating procedures equipment/ components is recorded in accordance with equipment/component rectifications can be identified
standard operating procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1052 of 1445
MEM 18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers locating and rectifying faults in equipment and components using up to 1000vAC/1500vDC single and multi-phase power, where they are disconnected from
their electrical supply. Where work involves up to 240v single phase supply only, Unit 18.45A (Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components which use up to 240v single
phase supply should be selected). When work involves disconnection and reconnection of fixed-wired equipment, Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment
(which use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)) must also be selected. Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety
and work procedures. Work performed in situ. The following definitions are included to clarify the constituent parts of the competency, but do not by themselves define the
competency. Circuits and systems cover industrial control systems for supply, switching, lighting, motor control, etc. using AC and DC power supplies incorporating a range of
components, e.g. switches, fuses, circuit breakers, relays, transformers, thyristors, regulators, motors, etc. All specifications and procedures gained from schematics, circuit
diagrams/drawings, engineering data sheets and manufacturers' hand books. Fault finding techniques may include testing for voltage, current, frequency, polarity, phase, circuit
continuity, insulation resistance, earth continuity etc. This unit covers basic mechanical disconnection, dismantling and re-assembly of equipment components, enclosures,
drives etc. Correct and appropriate tools and equipment may include continuity testers, ammeters, voltmeters, multimeters, tong testers, wattmeters, cathode ray oscilloscopes,
etc. a range of hand and hand held power tools such as pliers, screwdrivers, spanners, etc. All work and work practices undertaken to relevant statutory authorities where
required. This may include controls or switching via contactors, relays, programmable controllers or other electronic switching devices. This unit covers electrical rescue,
including electrical shock victim rescue methods and procedures, basic first aid for shock, burns and bleeding, expired air resuscitation, external cardiac compression, and
cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the fault finding and repair and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
of AC and DC electrical equipment/components or other units - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1053 of 1445
 MEM 18.46A A Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components which use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.47A A Diagnose and maintain electronic controlling systems on mobile plant
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.30A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.30A Diagnose and repair low voltage electrical systems 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.47A.1 Access and interpret fault codes.

Criteria 18.47A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Applicable control unit located and identified. Correct techniques and procedures are followed to locate Control unit located and correctly identified using
& identify the control unit. Applicable manual.

Criteria 18.47A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault codes accessed using vehicle indicators, meters Fault codes accessed correctly with indicators, meters or Applicable fault codes can be described.
and diagnostic tooling. diagnostic tooling using applicable manuals and
procedures.

Criteria 18.47A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault codes interpreted. Fault codes interpreted correctly from applicable manuals. The meaning of applicable fault codes is understood and
explained.

Criteria 18.47A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault codes cleared from memory according to Correct procedure used to clear fault codes from memory Procedure to clear fault codes and verify clearance is
procedures. and verifies using applicable procedures and manuals. outlined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1054 of 1445
 MEM 18.47A A Diagnose and maintain electronic controlling systems on mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.47A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Diagnostic and maintenance procedures performed using Correct techniques used to safeguard electronic Correctly identifies sources of potential damage to
applicable techniques and precautions to safeguard components and systems when diagnosing and typical automotive electronic systems when performing
electronic components and systems. maintaining typical automotive electronic circuits. maintenance and diagnostic work. Uses techniques and
procedures to safeguard against this damage.

Element 18.47A.2 Locate and repair faults using fault codes and manufactures fault finding and repair procedures
Criteria 18.47A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault traced from fault codes using applicable Logical procedure followed to trace faults identified from Correct trouble-shooting procedures identified and
trouble-shooting procedures. fault codes. understood.

Criteria 18.47A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults repaired to required specification. Appropriate techniques/procedures used to repair faults Techniques/procedures used to repair various faults can
to manufactures specifications. be outlined.

Element 18.47A.3 Locate and test input components

Criteria 18.47A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Input components located and identified. Locates and identifies various types of input components. Locates and identifies various types of input
components.
Understands and correctly describes the operation and
principles of transducers used in control systems.

Criteria 18.47A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Input components electrically tested. Applicable procedures followed. Testing procedure is outlined.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1055 of 1445
 MEM 18.47A A Diagnose and maintain electronic controlling systems on mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.47A.4 Locate and test output components

Criteria 18.47A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Output components located and identified. Locates and identifies various types of output Identifies and describes component types, functions and
components. locations .Understands and correctly describes the
operation and principles of actuators used in control
systems.

Criteria 18.47A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Output components electrically tested.. Output components correctly tested according to Testing procedure is outlined.
manufactures procedures.

Element 18.47A.5 Remove/ replace and adjust sensors and actuators.

Criteria 18.47A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component part removed correctly. Correct removal of identified component part. Component part removed using appropriate tooling and
procedure to applicable instructions.

Criteria 18.47A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct replacement part identified. Component part identified correctly from manufactures Correct component part identified and selected from
coding and parts listings. manufacturer listings and codes.

Criteria 18.47A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component part replaced correctly. Correct replacement of component part. Component part replaced using appropriate tooling and
procedure to manufacturer instructions.

Criteria 18.47A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments made in relation to mechanical clearances Adjustments carried out in relation to mechanical Correct adjustments made in relation to mechanical
and measured electrical and resistance values. clearances and measured electrical and resistance values. clearances and measured electrical and resistance values
to manufacturer specifications and procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1056 of 1445
 MEM 18.47A A Diagnose and maintain electronic controlling systems on mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.47A.6 Change operating parameters

Criteria 18.47A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate specifications sourced from plant/equipment Correctly locates and understands appropriate Use of plant/equipment identification and applicable
identification and applicable manuals and specifications. specifications. manuals and specifications to source specifications is
explained.

Criteria 18.47A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tooling (software/hardware) selected. Correct tooling (software/hardware) selected according to Understands and describes the concepts of EPROM
manufactures manual. processors.

Criteria 18.47A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Plant/equipment identification used to obtain security Security codes obtained using correct protocol from Procedure to obtain security codes explained.
codes. manufacturer, using plant/equipment identification and
appropriate identification.

Criteria 18.47A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Download data. Correctly download data as per manufacturer procedures. Procedure to download data is understood and outlined.

Criteria 18.47A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data entered for new specifications. Correctly enters data for new specifications using Procedure for entering data explained.
applicable procedures.

Criteria 18.47A.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Successful data entry verified. Verifies successful data entry according to applicable Procedure to verify data entry outlined/explained.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1057 of 1445
 MEM 18.47A A Diagnose and maintain electronic controlling systems on mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the skills and knowledge required to diagnose, fault find and remove/replace electronic control systems associated with mobile plant and equipment, including
discrete logic, analogue and microprocessor monitoring and control systems.
Maintenance would typically cover wiring harness faults, testing and identifying faulty sensors, actuators and control components, replacement and adjustments to input and
output components, accessing data from electronic control unit and applicable manufacturer software/hardware to change operating parameters. Information is sourced from
manufactures/technical manuals. All work undertaken to manufacturer’s specifications and standard operating procedures. This competency does not cover the skills needed to
repair electronic circuitry associated with these systems. If this skill is required Units 18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) and 18.57A (Maintain/service
analog/digital electronic equipment) should be selected as appropriate.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with electronic control systems or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
To undertake the elements of this competency an understanding of involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
the concepts of electronic circuity components their functions and
operation at a basic level is required. Typically this would include
resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, ICs, EPROMs ,ect.
To ensure safeguarding when diagnosing and maintaining these
systems it is recommended the importance of the above concepts are
understood in relation to voltage and current in typical automotive
type electronic applications. The aim of the unit is to develop skills in
the troubleshooting and repairs to electronic systems using
recommended procedures and underpinning knowledge of electronic
components and systems.
© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1058 of 1445
 MEM 18.48A A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.48A A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 10
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring
10.3A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
1000vAC/1500vDC)
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.49A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment which
use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC

Element 18.48A.1 Locate fault

Criteria 18.48A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuit function and characteristics determined and All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics are The circuit characteristics can be identified. The hazards
understood by reference to circuit diagrams, obtained in accordance with work site procedures. Where associated with the electrical circuit(s) can be identified.
specifications, schematics and/or consultation with appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in The relevant regulatory requirements can be identified.
technical adviser. accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.48A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators, error codes Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators located and Errors indicated by built-in devices can be correctly
examined and correctly interpreted and results recorded read/recorded in accordance with work site procedures. identified.
to standard operational procedures. Where appropriate, error code interpretation documents
obtained in accordance with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.48A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, circuit is correctly isolated from Where appropriate, the electrical circuit is isolated from the Circuit isolation procedures can be identified.
power supply. power supply in accordance with work site procedures.
Where appropriate, the isolated circuit is tagged in
accordance with work site procedures. Where appropriate,
circuit isolation is verified in accordance with work site
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1059 of 1445
 MEM 18.48A A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.48A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are verified or localised using correct and Circuit faults are confirmed/localised using appropriate Common electrical test instruments and their application
appropriate techniques, procedures, tools and test test equipment, work techniques and tools in accordance can be identified. Common techniques for testing
equipment. with work site procedures. electrical circuits can be identified.

Criteria 18.48A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are recorded to standard operating procedures. Faults in the electrical circuit are recorded/reported in The recording/reporting requirements for electrical circuit
accordance with work site procedures. faults can be identified.

Element 18.48A.2 Repair/rectify fault(s)

Criteria 18.48A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using correct and appropriate techniques, procedures, Where appropriate, the electric circuits are The appropriate techniques/procedures for returning the
tools and equipment, circuit/s is repaired, replaced or repaired/adjusted to specification in accordance with work circuit/s to specification can be identified.
adjusted to specifications or manufacturer's requirements. site procedures.

Criteria 18.48A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuit/s is checked and tested using correct and The appropriate test instruments are used to confirm that The site/manufacturer's circuit specifications can be
appropriate techniques, procedures, tools and equipment the circuit/s has been returned to specification. identified.
for compliance with site or manufacturer's specifications.

Criteria 18.48A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, repair/rectification report recorded to Any rectification of the circuit(s) is recorded in accordance The requirements for recording circuit rectifications can
standard operating procedures. with work site procedures. be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1060 of 1445
 MEM 18.48A A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Work performed in situ. The following definitions
are included to clarify the constituent parts of the competency, but do not by themselves define the competency. Circuits and systems cover industrial control systems for supply,
switching, lighting, motor control, etc. using AC and DC power supplies incorporating a range of components, e.g.: switches, fuses, circuit breakers, relays, transformers, thyristors,
regulators, motors, etc. All specifications and procedures gained from schematics, circuit diagrams/drawings, engineering data sheets and manufacturers' hand books. Fault finding
techniques may include testing for voltage, current, frequency, polarity, phase, circuit continuity, insulation resistance, earth continuity etc. Correct and appropriate tools and
equipment may include continuity testers, ammeters, voltmeters, multimeters, tong testers, wattmeters, cathode ray oscilloscopes, etc. a range of hand and hand held power tools
such as pliers, screwdrivers, spanners, etc. All work and work practices undertaken to relevant statutory authorities where required. This may include controls or switching via
contractors, relays, programmable controllers or other electronic switching devices. This unit covers electrical rescue, including electrical shock victim rescue methods and
procedures, basic first aid for shock, burns and bleeding, expired air resuscitation, external cardiac compression, and cardio-pulmonary resuscitation. Basic Circuits - A basic circuit
is defined as a single circuit with a single output. A single circuit may be controlled by one or more devices and the output may control one or more devices.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. The candidate
will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by
the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the fault finding of basic and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
electrical circuits, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1061 of 1445
MEM 18.49A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.49A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 3
This unit covers the competencies required to connect and disconnect equipment. Work is performed in situ and it may include the original connection of fixed wire
equipment. Disconnection of equipment may include electric motors, modular sensing devices, limit switches, etc.
Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.49A.1 Disconnect equipment

Criteria 18.49A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical characteristics of equipment and circuit All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics, The characteristics of the circuit and the equipment can
determined by reference to circuit drawings, schematics, etc. are obtained in accordance with work site procedures be identified The hazards associated with the circuits
reference manuals, equipment specifications, Where appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in and the equipment can be identified The relevant
identification plate and/or consultation with technical accordance with work site procedures regulatory requirements can be identified
adviser

Criteria 18.49A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, equipment characteristics Where appropriate, the equipment characteristics are The procedures for determining equipment
determined and recorded to standard operating determined and recorded in accordance with standard characteristics can be given The procedures for
procedures (rotation etc.) operating procedures recording equipment characteristics can be given The
tools, techniques and equipment required to determine
equipment characteristics can be identified
Criteria 18.49A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Point/s of isolation identified using correct and The procedures to be followed in identifying the point(s) The point(s) of isolation for the fixed wired equipment
appropriate procedure of isolation of fixed wired equipment were followed can be identified The reasons for selecting the chosen
isolation point(s) can be explained
Criteria 18.49A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is isolated using correct and appropriate The fixed wired equipment is correctly isolated using The isolation procedures for the fixed wired equipment
techniques and procedures appropriate techniques in accordance with standard can be given The technique to be used to isolate the
operating procedures fixed wired equipment can be identified The reasons for
selecting the chosen technique can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1062 of 1445
MEM 18.49A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.49A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All lock off equipment and signage requirements used All lock off equipment and signs are used correctly and The lock off equipment and signs to be used can be
correctly and appropriately appropriately identified The reasons for using lock off equipment and
signs can be given
Criteria 18.49A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical isolation is proven using correct and Electrical isolation is proven using appropriate The procedures for proving electrical isolation can be
appropriate techniques, procedures and test equipment techniques and equipment in accordance with standard given The tools, techniques and equipment to be used
operating procedures to prove electrical isolation can be identified
Criteria 18.49A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductor layout is noted, recorded and labelled to Conductors are labelled and their layout recorded in The procedures for labelling conductors and recording
standard operating procedure accordance with standard operating procedures conductor layout can be given
Criteria 18.49A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductors disconnected using correct and appropriate Conductors are disconnected using appropriate tools, The procedures for disconnecting conductors can be
techniques, procedures, tools and equipment techniques and equipment in accordance with standard given The tools, techniques and equipment to be used
operating procedures to disconnect conductors can be identified
Criteria 18.49A.1.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Disconnected cables/connections are terminated and Disconnected cables/connections are terminated in The procedures for terminating disconnected
made safe to standard operating procedures accordance with standard operating procedures cables/connections can be given

Element 18.49A.2 Connect equipment

Criteria 18.49A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics of the equipment to be connected are All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics, The characteristics of the circuit and the equipment can
identified and connection requirements determined etc. are obtained in accordance with work site procedures be identified The hazards associated with the circuits
Where appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in and the equipment can be identified The relevant
accordance with work site procedures regulatory requirements can be identified
Criteria 18.49A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuit checked for safe isolation using correct and The circuit is checked for safe isolation using The procedures for checking circuits for safe isolation
appropriate techniques, procedures and test equipment appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in can be given The tools, techniques and equipment
accordance with standard operating procedures required to check circuits for safe isolation can be
identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1063 of 1445
MEM 18.49A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.49A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Connections checked and conductors prepared for Connections are checked and conductors prepared for The procedures for terminating conductors and
termination using correct and appropriate tools and termination using appropriate tools and equipment in checking connections can be given The tools,
procedures accordance with standard operating procedures techniques and equipment to be used to terminate
conductors and check connections can be identified
Criteria 18.49A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductors are connected to equipment to The conductors are connected to the equipment using The specifications for the connections to be made can
specifications using correct and appropriate techniques, appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in be identified The procedures for connecting conductors
tools and equipment conformance with specifications and standard operating to equipment can be given The tools, techniques and
procedures equipment to be used to connect the conductors to the
equipment can be identified
Criteria 18.49A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All cables/wires/conduit fastened/sealed to specifications All cables/wires/conduits are fastened/sealed to The procedures for fastening and sealing cables, wires
using correct and appropriate techniques, tools and specifications using appropriate tools, techniques and and conduits can be given The tools, techniques and
equipment equipment in accordance with standard operating equipment to be used to fasten and seal the cables, wires
procedures and conduits can be identified
Criteria 18.49A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All lock off equipment and signage removed using All lock off equipment and signage is removed from the The procedures for removing lock off equipment and
standard operating procedures equipment in accordance with standard operating signage can be given
procedures
Criteria 18.49A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment and circuit checked and tested for The equipment and circuits are checked and tested using The operational specifications of the fixed wired
compliance with specifications using correct and appropriate tools, techniques and equipment for equipment can be identified The procedures for
appropriate techniques, procedures, tools and equipment conformance to specifications in accordance with checking the operation of the equipment and circuits
standard operating procedures can be given The tools, techniques and equipment to be
used to check and test the compliance of the
equipment with specifications can be identified

Element 18.49A.3 Perform emergency first aid

Criteria 18.49A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Situation assessed to identify points of danger to the All potential points of danger are considered when Potential dangers are identified
injured person and potential rescuer planning rescue or provision of assistance

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1064 of 1445
MEM 18.49A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.49A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Rescue/recovery of injured person, or assistance to Appropriate procedures are followed for the Recognised procedures for the movement and
injured person undertaken in accordance with recognised movement/treatment of injured, including: treatment of the injured person are identified
standards/procedures Contact made with appropriate - clearing of airways Appropriate local medical and rescue services identified
medical and rescue authorities - CPR (cardio-pulmonary resuscitation)
- care of spinal injuries
- treatment of cuts/lesions etc
- treatment of burns/scalds
- treatment of shock

Criteria 18.49A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Details of first aid given recorded Details of first aid are accurately recorded The details to be recorded of first aid given can be
identified The procedures for recording first aid given
can be identified The reasons for recording first aid
given can be explained

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1065 of 1445
MEM 18.49A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Work performed in situ and may include the
original connection of fixed wire equipment. Disconnection of equipment may include electric motors, modular sensing devices, limit switches. Correct and appropriate tools
and equipment may include ammeters, voltmeters, multimeters, tong testers, etc; a range of hand tools such as pliers, screwdrivers, sockets, spanners, conduit benders etc. If
power tools are used Unit 18.2A (Use power tools/hand held operations) must also be selected. Isolation refers to the safe disconnection of all electrical power to equipment or
equipment supply circuits via switching, circuit breakers or fuses etc. on circuits/equipment using up to 1000 volts AC or 1500 volts DC single or multi-phase supply. All work
and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. - Standards and procedures
for the provision of emergency first aid. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by
other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues
who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. -
Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be
satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the
unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the connection and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
disconnection of fixed wired equipment up to 1000 volts AC, 1500 - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
volts DC or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1066 of 1445
 MEM 18.50A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment over 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.50A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment over 1000vAC/1500vDC

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 3
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation Band A unit and a Specialisation Band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.50A.1 Disconnect equipment

Criteria 18.50A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical characteristics of equipment and circuit are All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics, The characteristics of the circuit and the equipment can
determined by reference to circuit drawings, schematics, etc are obtained in accordance with work site procedures. be identified. The hazards associated with the circuits
reference manuals, equipment specifications, Where appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in and equipment can be identified. The relevant regulatory
identification plates and/or consultation with technical accordance with work site procedures. requirements can be identified.
adviser.

Criteria 18.50A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, equipment characteristics determined Where appropriate, the equipment characteristics are The procedures for determining equipment
and recorded to standard operating procedures (rotation determined and recorded in accordance with standard characteristics can be given. The procedures for
etc.). operating procedures. recording equipment characteristics can be given. The
tools, techniques and equipment required to determine
equipment characteristics can be identified.

Criteria 18.50A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Points of isolation identified using correct and The procedures to be followed in identifying the point(s) The point(s) of isolation for the fixed wired equipment
appropriate procedure. of isolation of fixed wired equipment were followed. can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
isolation point(s) can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1067 of 1445
 MEM 18.50A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment over 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.50A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is isolated using correct and appropriate The fixed wired equipment is correctly isolated using The isolation procedures for the fixed wired equipment
techniques and procedures. appropriate techniques in accordance with standard can be given. The technique to be used to isolate the
operating procedures. fixed wired equipment can be identified. The reasons for
selecting the chosen technique can be given.

Criteria 18.50A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All lock off equipment and signage requirements used All lock off equipment, signage and barriers are used The lock off equipment and signs to be used can be
correctly and appropriately. correctly and appropriately. identified. The reasons for using lock off equipment,
signs and barriers can be given.

Criteria 18.50A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical isolation is proven using correct and Electrical isolation is proven using appropriate techniques The procedures for proving electrical isolation can be
appropriate techniques, procedures and test equipment. and equipment in accordance with standard operating given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be used
procedures. to prove electrical isolation can be identified.

Criteria 18.50A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductor layout is noted, recorded and labelled to Conductors are labelled and their layout recorded in The procedures for labelling conductors and recording
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. conductor layout can be given.

Criteria 18.50A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductors disconnected using correct and appropriate Conductors are disconnected using appropriate tools, The procedures for disconnecting conductors can be
techniques, procedures, tools and equipment. techniques and equipment in accordance with standard given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be used
operating procedures. to disconnect conductors can be identified.

Criteria 18.50A.1.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Disconnected cables/connections are made safe to Disconnected cables/connections are terminated in The procedures for terminating disconnected
standard operating procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. cables/connections can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1068 of 1445
 MEM 18.50A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment over 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.50A.2 Connect equipment

Criteria 18.50A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics of the equipment to be connected are All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics, The characteristics of the circuit and the equipment can
identified and connection requirements determined. etc are obtained in accordance with work site procedures. be identified. The hazards associated with the circuits
Where appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in and equipment can be identified. The relevant regulatory
accordance with work site procedures. requirements can be identified.

Criteria 18.50A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuit checked for safe isolation using correct and The circuit is checked for safe isolation using appropriate The procedures for checking circuits for safe isolation
appropriate techniques, procedures and test equipment. tools, techniques and equipment in accordance with can be given. The tools, techniques and equipment
standard operating procedures. required to check circuits for safe isolation can be
identified.

Criteria 18.50A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Connections are checked and prepared for termination Connections are checked and conductors prepared for The procedures for terminating conductors and checking
using correct and appropriate tools and procedures. termination using appropriate tools and equipment in connections can be given. The tools, techniques and
accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment to be used to terminate conductors and check
connections can be identified.

Criteria 18.50A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductors are connected to equipment to specifications The conductors are connected to the equipment using The specifications and regulatory requirements for the
using correct and appropriate techniques, tools and appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in connections to be made can be identified. The
equipment. conformance with specifications, regulatory requirements procedures for connecting conductors to equipment can
and standard operating procedures. be given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be
used to connect the conductors to the equipment can be
identified.

Criteria 18.50A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All cables/wires/conduit fastened/sealed to All cables/wires/conduits are fastened/sealed to The procedures for fastening and sealing cables, wires
specifications, using correct and appropriate techniques, specifications using appropriate tools, techniques and and conduits can be given. The tools, techniques and
tools and equipment. equipment in accordance with standard operating equipment to be used to fasten and seal the cables, wires
procedures. and conduits can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1069 of 1445
 MEM 18.50A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment over 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.50A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All lock off equipment and signage removed using All lock-off equipment, barriers and signage are removed The procedures for removing lock-off equipment, barriers
standard operating procedures. from the equipment in accordance with standard operating and signage can be given.
procedures.

Criteria 18.50A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment and circuit checked and tested for compliance The equipment and circuits are checked and tested using The operational specifications of the fixed wired
to specifications using correct and appropriate appropriate tools, techniques and equipment for equipment can be identified. The procedures for
techniques, procedures, tools and equipment. conformance to specifications in accordance with standard checking the operation of the equipment and circuits can
operating procedures. be given. The tools, techniques and equipment to be
used to check and test the compliance of the equipment
with specifications can be identified.

Element 18.50A.3 Perform emergency first aid

Criteria 18.50A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Situation assessed to identify points of danger to the All potential points of danger are considered when Potential dangers are identified.
injured person and potential rescuer. planning rescue or provision of assistance.

Criteria 18.50A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Rescue/recovery of injured person, or assistance to Appropriate procedures are followed for the Recognised procedures for the movement and treatment
injured person undertaken in accordance with recognised movement/treatment of injured, including: of the injured person are identified. Appropriate local
standards/procedures. Contact made with appropriate - clearing of airways medical and rescue services identified.
medical and rescue authorities. - CPR (cardio-pulmonary resuscitation)
- care of spinal injuries
- treatment of cuts/lesions etc
- treatment of burns/scalds
- treatment of shock

Criteria 18.50A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Details of first aid given recorded. Details of first aid are accurately recorded. The details to be recorded of first aid given can be
identified. The procedures for recording first aid given
can be identified. The reasons for recording first aid
given can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1070 of 1445
 MEM 18.50A A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment over 1000vAC/1500vDC Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or part of a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safe work procedures. Work performed in situ. Correct and appropriate
tools and equipment may include ammeters, tong testers, continuity testers, voltmeters, multimeters etc., a range of hand held tools such as pliers, screwdrivers, sockets, spanners,
keys etc. If power tools are used Unit 18.2A (Use powertools/hand held operations) must also be selected. Isolation refers to the safe disconnection of electrical power to equipment
or equipment supply circuit with switch breaker or fuses etc. Circuit applies to voltage levels above 1000 volts AC and 1500 volts DC. All work and work practices undertaken to
regulatory and legislative requirements. Persons undertaking this work would be appropriately recognised and endorsed by relevant statutory authorities where required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. - Standards and procedures for the
provision of emergency first aid. The candidate will be required to: - Orally, or by other
methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. - Identify colleagues who
can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where appropriate. - Present
evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that
the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the unit as specified
by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the connection and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
disconnection of fixed wired equipment over 1000 volts AC or 1500 plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
volts DC or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1071 of 1445
 MEM 18.51A A Fault find repair/rectify complex electrical circuits Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.51A A Fault find repair/rectify complex electrical circuits

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring
10.3A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
1000vAC/1500vDC)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.48A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits 18.49A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment which
use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC

Element 18.51A.1 Locate fault

Criteria 18.51A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuit/system function and characteristics determined All relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics are The circuit function and characteristics can be identified.
and understood by reference to circuit diagrams, obtained in accordance with work site procedures. Where The hazards associated with the electrical circuit(s) can
specifications, schematics and/or consultation with appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in be identified. The relevant regulatory requirements can
technical adviser. accordance with work site procedures. be identified.

Criteria 18.51A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators, error codes Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators located and Errors indicated by built-in devices can be correctly
examined and correctly interpreted and results recorded read/recorded in accordance with work site procedures. identified.
to standard operational procedures. Where appropriate, error code interpretation documents
obtained in accordance with work site procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1072 of 1445
 MEM 18.51A A Fault find repair/rectify complex electrical circuits Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.51A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, circuit(s) correctly isolated from Where appropriate, the electrical circuit is isolated from the Circuit isolation procedures can be identified.
power supply. power supply in accordance with work site procedures.
Where appropriate, the isolated circuit is tagged in
accordance with work site procedures. Where appropriate,
circuit isolation is verified in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 18.51A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are verified or localised using correct and Circuit faults are confirmed/localised using appropriate Common electrical test instruments and their application
appropriate techniques, procedures, tools and test test equipment, techniques and tools in accordance with can be identified. Common techniques for testing
equipment. work site procedures. electrical circuits can be identified.

Criteria 18.51A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are recorded to standard operating procedures. Faults in electrical circuits are recorded/reported in The recording/reporting requirements for electrical circuit
accordance with work site procedures. faults can be identified.

Element 18.51A.2 Repair/rectify fault(s)

Criteria 18.51A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using correct and appropriate techniques, procedures, Where appropriate the electric circuit/system is The appropriate techniques/procedures for returning the
tools and equipment, circuit/system is repaired, replaced repaired/adjusted to specification in accordance with work circuit/system to specification can be identified.
or adjusted to specifications or manufacturer's site procedures.
requirements.

Criteria 18.51A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuit/system is checked and tested using correct and The appropriate test instruments are used to confirm that The site/manufacturer's circuit specifications can be
appropriate techniques, procedures, tools and equipment the circuit(s) has been returned to specification. identified.
for compliance with site or manufacturer's specifications.

Criteria 18.51A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, repair/rectification report recorded to Any rectification of the circuit(s) is recorded in accordance The requirements for recording circuit rectification can be
standard operating procedures. with work site procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1073 of 1445
 MEM 18.51A A Fault find repair/rectify complex electrical circuits Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Work performed in situ. The following definitions
are to clarify the constituent parts of the competency, but do not by themselves define the competency. Circuits and systems cover industrial control systems for supply, switching,
lighting, motor control, etc. using AC and DC power supplies incorporating a range of components, e.g.: switches, fuses, circuit breakers, relays, transformers, thyristors,
regulators, motors, etc. This may include controls or switching via contactors, relays, programmable controllers or other electronic switching devices. Fault finding techniques may
include testing for voltage, current, frequency, polarity, phase, circuitry continuity, insulation resistance, earth continuity etc. Correct and appropriate tools and equipment may
include continuity testers, ammeters, voltmeters, multimeters, tong testers, wattmeters, cathode ray oscilloscopes, etc. a range of hand and hand held power tools such as pliers,
screwdrivers, spanners, etc. All specifications and procedures gained from schematics, circuit diagrams/drawings, engineering data sheets and manufacturers' hand books. All work
and work practices undertaken to relevant statutory authorities where required. Complex Circuits - A complex circuit is defined as one made up of more than one interdependent
circuit. A complex circuit is made up of more than one circuit, controlling and processing inputs or outputs. This unit covers electrical rescue, including electrical shock victim
rescue methods and procedures, basic first aid for shock, burns and bleeding, expired air resuscitation, external cardiac compression, and cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. The candidate
will be required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by
the assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the fault finding of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
interconnected electrical circuits, or other units requiring the exercise plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1074 of 1445
 MEM 18.51A A Fault find repair/rectify complex electrical circuits Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.52A A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.52A.1 Secure system from potentially hazardous situations

Criteria 18.52A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sources of stored energy are identified. Sources of stored energy are identified on mobile plant. Different sources of stored energy and their applications
can be described and identified from circuit diagrams and
manufacturer manuals.

Criteria 18.52A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mobile plant is assessed for potentially hazardous Hazardous situations/conditions are identified and Hazardous situations/conditions relating to maintenance
situations and conditions. appropriate safety measures applied. and repair of fluid power systems can be outlined and
safety precautions described.

Criteria 18.52A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Accumulators and position actuators are bled down to Accumulators bled down and actuators positioned The reasons for bleeding accumulators and actuators can
remove stored energy as per manufacturers instructions. correctly. be outlined and the hazards associated with working on
pressurised systems explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1075 of 1445
 MEM 18.52A A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.52A.2 Check hydraulic system components

Criteria 18.52A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components identified correctly, using Appropriate circuit diagram or manufacturer instructions The full range of hydraulic system components can be
appropriate circuit diagrams or manufacturers instruction. selected, system components identified and other relevant identified in a mobile plant application. Information on
information interpreted. All applicable components are circuit diagram or manufacturer instructions can be
identified on mobile plant. explained. The characteristics and operational function of
each system component can be described.

Criteria 18.52A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are traced and localised with reference to Faulty components are traced and localised using fluid Methods and techniques for tracing and localising faults
manufacturer trouble shooting procedures and flow power principles, procedures and safety requirements. can be outlined and explained.
charts.

Criteria 18.52A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of components is inspected and Equipment for testing hydraulic system components is The procedures and equipment for inspecting and
tested in accordance with standard operating used correctly. Components including hoses, pipes, testing hydraulic system components can be identified.
procedures. actuators, pumps, valves, cylinders and rams are Problems relating to faulty hydraulic system
inspected/tested according to procedure and using fluid components/operation can be described. The
power principles. All relevant hydraulic circuits, drawings, specifications of each hydraulic system component can
instructions, manuals and data sheets and specifications be identified. The reasons for hydraulic components not
are obtained in accordance with standard operating operating in accordance with specifications can be given.
procedures. Hydraulic components not operating in All safety procedures and precautions can be identified.
accordance with specifications are identified Common faults in hydraulic components can be
described.

Element 18.52A.3 Replace faulty system components

Criteria 18.52A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are correctly removed from system Components are correctly removed from system. Removal methods for various components can be
using appropriate tools, techniques and procedures. described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1076 of 1445
 MEM 18.52A A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.52A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components are sourced where appropriate Replacement pipes and hoses identified using catalogues Information in catalogues or electronic media can be
from manufacturer/supplier. or electronic media. Replacement parts are obtained using correctly interpreted. Procedures to obtain replacement
appropriate procedures parts can be outlined.

Criteria 18.52A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hoses, tubes and pipework are prepared and assembled Appropriate conductors and fittings are selected from Typical conductor types and fittings can be identified
using appropriate tools, techniques and procedures. manufacturer catalogues and charts. Conductors are cut to and their applications explained. Methods for cutting and
length using appropriate tooling/machine. Conductors are assembling hoses, tubes and pipework can be explained.
assembled using correct techniques and orientation

Criteria 18.52A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement components and conductors correctly Component parts correctly replaced in system using Tools and techniques for fitting replacement components
assembled and refitted to system. appropriate tools and techniques. and conductors can be outlined.

Criteria 18.52A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System tested and adjusted for correct operation Replacement components are tested and adjusted for The correct operation of hydraulic components and
according to standard operating procedures. correct operation and conformance to specifications in conductors can be identified. The procedures for
accordance with standard operating procedures. checking and adjusting the system can be given.
Conductor assemblies are conducted using machine
circuits and/or test rigs and correct assembly verified.

Element 18.52A.4 Dismantle, inspect and repair linear actuators

Criteria 18.52A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hydraulic cylinders and rams are dismantled using Linear actuators are dismantled without damage, using The tools, techniques and procedures used for
appropriate tools, techniques and procedures. correct tools, techniques, procedures and safety measures. dismantling can be identified. Safety measures for
dismantling linear actuators can be described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1077 of 1445
 MEM 18.52A A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.52A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component parts evaluated for condition. Specifications are located and used to identify The methods of inspection and measurement can be
performance/ condition of cylinders and rams. Wear and described. Guides and specifications for reusable parts
damage to cylinders and rams is identified. are used.

Criteria 18.52A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Seals and bearings fitted as per manufacturer Seals and bearings are fitted correctly. The correct procedures for fitting bearings and seals can
specifications. be given. Manufacturer installation instructions can be
accessed and described.

Criteria 18.52A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cylinders/rams reassembled and fitted as per Cylinder/ram reassembled in correct sequence as per The sequence and procedure for reassembly of
manufacturer instructions. manufacturer instruction. Assembly is correctly refitted to cylinder/ram can be given. Assembly and fitting
machine instructions can be accessed and described. The
procedures for refitting rams can be given.

Criteria 18.52A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembly is tested by use of machine circuit or Refitted assemblies are tested and repairs are verified on The procedures for testing and verifying repairs using
equivalent. machine circuit and/or test rig. machine circuits and/or test rigs are given. Necessary
remedial action can be described.

Element 18.52A.5 Service hydraulic systems

Criteria 18.52A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Hydraulic systems are serviced according to General service procedures carried out correctly. Manufacturer scheduled service timeframes and service
manufacturers schedules and instructions. items can be identified. Service procedures can be
described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1078 of 1445
 MEM 18.52A A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the skills and knowledge required to diagnose, fault-find and repair basic fluid power systems used in the earthmoving, mining, agricultural, marine and transport
industries. This competency does not cover skills required in the design or modification of systems, component re-manufacture or the diagnosis, maintenance and repair of control
systems (solenoid and electro proportional systems). If these skills are required, then Units 18.23B (Modify fluid power system operation), 18.47A (Diagnose and maintain
electronic controlling systems on mobile plant) and 18.53B (Modify fluid power control systems) should be selected as appropriate. Repairs would typically include the assembly
and fitting of hydraulic hoses, tubing and pipework. Resealing and repairs to cylinders and rams. Change out of hydraulic components such as pumps, valves and actuators and
the associated remedial actions required such as system flushing and purging and setting of component parameters. Fault finding of systems according to manufacturers
guidelines and procedures would typically include techniques such as pressure and flow testing, cycle times, basic interrogation of diagnostic system and may include basic
electronic servicing. The general servicing of systems is also covered by this unit and includes fluid replacement, filtration requirements and oil sampling. Where Unit 18.20
(Maintain hydraulic system components) and/or 18.21A (Maintain and repair hydraulic systems) are selected, this unit should not be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with fluid power for mobile plant and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
To undertake the elements of this competency an understanding of involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
the concepts of fluid power and fluid power components and their
application to mobile plant is required. This is considered important in
the development of effective trouble shooting skills, and in the ability
to work safely on systems containing stored energy devices
(accumulators) and systems under pressure due to external forces.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1079 of 1445
 MEM 18.52A A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.53B A Modify fluid power control systems

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 2.6C10 Plan a complete activity 2.7C10 Perform computations - basic
2.8C10 Perform computations 2.10C5 Write reports 2.14C5 Use graphical techniques and perform simple
statistical computations
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work 18.6A Dismantle/repair/replace/assemble and fit engineering
components
18.10A Equipment condition monitoring and recording 18.16B Analyse plant and equipment condition monitoring 18.18A Maintain pneumatic system components
results
18.19A Maintain and repair pneumatic systems 18.20A Maintain hydraulic system components 18.21A Maintain and repair hydraulic systems
18.22A Maintain/repair/replace fluid power controls 18.23B Modify fluid power system operation 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.53B.1 Check/test control software program

Criteria 18.53B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program steps checked against manufacturers' and site All relevant manufacturers' and site specifications, The operational specifications of the control system can
specifications using schematics, circuit and ladder schematics, circuit and ladder diagrams obtained in be identified. The program steps and their function can
diagrams. accordance with standard operating procedures. The be identified.
program steps are checked for conformance to
specification in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 18.53B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Deviations determined and recorded. Where appropriate, deviations of control software program The procedures for recording deviations of the control
from specification are recorded in accordance with software program from specification can be identified.
standard operating procedure.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1080 of 1445
 MEM 18.53B A Modify fluid power control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.53B.2 Control system software/program corrected or modified

Criteria 18.53B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Program deviations corrected and aligned to specification Program deviations are corrected and aligned to The procedures for correcting deviations of the control
requirements using standard operating procedures. specification in accordance with standard operating system software from specification can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.53B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications to program undertaken to specification The control system software/program is modified to The modifications to be made to the control system
requirements using standard operating procedures. specification in accordance with standard operating software can be identified. The reasons for modifying the
procedures. control system software can be given.

Criteria 18.53B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification recorded to standard operating procedures. The modifications made to the control system software are The procedures for recording control system software
recorded in accordance with standard operating modifications can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.53B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modified program backed up to standard operating The modified control system program is backed up in The procedures for backing up modifications to control
procedures. accordance with standard operating procedures. system programs can be identified.

Element 18.53B.3 Check/test control system inputs/outputs

Criteria 18.53B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Input/output signals checked and assessed against The input and output signals are checked for conformance The tools, equipment and techniques to be used to check
operational specifications using correct and appropriate to specification using appropriate tools, equipment and input and output signals for conformance to
techniques, tools and equipment. techniques in accordance with standard operating specification can be identified. The correct form of the
procedures. input and output signals can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1081 of 1445
 MEM 18.53B A Modify fluid power control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.53B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty signals identified, repaired and recorded/reported Where appropriate, faulty signals identified are The procedures for recording/ reporting faulty
to appropriate personnel. recorded/reported in accordance with standard operating input/output signals can be identified.
procedure.

Element 18.53B.4 Repair faulty control system input/output

Criteria 18.53B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty signal source repaired and/or replaced. The source of the faulty signal is marked for repair or The procedures for marking items for repair or
replacement in accordance with standard operating replacement can be identified. The tools, equipment and
procedures. All relevant supplier catalogues are obtained techniques necessary to repair the signal source can be
in accordance with workplace procedures. Where identified. The disassembly/assembly procedures to be
appropriate, the faulty signal source is repaired and/or followed when repairing signal sources can be identified.
replaced in accordance with standard operating Where appropriate, replacement parts/items are selected
procedures. from supplier catalogues. The specifications of the signal
source can be identified.

Criteria 18.53B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired/replaced signal source tested for correct The repaired/replaced signal source is tested for correct The procedures for testing signal sources can be
operation in system and commissioned in conformance to operation in accordance with specifications and standard identified. The procedures for commissioning signal
operational specifications. operating procedures. The repaired/replaced signal source sources into operation can be identified.
is commissioned into operation in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Element 18.53B.5 Prepare service report

Criteria 18.53B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service report is prepared and completed following All necessary service reports are completed in accordance The procedures for reporting service undertaken on
standard operating procedure Recommendations for with standard operating procedures. All relevant historical control systems can be identified. Any trends evident in
improvement and repeat downtime avoidance analysis are data, reports and documents with respect to the control the data collected and collated can be identified. The
included. system's operation are obtained in accordance with work probable causes of any detected trends can be given.
place procedures. Where appropriate, improvements to the control system
are recommended. Where appropriate, the reasons that
the recommended improvements should be implemented
can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1082 of 1445
 MEM 18.53B A Modify fluid power control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the skills required to alter the control parameters of fluid power control systems by system modification; this includes the ability to assess system performance
based on sound working knowledge of established principles, methods and procedures. System specifications interpreted and understood from data sheets, circuit diagrams and
flow diagrams. Corrections, modifications/alterations are undertaken to specifications to parts of the control system including software timers, gates, associated equipment, flow,
ladder and logic diagrams. Fault finding of hardware associated with system input/outputs includes input/output circuitry, cards, external sensors, limits, mnemonic coding and
associated equipment. Control systems include PCs, programmable controllers, DCS, relay logic (electric-hydraulic-pneumatic) etc. Service reports are prepared according to
standard operating procedure. Modifications covered by this unit are changes to fluid power control systems that lead to desired changes in system performance. Programmable
controllers include PLC and DCS or similar.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the modification of fluid and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
power control systems or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1083 of 1445
 MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components
components

Element 18.54A.1 Test instrumentation systems, equipment

Criteria 18.54A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work/test requirements identified and defined to All relevant data with respect to the operation of the The operational requirements/ specifications of the
standard operating procedures. instrumentation systems/equipment is obtained in instrumentation system/equipment can be identified. The
accordance with workplace procedures. correct operation of the instrumentation
system/equipment can be explained.

Criteria 18.54A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct test application principles selected after The instrumentation system/equipment and its The procedures for inspecting instrumentation
inspection of instrumentation systems, components are inspected for correct operation in systems/equipment and their components can be
equipment/components. accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The procedures and principles to be applied in
testing the instrumentation system/equipment can be
identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
procedures and principles can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1084 of 1445
 MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.54A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate test equipment selected in accordance with The appropriate test equipment can be identified.
defined requirements.

Criteria 18.54A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Device isolation methods/requirements observed and The instrumentation system/equipment is isolated in The procedures for isolating instrumentation
utilised. accordance with standard operating procedures. systems/equipment can be identified. The hazards
associated with fault-finding, testing and calibrating
instrumentation systems/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.54A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate test procedures and application principles The operation of the instrumentation system/equipment
applied in assessing operation of instrumentation and its components is tested using appropriate equipment,
systems, equipment/components. techniques and procedures.

Criteria 18.54A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Normal operating characteristics of instrumentation The operational specifications of the instrumentation
systems, equipment/components understood to the level system/equipment can be identified. Where appropriate,
necessary to identify and localise faults. variations between test results and operational
specifications can be identified. Where appropriate,
faults in instrumentation system/equipment components
can be identified.

Criteria 18.54A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics/operational function assessment Procedures followed and safety requirements observed The operational function of the instrumentation
procedures applied according to safety and and met. system/equipment can be explained. Any
regulatory/site specifications. regulatory/safety requirements associated with the
operation of the instrumentation system/equipment can
be identified. The operation of the instrumentation
system/equipment with respect to safety, regulatory and
site requirements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1085 of 1445
 MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.54A.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Characteristics and operational function checked and The operational function of the instrumentation The procedures for checking and verifying the
verified. system/equipment is checked in accordance with standard operational function of the instrumentation
operating procedures The operational system/equipment can be given. The equipment and
function/malfunction of the instrumentation techniques necessary to test the operational function of
system/equipment is verified in accordance with standard the instrumentation system/equipment can be identified.
operating procedures.

Element 18.54A.2 Apply data collection techniques and localise fault conditions
Criteria 18.54A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings/diagrams and operational specifications All relevant drawings/diagrams and operational The correct function of the instrumentation
utilised in identifying and localising fault conditions. specifications are obtained in accordance with work place system/equipment can be identified. The operational
procedures. specifications of the instrumentation system/equipment
can be identified.

Criteria 18.54A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, built-in fault indicators, error codes Where appropriate, built-in indicators located and Errors indicated by built-in devices can be correctly
examined and correctly interpreted and results recorded read/recorded in accordance with standard operating identified.
to standard operating procedures. procedures. Where appropriate, error code interpretation
documents obtained in accordance with workplace
procedures.

Criteria 18.54A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition localised to major component level using Logical, safe and efficient procedures followed, using Methods of determining procedures can be described.
appropriate test equipment principles and procedures. appropriate test equipment.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1086 of 1445
 MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.54A.3 Analyse and report test results

Criteria 18.54A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Test results analysed/verified against operational The test results obtained are compared to the operational
specifications and localised faults confirmed. specifications and the faulty component(s) confirmed.

Criteria 18.54A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Potential and real faults reported using standard Real and potential faults are reported in accordance with The procedures for reporting faults can be identified. The
operating procedures. standard operating procedures. difference between real and potential faults can be
explained.

Criteria 18.54A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty conditions evaluated and corrective action Corrective action plan developed. The probable causes of faults in instrumentation
planned. system/equipment components can be given. The action
to be taken to rectify the causes of faults in
instrumentation systems/equipment can be identified.
The sequence of events to be undertaken to correct
faults in the instrumentation system/equipment
components can be identified.

Criteria 18.54A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Action plan recorded and documented according to The planned maintenance activities are The procedures for recording/documenting planned
standard operating procedures. recorded/documented in accordance with standard maintenance activities can be identified.
operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1087 of 1445
 MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.54A.4 Calibrate instrumentation equipment/components

Criteria 18.54A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Zero, span and range checks undertaken on Zero, span and range checks are undertaken on The function of zero, span and range checks on
indicators/controllers using correct and appropriate instrumentation systems/equipment, in accordance with instrumentation systems/equipment can be explained.
configuration. standard operating procedures. The procedures for checking zero, span and range of
instrumentation systems/equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.54A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, methods of adjustment using Where appropriate, the instrumentation system/equipment The procedures for calibrating and adjusting
calibration devices are performed and documented to is calibrated using appropriate techniques and equipment instrumentation systems/ equipment can be given. The
prescribed procedures and operational specifications. in accordance with standard operating procedures. operational specifications of the instrumentation
system/equipment can be identified. The procedures for
recording the calibration of instrumentation
systems/equipment can be identified. The equipment
required to carry out the calibration of instrumentation
systems/equipment can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1088 of 1445
 MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Undertake test procedures to determine correct operational function of electrical, electronic, mechanical, fluid power
systems, equipment, components and associated items. Extends to the use of mechanical, pneumatic/electro-pneumatic, electronic (analog/digital) and associated instruments,
measuring variables such as temp, level, pressure, flow rate, current, resistance, voltage, levels, light, density or any other process variable. Tasks undertaken in workshop/site,
laboratory environments utilising system calibrators, manometers, dead weight testers, wheatstone bridge, potentiometers, frequency/signal generators, logic probes, multimeters,
(analog/digital), test gauges, cathode ray oscilloscopes and other associated equipment. Operational function of instrumentation equipment/components tested and assessed
against operational specifications, interpreted from data sheets and circuit diagrams in consultation with appropriate personnel where applicable. Service reports completed by
appropriate means. All regulatory/legislative requirements adhered to. In this unit, major components can include transducers, power supplies, removable circuit boards, sensor
units and other like components. Soldering/desoldering of electrical/electronic components requires the selection of Unit 5.1A (Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic
components) or Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering) as appropriate. High reliability covers soldering/desoldering for the installation and fabrication of
electrical/electronic components to advanced or military specifications, or where the reliability of electrical connections is critical. It also covers the soldering of electronic
components where prevention of damage through electrostatic discharge or other means is required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the fault-finding, testing, and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
calibrating of instrumentation systems and equipment or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1089 of 1445
 MEM 18.54A A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.55A A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 3
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations

Element 18.55A.1 Dismantle engineering components

Criteria 18.55A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering components are inspected and task All relevant instructions, drawings and specifications are The tasks to be performed can be identified.
requirements analysed. obtained in accordance with workplace procedures.

Criteria 18.55A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools and equipment selected and The component is prepared for dismantling in accordance The procedures for dismantling the component can be
component/s prepared for dismantling. with standard operating procedures. identified. The tools and equipment to be used to
dismantle the components can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the tools and equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.55A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Component dismantled using standard operating The components are dismantled using appropriate The reasons for utilising the selected technique to
procedures, tools and equipment. techniques, tools and equipment in accordance with dismantle the components can be given. Two examples
standard operating procedures. of situations where other dismantling techniques may be
selected can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1090 of 1445
 MEM 18.55A A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.55A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering components are clearly marked to aid The component parts are appropriately marked for The reasons for identifying parts can be explained. The
reassembly. identification purposes in accordance with standard procedures for marking component parts can be
operating procedures. identified.

Element 18.55A.2 Identify faulty components

Criteria 18.55A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Specifications for components obtained from appropriate All relevant specifications and data are obtained in The specifications of the component can be identified.
source and interpreted and understood. accordance with standard operating procedures. Alternative sources of component specifications can be
given.

Criteria 18.55A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Damaged or faulty components assessed against The components are visually and dimensionally checked The procedures for checking components for
specifications. for conformance to specification in accordance with conformance to specification can be given. The
standard operating procedures. equipment necessary to check components for
conformance to specification can be identified. The
consequences of having components that do not comply
with specifications can be explained.

Criteria 18.55A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are identified for repair, replacement Where appropriate, faulty parts are marked for repair, The reason(s) for identifying parts for repair, replacement
or adjustment. replacement or adjustment in accordance with standard or adjustment can be given. Two examples of situations
operating procedures. where parts would be identified for repair can be given.
Two examples of situations where parts would be
identified for replacement can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1091 of 1445
 MEM 18.55A A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.55A.3 Select replacement components

Criteria 18.55A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, replacement and/or repaired parts are Replacement parts selected confirm to specifications All The specifications of the components to be replaced can
selected for reassembly. relevant supplier catalogues are obtained in accordance be identified. The features and/or dimensions upon
with workplace procedures. which replacement parts are to be selected can be
identified. The process of identifying replacement parts
from "third party" suppliers' catalogues can be
described.

Element 18.55A.4 Assemble engineering components into assemblies or sub-assemblies

Criteria 18.55A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate techniques are applied in the preparation, The components are prepared and assembled using The procedures for assembling components can be
assembly and adjustment of components using fastening appropriate fitting techniques and principles in accordance identified The requirements of the assembly in terms of
equipment and methods which ensure conformance to with standard operating procedures. specifications, operational performance, quality and
specifications, operational performance, quality and safety can be identified. Two examples of situations
safety of the completed assembly. where other assembly techniques may be used can be
given.

Criteria 18.55A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct lubrication, packing, sealing materials selected Where appropriate, lubricants are correctly applied to the The procedures for lubricating the assembly can be
and applied correctly in conformance to job assembly in accordance with specifications and standard identified. The application of different types of lubricants
specifications. operating procedures. Where appropriate, packing and/or can be identified The consequences of using
sealing materials are applied in accordance with inappropriate or no lubricant can be explained. The
specifications and standard operating procedures. function of packing and sealing materials can be
explained. The applications of different types of packing
and sealing materials can be identified. The reasons for
selecting chosen packing and/or sealing materials can be
explained. The procedures for installing packing and
sealing materials can be given.

Criteria 18.55A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final component assembly inspected, tested and The final assembly is inspected and checked for The checks to be undertaken during inspection of the
adjusted as necessary for compliance with operational conformance to specification. Where appropriate the final final assembly can be identified. The procedures for
specifications and returned to use according to standard assembly is returned into use in accordance with standard returning components/assemblies into use can be
operating procedure. operating procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1092 of 1445
 MEM 18.55A A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. This unit involves the dismantling,
inspection, replacement, assembling of engineering components. All specifications interpreted from manufacturers' manuals, engineering drawings, detailed/technical sketches and
associated data sheets. Tasks are undertaken utilising engineering principles, designated procedures, appropriate tools, equipment and safe workshop practices. Replacement parts
are selected from manufacturers' catalogues, etc. Appropriate techniques utilised in the assembly of component parts using fastening equipment and methods which ensure
conformance to specifications, operational performance, quality and safety; this may include the straightforward removal and replacement of pre-manufactured bearings and seals.
Appropriate lubrication, packing, sealing materials are selected and applied in conformance to standard operating procedure. Where precision mechanical measurement is required,
then Unit 12.3A (Precision mechanical measurement) must also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the dismantling, replacement and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
and assembly of engineering components or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1093 of 1445
 MEM 18.56A A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.56A A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 10
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
components
18.1A Use hand tools 18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment

Element 18.56A.1 Locate fault in electronic system/sub-assembly

Criteria 18.56A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/sub-assembly functions and principles All relevant circuit diagrams, manuals, specifications, The function(s) of the electronic system/sub-assembly
determined and understood eg: reference to equipment schematics, maintenance records, etc. obtained in can be identified. The electronic principles utilised in the
manuals, circuit diagrams etc.. accordance with workplace procedures. operation of the system/sub-assembly can be explained.

Criteria 18.56A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Built-in test functions run and fault indicator error codes Where appropriate, built-in test functions are run in The procedures for running built-in test functions can be
and appropriate maintenance records checked and accordance with standard operating procedures. Where identified. Errors indicated by built-in devices can be
reviewed. appropriate, built-in fault indicators are located and read/ correctly identified.
recorded in accordance with standard operating
procedures. Where appropriate, error code interpretation
documents are obtained in accordance with workplace
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1094 of 1445
 MEM 18.56A A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.56A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault symptoms reproduced, where appropriate, and Where appropriate, the fault symptoms are reproduced in The symptoms of the fault in the electronic
verified using appropriate technique. the system and the fault verified using appropriate test system/sub-assembly can be identified. The purpose of
equipment and techniques in accordance with standard reproducing system/sub-assembly fault symptoms can
operating procedures. be explained. The test equipment and techniques
necessary to confirm electronic system/sub-assembly
faults can be identified. The procedures for verifying
faults in electronic systems/sub-assemblies can be given.

Criteria 18.56A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, faulty sub-assembly isolated and Where appropriate, the electronic system/sub-assembly is The procedures for isolating electronic
removed from electronic system using correct and isolated from the power supply in accordance with systems/sub-assemblies can be identified. The hazards
appropriate tools and techniques. standard operating procedures. Where appropriate the associated with electronic systems/sub-assemblies can
faulty sub-assembly is removed from the electronic system be identified. The procedures for removing
using appropriate tools and techniques in accordance sub-assemblies from electronic systems can be given.
with standard operating procedures. The tools and techniques to be used to remove the
sub-assemblies from the electronic system can be
identified.

Criteria 18.56A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sub-assembly checked and tested using correct and The electronic sub-assembly is checked for conformance The procedures for testing faulty sub-assemblies can be
appropriate test equipment and techniques. to specification using appropriate equipment and given. The operational specifications of the
techniques in accordance with standard operating sub-assembly can be identified. The equipment and
procedures. techniques to be used to test the faulty sub-assemblies
can be identified. The test results obtained are compared
with the operational specifications and the faulty
components identified. The probable causes of
component failure can be given.

Criteria 18.56A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component/s identified and/or fault cause isolated.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1095 of 1445
 MEM 18.56A A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.56A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.56A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component removed, where required, using correct Where appropriate, faulty components are removed from The procedures for removing faulty components from
and appropriate tools and techniques. the electronic system using appropriate tools and electronic systems can be identified. The tools and
techniques in accordance with standard operating techniques to be used to remove components from
procedures. electronic systems can be identified.

Criteria 18.56A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component repaired/replaced in accordance with All relevant suppliers' catalogues are obtained in The procedures for repairing faulty components can be
manufacturers' recommended procedures or to standard accordance with work place procedures. Faulty identified. Replacement parts can be selected from
operating procedures. components are repaired/replaced using appropriate tools suppliers' catalogues in conformance to specification. All
and equipment in accordance with standard operating tools and equipment necessary to repair faulty
procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.56A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired/replacement components fitted in accordance The repaired/replaced components are refitted into the The procedures for fitting repaired/ replaced components
with manufacturers' recommended procedure or to sub-assembly using appropriate tools and techniques in into sub-assemblies can be identified. The tools and
standard operating procedure using correct and accordance with standard operating procedures. techniques required to refit the repaired/replaced
appropriate tools and techniques. components into sub-assemblies can be identified.

Criteria 18.56A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, repaired sub-assembly refitted to Where appropriate, the repaired sub-assembly is refitted The procedures for fitting repaired sub-assemblies into
electronic system using correct and appropriate tools and into the electronic system using appropriate tools and electronic systems can be identified.
techniques. techniques in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 18.56A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Systems/sub-assembly checked and tested for correct The electronic system/sub-assembly is tested for The procedures for testing electronic
operational compliance with specifications utilising compliance with specifications using appropriate test system/sub-assembly performance can be identified. The
correct and appropriate test procedures and equipment. equipment and techniques, in accordance with standard operational specifications of the electronic
operating procedures. system/sub-assembly can be identified. The test
equipment and techniques necessary to check electronic
system/sub-assembly performance can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1096 of 1445
 MEM 18.56A A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Diagnose includes working from first principles to
identify non-routine and undefined faults. Work performed in laboratory, workshops or on-site environments. Correct and appropriate tools and equipment include continuity
testers, ammeters, voltmeters, cathode ray oscilloscopes, frequency counters, signal generators, digital probes etc. Fault finding techniques include signal injection, substitution,
monitoring, heating/cooling etc. Electronic sub-assemblies can form part of electronic systems or equipment including computer, control, safeguarding, monitoring,
telecommunications, interface or security equipment etc. Components may include discrete component assemblies or individual components such as resistors, switching devices,
capacitors, transformers, solenoids, tubes, semi-conductors etc. All specifications and procedures gained from schematics, circuit drawings, engineering data sheets or
manufacturers' hand books. Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering) must also be selected if soldering of components is required to advanced or military
specifications, where the reliability of electrical connections is critical, or where surface mounted devices are being soldered/de-soldered. Where termination of cables is involved,
Unit 10.2A (Terminate and connect electrical wiring) and/or Unit 18.63A (Terminate signal and data cables) must also be selected. All work and work practices undertaken to
regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
electronic systems/sub-assemblies (analog) or other units requiring plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1097 of 1445
 MEM 18.57A A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.57A A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
components
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.57A.1 Undertake maintenance checks and routine tests

Criteria 18.57A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electronic equipment, functions determined and All relevant circuit diagrams, manuals, specifications, The function(s) of the electronic equipment can be
understood by reference to circuit diagrams, equipment schematics, maintenance records, etc. obtained in identified.
manuals and/or consultation with equipment operator accordance with workplace procedures. Where
where appropriate. appropriate, equipment operator consulted with respect to
equipment operation.

Criteria 18.57A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment built-in test functions run and results Where appropriate, built-in test functions are run in The procedures for running built-in test functions can be
recorded to standard operating procedures where accordance with standard operating procedures. Where identified. Errors indicated by built-in devices can be
appropriate. appropriate, built-in fault indicators are located and correctly identified.
read/recorded in accordance with standard operating
procedures. Where appropriate, error code interpretation
documents are obtained in accordance with workplace
procedures.

Criteria 18.57A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Built-in faults/status display noted and recorded to Where appropriate, the faults and/or equipment status The procedures for recording faults and/or equipment
standard operating procedure. indicated by built-in test functions/displays are recorded status identified by built-in test functions/displays can
in accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1098 of 1445
 MEM 18.57A A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.57A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/sub-assemblies, components, connections, The electronic equipment/sub-assemblies, components, The procedures for checking the following for
terminations etc. checked visually and with correct and connections and terminations are checked for compliance with specifications can be identified: -
appropriate test equipment and techniques. conformance to specifications using appropriate test electronic - equipment/sub-assemblies - components -
equipment and techniques in accordance with standard connections - terminations.
operating procedures.

Criteria 18.57A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components removed and replaced where Where appropriate, faulty components are removed from The procedures for removing faulty components from
appropriate. the electronic equipment using appropriate tools and electronic equipment can be identified. The tools and
techniques in accordance with standard operating techniques to be used to remove/replace components
procedures. Where appropriate, the replacement from/into electronic equipment can be identified. The
component is refitted into the electronic equipment using procedures for fitting replacement components into
appropriate tools and techniques in accordance with electronic equipment can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.57A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All results checked for compliance with manufacturers' The electronic equipment is checked for conformance to The procedures for testing electronic equipment can be
requirements or specification, results recorded to specification using appropriate equipment and techniques given. The operational specifications of the electronic
standard operating procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. The equipment can be identified. The equipment and
results of the tests undertaken on the electronic equipment techniques to be used to test the electronic equipment
are recorded in accordance with standard operating can be identified. The test results obtained are compared
procedures. with the operational specifications and where
appropriate, the faulty components identified. The
procedures for recording electronic equipment test
results can be identified.

Element 18.57A.2 Maintain and/or service electronic equipment

Criteria 18.57A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, isolate sub-assemblies to standard Where appropriate, the electronic sub-assembly is isolated The procedures for isolating electronic
operating procedures. from the power supply in accordance with standard equipment/sub-assemblies can be identified. The hazards
operating procedures. associated with electronic sub-assemblies can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1099 of 1445
 MEM 18.57A A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.57A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electronic equipment/sub-assemblies adjusted to The electronic equipment/sub-assemblies are The procedures for adjusting the electronic
specifications, manufacturers' requirements and/or adjusted/tuned in accordance with specifications, using equipment/sub-assembly can be identified. The tools,
standard operating procedures using correct and appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in equipment and techniques to be used to adjust the
appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. accordance with standard operating procedures. electronic equipment/sub-assembly can be identified.
The operational specifications of the electronic
equipment/sub-assembly can be identified.

Element 18.57A.3 Return electronic equipment to service

Criteria 18.57A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/sub assemblies returned into service utilising The electronic equipment/sub-assembly is returned into The procedures for returning to service the electronic
correct and appropriate techniques and procedures. service in accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment/sub-assembly can be identified. The
equipment and techniques to be used to return the
electronic equipment/sub-assembly back into service can
be identified.

Criteria 18.57A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/sub assemblies checked for operational The electronic equipment/sub-assembly is checked for The operational specifications of the electronic
compliance to specifications and/or manufacturers conformance to specification, using appropriate test equipment/sub-assembly can be identified. The
requirements and documentation requirements are carried equipment and techniques in accordance with standard procedures for recording/ documenting the maintenance
out to standard operating procedure. operating procedures. The test results are recorded in servicing of the electronic equipment/sub-assembly can
accordance with standard operating procedures. be given. The test equipment and techniques to be used
to check the electronic equipment/sub-assembly for
conformance to specification can be identified. The
procedures for testing the electronic
equipment/sub-assembly for compliance with
specification can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1100 of 1445
 MEM 18.57A A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the testing and maintenance of electronic equipment and systems, it covers situations in which a series of checks and pre-determined tests is applied in accordance
with work shop manuals, testing procedures etc. This unit also covers the replacement of faulty components identified during these tests. Work ordinarily undertaken with minimal
assistance but could include working as part of team. Work undertaken in field (in situ) or workshop/laboratory environment. Check, tests, adjustments and services undertaken on
a wide range of equipment utilised in engineering environments including telecommunication, process control, computer systems, security monitoring and alarm systems etc.
Correct and appropriate tools and equipment includes the use of voltmeters, ammeters, cathode ray oscilloscopes, frequency counters, continuity testers etc, hand tools and
soldering and de-soldering devices etc. Components may include discrete component, circuit boards, connectors, plug-in items, power supplies and the like. Where termination of
cables is involved Unit 10.2A (Terminate and connect electrical wiring ) and/or Unit 18.63A (Terminate signal and data cables) must also be selected. If diagnosis and repair of
electronic equipment is undertaken to component level Unit18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) and/or Unit 18.65A (Diagnose and repair digital
equipment and components) should also be selected. For higher level diagnostic skills see Unit 18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) or Unit 18.65A
(Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components) is used. All specifications and procedures obtained from circuit drawings, engineering data sheets or manufacturers hand
books. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
calibration of electronic systems and equipment or other units plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1101 of 1445
MEM 18.58A B Modify electronic equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.58A B Modify electronic equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
This unit covers the competencies required to modify and recommission equipment. Modifications can vary from minor calibrations and alteration requirement to
experimental and development modifications of a complex nature and can include replacement and /or alterations of system equipment, sub assemblies, PCBs and
components on analog and digital electronic systems
Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.56A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and 18.65A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and
components components

Element 18.58A.1 Modify equipment

Criteria 18.58A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification requirements determined and understood Relevant circuit diagrams, schematics, manuals, etc. obtained Modification requirements can be identified Sources of
by reference to circuit diagrams, schematics, equipment in accordance with work site procedures Where appropriate, technical advice can be identified
manuals and /or consultation with technical authority technical authority consulted in accordance with work site
where appropriate procedures
Criteria 18.58A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment isolated to standard operational procedures Equipment is isolated in accordance with work site Equipment isolation procedures can be identified
procedures Isolated equipment is tagged in accordance with
work site procedures Isolation of equipment is verified in
accordance with work site procedures
Criteria 18.58A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment removed from system, if required, using Where appropriate, equipment is removed from system in The procedures for removing equipment from the system
correct and appropriate techniques and equipment accordance with work site procedures can be identified

Criteria 18.58A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification carried out to The modification is carried out to specification in The modification to be carried out can be identified The
equipment/sub-assembly/component in accordance with accordance with work site procedures specifications applicable to the modification can be
specifications or application requirements using correct identified Any permits/approvals required can be identified
and appropriate techniques and equipment The tools and equipment necessary to carry out the
modification can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1102 of 1445
MEM 18.58A B Modify electronic equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.58A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sub-assembly refitted to equipment, if required, using Where appropriate, sub-assembly/equipment refitted to Any specialised fitting requirements can be identified
correct and appropriate technique and equipment system in accordance with work site procedures

Element 18.58A.2 Return equipment to service

Criteria 18.58A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where required, circuit diagrams, schematics, equipment Where appropriate, circuit diagrams, schematics, equipment The modifications undertaken can be identified
manuals etc. amended to reflect modifications manuals, specifications, etc. affected by the modifications
undertaken are amended to reflect the modifications, in accordance with
work site procedures
Criteria 18.58A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Checks and tests undertaken to specifications using The modified electronic equipment is tested to ensure The electronic equipment specifications can be identified
correct and appropriate techniques, test equipment and conformance to specifications in accordance with work site Appropriate test equipment and its application can be
tools procedures identified Appropriate testing procedures can be identified

Criteria 18.58A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/system recommissioned using correct and The electronic equipment is recommissioned in accordance The procedures for recommissioning electronic equipment
appropriate techniques and procedures with work site procedures can be identified

Criteria 18.58A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment/system checked for operational compliance The equipment/system is checked for conformance to The operational specification of the equipment/system can
with specifications operational specifications in accordance with work site be identified
procedures

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1103 of 1445
MEM 18.58A B Modify electronic equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously and/or as a member of team. Professional or higher level technical assistance may be utilised for determining modification. Work undertaken in
field or workshop/laboratory. Modifications include minor adjustments and alterations requirements through to experimental and development modifications of a complex nature
and can include replacement and/or alterations of system equipment, sub-assemblies, PCBs and components etc. on analog and digital electronic equipment and systems. All work
and work practices undertaken to regulatory or legislative requirements. Where drafting skills are required, then Unit 9.3A (Prepare basic engineering drawing) or Unit 9.4B
(Electrical/electronic detail drafting) should be considered. Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering) must also be selected if soldering of components is required to
advanced or military specifications, where the reliability of electrical connections is critical, or where surface mounted devices are being soldered/de-soldered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by this unit The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. The candidate will
be required to: - Orally, or other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units addressing the During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the modification of electronic equipment, or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification;
- use accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical
workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1104 of 1445
 MEM 18.59B A Modify electronic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.59B A Modify electronic systems

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
components
12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.56A Diagnose and repair analog equipment and 18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.58A Modify electronic equipment
components
18.65A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and
components

Element 18.59B.1 Modification determined

Criteria 18.59B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification requirements determined and understood All relevant instructions, schematics, circuit diagrams are The modifications to be made to the electronic system
by reference to schematics, circuit diagrams, obtained in accordance with work place procedures. can be identified. The reasons for undertaking the
documentation and/or consultation with appropriate Where appropriate, technical advisers are consulted in modification to the electronic system can be given. The
authority. accordance with work place procedures. appropriate personnel to consult for technical advice can
be identified. The hazards associated with the electronic
system can be identified.

Criteria 18.59B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, maintenance reports and system All relevant maintenance reports and system output The data obtained is collated and any trends and/or
output information analysed to confirm the need and information is obtained in accordance with workplace deviations from specification are identified. The probable
nature of modification. procedures. causes for any detected trends and/or deviations from
specification can be given. The likely effect of the
proposed modifications on system performance can be
explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1105 of 1445
 MEM 18.59B A Modify electronic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.59B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Scope and nature of modifications determined, recorded The proposed modifications are recorded in accordance The procedures for recording modifications to be made
to standard operating procedures and confirmed with with standard operating procedures. Approval to carry out to electronic systems can be identified. The appropriate
appropriate authority. the proposed modifications is obtained from the authority to authorise modifications to electronic
appropriate authority. systems can be identified.

Element 18.59B.2 Undertake modification(s)

Criteria 18.59B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification/s undertaken using correct and appropriate The electronic system is modified using appropriate tools The procedures to be followed when undertaking
techniques, tools and procedures. and techniques in accordance with standard operating modifications to electronic systems can be identified.
procedures. The tools and techniques to be used to modify the
electronic system can be identified.

Criteria 18.59B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate amendments undertaken to All relevant documents, circuit drawings, schematics etc. The procedures for amending documents, circuit
documentations, circuit drawing etc. using standard are amended in accordance with the modifications made to drawings, schematics etc. can be identified. The
operating procedures. the electronic system and standard operating procedures. appropriate authority to authorise changes to
documentation, circuit drawings, schematics etc. can be
identified.

Element 18.59B.3 Test and evaluate modified electronic systems

Criteria 18.59B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications checked/tested and evaluated for The modified electronic system is checked for The procedures for checking the performance of the
compliance with desired outcome or specification using conformance to specification using appropriate test modified electronic system can be identified. The test
correct and appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. equipment and techniques in accordance with standard equipment and techniques to be used to evaluate the
operating procedures. modified electronic system can be identified. The
operational specifications to be achieved by the modified
electronic system can be identified.

Criteria 18.59B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Additional modification changes, if required, Where appropriate, additional modifications are Any deviations/variations of test results from
recommended using standard operating procedures. recommended in accordance with standard operating operational specifications can be identified. The probable
procedures. causes of any deviations/variations from specification
can be given. The likely effect of further modifications on
electronic system performance can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1106 of 1445
 MEM 18.59B A Modify electronic systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Professional or higher level technical assistance may be utilised in determining modifications. Work undertaken in
field, workshop/laboratory. Modification proposals are approved by appropriate authority. Modifications include approved design changes and/or replacement of components or
sub-assemblies on electronic analog and digital systems. All work undertaken to regulatory or legislative requirements. Where drafting skills are required, then Unit 9.3A (Prepare
basic engineering drawing) or Unit 9.4B (Electrical/electronic detail drafting) should be considered. Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering must also be selected if
soldering of components is required to advanced or military specifications, where the reliability of electrical connections is critical, or where surface mounted devices are being
soldered/de-soldered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the modification of electronic and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
systems or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1107 of 1445
MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
This unit covers the competencies required to determine control loop characteristics, monitor and record operation of panel mounted, split architecture single/multiple
loop control instruments. It covers the ability to localise the fault condition, replace or repair faulty conditions, calibrate and adjust control instrumentation,
recommission
and complete service reports. The tasks undertaken use pneumatic calibrators, electronic calibrators and test equipment (current, voltage and digital).

Note - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation
sensors, transmitters and final control elements
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation
equipment components sensors, transmitters and final control elements
18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components

Element 18.60A.1 Determine control loop operating characteristics

Criteria 18.60A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering specifications, technical information and All relevant engineering specifications, technical Relevant data on the control loop characteristics can be
historical trends examined for relevant data information, historical records and documents are identified Where appropriate, trends are identified
obtained in accordance with workplace procedures from the data
Criteria 18.60A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System specifications, operational data and other The specifications of system components and The specifications of each system component can be
relevant data sources examined, read, interpreted and operational data are obtained in accordance with work identified Where appropriate, trends are identified
relevant conclusions noted place procedures from operational data

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1108 of 1445
MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.60A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consultation with system operators and other relevant System operators and other relevant plant personnel are The procedures for documenting information gained by
plant personnel is carried out, relevant data extracted consulted with respect to the control loop characteristics consultation with personnel can be given Where
and documented by appropriate means The information obtained from system operators and appropriate, relevant data and/or trends are identified
other relevant personnel is documented in accordance
with standard operating procedures
Criteria 18.60A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of all control loop device The operation of the system is observed to confirm The reasons for observing the system in operation can
characteristics, controller mode principles and function/malfunction of the system and/or its be explained The following can be identified for the
adjustment methods, operation of the system is given control system: - the characteristics of the
external control device - the controller modes - the
means of signal transmission - the principles of
operation of the final control element - the procedures
for calibrating the control system - the procedures for
adjusting the control system

Criteria 18.60A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate test equipment and testing procedures used The control system is tested using appropriate The equipment necessary to test the control system
equipment and techniques in accordance with standard can be identified The reasons for selecting the chosen
operating procedures test equipment can be given The test procedures to be
followed can be identified
Criteria 18.60A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault finding and diagnostic techniques utilised The operational characteristics of control devices, signal Fault finding and diagnostic tests to be applied to
conversion instruments and final control elements are control devices, signal conversion instruments and final
checked for conformance to specification, using control elements can be identified The necessary test
appropriate test equipment and techniques in accordance equipment and techniques can be identified The
with standard operating procedures Where appropriate, procedures for testing control system components can
faults/defects in control system components are be identified
correctly identified

Criteria 18.60A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant data collected by appropriate means, from all In-built fault indicators and error codes are located/read The errors indicated by in-built devices can be correctly
sources including maintenance records, fault indicators, in accordance with standard operating procedures identified All relevant data from all sources is
charts, error codes operational symptoms, observation collected and collated for analysis
monitoring and consultation with appropriate personnel

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1109 of 1445
MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 18.60A.2 Monitor and record operation of a control loop
Criteria 18.60A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pneumatic, electrical and electronic circuit diagrams All relevant pneumatic, electrical and electronic circuit The correct function of the circuits can be identified
interpreted and understood diagrams obtained in accordance with work place The components of the control loop can be identified
procedures
Criteria 18.60A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of all control loop device The control loop operation is tested and monitored for The characteristics of the control loop devices can be
characteristics, controller mode principles and correct operation using appropriate test equipment and given The calibration and adjustment methods for the
calibration/adjustment methods, check/test and monitor techniques in accordance with standard operating control loop devices can be explained The principles
loop operation from the controller response to set procedures and modes of operation of the system controller can be
point and manual output changes using correct test explained The test equipment and techniques
equipment, principles and procedures necessary to monitor and record the operation of the
control system can be identified The reasons for
selecting the chosen test equipment and techniques can
be explained The test procedures to be applied to the
control system can be identified

Criteria 18.60A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Interpret software configuration data for digital control All relevant software data is obtained in accordance with The configuration of the digital control system
systems work place procedures software can be identified
Criteria 18.60A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operational responses monitored and recorded by The operational responses of the control system are The operational responses to be monitored can be
appropriate means monitored and recorded in accordance with standard identified The procedures for recording test and
operating procedures operational data can be identified
Criteria 18.60A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault finding and diagnostic techniques utilised Appropriate fault-finding and diagnostic techniques and The need to employ appropriate fault-finding and
throughout checking and testing procedures including procedures are used throughout the monitoring and diagnostic techniques throughout the monitoring and
simple and multi-controller type control schemes testing process testing process can be explained
Criteria 18.60A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Diagnostic results and conclusions analysed against The collated data is compared with the operational Where appropriate, deviations/ variations from
predetermined operational specifications specifications of the control system The results of the specification can be identified The probable reasons for
analysis of collated data and any conclusions reached are any deviations/variations from specification can be
documented in accordance with standard operating given The procedures for documenting control system
procedures tests and analysis can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1110 of 1445
MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 18.60A.3 Localise fault condition
Criteria 18.60A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuits tested to the level necessary to identify and The circuits are tested for continuity/fault in accordance The procedures for testing circuits can be identified
localise faults with standard operating procedures The hazards associated with testing circuits can be
identified Where appropriate, the procedures for
isolating the control system and its components can be
identified
Criteria 18.60A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Drawings/diagrams, operational testing data utilised in All relevant drawings, diagrams and operational test data The relevant drawings, diagrams and operational test
identifying and localising fault conditions are collected and collated to assist in localising fault data can be identified
conditions
Criteria 18.60A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition localised and verified to major Apparent faults are verified using appropriate test The procedures for verifying apparent faults in circuits
component level using appropriate test equipment, equipment and techniques in accordance with standard and/or control system components can be given The
principles and procedures operating procedures test equipment and techniques required to verify an
apparent fault can be identified

Element 18.60A.4 Replace or repair faulty condition

Criteria 18.60A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components dismantled for repair or replacement using Components marked for repair or replacement in The procedures for marking components for repair or
appropriate tools, equipment and procedures accordance with standard operating procedures replacement can be identified The procedures for
Serviceable items are dismantled/ disassembled in dismantling/ disassembling components for repair or
accordance with standard operating procedures replacement can be identified
Criteria 18.60A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replaceable items are selected from manufacturers' All relevant manufacturers'/ suppliers' catalogues, spare Appropriate replacement parts can be identified
catalogues, spare parts lists, or data sheets parts lists or data sheets obtained in accordance with
workplace procedures
Criteria 18.60A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceable items repaired using correct principles, The serviceable item(s) are repaired using appropriate The correct maintenance procedures for serviceable
tools, equipment and procedures tools and equipment in accordance with specifications item(s) can be identified The tools and equipment
and standard operating procedures required to undertake maintenance on the serviceable
item(s) can be identified The specifications of the
serviceable item(s) can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1111 of 1445
MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.60A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired and replaceable items reassembled using Repaired and/or replacement items are assembled in The procedures for assembling repaired and/or
appropriate tools, equipment, techniques and procedures accordance with standard operating procedures replacement items can be identified

Element 18.60A.5 Calibrate and adjust control instrumentation

Criteria 18.60A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibrate and adjust panel mounted, split architecture The appropriate test and calibration equipment is set up The calibration procedures for the control system
single loop/multiple loop control instruments using in accordance with standard operating procedures components can be identified The equipment necessary
correct calibration principles, equipment and methods Control system components are calibrated and adjusted to calibrate the control system components can be
for all devices according to manufacturers' instructions in accordance with standard operating procedures identified The specifications of the equipment to be
calibrated can be identified The reasons for selecting
the chosen test and calibration equipment can be
explained The adjustments that can be made to control
system components can be identified The effects of
those adjustments on the calibration of the control
system component can be explained

Criteria 18.60A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjust controller modes and actions according to The controller modes and actions are set and adjusted to The controller modes and actions specified can be
specifications specification in accordance with standard operating identified
procedures
Criteria 18.60A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Zero span and range checks undertaken using correct The control instrumentation is checked for correct zero, The control instrumentation specifications can be
and appropriate configuration span and range in accordance with specifications and identified The procedures for checking control
standard operating procedures instruments for zero, span and range can be given
Criteria 18.60A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate procedures, techniques, tools The control system is adjusted as required to ensure that The procedures for making final adjustments to ensure
and equipment used to make final adjustments to all components conform to specification in accordance all control system components conform to
control instrumentation to specifications with standard operating procedures specification can be given

Element 18.60A.6 Complete service reports and recommission

Criteria 18.60A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports completed to standard operating All necessary reports are completed in accordance with The reporting/recording requirements associated with
procedures standard operating procedures the commissioning of the control system can be
identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1112 of 1445
MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.60A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures adopted The appropriate follow up procedures are followed The follow up actions to be undertaken can be
identified The procedures to be followed after
maintaining/repairing control system instrumentation
can be identified
Criteria 18.60A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control instrumentation recommissioned to standard The control system is commissioned in accordance with The procedures for commissioning the control system
operating procedures standard operating procedures can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1113 of 1445
MEM 18.60A A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single and multiple loop control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Tasks undertaken in workshop or on-site
environments utilising pneumatic calibrators, electronic calibrators and test equipment (current, voltage and digital). Extends to the use of pneumatic analog and digital test
equipment for the testing and calibration of panel mounted, split architecture single loop/multi-loop control instrumentation including PLCs, distributed control systems,
computer based systems, both PC based and (mini) process computer based. The tasks involve the use of operating and calibration principles for all devices according to
manufacturers' instructions; interpretation of pneumatic electrical and electronic circuit diagrams, interpretation of software configuration data for digital control systems.
Included is the basic adjustment of controller modes, checking of loop operation from the controller response to set point and manual output changes; identification and fault
finding of simple and multiple controller type control schemes, adjusting controller modes and actions according to specifications. In this unit, major components can include
transducers, power supplies, removable circuit boards, sensor units and other like components. Where fault finding is required to electronic component level Unit 18.56A
(Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) and/or Unit 18.65A (Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components) should also be selected.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
of control system instrumentation or other units requiring the - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1114 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Notes - Where diagnosis and repair of electronic equipment is undertaken to component level Unit 18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components)
and/or Unit 18.65A (Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components) should be selected.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.36B Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems,
equipment
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation
components sensors, transmitters and final control elements
18.69B Maintain, repair instrumentation process control
analysers
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.36B Maintain and repair scientific analysis equipment 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components
18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components 18.69B Maintain, repair instrumentation process control
analysers
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.60A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single & 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation
multiple loop control systems sensors, transmitters and final control elements
18.67A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi
element systems

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1115 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pre-requisite units - Path 4
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.60A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single &
equipment components multiple loop control systems
18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation 18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components 18.67A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi
sensors, transmitters and final control elements element systems

Element 18.61B.1 Determine system specifications and control loop characteristics

Criteria 18.61B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering specifications, technical information and All relevant engineering specifications, technical Relevant data on the control loop characteristics can be
historical records and trends examined and relevant data information, historical records and documents are obtained identified. Where appropriate, trends are identified from
documented. in accordance with workplace procedures. the data.

Criteria 18.61B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System specifications and operational data including The specifications of system components and operational The specification of each system component can be
those for multiple loop control systems and devices data are obtained in accordance with workplace identified. Where appropriate, trends are identified from
obtained, read and interpreted. procedures. operational data.

Criteria 18.61B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuit and logic diagrams and configuration data All relevant circuit and logic diagrams and configuration The system components and their function can be
obtained, read and interpreted. data are obtained in accordance with work place identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.61B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consultation with system operators and other relevant System operators and other relevant plant personnel are The procedures for documenting information gained by
plant personnel is carried out, relevant data extracted and consulted with respect to the control loop characteristics. consultation with personnel can be given. Where
documented by appropriate means. The information obtained from system operators and other appropriate, relevant data and/or trends are identified.
relevant personnel is documented in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1116 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.61B.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate work clearances obtained for monitoring and All necessary work clearances for the monitoring and The work clearances to be obtained can be identified.
testing the system. testing of the system are obtained in accordance with The procedures for obtaining work clearances can be
standard operating procedures. given.

Element 18.61B.2 Test, monitor and record system operation

Criteria 18.61B.2.0 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant data collected by appropriate means from all In-built fault indicators and error codes are located/read in The errors indicated by in-built devices can be correctly
sources including maintenance records, chart recorders, accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. All relevant data from all sources is collected
data loggers, fault indicators, error codes, operational and collated for analysis.
symptoms, tests and observation monitoring.

Criteria 18.61B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System operation observed using knowledge of all The operation of the system is observed to confirm The reasons for observing the system in operation can
individual/multiple element loop device characteristics, function/ malfunction of the system and/or its be explained. The following can be identified for the
controller mode principles, testing, calibration and components. given system: - all individual/multiple element loop
adjustment methods. device characteristics - controller mode principles -
testing methods - calibration methods - adjustment
methods.

Criteria 18.61B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault detection and diagnostic data analysed against The collated data is compared with the operational Where appropriate, deviations/ variations from
predetermined operational specifications, and specifications of the control system. The results of the specification can be identified. The probable reasons for
conclusions documented. analysis of collated data and any conclusions reached are any deviations/variations from specification can be
documented in accordance with standard operating given. The procedures for documenting control system
procedures. tests and analysis can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate test equipment set up and used correctly. The appropriate test equipment is set up and used in The test equipment to be utilised can be identified. The
accordance with standard operating procedures. reasons for selecting the chosen test equipment can be
explained. The procedures for using the chosen test
equipment can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1117 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.61B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tests undertaken using standard operating All tests are carried out in accordance with standard The test procedures to be followed can be given.
procedures. operating procedures.

Criteria 18.61B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Signal transmission test equipment set up and used Where appropriate, the transmission signal is tested using The equipment necessary to test signal transmissions
where applicable. suitable equipment and techniques in accordance with can be identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
standard operating procedures. test equipment can be given. The test procedures to be
followed can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustment/maintenance needs determined through The adjustments/maintenance to be carried out can be
interpretation and analysis of pneumatic, electrical, identified. The reasons for identifying the
electronic, logic diagrams and configuration data for all adjustments/maintenance to be carried out can be
control system devices. explained in terms of test results and control system
device logic diagrams and configuration data.

Criteria 18.61B.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Connect appropriate field instrumentation to test system Appropriate field instruments are connected to the system Field instrumentation to be used to test system
configuration. in accordance with standard operating procedures. configuration can be identified. The procedures for
testing system configuration can be given.

Criteria 18.61B.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Connect field instrumentation for selected control The operation of selected controls is tested and monitored The procedures for testing and monitoring the operation
operation, test and monitor performance against using field instrumentation in accordance with standard of selected controls can be given.
specifications. operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1118 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.61B.2.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Carry out diagnostics checks to ensure correct operation. Diagnostic checks are carried out on the system in Diagnostic checks to be applied to the system to ensure
accordance with standard operating procedures. correct operation of the system can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen diagnostic checks can
be explained. The procedures for carrying out the
diagnostic checks can be given.

Criteria 18.61B.2.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault finding and diagnostic tests undertaken using The operational characteristics of control devices, signal Fault finding and diagnostic tests to be applied to
correct equipment, techniques and procedures to detect conversion instruments and final control elements are control devices, signal conversion instruments and final
faulty control system components or elements. checked for conformance to specification, using control elements can be identified. The necessary test
appropriate test equipment and techniques in accordance equipment and techniques can be identified. The
with standard operating procedures. Faults/defects in procedures for testing control system
control system components/elements are correctly components/elements can be identified.
identified.

Element 18.61B.3 Localise fault condition

Criteria 18.61B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System tested to the level necessary to detect and The system is tested for continuity/fault in accordance The procedures for testing circuits and control lines can
localise fault condition. with standard operating procedures. be identified. The hazards associated with testing circuits
and control lines can be identified. Where appropriate,
the procedures for isolating the control system and its
components can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition localised and verified using appropriate Apparent faults are verified using appropriate test The procedures for verifying apparent faults in circuits,
test equipment, principles and processes. equipment and techniques in accordance with standard control lines and/or control system components can be
operating procedures. given. The test equipment and techniques required to
verify an apparent fault can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1119 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.61B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition analysed, evaluated and corrective action Where appropriate, the corrective action to be taken is The causes of verified faults can be identified. The action
planned. documented showing the sequence of activities to be to be taken to return the control system/component to
performed. specification can be identified.

Element 18.61B.4 Replace or repair faulty condition

Criteria 18.61B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceable items dismantled for repair or replacement Serviceable items are marked for repair or replacement in The procedures for marking serviceable items for repair
using appropriate tools, equipment and procedures accordance with standard operating procedures. or replacement can be identified. The procedures for
according to manufacturers' recommendations. Serviceable items are dismantled/disassembled in dismantling/ disassembling items for repair or
accordance with standard operating procedures. replacement can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replaceable items selected from manufacturers' All relevant manufacturers'/suppliers' catalogues, spare Appropriate replacement parts can be identified.
catalogues, spare parts lists, or data sheets. parts lists or data sheets are obtained in accordance with
workplace procedures.

Criteria 18.61B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using manufacturers' handbooks, correct maintenance The correct maintenance procedures for serviceable
procedures for serviceable items established. item(s) can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Serviceable items repaired using correct maintenance The serviceable item(s) are repaired using appropriate The tools and equipment required to undertake
procedures and equipment. tools and equipment in accordance with specifications and maintenance on the serviceable item(s) can be identified.
standard operating procedures. The specifications of the serviceable item(s) can be
identified.

Criteria 18.61B.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired and replaceable items reassembled using Repaired and/or replacement items are assembled in The procedures for assembling repaired and/or
appropriate principles, tools, equipment, techniques and accordance with standard operating procedures. replacement items can be identified.
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1120 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.61B.5 Calibrate, configure, adjust complex control systems

Criteria 18.61B.5.0 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Carry out diagnostic checks to ensure correct operation Diagnostic checks of the system are carried out in The diagnostic checks to be carried out can be identified.
of system taking appropriate corrective action as accordance with standard operating procedures. Where The procedures for carrying out diagnostic checks can
necessary. appropriate, corrective action is taken to bring system be given. The procedures for adjusting the system to
operation into line with specifications. conform to operational specifications can be given.

Criteria 18.61B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct calibration and test equipment selected/set up to The appropriate test and calibration equipment is set up in The calibration procedures for the control system
enable calibration to manufacturers' specifications. accordance with standard operating procedures. components can be identified. The equipment necessary
to calibrate the control system components can be
identified. The specifications of the equipment to be
calibrated can be identified. The reasons for selecting the
chosen test and calibration equipment can be explained.

Criteria 18.61B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Mechanical alignment of control devices undertaken Where appropriate, control devices are aligned to The procedures for aligning control devices can be
where applicable. specifications in accordance with standard operating identified The alignment specifications can be identified.
procedures. The tools and equipment necessary to carry out the
alignment of the control devices can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Configure system using appropriate programming tools The system is configured using appropriate programming The procedures for configuring the system can be given.
and techniques. tools and techniques in accordance with standard The programming tools and techniques to be used can
operating procedures. be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1121 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.61B.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tune controllers for optimum control and in accordance Controllers are tuned for optimum performance in The procedures for tuning controllers can be given. The
with specifications. accordance with specifications and standard operating specifications of the controllers can be identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.61B.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct sequence of tuning is used on multiple control Multiple control loops are tuned in the correct sequence in The procedures for tuning multiple control loops and
loops and multi-element systems. accordance with standard operating procedures. multi-element systems can be given. The correct
sequence of tuning can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.5.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct recording equipment set up for adjustment and The appropriate recording equipment is set up and The procedures for recording signals and data during
monitoring during tuning. monitored during the tuning process to identify the effects system tuning operations can be given. The recording
of adjustment made to the system. equipment to be used can be identified.

Criteria 18.61B.5.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration and adjustment function performed on Control system components are calibrated and adjusted in The adjustments that can be made to control system
multi-loop devices, multi-element control loops, controller accordance with standard operating procedures. components can be identified. The effects of those
modes and actions according to operational adjustments on the calibration of the control system
specifications using correct principles and methods components can be explained.
applicable to the type of control loop being serviced.

Criteria 18.61B.5.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Make on-line changes to parameters in the system to Where appropriate, system parameters are changed on-line The requirements to be achieved by changing system
meet specified requirements. to meet specified requirements. parameters on-line can be identified. The procedures for
changing parameters can be given.

Criteria 18.61B.5.9 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Connect field instrumentation for selected control Field instrumentation is connected to a selected control The level of control to be achieved can be identified. The
operation and operate system to a satisfactory level of system. The system is operated to a satisfactory level of procedures for operating and monitoring a control
control. control. system can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1122 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.61B.6 Return system to service

Criteria 18.61B.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final adjustments to align system operation to The control system is adjusted as required to ensure that The procedures for making final adjustments to ensure all
operational specifications including process and optimum all components conform to specifications in accordance control system components conform to specifications
control efficiencies undertaken. with standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.61B.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct procedures are applied in return to service All instrumentation is correctly configured, calibrated, The procedures for returning to service all
including configuring, calibrating, adjusting, tuning and adjusted and tuned in accordance with specifications and instrumentation in the control system can be identified.
final validation of system performance in accordance with standard operating procedures.
specifications.

Criteria 18.61B.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System returned to service in accordance with standard The system performance in conformance to specifications The equipment and techniques to be used to adjust, tune
operating procedures. is validated using appropriate equipment and techniques and validate system performance can be identified. The
in accordance with standard operating procedures. The procedures for returning to service can be identified.
control system is returned to service in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.61B.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports completed to standard operating All necessary reports are completed in accordance with The reporting/recording requirements associated with
procedures. standard operating procedures. return to service of control systems can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1123 of 1445
 MEM 18.61B A Maintain/calibrate complex control systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment in consultation with appropriate personnel, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures.
Tasks undertaken in workshop or on-site environments. Equipment used may include pneumatic and/or electronic, analog and/or digital test and recording equipment. Control
systems include pneumatic control, analog and/or digital electronics, distributed PLC, DCS, SCADA, and computer based control systems. Computer based control systems may
include supervisory mode. Control strategies include; ratio, cascade, selector, duplex, feed forward, adaptive, dynamic compensations, computations, energy management and
environmental control/systems. Tasks include testing, configuration and calibration of multiple loop control systems. Tasks involve the interpretation of manuals, specifications
and diagrams, including pneumatic, electrical, electronic and logic diagrams, as well as program listings and configuration data for control system devices. Unit 5.2A (High reliability
soldering and desoldering) must also be selected if soldering of components is required to advanced or military specifications, where the reliability of electrical connections is
critical, or where surface mounted devices are being soldered/de-soldered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
complex control systems or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1124 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final
control elements
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment

Pre-requisite units - Path 2

2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components
equipment components

Element 18.62A.1 Select for installation appropriate sensors, transmitters and final control elements
Criteria 18.62A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine specification requirements from data sheets, All relevant data sheets, circuit diagrams, engineering The specifications for the sensors, transmitters and final
circuit diagrams, engineering drawings. drawings, instructions etc. are obtained in accordance with control elements to be installed can be identified.
workplace procedures.

Criteria 18.62A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of device characteristics and principles The characteristics and principles of operation of the
of operation, specification requirements interpreted, sensors, transmitters and final control elements to be
defined and understood. installed can be correctly described.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1125 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Having regard for measurement range, processes and Appropriate sensors, transmitters and final control The procedures for selecting appropriate sensors,
environment, sensors, transmitters and final control elements are selected in accordance with specifications transmitters and final control elements can be given. The
elements are selected according to their device and standard operating procedures. following details with respect to the sensors,
characteristics, principles of operation and measurement transmitters and final control elements to be selected can
capabilities, in conformance to specifications. be identified: - the range of measurements to be made -
the processes to be measured - the environment in which
measurements are to be taken - the capabilities of the
selected sensor, transmitter and final control elements.
The reasons for selecting the chosen sensors,
transmitters and final control elements can be explained.

Element 18.62A.2 Install instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements
Criteria 18.62A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sensors, transmitters and final control elements installed Sensors, transmitters and final control elements are The procedures for installing sensors, transmitters and
using sound working knowledge of installation correctly installed to specification using appropriate tools, final control elements can be given. The tools, equipment
principles, procedures, techniques, tools and equipment, equipment and techniques in accordance with all relevant and techniques required to install sensors and
according to appropriate codes of practice, standards, codes, standards, legislative and safety requirements and transmitters can be identified. The relevant codes,
safety and legislative requirements. procedures. standards, safety and legislative requirements can be
identified.

Criteria 18.62A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
During installation access for maintenance and mounting Appropriate access is provided to the installed sensors, The need to provide access to installed sensors,
connections for power, signal, and process are planned transmitters and final control elements to enable future transmitters and final control elements for future
and catered for. maintenance and connections to be undertaken. maintenance and connections can be explained. The
maintenance, removal/ replacement procedures
applicable to sensors, transmitters and final control
elements can be identified. The connections to be made
to sensors, transmitters and final control elements can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1126 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Installed sensors, transmitters and final control elements The installed sensors, transmitters and final control The procedures for testing installed sensors, transmitters
diagnosed for correct operation using appropriate elements are tested for correct operation using appropriate and final control elements can be given. The test
equipment and procedures. Results assessed against test equipment and techniques in accordance with equipment and techniques to be used to check installed
specifications or manufacturers technical data sheets. standard operating procedures. sensors, transmitters and final control elements for
correct operation can be identified. The specifications of
the installed sensors, transmitters and final control
elements can be identified. Where appropriate, variations
of test results from specifications can be identified.

Element 18.62A.3 Maintain, diagnose sensors , transmitters and final control elements
Criteria 18.62A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of device characteristics and principles Relevant preventative maintenance schedules for sensors, The procedures for maintaining sensors, transmitters and
of operation, preventative maintenance schedules and transmitters and final control elements are obtained in final control elements can be identified. The maintenance
procedures are applied to maintain sensors, transmitters accordance with work place procedures. to be undertaken and the frequency at which sensors,
and final control elements in optimum condition. Scheduled/preventative maintenance is carried out on transmitters and final control elements are to be
sensors, transmitters and final control elements in maintained can be identified.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.62A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of device characteristics and principles Sensors are cleaned and serviced using appropriate tools, The housekeeping requirements with respect to sensors
of operation, sensing elements cleaned and serviced to techniques and equipment in accordance with standard can be identified. The reasons for cleaning and servicing
maintain optimum operating condition particularly at the operating procedures. sensors can be explained. The tools, equipment and
process interface, using correct principles, tools, techniques required to clean and service sensors can be
equipment, techniques and procedures. identified. The procedures for cleaning and servicing
sensors can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1127 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate test equipment and procedures, The correct function/malfunction of sensors, transmitters The procedures for determining correct
sensors, transmitters and final control elements are and final control elements is determined using appropriate function/malfunction of sensors, transmitters and final
diagnosed, within the system or as individual devices, to test equipment and techniques in accordance with control elements can be given. The test equipment and
determine correct operation or malfunction. standard operating procedures. techniques required to determine correct function or
malfunction of sensors, transmitters and final control
elements can be identified.

Criteria 18.62A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation of sensors, transmitters and final control The test results are recorded in accordance with standard The operational specifications of the sensors,
elements monitored and assessed against predetermined operating procedures. transmitters and final control elements can be identified.
specification or manufacturers technical data. Where appropriate, variations of sensors, transmitters
and final control elements from specification can be
identified. The procedures for recording test results can
be identified.

Criteria 18.62A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate test equipment/procedures correct Where appropriate, the apparent fault is monitored in The procedures for monitoring apparent faults detected
operation of sensors, transmitters and final control accordance with standard operating procedures. Where from test results can be given. The test results have been
elements is checked or fault condition identified, localised appropriate, faults in sensors, transmitters and final compared to the sensors, transmitters and final control
and monitored. control elements are identified and localised in accordance elements specification. Any variations between test
with standard operating procedures. results and specifications can be identified. The probable
causes of variations between test results and
specifications can be explained.

Element 18.62A.4 Complete fault documentation and plan corrective action

Criteria 18.62A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions documented or reported Faults and malfunctions in sensors, transmitters and final The procedures for reporting/ recording faults and/or
according to standard operating procedures. control elements are reported/ recorded in accordance with malfunctions in sensors, transmitters and final control
standard operating procedures. elements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1128 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective action planned autonomously or in An appropriate, sequential action plan to correct faults in The action to be taken to return the sensors, transmitters
consultation with appropriate personnel and actioned. sensors, transmitters and final control elements is and final control elements to specification can be given.
prepared. The reasons for undertaking the proposed actions can be
explained. Where appropriate, the persons to be
consulted in planning the corrective action can be
identified. The sequence of actions to be taken can be
given.

Element 18.62A.5 Analyse control loop and localise faults

Criteria 18.62A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering specifications and technical information, All relevant and appropriate specifications and information There is a clear understanding and interpretation of all
control device, signal transmission and final element obtained and/or accessed. specifications and information.
specifications obtained and interpreted. System
specifications, including operational data, and historical
records and trends read and interpreted.

Criteria 18.62A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consultation with system operators and other relevant Appropriate communication occurs and relevant details The reasons and importance for consultation can be
plant personnel is carried out, relevant data extracted and recorded. explained.
documented to standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.62A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation of the system is observed using sound Systematic observation occurs.
knowledge of all external control device characteristics,
controller modes, signal transmission, final control
devices.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1129 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate signal transmission test Correct equipment for the job is selected and properly set The factors that determine the type of test equipment
equipment set up and applied using appropriate up and applied. required can be given.
technique.

Criteria 18.62A.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Circuits and control lines tested to the level necessary to Appropriate and thorough sequential and loop testing The need for systematic and sequential testing can be
detect and localise fault. procedures are used. explained.

Element 18.62A.6 Repair/replace, overhaul sensors, transmitters and final control elements
Criteria 18.62A.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sensors, transmitters and final control elements examined Sensors, transmitters and final control elements are The procedures for marking components for repair,
and verified for replacement, repair or overhaul using checked using appropriate tools, techniques and replacement or overhaul can be identified. The tools,
correct tools/equipment and appropriate principles, equipment and marked for replacement, repair or overhaul equipment and techniques required to test components
techniques and procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. The reasons for marking components
for repair, replacement and/or overhaul can be explained.

Criteria 18.62A.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturers parts lists All relevant supplier catalogues are obtained in The specifications of the component(s) to be replaced
or catalogues to meet specifications. accordance with work place procedures. can be identified. Appropriate replacement components
can be identified from supplier catalogues.

Criteria 18.62A.6.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items obtained. Where appropriate, replacement components are obtained The procedures for obtaining replacement parts can be
in accordance with standard operating procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1130 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.6.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items repaired or overhauled using correct Faulty items are repaired or overhauled using appropriate The procedures for repairing/over-hauling faulty items
principles, techniques, tools, equipment and procedures. tools, techniques and equipment in accordance with can be identified. The tools, techniques and equipment
standard operating procedures. required to repair/over-haul the faulty items can be
identified.

Criteria 18.62A.6.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired, overhauled and replacement items prepared for The repaired, overhauled and replacement items are The preparation requirements of items to be fitted/refitted
refitting according to standard workshop procedures. prepared for fitting/refitting in accordance with standard can be identified. The procedures for preparing items for
operating procedures. fitting/refitting can be given.

Criteria 18.62A.6.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sensors, transmitters and final control elements refitted Sensors, transmitters and final control elements are fitted/ The procedures for fitting/refitting sensors, transmitters
using correct principles, tools, equipment and refitted using appropriate tools, techniques and equipment and final control elements can be given. The tools,
procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. techniques and equipment required to fit/refit sensors,
transmitters and final control elements can be identified.

Criteria 18.62A.6.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refitted sensors, transmitters and final control elements The fitted/refitted sensors, transmitters and final control The preparation requirements of sensors, transmitters
prepared for testing and calibration. elements are prepared for testing and calibration in and final control elements prior to testing and calibration
accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified.

Element 18.62A.7 Calibrate and test instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements
Criteria 18.62A.7.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sensors, transmitters and final control elements calibrated Sensors, transmitters and final control elements are The procedures for calibrating sensors, transmitters and
against appropriate physical standards using correct calibrated against appropriate physical standards using final control elements can be identified. The physical
calibration devices, equipment, techniques and appropriate calibration devices, equipment and techniques standards against which sensors, transmitters and final
procedures. in accordance with standard operating procedures. control elements are to be calibrated can be identified.
The devices, equipment and techniques required to
calibrate sensors, transmitters and final control elements
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1131 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.7.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Zero, span and range tests performed using correct The sensors, transmitters and final control elements are The zero, span and range tests to be applied to the
calibration devices, equipment, principles, techniques tested with respect to zero, span and range using sensors, transmitters and final control elements can be
and procedures. appropriate equipment and techniques in accordance with identified.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.62A.7.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Zero span and range results assessed against Relevant instruction/information sheets are accessed and Specification range for the sensors, transmitters and final
manufacturers instructions sheets. used. control elements can be identified. The test results have
been compared to the specifications and any
deviations/variations from specification can be identified.
The probable causes of any deviations/variations from
specification detected can be explained.

Criteria 18.62A.7.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Zero, span adjustments applied to align sensors, Sensors, transmitters and final control elements are The adjustments that can be made to sensors,
transmitters and final control elements to manufacturers adjusted to specification in accordance with standard transmitters and final control elements with respect to
instruction sheets using correct calibration equipment, operating procedures. zero, span and range can be identified. The procedures
principles, techniques and procedures. for adjusting sensors, transmitters and final control
elements can be identified.

Element 18.62A.8 Return sensors, transmitters and final control elements and control loops to service
Criteria 18.62A.8.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sensors, transmitters and final control elements put into Sensors, transmitters and final control elements are The procedures for recommissioning sensors,
service on conformance to specifications with due regard returned to service in accordance with standard operating transmitters and final control elements can be given. The
to process requirements, safety, procedures. safety procedures to be taken when recommissioning
installation/commissioning procedures and sequence of sensors, transmitters and final control elements can be
operation. explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1132 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.62A.8.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Controller modes and actions adjusted according to Device performance requirements are considered during The performance requirements can be given.
specifications. adjustment.

Criteria 18.62A.8.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Electrical and pneumatic transmission lines tested and Accepted test procedures are used and that any necessary Variation to test procedures to suit different operating
appropriate action taken including the use of signal action is undertaken where required. conditions and parameters can be described.
conditioning devices.

Criteria 18.62A.8.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct procedures are applied in returning All actions are carried out systematically and to identified Variation from given specifications can be analysed and
instrumentation to service, including configuring, procedures. correct action sequence determined.
calibrating, adjusting, tuning and validating system
performance.

Criteria 18.62A.8.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System returned to service in accordance with standard Procedures are followed to ensure correct operation once
operating procedures. returned to service.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1133 of 1445
 MEM 18.62A A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Tasks relate to the use of mechanical,
pneumatic, electrical, electronic (analog and digital) and associated sensing, indication and signal transmitting instrumentation, representing measurement of pressure, temperature,
level, flowrate, weight, density and other process variables. Equipment includes manometers, dead weight testers, vacuum system, power supplies, control valve test beds.
Pneumatic, analogue, digital, test and calibration equipment, utilised for maintenance, calibration and testing of process signal converters and final control elements. Tasks involve
the maintenance, calibration and testing of process signal converters, associated devices, calibration of transmitters to manufacturers' specifications and application requirements
(including flow, level, temperature, pressure), installation and zero checking of transmitters, testing of electrical and pneumatic signal lines. Additional tasks include the
maintenance of control valves (including changing and reseating valve plugs), adjustment of valve actuators (pneumatic, electrical and hydraulic) maintenance and adjustment of
pneumatic, electro-pneumatic and electronic valve positioners and signal converters. Tasks undertaken in workshop, laboratory or on-site environments utilising mechanical and
electrical tools and test equipment such as: spanners (all forms), screwdriver, pliers, multimeters (analog, digital) calibration devices/charts, manufacturers parts lists, catalogues and
instructions sheets. Extends to the installation, maintenance, testing, calibration and commissioning of sensors and transmitters in accordance to specifications with due regard to
process requirements, safety, installation/commissioning principles, techniques and procedures. All codes of practice and legislative requirements adhered to where applicable.
Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering) must also be selected if soldering of components is required to advanced or military specifications, where the reliability of
electrical connections is critical, or where surface mounted devices are being soldered/de-soldered. If diagnosis and repair of electronic equipment is undertaken to component level
Unit 18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) and/or Unit 18.65A (Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the installation, repair and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
overhaul of instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
elements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
knowledge covered by this unit. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1134 of 1445
 MEM 18.63A A Terminate signal and data cables Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.63A A Terminate signal and data cables

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
components
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.63A.1 Identify and mark conductors/cables

Criteria 18.63A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cables and conductors are identified using appropriate Cables and conductors are identified using appropriate The test equipment and techniques to be used to identify
test equipment and techniques. test techniques and equipment in accordance with cables and conductors can be given. The procedures to
standard operating procedures. be followed when identifying cables and conductors can
be given.

Criteria 18.63A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cables and conductors are labelled in accordance with All cables and conductors are labelled in accordance with The labelling requirements of cables and conductors can
standard operating procedures to specifications. specifications and standard operating procedures. be identified. The procedures for labelling cables and
conductors can be given.

Element 18.63A.2 Prepare cable

Criteria 18.63A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Termination requirements and specifications obtained All relevant instructions, specifications and data sheets The termination requirements and specifications can be
and understood. are obtained in accordance with standard operating identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.63A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cable ends prepared to specifications utilising Cable ends are prepared for termination in accordance with The procedures for preparing cable ends for termination
appropriate tools and techniques. specifications and standard operating procedures. can be given. The tools and techniques to be used to
prepare cable ends for termination can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1135 of 1445
 MEM 18.63A A Terminate signal and data cables Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.63A.3 Terminate cables

Criteria 18.63A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cables are terminated to specifications utilising All terminations are made to specifications in accordance The procedures for terminating cables can be given. The
appropriate tools and techniques. with standard operating procedures. tools and techniques to be used to terminate cables can
be identified.

Criteria 18.63A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Terminations are tested/examined for compliance with Completed terminations are tested for compliance to The procedures for testing completed terminations can
specifications utilising appropriate test equipment and specifications safely in accordance with standard be given. The tests to be undertaken can be identified.
techniques. operating procedures.

Element 18.63A.4 Fix/secure cables

Criteria 18.63A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Cables are fixed/secured in accordance with standard All cables are fixed/secured in accordance with standard The procedures for fixing and securing cables can be
operating procedures and specifications, utilising operating procedures. given. A variety of fixing/securing techniques can be
appropriate fixing/securing techniques. identified. The reasons for selecting the chosen
fixing/securing technique can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1136 of 1445
 MEM 18.63A A Terminate signal and data cables Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or as part of team environment. Work undertaken in field or workshop environment. Termination techniques may include solder, crimp, wire wrap,
(non-insulated and pre-insulated), connectors, multi-terminal plugs and sockets, fibre optics, co-axial, terminal blocks etc. Fixing and securing include the use of clamps, cable ties,
bolting, screwing etc. All specifications and procedures are obtained from circuit drawings, data sheets and instructions. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and
legislative requirements. If termination of cables is undertaken to pre-determined specifications and procedures the competency is covered by Unit 3.4A (Electronic/electrical
assembly (production). Where hand held power tools are used, Unit 18.2A (Use power tool/hand held operations). Where higher levels of electrical/electronic measures are
required, Unit 12.4A (Precision electrical/electronic measurement) should be selected. This unit covers all types of signal and data cables, excluding specialist cables.
Types of cables covered include:
Signal cables;
- thermocouple/compensator cables
- transmission cables
- thermoplastic/elastomer insulated/sheathed
- compensating cables
Communication cables;
- telephone
- category 5
- coaxial
- optical fibre
Extra low voltage power and control cables;
- telephone
- category 5
- optical fibre
- thermoplastic/elastomer insulated/sheathed
For termination and connection of specialist cables, see Unit 10.11A (Terminate and connect specialist cables).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of the
unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1137 of 1445
 MEM 18.63A A Terminate signal and data cables Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the termination of signal and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
data cables or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1138 of 1445
 MEM 18.64A A Maintain instrumentation system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.64A A Maintain instrumentation system components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.64A.1 Check instrumentation system components

Criteria 18.64A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components identified correctly. Appropriate system components are located. Various system components can be identified.

Criteria 18.64A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operational function of each The characteristics and operational function of each
system component are understood. system component can be explained.

Criteria 18.64A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component is inspected A range of instrumentation system components is Procedures for inspecting & testing instrumentation
and tested in accordance with standard operating inspected and tested. Standard operating procedures are system components can be explained.
procedures. followed. The equipment required to test instrumentation system
components can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1139 of 1445
 MEM 18.64A A Maintain instrumentation system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.64A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation of each component is assessed against All relevant data sheets and specifications are obtained The specifications of each instrumentation system
specifications. and used to interpret operation of component in component can be identified. Deviations from
accordance with standard operating procedures. specifications can be explained.
Instrumentation components not operating in accordance
with specifications are identified.

Element 18.64A.2 Identify, repair/replace faulty instrumentation system components

Criteria 18.64A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty system components are localised/isolated and the All relevant instrumentation circuits, drawings, The individual components within the instrumentation
malfunction confirmed by inspection & testing using instructions, manuals and data sheets are obtained and system can be identified. The safety procedures to be
instrumentation principles, procedures and safety used in accordance with workplace procedures. The followed when working on instrumentation components
requirements. individual components within the instrumentation system can be identified. Where appropriate, faulty system
are checked for correct operation in accordance with components can be identified.
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.64A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty system components are dismantled and repaired Components are dismantled and repaired correctly. The procedures for repairing instrumentation system
according to manaufacturer's/site specifications and in components can be explained.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.64A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts are selected from manufacturer Correct replacement parts are selected from the Parts to be replaced can be identified. The reasons for
catalogues and listings according to required manufacturer/supplier catalogues. replacing parts can be given.
specifications.

Criteria 18.64A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components are reassembled and tested for Instrumentation system components are reassembled Reassembly and testing techniques are understood.
correct operation and assessment against specifications correctly. Operation and conformance to specifications is
and in accordance with standard operating procedures. confirmed.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1140 of 1445
 MEM 18.64A A Maintain instrumentation system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.64A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of the instrumentation system is The operation of the instrumentation system is checked The correct operation of the instrumentation system can
confirmed to according to standard operating procedure. for conformance to specification in accordance with be explained. Procedures for checking instrumentation
standard operating procedures. can be given.

Criteria 18.64A.2.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures are adopted according Where appropriate, repaired/replaced instrumentation Follow up procedures can be explained.
to standard operating procedures. system components are checked for correct operation in
accordance with standard follow up procedures.

Criteria 18.64A.2.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, service reports are completed Service reports are completed with all relevant detail. Reporting/recording procedures can be explained.
according to standard operating procedures. Reasons for completing service reports can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1141 of 1445
 MEM 18.64A A Maintain instrumentation system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken using predetermined standards of safety, quality and work procedures. Instrumentation system components identified, inspected and assessed using
instrumentation principles to predetermined specifications interpreted from data sheets and circuit diagrams. Repairs and replacements to site or manufacturer's specifications.
Instrumentation system components may include sensors, transmitters, converters, indicators, analysers and controllers associated with determining/controlling density, level, flow,
temperature, composition etc, of a range of materials. Application may include, but are nor limited to, fixed and mobile plant and equipment, marine installations and machine and
process operations. Correct operational function of equipment components confirmed and commissioned in conformance to specifications, using standard operating procedures.
For straightforward removals/replacement of components from an instrumentation system, see Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
instrumentation system components or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1142 of 1445
 MEM 18.65A A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.65A A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 10
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF level IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
components
18.1A Use hand tools 18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment

Element 18.65A.1 Locate fault

Criteria 18.65A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System/equipment functions and principles determined All relevant circuit diagrams, manuals, specifications, The function(s) of the electronic system/equipment can
and understood by reference to equipment manuals, schematics, maintenance records, etc obtained in be identified. The electronic principles utilised in the
circuit diagrams etc. accordance with work place procedures. operation of the system/equipment can be explained.

Criteria 18.65A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Built in test functions run and fault indicators error codes Where appropriate, built-in test functions are run in The procedures for running built-in test functions can be
and appropriate maintenance records checked and accordance with standard operating procedures. Where identified. Errors indicated by built-in devices can be
reviewed. appropriate, built-in fault indicators are located and read/ correctly identified.
recorded in accordance with standard operating
procedures. Where appropriate, error code interpretation
documents are obtained in accordance with work place
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1143 of 1445
 MEM 18.65A A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.65A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault symptoms reproduced where appropriate and Where appropriate, the fault symptoms are reproduced in The symptoms of the fault in the electronic
verified, using appropriate technique. the system and the fault verified using appropriate test system/equipment can be identified. The purpose of
equipment and techniques in accordance with standard reproducing system/equipment fault symptoms can be
operating procedures. explained. The test equipment and techniques necessary
to confirm electronic system/equipment faults can be
identified. The procedures for verifying faults in
electronic system/equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.65A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, faulty equipment isolated and Where appropriate, the electronic system/equipment is The procedures for isolating electronic
removed from system using correct and appropriate tools isolated from the power supply in accordance with systems/equipment can be identified. The hazards
and techniques. standard operating procedures. Where appropriate the associated with electronic systems/equipment can be
faulty equipment is removed from the electronic system identified. The procedures for removing equipment from
using appropriate tools and techniques in accordance with electronic systems can be given. The tools and
standard operating procedures. techniques to be used to remove the equipment from the
electronic system can be identified.

Criteria 18.65A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment checked and tested using correct and The electronic equipment is checked for conformance to The procedures for testing faulty equipment can be
appropriate test equipment and techniques. specification using appropriate equipment and techniques given. The operational specifications of the equipment
in accordance with standard operating procedures. can be identified. The equipment and techniques to be
used to test the faulty equipment can be identified. The
test results obtained are compared with the operational
specifications and the faulty components identified. The
probable causes of component failure can be given.

Criteria 18.65A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component/s identified and/or fault cause isolated. The test results obtained are compared with the
operational specifications and the faulty components
identified. The probable causes of component failure can
be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1144 of 1445
 MEM 18.65A A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.65A.2 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.65A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component removed where required using correct Where appropriate, faulty components are removed from The procedures for removing faulty components from
and appropriate tools and techniques. the electronic system using appropriate tools and electronic systems can be identified. The tools and
techniques in accordance with standard operating techniques to be used to remove components from
procedures. electronic systems can be identified.

Criteria 18.65A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component repaired/replaced in accordance with All relevant suppliers' catalogues are obtained in The procedures for repairing faulty components can be
manufacturers recommended procedures or to standard accordance with work place procedures. Faulty identified. Replacement parts can be selected from
operating procedures. components are repaired/ replaced using appropriate tools suppliers' catalogues in conformance to specification. All
and equipment in accordance with standard operating tools and equipment necessary to repair faulty
procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.65A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired/replacement components fitted in accordance The repaired/replaced components are refitted into the The procedures for fitting repaired/ replaced components
with manufacturers recommended procedure or to equipment using appropriate tools and techniques in into the equipment can be identified. The tools and
standard operating procedure using correct and accordance with standard operating procedures. techniques required to refit the repaired/replaced
appropriate tools and techniques. components into the equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.65A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where appropriate, repaired equipment refitted to system Where appropriate, the repaired equipment is refitted into The procedures for fitting repaired equipment into
using correct and appropriate tools and techniques. the electronic system using appropriate tools and electronic systems can be identified.
techniques in accordance with standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 18.65A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Systems/equipment checked and tested for correct The electronic system/equipment is tested for compliance The procedures for testing electronic system/equipment
operational compliance to specifications utilising correct with specifications using appropriate test equipment and performance can be identified. The operational
and appropriate test procedures and equipment. techniques, in accordance with standard operating specifications of the electronic system/equipment can be
procedures. identified. The test equipment and techniques necessary
to check electronic system/equipment performance can
be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1145 of 1445
 MEM 18.65A A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Diagnose includes working from first principles to
identify non-routine and undefined faults. Work performed in laboratory, workshops or on site environments. Correct and appropriate tool and equipment includes continuity
testers, ammeters, voltmeters, cathode ray oscilloscopes, frequency counters, signal generators, digital probes, pulse generators, hand tools and soldering and desoldering devices
etc. Fault finding techniques include signal injection, substitution, monitoring, heating/cooling etc. Electronic sub assemblies can form part of electronic systems or equipment
including computer, control, safeguarding, monitoring, telecommunications, interface or security equipment etc. Components may include discrete component assemblies or
individual components such as resistors, digital/electronic switching devices, capacitors, etc. All specifications and procedures gained from circuit drawings, engineering data
sheets or manufacturers hand books. All schematics, flow charts, work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements. Unit 5.2A (High reliability
soldering and desoldering) must also be selected if soldering of components is required to advanced or military specifications, where the reliability of electrical connections is
critical, or where surface mounted devices are being soldered/de-soldered. Where termination of cables is involved Unit 10.2A (Terminate and connect electrical wiring) and/or Unit
18.63A (Terminate signal and data cables) must also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
digital systems and equipment or other units requiring the exercise of plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1146 of 1445
 MEM 18.66A A Diagnose and repair microprocessor based equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.66A A Diagnose and repair microprocessor based equipment

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
components
12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment

18.65A Diagnose and repair digital equipment and

components

Element 18.66A.1 Locate faults

Criteria 18.66A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment function and principles determined and All relevant circuit diagrams, manuals, specifications, flow The function(s) of the microprocessor-based equipment
understood by reference to schematics, circuit diagrams, charts, schematics, maintenance records, etc obtained in can be identified. The electronic principles utilised in the
flow charts, equipment manuals etc. accordance with work place procedures. operation of the equipment can be explained.

Criteria 18.66A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Built in test functions run and results interpreted Where appropriate, built-in test functions are run in The procedures for running built-in test functions can be
correctly. accordance with standard operating procedures. Where identified. Errors indicated by built-in devices can be
appropriate, built-in fault indicators are located and read/ correctly identified.
recorded in accordance with standard operating
procedures. Where appropriate, error code interpretation
documents are obtained in accordance with work place
procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1147 of 1445
 MEM 18.66A A Diagnose and repair microprocessor based equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.66A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault symptoms reproduced where appropriate and Where appropriate, the fault symptoms are reproduced in The symptoms of the fault in the microprocessor-based
verified using appropriate techniques. the system and the fault verified using appropriate test equipment can be identified. The purpose of reproducing
equipment and techniques in accordance with standard fault symptoms can be explained. The test equipment
operating procedures. and techniques necessary to confirm
microprocessor-based equipment faults can be identified.
The procedures for verifying faults in
microprocessor-based equipment can be given.

Criteria 18.66A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty or defect component/s identified and/or fault The microprocessor-based equipment is checked for The procedures for testing faulty microprocessor-based
cause isolated. conformance to specification using appropriate equipment equipment can be given. The operational specifications
and techniques in accordance with standard operating of the equipment can be identified. The equipment and
procedures. techniques to be used to test the faulty
microprocessor-based equipment can be identified. The
test results obtained are compared with the operational
specifications and the faulty components identified. The
probable causes of component failure can be given.

Element 18.66A.2 Replace/repair faulty components

Criteria 18.66A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component renewed using correct and appropriate Where appropriate, faulty components are removed from The procedures for removing faulty components from
tools and techniques. the microprocessor-based equipment using appropriate microprocessor-based equipment can be identified. The
tools and techniques in accordance with standard tools and techniques to be used to remove components
operating procedures. from microprocessor-based equipment can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1148 of 1445
 MEM 18.66A A Diagnose and repair microprocessor based equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.66A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component/s repaired/replaced in accordance with All relevant suppliers' catalogues are obtained in The reasons for identifying the faulty component for
manufacturers recommended procedure or standard accordance with work place procedures. Faulty repair or replacement can be given. The procedures for
operating procedure. components are repaired/ replaced using appropriate tools repairing faulty components can be identified.
and equipment in accordance with standard operating Replacement parts can be selected from suppliers'
procedures. catalogues in conformance to specification. All tools and
equipment necessary to repair faulty components can be
identified.

Criteria 18.66A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired/replaced component/s fitted using correct and The repaired/replaced components are refitted into the The procedures for fitting repaired/ replaced components
appropriate tools and techniques. microprocessor-based equipment using appropriate tools into the microprocessor-based equipment can be
and techniques in accordance with standard operating identified. The tools and techniques required to refit the
procedures. repaired/replaced components into the
microprocessor-based equipment can be identified.

Criteria 18.66A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment checked and tested for operational compliance The microprocessor-based equipment is tested for The procedures for testing microprocessor-based
to specifications utilising correct and appropriate test compliance with specifications using appropriate test equipment performance can be identified. The
procedures and equipment. equipment and techniques, in accordance with standard operational specifications of the microprocessor-based
operating procedures. equipment can be identified. The test equipment and
techniques necessary to check the microprocessor-based
equipment performance can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1149 of 1445
 MEM 18.66A A Diagnose and repair microprocessor based equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit refers to situations in which the individual has sufficient information and access to microprocessor components to diagnose the functioning of elements within the
microprocessor. For routine fault finding within microprocessor systems refer to Unit 18.57A (Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment). For diagnosis of analog
components Unit 18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) should also be selected. Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment. Work
performed in workshop/laboratory or on site environments. Correct and appropriate tools and equipment includes voltmeters, cathode ray oscilloscope, frequency counters, pulse
generators, digital probes etc. Fault finding techniques include signal injection, substitution, monitoring, heating/cooling and the use of inbuilt software and hardware diagnostics.
Equipment includes sub assemblies of systems or discrete equipment used in computer, control, safeguarding, monitoring, telecommunication, connection, security etc equipment
and systems. Components may include component assemblies (PCB), etc. or individual components including resistors, capacitors and full range of plug in and solder fixed chips
associated with microprocessor equipment. This unit requires understanding of machine and assembly language and address and bus systems. All specifications and procedures
gained from schematics, circuit drawings, instruction sets, flow charts and data sheets. All work and work practices to regulatory or legislative requirements.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the diagnosis and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
microprocessor-based equipment or other units requiring the exercise plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1150 of 1445
 MEM 18.67A A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi element systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.67A A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi element systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.60A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single & 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation
multiple loop control systems sensors, transmitters and final control elements
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.60A Maintain, repair control instrumentation - single &
equipment components multiple loop control systems
18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation 18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components
sensors, transmitters and final control elements

Element 18.67A.1 Determine control loop characteristics

Criteria 18.67A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Engineering specifications, technical information and All relevant engineering specifications, technical Relevant data on the control loop characteristics can be
historical process, records and trends examined for information, historical records and documents are obtained identified. Where appropriate, trends are identified from
relevant data. in accordance with work place procedures. The the data. The specifications of each system component
specifications of system components and operational data can be identified.
is obtained in accordance with work place procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1151 of 1445
 MEM 18.67A A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi element systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.67A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Consultation with system operators and other relevant System operators and other relevant plant personnel are The procedures for documenting information gained by
plant personnel is carried out, relevant data extracted and consulted with respect to the control loop characteristics. consultation with personnel can be given. Where
documented to standard operating procedures. The information obtained from system operators and other appropriate, relevant data and/or trends are identified.
relevant personnel is documented in accordance with
standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.67A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Programmed maintenance/service reports read and Relevant maintenance and service reports are obtained in Where appropriate, relevant data and/or trends are
relevant data noted. accordance with work place procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.67A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Data is analysed and control loop characteristics The data collected and collated is compared to the
ascertained. operational specifications of the control loop. The
control loop characteristics can be identified.

Element 18.67A.2 Record control loop responses

Criteria 18.67A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using chart recorders and data loggers, control loop The operational responses of the control loop are recorded The operational responses to be monitored can be
responses are recorded in open and closed loop mode. in accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The procedures for recording test and
operational data can be identified.

Criteria 18.67A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Unit tested for tuning using appropriate diagnostic Appropriate diagnostic techniques and procedures are The need to employ appropriate fault-finding and
techniques. used throughout the monitoring and testing process. diagnostic techniques throughout the monitoring and
testing process can be explained. The test equipment and
techniques required to diagnose control loop responses
can be identified. The procedures for diagnosing and
fault-finding control loops can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1152 of 1445
 MEM 18.67A A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi element systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.67A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Diagnostic results analysed against specifications. The collated data is compared with the operational Where appropriate, deviations/ variations from
specifications of the control system. The results of the specification can be identified. The probable reasons for
analysis of collated data and any conclusions reached are any deviations/variations from specification can be
documented in accordance with standard operating given. The procedures for documenting control system
procedures. tests and analysis can be identified.

Element 18.67A.3 Tune control loops

Criteria 18.67A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of control loop device characteristics, The control loop is tuned using appropriate equipment The modes of controller operation can be identified. The
controller mode principles and adjustment methods, and techniques in accordance with standard operating methods of adjusting the controller can be given. The
tuning operations performed using correct and procedures. procedures for tuning the control loop can be identified.
appropriate techniques, procedures and equipment. The equipment and techniques required to tune the
control loop can be identified.

Criteria 18.67A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct and appropriate test and recording equipment The results of tests and adjustments carried out on control The procedures for recording test results can be given.
used for monitoring and adjustment of control loop loop components during the tuning of the controller are The recording equipment to be used to monitor
components during controller tuning operations. recorded using appropriate equipment in accordance with adjustments made to control loop components can be
standard operating procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.67A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Step response - open loop tuning calculations are applied Specified loop characteristics are correctly calculated. The loop characteristics that may be calculated can be
to achieve specified loop characteristics. identified. The procedures for calculating loop
characteristics can be explained. The data necessary to
enable loop characteristics to be calculated can be
identified. The procedures for obtaining the data
necessary for calculating loop characteristics can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1153 of 1445
 MEM 18.67A A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi element systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.67A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Closed loop tuning methods using ultimate sensitivity Specified loop characteristics are achieved through the The closed loop tuning methods can be identified. The
and systematic trials, used to achieve specified loop correct use of closed loop tuning methods. loop characteristics to be obtained from closed loop
characteristics. tuning methods can be identified. The procedures for
obtaining loop characteristics from closed loop tuning
methods can be given.

Criteria 18.67A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct sequence of tuning is used on multi controllers The specified loop characteristics of multi controller The specified sequence of events within the control loop
and/or multi element systems to achieve specified and/or multi element systems are achieved by the can be identified. The procedures for tuning multi
characteristics. application of correctly sequenced tuning procedures. controller and/or multi element systems can be given.

Criteria 18.67A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tune control loops to optimum mode settings utilising The control loop is tuned to specification in each The optimum mode settings for the control loop can be
correct and appropriate techniques, tools, equipment and operational mode using appropriate tools, techniques and identified. The tools, equipment and techniques required
procedures. equipment in accordance with standard operating to tune the control loop can be identified. The
procedures. procedures for tuning control loops can be given.

Element 18.67A.4 Complete service reports

Criteria 18.67A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports completed to standard operating All necessary reports are completed in accordance with The reporting/recording requirements associated with
procedures. standard operating procedures. the commissioning of the process control loop can be
identified.

Criteria 18.67A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow up procedures adopted. The appropriate follow-up procedures are followed. The follow-up actions to be undertaken can be identified.
The procedures to be followed after tuning the process
control loop can be identified.

Criteria 18.67A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process control loop recommissioned to specifications. The process control loop is commissioned in accordance The procedures for commissioning the process control
with standard operating procedures. loop can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1154 of 1445
 MEM 18.67A A Tune control loops - multi controller or multi element systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Tasks undertaken in situ, utilising
appropriate knowledge of control loop characteristics, controller mode principles and methods of adjustment and tuning. Involves the use of pneumatic, analog and digital
electronic test and recording equipment for the monitoring and adjustment of control loop tuning - the recording of control loop responses in open and closed loop modes. Included
is the application of step response - open loop tuning calculations and closed loop, ultimate, sensitivity trials to achieve specified loop characteristics in conformance to
operational specifications. Consultation with process operation personnel for data collection and to ensure plant safety during tuning operations. Extends to the interpretation of
process system configuration data, including process schematics and instrument schematics. Correct sequencing of tuning of multi control loops and multi element systems is
included. The application of fault finding, diagnostic and analytical techniques is included. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and legislative requirements.
Where fault finding is required to electronic component level Unit 18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the tuning of control loops or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1155 of 1445
 MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 5.1A Manual soldering/desoldering - electrical/electronic 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch
components
9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
equipment components
18.57A Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 18.62A Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation
sensors, transmitters and final control elements
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.54A Fault find, test, calibrate instrumentation systems, 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.64A Maintain instrumentation system components
equipment components

Element 18.69B.1 Perform preventative maintenance on process control analysers

Criteria 18.69B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Determine specification requirements from manufacturers' All relevant data sheets, circuit diagrams, engineering The specifications for the process control analyser to be
manuals, maintenance schedules and other relevant drawings, instructions etc. are obtained in accordance with installed can be identified.
documents. workplace procedures.

Criteria 18.69B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using knowledge of process control analyser
characteristics and principles of operation, specification
requirements interpreted, defined and understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1156 of 1445
 MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.69B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance schedules performed on Relevant preventative maintenance schedules for process The procedures for maintaining process control
process control analysers to service and maintain control analysers are obtained in accordance with analysers can be identified. The maintenance to be
analysers at optimum operating condition. workplace procedures. Scheduled/preventative undertaken and the frequency at which process control
maintenance is carried out on process control analysers in analysers are to be maintained can be identified.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.69B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate electrical and electronic test The correct function or the malfunction of process control The procedures for determining correct function or the
equipment, techniques and procedures, specified process analysers is determined using appropriate test equipment malfunction of process control analysers can be given.
control analysers are diagnosed within the system or and techniques in accordance with standard operating The test equipment and techniques required to determine
within the laboratory to determine correct operation or procedures. The test results are recorded in accordance correct function or malfunction of process control
malfunction. with standard operating procedures. analysers can be identified. The operational
specifications for the process control analysers can be
identified. The procedures for recording test results can
be identified.

Criteria 18.69B.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation of process control analysers monitored and Where appropriate, the apparent fault is monitored in The procedures for monitoring apparent faults detected
assessed against predetermined laboratory data and/or accordance with standard operating procedures. from test results can be given.
fault condition identified, localised and monitored.

Criteria 18.69B.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using appropriate test equipment and procedures, correct Where appropriate, faults in process control analysers are The test results have been compared with the process
operation of analysers is tested, and/or fault condition identified and localised in accordance with standard control analyser's specification. Any variations between
identified, localised and monitored. operating procedures. test results and specifications can be identified. The
probable causes of variations between test results and
specifications can be explained.

Criteria 18.69B.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation confirmed. Where appropriate, correct action of the process control
analysers is confirmed.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1157 of 1445
 MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.69B.1.8 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions identified and confirmed. Where appropriate, faults and malfunctions are identified
and confirmed.

Element 18.69B.2 Complete fault documentation

Criteria 18.69B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults and malfunctions documented or reported Faults and malfunctions in process control analysers are The procedures for reporting/ recording faults and/or
according to standard operating procedures. reported/ recorded in accordance with standard operating malfunctions in process control analysers can be
procedures. identified.

Element 18.69B.3 Plan corrective action

Criteria 18.69B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Corrective action planned autonomously or in An appropriate, sequential action plan to correct faults in The action to be taken to return the process control
consultation with appropriate personnel and actioned. process control analysers is prepared. analysers to specification can be given. The reasons for
undertaking the proposed actions can be explained.
Where appropriate, the persons to be consulted in
planning the corrective action can be identified. The
sequence of actions to be taken can be given.

Element 18.69B.4 Repair, replace, overhaul process control analysers

Criteria 18.69B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process control analysers examined or verified for repair, Process control analysers are checked using appropriate The procedures for marking components for repair,
replacement or overhaul using correct tools/equipment tools, techniques and equipment and marked for replacement or overhaul can be identified. The tools,
and appropriate principles, techniques and procedures. replacement, repair or overhaul in accordance with equipment and techniques required to test components
standard operating procedures. can be identified. The reasons for marking components
for repair, replacement and/or overhaul can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1158 of 1445
 MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.69B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturers' parts All relevant supplier catalogues are obtained in The specifications for the component(s) to be replaced
lists or catalogues according to specifications required. accordance with work place procedures. can be identified. Appropriate replacement components
can be identified from supplier catalogues.

Criteria 18.69B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items repaired or overhauled using correct Faulty items are repaired or overhauled using appropriate The procedures for repairing/overhauling faulty items
principles, techniques, tools, equipment and procedures. tools, techniques and equipment in accordance with can be identified. The tools, techniques and equipment
standard operating procedures. required to repair/overhaul the faulty items can be
identified.

Criteria 18.69B.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repaired, overhauled and replacement items prepared for The repaired, overhauled and replacement items are The preparation requirements of items to be fitted/refitted
refitting according to standard operating procedures. prepared for fitting/refitting in accordance with standard can be identified. The procedures for preparing items for
operating procedures. fitting/refitting can be given.

Criteria 18.69B.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process control analysers refitted using correct Process control analysers are fitted/ refitted using The procedures for fitting/refitting process control
principles, tools, equipment and procedures. appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in analysers can be given. The tools, techniques and
accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment required to fit/refit process control analysers
can be identified.

Criteria 18.69B.4.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refitted process control analysers prepared for testing The fitted/refitted process control analysers are prepared The preparation requirements of process control
and calibration. for testing and calibration in accordance with standard analysers prior to testing and calibration can be
operating procedures. identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1159 of 1445
 MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.69B.5 Calibrate and test process control analysers

Criteria 18.69B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process control analysers calibrated against appropriate Process control analysers are calibrated against The procedures for calibrating process control analysers
physical standards using correct calibration devices, appropriate physical standards using appropriate can be identified. The physical standards against which
equipment, techniques and procedures. calibration devices, equipment and techniques in process control analysers are to be calibrated can be
accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. The devices, equipment and techniques
required to calibrate process control analysers can be
identified.

Criteria 18.69B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibrated process control analysers tested using Calibrated process control analysers are tested using The equipment necessary to test calibrated process
appropriate test equipment. appropriate equipment in accordance with standard control analysers can be identified. The procedures for
operating procedures. testing calibrated process control analysers can be
given.

Criteria 18.69B.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration and analysis data collected. All relevant calibration and analysis data with respect to
the given process controller is obtained in accordance
with work place procedures.

Criteria 18.69B.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration and analysis data interpreted and understood. The collected and collated data has been compared with
the operational specifications of the process control
analyser and any deviations/ variations from
specification identified.

Criteria 18.69B.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Calibration and analysis data assessed in accordance The probable causes of any variations/deviations
with manufacturers' data sheets, codes of practice and detected can be explained. Where appropriate, action to
safety procedures. be taken to return the process control analyser to
specification can be identified. The reasons for
undertaking the proposed action(s) can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1160 of 1445
 MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.69B.6 Re-install and recommission process control analysers

Criteria 18.69B.6.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process control analysers put into service to Process control analysers are recommissioned into service The procedures for recommissioning process control
specifications with due regard to process requirements, in accordance with standard operating procedures. analysers can be given. The safety precautions to be
codes of practice, safety, commissioning procedures and taken when recommissioning process control analysers
techniques. can be explained.

Criteria 18.69B.6.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service reports completed to standard operating All necessary service reports are completed in accordance The procedures for reporting/recording service
procedure. with standard operating procedures. undertaken on process control analysers can be given.
The reasons for recording service undertaken on process
control analysers can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1161 of 1445
 MEM 18.69B A Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analysers Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment, using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Tasks performed in laboratory, workshop or
on-site environments using electrical and electronic test equipment for transmission and signal measurement. Extends to the use of liquid analysis devices for the measurement of
ph, selective and specific ions, oxygen and electrolytic conductivity. Included is the use of gas analysis devices operating on the principles of thermal conductivity, thermal
reaction, combustion, paramagnetism, chemical absorption, ionisation, infra-red, ultraviolet, emission or absorption and solid electrolytic conductivity. Tasks involve the use of
hygrometers, wet and dry bulb and calibration of gas cylinders and gas supply equipment, the use of chemical calibration solutions and the use of special calibration devices
specific to chemical detectors. Central to the task is the interpretation of electrical and electronic circuit diagrams and the interpretation of calibration and analysis data and
procedures in accordance with manufacturers' data sheets. Safety codes of practice including the identification, handling and appropriate use of high pressure gas cylinders,
equipment and chemical solutions are included. Unit 5.2A (High reliability soldering and desoldering) must also be selected if soldering of components is required to advanced or
military specifications, where the reliability of electrical connections is critical, or where surface mounted devices are being soldered/de-soldered. If diagnosis and repair of
electronic equipment is undertaken to component level Unit 18.56A (Diagnose and repair analog equipment and components) and/or Unit 18.65A (Diagnose and repair digital
equipment and components) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the maintenance and repair of and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
instrumentation process control analysers or other units requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
been satisfied. involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1162 of 1445
MEM 18.70B B Modify complex electrical circuits and systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.70B B Modify complex electrical circuits and systems

Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
This unit covers the competencies required to check circuits and systems and diagnose faults, modify systems as required and test the modified system. Diagnostic
techniques may include testing for voltage, current, frequency, polarity, phase circuit continuity, insulation resistance, earth continuity etc.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 10.2A Terminate and connect electrical wiring
10.3A Install and test electrical wiring and circuits (up to 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 12.4A Precision electrical/electronic measurement
1000vAC/1500vDC)
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.48A Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits
18.49A Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment which 18.51A Fault find repair/rectify complex electrical circuits
use up to 1000vAC/1500vDC

Element 18.70B.1 Determine system specifications and characteristics

Criteria 18.70B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Complex circuit/system function and characteristics Relevant circuit diagrams, specifications, schematics, The circuit function and characteristics can be identified
determined and understood with reference to circuit engineering data sheets, etc. are obtained in accordance with The appropriate personnel to consult for technical advice
diagrams, specifications, schematics and/or consultation work site procedures can be identified
with technical adviser
Criteria 18.70B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System specifications and operational data obtained, Information and data obtained Information and data can be described and interpretation
read and interpreted synthesised

Criteria 18.70B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Findings are verified using correct and appropriate Circuit/system faults are confirmed/localised using Common electrical test instruments and their application
techniques, procedures, tools and test equipment appropriate test equipment, techniques and tools in can be identified Common techniques for testing electrical
accordance with work site procedures circuits/systems can be identified
Criteria 18.70B.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results are recorded and analysed to determine Faults in the operation of the electrical circuit/system are The recording/reporting requirements for electrical
appropriate modification recorded/reported in accordance with work site procedures circuit/system faults can be identified Appropriate
circuit/system modification can be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1163 of 1445
MEM 18.70B B Modify complex electrical circuits and systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 18.70B.2 Modify circuits and systems as required
Criteria 18.70B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications undertaken as determined to standard Circuit/system modifications undertaken safely in The hazards associated with the modification to the
operating procedures accordance with work site procedures All relevant circuit/system to be undertaken can be identified The
documentation is amended to reflect the modifications relevant regulatory requirements can be identified
undertaken in accordance with work site procedures
Element 18.70B.3 Test modification
Criteria 18.70B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modification tested and monitored to assess suitability The modified electrical circuit/system is tested and The operational specifications of the circuit/system can be
monitored for conformance to specifications in accordance identified That appropriate test equipment and its
with work site procedures Where appropriate, reports on application to the testing of the modified circuit/system can
the suitability of the modifications undertaken are be identified The testing and monitoring procedures for
completed in accordance with work site procedures modified circuits and systems can be identified
Criteria 18.70B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications documented in accordance with standard Reports completed The reporting/recording requirements associated with the
operating procedures modification of complex electrical circuits and systems can
be identified

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1164 of 1445
MEM 18.70B B Modify complex electrical circuits and systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
A systems' circuit is defined as one that interconnects between a number of interdependent apparatus. A systems' circuit is made up of more than one interconnecting circuit
controlling and processing apparatus inputs and outputs. This unit involves demonstration of an understanding of system inter-relationship and dynamics, the implications of
modifications to system and the ability to determine appropriate system modifications. Complex electrical circuits and systems cover industrial control systems, automatic
process machines, material transfer systems, distribution systems, complex control panels etc. incorporating a range of circuit protective devices, relays, timers, transformers,
sensors etc. Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and work procedures. Work performed in situ. Correct and
appropriate tools and equipment may include continuity testers, ammeters, voltmeters, multimeters, tong testers, wattmeters, cathode ray oscilloscope, etc. Diagnostic techniques
may include testing for voltage, current, frequency, polarity, phase circuit continuity, insulation resistance, earth continuity etc. All specifications and procedures gained from
schematics, circuit diagrams/drawings, engineering data sheets or manufacturers' hand books. Modifications are on existing circuits and systems and are limited to replacement of
components, changes to supply and circuitry. All modifications recorded or incorporated into drawings, schematics, etc. All work and work practices undertaken to regulatory and
legislative requirements where required.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered by this unit The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. The candidate will
be required to: - Orally, or by methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units applicable to the During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
safety, quality, communication, materials handling, recording and reporting communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
associated with the diagnosis and modification of complex electrical circuits and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
systems, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites tasks in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification;
have been satisfied. - use accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures.
Tasks involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical
workplace activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1165 of 1445
 MEM 18.70B A Modify complex electrical circuits and systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.71A A Connect/disconnect fluid conveying system components

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 2
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.71A.1 Disconnect fluid conveying components and assemblies

Criteria 18.71A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Safety/risk assessment is carried out, potentially Plant operator or other appropriate personnel consulted to Different sources of stored energy and their applications
hazardous situations/conditions identified and safety ensure isolation has been correctly carried out. Potentially can be described and identified from circuit diagrams and
devices positioned as required. hazardous situations are identified and remedial action manufacturer manuals. Hazardous situations/conditions
taken. Tagging, safety/security lock off devices and can be explained. OHS responsibilities of customer and
signage installed using appropriate techniques and self can be explained. Safety/security lock off devices
procedures. and signage can be identified. The reasons for installing
lock off devices and signage can be explained. The
procedures for installing lock off devices and signage
can be given.

Criteria 18.71A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fluid conveying conductor lay out is noted, recorded and Appropriate note is taken of the layout, if necessary for Procedures to record and label components are
labelled to standard operating procedures. future reference. understood.

Criteria 18.71A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty component/assembly identified using specific Faulty component is located. Trouble shooting techniques understood.
trouble-shooting procedures and reference documents to
identify the fault location.

Criteria 18.71A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fluid conveying components and assemblies Pressures neutralised safely. Component/assembly Techniques, procedures and safety practices
disconnected and removed using appropriate techniques, removed correctly. Safety practices adhered to. understood, including neutralisation of pressures.
procedures, tools and equipment.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1166 of 1445
 MEM 18.71A A Connect/disconnect fluid conveying system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.71A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Open system adequately sealed with standard or special System is sealed correctly. Standard & specific sealing materials and techniques are
purpose sealing materials. understood.

Element 18.71A.2 Obtain replacement parts

Criteria 18.71A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer catalogues Reference materials are used to identify required part(s) Different fluid conveying parts and their function can be
and other relevant reference sources according to explained.
international standards and specifications.

Element 18.71A.3 Test and store components

Criteria 18.71A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fluid conveying assemblies and individual components Correct pressure testing method is followed and safety Techniques and safety practices for pressure testing are
pressure tested according to industry and manufacturer practices adhered to at all times. understood.
standards. Basic functions of fluid power systems understood,
including:
- effects of heat/contamination
- pressures, flow rates and temperatures
- hose strength and size
- effect of media on hoses
- test, operational and burst pressures

Criteria 18.71A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Condition assessed and noted according to standard Correct assessment of condition and serviceability is Criteria for assessment are understood. Storage methods
operating procedure. made. and requirements can be explained.

Criteria 18.71A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components/assemblies cleaned, sealed and stored Components cleaned, sealed and stored correctly. Methods of cleaning, sealing and storing are
according to industry and manufacturer standards.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1167 of 1445
 MEM 18.71A A Connect/disconnect fluid conveying system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.71A.4 Connect fluid conveying components and assemblies

Criteria 18.71A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Connections are checked and prepared for reconnection. Suitability of connection is established. Criteria for checking connection is understood.

Criteria 18.71A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components and assemblies are connected to equipment Connections are established correctly. Techniques for connection are understood.
to specifications using appropriate techniques.

Criteria 18.71A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tagged out equipment, signage and safety blocking All signage & security devices are removed. Procedure for removal is understood.
devices removed according to standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 18.71A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment and fluid conveying systems checked and Test is carried out correctly. Testing procedures are understood. Safety requirements
tested for correct operation according to manufacturer can be explained.
and industry standards.

Element 18.71A.5 Report results

Criteria 18.71A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Reporting and certification procedures followed. Reports completed correctly. Reporting procedures and media for reporting are
understood.

Criteria 18.71A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All relevant information is completed and correct. All relevant information is included and checked. Required information is understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1168 of 1445
 MEM 18.71A A Connect/disconnect fluid conveying system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken using pre-determined standards of safety, quality and work procedures. Fluid conveying components and assemblies identified, inspected and assessed using
fluid power principles or pre-determined specific interpretations from data and circuit diagrams. Repairs and replacement to pressure and suction systems on fixed and mobile
plant/equipment, including marine, heavy plant, manufacturing plant applications. Work undertaken to industry standards and manufacturer specifications. Fluid conveying
components may include high pressure seals, seats, hoses, tubes, pipes, fittings, connectors, adaptors and anchors, and other associated attachments. System applications may
include, but are not limited to hydraulic, pneumatic, water, gas, acids/corrosives/alkalines, abrasives, petroleum and other dry/wet media. System pressures would typically range
from 10.5MPa to 35 MPa, ranging up to 70 MPa. Functional testing of fluid conveying components and assemblies may include in-situ and high pressure test rigs . Reference
material for identification of parts may include manufacturer product catalogues, tables and charts. This unit is not to be selected when Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and
assemble engineering components) or Unit 18.52A (Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant) has already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with fluid conveying systems or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
To undertake the elements of this competency an understanding of involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
basic concepts of fluid power and fluid power components and their
application to fluid conveying systems is required. This is considered
important for the ability to work safely on systems containing stored
energy devices (accumulators) and systems under pressure due to
external forces.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1169 of 1445
 MEM 18.71A A Connect/disconnect fluid conveying system components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.72A A Manufacture fluid conveying conductor assemblies

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 18.72A.1 Manufacture fluid conveying system conductors

Criteria 18.72A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductor requirements identified and appropriate Correct materials/fittings are obtained with reference to Conductor materials and fittings for a range of
materials/fittings selected to suit application. circuit drawings, schematics, reference manuals and applications and media (fluid types) are understood.
equipment specifications.

Criteria 18.72A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductor materials prepared for assembly. Existing conductor prepared and fittings removed, if Methods for preparation of different conductors can be
necessary. Conductor is cut to required length using explained, including hose and pipe assemblies.
appropriate equipment. Pipes bent to basic shapes to
drawing or by copying supplied shapes. Correct fittings
are detected to suit conductors or machined to size, if
necessary.

Criteria 18.72A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Conductors are assembled to specification. Conductors assembled using appropriate equipment and Specifications are understood. Different methods for
techniques. Assembly is checked to ensure specifications assembling hose and pipe assemblies can be explained,
met including swaging, crimping, brazing/soldering.

Element 18.72A.2 Repair faulty conductors and assemblies

Criteria 18.72A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty fluid conveying system conductors dismantled Safety practices are followed at all times. Dismantle and repair procedures are understood.
and repaired to manufacturer/industry standards and
specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1170 of 1445
 MEM 18.72A A Manufacture fluid conveying conductor assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.72A.3 Check/test conductor assemblies

Criteria 18.72A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Operation of fluid conveying components and assemblies Procedures are followed correctly. Operational function and characteristics of fluid
assessed against current industry standards and conveying installation and application category types is
manufacturer specifications. understood. Industry standards and manufacturer
specifications are understood. Procedure to assess
operation is understood.

Criteria 18.72A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty fluid conveying components and assemblies Components identified correctly from circuit drawings, Fluid power conveying principles, procedures and safety
identified and failure/potential to fail confirmed by schematics, reference manuals and equipment requirements are understood.
inspection and testing using fluid power conveying specifications
principles, procedures and safety requirements. All faults/ potential faults are identified.

Criteria 18.72A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Manufactured/repaired components assembled, cleaned, Compliance/non-compliance with specifications is Procedures to assemble, clean, test are understood.
tested and correct operation verified to ensure established.
compliance with required specifications and standards.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1171 of 1445
 MEM 18.72A A Manufacture fluid conveying conductor assemblies Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken using pre-determined standards of safety, quality and work procedures. Fluid conveying components and assemblies identified, inspected and assessed using
fluid power principles or pre-determined specific interpretations from data and circuit diagrams. Conductor assemblies may apply to positive and negative pressure systems on fixed
and mobile plant/equipment, including marine, heavy plant, manufacturing plant applications. Work undertaken to industry standards and manufacturer specifications. Fluid
conveying components may include high pressure seals, seats, hoses, tubes, pipes, fittings, connectors, adaptors and anchors, and other associated attachments. System
applications may include, but are not limited to hydraulic, pneumatic, water, gas, acids/corrosives/alkalines, abrasives, petroleum and other dry/wet media. Correct assembly and
functional testing of fluid conveying components and assemblies may include: hose - skive and measurement tools, crimping and cleaning machines, lathes. Testing may be in-situ
or using high pressure test rigs. System pressures would typically range from 10.5MPa to 35 MPa, ranging up to 70 MPa. Reference material for identification of parts may include
manufacturer product catalogues, tables and charts. Where brazing/soldering is required, Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver soldering) should also be selected. This unit is
not to be selected when Unit 18.55A (Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components) or Unit (18.52A Maintain and repair fluid power systems for mobile plant) has
already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will be provided with: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with fluid conveying systems or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other competencies requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
To undertake the elements of this competency an understanding of involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
basic concepts of fluid power and fluid power components and their
application to fluid conveying systems is required. This is considered
important for the ability to work safely on systems containing stored
energy devices (accumulators) and systems under pressure due to
external forces.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1172 of 1445
 MEM 18.86A A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.86A A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.86A.1 Assess refrigeration system operation

Criteria 18.86A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration system operating principles and The operating principles of refrigeration systems can be
terminology understood. explained. The range of refrigerants available for use in
refrigeration systems can be identified. The
characteristics and properties of each type of refrigerant
can be given. The safety precautions to be taken when
handling or working with refrigerants can be given. The
methods of identifying stored refrigerants can be given.
The methods of identifying the type of refrigerant used
in refrigeration systems can be described.

Criteria 18.86A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
All relevant information is obtained and correctly All relevant drawings, instructions, specifications, The correct refrigerant for the given system can be
interpreted prior to the commencement of work on the procedures, codes and regulations are obtained in identified The precautions to be taken when handling or
refrigeration system. accordance with workplace procedures. working with the refrigerant can be given. The relevant
codes and regulations applying to the given refrigeration
system can be identified. The operating specifications of
the refrigeration system can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1173 of 1445
 MEM 18.86A A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.86A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration system checks are undertaken safely in Refrigeration system is checked safely in accordance with The procedures for testing/checking refrigeration
accordance with standard operating procedures, relevant standard operating procedures, relevant codes and systems can be given. The precautions to be taken when
codes and regulations. regulations. checking refrigeration systems can be identified.

Criteria 18.86A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Pressures and temperatures correctly determined and Pressures and temperatures are correctly determined and The tests to be undertaken can be identified. The
recorded. recorded in accordance with standard operating equipment and techniques to be used to determine
procedures. pressures and temperatures can be identified. The
procedures for recording refrigeration system test results
can be given.

Criteria 18.86A.1.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faults are correctly isolated to component level and The refrigeration system components are checked for The specifications of the refrigeration system
appropriate corrective action determined. correct operation in accordance with standard operating components can be identified. Faulty components can be
procedures. identified. The appropriate corrective action can be
identified. The reasons for proposing the identified
corrective action can be given.

Criteria 18.86A.1.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration system is checked for leaks. The refrigeration system is checked for leaks safely using The procedures for checking refrigeration systems for
appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in leaks can be given. The types of leak detection
accordance with standard operating procedures. equipment/techniques and their applications can be
given. The method(s) of leak detection to be used for a
given refrigeration system can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen method(s) can be explained. The
safety precautions to be taken when leak testing
refrigeration systems can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1174 of 1445
 MEM 18.86A A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.86A.1.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration system is checked for contamination. The refrigeration system is checked for contamination in The causes of contamination in refrigeration systems can
accordance with standard operating procedures. be identified. The procedures, tools and equipment to be
used to clean up contaminated systems can be
identified. The effects of contaminants on refrigeration
system performance can be explained.

Element 18.86A.2 Reclaim refrigerant and system evacuation

Criteria 18.86A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration system is evacuated in accordance with The appropriate tools, techniques and equipment are used The procedures for evacuating refrigeration systems can
standard operating procedures, codes and regulations. to evacuate the refrigeration system in accordance with be identified. The tools, techniques and equipment
standard operating procedures, codes and regulations. required to carry out evacuation procedures can be
identified. The appropriate evacuation procedure for a
given refrigeration system can be identified. The reasons
for selecting the chosen evacuation procedure can be
explained.

Criteria 18.86A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigerant evacuated from the refrigeration system is The evacuated refrigerant is contained/disposed of in The reasons for containing reclaimed refrigerant can be
contained/disposed of in accordance with the relevant accordance with standard operating procedures and the explained. The procedures for storing/disposing of
codes and regulations. relevant codes and regulations. The quantities of reclaimed refrigerant can be given. The procedures for
refrigerant reclaimed from refrigeration systems are recording/reporting quantities of refrigerant reclaimed
recorded/reported in accordance with standard operating from refrigeration systems can be given. The procedures
procedures, codes and regulations. Where appropriate, the for recording/reporting quantities of refrigerant released
quantities of any refrigerant released into the atmosphere into the atmosphere can be given. The consequences of
are recorded/reported in accordance with standard releasing quantities of refrigerant into the atmosphere
operating procedures, codes and regulations. can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1175 of 1445
 MEM 18.86A A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.86A.3 Charge the refrigeration system

Criteria 18.86A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration system is charged with the correct The refrigeration system is safely charged with the correct The procedures for charging refrigeration systems can be
refrigerant in accordance with standard operating refrigerant in accordance with standard operating given. The correct refrigerant for a range of given
procedures. procedures and all relevant legislative and regulatory applications can be identified. The tools, techniques and
requirements. equipment required to charge a refrigeration system with
refrigerant can be given. The precautions to be taken
when charging refrigeration systems with refrigerant can
be given.

Criteria 18.86A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The appropriate lubricating oil is added to the The correct lubricating oil for the given application is The procedures for adding lubricating oil to refrigeration
refrigeration system in accordance with standard added to the refrigeration system in accordance with systems can be given. The properties of refrigeration oil
operating procedures. standard operating procedures and all relevant legislation can be identified. The appropriate refrigeration oil for a
and regulations. range of given applications can be identified. The
reasons for selecting the chosen refrigeration oil can be
explained. The function of the refrigeration oil in the
refrigeration system can be explained.

Criteria 18.86A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigeration system is checked for leaks. The refrigeration system is checked for leaks safely, using The procedures for checking refrigeration systems for
appropriate tools, techniques and equipment in leaks can be given.
accordance with standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1176 of 1445
 MEM 18.86A A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work is undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of safety, quality and workshop procedures. Refrigeration systems may be associated
with refrigeration and air conditioning applications including commercial, industrial and transport. All work is to be undertaken in accordance with all relevant state or territory
legislation and regulatory requirements. Refrigerants include CFCs, HFCs, ammonia, etc.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant data sheets, catalogues, circuit diagrams and engineering drawings. The candidate
individual is familiar with. will be required to: - Orally, or by methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this
unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with other units During assessment, the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the testing, evacuating and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
charging of refrigeration systems or other competencies requiring the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1177 of 1445
 MEM 18.87A A Service and repair domestic and light commercial refrigeration and air conditioning equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.87A A Service and repair domestic and light commercial refrigeration and air
conditioning equipment
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems

Element 18.87A.1 Undertake preventive maintenance checks/adjustment on domestic air conditioning/refrigeration

equipment
Criteria 18.87A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Visual inspection and testing with appropriate test Testing is carried out to accepted standards in a safe Correct test procedures can be identified and described.
equipment is carried out according to refrigeration/air manner.
conditioning principles, procedures and safety
requirements.

Criteria 18.87A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance tasks are performed according All work is carried out to accepted standards and to Frequency and reason for preventative maintenance is
to manufacturers specifications using refrigeration/air specifications where applicable. understood.
conditioning techniques/practices.

Element 18.87A.2 Undertake fault finding on domestic refrigeration/air conditioning equipment

Criteria 18.87A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment components identified correctly. Components on a range of equipment can be accurately Variations in component identities can be explained.
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1178 of 1445
 MEM 18.87A A Service and repair domestic and light commercial refrigeration and air conditioning equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.87A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operation of each component is Operation and characteristics of range if components can
understood. be described.

Criteria 18.87A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component is inspected All refrigeration/air conditioning system components are The procedures for checking refrigeration/air
and tested. checked for correct operation using appropriate tools, conditioning components for correct operation can be
techniques and equipment in accordance with standard given. The tools, techniques and equipment necessary to
operating procedures. check refrigeration/air conditioning system components
for correct operation can be identified.

Criteria 18.87A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against Component performance/operation is compared against Specifications are obtained, interpreted and understood.
specification. specification.

Element 18.87A.3 Repair/replace faulty domestic refrigeration/air conditioning components

Criteria 18.87A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are localised and malfunction Where appropriate, faulty components are identified for The procedures for identifying components for repair or
confirmed by inspection and testing using refrigeration repair or replacement. replacement can be given.
and air conditioning principles, procedures and safety
requirements.

Criteria 18.87A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigerant is removed safely from the system and The refrigerant is evacuated and contained in a safe and Evacuation, containment and storage procedures can be
contained in accordance with standard operating appropriate manner, meeting all necessary requirements. identified and explained.
procedures and regulatory requirements where
appropriate.

Criteria 18.87A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are dismantled and repaired to Repairs are undertaken in a safe and reliable manner using The effect of poor repair practices can be described.
manufacturer's specifications as required. correct techniques and accepted practices.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1179 of 1445
 MEM 18.87A A Service and repair domestic and light commercial refrigeration and air conditioning equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.87A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's Relevant catalogues/lists are used. Process to select replacement parts can be described,
catalogues according to required specifications. particularly when catalogues etc are not available.

Element 18.87A.4 Return to service domestic refrigeration/air conditioning equipment

Criteria 18.87A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are reassembled and tested for correct Assembly and testing procedures are followed correctly Assembly and testing procedures can be identified and
operation and assessed against specification. and thoroughly. explained.

Criteria 18.87A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using domestic refrigeration/air conditioning principles The temperatures, flows, pressures, air properties and The procedures for adjusting refrigeration/air
and system application techniques, correct operation of noise/vibration levels achieved as a result of the conditioning systems for correct operation in accordance
the equipment is verified. adjustments made are recorded/reported in accordance with specifications can be given.
with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.87A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports completed by Where appropriate, authorised out-of specification The procedures for obtaining authorisation of
appropriate designated means. adjustments are recorded in accordance with standard adjustments outside of operational specifications can be
operating procedures. given. The person(s) responsible for authorising
adjustments outside of specifications can be identified.
The reasons adjustments outside of specification may be
made can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment required to adjust the refrigeration/air
conditioning system to specification can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1180 of 1445
 MEM 18.87A A Service and repair domestic and light commercial refrigeration and air conditioning equipment Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies servicing of domestic and light commercial refrigeration and air conditioning equipment and components. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team
environment. Interpret drawings and diagrams of refrigeration and air conditioning equipment, and utilise basic fault finding procedures, service manifolds, and test equipment to
identify and diagnose faults in equipment; and isolate faulty components including control components and rectify common faults. They are able to retro fit existing domestic and
light commercial refrigeration and air conditioning equipment with alternative refrigerants, recondition components, return to service and test equipment, and complete service
reports for administrative action. Where any rectification, modification involves electrical disconnection and reconnection, then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired
equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC) should also be considered. When there is a requirement to remove and replace components by brazing and or silver soldering Unit 5.6A
(Perform brazing and/or silver soldering) should also be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with refrigeration and air and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
conditioning or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1181 of 1445
 MEM 18.88A A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.88A A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning systems and components
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems

Element 18.88A.1 Undertake preventive maintenance checks/adjustment on commercial air conditioning systems and
components
Criteria 18.88A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The temperature, quality, properties and flow of air Appropriate measuring equipment selected and used to The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment for
delivered by the air conditioning system is checked for check that the temperature, flow and quality of the checking air temperatures, air flows, air quality and air
conformance to specification. conditioned air conforms to specification. Appropriate properties can be identified. The appropriate
measuring instruments/equipment selected and used to specifications required for checking air temperatures, air
check that the air properties conform to specification. All flows, air quality and air properties can be identified. The
non conforming measurements are correctly identified. procedures for reporting non conformances can be
given. The air properties controlled by the air
conditioning system can be identified.

Criteria 18.88A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The noise/vibration levels of the air conditioning system Appropriate measuring instruments/equipment selected The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment
components are checked for conformance to and used to check noise and vibration levels of the system required for checking component noise and vibration
specification. components are within specifications. Abnormal levels can be identified. The appropriate specifications
noise/vibration is correctly identified. for checking component noise and vibration levels can
be identified. The procedures for reporting abnormal
noise/vibration can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1182 of 1445
 MEM 18.88A A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.88A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance tasks are performed according The preventative maintenance procedures are performed in The appropriate procedures and sequence for performing
to manufacturer's specifications using refrigeration and accordance standard operating procedures and all preventative maintenance on an air conditioning system
air conditioning principles, techniques. legislative and regulatory requirements. can be identified.

Element 18.88A.2 Undertake fault finding on commercial air conditioning systems and components
Criteria 18.88A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components identified correctly. The system components correctly identified from The specifications and process for identifying system
specifications. components can be given.

Criteria 18.88A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operation of each component is The operational characteristics of the system
understood. components can be given.

Criteria 18.88A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component is inspected The system components are inspected and tested in The appropriate procedures for inspecting and testing
and tested. accordance standard operating procedures. system components can be identified.

Criteria 18.88A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against The operation of each system component is assessed The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
system specification. against system specification in accordance standard operation of system components meet system
operating procedures. specification can be identified.

Element 18.88A.3 Repair/replace faulty commercial air conditioning components

Criteria 18.88A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are localised and malfunction The faulty components are localised and malfunction The appropriate process for localising and confirming
confirmed by inspection and testing using air confirmed in accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be given.
conditioning principles, procedures and safety
requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1183 of 1445
 MEM 18.88A A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.88A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigerant is removed safely from the system and The refrigerant is safely removed in accordance with The procedures and all legislative and regulatory
contained in accordance with standard operating standard operating procedures and all legislative and requirements for safely removing the refrigerant from the
procedures and regulatory requirements where regulatory requirements. system can be identified.
appropriate.

Criteria 18.88A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are dismantled and repaired to The faulty components dismantled and repaired in The appropriate procedures for dismantling and repairing
manufacturer's specifications as required. accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be identified.

Criteria 18.88A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's The procedures for selecting replacement parts can be
catalogues according to required specifications. given.

Element 18.88A.4 Return to service commercial air conditioning system and components
Criteria 18.88A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are reassembled and tested for correct The components reassembled and tested in accordance The appropriate procedures for reassembling and testing
operation and assessed against specification. standard operating procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.88A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The system is charged with correct refrigerant safely in The system is correctly and safely charged with refrigerant The procedures and all legislative and regulatory
accordance with standard operating procedures and in accordance standard operating procedures and all requirements for safely charging the system be identified.
regulatory requirements where appropriate. legislative and regulatory requirements.

Criteria 18.88A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using air conditioning principles, correct operation of the The operation of each system component is assessed The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
equipment is verified. against system specification in accordance standard operation of system components meet system
operating procedures. specification can be identified.

Criteria 18.88A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports completed by Maintenance records/service reports completed in The appropriate procedures for completing maintenance
appropriate designated means. accordance standard operating procedures. records/service reports can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1184 of 1445
 MEM 18.88A A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies maintenance and repair of commercial air conditioning systems and components, which may include heating systems, direct expansion refrigeration systems,
simple air distribution systems, typically used for comfort air conditioning. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team environment and includes interpreting drawings and
diagrams of commercial air conditioning systems. Utilising fault-finding procedures, service manifolds, and test equipment to identify and diagnose faults in systems to isolate
faulty components and rectify common faults return to service, test systems, and complete service reports. Work may also include retrofitting existing commercial air conditioning
systems with alternative refrigerants and reconditioning components. Where the refitting or repair/replacement of components involves the fabrication and installation of pipework
and assemblies Unit 10.10A (Install pipework and pipework assemblies) should be accessed. Where any rectification, modification involves electrical disconnection and
reconnection, then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC) should also be considered. When there is a requirement to remove and
replace of components by brazing and/or silver soldering Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver soldering) should also be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with air conditioning service work and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1185 of 1445
 MEM 18.89A A Maintain and repair large central air handling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.89A A Maintain and repair large central air handling systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components

Element 18.89A.1 Undertake preventive maintenance checks/adjustment on large central air handling systems
Criteria 18.89A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The temperature, humidity, quality, pressure and flow of Appropriate measuring equipment selected and used to The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment for
air delivered to zones by the air handling system is check that the temperature, humidity, quality, pressure and checking humidity, air temperatures, air flows, air quality
checked for conformance to specification. flow of the air delivered to the zones conforms to and air pressure can be identified. The appropriate
specification. All non conforming measurements are specifications required for checking humidity, air
correctly identified. temperatures, air flows, air quality and air pressure can be
identified. The procedures for reporting non
conformances can be given. The air properties controlled
by the air handling system can be identified.

Criteria 18.89A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The noise/vibration levels of the air handling sub Appropriate measuring instruments/equipment selected The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment
systems are checked for conformance to specification. and used to check noise and vibration levels of the sub required for checking sub system noise and vibration
systems are within specifications. Abnormal levels can be identified. The appropriate specifications
noise/vibration is correctly identified. for checking sub system noise and vibration levels can
be identified. The procedures for reporting abnormal
noise/vibration can be given.

Criteria 18.89A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance tasks are performed according The preventative maintenance procedures are performed in The appropriate procedures and sequence for performing
to manufacturer's specifications using appropriate accordance standard operating procedures and all preventative maintenance on an air conditioning system
refrigeration and air conditioning techniques/practices. legislative and regulatory requirements. can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1186 of 1445
 MEM 18.89A A Maintain and repair large central air handling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.89A.2 Undertake fault finding on large central air handling system
Criteria 18.89A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components of sub systems correctly identified. Primary and secondary refrigerant, or air The specifications of and process for identifying primary
distribution/reticulation systems correctly identified from and secondary refrigerant, or air distribution/reticulation
specifications. systems can be given.

Criteria 18.89A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operation of each sub system The operational characteristics of each sub system
component understood. component can be given.

Criteria 18.89A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each sub system component The sub system components are inspected and tested in The appropriate procedures for inspecting and testing
inspected and tested. accordance standard operating procedures. each sub system component can be identified.

Criteria 18.89A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against The operation of each component is assessed against The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
specification. system specification in accordance standard operating operation of the components meet system specification
procedures. can be identified.

Element 18.89A.3 Repair/replace faulty air handling components

Criteria 18.89A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are localised and malfunction The faulty components are localised and malfunction The appropriate process for localising and confirming
confirmed by inspection and testing using air confirmed in accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be given.
conditioning principles, procedures and safety
requirements.

Criteria 18.89A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are dismantled and repaired to The faulty components dismantled and repaired in The appropriate procedures for dismantling and repairing
manufacturers specifications as required. accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1187 of 1445
 MEM 18.89A A Maintain and repair large central air handling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.89A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's The procedures for selecting replacement parts can be
catalogues according to required specifications. given.

Element 18.89A.4 Return to service large central air handling system

Criteria 18.89A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are reassembled and tested for correct The components reassembled and tested in accordance The appropriate procedures for reassembling and testing
operation and assessed against specification. standard operating procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.89A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using air handling principles and techniques correct The operation of each system component is assessed The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
operation of the equipment is verified. against system specification in accordance standard operation of system components meet system
operating procedures. specification can be identified.

Criteria 18.89A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports completed by Maintenance records/service reports completed in The appropriate procedures for completing maintenance
appropriate designated means. accordance standard operating procedures. records/service reports can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1188 of 1445
 MEM 18.89A A Maintain and repair large central air handling systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies maintenance and repair of large central air handling systems, which may include boilers, chillers, secondary refrigeration pumps, dehumidifiers, odour control,
complex filtering systems, multi zone air distribution systems etc. typically used for comfort air conditioning. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team environment, and
includes interpreting drawings and diagrams of large central air handling systems. Utilising fault finding procedures, and test equipment to identify and diagnose faults in systems
to isolate faulty components, rectify faults, return to service test the systems and complete service reports. Where the refitting or repair/replacement of components involves the
fabrication and installation of pipework and assemblies Unit 10.10A (Install pipework and pipework assemblies) should be accessed. Where any rectification, modification involves
electrical disconnection and reconnection, then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC) should also be considered. Where there is a
requirement to remove and replace components by brazing and/or silver soldering Unit 5.6 (Perform brazing and/or silver soldering) should also be accessed. Where there is a
requirement for maintaining/dosing water cooling towers and treatment systems in accordance legislative and regulatory requirements Unit 13.7A (Maintain water cooling towers
and treatment systems) should be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision mechanical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1189 of 1445
 MEM 18.90A A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.90A A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems and components
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems

Element 18.90A.1 Undertake preventive maintenance checks/adjustment on industrial refrigeration systems and components

Criteria 18.90A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The temperature and properties of the controlled Appropriate measuring equipment selected and used to The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment for
medium/s is checked for conformance to specification. check that the temperature of the controlled medium(s) checking the temperature(s) and properties of the
conforms to specification. Appropriate measuring controlled medium(s) can be identified. The appropriate
instruments/equipment selected and used to check that specifications required for checking temperature(s) and
the properties of the controlled medium/s conform to properties of the controlled medium(s) can be identified.
specification. All non conforming measurements are The procedures for reporting non conformances can be
correctly identified. given. The air properties controlled by the controlled
medium(s) can be identified.

Criteria 18.90A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The noise/vibration levels of the industrial refrigeration Appropriate measuring instruments/equipment selected The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment
system components are checked for conformance to and used to check noise and vibration levels of the system required for checking components noise and vibration
specification. components are within specifications. Abnormal levels can be identified. The procedures for reporting
noise/vibration is correctly identified. abnormal noise/vibration can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1190 of 1445
 MEM 18.90A A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.90A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance tasks and plant room safety The preventative maintenance procedures and plant room The procedures and sequence for performing
equipment checks are performed according to safety equipment checks are performed in accordance preventative maintenance on an air conditioning system
manufacturers specifications using refrigeration standard operating procedures and all legislative and can be identified. The procedures and sequence for
principles techniques/practices. regulatory requirements. performing plant room safety equipment checks can be
identified.

Element 18.90A.2 Undertake fault finding on industrial refrigeration systems and components
Criteria 18.90A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components identified correctly. The system components correctly identified from The specifications and process for identifying system
specifications. components can be given.

Criteria 18.90A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operation of each component is The operational characteristics of the system
understood. components can be given.

Criteria 18.90A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component is inspected The system components are inspected and tested in The appropriate procedures for inspecting and testing
and tested. accordance standard operating procedures. system components can be identified.

Criteria 18.90A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against The operation of each system component is assessed The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
specification. against system specification in accordance standard operation of system components meet system
operating procedures. specification can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1191 of 1445
 MEM 18.90A A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.90A.3 Repair/replace faulty industrial refrigeration components

Criteria 18.90A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are localised and malfunction The faulty components are localised and malfunction The appropriate process for localising and confirming
confirmed by inspection and testing using industrial confirmed in accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be given.
refrigeration principles, procedures and safety
requirements.

Criteria 18.90A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigerant is removed safely from the system and The refrigerant is safely removed in accordance with The procedures and all legislative and regulatory
contained in accordance with standard operating standard operating procedures and all legislative and requirements for safely removing the refrigerant from the
procedures and regulatory requirements where regulatory requirements. system can be identified.
appropriate.

Criteria 18.90A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are dismantled and repaired to The faulty components dismantled and repaired in The appropriate procedures for dismantling and repairing
manufacturers specifications as required. accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be identified.

Criteria 18.90A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacements parts selected from manufacturers The procedures for selecting replacement parts can be
catalogues according to required specifications. given.

Element 18.90A.4 Return to service industrial refrigeration system and components

Criteria 18.90A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are reassembled and tested for correct The components reassembled and tested in accordance The appropriate procedures for reassembling and testing
operation and assessed against specification. standard operating procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.90A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The system is charged with correct refrigerant safely in The system is correctly and safely charged with refrigerant The procedures and all legislative and regulatory
accordance with standard operating procedures and in accordance standard operating procedures and all requirements for safely charging the system be identified.
regulatory requirements where appropriate. legislative and regulatory requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1192 of 1445
 MEM 18.90A A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.90A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using industrial refrigeration principles and system The operation of each system component is assessed The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
application techniques correct operation of the against equipment specification in accordance standard operation of system components meet equipment
equipment is verified. operating procedures. specification can be identified.

Criteria 18.90A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports completed by Maintenance records/service reports completed in The appropriate procedures for completing maintenance
appropriate designated means. accordance standard operating procedures. records/service reports can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1193 of 1445
 MEM 18.90A A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems and components Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
The unit applies maintenance and repair of industrial refrigeration systems that may include large capacity (ammonia) plant typically used for product/process
temperature/environment control. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team environment, and includes interpreting drawings and diagrams of industrial refrigeration systems.
Utilising fault finding procedures, service manifolds, and test equipment to identify and diagnose faults in systems to isolate faulty components, rectify faults, return to service, test
the systems and complete service reports. The work may also include retrofitting existing industrial refrigeration systems and reconditioning components. Where the refitting or
repair/replacement of components involves the fabrication and installation of pipework and assemblies Unit 10.10A (Install pipework and pipework assemblies) should be accessed.
Where any rectification, modification involves electrical disconnection and reconnection, then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC)
should also be considered. Where there is a requirement to remove and replace of components by brazing and/or silver soldering Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver soldering)
should also be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
The assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision mechanical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1194 of 1445
 MEM 18.91A A Maintain and repair multi stage, cascade and/or ultra-cold industrial refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.91A A Maintain and repair multi stage, cascade and/or ultra-cold industrial
refrigeration
systems
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 4
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.87A Service and repair domestic and light commercial
refrigeration and air conditioning equipment
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.90A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems
and components
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.88A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning
systems and components

Element 18.91A.1 Undertake preventive maintenance checks/adjustment on multi stage, cascade and/or ultra cold industrial
refrigeration systems

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1195 of 1445
 MEM 18.91A A Maintain and repair multi stage, cascade and/or ultra-cold industrial refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.91A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The temperature, pressure and properties of the multi Appropriate measuring equipment selected and used to The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment for
stage, cascade and/or ultra cold refrigeration system is check that the temperature of the controlled medium/s checking the temperature/s and properties of the
checked for conformance to specification. conforms to specification. Appropriate measuring controlled medium/s can be identified. The appropriate
instruments/equipment selected and used to check that specifications required for checking temperature(s) and
the properties of the controlled medium/s conform to properties of the controlled medium(s) can be identified.
specification. All non conforming measurements are The procedures for reporting non conformances can be
correctly identified. given. The air properties controlled by the controlled
medium(s) can be identified.

Criteria 18.91A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The noise/vibration levels of the multi stage, cascade Appropriate measuring instruments/equipment selected The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment
and/or ultra cold refrigeration system is checked for and used to check noise and vibration levels of the system required for checking components noise and vibration
conformance to specification. components are within specifications. Abnormal levels can be identified. The procedures for reporting
noise/vibration is correctly identified. abnormal noise/vibration can be given.

Criteria 18.91A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance tasks are performed according The preventative maintenance procedures and safety The procedures and sequence for performing
to manufacturer's specifications using refrigeration equipment checks are performed in accordance standard preventative maintenance on an air conditioning system
techniques/practices. operating procedures and all legislative and regulatory can be identified. The procedures and sequence for
requirements. performing safety equipment checks can be identified.

Element 18.91A.2 Undertake fault finding on multi stage, cascade and/or ultra cold industrial refrigeration system
Criteria 18.91A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System components identified correctly. The system components correctly identified from The specifications and process for identifying system
specifications. components can be given.

Criteria 18.91A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operation of each component is The operational characteristics of the system
understood. components can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1196 of 1445
 MEM 18.91A A Maintain and repair multi stage, cascade and/or ultra-cold industrial refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.91A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component is inspected The system components are inspected and tested in The appropriate procedures for inspecting and testing
and tested. accordance standard operating procedures. system components can be identified.

Criteria 18.91A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against The operation of each system component is assessed The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
specification. against system specification in accordance standard operation of system components meet system
operating procedures. specification can be identified.

Element 18.91A.3 Repair/replace faulty components

Criteria 18.91A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are localised and malfunction The faulty components are localised and malfunction The appropriate process for localising and confirming
confirmed by inspection and testing using industrial confirmed in accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be given.
refrigeration principles, procedures and safety
requirements.

Criteria 18.91A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigerant is removed safely from the system and The refrigerant is safely removed in accordance with The procedures and all legislative and regulatory
contained in accordance with standard operating standard operating procedures and all legislative and requirements for safely removing the refrigerant from the
procedures and regulatory requirements where regulatory requirements. system can be identified.
appropriate.

Criteria 18.91A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are dismantled and repaired to The faulty components dismantled and repaired in The appropriate procedures for dismantling and repairing
manufacturer's specifications as required. accordance standard operating procedures. faulty components can be identified.

Criteria 18.91A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's The procedures for selecting replacement parts can be
catalogues according to required specifications. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1197 of 1445
 MEM 18.91A A Maintain and repair multi stage, cascade and/or ultra-cold industrial refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.91A.4 Return to service multi stage, cascade and/or ultra cold refrigeration system
Criteria 18.91A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are reassembled and tested for correct The components reassembled and tested in accordance The appropriate procedures for reassembling and testing
operation and assessed against specification. standard operating procedures. components can be identified.

Criteria 18.91A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The system is charged with correct refrigerant safely in The system is correctly and safely charged with refrigerant The procedures and all legislative and regulatory
accordance with standard operating procedures and in accordance standard operating procedures and all requirements for safely charging the system be identified.
regulatory requirements where appropriate. legislative and regulatory requirements.

Criteria 18.91A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using industrial refrigeration principles and system The operation of each system component is assessed The appropriate procedures for assessing that the
application techniques correct operation of the against equipment specification in accordance standard operation of system components meet equipment
equipment is verified. operating procedures. specification can be identified.

Criteria 18.91A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports completed by Maintenance records/service reports completed in The appropriate procedures for completing maintenance
appropriate designated means. accordance standard operating procedures. records/service reports can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1198 of 1445
 MEM 18.91A A Maintain and repair multi stage, cascade and/or ultra-cold industrial refrigeration systems Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the maintenance and repair of multi stage, cascade cryogenic and ultra cold industrial refrigeration systems. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team
environment. Interpret drawings and diagrams of complex industrial refrigeration systems and utilising fault finding procedures and test equipment to identify and diagnose faults in
systems; and isolate faulty components and rectify common faults. They are able to retrofit existing industrial refrigeration systems, recondition components, return to service and
test systems, and complete service reports for administrative action. Where the refitting or repair/replacement of components involves the fabrication and installation of pipework
and assemblies, Unit 10.10A (Install pipework and pipework assemblies) should be accessed. Where any rectification, modification involves electrical disconnection and
reconnection, the Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000vAC/1500vDC) should also be considered. Where there is a requirement and replace of
components by brazing and/or silver soldering, Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver soldering) should also be accessed.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. The workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
assessment environment should not disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with refrigeration or other units and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1199 of 1445
 MEM 18.92A A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.92A A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial refrigeration and/or air
conditioning controls
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C7 (AQF IV)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.88A Maintain and repair commercial air conditioning
systems and components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.90A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems
and components

Element 18.92A.1 Install/replace refrigeration/air conditioning controls

Criteria 18.92A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration/air conditioning control principles and System/circuit diagrams, system operation and control The system operational requirements and specifications
system diagrams interpreted and understood. data obtained in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The application of common
refrigeration/air conditioning system components and
controllers can be identified.

Criteria 18.92A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control circuit components identified and inspected for System/circuit components are checked/inspected for The system/circuit components can be identified.
compliance to specifications. compliance to specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1200 of 1445
 MEM 18.92A A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.92A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequential installation undertaken according to Specifications addressed and procedures followed during The importance of following installation procedures can
manufacturer's specifications and standard operating any installation work. be explained in terms of control operation, safety and
procedures. reliability.

Element 18.92A.2 Check and adjust refrigeration/air conditioning control sequence and operation
Criteria 18.92A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The temperature, quality, pressure and properties of the Appropriate measuring equipment selected and used to The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment for
air delivered by the air conditioning system is checked for check that the temperature, flow and quality of the checking air temperatures, air flows, air quality and air
conformance to specification. conditioned air conforms to specification. Appropriate properties can be identified. The appropriate
measuring instruments/equipment selected and used to specifications required for checking air temperatures, air
check that the air properties conform to specification. All flows, air quality and air properties can be identified. The
non conforming measurements are correctly identified. procedures for reporting non conformances can be
given. The air properties controlled by the air
conditioning system can be identified.

Criteria 18.92A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Controls operation checked against operational Appropriate test equipment is used to check control and Refrigeration/air conditioning test equipment and
specifications using appropriate test equipment and system operation against specifications in accordance application can be identified.
application principles/techniques. with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.92A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments performed to control sequence to meet/align Where appropriate, the system is adjusted to ensure that The correct operational sequence of the system can be
to operational requirements and specifications. the sequence of operations conforms to operational identified. Typical adjustments to correct sequencing
requirements in accordance with work site procedures. variations from specification can be given.

Criteria 18.92A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications/alterations recorded and reported in Any modifications/alterations to the system are The consequences of not recording/reporting
accordance with standard operating procedures. recorded/reported in accordance with work site modifications to systems can be given. The procedures
procedures. for recording/reporting modifications/alterations can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1201 of 1445
 MEM 18.92A A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.92A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Controls operation checked and returned to service to The operation of the controls is checked for conformance The operational and control specifications can be
specifications. to specification. The system is returned to service in identified. The refrigeration/air conditioning system
accordance with work site procedures. return to service procedures can be identified.

Element 18.92A.3 Fault-find refrigeration/air conditioning control circuits

Criteria 18.92A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control circuit diagrams, data sheets interpreted and All relevant system/circuit diagrams and data sheets are The system components and their specifications can be
understood. obtained in accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.92A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control circuit components identified and inspected. The control circuit components are checked/inspected for
conformance to specifications.

Criteria 18.92A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control circuit traced and action of components The control circuit components are checked for correct
diagnosed to identify and localise faults. operation in accordance with work site procedures.
Components not conforming to operational specification
identified and fault localised in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 18.92A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control circuit parts tested using appropriate test Appropriate tests are conducted on control circuit parts in Common test equipment and its application can be
equipment and application principles. accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.92A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control circuit parts assessed against operational Control circuit parts are checked for conformance to
specifications. specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1202 of 1445
 MEM 18.92A A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.92A.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition localised at the component level. The component(s) not complying with operational
specification can be identified.

Criteria 18.92A.3.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty condition evaluated, root cause analysed and An appropriate corrective action plan is documented in Typical causes of component failure can be given. The
corrective action planned. accordance with work site procedures. causes of the faulty condition in the component(s) can
be identified. Appropriate procedures for rectifying the
faulty condition can be identified.

Element 18.92A.4 Maintain, repair/replace control components

Criteria 18.92A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct maintenance procedures applied according to Appropriate maintenance is carried out in accordance with The appropriate maintenance schedule and procedures
standard operating procedures. work site procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 18.92A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair procedures selected and applied using correct and Where appropriate, control components repaired in Appropriate control component repair procedures can be
appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.92A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items tested, repaired or replaced using sequential Faulty items tested for conformance to specification in Any special installation requirements can be identified.
installation procedures according to manufacturers' accordance with work site procedures. Repaired/replaced Component and operational specifications can be
specifications. components installed in accordance with manufacturers' identified. Typical test equipment and its application can
requirements and work site procedures. be identified.

Criteria 18.92A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturers' Where appropriate, replacement items are selected from
catalogues to meet specification. manufacturers' catalogues in conformance with
specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1203 of 1445
 MEM 18.92A A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.92A.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control components reassembled using appropriate Where appropriate, control components reassembled in
principles and procedures according to specification. accordance with work site procedures.

Element 18.92A.5 Check and adjust sequence of refrigeration/air conditioning controls

Criteria 18.92A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using circuit diagram and refrigeration/air conditioning Circuit diagrams are obtained in accordance with work site Circuit sensors and controllers can be identified.
system control principles, identify sensors and procedures.
controllers.

Criteria 18.92A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Make necessary adjustments to sequence control circuit Where appropriate, the control system is adjusted to The operational requirements/specifications of the
to meet operational specification. ensure conformance to operational specification in system can be identified. Common adjustments that can
accordance with work site procedures. be made to control systems and their effect can be
identified.

Criteria 18.92A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of control circuit checked and The operation of the control system is checked for The correct operation of the control system can be
confirmed against operational specification. conformance to operational specifications in accordance confirmed.
with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.92A.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration/air conditioning controls return to service The refrigeration/air conditioning control system is The procedures for returning to service commissioning
to specification. returned to service to specification in accordance with refrigeration/air conditioning control systems can be
work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.92A.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow-up procedures adopted. Where appropriate, maintenance and/or service follow-up Any maintenance/service follow-up procedures can be
procedures are initiated in accordance with work site identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.92A.5.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service/maintenance report completed to standard Maintenance and/or service reports are completed in The maintenance/service recording/reporting
operating procedures. accordance with work site procedures. requirements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1204 of 1445
 MEM 18.92A A Maintain and repair commercial and/or industrial refrigeration and/or air conditioning controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the repair/replacement of commercial industrial refrigeration and commercial air conditioning controls. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team
environment, utilising predetermined standards of safety, quality and workshop procedures. System circuit components identified, traced, inspected and operational function
assessed and verified using refrigeration/air conditioning principles to predetermined specifications interpreted from data sheets and circuit diagrams. Installation, adjustment,
repairs, replacements and overhauls undertaken to site or manufacturers' specifications, using working and application of principles of domestic refrigeration and/or commercial air
conditioning control sequencing which may include: PLC's, relay logic control systems, unitised/modular sensors, transducers, timers, counters and associated equipment. If the
skills beyond the sequencing of PLC controls are required, then Unit 10.4A(Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters) and/or Unit 10.5A (Commission
programmable controller programs) should also be assessed. Correct operational function of the industrial refrigeration/air handling system controls verified and return to service in
conformance to specifications. Where any rectification, modification involves electrical disconnection then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to
1000vAC/1500vDC) should be considered. This unit should not be selected if Unit 18.93B (Maintain and repair integrated refrigeration and/or large handling system controls) has
already been selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with refrigeration and air and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
conditioning, or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1205 of 1445
 MEM 18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial refrigeration and/or large air handling system controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial refrigeration and/or large air handling
system controls
Band – Specialisation band B Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.90A Maintain and repair industrial refrigeration systems
and components
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.5C11 Measure with graduated devices 9.2A Interpret technical drawing 12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering
components
18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems 18.89A Maintain and repair large central air handling
systems

Element 18.93B.1 Install/replace refrigeration/air handling system controls

Criteria 18.93B.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration/air handling control principles and system System/circuit diagrams, system operation and control The system operational requirements and specifications
diagrams interpreted and understood. data obtained in accordance with work site procedures. can be identified. The application of common
refrigeration/air handling system components and
controllers can be identified.

Criteria 18.93B.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control system/circuit components identified and System/circuit components are checked/inspected for The system/circuit components can be identified.
inspected for compliance to specifications. compliance to specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1206 of 1445
 MEM 18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial refrigeration and/or large air handling system controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.93B.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sequential installation undertaken according to Specifications addressed and procedures followed during The importance of following installation procedures can
manufacturer's specifications and standard operating any installation work. be explained in terms of control operation, safety and
procedures. reliability.

Element 18.93B.2 Check and adjust refrigeration/air handling system control sequence and operation
Criteria 18.93B.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The temperature, quality, pressure and properties of the Appropriate measuring equipment selected and used to The appropriate measuring instruments/equipment for
air delivered by the air handling system is checked for check that the temperature, flow and quality of the checking air temperatures, air flows, air quality and air
conformance to specification. conditioned air conforms to specification. Appropriate properties can be identified. The appropriate
measuring instruments/equipment selected and used to specifications required for checking air temperatures, air
check that the air properties conform to specification. All flows, air quality and air properties can be identified. The
non conforming measurements are correctly identified. procedures for reporting non conformances can be
given. The air properties controlled by the air
conditioning system can be identified.

Criteria 18.93B.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Controls and system operation checked against Appropriate test equipment is used to check control and Refrigeration/air conditioning test equipment and
operational specifications using appropriate test system operation against specifications in accordance application can be identified.
equipment and application principles/techniques. with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.93B.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Adjustments performed to sequence system to meet/align Where appropriate, the system is adjusted to ensure that The correct operational sequence of the system can be
to operational requirements and specifications. the sequence of operations conforms to operational identified. Typical adjustments to correct sequencing
requirements in accordance with work site procedures. variations from specification can be given.

Criteria 18.93B.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Modifications/alterations recorded and reported in Any modifications/alterations to the system are The consequences of not recording/reporting
accordance with standard operating procedures. recorded/reported in accordance with work site modifications to systems can be given. The procedures
procedures. for recording/reporting modifications/alterations can be
identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1207 of 1445
 MEM 18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial refrigeration and/or large air handling system controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.93B.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Controls and system operation checked and The operation of the controls is checked for conformance The operational and control specifications can be
commissioned to specifications. to specification. The system is returned to service in identified. The refrigeration/air handling system return to
accordance with work site procedures. service procedures can be identified.

Element 18.93B.3 Fault-find refrigeration/air handling system control circuits

Criteria 18.93B.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control system/circuit diagrams, data sheets interpreted All relevant system/circuit diagrams and data sheets are The system components and their specifications can be
and understood. obtained in accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.93B.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control system/circuit components identified and The control circuit components are checked/inspected for
inspected. conformance to specifications.

Criteria 18.93B.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control system/circuit traced and action of components The control circuit components are checked for correct
diagnosed to identify and localise faults. operation in accordance with work site procedures.
Components not conforming to operational specification
identified and fault localised in accordance with work site
procedures.

Criteria 18.93B.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control system/circuit parts tested using appropriate test Appropriate tests are conducted on control circuit parts in Common test equipment and its application can be
equipment and application principles. accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.93B.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Control system/circuit parts assessed against operational Control circuit parts are checked for conformance to
specification. specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1208 of 1445
 MEM 18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial refrigeration and/or large air handling system controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.93B.3.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fault condition localised at the component level. The component(s) not complying with operational
specification can be identified.

Criteria 18.93B.3.7 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty condition evaluated, root cause analysed and An appropriate corrective action plan is documented in Typical causes of component failure can be given. The
corrective action planned. accordance with work site procedures. causes of the faulty condition in the component(s) can
be identified. Appropriate procedures for rectifying the
faulty condition can be identified.

Element 18.93B.4 Maintain, repair/replace system control components

Criteria 18.93B.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct maintenance procedures applied according to Appropriate maintenance is carried out in accordance with The appropriate maintenance schedule and procedures
standard operating procedures. work site procedures. can be identified.

Criteria 18.93B.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Repair procedures selected and applied using correct and Where appropriate, control components repaired in Appropriate control component repair procedures can be
appropriate techniques, tools and equipment. accordance with work site procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.93B.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty items tested, repaired or replaced using sequential Faulty items tested for conformance to specification in Any special installation requirements can be identified.
installation procedures according to manufacturer's accordance with work site procedures. Repaired/replaced Component and operational specifications can be
specifications. components installed in accordance with manufacturers' identified. Typical test equipment and its application can
requirements and work site procedures. be identified.

Criteria 18.93B.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement items selected from manufacturer's Where appropriate, replacement items are selected from
catalogues to meet specifications. manufacturers' catalogues in conformance with
specifications.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1209 of 1445
 MEM 18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial refrigeration and/or large air handling system controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.93B.4.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
System control components reassembled using Where appropriate, control components reassembled in
appropriate principles and procedures according to accordance with work site procedures.
specification.

Element 18.93B.5 Check and adjust sequence of refrigeration/air handling system controls
Criteria 18.93B.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using circuit diagram and refrigeration/air handling Circuit diagrams are obtained in accordance with work site Circuit sensors and controllers can be identified.
system control principles, identify circuit sensors and procedures.
controllers.

Criteria 18.93B.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Make necessary adjustments to sequence system control Where appropriate, the control system is adjusted to The operational requirements/specifications of the
circuit to meet operational specification. ensure conformance to operational specification in system can be identified. Common adjustments that can
accordance with work site procedures. be made to control systems and their effect can be
identified.

Criteria 18.93B.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of system control circuit checked and The operation of the control system is checked for The correct operation of the control system can be
confirmed against operational specification. conformance to operational specifications in accordance confirmed.
with work site procedures.

Criteria 18.93B.5.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Refrigeration/air handling system controls commissioned The refrigeration/air handling control system is returned to The procedures for returning to service commissioning
to specification. service to specification in accordance with work site refrigeration/air handling control systems can be
procedures. identified.

Criteria 18.93B.5.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate follow-up procedures adopted. Where appropriate, maintenance and/or service follow-up Any maintenance/service follow-up procedures can be
procedures are initiated in accordance with work site identified.
procedures.

Criteria 18.93B.5.6 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Service/maintenance report completed to standard Maintenance and/or service reports are completed in The maintenance/service recording/reporting
operating procedures. accordance with work site procedures. requirements can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1210 of 1445
 MEM 18.93B A Maintain and repair integrated industrial refrigeration and/or large air handling system controls Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the repair/replacement of integrated industrial refrigeration and air handling systems controls. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team environment.
Utilising predetermined standards of safety, quality and workshop procedures. System circuit components identified, traced, inspected and operational function assessed and
verified using refrigeration/air conditioning principles to predetermined specifications interpreted for data sheets and circuit diagrams. Installation, adjustment, repairs, replacements
and overhauls undertaken to site or manufacturers specification, using working and application of principles of industrial refrigeration and/or air handling systems control
sequencing which may include: PLC's relay logic control systems, unitised/modular sensors, transducers, timers, counters and associated equipment. If the skills beyond the
sequencing of PLC controls are required. Then Unit 10.4A (Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters) and/or Unit 10.5A (Commission programmable
controller programs) should also be assessed. Correct operational function of the industrial refrigeration/air handling system controls verified and commissioned in conformance to
specifications. Where any rectification, modification involves electrical disconnection and reconnection, then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to
1000vAC/1500vDC) should also be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
candidate. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with precision mechanical and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
measurements or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1211 of 1445
 MEM 18.94A A Service and repair of commercial refrigeration Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 18.94A A Service and repair of commercial refrigeration

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Maintenance & diagnostics Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
12.2A Electrical/electronic measurement 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.55A Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering 18.86A Test, evacuate and charge refrigeration systems
components

Element 18.94A.1 Undertake preventive maintenance checks/adjustment on commercial refrigeration equipment

Criteria 18.94A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Visual inspection and testing with appropriate test Testing is carried out to accepted standards in a safe Correct test procedures can be identified and described.
equipment is carried out according to refrigeration manner.
principles, procedures and safety requirements.

Criteria 18.94A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preventative maintenance tasks as performed according All work is carried out to accepted standards and to Frequency and reason for preventative maintenance is
to manufacturer's specifications using refrigeration specifications where applicable. explained.
techniques and practices.

Element 18.94A.2 Undertake fault finding on commercial refrigeration equipment

Criteria 18.94A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment components identified correctly. Components on a range of equipment can be accurately Variations in component identities can be explained
identified.

Criteria 18.94A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The characteristics and operation of each component is Operation and characteristics of range if components can
understood. be described

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1212 of 1445
 MEM 18.94A A Service and repair of commercial refrigeration Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 18.94A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The operational function of each component is inspected All refrigeration system components are checked for The procedures for checking refrigeration components
and tested. correct operation using appropriate tools, techniques and for correct operation can be given. The tools, techniques
equipment in accordance with standard operating and equipment necessary to check refrigeration system
procedures. components for correct operation can be identified.

Criteria 18.94A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct operation of each component assessed against Component performance/operation is compared against Specifications are obtained, interpreted and understood.
specification. specification.

Element 18.94A.3 Repair/replace commercial refrigeration components

Criteria 18.94A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are localised and malfunction Where appropriate, faulty components are identified for The procedures for identifying components for repair or
confirmed by inspection and testing using refrigeration repair or replacement. replacement can be given.
principles, procedures and safety requirements.

Criteria 18.94A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
The refrigerant is removed safely from the system and The refrigerant is evacuated and contained in a safe and Evacuation, containment and storage procedures can be
contained in accordance with standard operating appropriate manner, meeting all necessary requirements. identified and explained.
procedures and regulatory requirements where
appropriate.

Criteria 18.94A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Faulty components are dismantled and repaired to Repairs are undertaken in a safe and reliable manner using The effect of poor repair practices can be described.
manufacturer's specifications as required. correct techniques and accepted practices.

Criteria 18.94A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Replacement parts selected from manufacturer's Relevant catalogues/lists are used particularly when Process to select replacement parts can be described.
catalogues according to required specifications. catalogues, etc., are not available.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1213 of 1445
 MEM 18.94A A Service and repair of commercial refrigeration Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 18.94A.4 Return to service commercial refrigeration equipment

Criteria 18.94A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Components are reassembled and tested for correct Assembly and testing procedures are followed correctly Assembly and testing procedures can be identified and
operation and assessed against specification. and thoroughly. explained.

Criteria 18.94A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Using domestic refrigeration principles and system The temperatures, flows, pressures, air properties and The procedures for adjusting refrigeration systems for
application techniques, correct operation of the noise/vibration levels achieved as a result of the correct operation in accordance with specifications can
equipment is verified. adjustments made are recorded/reported in accordance be given.
with standard operating procedures.

Criteria 18.94A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Maintenance records/service reports completed by Where appropriate, authorised out-of-specification The procedures for obtaining authorisation of
appropriate designated means. adjustments are recorded in accordance with standard adjustments outside of operational specifications can be
operating procedures. given. The person(s) responsible for authorising
adjustments outside of specifications can be identified.
The reasons adjustments outside of specification may be
made can be given. The tools, techniques and
equipment required to adjust the refrigeration system to
specification can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1214 of 1445
 MEM 18.94A A Service and repair of commercial refrigeration Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to servicing and repairing commercial and supermarket refrigeration equipment and components. Work is carried out autonomously or in a team environment.
Interpret drawings and diagrams of refrigeration equipment, and utilise basic fault finding procedures, service manifolds, and test equipment to identify and diagnose faults in
equipment; and isolate faulty components including control components and rectify common faults. They are able to retro fit existing commercial refrigeration equipment with
alternative refrigerants, recondition components, return to service and test equipment, and complete service reports for administrative action. Where any rectification, modification
involves electrical disconnection and reconnection, then Unit 18.49A (Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000v AC and 1500v DC) should also be considered.
When there is a requirement to remove and replace components by brazing and or silver soldering Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing and/or silver soldering) should also be accessed.
Where detailed maintenance is carried out on control systems, Unit 18.57A (Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment) should also be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
both on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
team. The assessment environment should not disadvantage the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference manuals. The candidate will be required to: -
candidate. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with refrigeration units requiring and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable time frames relating to typical workplace
activities.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1215 of 1445
 MEM 19.1A A Jewellery metal casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.1A A Jewellery metal casting

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass

Element 19.1A.1 Prepare metals for casting

Criteria 19.1A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Metals and alloys selected in appropriate proportions. Jewellery metals and alloys are identified for given job Procedures for identifying jewellery metals and alloys
Correct proportions/quantity of metals selected for can be given. Procedures for calculating
appropriate alloys. proportions/quantities of alloys can be given for
jewellery metals. Properties of jewellery metals in relation
to casting are understood.

Criteria 19.1A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Metals/alloys are weighed out correctly. Metals/alloys are weighed out in correct Procedures for weighing out metals/alloys in correct
proportions/sequence according to standard procedures. proportions/sequence can be given.

Criteria 19.1A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Relevant data is recorded. All applicable data is recorded according to standard Procedures for recording all data can be given and
operating procedure. accessed as reference material.

Element 19.1A.2 Conduct pre-casting operations

Criteria 19.1A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment is prepared according to standard operation Equipment is balanced/set according to standard Procedures for preparing equipment at all process stages
procedure. operating procedures. can be identified. Results of poor work practices can be
given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1216 of 1445
 MEM 19.1A A Jewellery metal casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.1A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Inert gas supply/delivery and vacuum systems checked, Inert gas supply/delivery, vacuum systems, and The procedures for checking and maintaining inert gas
if applicable. graphite/silicone seals checked, checked according to supply/delivery seals and vacuum systems can be given.
standard operating procedure and manufacturers
specifications.

Criteria 19.1A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Preheating/glazing carried out if applicable. Crucible pre-heated/glazed and thermocouple/heat Procedures for pre-heating/glazing of melting crucible
register/control device tested, if applicable. All and testing of heat register/control device can be given.
systems/devices checked according to standard operating
procedure and manufacturer specifications.

Criteria 19.1A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Temperature of invested flask is maintained. Invested flask maintained at appropriate temperature after Procedures for maintaining flask temp can be identified
burn out. for various situations and flask combinations.

Element 19.1A.3 Melt jewellery metal

Criteria 19.1A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Protective coating applied to jewellery metal as Appropriate coating is applied in accordance with Procedures for applying protective coating to jewellery
appropriate. standard operating procedures. metal can be identified, and reasons for its use can be
given.

Criteria 19.1A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Jewellery metal is heated. Metal is heated by appropriate means, following standard Procedures for heating jewellery metals of various
operating procedures/equipment manuals. qualities and quantities can be identified.

Criteria 19.1A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Jewellery metal casting temperature is achieved. Metal is raised to casting temperature in accordance Procedures for achieving casting temperatures can be
standard operating procedures, and Occupational Health identified for a range of metals.
and Safety requirements.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1217 of 1445
 MEM 19.1A A Jewellery metal casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.1A.4 Cast metals

Criteria 19.1A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Burn-out flask is positioned correctly. Burn-out flask is placed safely in casting position in Procedures for safe and secure placement of burn-out
accordance with standard operating procedure. flasks in the casting position can be given for different
size flasks.

Criteria 19.1A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Molten metal tapped following. Metal is poured/dropped/released in accordance with Molten jewellery metal status and properties can be
standard operating procedures. Safe and accurate flow of given Relevant Occupational Health and Safety issues
molten metal is ensured. can be explained.

Criteria 19.1A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Allowance made for adequate solidification time. Appropriate time frame observed for solidification in The processes for confirming stabilisation and
accordance with standard operating procedure. solidification of jewellery metals can be given for various
flask sizes and applications.

Criteria 19.1A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Furnace is operated in accordance with work site Furnace is started, monitored and shut down in Furnace start up and shut down procedures can be
procedures. accordance with work site procedures and occupational given. Optimum operating temperatures can be given.
health and safety requirements and regulations. Safety clothing/apparatus and their applications can be
identified. Hazards associated with feeding and removing
materials can be identified. Hazard prevention and
emergency procedures can be given.

Element 19.1A.5 Perform post-casting operations

Criteria 19.1A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Casting flask removed and stored in a safe manner. Flask is safely removed and stored in accordance with The procedures for safe handling and storage of casting
standard operating procedure. flask can be identified. The results of inappropriate
action at this stage can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1218 of 1445
 MEM 19.1A A Jewellery metal casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.1A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Casting materials/consumables cleaned/stored/disposed Investment materials removed, trees cleaned, and cleaning Procedures for the safe handling and storage of all
as appropriate. agents are stored and/or disposed of following safety materials can be demonstrated, and the
precautions/Occupational Health and Safety requirements hazards/precautions can be explained in each case.
and in standard operating procedure.

Criteria 19.1A.5.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work area and equipment maintained. Work area and equipment cleaned of investment, Procedures for appropriate cleaning work areas and
chemicals and cleaning agent residue. equipment can be given and the consequences of poor
standards can be explained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1219 of 1445
 MEM 19.1A A Jewellery metal casting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers jewellery metal casting, primarily by the ‘lost wax’ method of investment casting, but may include cuttlebone and sand processes as extensions. All work
undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined specifications and standards of quality, safety. Casting metals may include gold, platinum, palladium,
silver, copper, and their alloys. Processes include centrifugal and vacuum assist. Heating methods may include resistance/induction coils, and hand held torches fuelled by a
variety of combinations of gas/propane/acetylene/air/oxygen. Protective coatings may include fluxes and inert gases.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit should be assessed on the job. The competencies covered The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
by this unit would be demonstrated by an individual working alone or required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
as part of a team. The assessment environment should not workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
disadvantage the candidate. Evidence for assessment should be relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
accompanied by appropriate evidence that supports the gaining of Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
underpinning knowledge. Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with the “lost wax’ casting and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1220 of 1445
 MEM 19.2A A Prepare jewellery illustrations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.2A A Prepare jewellery illustrations

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch

Element 19.2A.1 Identify illustration requirements

Criteria 19.2A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Requirements and purpose of illustration determined from Customer and/or work instructions and associated Common work specifications and documents relating to
customer and/or work instructions and associated documents interpreted and illustration requirements work instruction can be identified. Various sources of
documents. determined. Sufficient information is obtained to determine information can be identified.
customer requirements.

Criteria 19.2A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Required data identified and collected. All data necessary to produce the drawing is identified Data for producing illustrations can be given.
and collected. Data is collected for emphasis and priority
according to illustration requirements and is identified,
collected and collated to match required outcomes.

Criteria 19.2A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate equipment is selected. Equipment is appropriate to the illustrating method Equipment can be identified and uses given. Storage and
chosen and requirements. Equipment is checked, maintenance requirements of equipment can be given.
maintained and stored according to standards operating The working parameters of the selected equipment can
procedure. be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1221 of 1445
 MEM 19.2A A Prepare jewellery illustrations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.2A.2 Prepare or modify drawing

Criteria 19.2A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Illustrations are consistent with enterprise standard Illustrations are produced/modified/supplied according to Jewellery metal/fabrication for preparation of the
operating procedures. standards operating procedures. Illustrations comply with illustration is understood. The key aspects of the
stated requirements and are appropriate for practical illustration can be identified. Working properties of
application. jewellery metals used in practical manufacturing
applications can be identified. Communication of
construction, polishing and stone setting as through
illustration is understood.

Criteria 19.2A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Illustration is rendered if applicable. Rendering requirements are identified Illustration is Rendering process is understood. Techniques and tools
rendered to specification. Colour, contour, for the creation of illustration effects can be given.
shadow/highlight techniques are used for emphasis to
display jewellery design concept.

Criteria 19.2A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Illustration and accompanying documentation approved Completed drawing and all accompanying specifications Procedure for approving illustrations can be given.
in accordance with standard operating procedures. are checked/approved in accordance with standard Appropriate authority for confirming
operating procedures. Modifications/corrections data/specifications/illustration can be identified.
undertaken to ensure conformance to specifications.

Element 19.2A.3 Filing/storage of illustration

Criteria 19.2A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Working and reference drawings/illustrations are Recording/storage and retrieval systems are used in Appropriate methods for storage and retrieval can be
used/stored/filed/copied/issued in accordance with accordance with standard operating procedures. identified. Systems usage procedures can be given.
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1222 of 1445
 MEM 19.2A A Prepare jewellery illustrations Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to manual and electronic procedures and equipment. Where a CAD system is used, the appropriate units should also be selected. Where interpersonal and
customer/client service skills are required, the appropriate units should be considered. Where computerised storage and retrieval systems are used Unit 2.9C10 (Perform computer
operations) should also be selected. Specifications may be obtained from design information, customer ideas/concepts/expectations/requirements, sketches, preliminary layouts.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

Competency in this unit requires the production of a jewellery During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
illustration that will ensure practical application of the elements of communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
construction and metal properties resulting in an item faithful to the and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
original design concept/specifications. This unit could be assessed plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
in conjunction with any other units addressing the safety, quality, accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
communication, materials handling, recording and reporting accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
associated with preparing jewellery illustrations or other units involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit.
Knowledge and experience in construction and polishing techniques
are considered essential in order to achieve competency in this unit
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have
been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1223 of 1445
 MEM 19.3A A Handle gem materials (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.3A A Handle gem materials (basic)

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 2

Element 19.3A.1 Handle gem materials

Criteria 19.3A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Working area set out in accordance with standard Gemstone observation area is prepared according to Requirements for setting up appropriate gem observation
operating procedure. standard operating procedure. area can be identified.

Criteria 19.3A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools selected to observe material. Appropriate observation tools/equipment selected Tools and equipment for observing the
according to standard operating procedure. properties/condition of materials can be identified and
their uses given. Function and limitations of selected
equipment can be given.

Criteria 19.3A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Observation carried out according to standard operating Tools/equipment and materials are used according to Techniques/observations that may be used/made with
procedure. standard operating procedure, occupational health and selected tools can be given.
safety and manufacturers specifications.

Criteria 19.3A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Correct handling procedure is identified. Gem materials are handled in accordance with the Specific handling procedures and measures for different
condition and properties identified. gem materials can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1224 of 1445
 MEM 19.3A A Handle gem materials (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.3A.2 Record and compare general observations

Criteria 19.3A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Techniques and results are recorded. Standard recording processes are followed All Recording processes can be identified. The type of
appropriate information is recorded. information to be recorded can be identified. The reasons
why information is relevant can be given.

Criteria 19.3A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results are interpreted. Results are collated and compared with reference Location of reference materials can be identified.
documentation charts/lists/graphs/diagrams, and all other Application of knowledge gained from
control material. Reference materials are used according to resource/observations can be applied to reach a
workshop practice. Results are collated according to conclusion.
standard operating procedures.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1225 of 1445
 MEM 19.3A A Handle gem materials (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the skills and knowledge for basic handling and observation of gem materials, where the application of skills and knowledge may not be part of a designated
gemmological work environment. Observations are primarily aimed at recognition of the properties of gem materials that may affect the way in which they are to be handled in the
workplace. Included in this unit is a basic understanding of gemology and gemstone types (including diamonds), nomenclature relative to gemstones and diamonds and the use of
the basic equipment required to observe the condition and features of gemstones. The basic equipment includes, but is not limited to, tweezers and 10x loupe. The range of
gemstones includes selections of all the major gemstone materials as well as composite, synthetic and imitation gemstones. All work undertaken autonomously or within a team
environment using predetermined specifications and standards of quality, safety.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

The underpinning knowledge required to complete this competency During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
will cover common workplace handling and storage of gemstone communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
materials. All knowledge must be applied to practical applications and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
such as parcel wear, reaction to heat, liquids, applied abrasive actions plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
and ultra-sonic cleaning effects. This unit could be assessed in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
conjunction with any other units addressing the safety, quality, accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
communication, materials handling, recording and reporting involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
associated with basic gemstone handling or other units requiring the
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Knowledge
and experience in construction and polishing techniques are
considered essential in order to achieve competency in this unit
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have
been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1226 of 1445
 MEM 19.3A A Handle gem materials (basic) Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.4A A Handle and examine gemstone materials

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
19.3A Handle gem materials (basic)

Element 19.4A.1 Prepare equipment for gemstone examination

Criteria 19.4A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate examination methods and equipment Appropriate procedures and equipment are selected for Different methods for examination of gem materials in
selected. examination of gem materials. relation to the properties and features that may affect
specific materials during jewellery manufacture, repair or
alteration can be given. Equipment required for
examination and the function of each can be given.

Criteria 19.4A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Equipment and specimen/s prepared. Equipment is prepared, pre-set, balanced, calibrated, Limitations of the selected equipment/methods can be
levelled according to supplier/manufacturer specifications. given. Standard operating procedures and
Specimen is cleaned according to workplace procedures. supplier/manufacturer specifications are understood.

Element 19.4A.2 Perform gemstone examinations

Criteria 19.4A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Physical and optical properties of gem materials are Equipment is used according to manuals and standard The procedures for correct use of the selected equipment
observed. operating procedures. All work is performed in accordance can be given. Definitions of processes and features can
with standard operating procedures and OH&S. All be given. Physical and optical properties of relevant
relevant physical and optical properties of gemstone are gemstones can be given. The requirements for
identified. occupational health and safety can be identified. The
effects of inadequate housekeeping and workplace
procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1227 of 1445
 MEM 19.4A A Handle and examine gemstone materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.4A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Results recorded and verified. Results are recorded and compared with known control The process for verifying results can be given. Resource
items/charts/lists/graphs/diagrams and resource materials materials can be identified and accessed.
Outcomes are verified.

Element 19.4A.3 Handle gem materials

Criteria 19.4A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate handling measures are identified. Appropriate handling measures and precautions are Handling measures and precautions for specific gem
selected in relation to given gem materials, work processes materials during jewellery manufacture, repair or
and tools/equipment. alteration can be given.

Criteria 19.4A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Gem materials are handled to minimise risk of damage. Selected handling measures and precautions are applied Specific handling measures and precautions used during
correctly during given jobs. given jobs can be explained.

Element 19.4A.4 Investigate and report examination results

Criteria 19.4A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Examination results prepared and recorded. Format/documentation of results is prepared according to Evidence used in support of conclusions can be
standard operating procedures. Results are interpreted and explained Terminology definitions can be given.
findings verified by independent source, where required. Limitations/errors in process/methods can be identified.
Sufficient evidence to support conclusions is presented. Sources of independent verification can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1228 of 1445
 MEM 19.4A A Handle and examine gemstone materials Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the knowledge and skills required to handle specific gem materials during jewellery manufacture, repair or alteration, through defining the properties and condition
of gem materials (including diamonds) that may affect handling in the workplace. The unit primarily aims at minimising the risk of damage to gem materials during jewellery
manufacturing, alteration, and repair processes, through gaining a familiarity and understanding of the physical and chemical properties of natural, composite, synthetic, imitation
and treated gem materials. It applies to an individual working autonomously and guided by strict rules of procedure. Emphasis to be placed on knowledge of the principles of
gemology, gemstone and diamond nomenclature, gemstone processing enhancement and repair, and appreciation of gemstone qualities. Equipment would include 10x loupe,
tweezers and thermal probes. The range of gem materials would include all natural, synthetic, treated, composite and imitation gem materials that may reasonably be expected to be
encountered in the workplace. Note: the competencies covered by this unit do not include the requirement to perform accurate and positive gemstone identifications.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with gemstone handling and and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
examination or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1229 of 1445
 MEM 19.5A A Produce three-dimensional precision items Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.5A A Produce three-dimensional precision items

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 8
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass 18.1A Use hand tools
18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work

Element 19.5A.1 Determine item requirements

Criteria 19.5A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Item production information identified. Specifications and drawings interpreted and data collected Location of information/specifications can be identified.
and assessed for practical applications according to Clarification/approval processes can be given.
standard operating procedures. Drawings/illustrations/specifications are understood.

Criteria 19.5A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Process/technique selected for production of item. Appropriate methods are selected for format requirements Wrought, forge, machine and cast techniques are
according to standard operating procedure. understood. The appropriate application for each can be
identified.

Criteria 19.5A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Item material/s selected. Materials are selected according to standard operating The appropriate properties/function of materials can be
procedures and item specifications. identified. All pre-requisite working
specifications/abilities/limitations of selected materials
are understood. Stored data on specifications and
processes can be accessed.

Criteria 19.5A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools, equipment and processes selected. Tools/equipment/processes are selected according to the Knowledge of tools and equipment is matched correctly
format requirements, and standard operating procedures. to processes, and fundamental variations are
understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1230 of 1445
 MEM 19.5A A Produce three-dimensional precision items Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.5A.2 Produce one-off design/item

Criteria 19.5A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Construction plan developed to meet Working knowledge of metals and materials is applied in Planning/process stages can be identified. Integrated
specifications/stages of process. the construction of the plan. working knowledge of different mediums can be given.

Criteria 19.5A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Item components are prepared using appropriate Materials are marked out and/or using acceptable Fine detail work processes can be given OH&S issues
techniques/procedures. techniques, procedures. Item/components are understood. Various components of jewellery items
pre-formed/produced to size and shape. Appropriate tools can be identified.
and equipment are utilised. Work is checked for
compliance to known specifications.

Criteria 19.5A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design/item produced/assembled. All work is undertaken according to standard operating Levels of acceptable performance and productivity
procedures and OH&S procedures. Product is outcomes can be identified.
produced/assembled to specification.

Element 19.5A.3 Finish and inspect work

Criteria 19.5A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Item checked for compliance with specifications. Product is matched to original design Inspection and compliance checks can be identified.
concept/drawings/specifications. Surface condition Surface/parts can be assessed as appropriate for
inspected for conformance to specification and post-production processes if required, e.g. setting,
appropriateness for post-production processing, if electroplating, etc.
applicable.

Criteria 19.5A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product data is recorded. Specifications, including weights and measurements are Reasons for the recording of specifications can be given.
recorded according to standard operating procedures. Appropriate measuring devices and recording methods
can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1231 of 1445
 MEM 19.5A A Produce three-dimensional precision items Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.5A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final finish and storage procedures applied. Final treatments are undertaken according to standard Knowledge of the finishing process can be given.
operating procedures and occupational health and safety Procedures for final treatment/safe handling and storage
procedures. Handling and storage of item conducted of items are understood. Reasons why tools, equipment,
according to workplace requirements. Items polished using resources and reference material are stored in accordance
appropriate techniques. with operating procedures and occupational health and
safety procedures can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1232 of 1445
 MEM 19.5A A Produce three-dimensional precision items Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the production of one-off three-dimensional precision jewellery items including rings, pendants, brooches, earings, bracelets and other decorative pieces from
metals common to industry practice. Work undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, workplace procedures and
accepted workplace techniques/methods. Documentation and manuals may include drawings/illustrations, customer verbal/written specifications. Work is mainly by the hand-held
application of processes and techniques. Tools & equipment include hand-held power tools, saws, files, drills, punch plates, pliers. Where lathes are used, Unit 7.5 (Perform
general machining) should also be selected. Where soldering is required Unit 5.6A (Perform brazing/soldering) should also be selected. Production of three-dimensional precision
jewellery masters is covered by Unit 19.13A (Prepare jewellery metal masters).

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with producing three dimensional and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
precision jewellery items or other units requiring the exercise of the plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Knowledge and experience accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
in construction and polishing techniques are considered essential in accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
order to achieve competency in this unit Competency in this unit involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1233 of 1445
 MEM 19.6A A Watch battery replacement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.6A A Watch battery replacement

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 1
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools

Element 19.6A.1 Identify watch case construction

Criteria 19.6A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Case material and construction identified. Case and adjustment parts are handled safely Watch Horological terminology for common case parts can be
status is clarified. given. Case requirement for battery can be identified.
Design of case types and their functions can be grouped
appropriately.

Criteria 19.6A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Case types and their functions are identified. Design of case types and their functions can be grouped Different case types and their functions can be given.
appropriately.

Criteria 19.6A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Associated parts and consumables identified. Preliminary inspection confirms power cell requirement. Relevant case/watch parts can be identified. Water
Glass, crown and pushers are inspected for obvious resistant, dustproof and diver’s cases can be identified.
damage/wear and/or moisture intrusion. Analog, digital, multi-function and mechanicals can be
identified. Watch functions can be explained. Wear and
the possible effects on glass and adjustors can be given.
Procedures to confirm power cell status can be given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1234 of 1445
 MEM 19.6A A Watch battery replacement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.6A.2 Open and close watches

Criteria 19.6A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Workshop tools and equipment selected and used The workplace set-up for battery replacement is in The watch-specific tools and equipment can be identified
appropriately. accordance with industry requirements and standard for a range functions related to watch battery fitting and
operating procedures. Tools for watch case open/close checking.
procedures are selected according to standard operating
procedures.

Criteria 19.6A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Watch cases are opened and closed correctly. Opening and closing procedures are undertaken in Seals, gaskets, threads and seating areas can be
accordance with standard operating procedures and identified and condition recognised. Opening and
OH&S. closing procedures for various case types can be given.

Criteria 19.6A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Parts inspected and results reported and/or recorded. Inspection of case parts conducted according to standard Reporting authority can be identified. Location of
operating procedures. Information recorded as appropriate recording facility can be identified and readily accessed.

Element 19.6A.3 Select power cells

Criteria 19.6A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate batteries/power cells selected. Manufacturer’s recommendations/specifications are Various types of batteries/power cells and their functions
identified from charts and information sheets, and where can be identified. Knowledge of cell construction can be
appropriate is included as part of standard operating given. The location of manufacturer’s
procedures. Appropriate type of replacement battery information/specifications can be identified and the
selected. contents are understood.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1235 of 1445
 MEM 19.6A A Watch battery replacement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.6A.4 Replace power cells

Criteria 19.6A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
General inspection of surface/contact areas performed. Inspection of the opened case surfaces and contact areas Knowledge of parts associated with power cell function
conducted in accordance with standard operating can be given. Location and cause of moisture and
procedures Moisture, corrosion, contaminants and corrosion effects can be identified.
damage identified.

Criteria 19.6A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate batteries/power cells selected and installed. Manufacturer’s recommendations/specifications are The correct handling/cleaning/adjustment procedures
identified from charts and information sheets and in can be identified and understood. The functions of
accordance with standard operating procedures. Contacts identified parts can be given.
are cleaned, residue removed, and seals checked.
Battery/power cell installed correctly.

Criteria 19.6A.4.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Voltage, consumption and resistance measured. Where applicable, voltage/ resistance/consumption Tools for measuring battery charge, current density, and
measured according to standard operating procedures. watch resistance can be identified. Knowledge of the
application and use of the testing equipment can be
given.

Criteria 19.6A.4.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Power cells handled and stored correctly. Handling and storage conducted according to standard The correct tools/equipment/procedures for safe
operating procedures and OH&S Storage for old batteries handling and storage can be identified. OH&S issues for
is labelled appropriately. Disposal is in accordance with mercury and lithium batteries are understood.
OH&S Used mercury, silver oxide and lithium batteries are
stored separately.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1236 of 1445
 MEM 19.6A A Watch battery replacement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.6A.5 Arrange water resistance and pressure testing

Criteria 19.6A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Watches requiring water resistance and/or pressure Water resistant watch cases are identified using relevant The location of relevant standards information can be
testing are identified. Australian and International Standards information. given. Appropriate symbols and other identifying
information can be given.

Criteria 19.6A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Water resistance and pressure testing is arranged. Resistance/pressure testing is arranged with appropriate Relevant internal and/or external water resistance and
internal/external personnel. Watches are despatched and pressure testing bodies/personnel can be identified.
received in accordance with workplace procedures. Arrangements/procedures for despatch and receipt of
Appropriate security, packaging and handling procedures watches can be given.
are applied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1237 of 1445
 MEM 19.6A A Watch battery replacement Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the selection and replacement of digital/analogue watch power cells whilst operating in a jewellery/watch workshop environment with access to the appropriate
equipment. Work undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, workplace procedures and accepted workplace
techniques/methods. Some knowledge of watch glasses and seals is required, however specific replacement functions for these are not covered by this unit Testing functions
relate only to the measurement of voltage, consumption, and resistance This competency does not apply to diver and other water-resistant watch types. Water resistance and
pressure testing is not covered by this unit, however identification of watches requiring testing as well as procedures for arranging testing are a requirement of this unit Where
power cell replacements in these two categories are of common practice with associated testing, and/or identification/cleaning/supply/fitting/of waterproofing/water resistance
components, the appropriate horological units should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with watch battery replacement or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Knowledge and experience in construction and polishing accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
techniques are considered essential in order to achieve competency accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
in this unit Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
prerequisites have been satisfied.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1238 of 1445
 MEM 19.7A A Perform gemstone setting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.7A A Perform gemstone setting

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 6
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
19.3A Handle gem materials (basic)

Element 19.7A.1 Identify setting requirements

Criteria 19.7A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Setting requirements are identified. Instructions are interpreted from job packets/ Setting processes can be identified. Terminology and
verbal/written instructions/diagrams. processes are understood.

Criteria 19.7A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Gemstone status is assessed. Gemstone features are identified for setting Gemstones Gemstone handling procedures can identified for a range
handled appropriately. of gems.

Criteria 19.7A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Setting metal is identified. Metal is identified as appropriate for the desired setting The process for determining the suitability of metal for
result. carving and setting requirements can be identified.

Element 19.7A.2 Prepare materials and equipment for setting

Criteria 19.7A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools are selected for use in achieving the desired Tools are selected according to work requirements. Knowledge of tool functions can be identified and
outcome. related to specific setting methods/techniques.

Criteria 19.7A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools are prepared and maintained to produce required Tools are prepared/adjusted/sharpened and maintained Procedures for maintaining a variety of tools for optimum
specifications. Profiles, shapes, points and angles clamps, etc. are performance can be given.
maintained to workplace standards.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1239 of 1445
 MEM 19.7A A Perform gemstone setting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.7A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Metal is prepared for setting. Metal is prepared according to job requirements. Process for achieving setting requirements is
understood.

Element 19.7A.3 Perform gemstone setting

Criteria 19.7A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Gemstones are secured correctly. Stone(s) secured according to workplace procedures and Appropriate setting techniques and procedures can be
using appropriate tools/methods. given.

Criteria 19.7A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Setting metal is finished/burnished to specification. Knowledge of gemstone/metal properties applied Working properties of materials can be identified and
according to standard operating procedures and OH&S understood for a variety of scenarios.
issues. Appropriate hand tools and/or flexi-drive
attachments used.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1240 of 1445
 MEM 19.7A A Perform gemstone setting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to most diamond and gem setting styles by manual methods, with the aid of basic electrical/mechanical equipment. Work undertaken autonomously or within a
team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, workplace procedures and accepted workplace techniques/methods. Metals may include noble jewellery metals
and their alloys. Do not select this unit for the setting of stones into wax, rubber, resin, etc. For production setting Unit 7.24 (Operate and monitor machine/process) should be
considered. Where annealing and tempering are required, Unit 19.5 (Produce three-dimensional precision item) should also be selected. Techniques cover the basic forms of claw,
grain and rub-over styles by manual methods, over a range of design styles.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with gemstone setting or other and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
this unit. Knowledge and experience in construction and polishing accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
techniques are considered essential in order to achieve competency in accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
this unit Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities
prerequisites have been satisfied. The basic setting styles of grain,
claw, and cabochon rub-over, are the relevant styles in this basic
setting context. General carving/engraving ability must be
demonstrated with the use of pointed/flat scrapers/gravers of
appropriate design. Setting work should be clean and neat, to
appropriate trade standards for security and accuracy. Finished work
would be set straight, level and in symmetry with the overall design of
the article. Set stones to be free from internal and surface damage
caused in the setting process. Surfaces of the jewellery item(s) should
be free from all evidence of cuts/scratches and abrasions caused by
the setting and/or resultant trimming/cleaning process.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1241 of 1445
 MEM 19.7A A Perform gemstone setting Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.8A A Prepare jewellery designs

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 6
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work
19.2A Prepare jewellery illustrations
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
8.10A Manually finish/polish materials 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 19.1A Jewellery metal casting
19.2A Prepare jewellery illustrations
Pre-requisite units - Path 3
9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations
18.3A Use tools for precision work 19.3A Handle gem materials (basic) 19.7A Perform gemstone setting
19.14A Perform hand engraving

Element 19.8A.1 Identify design requirements

Criteria 19.8A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design requirements, purpose and needs determined from Purpose and needs identified, including design restraints, Knowledge of design resources and where to locate
appropriate sources. budget considerations, item end-use, proportions and them.
desired features, available materials.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1242 of 1445
 MEM 19.8A A Prepare jewellery designs Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.8A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where necessary, further research/idea development Research/idea development undertaken to sufficient level Research techniques and available resources can be
undertaken. as to determine customer expectations and/or design given. Awareness of social trends,
outcomes. Ethical and environmental contexts taken into cultural/environmental/social context Awareness of
consideration. relevant industry literature. Awareness of existing
designs, ethical & competitive consideration. Awareness
of any applicable industry standards or regulations.
Brainstorming techniques for research/idea development
can be given.

Criteria 19.8A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Information is consolidated and analysed. Data is collected and collated to match desired outcomes. Abstract and applied concepts/data can be recognised
and evaluated for use in a commercial environment.

Criteria 19.8A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, customer is advised on design Concepts are communicated in terms suitable to relevant Design concepts/drafts are interpreted as appropriate for
considerations and limitations and further clarification customer or other contacts e.g. engineer, master pattern client/industry technician. Valid options can be given.
made as necessary. maker.

Element 19.8A.2 Develop design concept

Criteria 19.8A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Concept developed employing design principles. Logical conceptual development displayed Desired Design principles including form, function, harmony, line
features are documented. definition (interpretive/actual) are understood.

Criteria 19.8A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design process is documented. Design process, features documented and design
development notes maintained.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1243 of 1445
 MEM 19.8A A Prepare jewellery designs Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.8A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Basic forms and proportions are established. Basic form drawings produced. Drawing accurately reflects Drawing media and their functions/applications can be
design concept. given including paper, watercolour, pastel ink pencil.
Drawing tools and their functions/applications can be
given including stencils, rubbers etc. Knowledge of
geometric forms e.g. cones, cylinders, cube, rectangle,
sphere etc. 3D concept understood - axis lines,
conversion of 2D to 3D concepts, depth, perspective and
scale (1,2,3 point).

Criteria 19.8A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Where applicable, decorative aesthetics applied. Balance, proportion, highlights, shadowing, texturing Enhancement techniques can be given.
effects are used appropriately.

Criteria 19.8A.2.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Design concept confirmed as necessary. Concept is confirmed with customer and
redesign/modifications made as necessary.

Element 19.8A.3 Produce drawings for item manufacture

Criteria 19.8A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate manufacturing technologies selected. Selected technologies are suitable for manufacture of Awareness of available manufacturing technologies and
item(s). their suitability for jewellery manufacture.

Criteria 19.8A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Working, technical and finished drawings are developed. Prepared drawings/designs comply with industry Types of working drawings and their uses can be given.
parameters. The inter-relation between technical and design drawings
is understood.

Criteria 19.8A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Production requirements/instructions specified and Appropriate actions undertaken to assess level of industry Industry requirements and availability of industry
communicated to appropriate persons. requirements. expertise can be identified.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1244 of 1445
 MEM 19.8A A Prepare jewellery designs Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
Work undertaken autonomously or in a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety and workshop procedures. Jewellery designs are developed with view
to producing the designed item/s using current commercial procedures, including traditional hand-fabrication techniques and/or in combination with a range of manufacturing
technologies. Procedures may include CNC and mass finishing activities. Preparation of designs may include 2D and 3D CAD applications. Where CAD is used, the appropriate
units should also be selected. Where jewellery illustrations only are prepared, Unit 19.2A (Prepare jewellery illustrations) should be selected.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with preparing jewellery designs and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
or other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1245 of 1445
MEM 19.9A A Perform investment procedures for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.9A A Perform investment procedures for lost wax casting process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 1
This unit covers the competencies required for the preparation of investment flasks for jewellery casting.
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
13.3A Work safely with industrial chemicals and materials 18.1A Use hand tools
Pre-requisite units - Path 2
2.7C10 Perform computations - basic 7.24A Operate and monitor machine/process 18.1A Use hand tools

Element 19.9A.1 Prepare investment materials

Criteria 19.9A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembled tree/materials checked, if appropriate Pre-assembled wax is checked for security, size, and The procedures for checking built wax are identified and
weight understood
Criteria 19.9A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate casting method and equipment selected Standard operating procedures are used to guide the Casting methods and equipment can be identified, and
selection process processes are understood
Criteria 19.9A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Associated tools and equipment prepared Sprue and investment materials selected/ checked/ The correct sprue/investment tools/ equipment/
cleaned according to standard operating procedures materials can be identified, their purposes given
Criteria 19.9A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Sprue/tree materials prepared/built if appropriate If appropriate, wax item/s assembled according to The techniques for sprue/tree styles can be identified
standard operating procedures Appropriate components Knowledge of the selection/application of the processes
selected Weights are recorded according to standard can be given Recording procedures can be identified
operating procedure

Element 19.9A.2 Invest flask

Criteria 19.9A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Flask is assembled for casting Appropriate flask size is selected and assembled with The selection of flask and components can be identified
components as per standard operating procedures for the specific casting process The reasons for
selections can be given

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1246 of 1445
MEM 19.9A A Perform investment procedures for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.9A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Investment is mixed appropriately Calculations are made for the correct proportions of Procedures and computations for mixing proportions,
investment material and water, and weighed out time calculations, volume and weights etc. can be
accurately Mix, vibrate and vacuum procedures are performed occupational health and safety
undertaken according to specifications, standard requirements/issues can be identified Knowledge of
operating procedures and occupational health and safety processes and the result of inappropriate
requirements methods/actions can be given

Criteria 19.9A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Curing stage prepared Invested flask is completed according to standard Requirements for curing/set stage can be identified and
operating procedures Appropriate gloss off/set time is understood
allowed prior to base removal

Element 19.9A.3 Operate “lost wax” sequence

Criteria 19.9A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
“Low melt” wax evacuated by steam process if Steamer and process are operated according to standard Steamer process can be identified and understood
appropriate operating procedures and occupational health and safety Suitability of flask/investment for burn-out can be given
requirements Flasks inspected for residue prior to
“burn-out”
Criteria 19.9A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
“Burn-out” procedure selected and applied Appropriate burn-out procedure/equipment selected Sequence, procedures, adjustments for variables can be
Sequence and values for time, temperature, and/or cam identified Knowledge of procedures and results can be
settings are in accordance with standard operating given for a variety of situations
procedures
Criteria 19.9A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Investment flask positioned/stored Flask is positioned/stored safely in accordance with Procedures for storage and positioning can be identified
standard operating procedures Oven/kiln cavity is
inspected and adjusted if appropriate

Element 19.9A.4 De-contaminate/clean site

Criteria 19.9A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Tools, equipment and site area cleaned as appropriate The working area, and all tools and investing equipment The procedures for cleaning, storage and/or removal of
are cleaned of investment residue in accordance with materials can be given The reasons for
standard operating procedures and occupational health appropriate/approved housekeeping functions can
and safety requirements Residue and materials are recognised and understood
disposed of/stored according to occupational health and
safety requirements

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1247 of 1445
MEM 19.9A A Perform investment procedures for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies to the preparation of investment flasks using manual and/or automatic equipment for jewellery casting procedures. Work undertaken autonomously or within
a team environment using pre-determined standards of quality, safety, workplace procedures and accepted workplace techniques/methods.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
individual is familiar with. required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with investment procedures for and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
“lost wax” casting process or other units requiring the exercise of - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1248 of 1445
MEM 19.10A A Produce rubber moulds for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.10A A Produce rubber moulds for lost wax casting process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required for the preparation of flexible moulds for the purpose of replicating an original model.

Element 19.10A.1 Prepare and pack mould frame/systems

Criteria 19.10A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate mould frame/moulding system selected for Appropriate frame/system selected to suit master Procedures for assessing frame/system can be given
given job requirements in accordance with standard operating The specific master requirements can be explained
procedures
Criteria 19.10A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate rubber selected for style of master Type/needs of master identified and rubber selected in Procedures for assessing rubber/ master
accordance with standard operating procedures suitability/compatibility can be given Knowledge of
working limitations of rubber can be demonstrated
Criteria 19.10A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Rubber prepared and packed correctly Master, frame/system prepared/packed in accordance Procedures for correct packing technique can be
with standard operating procedures, OH&S and demonstrated Knowledge of packing variations for a
manufacturer specifications range of situations can be given

Element 19.10A.2 Vulcanise/cure rubber

Criteria 19.10A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate curing system selected The appropriate variables of time, temperature, and The methods for establishing the appropriate time,
pressure are selected in accordance with standard temperature and pressure settings for the selected
operating procedures, and manufacturers specifications process can be identified The significance of these
variables can be given
Criteria 19.10A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Assembled mould cured, cooled, removed Preparations prior to mould release are performed in The stages in the process for mould curing, removal and
correct sequence according to standard operating cooling can be explained Occupational health and
procedures and manufacturers specifications safety issues can be identified and described

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1249 of 1445
MEM 19.10A A Produce rubber moulds for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Element 19.10A.3 Release mould
Criteria 19.10A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools and procedure for the release of Tools/methods for safe and accurate release of master The process for correct selection of tools/ procedures
master pattern selected are selected according to release procedure can be identified
Criteria 19.10A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Master pattern is released correctly The master is released safely and without damage using The appropriate sequence of procedures for release of
tools and procedures according to standard operating master can be identified The placement of mould/vent
procedures and occupational health and safety lines can explained
requirements

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1250 of 1445
MEM 19.10A A Produce rubber moulds for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Range statement
This unit applies to the preparation of flexible moulds to replicate an original model. Work undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined
standards of quality, safety, workplace procedures and accepted workplace techniques/methods. Types of rubber material used may include natural and silicon varieties of
differing working specifications such as shrinkage and transparency. Vulcanisation may include RTV as well as standard heat and pressure combinations.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
individual is familiar with. required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with producing rubber moulds for and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
“lost wax” process or other units requiring the exercise of the skills - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1251 of 1445
MEM 19.11A A Perform wax injection of moulds for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.11A A Perform wax injection of moulds for lost wax casting process
Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 2
This unit covers the competencies required injecting materials under pressure for investment and burn-out aspects within "lost wax" casting procedures.

Element 19.11A.1 Perform wax injection of moulds

Criteria 19.11A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate wax material selected Wax type is selected according to wax/ model/ cavity The variables associated with the selection process can
specifications be identified and explained
Criteria 19.11A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Injection equipment/tools prepared Selections and adjustments equipment/tools made The standard operating procedures for wax injection
according to wax/model/cavity specifications and equipment/processes can be identified and understood
standard operating procedures for the given values of time, temperature, pressure
Criteria 19.11A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Moulds prepared correctly Mould prepared according to workplace standards for Mould conditions can be identified and inappropriate
automatic/manual procedures features rectified
Criteria 19.11A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wax injection procedures carried out correctly Injection is completed according to specifications and Injection procedures can be identified Minor
standard operating procedures variations and adjustments to processes/ equipment
situations can be given

Element 19.11A.2 Remove and inspect patterns

Criteria 19.11A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wax pattern is removed without damage Duplicated wax pattern is removed using one/two/three Undamaged wax duplicate removal techniques for a
piece techniques as appropriate, without distortion or range of scenarios can be given
breakage

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1252 of 1445
MEM 19.11A A Perform wax injection of moulds for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.11A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Duplicate wax pattern inspected and stored Duplicate is checked for compliance with Procedures for wax duplicate inspection can be given
master/specifications, and inspected for irregularities Types of common irregularities can be identified
Item is stored according to standard operating procedures Causes of imperfections can be given Remedies for
Irregularities are reported/recorded as appropriate imperfections can be identified Safe storage procedures
can be identified Reporting authority can be identified
Criteria 19.11A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Work area secured and cleaned All excess materials are removed/stored, and Procedures for safe cleaning, disposal, and storage can
equipment/tools cleaned and stored according to be given The reasons for standard operating procedures
workplace procedures Disposal of waste complies with and occupational health and safety measures can be
occupational health and safety and legislative given
requirements The immediate work area is maintained
safe and clean according to standard operating

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1253 of 1445
MEM 19.11A A Perform wax injection of moulds for lost wax casting process Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit applies primarily to organic/synthetic wax injection, but may include resin and plastic materials injected under pressure for investment and burn-out aspects within
"lost wax" casting procedures. Work undertaken autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, workplace procedures and
accepted workplace techniques/methods.

Evidence
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
of on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any
be demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. relevant workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. -
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the Any relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be
individual is familiar with. required to: - Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the
assessor. - Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency
evidence where appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to
this unit. Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently
perform all elements of the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.
Critical aspects Special notes
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with wax injection of moulds for and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work;
“lost wax” casting process or other units requiring the exercise of - plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks
the skills and knowledge covered by this unit. Competency in this in accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace
activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1254 of 1445
 MEM 19.12A A Produce jewellery wax model Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.12A A Produce jewellery wax model

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 4
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
18.1A Use hand tools 18.2A Use power tools/hand held operations 18.3A Use tools for precision work

Element 19.12A.1 Determine master requirements

Criteria 19.12A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Customer specifications are identified. Customer specifications are identified from verbal Factors affecting construction of wax model can be
instruction/supplied item/illustration. Method of given, including type of wax, hand tools, method of
construction of wax model is suitable for the supplied construction, final finish, weight of finished product.
specifications.

Element 19.12A.2 Prepare materials for production of wax model

Criteria 19.12A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate waxes are selected. Wax selection allows for variation in end product. Wax Variations in end product and the relationship with wax
properties are selected to suit construction method and types can be given.
required finish.

Criteria 19.12A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Stock materials are cut to appropriate length. Stock materials are cut by most appropriate method for Methods based upon the outcome
design, allowing for variation and/or error in process and requirements/specifications and waste minimisation can
finish. be given.

Criteria 19.12A.2.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Appropriate tools are selected and used. Tools are selected to suit wax work. Tools for preparing and producing wax can be given for
specific wax types and constructions.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1255 of 1445
 MEM 19.12A A Produce jewellery wax model Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.12A.3 Produce wax models

Criteria 19.12A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Material use and production time is optimised. Shapes are roughed out, with material removed to minimise Importance of minimising material wastage and time taken
wastage. Material removed to minimise effort/time in final during roughing/finishing can be explained.
finishing, taking into account minimal wastage.

Criteria 19.12A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Wax is sculpted to specifications. A close match of model features to original specifications Appropriate key features/datum points are identified.
is achieved. Wax joints are fused to achieve optimum
strength and quality. Sections are added/backfilled as
required.

Element 19.12A.4 Finish wax models

Criteria 19.12A.4.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Imperfections in final wax model are minimised. Best surface is produced to suit final product Purpose/requirements for selected surface finish can be
requirements. identified.

Criteria 19.12A.4.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Surface finishes are applied. Texture finishing, high polishes, etc are applied as Melting wax, effects of toxic fumes understood.
required. Appropriate protective safety equipment is worn,
including dust mask and safety goggles.

Element 19.12A.5 Assess suitability of final wax product

Criteria 19.12A.5.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Product is inspected for compliance with specifications. Product is inspected for correct tolerances, allowance for Effects of casting shrinkage and finishing processes can
casting shrinkage and finishing processes. be given.

Criteria 19.12A.5.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Final product is modified as necessary. Final product is modified as necessary to meet required Evaluation of product by weight formulation can be
tolerances and finishes. given.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1256 of 1445
 MEM 19.12A A Produce jewellery wax model Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit covers the production of wax models for a range of jewellery products, simple to moderate carved forms, simple to moderate structural forms. Work undertaken
autonomously or within a team environment using predetermined standards of quality, safety, workplace procedures and accepted workplace techniques/methods. Tools may
include electric and handheld tools, e.g., heat irons, wax guns, saws, carving tools, wax files, flaming torch. Materials may include those of different colours/hardness/properties.
Processes may include free-form carving moderate detail with some fine detail. This unit is not intended to include fine wire filigree work. Appropriate awareness of occupational
health and safety issues and measures, including the use of protective equipment is applied, including control of melting wax, knowledge of effects of toxic fumes. For modelling
with the use of computer aided equipment, Units 9.9B Create 2D drawings using computer aided design system and Units 9.10B Create 3D models using computer aided design
system should be considered.

Evidence guide
Assessment context Assessment conditions
This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job, or a combination of The candidate will have access to: - All tools, equipment, materials and documentation
on and off the job. The competencies covered by this unit would be required. The candidate will be permitted to refer to the following documents: - Any relevant
demonstrated by an individual working alone or as part of a team. workplace procedures. - Any relevant product and manufacturing specifications. - Any
Assessment should be conducted in an environment that the relevant codes, standards, manuals and reference materials. The candidate will be required to: -
individual is familiar with. Orally, or by other methods of communication, answer questions put by the assessor. -
Identify colleagues who can be approached for the collection of competency evidence where
appropriate. - Present evidence of credit for any off-job training related to this unit. Assessors
must be satisfied that the candidate can competently and consistently perform all elements of
the unit as specified by the criteria, including required knowledge.

Critical aspects Special notes

This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other units During assessment the individual will: - demonstrate safe working practices at all times; -
addressing the safety, quality, communication, materials handling, communicate information about processes, events or tasks being undertaken to ensure a safe
recording and reporting associated with jewellery wax production or and efficient working environment; - take responsibility for the quality of their own work; -
other units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge covered plan tasks in all situations and review task requirements as appropriate; - perform all tasks in
by this unit. Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all accordance with standard operating procedures; - perform all tasks to specification; - use
prerequisites have been satisfied. accepted engineering techniques, practices, processes and workplace procedures. Tasks
involved will be completed within reasonable timeframes relating to typical workplace activities

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1257 of 1445
 MEM 19.13A A Produce jewellery metal masters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unit MEM 19.13A A Produce jewellery metal masters

Band – Specialisation band A Field – Jewellery & horological Unit Weight 4
Notes - This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit for progression to C5 (AQF level V)
Pre-requisite units - Path 1
8.10A Manually finish/polish materials 9.1A Draw and interpret sketch 13.4A Work safely with molten metals/glass
19.1A Jewellery metal casting

Element 19.13A.1 Determine master pattern requirements

Criteria 19.13A.1.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Interpret specifications and drawings. All data is collected and assessed for practical Location of information/specifications can be identified.
applications according to standard operating procedures. Clarification approval processes can be given. Collective
information/drawings/specification/product development
plans are understood.

Criteria 19.13A.1.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Technique/process to achieve suitable quality finish for Appropriate methods are selected for format requirements Wrought, forge, machine and cast techniques are
masters selected. according to standard operating procedure. understood. The valid application for each case can be
identified.

Criteria 19.13A.1.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select item material(s). Materials are selected according to standard operating The appropriate properties/function of materials can be
procedures and object/production specifications. identified. All pre-requisite working
specifications/abilities/limitations of selected materials
are understood. Stored data on specifications and
processes can be readily accessed.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1258 of 1445
 MEM 19.13A A Produce jewellery metal masters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria 19.13A.1.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Select appropriate tools, equipment and processes. Tools/equipment/processes are selected according to the Knowledge of tools and equipment is matched correctly
format requirements, and standard operating procedures. to the processes, and fundamental variations are
understood.

Element 19.13A.2 Produce master

Criteria 19.13A.2.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Materials are marked out and/or construction plan Apply a working knowledge of metals and materials. The ability to recognise and understand
developed to meet specifications/stages of process. planning/process stage is evident. Difference between
master and finished item specifications are understood
prior to assembly/construction/solder/drill operations.

Criteria 19.13A.2.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Prepare pattern material(s). Using acceptable techniques/procedures, and utilising Knowledge of fine detail work processes can be given
appropriate tools and equipment, the item/components OH&S issues are understood.
is/are pre-formed/produced to size and shape. Work is
checked for compliance to known specifications,
particularly in relation to the calculated requirements of the
retail finished product.

Criteria 19.13A.2.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Produce master. All work is undertaken according to standard operating Levels of acceptable performance and productivity
procedures and OHS&W. Product is checked for outcomes can be identified. Knowledge of the finishing
compliance to specifications and design outcomes. process can be given. Understands the sequential
processes required for design outcomes.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1259 of 1445
 MEM 19.13A A Produce jewellery metal masters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Element 19.13A.3 Finish and inspect work

Criteria 19.13A.3.1 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Check item for compliance with specifications. Product is matched to original design concept/drawings/ Inspection and compliance checks can be identified.
specifications. Surface condition inspected for Surface/parts/areas can be assessed as appropriate for
pre-treatment/plating process (if appropriate). Allowance post production processes if required for
made for sequential processes. setting/electroplating/enamelling, and for the subsequent
processes of moulding and waxing.

Criteria 19.13A.3.2 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Record all weights and measurements. Statistical evidence is recorded according to standard Reasons for the recording of specifications can be given.
operating procedures. Appropriate measuring devices and recording methods
can be identified.

Criteria 19.13A.3.3 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Fit correct sprue material if appropriate. If required, sprue section is positioned/secured in the Handling and design needs associated with sprue
approved manner. placement can be identified. Appropriate knowledge of
wax injection, moulding, casting, molten metal
flow/solidification can be given.

Criteria 19.13A.3.4 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Apply final finish, where appropriate, and store item. Final treatments are undertaken according to standard Procedures for final treatment/safe handling/storage of
operating procedures and OH&S. Handling and storage of item can be identified and understood. Reasons why all
item conducted according to workplace requirements. tools, equipment, resources and reference material are
stored in accordance with OH&S and standard operating
procedures can be given.

Criteria 19.13A.3.5 Assessor guide: observe that – Assessor guide: confirm that –
Evaluate and compare master to production sample where Appropriate design specifications are Relevancy of calculations/specifications are understood.
appropriate. compared/calculated.

© Australian National Training Authority MEM98 version 4 to be reviewed by 31 December 2003 version 4.00 page 1260 of 1445
 MEM 19.13A A Produce jewellery metal masters Metal and Engineering Training Package
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Range statement
This unit requires the application of precision measurement and hand-making/machine skills to a greater level than that required in Unit 19.5 A (Produce three-dimensional precision
items) Competency in this unit cannot be fully met without appropriate comparison to the finished production item. The unit covers the manufacture of jewellery master pattern(s)
for jewellery reproduction, mainly by the hand held application of processes whilst working autonomously. Materials include jewellery alloys and/or their base metals.
Understanding of the principles of casting, moulding, shrinkage, and wax injecti